JP2019165771A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing a game performance includes a board for disposing electronic components for executing the game performance, and a cover body disposed in a front side of the board, and an accessory including the cover body executes a performance by the electronic component mounted on the board.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed upon establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a predetermined game value is given when a symbol stop result is in a predetermined mode. In such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, effects such as display of an image by the image display unit, movement of an accessory, sound by a speaker, lighting of various lamps, and the like are executed along with variable display of the symbols. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-061263 A

  However, in order to realize a wide variety of performances, the game entertainment has been improved by increasing the size of the equipment mounted on the gaming machine or increasing the size of the game, but the role of the game is limited. Since there are restrictions on the size and arrangement of objects, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced due to a monotonous production.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said situation, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can suppress that the interest of a game falls.

To achieve the above objectives,
In the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of producing a game,
A board on which electronic components for executing the game are arranged;
A cover body disposed on the front side of the substrate,
The substrate is at least partially visible from the player through the cover body,
The substrate has a light emitting means.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can solve the above-described problems and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.34 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.34 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.51 (a). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the NN line | wire in Fig.51 (a), (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the OO line in Fig.51 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 63 and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the game panel of the form different from FIG. 63 from the front with the front structural member, the board | substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as game balls, which relay the electrical connection of the payout control board which constitutes the main board, the CR unit, and the frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 90 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arrange | positioned at the game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows a circuit structure when the several sensor signal input part each connected to each of several magnetic detection sensor is connected in parallel with the base terminal of the transistor of a detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the example. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the example. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of a circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the voltage output part to another board | substrate (sensor board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part to another board | substrate (for example, main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor to the voltage output part in parallel. It is a figure which shows typically a mode that integration was achieved only in components (discrete components) with high security performance with respect to fraud in 1st control part MCG. It is a figure which shows the partial area | region in this base substrate about the base substrate of the main control board concerning a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the opening window vicinity. It is AA arrow sectional drawing in FIG. The figure which shows typically the relationship between the special operation receiving part when the pachinko machine 1 is seen by a front view, and the various effect members arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with this special operation receiving part by a front view. is there. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control aspect with respect to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control aspect with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a control about the detection information analysis process of the physical object performed in a periphery control part regular process. (A) is a time chart which shows the control when production | generation reception generate | occur | produces in several operation site | parts, (b) shows the mode of generation | occurrence | production of production | production operation | movement when production | generation reception each generate | occur | produces in several operation site | parts. FIG. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure showing example production 1 using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting port passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 2nd starting port passage process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about jackpot determination processing (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a jackpot determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a gate part passage process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal symbol normal processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) referred by the said effect symbol variation start process when it is in a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process sequence about the lottery (notice lottery performed within an effect symbol variation start process) regarding the notice effect which appears within the execution period (design variation time) of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 referred when the said fluctuation | variation (pending to be digested) is not the object of a timer prefetching effect in a normal game state (2nd timer notice lottery). (A) is a figure which shows an example of 1st mission effect determination table T3a (1st mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is performed in a normal game state, (b) is a normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice side timer type determination table T4 referred in notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). The reach type and processing status (when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has not been made) It is a figure which compares and shows the upper limit number of appearance of the timer object candidate effect determined according to the below-mentioned 5th processing status and 6th processing status etc. besides the 1st-4th processing status. Step S5508 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and when it is in the first processing state where a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of. Step S5523 is in the second processing state that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that has been determined to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of. Step S5533 is in the third processing state that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and that is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of. If it is in the fourth processing state that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of. In the first processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined (YES in step S5507), the process of step S5508 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is determined to make the number of notices into 1 as a result of performing (step S5509). In the second processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507), the process in step S5523 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing (step S5524). In a fourth processing situation that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), the process of step S5543 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 2 as a result of performing (step S5544). Corresponds to character reach in the second processing situation that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number to select is selected. Corresponds to SP reach in the second processing situation where it is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number to select is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of table T7a referred by 1st timer non-target advance notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b referred by the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). When it is in the fifth processing situation in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553. In the sixth processing situation in which the notice timer performance is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made, step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6e-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing this process (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined (YES in step S5552), step S5553 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6e-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing this process (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which the notification side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-1 referred when it is decided to make the number of notices into 1 as a result of performing the process of (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which the notification side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (NO in step S5552) is determined to be executed (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of table T6f-2 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 2 as a result of performing this process (step S5564). (A) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and three hold information in which the variable display is not executed (all are the first special symbol). It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in a state. Further, (b) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and two hold information (both being the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the state which is in the state. (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about the table T8a-1 and table T8a-2 which are referred when determining the execution aspect of a timer prefetch effect in the situation where the number of prefetch fluctuation | variation is four. . (A), (b) is a figure which shows the example about the table T8b-1 and table T8b-2 referred when determining the execution aspect of a timer prefetch effect in the condition where the number of prefetch fluctuation | variation is three. . Usually referred to when there is nothing that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the time holding | maintenance change table T9a. Special that is referred to when there is something that causes a big hit symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) It is a figure which shows the time holding | maintenance change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the process sequence about the process performed in order to implement | achieve a change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed. Timer target advance performed in the second processing situation in which it is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of production. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about whether to generate | occur | produce a timer object advance effect, and also at which timing a timer object advance effect is generated. When a timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3, it is a diagram illustrating an example of the content of a determination process regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about which type the production | generation aspect to generate | occur | produce at those timing, when performing timer object advance production at any two timings of timing Ta1-Ta3. It is a figure which shows the example about the content of the determination process about which kind of effect form to generate | occur | produce at those timings, when performing timer object advance effect at all timings of timing Ta1-Ta3. In the second processing situation in which it is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507), the number of notices is 2. Revival timer effect that is performed when it is determined (step S523) that the “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and the “object A action 1” is determined at the later timing. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object suppression control performed. (B) is a figure which shows the example about the table referred in the timer object suppression control when changing the ratio which a suppression period generate | occur | produces with the kind of effect aspect which appears as a timer object effect. (A) is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. (B) is a mode of a single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer effect which made the new timer performed the effect object. Timer mode effect that is a single timer mode (YES in step S506) and that is performed in the second processing situation in which the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S507) It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of. (A) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S506), and the second is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed in the processing condition of. It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process sequence when implement | achieving count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer plus production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the progress effect connected with a timer object effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows the example of a timer production concretely. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the periphery control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or those combination. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search process in the case of performing control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditions which select the channel which replaces sound output (stops sound reproduction) when the channel is not empty at the time of output of new sound in the present embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of an effect for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is outputted. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half fluctuation | variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound effect, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure table | surface of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the fluctuation | variation second half of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of effect sound, (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by channel group which shows the priority of the volume (sound volume) control for every group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control process which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table classified by sound effect which shows volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of the sound in this embodiment. It is the first half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is the latter half part of the flowchart which shows the procedure of the volume control process which performs sound control based on the parameter set for every sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the procedure which controls the volume in this embodiment along a time series, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the conditions (cancellation conditions) by which alerting | reporting is complete | finished according to the kind of alerting | reporting sound illustrated in FIG. (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (B) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (C) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 1st alerting group is satisfied when the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. (D) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output conditions (state detection) of the alerting sound which belongs to the 2nd alerting | reporting group are satisfy | filled when the alerting | reporting sound which belongs to the 3rd alerting | reporting group is reproduced | regenerated. It is. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the example as an aspect which alert | reports the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining according to the information state of the pachinko machine 1 about the contents of information processing under production progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process concerning the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the content of restrictions defined according to a channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when an operation sound output process under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation condition of each channel when the process relevant to channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. Examples of the channel assignment status and the status of the movable ornament when the movable ornament is detected in the process of operating the movable ornament according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected not within the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit judgment, It is a time chart which shows an example about the condition by the side of a decoration body. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at the specific timing in the period when pattern change is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. . In the time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decoration bodies at two different timings in the period in which symbol variation is performed, and the situation on the movable decoration body side is there. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example about the display content when operation is performed in multiple times. It is a time chart which shows the example about the control content for implement | achieving an automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a time chart which shows the example of production using the automatic multiple times operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform a sword production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword preparation transition production according to the classification of a fluctuation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword book effect. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword decoration body in case an aura member is provided in a sword part (blade part) itself, (A) A sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd Indicates the extracted state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword decoration operation | movement of a sword ornament in case an aura member is provided in a sheath part, (A) Sword state, (B) 1st sword state, (C) 2nd sword state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword ornament, and the operation effective period which concerns on an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament of the modification 1, and the operation timing of an operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the extraction effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in a princess reach production, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used in many ways, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production | presentation display apparatus in reach production, the state transition of an operation button, and the operation | movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the production | presentation of whether the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is provided while the pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the post-operation effect of the sword ornament (the fall effect of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse)) during the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition used as the characteristic of a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo continuous effect, and shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear character) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of the sword decorative body and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) in the pseudo-continuous effect, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is activated during the reach production by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the fluctuation production (reach production) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of reach production in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed. Like the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword ornament is not activated and the operation button is activated once, then the sword ornament is activated It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production aspect regarding a specific operation related production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect aspect regarding a specific operation related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation related effect. It is a figure explaining the example about an effect when "the specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of a timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the contents of production for every production about a production when a plurality of types (prediction production A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a production of indication. It is a figure which shows those production examples about the production content when the precursor production which is not a specific operation relevant production is performed, and the production content when the precursor production as a specific operation related production is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the content of the effect when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by which the button image BTG is displayed in the aspect (specific effect aspect) to which the princess character was added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of the operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st sign production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when the 1st sign production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation in which expectation is shown by an automatic production | presentation function. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating operation unification control when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic production | presentation process in being in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation reception process according to the display classification when it exists in an automatic button production | presentation state. (A) is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated several times in the mode of single operation when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect when it is operated by the aspect of a long press when not done. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the example of production when operation is started in the mode. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the symbol variation is started with “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears” can be set, It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the “second effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation to appear and the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompts cannot be set” is set. The time chart which shows the example of a process when a fluctuation | variation is started and the operation (cancellation operation) for canceling | releases an automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for a setting are performed within the execution period of this symbol fluctuation | variation is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” is set, and the symbol change execution period It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when operation for setting to an automatic button effect state is performed in the inside. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when production progress is carried out with the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific process regarding effects, such as effect setting." It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "the specific process regarding effects, such as effect setting." It is a time chart which shows an example about the effect process regarding a special effect reception period. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decoration body when specific conditions are satisfied. FIG. 375 is a time chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 374. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol fluctuation | variation starts comes in the condition where a specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special production pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process until a sword ornament 5001 returns to an original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the period other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation | movement state of a sword ornament in an operation reception period, (B) is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state of a sword decoration in other than an operation reception period, and abnormality detection. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of an operation button, (B) is a time chart which shows the abnormality determination timing of the movable decoration provided in the game board. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of normality, (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the effect at the time of button protrusion at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the normal button production at normal time, and (B) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in the button normal production at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period, and (B) is the operation button when the abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production | presentation at the time of abnormality generation | occurrence | production of a movable decoration body. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-short-time state, and (B) is the operation button cover and the operation button when the abnormality occurs in the time-short state. It is a time chart which shows an operation state. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline | summary of the function for performing presentation control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the periphery control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a structure until it acquires data required for presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp | ramp and the sound in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of change display from the change start of the special symbol in this embodiment to a stop, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting / flashing control of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls the lamp | ramp in the button cut-in notification of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in the star object notice of this embodiment, and a left star object. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role in the star role notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo object fall notification of this embodiment. It is drawing explaining the scheduler data executed at the time of power-on of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the game machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structures. It is a figure explaining the process of performing scheduler data at the time of power activation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display until it stops from the fluctuation | variation start of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) performs the effect performed from a fluctuation | variation start to completion | finish, and the said effect | production. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination in the winning combination fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of button 鉈 combination first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the first half drop notice of the 鉈 combination that is the first half of the combination drop notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the second half of the late combination fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for performing the motor control in the late fall notice of the late combination that is the latter half of the advance notice of the fall of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) according to change pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) classified by variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of presentation control of the first half fluctuation | variation (normal fluctuation | variation 12 second) of fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control starting process of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update process of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs a notice effect in the change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing which performs a notice effect, execution time of the notice effect, and (B). The scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which produces the data file for drawing for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment by the step-up production unit (step-up 1 production-4 productions) with the image composition / motion creation graphic tool. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub effect block data. Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for scheduler functions for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production SW starting command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the step in which a step-up notice effect is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for performing step-up notice 1, (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining master SW defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production | presentation switch of this embodiment, and the evaluation procedure which sets production | presentation SW to ON is shown especially. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines an effect SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C). Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows an effect SW flag, (B) shows an effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is the effect SW replacement table information, and (B) is the effect SW. Indicates a replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list | wrist which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of a layer information table (for background) Indicates. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (first notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (first notice 2). Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the button mini character effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be judged within the callback function at the time of callback execution by effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of notice effect execution of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block over several periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the display timing of a symbol and the execution effect of a notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image in a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer, respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure which writes in a frame buffer after converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which memorize | stores the display list command group in this embodiment temporarily in peripheral control RAM, and transfers to sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure which transfers the display list command group in this embodiment to VDP with built-in sound source, without memorize | storing in peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure which has two or more display areas which carry out the variable display of the identification symbol in this embodiment, (A) is a structural example which has the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol on one display screen, ( B) is an example of a configuration having an identification symbol display area A and a display area B on each display screen when two display screens are provided. It is a figure explaining the emphasis aspect of the display area which performs the variable display of the identification symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the normal aspect which displays the display area A and the display area B in a standard aspect (regulated size) (B) is an emphasis mode A for displaying the display area A in an emphasis mode, and (C) is an emphasis mode B for displaying the display area B in an emphasis mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the structure which performs the variable display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B, respectively, and interlock | cooperates when the fluctuation | variation of a part of identification symbol stops in the display area A Then, an example in which the variation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B is shown. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the structure which performs the variable display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. An example of displaying all stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production block of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production | presentation block of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example in which an identification symbol fluctuates and displays in each of the some display area of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which carries out the variable display of the identification symbol independently in each of the several display area of this embodiment, and carries out the variable display by the equivalent aspect at a predetermined timing. It is a figure which shows the example in which an identification symbol variably displays in the some display area of this embodiment, and stops at a different symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character combination in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is the figure seen from the front and (B) from back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the character combination of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character combination of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character combination board | substrate of the character combination of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character combination board | substrate in the cover member of the character combination of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of a character combination board | substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body and the permeation | transmission part and non-transmission part of a cover member in the character combination of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light-emitting body in the character combination of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character combination board | substrate of the character combination of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character combination board | substrate in the cover member of the character combination of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of a character combination board | substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of a light-emitting body and the permeation | transmission part and non-transmission part of a cover member in the character combination of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character combination board | substrate of the character combination of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and has shown the state with which the character combination board | substrate and the light guide member have overlapped. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character combination board | substrate in the cover member of the character combination of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of a character combination board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character combination thing of the modification 2 of this embodiment to the game board. It is a figure which shows sectional drawing of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman board | substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side of the snowman board | substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which showed the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and disassembled perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view and rear view of the face board of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the perspective view which showed the state in which the rabbit accessory of this embodiment exists in a standby position. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed one Example about the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump combination of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump combination of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear wall cover, and the front view of a rear wall board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear wall cover, and the front view of a rear wall board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-cured material of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass-curing thing in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and disassembled perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the mountain combination of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the board back grass thing of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A) of the present embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are each moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is the figure which showed the state moved. It is the figure which showed the example which provided the grass board part provided in place of the 1st grass movable part and the 2nd grass movable part instead of providing the stump board part ahead of the stump box part of this embodiment. is there. It is the figure which showed the modification of FIG. 517 of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. (A), (B) is the figure which showed the example of the structure of the box rear wall part of FIG. 520 of this embodiment, (C), (D) is the box rear wall part of FIG. 521 of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the structure.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for low sound inside attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is accommodated, and a payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. A payout control board box 950 There.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and projects from the base portion 171 in a bar shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the rendering operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main member. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a is formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side, and is arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player is relatively easy to press (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44), the player who presses the operation button 410 is operated. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the production operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross hatched portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative part 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative part 432g intersect each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective upright wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that is erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the near side. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is formed to be flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. This reflective surface can be provided by providing the inner side surface of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner side surface. Is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective upright wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion that bears a part (left side portion) of the reflective upright wall portion 33 described above.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 51C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 55A is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and faces the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface that can reflect light. In addition, this reflective surface is provided with a reflective material such as metal or resin, as well as the inner side surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, as well as the inner side surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a as a whole moves to the right from the rear end side toward the front, so that the main body 553a is moved to the right as viewed from the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is within the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is moved to the left from the front end as it moves forward from the rear end side, and the whole body portion 556a is entirely perpendicular to the front vertical line of the door frame right side decorative board 552. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 559a extends rightward and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four parts by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By making the member 561 and the like illuminate in a unique manner, the attendant of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and recognized, and the problem can be quickly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space, the above-mentioned outer-peripheral light-emitting part 34 (left outer-periphery light-emitting part 34a, right-outer outer-periphery light-emitting part 34b) provided to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window The outer-periphery light detector 35 (the left-hand outer light detector 35a and the right-hand outer light detector 35b) that detects the light outside the outer periphery is provided.

  That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer-periphery light-emitting part 34 and the outer-periphery light detection part 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It is possible to make the entire area of the window function as a portion (operation receiving portion) that receives an operation by the player. Further, the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. As a result, when detecting the light by the outer periphery outside light detection unit 35, it is possible to suitably eliminate the effect light that may be a disturbance.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are respectively mounted at portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271 pass therethrough. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors which are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and have a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the left and right directions and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely forward from the front portion of the trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c squarely cut from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d cut from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion projecting forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that house the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the right front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the opened part is closed by the unit main body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are bent backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e tactilely. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a part of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows game balls to be received either in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. A top 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 are inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, whereby the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 that are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1114 that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction. It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part 1115 which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 includes a holding step 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 5a inside the holding step 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front surface. The holding step 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a predetermined clearance with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper portion of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It protrudes toward the front and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. By engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement pieces 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 according to an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel having a form different from that in FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front component member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as a veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The gaming panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 described above.

  The gaming panel 1150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower rear side of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end and is opened downward, and the notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000 and the up-down direction above the notch 1152 And a square insertion hole 1153 into which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the gaming panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating forward and backward for attaching the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 described above. ing.

  The gaming panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  Note that the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402 made up of, the normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate 2003, and the game ball received at the first starting port 2002 are selected by lottery. The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 Number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or second It is mainly provided with a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of game balls in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning ports 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first start opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached immediately above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a prize winning port 2005, and a start port unit. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view 2100 and has a plurality of general winning ports 2001, and a side unit that is attached to the upper left end of the side unit bottom 2200 in front view. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004, which are attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

  In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time, and the big winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and can be opened and closed according to the gaming state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  In the gaming area 5a, the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is arranged above the start port unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view, on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect units provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 includes a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that releases the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 5a. The start opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530. When a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received at the first start opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the left side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal attaching part 3010b.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

  The back unit 3000 is appropriately used using a rear-behind movable effect unit 3100, a rear-upper left movable effect unit 3200, a rear-left movable effect unit 3300, a rear-upper movable effect unit 3400, a lower-bottom front movable effect unit 3500, and the like. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are moved by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, that is, A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the game ball is positioned directly above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn to the center side in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200 There is a possibility that it will be received in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the region where the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 are provided flows down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it is in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). Note that the special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R big hit "," perpendicular change (probability change) per "," shorter time (shorter time) per "," shorter per probability change "," short per chance at the time of probable change ", etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special prize opening 2005 when the special prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) of gaming balls from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the winning prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the winning prize opening 2005 to receive game balls, a lot of gaming balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept game balls, or the winning prize opening 2005 When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an open / close pattern (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) that closes a game ball in an unacceptable state is predetermined. Repeats the number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  The time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of the center accessory 2500, various ornaments of the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, and the back left movable effect The unit 3300, the back / upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back / under front movable effect unit 3500, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like. The player can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the window portion of the present embodiment, and the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are provided in the bulge portion of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Further, the decorative member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention. The second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. LED 477a of 477 is a light emitter of the present invention, door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, unit base 431 of base unit 430, and The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Of the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is full of perspective, so that it can attract the player's attention strongly. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Further, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (the operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative portion 411a and the second button internal decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) due to the change in the distance from the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc. , Etc.), it is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration) The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decorating, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button internal decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Furthermore, each LED (or sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is provided. When the LED 477a) is caused to emit light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated and decorated. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button inner decoration section 432g has an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper part. While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is decorated with indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). The second button inner decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly luminescent decorated, whereas the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly luminescent decorated. In the state where each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 emits light, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration section 411a When the two-button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) is viewed, it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized perspective, and appealing power that strongly attracts the player's interest. A high pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power that can enhance the decorativeness, enhance the appearance, and attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is broken during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and deteriorates the interest, and the button lens 411 is broken. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized through the through-hole 111 from the front, On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The first button 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the tube portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner tube portion 416d and the main body portion are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. Illumination can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated to emit light. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a light emission effect with good appearance can be performed. Moreover, various patterns of light-emitting effects can be performed by appropriately combining the turn-off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b, 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by lighting are arranged as one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared to the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LED 422a, 423a can be moved away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LED 422a, 423a is sufficiently The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Accordingly, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light appropriately so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). An effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be displayed to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By making it operate, it is possible to entertain the player to operate the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by lighting the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being difficult to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can fully enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, light from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b is received at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d from the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  In addition, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 at the end (rear end) on the side close to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go through the rear end of the main body 413a, and completely prevents the light from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is located in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is formed from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) difficult to see. Accordingly, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light as appropriate, so that the light rotates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since the player can show the player a light-emitting effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can get tired of the player by various light-emitting effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside, and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  In addition, at the part of the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 abut or press against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and to reduce the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Also, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured or uncomfortable by intruding the game ball into the remaining space of the attachment space 326j. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 splashes in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321, the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A is provided as described above, the game ball of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is provided. Since it can be prevented from coming into contact with the rear side, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be prevented from being damaged, and the interruption of the game can be reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray cover 340, 340A can be reduced, the lower tray cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. The increase in the burden on the side of the game hall in which 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front is swelled forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game ball is received in the general prize opening 2001 or the like. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower tray 322 that can store a game ball and can be stored in the storage tray (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) outside the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in a front view. Lower space of the lower plate first area A1 and the space behind the installation space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. The second stage operation area 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be made conspicuous when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321). And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power capable of attracting the player's interest strongly can be obtained.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, a portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is provided. The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view is smaller. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension unit 325C having a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the installation space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. In addition, as described above, the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C can be rearranged (replaced), so that the rear space of the attachment space 326j can be accommodated. Since the width of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is depressed downward, and a game ball Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, it is possible to cope with various forms. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

  In the lower plate 322 constituted by the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the lower plate cover 340, 340A is combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, the part on which the game ball is placed in the lower plate 322 is the lower plate body 325, and therefore, the portion where the load of more game balls is applied due to the storage, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340, 340A The boundary (joint, parting line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if many game balls are stored. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from being detached from the lower plate body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate that can store the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received such that the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the front plate is difficult to see from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and improved in appearance. Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), a game in the lower plate 322 is made to the player. This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. It is possible to make an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is circulated to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate with respect to the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322 compared to the appearance.

  Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing so as to go around in the lower plate 322, and the game ball flowing through the lower plate 322 can be surely made difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are immediately noticed by the ball guiding unit 322c and the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the player is given an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322. Can do. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to view more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower dish 322 from the front, the lower dish visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than double the size of the size that can be seen with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured in the same manner as the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Due to the shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a. But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, On the other hand, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appealing power can be obtained. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the dish unit base 323), the lower dish cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, and to make the player feel at ease and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. In comparison, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the side and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) are covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player is placed in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the hand is put in, and to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) is easily visible. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a simple feeling, and to entertain the player by dedicating the player to the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326. Attach the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside, and the outer diameter so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) Is about 15cm and the center swells away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) The operation button 410 having the transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 on the outer peripheral edge thereof. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the appearance of the outer edge, the rear side (rear side), and the like of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (main body part 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an oblique direction, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from being visible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 Therefore, the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Accordingly, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 The side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or movable, and the door frame side effect display device that can entertain the player through the operation buttons 410. 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more entertaining can be realized.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, design (decoration) is imparted to the operation button 410. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made conspicuous and the player is interested. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  In the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer periphery of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button internal decoration member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by actively engaging the player in the player participation type production. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. And a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached and the button button 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) is arranged so that the operation button 410 surrounds the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer periphery of the button lens 411. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are provided. At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a sticker or a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. You may make it.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedron shape.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Equipped with an operation device "," equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface "," equipped with a decoration with decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration "," game " Characters, items, logos, and decorative bodies that three-dimensionally represent scenes (diorama), etc. according to the machine concept "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the gaming machine concept , Etc., which are decorated by stickers, printing, etc. ", etc." Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the production operation unit attachment portion 326a) is not necessarily one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j may be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the pan unit cover 326 is formed with the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward to mount the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-like cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the attachment space 326j (or the remaining space of the attachment space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decoration such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration element 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation button internal decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect that are arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A and the like such that the rear member is always visible is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is a predetermined condition. It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which a rear side becomes visible by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmission means, “the rear side can be visually recognized due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, such as a magic mirror”, “transparent by turning the power ON / OFF, such as a liquid crystal film Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By having the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can be overlapped. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made hard to get tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interests.

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and a decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration with the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the rear member of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED (or the light between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED. ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting a portion that is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light from the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game that is progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  60, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 or a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Further, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects an illegal act using a magnet attached thereto is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the port input terminal.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a driving signal from the output terminal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. For the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, in which game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch are used for the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this is triggered, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., as shown in FIG. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls relating to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the various signals based on the information The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like, and is not reset by a payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  Out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting the out-of-game ball in the supply passage of the in-ball supply unit 820 of the out-of-payment unit 800 and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting the game ball released from the out-out exits 831b and 832b of the out-feed device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the sake of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 for proceeding the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending apparatus connection terminal board. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, and in addition to the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The digit segment display is controlled to turn on. By such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. Power factor improving circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and to output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 in the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, the display control drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. While performing the drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs sound control of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time, hour and minute A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the second, and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You lose your contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is electrically connected. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I, and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.
Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control program copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, etc. Various control data copy area 1511ce for storing copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing non-backup target data among various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 1511cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are one pair, Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including power recovery due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various data such as music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And a signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is inputted, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not inputted, the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode (to be described later) by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume that has been adjusted by turning the volume, and the volume of the combined performance sound actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used; Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the flow of the notification sound so as to notify the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal action against the pachinko machine 1. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the subvolume value set for the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound having the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data for use is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to adjust to the setting mode, the sub volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are used. It comes to flow.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. Then, when it stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period elapses after the notification sound starts to flow. It starts to flow again from where it has progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b draws the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects are reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in stereo.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when it is received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sand storm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other plurality of wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal to be described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for informing that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320, but there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) Is controlled by the VDP1512a with built-in sound source. In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the year, month, day, and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as date, time, hour, minute, and second information that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is reduced, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 682 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. 1 with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 to thereby control the ball of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball hitting device 650.

  The power generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V from the payout control board 951. + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1 Current flows to the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM to hold the stored contents. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the main control built-in RAM is constituted by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are shown in FIG. 76A. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3 and the like.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 12V to + 3.3V. + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power failure or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 1310. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  69 and 75, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. Note that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end thereof is a capacitor MC4 which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives a logic from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform RAM clear that erases information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation signal that has been pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004 that are directly input to the main control board 1310 are set to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 that are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 1310a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power supply line and the other end of the resistor MR Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. 78, the positive terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, as shown in FIG. 78, the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and one end Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. As a result, the power failure warning signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 7, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is paid out to the payout control board 951. Main system without reset function that outputs as a power failure warning signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a wiring Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, or detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information about the game (game information) is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the control output circuit 1310ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and thus the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and has the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is used as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal as a serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When power or instantaneous power failure occurs, +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main periphery serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb having no function, the peripheral control board 1510 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, to which + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied and whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply substrate 931 is smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, The circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches such as the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is substantially the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door opening signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 It is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 1310 is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 1310 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 4 does not occur during the normal game, and the outer frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge because it is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or it is impossible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, but there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the payout power failure notification signal that is input to the payout control board 951. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The full-tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The detection signal from various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is transmitted from a T-type filter circuit such as a full-terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. If it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the storage space is full of the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game balls by the payout rotating body. It comes to perform control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not filled with the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the driving control is forcibly stopped to stop paying out the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls stored. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-described prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotator to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is rotated. The dispensing motor 834 becomes overloaded and abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational motion of the dispensing rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signals from operation switches]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeats the ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a front-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a rear-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is a transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear that erases information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 954 and the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. 3 is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 using + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switch signal input to the voltage switch input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal and supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball rental request signal and the BRQ as a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the photocoupler PIC73 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  A PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 70, and detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or a payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and a payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payer ACK signal is main-controlled from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. And so on.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And games such as jackpot information output signal such as 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed through) the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the total number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, so the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. For example, a big hit of 15 rounds may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of jackpots for 2 rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of jackpots for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling ambition more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal, and the two round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the short time medium information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A signal indicating that a state has occurred. The prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize-ball number information output signal is a signal indicating the effect, and the various prize-winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls that entered the ball, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot In a state 2 round jackpot information output signal is a signal that reports that 2 round jackpots are occurring, and the probability changing information output signal is in a state where probability fluctuations are occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that there is a change, and the special symbol change display is ended by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  On the external terminal plate 784, as shown in FIG. 86, output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is opened.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is terminated (stopped) in this embodiment. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and then the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted to count the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal to notify that every time a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start opening prize information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the first opening opening 2002 or the second of the pachinko machine 1 every time the start opening prize information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of game balls entered can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 15-round jackpot has been generated. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates 15 round jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15 round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 15 round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that the 2-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input and grasp the total number of times that the 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol change display is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 when the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stopped). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal and then the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. As described above, the time reduction / medium information output signal is a signal indicating that a time reduction state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time reduction state is occurring. ing. When the time and medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the time and time state is generated in the pachinko machine 1 when the time and medium information output signal is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability variation in-progress information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the probability variation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state in which probability variation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability variation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is a certain number of times, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball is scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball, and to determine the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out. can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side toward the right side, also in this respect, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If the 15-round big hit happens to happen in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining amount becomes small, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as a prize ball will be insufficient, so that it will be paid out. (In addition, for example, when a ball clog or a ball is generated in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless it can be resolved). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since this is a signal that informs the player every time, the payout control board 951 can output the award ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle for supplying game balls from the Pachinko Island facilities to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the ball clogging (for example, occurs in the payout device 830) In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if the hall clerk is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and the game ball is paid out by the hall clerk after the 15 round round hit. Returning to the state, the payout control board 951 pays out unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15th round big hit ends and the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Outputs an award ball number information output signal indicating that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, in spite of the fact that 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. The problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship arises.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and is actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (troubles such as clogging of the refilling nozzle or the like, clogging of the ball in the dispensing device 830 or ball clogging) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the relationship with the hall computer can be accurately transmitted. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Stage display drive board circuit]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is accommodated in the dish unit 320. A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side production transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, It is restored to three synchronizing signals, that is, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals obtained by differentiating a certain LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forcible switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. The serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Note that the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, as described above. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the state of waiting for a customer and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is intentionally transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has a VDD terminal, a VDDO terminal, an LVDSVDD terminal, a PLLVDD terminal, and a PDWN terminal supplied with + 3.3V respectively created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is a ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as a ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected, and are the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
Incidentally, it is generally known that when electronic components are surface-mounted, it is beneficial in that the hardware circuit can be suitably downsized by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit components (components encapsulated in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements (such as resistance elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements)), By nature, a package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), thus creating a relatively large space on the back side of the package. In addition, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted illegally) that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) for many years instead of surface mounting.

  That is, the electronic component to be inserted and mounted tends to generate a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, even in the mounted state, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place where it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It is made to suppress suitably.

  However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the space for presentations has been further increased, and the hardware circuit has been downsized while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. There is a need to plan.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second control unit that only performs effect control relating to the game among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is not easily fraudulent, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment includes the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to perform the effect progression process according to the result of the game progression process. Can be executed.

  Here, various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Examples of various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 include resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, and an electrolytic capacitor AC10 shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510). Only the surface mounting area to be mounted in the form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the above-described various electronic components that the peripheral control board 1510 has. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits that the player gets and are not subject to fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is not affected. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be downsized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to control the power supply for control (for example, + 5V). Processing related to the game including generation processing and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be illegal. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and amusement entertainment The decline is inevitable.

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931). Of the various electronic components, the discrete component has a smaller package than the integrated circuit component, and even if the electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It can be said that this is a component having relatively high performance as security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  That is, the inventor mixed electronic parts mounted on the first control unit MCG with high security performance parts (discrete parts) against fraud and low security performance parts (integrated circuit parts) against fraud. Focusing on the fact that further integration as a hardware circuit is made only with parts with high security performance against illegality (discrete parts), the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent, It has been found that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically illustrating a state in which the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud. In the following, referring to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. This is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. A base substrate 951 and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are provided, and an example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of convenience, here, for the sake of convenience of explanation, description will be given assuming an example in which they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, the base plate BB includes
-An insertion mounting area TH that is mounted in a form in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB, and that is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
A surface mounting region SM that is mounted in a form in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate BB and has excellent integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, etc., but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided in the form of being divided.

  According to such a configuration, while it is possible to mount an electronic component that is difficult to be fraudulent in the surface mounting region SM, an electronic component that should be pursued for fraud suppression rather than integration is mounted on the insertion mounting region TH side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts while making it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
-Integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance against unauthorized mounting, enclosed in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements;
A single-function element is simply enclosed in a relatively small package, and includes a discrete component D2 with high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

  In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance is referred to as the insertion mounting region TH and the surface. The mounting area SM is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having a high security performance, a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the surface mount region SM And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH.

  That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, in general, it is possible to achieve integration by using a surface mounting type instead of an insertion mounting type. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately as the base plate BB, for example, the position where the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected is provided in circuit design. In view of the balance with the space provided with the wiring pattern related to this, it is possible to reverse the integration by arranging the electronic components not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. Cases can also arise.

  In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, not all of the discrete components D2 are used as the surface mount type discrete components D2a, so that the most suitable mode for integration is achieved. In some cases, an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit is more suitably reduced in size while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppressing performance is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the board and is formed on the other side (front side) surface to provide discrete components. And integrated circuit components are both mounted. On the other hand, the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is not formed on the one side (back side) surface of the substrate, and is formed on the other side (front side) surface so that the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are not formed. Of these, it is desirable to mount only the discrete components without mounting the integrated circuit components. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface, which is likely to be a blind spot when confirming whether the illegal component is mounted, is excluded. On this basis, in the insertion mounting area TH having excellent fraud suppression performance, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent and discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. In the inferior surface mounting area SM, since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are to be mounted, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of fraudulent components. It becomes like this.

  Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even in the discrete component D2 having the high security performance, a capacitor element having a large capacitance value among the capacitor elements (backup) For the power supply, etc., the surface mount region is considered to have a relatively larger shape than other elements (such as a resistance element, a diode element, and a capacitor element with a small capacitance value (such as a filter circuit)). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insertion mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted in the insertion mount region TH. As a result, when miniaturizing the hardware circuit, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be more suitably maintained.

  However, although a capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete parts), there is no large gap between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit part D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount region SM, and even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

  In addition, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a characteristic second technique based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). As a discrete circuit (a hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC that is electrically constituted by the discrete component D2. However, the discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 each mounted in a manner divided into an insertion mounting region TH and a surface mounting region SM.

  That is, in this case, although the circuit is a single discrete circuit DHC intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting region TH is performed on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that can be mounted and an electronic component D2a having a shape that can be mounted on the surface mounting region SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the current situation, and it is expected that fraud can be suppressed even if the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting region SM, it is possible to expect a reduction in the size of the hardware circuit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud to electronic components.

  However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Next, an example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application. explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. And three base substrates. Then, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the three base boards, only the insertion mounting region TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931, and the base of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the board and the base board of the payout control board 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided so as to be separated from each other.

  Of the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75) of the “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM” described above. Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control board 1310 as a surface mount type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. The surface SM is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a.

  According to such a configuration, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) among the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance is the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It is mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. A characteristic first technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements) are mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance have the same shape, it is expected that the effort required for fraud confirmation is saved.

  Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components that bear a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) side different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mounting region SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting region SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom for circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, a single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. The plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are mounted separately in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, in spite of the single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting region TH (power supply board) is formed on the base plate BB. 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape enabling mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the situation, and it is possible to expect fraud suppression even if the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function are inserted and mounted region TH (capacitor element). And the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), and the discrete component D2 is divided into two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board) In this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit has increased. So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting region SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting region TH of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. The area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting region SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraud can be expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is relatively inferior in security performance are relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as that in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a surface mounting area that is relatively inferior in security performance is relatively reduced. The load on the visual check can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting region SM is provided on each of the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951. It may be formed.

  Further, the surface mounting region SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on the other base substrate is also collectively arranged on the specific base substrate. Also good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting has been performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mounting region SM formed on a specific base substrate. It will be expected that it will save time and effort.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to appropriately suppress fraud. I must.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 117, they may be configured collectively on one base substrate.

  In addition, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application may be anything as long as the surface mounting region SM and the insertion mounting region TH are separated, and these are provided by a plurality of base substrates. Alternatively, it may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, the base board of the main control board 1310 includes a first base board in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, and the second base board By inserting and mounting the board on the insertion mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic components inserted and mounted on the first base board are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It may be assumed that a structure in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other is adopted, but in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” The “plate BB” is a concept including at least both the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. . That is, this aspect is also one of the aspects in which “the insertion plate mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are both provided in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG”. It is included as an aspect.

  When the first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate in which only the surface mounting region SM is formed are provided, the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so as to face different directions (preferably, orthogonal directions).

  That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface-mounted component) mounted on the surface-mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting unauthorized components (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even with such discrete components (surface mount components) with excellent security performance, there are places on the back side that are difficult to confirm by visual inspection when mounted on the surface mount region SM, although it is a small space. Still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that “there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mounted parts) to mount unauthorized parts”. However, in the situation where it is difficult to check by anxiety, such as “an extremely small illegal part may be created and this may be illegally installed”, it is difficult to confirm by visual inspection. There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will be complicated, such as forced confirmation.

  Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 in the following manner instead of the above-described manner.

[Modifications of the base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating a partial region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 118, a modified example of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described. Note that description of modifications of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, but it is possible to make modifications with the same contents as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB that is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  And also in the insertion mounting board | substrate THB concerning this modification, it mounts in the form in which several types of electronic components (insertion mounting parts) are inserted similarly to the insertion mounting board | substrate TH of the said embodiment. Similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance and the discrete component D2b having a high security performance.

  However, as apparent from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components to be mounted in this way are only provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example has a surface mounting area and a surface mounting component mounted in the area, any of them can be seen at first glance. It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

  More specifically, the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is not only the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the above-described insertion mounting component, but also the special mounting component D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component D3a, special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is hidden from the insertion mounting substrate THB. Insertion mounting is performed via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL described later.

  According to such a special mounting component D3, although the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area are respectively provided in the interior, fraud suppression is performed. Since it has an appearance shape that looks as if it is a single insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB having excellent performance, it is expected to be removed from the target component for unauthorized purposes by a malicious person. Can be done. Note that in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion on which the special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting board THB is the surface mounting on which the surface mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

  In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged in one place (adjacent) but are arranged at a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large region (insertion mounting region) where the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. We are going to establish.

  That is, in this case, the surface mount area inferior to the fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mount parts) mounted on the surface mount area are subdivided and become inconspicuous. The surface mounting area exists when a malicious person views the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is well mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it is possible to make the hardware circuit more difficult to notice, and thus, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts more appropriately.

  As will be described later, inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed. As described above, the diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), an insertion mounting region (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and a surface mounting region (Schottky diode element) (Diode MD0)) and mounting. In addition, with respect to the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) that is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position that is not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area (such as the power supply board 931). It is made to be implemented with.

  As described above, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exhibits a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby increasing the difficulty in understanding the circuit. Thus, even when it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted so that the internal structure is exposed. The figure (portion surrounded by a dotted line) is included.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB, and a special insertion mount lead portion that is inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insert mount substrate THB. TL and the outer package OP which molds each of these parts with mold resin are provided.

  Here, the special surface mounting substrate SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL. The wiring patterns HP are formed so as to be connected to each other, and the mounting surface thereof is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

  The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is limited to a size that allows the surface mounting type discrete component D2a to be mounted. For example, it is necessary when mounting an integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a. The mounting surface has an area smaller than the assumed area. In other words, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a surplus space for further mounting other electronic components. In the surface mount substrate SMB, in order to reduce the size, there is not enough space to mount another electronic component when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes difficult to perform any fraud on the special surface mounting board SMB, further downsizing of the hardware circuit can be achieved while suppressing the mounting of the fraudulent parts. Expected.

  The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded with a mold resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin). Other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB are electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

  Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered so that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. By surface mounting. However, as described above, the special surface mounting substrate SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted has a mounting surface that is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting substrate THB. Accordingly, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is opposed to the thin mounting surface (thin surface) of the insertion mounting substrate THB instead of its flat surface. It will be implemented in a form.

  In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board THB, not a flat surface having a relatively large area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (for two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB so that only one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed in the small area (for two through holes).

  Note that the size of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself (the length in the horizontal direction in the figure) according to this modification is when the special mount component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The pitch is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are inserted (specific insertion hole installation interval).

  The special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting substrate SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at a certain location, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered in a state of being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and the insertion mounting board THB side It is electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern.

  Further, the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by a mold resin, but is different from the mold resin. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double-molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to perform any fraud on a surface-mount substrate that is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification, the external shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of a specific type of surface mounted component that is surface-mounted inside. . That is, in this case, the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a concealed form, so that a specific type of surface mount component built in the special mount component D3a is not mounted. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, and fraud suppression can be expected.

  Moreover, the outer package OP has only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL out of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided in the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be drawn out to the outside of the lead, and the special mount component D3a is inserted into the lead portion for insertion mounting (special insertion mounting). It is designed to be mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

  According to such a configuration, despite the fact that the surface mounting substrate inferior in fraud suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate are provided inside, the special mounting component D3a, Since it can function as if it were one insertion mounting component mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected to be excluded from the target of malicious purposes by malicious persons Can be done. In addition, since it can be handled in the same way as one insertion mounting type discrete component in terms of physical distribution and mounting, it can be said that it is excellent in terms of such handling.

  Still further, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By molding together with the target special surface mounting substrate SMB, the external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes is provided.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting region (the interval between the insertion holes), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraud.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, there is no electronic component having an external shape having a lateral width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310. Since only the electronic component of the type (insertion mounting component) can be viewed as being mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized components.

  Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components mounted on the surface, and all the insertion mounted components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (special It has a unique external shape different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3). That is, the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification has an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin against a mere discrete component D2a that can only have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. In addition, it is unique as an external shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large external shape.

  According to such a configuration, since excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, the willingness to perform fraud is reduced. Can be expected.

  Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP. In this modification, the content of the identification number (◯ 3213) is assigned to the inner package ( It is made different from the content (SD) of the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

  According to such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to a specific type of surface mounting component does not appear, so that the external shape generated by the outer package OP and the surface mounting are internally performed. This makes it possible to make it appear that a specific type of surface mount component is not mounted, coupled with the fact that the specific shape of the surface mount component is different (in combination with the structure of the double mold). In addition, it is possible to make it appear as if only an insertion-mounting type electronic component (insertion-mounting component) is mounted, and it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized components.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is set to be smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. On this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly applied to the back surface thereof. It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is mounted in the insertion mounting area TH as well as forming a unique and asymmetrical external shape. This is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. This eliminates the necessity of securing a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB, coupled with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be inserted while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example appears as one insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance, but in practice, the special surface mounting substrate SMB and the surface mounting type discrete component are used. D2a is included in each of them. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire.

  Further, in the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a to be surface-mounted, a special mounting component D3b for internally mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

  That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the discrete components D2b of the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. A circuit is formed. Even in such a configuration related to a filter circuit, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to prevent fraud, and by increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, fraud can be suppressed.

  As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be surface-mounted on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, respectively. However, in this case, the electronic components having the highest height among the electronic components (insertion mounting components) inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (for example, the electronic components are arranged side by side in a line) For example, in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing.

  The special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side and in a row with respect to one special surface mounting substrate SMB, and those electronic components are also mounted. It is desirable to package the component and the special surface mounting substrate SMB together by molding with a molding resin.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally increases, and “It is an electronic component of a type that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible to expect a dazzling effect using preconceptions, such as "Is it a discrete component of the insertion mounting type?" Therefore, in order to suitably obtain such a dazzling effect using preconceptions, one surface mount type discrete component is made as a single unit, and its external shape is made different by the structure of the double mold described above, and its thinness is reduced. It is desirable to mount the surface so that the surface faces the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number attached to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can also be said that it is important to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding by adding OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modification is a structure having “one surface mounting type discrete component” smaller than “one insertion mounting type discrete component” in the inside thereof. The size when double-molded is about the same size as “one insert mounting type discrete component”, and it can be expected that the above-described excellent operational effects can be expected. . Therefore, in a configuration in which “one insert mounting type discrete component” is included and double-molded, the size is larger than “one insertion mounting type discrete component”. Therefore, it is impossible to expect the above-described excellent effects.

  The techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized below. Each content described below can be adopted by the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and the example thereof, or the technique described with reference to FIG. 118 and the example thereof, unless otherwise specified. This is an effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG.
・ Having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and using these electronic components, in addition to generating a control power source (for example, +5 V, etc.), a game progress process including award ball payout A first control unit MCG for performing control related to the game, and a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and using the electronic components, effects relating to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG are performed. Second control unit SCG
The purpose of the game machine is to solve the problem of “reducing the hardware circuit size while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting”. .

  More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, first, the effect control related to the game is performed among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the second control unit SCG, which is only to be performed, is not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and is difficult to be fraudulent. One of the technical features is that this is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mounting type components (SMD) are also used as the above-described various mounting electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, but these mounting electronic components are obtained by the player. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting because it is not directly related to the privilege and is not subject to fraud. The size can be reduced.

  On the other hand, since the process on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be an illegal target. Therefore, although the size reduction of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of the mounting electronic components is significantly reduced, The reality is that a decline in the amusement interest is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
-An insertion mounting area in which the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate BB, which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
・ Surface mounting area where the lead part provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB and the integration performance is excellent due to the multi-layered wiring pattern, but the injustice suppression performance is inferior Both are to be provided first. Based on this, the following two types of mounting electronic parts with different properties are selectively mounted in the insertion mounting region or surface mounting region having the above properties in such a manner that the above-mentioned problems can be solved. One of them.

・ Multiple types of single function elements are integrated in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting ・ Single function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

  More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component having the low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region. In addition, in the surface mounting region inferior to the fraud suppression performance, only the discrete component having the high security performance is mounted. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the mounting electronic component even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  However, even if it is configured to maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components in this way, the board included in the first control unit MCG is likely to be targeted for fraud. There is no change. Therefore, the substrate of the first control unit MCG basically has a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7, FIG. It is desirable that the mounting surface (flat surface) be directed to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in a state covered with the In other words, in this case, the first control unit MCG can be achieved by simply opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 as well as making it possible to make illegal actions on the mounting surface (flat surface) difficult by the transparent cover member. Therefore, it is possible to monitor (visually) whether or not an illegal component is mounted, so that an illegal component is used as a substrate (first substrate) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be illegal is mounted. It is possible to suitably ensure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring with respect to the mounting of each.

  In order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic component is mounted on one side (back side) of the board of the first control unit MCG. First, the mounting electronic component is mounted only on the other side (front side) and covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). It goes without saying that the surface on the other side (front side) should be directed toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 is a part of the first control unit MCG that performs processing directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG has the above-described components. It can be said that it is particularly desirable to apply each of the substrates to the substrate included in the main control substrate 1310.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components, first, an insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed as a substrate included in the main control board 1310, and the integrated circuit component and At least a first substrate on which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which surface mount regions inferior in fraud suppression performance are formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted but discrete components are surface mounted are prepared. To. Among the substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) and the one side surface (the electronic component is not mounted). With respect to the second substrate, the other side surface (the back side surface) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) are arranged so that the other side surface faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal to this It is desirable to arrange so as to face the direction. That is, in this case, the presence of the surface mounting region (second substrate) inferior to the fraud suppression performance can be made difficult to visually recognize from the rear side, so that the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components is more suitable. Will be expected to maintain.

  However, even in such a configuration, if a malicious person sticks to "whether a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed somewhere", the surface inferior in fraud suppression performance There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting region is formed will be noticed. In this case, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, although only the discrete component with high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted, the fraud that the hall side has not yet recalled. If a small illegal chip is used (for example, a very small illegal chip is developed), a loss may occur.

  Therefore, the other side surface (front side) of the first substrate on which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is not limited to the insertion mounting area but fraud suppression. The surface mounting area with inferior performance is also formed on the same surface (front side). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is connected to the pachinko machine. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the rear side of 1. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting region of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first board arranged to face the rear side is when a malicious person tries to perform an illegal act from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “no mounting electronic components are mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to fraud suppression performance, and the pachinko machine 1 has high fraud suppression performance” As a result, it is possible to lose the willingness of a malicious person to find the second substrate on which the surface mounting region having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed. Note that the surface mounting region formed on the first substrate is preferably provided at a position (such as an end of the first substrate) where the presence of the surface mounting region is easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

  The pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate has an independent shape that is not electrically connected to the surface mounting area and the insertion mounting area formed on the same plane. Although it is electrically connected to the insertion / mounting area, even if an unauthorized part is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion / mounting area side is not affected (the game is advanced) It is important to form it on an output signal that does not need to be used above. On the other hand, unlike the first substrate, the second substrate according to this illustrative example is formed with only the surface mounting region that is inferior in fraud suppression performance among the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region. A mounting electronic component (here, a discrete component) is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region.

  Even when each of the above-described configurations is adopted, a “second board on which a discrete component is surface-mounted on a surface-mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance” may be found by a malicious person. Sex cannot be completely excluded. Accordingly, among the surface mounting regions of the main control board 1310, the “surface mounting region formed only on the other surface of the first substrate and not mounted with any mounting electronic component” is the surface mounting region. On the other hand, with respect to the “surface mounting region formed only on the other side surface of the second substrate”, the pattern wiring as shown in FIG. Is molded with a mold member (non-permeable member) together with the second substrate in a state where only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is surface-mounted. Both the back side where no electronic components are mounted) and the other side (front side) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but face the direction perpendicular to this. It is desirable to be disposed. In other words, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component is mounted on the surface mounting area. In addition, the improper act on the mounting surface is made difficult by the mold member (the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area where mounting of illegal parts is virtually impossible, It is possible to remove from the target that needs to be monitored for mounting), and “to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected to solve the problem of “good” appropriately.

  However, more preferably, for a mounting component (in this case, a discrete component) that is surface-mounted in the surface mounting region, as shown in an example of the mold structure in FIG. It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area TH of the first substrate in a state where it is molded with a non-permeable member. According to such a configuration, the first substrate disposed so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (the surface mounting region that impresses that “the surface mounting component is not mounted in the pachinko machine 1”, and the electronic component In the insertion mounting area, the "discrete component", the "integrated circuit component", and the "mold member (non-permeable member) together with the second substrate" The “surface-mounting regions in a state molded by the above” are inserted and mounted, and are electrically connected between the electronic components. In other words, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, the surface mounting region (the first inferior anti-fraud performance) is included in the insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted and excellent in the anti-fraud performance. (2 substrates) is difficult to see with the mold member, and it can be inserted and functioned as if it is an inserted mounting component, so that it can maintain the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components. However, it is expected to solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit” more suitably.

  In addition, for the second board on which the surface mount component is mounted, the board is inserted and mounted to the first board so that the thin surface of the board faces the rear side (the board surfaces are orthogonal to the first board). Therefore, it is possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without generating a large blind spot between the first substrate and the first substrate.

  Here, even when each of the above configurations is adopted, “the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-permeable member) is used as a mold member (non-permeable member) together with unauthorized parts. The hall side is required to periodically check whether or not an illegal act such as “replace with another substrate in a molded state” is performed. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, the fraudulent action is performed when the above-mentioned fraudulent action is performed in which the color or material of the mold member is replaced with another substrate having the same configuration. It may be difficult to detect that the electronic device is in a broken state, and the security performance against improper mounting of mounting electronic components may also be reduced.

  Therefore, only a specific type of discrete component (mounting electronic component) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control substrate 1310 is included in the surface mounting region of the second substrate to be molded. It is desirable that the surface mounting is performed, and the other types are not mounted on the second substrate, but only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only the discrete component having a specific shape is molded on the surface mounting region of the second substrate while being surface-mounted, so that the shape of the undulating portion ( The degree of swelling of the mold member at the discrete component mounting position (see, for example, FIG. 118) is unified. In other words, when another board on which an illegal component is mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component is molded with a mold member, the degree of swelling of the mold member at the mounting position of the illegal component is the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Therefore, it is easy to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior by the shape difference appearing on the mold member (the swelling state is not single). It is expected that the security performance is suitably maintained.

  In this case, at least the board included in the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG is configured such that specific types of discrete components are mounted together only in the surface mounting area of the second board. It can be said that it is more desirable not to be mounted on a board different from the two boards in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit.

  However, since the “specific type discrete component” for obtaining the above-described effects is required to be the same mounting electronic component in shape, for example, as the “specific type discrete component” If the “Schottky barrier diode” is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the “PN diode” is a “discrete component different from the specific type” and is not mounted on the second substrate and is a different substrate. It will be required to be mounted on. Strictly speaking, when a “Schottky barrier diode” as a “specific type of discrete component” is surface-mounted on the second board, the “Schottky barrier diode” of the same product is attached to the second board. The “Schottky barrier diode” of a different product is preferably not mounted on the second substrate but mounted on a different substrate.

  However, on the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to more favorably reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit, only the type of discrete component to be surface-mounted is different, and other structures (the insertion mounting region is not formed, The third substrate is the same as the second substrate described above, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. It is desirable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to other mounting electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrate (second substrate, third substrate) having the above-described mold structure for each type of discrete component is a separate electronic component (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, special component It is prepared as a mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored for each substrate having a mold structure (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified to monitor for the above-mentioned fraud (on the corresponding substrate). It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not an electronic component of a type that should not be mounted is mounted). Therefore, “Hardware while maintaining security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. The problem of “reducing the circuit size” can be preferably solved. In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only a discrete component of a type different from the discrete component mounted on the substrate may be similarly prepared.

  If only one discrete component is mounted on the surface of the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the above-described double mold structure can be used. In combination, it becomes possible to more suitably solve the problem of “reducing the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components”.

  When a plurality of substrates thus molded (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided. It is desirable that each surface mounting surface (the other surface described above) is disposed so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling in the mold member of each substrate from the same direction, it is possible to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate). It is possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not electronic components are mounted.

  Furthermore, each component (mold member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is given a component-side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that each of the surfaces with the component side identification display be arranged so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to make a one-to-one correspondence between the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape to appear on the mold member” attached to the second substrate and the third substrate, respectively. It is possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display may be attached to the mold surface opposite to the side on which the surface mounting region is formed (the surface on the side where the bulge does not occur in the mold member). It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display so as not to cause a confirmation error.

  Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region inferior in tampering suppression performance is formed, one electron molded together with the discrete components that are surface mounted on the substrate. These are provided as components, and are inserted and mounted in such a manner that their board surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion mounting area formed on the first board. That is, in this case, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted is as if it is an insertion mounting component without creating a large space between the first substrate and the second substrate. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while favorably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  However, in order to favorably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts, the appearance of the electronic board inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion mounted part is the second board or Each of the third substrates is required to be hidden from the substrate on which the surface mounting region is formed. Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, a plurality of types of discrete components are prevented from being surface mounted, an integrated circuit component is prevented from being surface mounted, and as shown in FIG. For example, the surface mounting of only one discrete component is to suppress the size of the substrate and to connect it to one insertion mounting component (a structure in which an electrical element is connected to the insertion mounting lead by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it appear as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component). That is, the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate or an empty state formed on the first substrate but nothing is mounted. It is required that the area be smaller than the surface mounting area.

  Further, the second substrate and the third substrate can be made compact in this way, and the second substrate and the third substrate are each one electron with respect to the first substrate. Insertion mounted components (discrete components (general electronic with a structure in which an electrical element is connected to an insertion mounting lead by a bonding wire) mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components when inserted and mounted as a component Components)) and insertion mounting components mounted at higher mounting heights than those electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components having a structure in which electrical elements are connected to the insertion mounting leads by bonding wires))) It is more desirable to arrange each of them. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the tampering suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region in the first substrate that is excellent in the tampering suppression performance. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate or the third substrate is provided as an electronic component (mold component) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or inserted into the first substrate. It can be said that it is important to provide the electronic component (molded component) smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

  In general, a board corresponding to the type of electronic component mounted on the board on which the electronic component is mounted, including the board (first board) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is provided near the place where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, for the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component functions and to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding. It can be said that it is desirable to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Therefore, different board side identification displays are attached in the vicinity of positions where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board. However, any of these board-side identification displays includes any board-side identification display provided in correspondence with the same type of mounting electronic component, and any board-side identification within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to have a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”). That is, in this case, even if the board side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board or the third board is inserted and mounted, the mode is the same kind of mounting electronics. Since it has a unique aspect that differs from the board-side identification display attached to each component, which type is mounted as a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate, respectively Can be made difficult to recognize.

  However, when a structure that increases the difficulty of circuit understanding is adopted by concealing which type of electronic component the second substrate or the third substrate functions as described above, In order to grasp the above, there is a concern that a malicious person may perform an act of cutting the mold member and trying to check the internal element.

  Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the substrate side identification display is not attached to the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious member removes the mold member and attempts to confirm the inside of the mold member, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. Is desirable.

  Still further, with respect to each discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate, many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate Is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted by the second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components, and the first substrate is molded. Even in the case of insertion mounting, the administrator on the hall side can easily find where the second board and the third board are, and fraud has been made to the second board and the third board. It becomes possible to facilitate the confirmation of whether or not there is.

  In this case, even a malicious person can assist in grasping information on which surface mounting region (second substrate or third substrate) inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided. It can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the surface mounting region with the second mold member together with the second substrate or the third substrate. In addition to increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even if it is, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded with the second substrate or the third substrate is in a state of being cut or whether the first mold member in the inside is being cut. As a result, it is expected that the difficulty of understanding the circuit is suitably maintained while keeping the type of the electronic component secret.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as “?” Or “*”) different from any board-side identification display is added. However, if only the board side identification display having such a unique aspect is attached, it is impossible to grasp which type of electronic component functions on the hall side, and maintenance / There are concerns that this will adversely affect management. Therefore, a board having a unique aspect at a position that is relatively easily visible in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are each inserted and mounted as one electronic component among the insertion and mounting surfaces of the first board. In addition to the side identification display, the same type of mounting electronic components (or different) on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to see (such as directly under the molded second substrate or third substrate) It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same form as the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board) is also secretly attached.

  Further, as described above, in this example, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate included in the main control substrate 1310 is used. Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. In addition, the surface mounting area of the third board has one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacity) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the board included in the main control board 1310. Only discrete components (mounting electronic components) of the capacitor are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is obvious that the second substrate or the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit) having a specific function. That is, a mounting electronic component that is surface-mounted on a surface mounting region formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) (here Then, by configuring a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components that are surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased, or the molded substrate (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed and it is necessary to make a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function). It is expected to be used for countermeasures.

  As described above, in summarizing the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, configurations having several technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. About each structure, it was only what was described as the best embodiment, and when implementing, it is not always necessary to use all of those structures, and those structures are appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. Can be implemented.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiments and modifications will be described below.

[Technology 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area where a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is formed by molding the surface mount component itself with a mold resin. The game machine is characterized in that it is molded together with the surface mounting region to be mounted by another mold resin.

[Technology 1-2]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using the electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, the gaming machine can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area where a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided in the electronic component. Of the surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the surface, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Among the plurality of electronic components, a first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit and a surface mount region provided on the base plate of the second control unit The second side surface mounted component to be mounted is one of the first side surface mounted component and the second side surface mounted component, although both are molded by a mold resin. The gaming machine, wherein the first side surface mounting component is molded together with the surface mounting region using a molding resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

  In such technical thoughts 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount region inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed by molding resin itself, Since it is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin, it is possible to apply some fraud to the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It becomes extremely difficult.

[Technology 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in such a manner that the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting lead mounted on the surface of the surface mounting lead provided on the surface mounting component of the electronic component.
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
On the special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion;
Surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is molded integrally with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, A gaming machine that is mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead portion.

  In such a technical idea 2, a surface mounting component mounted in a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is caused to function as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted in an insertion mounting area in excellent fraud suppression performance. As a result, it can be expected that a malicious person is excluded from the object of fraud.

[Technology 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in such a manner that the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component of the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting lead mounted on the surface of the surface mounting lead provided on the surface mounting component of the electronic component.
The surface mount component includes
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which a single function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount component is:
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface mount component itself, and the base of the specific control unit A gaming machine having an appearance shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  In such technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is applied to a mere discrete surface mount component that can only have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. It is unique as an external shape that attracts the attention of a malicious person and has a relatively large external shape. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to show the third party the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit, it is possible to expect a decrease in the willingness to perform fraudulent acts.

[Technology 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area where a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting area is distributed in a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area, whereas the insertion mounting area is distributed. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  In such a technical idea 4, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppressing performance is not concentrated in one place, but is divided into small portions so that the surface mounting area is inconspicuous, and the fraud suppressing performance is relatively large. It is arranged to be inserted into an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, when a malicious person looks at the base plate of the specific control unit, it becomes difficult to notice that the surface mounting area exists, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

[Technology 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and includes a specific control unit that can perform control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic circuits,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The plurality of electronic circuits include
A backup power supply circuit that supplies a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of a single function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
A surface mount area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The insertion mounting area is
Provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area, so that the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area are adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power supply circuit is
Despite being provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function for supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power is shut off, the capacitors and diodes of the discrete circuit are provided. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting region surrounded by the insertion mounting region, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting region of the insertion mounting region. A gaming machine that is mounted at a position that is not adjacent to a component.

  According to the technical idea 5 as described above, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on an insertion mounting area on the base plate. Electronic components having a shape to be standardized and electronic components having a shape to be capable of being mounted on the surface mounting region are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of a specific control unit, they have a close electrical role to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  In addition, the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is placed in the form of an insertion mounting area that has excellent fraud suppression performance and is provided as a relatively large area. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit aiming to exhibit the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and even if the presence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components. Thus, it becomes difficult to recall what electrical functions are implemented so as to make it difficult to suppress fraud by further increasing the difficulty of understanding these circuits. It can be expected.

[Technology 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in a manner in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting lead mounted on the surface of the surface mounting lead provided on the electronic component.
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
The special surface mount board is
The wiring part is formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead part of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead part, and with respect to the insertion mounting board. The special insertion / mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion / mounting board and disposed so that their mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In general, a component mounted on a surface mounting board often has a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6 described above, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, an electronic component is mounted as an insertion mounting board because a thin surface having only a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mount board can be disposed even in a situation where only a small possible area (surface area) remains.

[Technology 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board that is mounted in a manner in which the insertion mounting lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted;
A surface mounting lead mounted on the surface of the base plate, and the surface mounting lead provided on the electronic component has a surface mounting plate,
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mount plate. And
The specific surface mount component is:
Despite being a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component is integrated with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine having an appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within an installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, when a specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes easy for third parties to notice and, in turn, can promote fraud.

  In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mount component is integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. This makes it difficult for third parties to notice this.

[Technology 8]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and that can execute a game progress process by using those electronic components;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and capable of executing a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using the electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The base plate of the first controller is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is mounted in the form of being inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area where the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting region is formed,
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is left exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component is mounted, and faces in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged.

  In such a technical idea 8, a first substrate on which a surface mounting region in which no mounting electronic components are mounted and which is in an empty state is prepared is prepared, and the first substrate is provided in the surface mounting region. The pattern wiring as described above is arranged in a state where it is exposed to the rear side of the gaming machine. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, “There is no mounting electronic component on the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance, and it is highly illegal as a gaming machine. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that “suppression performance is provided”, and it is expected to suppress the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  On the other hand, the second board is arranged in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine so that the presence of the second board is not easily noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Of the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are not mounted, and only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. That is, in this case, in addition to the presence of the first substrate, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the second substrate itself, and even if it is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are not subject to fraud are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized components. Become.

[Technology 9]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate having a surface mounting region mounted thereon and a special insertion mounting lead portion that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting region of the first substrate. And
The first substrate includes
An insertion mounting area where insertion mounting lead portions provided in the insertion mounting component can be mounted and a surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mounting component are placed on the surface. Both the surface mount area that can be mounted are formed, but no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is not formed. It has been left in the dew,
In the second substrate,
Only the surface mounting region is formed of the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region, and only the discrete component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is to be mounted. As the one electronic component molded into the first board, the special insertion / mounting lead portion is inserted into the insertion / mounting area of the first board, so that various insertion / mounting parts to be mounted on the first board can be obtained. A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between.

  In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance, a surface mounting area in which no mounting electronic components are mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed ( A first substrate), and a surface mounting region (second substrate) in which only the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is surface-mounted and molded together with the substrate. It has. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, the surface mounting area on which the mounting electronic components are mounted is difficult to see, and any mounting Since only the surface mounting area on which no electronic components are mounted is made visible, the surface mounting area is said to be “no mounting electronic components are mounted on the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance. As a gaming machine, it has a role as an advertising tower appealing that it has a high fraud suppression performance as a gaming machine, and as a result, it is expected to suppress the mounting of illegal parts.

  In addition, the first substrate on which the surface mounting region serving as the advertising tower is formed has an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance in addition to the surface mounting region. Thus, the surface mounting region (second substrate) that is molded together with the substrate is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area (first mounting) that is inferior in fraud suppression performance in the insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud suppression performance in the board (first board) that impresses that “the surface mounting component is not mounted”. (2 substrates) is inserted into the mold in such a way that it is difficult to see, so that it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting illegal components. Become.

[Technology 10]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region is formed in which a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is inserted into the substrate, and a lead portion provided in the mounting electronic component is the surface of the substrate A second substrate on which a surface mounting area is mounted to be mounted on the surface;
In the first substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other side surface, and the other side surface is behind the gaming machine. Whereas it is arranged in the direction facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other side surface, and only the discrete component is mounted. In the molded state, the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first substrate in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine.

  In the technical idea 10 as described above, with respect to the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed, the mounting electronic component is not mounted on the one side surface, and the discrete component is integrated on the other side surface. Since both the circuit component and the circuit component are mounted, the other side surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the gaming machine, so that an integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent is mounted. As a board (first board), it is possible to suitably ensure the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts and the ease of monitoring.

  In addition, for the second board on which the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, mounting electronic components are not mounted on one side, and integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are mounted on the other side. Since only discrete components that are not likely to be fraudulent are mounted, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while favorably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

  In addition, in the second board, both the one side surface and the other side surface are the gaming machine in a state where a surface mounting region on which the discrete component is mounted is molded with a molding member together with the board. It is arranged so that it faces in a direction different from the rear side. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area in which mounting of illegal parts is substantially impossible, and an object that requires monitoring for mounting of illegal parts (game machine) It can be removed from the object to be confirmed from the rear side.

  In addition, regarding the surface mounting area (second board) thus excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of the unauthorized parts, the thin portion of the board faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side surface are the relevant). Since it is mounted on the first board so that it faces in a different direction from the rear side of the gaming machine), the molded state without creating a large space with the first board. It becomes possible to mount the second substrate.

[Technology 11]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate on which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed;
A second substrate on which a surface mounting region is formed in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and a specific type of mounting electronic component is surface-mounted among the discrete components; and A third substrate on which a surface mounting region is formed in which the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and the mounting electronic component of a type different from the specific type is mounted on the surface of the discrete component. Have
The second substrate and the third substrate are:
By being provided as separate electronic components molded together with discrete components that are surface-mounted on the respective substrates, and being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, respectively. It is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
Each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is mounted on the surface of each member. A gaming machine, characterized in that each surface with an identification display is arranged so as to face a specific direction.

  According to the technical idea 11 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Thus, only the discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulently mounted on the second and third substrates on which the surface mounting regions inferior in fraud suppression performance are formed are respectively mounted in different types for each substrate.

  Therefore, for mounting electronic parts mounted on the insertion mounting area side with excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the conventional fraud suppression function is maintained but also mounting on the surface mounting area side with inferior fraud suppression performance As for electronic components, confirmation is made as to whether the mounting electronic components having the type corresponding to each of the second and third substrates are mounted (electronic components of a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate) It will be easy to detect even if fraud is made, and it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit. become.

  In addition, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components that are surface-mounted on those substrates, respectively. In addition, by being inserted and mounted in each of the insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, it is possible to electrically connect to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. Yes. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component originally provided as a surface mounting component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first board as if they were insertion mounting components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Furthermore, each component that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display corresponding to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. Each of the surfaces with side identification indications is arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the “type of component side identification display” and the “shape that should appear on the mold member” attached to the second board and the third board that are respectively inserted and mounted on the first board. Since it becomes possible to cope with it, it is possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technology 12]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
Provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and inserted and mounted in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. By doing so, it is possible to be electrically connected to various insertion mounted components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate includes
When the second substrate is inserted and mounted on the substrate as one electronic component, the mounting component is mounted with a mounting height lower than that of the electronic component, and is mounted with a mounting height higher than the electronic component. An amusement machine characterized in that an insertion mounting component is provided.

  According to the technical idea 12 described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is difficult to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the inserted mounting region. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted does not create a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate as if it is an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Still further, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the substrate, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height are respectively disposed, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in the anti-fraud performance is formed is the illegal one formed on the first substrate. It becomes difficult to recognize that it is mounted in an insertion mounting area with excellent suppression performance.

[Technology 13]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate is configured by being molded by a first mold member having a specific color different from many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
Insertion mounting region provided as one electronic component molded with a second mold member of the same or similar color to the specific color together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and formed on the first substrate The gaming machine can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted and mounted on the first board.

  According to the technical idea 13 as described above, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is less likely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  In addition, for discrete components that are surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from many of the discrete components that are inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate And configured as one electronic component that is further molded by a second mold member having the same or similar color to the specific color together with the second substrate to be mounted. I have to.

  Therefore, even if the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components and inserted and mounted on the first substrate, The administrator on the side can easily find where the second board is, and can easily check whether the second board is fraudulent. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help grasp information on which surface mounting region (second substrate) inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided.

  In this regard, in the above configuration, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type as the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting region with the second mold member together with the second substrate. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the discrete component mounted on the surface as well as improving the performance. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounting area, the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside. Even so, it can be difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or whether the first mold member inside is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component is kept secret and the difficulty in understanding the circuit is suitably maintained.

[Technology 14]
A first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and a game progress process can be executed by using those electronic components;
A second control unit that has a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and that can execute a progress process of an effect according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic components;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of mounting electronic components,
Discrete parts in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package and integrated circuit parts in which a plurality of types of single function elements are integrated are included.
The substrate of the first controller is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; and the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component; A second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. It can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting parts mounted on
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate side identification display corresponding to a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate, and the one electronic component is not mounted on the mounting surface of the first substrate. A specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized by a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification displays attached in the insertion mounting area of the gaming machine, including the board-side identification display.

  According to the technical concept 14, both the integrated circuit component that is likely to be fraudulent and the discrete component that is unlikely to be fraudulent are mounted on the first substrate on which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. On the second board on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulent are mounted. It is expected to reduce the size of the circuit.

  In addition, the second substrate on which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete component to be surface mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. Insertion mounting is performed on the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mounting component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion mounting component. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  Still further, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate side identification display corresponding to the discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate, and is not provided on the mounting surface of the first substrate. Is provided with a specific board side identification display corresponding to the position where the second board as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted. The specific board side identification display is the same kind of electronic component for mounting. Including the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the above-mentioned, a unique mode different from any of the board-side identification display attached in the first control unit or the second control unit is adopted. That is, in this case, even if a specific board-side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the mode is different from the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same kind of mounting electronic component. Because of the unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component that is surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, in order to grasp the type of discrete parts that are surface-mounted to the surface-mounted area, even if an act such as trying to confirm the inside of the mold member is scraped to a malicious person, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technology 15]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and that can use each of the electronic circuits to execute control power generation processing and game progression processing;
A second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and capable of executing a progress process of performance according to a result of the progress process of the game by using these electronic circuits;
When a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress process of the game, a gaming machine that can give a privilege to the player,
In the plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit,
Consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, includes specific discrete circuits intended to demonstrate specific electrical functions,
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting region and a surface mounting region formed on different substrates,
In the specific board on which the surface mounting area is formed in the base plate, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted and the specific type Various electronic components that are mounted on the different substrates by being mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate, provided as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components. It can be electrically connected to the inserted mounting parts.
Of the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit, other mounting electronic components different from the specific type are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

  In such a technical idea 15, only a discrete component (a mounting electronic component constituting a specific discrete circuit) that is difficult to be fraudulently mounted is mounted on a specific substrate on which a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. For this reason, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

  In addition, in the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is formed, only the specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted, and the specific type Various electronic components that are mounted on the different substrates by being mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together with the mounting electronic components. It is possible to be electrically connected to the insertion mounting component.

  In other words, in this case, the specific board on which the surface-mounted component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the above. In addition, on the above-mentioned specific board, since only a specific type of mounting electronic components among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted, check whether the surface mounting area is fraudulent. Can be made easier. In addition, since the specific board is molded together with a specific type of mounting electronic component, it is inserted and mounted on another board on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit for a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a substrate and an insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate, and to be used as a countermeasure against fraud Is expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage dishes. When the game ball as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H is designated. In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and a ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), a payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low probability It is composed of a low-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and is not a time-short state. Low probability non-short state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the short time state is, for example, a normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared with the non-short-time state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display compared to the non-time-short state, the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is made longer than that of the non-time-short state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown (in other words, a non-short-time state) In addition, the number of times of determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened. The state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the mouth 2004).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is an instruction to start the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the first to sixteenth rounds of opening the big winning opening 1 (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). The winning prize opening 2005 is closed during the round or the closing start is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls of 0 to 10 is counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is used when a small hit middle / large prize opening winning effect (a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 at the 1st to 16th rounds is released (the start opening unit 2100 The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). The prize winning 1 count display command is used when the prize winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the prize winning opening 1 is changed (when the prize winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball enters the prize winning opening 2005. Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2005 of the start port unit 2100 is opened at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes a command at the time of power-on and a name of the main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. When the power is turned on, the power-on status command is used when the power supply is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), The information indicating which state (probability and short-time state) to recover from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, what kind of game is copyrighted, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state. As described above, the probability and the short time state include a low probability short time state that indicates a low probability state and a short time state, and a high probability short time state that indicates a high probability state and a short time state. A low-probability non-time-short state that indicates a low-probability state and not a time-short state, and a high-probability non-time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and not a time-short state (usually As the gaming state, a low probability non-short-time state is set).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hitting opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is open during open power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2107). State or when expanding), and the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start-up solenoid 2107). The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display section includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating) (a game ball is entered into the big winning port 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 4005 detects the winning abnormality notification, the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical signal on a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, and a count sensor. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005, etc. occurs. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002. , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and informs the number of balls that have not been used yet for the variation display of the special symbol (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command instructs the start of the pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol indicator 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before using the second special symbol display 1405 to display the variation of the special symbol, pre-read and instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol change display in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display unit 1403 to display the variation of the special symbols) The special symbol 2 storage command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of the special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the variable display, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, the special number display unit 1405 displays a special number from the number of reserves. Design The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is transmitted). In the state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display in the symbol display 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, the normal symbol indicator is displayed from the reserved number. 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and when the number of reserved symbols decreases), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is received when the number of special symbol 1 actuated reserved balls increases (game ball at the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number increases (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number). But Sent when it increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given when the start opening is won (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not make a sound notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. The frame state 1, error release navigation, Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is provided with a sphere ball, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. Display pattern random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot A big hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator 1 when generating a small hit gaming state 03 and a small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol indicator 1405, and an initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random symbol for the small hit symbol A random number for determination is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number for determination per symbol for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are obtained. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the normal value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and always updates the random number for determination per symbol based on the extracted ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the start port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  The main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value. The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this electric power clear process, first, the output of the power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear process, first, output of a power outage clear signal is started to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, thereby starting output of the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting for the voltage to become larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilize after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 being operated to the main control MPU 1310a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until. In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has been normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, game information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 built in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware And setting the acquisition of the random number by latching, and setting the activation of the hard random number circuit 1310an with the main control in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77) input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into power-on as shown in FIG. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program reads the start port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Thereafter, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged into the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power supply from the Pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island facility is The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power is shut off until about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Just before the system that performs the drawing control of the device 460 starts (boots) starts to wait (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) and immediately before reaching the waiting time. Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control side timer interruption process described below is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control-side power-on process may not be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication of the clearing of the RAM by the hall clerk. ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input (ie, step If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even when the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information due to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system constituted by the process of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of power-off on the main side, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the checksum calculation result in step S28 And the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in step S64) match, so the instantaneous stop stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. The game information just before a power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the pachinko island facility is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the power supply VDD terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after that, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the determination again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and making it impossible to start the time measurement again. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT 1310af, so that an interrupt initial setting is performed after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to avoid updating the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM by setting the interrupt permission and preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing (to be described later). The system is adopted. In this way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the main control-side power supply and the part that is covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all The contents of the main control built-in RAM (the contents of the main control built-in RAM are divided into two parts, that is, the part covered by hardware so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information) is not changed at all. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start-port solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on in step S50 is not performed in step S50 will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. Starting to drive the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state in which it is opened; That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned based on the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted to inform the number of gaming balls that are detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. The main prize-winning port 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 between rounds) from the main control board 1310. When transmission is made to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2108 starts to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. That the state is to be released (that is, 5 of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and the short time state, and displays it on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

  Further, for example, a screen (for example, indicating that the movable piece is expanded) that indicates that the gaming state where the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is in an advantageous gaming state for the player. 8 is displayed when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to drive the start port solenoid 2107. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 displays the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power outage has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he plays.

  Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem that it was not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310 and the big prize opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, A screen (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game is played in the big prize opening is started.) The driving of the casoleole 2108 is started and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. “Please play the game to make the ball enter.” Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. Later, a game can be instructed to enter a game ball into the grand prize opening 2005. For example, in the above-described example, a game state in which a game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is entered. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a game state advantageous to the user and then power is restored, the start-up solenoid 2107 serves as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs that the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction after driving is started (for example, “The movable piece has been expanded. After the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine. The game can be instructed to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 at. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of Steps S58 to S68 which are backup processes and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. Thus, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are generated. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Will be stored in For these commands, a power-on state command is transmitted first, followed by a power-on main control return destination command in a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  Incidentally, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, (Including the time of recovery to recover)) In any of the above states (probability and short-time state) among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state Information indicating whether to do so, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specifications (so-called ST machine, etc.)) in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur). As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. 69, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 notifying that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has successfully received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. And stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004 And the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are each read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning award opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls In order to notify that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 951 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display in FIG. 90). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main random number built-in circuit random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (Random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Whether or not the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of the counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) that is set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is set so that the indicator 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, 2 to turn on the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the wind display lamp 1407a is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be lit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the presence / absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display unit 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display unit 1402 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and output information described above. Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The display information is determined and the transmission information described above as the transmission information is created by creating various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacking solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning prize opening 2005, or a driving signal is output to a starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes a movable piece. In addition to output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as short and medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. And it outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, and shown in FIG. Various commands classified into commands and jackpot relations (for example, when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, the big prize is based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69). 90 winning command 1 count display command corresponding to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands related to ordinary drawing synchronization effects, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effects, FIG. The various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, etc.) and status display that are classified into the notification display shown in Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as + 5V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41 aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310 aea as main serial data. When power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Furthermore, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Constituting a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring a main control return destination command at power-on, status, The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM reads out the game information from the game backup information in accordance with the game information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Also, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. 89. When the power-on main control return destination command in FIG. Can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 performs main setting in the work area setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery), the power-on status command and the main power-on time are shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 to indicate the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, thereby providing two commands: a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and thumb value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms) and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the effect backup information that is backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db is also obtained for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and comparison of effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511 dc. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written and a cold start is made. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 and cleared to zero. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it doesn't take.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 5, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted by using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by this every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 410 is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various types of information acquired are set, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is determined as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the above.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but although a so-called frame drop occurs, the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a sound data output process described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects tailored to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, from the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various kinds of information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The production control program is based on information transmitted from the production display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of a start opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held A normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol storage command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, A winning prize 1 count display command output every time a game ball is received (a winning prize count command), or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating a full state shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that a command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 89 are classified into various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands classified as related to jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a prefetch effect control process (step S1027). The prefetch effect control process executes a process related to the prefetch effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or a special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading effect command”) is received, the pre-reading effect is executed. Set up. Details of the prefetch effect control process will be described later.

  The pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when a game ball wins the start opening 2101 and 2102. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process in step S1022. In the prefetch effect control process, when the prefetch effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether to execute the prefetch effect based on the content of the prefetch effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect is actually executed in the peripheral control board 4140.

  And when performing a prefetching effect, the mode of the hold display of start memory is changed as this prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect). In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the normal prefetching effect is executed, the continuous prefetching effect is executed to change the mode of the hold display every time the start memory for executing the variable display is executed in advance. To do. In the prefetch effect control process, a process for executing the normal prefetch effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous prefetch effect. The predetermined condition is, for example, a case where the number of start memories that have not been digested is a certain number or more, and a case where the expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be read ahead is a big hit is high. May be.

  Note that the content of the pre-reading effect not only changes the display mode of the start memory, but also the display effect on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 such as the character display and background change, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output from the speaker. An effect such as the operation of the movable body may be used.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board, and various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby producing a game board side effect display device. 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. Audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data by the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0-6. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in the program from the mute level to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb up to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as a request factor of the A controller 1511ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in backup second area 1511 dc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is designated, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously written by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted as shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 95 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is arranged in time series. 72. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c to be externally attached. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1 byte data and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the serial I / O port for motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c is externally configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus received is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , Movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In the effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby detecting history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. The control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output in order to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display driving board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information obtaining storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the 1ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. Further, the production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the top address of) in the backup second area 1511 cc, Bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the received command storage area 1511cac in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral ring reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb Then, the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. From the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Are copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. If the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are provided. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creating process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). The data) No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST includes the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a illustrated in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit) in the present embodiment, and is the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 The door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the display and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected, that is, there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. (Counting the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. The communication check counter CC-CNT is restored to the value immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a value of 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This flag indicates whether or not a failure has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, with the value 0 being set, but is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery process, it is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Output a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 illustrated in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 in the peripheral control unit steady process as illustrated in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the schedule data for screen generation, and displays a startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is finished as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and the updating of all the pointers is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step) S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. To do (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is used to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. Process to draw on. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” is displayed. Further, in the communication error display process, a period during which the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a waiting state. During the period of time, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation check request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is set to LOCKN. As a response signal for the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and this LOCKN signal is not input, a problem occurs in the door frame side effect display device 460 because there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, a process in which a notification sound (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper platen side liquid crystal display device”) repeatedly flows from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 is performed. At this time, you may make it perform the process which lightes all the various LED mounted on the various decoration board | substrates with which the LED for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are equipped.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. Peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The decorative symbol change display is executed by a part steady process or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 94 or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls at the start opening 2004 is “big hit”, the number of times of opening / closing the winning prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round. A total of 15 rounds, up to 15 rounds. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second start port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative graphic is in the center. On the right side, the change display of the right decorative design is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player. At this time, the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed variably, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized. From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set in cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Because it is updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 102 in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT of the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem with the connection) between the receiver and the receiver is not performed, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC ICDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process in step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the presentation is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Warning in step S1024 in the peripheral processing unit steady process of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When it is determined that there is no failure in the connection with the receiver, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter If the number of times that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is determined to be in a state where there is a failure is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. When the connection between the transmitter and receiver is faulty. If the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the communication abnormality flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the process, and the communication error display described above is performed. Perform processing and end the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to have not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process must be performed, so that the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, This means that the connection between the transmitter and receiver is restored, while the transmitter is When the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the receiver and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk. LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. Since the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the interval period until the game is started, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect Trouble occurs between the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. By performing the pattern output process without fail, the process of recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the two has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the fault between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely occurred) For example, by performing the communication error display process, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative design and the central decorative design are activated. And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in connection recovery processing is performed The process for recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate LCD device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side transmitter transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The door frame side effect display device 460 invalidates the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the fact that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Display an image based on.

  As described above, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. In the interval period until the change display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is informed that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. A receiver ICSD for door frame side presentation that informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the combination result in which the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state to which the game is given occurs, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the rendering is not interrupted and the process of recovering the drawing correctly is not performed, but the display area of the game board side rendering display device 1600 is left. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a waiting state. Thus, during the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, it is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer, and the game board side effect display device 1600 demonstrates In a period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, differential Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the merging circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. 1600 and a notification sound to that effect (for example, “top plate side Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process in step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The receiver ICSDIC0 is a door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the drawing data received becomes abnormal data. For this purpose, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication malfunction between the image communications at an early stage, and can act on the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the malfunction. It is like that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by discovering and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception is impossible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling you The message “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk.” Is generated, and the generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can tell the hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the hall clerk who passed by the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the hall clerk etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by early finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state of being not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications From the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during the period when the game starts and stops and the game is not progressing, it is possible to move toward a direction in which the communication trouble is eliminated.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. This is a case where there is a failure in the connection between the production receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection confirmation When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 and stops and displays it. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 or a second start which is a start area in which a game ball launched by the ball striking device 650 is directed toward the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and if the payout control unit is operated within the period during which the power-on process is performed, the payout control built-in RAM is stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. Period (or power supply) in which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the on-time process 82 is used as an error canceling signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 when it is operated after a period of time during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of entry. The game control microprocessor uses the RWMCLR signal of FIG. And an error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 92 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. The determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed 82 (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after power-on) has passed, the RWMCLR signal in FIG. 82 is used as an error cancel signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the payout device 830 Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor, the RAM clear function can be operated by one operation switch 954. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, ie, an error canceling function. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input part of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a gaming machine, try to obtain an unfair advantage by manipulating the flow-down state of a game ball as desired by bringing a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) closer to the game ball that is driven into the game area. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by sound. Yes.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive effect element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. Do not (0V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thereby, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thereby, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage, in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b includes a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 through the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. Thereby, when the previous stage transistor ITR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 is connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied. In addition, the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and is configured by a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are provided on the panel relay board 4161.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on similarly to the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, if the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work etc., the pin contact The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust or the like easily enters from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing right-handed, when sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down to the connector member However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when the contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. Note that the size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the connector contact is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which no magnetism is detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b 1310 has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  The magnetic detection sensors 4024 are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, near the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment is different from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side is applied and lower than the first voltage, the detection circuit unit 4164 is affected by the predetermined voltage. The voltage raising unit 4166 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example constituted by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR built in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection part. It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conductive state. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511 and a process of outputting a signal indicating that from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 105, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR increases.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  As in the prior art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. Notification that an illegal gaming act using the game machine has been performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has been disconnected is provided by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, voice, etc. To do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 having one end connected to the voltage output unit 4163, one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end grounded. The second resistor IR3 is included. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is configured by the resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage pulled to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistance. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current with a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost falls to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. For this reason, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

  In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that constitute a Darlington circuit that is set to an operating voltage that is higher than the second voltage and higher than a predetermined voltage that is lower than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 having the other end grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, the third embodiment is an example in which the voltage raising unit 4166 includes a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the former stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 while + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 applied to the other end.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Accordingly, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. In addition, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned on.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lifts up. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. Do not flow. Therefore, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is not turned on. Also, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising portion 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit portion 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, since the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance is False detection can be prevented.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each provided voltage output unit 4163 is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial product, TOSHIBA Corporation). It can be used by connecting to the product.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, but a connector member. As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application example to which sensor signal input unit 4162 of panel relay board 4161 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above has been described as preventing the erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable part of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor has a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, arranged in the vicinity of a start opening, a winning opening, a big winning opening, an out opening, etc.). . For this reason, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and a detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on the panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor is varied depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected. About this point, it will take various forms by the difference in the model of a game machine.

  By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes as the resistance value changes due to the aging of the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring pattern used, and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes due to a specification change during development, for example, when the design of the type of the detection sensor, the arrangement location, or the length of the wiring (harness) is changed. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, depending on the location where the detection sensor is arranged, the length of the harness being extended, or the location where the harness is routed changes, there may be locations where noise is easily picked up, and the influence of noise also changes.

  If a current flows through a resistance value that changes due to such reasons, the current flowing through the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor is erroneously detected. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the detection sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is used for electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) used over time, wiring patterns, and wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value varies depending on the length, erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the example of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  Hereinafter, a case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 110A is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise is present.

  As shown in FIG. 110A, in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at a low level (0.4 V) when the magnetism is not detected, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. Can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V), a level higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is applied, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform has a voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. ), The transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  Further, not only noise but, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when overshoot occurs, in the state where magnetism is detected, no false detection occurs, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. As a result, the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 105 to 2V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. Has been. When there is no noise, the detection operation is at a low level (0.4 V) in a state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and is lower than the raised voltage 2 V. Therefore, the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12 V) and is higher than the raised voltage 2 V, so that the voltage raising portion 4166 is turned on and the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. 8V), the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism. However, since it is lower than the raised voltage 2V, the voltage raising part 4166 maintains the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage increase due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change will be described as an example. FIG. 111A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform that is input when it is normal, and the right side is a signal waveform that is input when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage as shown by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0. Even if it exceeds the voltage (0.8V) to be operated, it is lower than the raised voltage 2V, so that the voltage raising part 4166 maintains the OFF state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Thus, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be caused by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the place where the harness is routed. Even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up, the sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. For this reason, the circuit parts (the sensor signal input part 4162 and the detection circuit part 4164) arranged on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162 ′ of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 described in the first to third embodiments described above includes the built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a signal whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when magnetism is not detected and turned on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

  FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and is turned on when magnetism above a predetermined value is detected.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising portion 4166, the one described in the first to third embodiments can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising part 4166 is an example constituted by a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection part.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is composed of a transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and + 12V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied to one end. Yes. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, a sensor signal winning unit 4162 ′ is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166, and a detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is configured by the transistor ITR0.

[Detection when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal where the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, a magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality due to resistance change]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state where it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 via the anode terminal of the transistor ITR0 is not affected, and the transistor ITR0 is still turned on. In other words, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 ′.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. The predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the OFF state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. For this reason, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 are arranged on the panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration according to the first aspect of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which three of the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

  In FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, the main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the performed circuit structure. Thus, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes due to aging and wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. In FIG. 113, the detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. When this happens, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on / off the output of the detection signal corresponding to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 in FIG. 113, the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used. Therefore, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the previous stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than (a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111 as an example) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising part 4166 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising portions 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 disposed at the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163. Further, the plurality of voltage raising portions 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit portion 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or magnetic sensors MGS are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is. Therefore, it is possible to detect the detection signal without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider a resistance value that varies as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of gaming machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to the reduction of man-hours related to design changes and manufacturing during development.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS according to another embodiment described in FIG. 112 are provided, and a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. In FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is used. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ described in another embodiment is used, there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V, and + 12V is connected to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

  In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. It is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, control related to game progress and effects will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) contributing to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In the first and second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning is made, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed. Done.

  If the process flag is 0 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start process, after the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested and executed on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 1 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored jackpot determination result or the current gaming state ( The processing flag is updated to “2” after determining and setting a stop symbol (such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) after a special symbol variable display is started and stopped.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 2 when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the time-out. Stop. After that, when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the big hit determination result stored in the fluctuation start process is not a big hit (losing) The processing selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is 3 when the first and second start opening winning processes are finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated, and the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of winning jackpot is set. Based on this, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, processing to stop the operation of the condition device is performed, or when the winning big hit type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a short time state or a probable change state. As shown, after the game state flag is updated, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process is started again.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as variation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from when the symbol variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends, and when the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing in the effect display device 1600 The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, a deviation reach variation variation pattern, and a variation variation variation pattern. The big hit fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after reaching the reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is expanded so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in a fixed stop state. Production is performed. The loss reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach determination is performed based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 performs the decoration through the reach effect. An effect is developed in which the change display of the symbols is finally lost and the symbols are displayed in a fixed stop state. The loss fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number is not determined to reach, and the effect display device 1600 does not reach the reach effect. Then, the effect is developed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally deviated and the symbol is confirmed and stopped. The variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the game information such as the result of the big hit determination is obtained from the main control board 1310 and is referred to so that such a variation pattern of the decorative design can appear. In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the decorative pattern variation pattern to appear, and the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed. Control is performed to change the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and to operate a movable member such as the after-behind movable effect unit 3100.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information for the operation button 410 and player operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also perform control related to effects according to the information.

  Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operation information acquisition principle in the vicinity of the opening window. In addition to omitting unrelated members in explaining the operation information acquisition principle, These are shown schematically. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow AA in FIG.

  In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 in which the game area 5a in which the game ball flows and which is stored in the main body frame 4 is formed, and the game area 5a are visible. And a door frame 3 that has an open window and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective upright wall portion 33 erected along the outer periphery of the opening window so that light can be reflected at least on the inner surface thereof. It has been. The opening window is a portion on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192 in the through-hole 111.

  Here, the reflection standing wall 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflection standing wall 33 is formed by a lower reflection standing wall 338 formed by the lower dish unit base 323, a left reflection standing wall 538 formed by the left unit base 531, and a right unit base 551. The right reflective upright wall portion 568 is provided, and these members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer peripheral edge of the open window (a mode in which no reflective upright wall portion is installed above the open window). It is configured by In the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568, the inner side surfaces thereof are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). The light reflecting surface is provided.

  According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflection standing wall portion 338, the left reflection standing wall portion 538, and the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is provided among the reflection standing wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U shape. The portion (the upper side of the opening window) is “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and as a result, a reflecting vertical wall portion It functions as a first part that makes it possible to “reflect at 33”, and “the light reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window”. It will also serve as a second part that makes it possible to “be detected”.

  Furthermore, in the reflection standing wall 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection is performed across the inner side surfaces of three separate members (the lower reflection standing wall 338, the left reflection standing wall 538, and the right reflection standing wall 568). A structure to which a member 36 (for example, a reflection seal) is attached is adopted, and thereby the reflection performance as the reflection standing wall portion 33 is suitably ensured including the joints of three separate members.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side outside the outer periphery of the opening window in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). The inner space 3435a includes a left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and a left outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35a. Note that the left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflection standing wall 338, the left reflection standing wall 538, and the right reflection standing wall 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side, allows light to travel toward the opening window side, and receives light from the opening window side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, but in order to suppress fraud from the back of the speaker 573, it is between the opening window. A transmissive member 3436a designed so as to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

  Further, the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35a, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  The left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a is unitized with the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33 to form the internal space 3435a. Incorporated. In this respect, in the internal space 3435a, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, so that the disturbance from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34a can be suppressed while the disturbance is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral outside light detector 35a.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side outside the outer periphery of the opening window in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435b, a right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b and a right outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having a very low light transmittance (or 0).

  Here, like the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b includes the one specific virtual plane P at a position where it intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall 338, the left reflective vertical wall 538, and the right reflective vertical wall 568, respectively. And is opened as a space where only the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window, and light from the opening window can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such an internal space 3435b is provided behind the right upper speaker 573, but in order to suppress fraud from the back of the speaker 573, it is between the opening window. A transmissive member 3436b designed to have a very high transmittance and a very low influence on the light traveling direction is arranged.

  In addition, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b, and emits light toward a wide range at least on the side where the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. Is provided so that it can proceed.

  The right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b is unitized with the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b, and can detect light from the side on which the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is provided to be.

  According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and then is reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33, and is reflected from the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to become the internal space 3435b. Incorporated. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, so that the disturbance from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting unit 34b can be suppressed while disturbance is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outside right outside light detecting portion 35b.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the region (3) surrounded by the lower reflective upright wall portion 338, the left reflective upright wall portion 538, and the right reflective upright wall portion 568 from the three directions by their height widths ( 120 is a special operation receiving portion 3333 that can detect an operation by the player, and the player's operation mode for the special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Thus, the production control according to the determination can be executed.

  For example, when the player does not perform an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, the light irradiated in a wide angle range from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is not blocked by any physical object, and is reflected from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33. The reflected light from various angles at (a variety of angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) travels toward the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a. That is, in the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a, a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) that reflects light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  At this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b in a wide angle range is also not blocked by any physical object, and various angles (at least one specific virtual plane P on the specific virtual plane P) without being blocked by any physical object. Angle) to be reflected toward the right outer peripheral outside light detector 35b. That is, the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b also uses a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P) to reflect light from various angles using an optical lens or the like. The special operation receiving unit 3333 outputs information indicating that no physical object is present to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the separate detection signal.

  On the other hand, when the player performs an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a in a wide angle range is a player's finger ( Only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) becomes reflected light on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral outside light detection unit 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer periphery light emitting unit 35a is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the size of the physics in which direction as viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  At this time, a part of light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the other light becomes reflected light at the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral outside light detection portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b is based on information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), and the right outer periphery outside light emitting unit 34b. By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the light source, the physical quantity of which direction in which direction when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and analyzed, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 performs physical analysis. In addition to information on whether or not an object exists (whether an operation has been performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333), when a physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333, its coordinate position (x, y) and size It becomes possible to acquire information related to the situation. As will be described later, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, such information is periodically acquired. This allows the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object. An operation gesture such as a change can be determined, and an effect control corresponding to the determination is executed.

  Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but are performed by an external unit that acquires information from the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis result from the external means, or the external control means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis results.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b is in an extinguished state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a is in the off state and the right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected. If the light is detected on the side of the external light detection unit 35b and analyzed based on such information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other. Accordingly, it is expected to obtain detection information with higher accuracy.

  Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer periphery light emitting portion 34b are respectively blinked, and the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34b is in the off state. , A period in which the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a is in the off state and a right outer periphery light emitting unit 34b is in a light emitting state, and a left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a is in an extinguished state and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b is also in the off state. One cycle in which the periods in the extinguishing state occur sequentially may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected. If the detection is performed on the side of the external light detection unit 35b, the offset amount when the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on these information, The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other, and the detected offset can be eliminated before determination can be made. It is expected to obtain high detection information.

  Further, visible light may be used as light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that the light is being produced in various places, it is possible to use invisible light rays such as infrared rays, the disturbance from the effect light and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress adverse effects on

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. A first portion that makes it possible to “reflect the reflection standing wall portion 33”, and “light reflected by the reflection standing wall portion 33 travels on the one specific virtual plane P and outside the outer periphery of the opening window”. The second portion that makes it possible to “be detected” is provided as the same portion of the reflection standing wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of areas where the light is allowed to travel between the outer periphery and the outer periphery of the opening window are provided with respect to the reflection standing wall 33, and the outer periphery light emitting section and the outer periphery light detection section are separately provided for these areas And may be arranged respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with the upper part opened, but the inner space 3435a and the inner space 3435b of the upper part of the opening window are formed. You may make it form the reflection standing wall part 33 also in the periphery of between. However, it is desirable to provide a direction in which the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are opened downward in order to suppress disturbance due to direct light from illumination or the like. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left outer periphery light emitting unit 34a and the left outer periphery outer light detection unit 35a, the right outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34b, and the right outer periphery outer light detection unit 35b are used to specially Although the operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure that can detect an operation in the special operation receiving unit 3333 may be used. For example, the reflected light from the left outer periphery outer light emitting unit 34a and the reflected light from the right outer periphery outer light detecting unit 35b are reflected on one outer periphery. The detection may be performed by the light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer-periphery light emitting unit 34 (the left outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34a and the right outer-periphery light-emitting unit 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window As the reflected light from the reflection standing wall 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light at least on the inner surface thereof, the outer-peripheral light detector 35 (outer left-hand outer periphery) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window By detecting the external light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window functions as the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the special operation receiving unit 3333 produces an effect according to the operation mode of the player. It can be executed.

  Further, the outer periphery outside light detection unit 35 is not disposed in a dew state, but is disposed in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. It has also been described above that when the light is detected by the unit 35, the effect light that can be a disturbance can be suitably excluded.

  However, even if it is such a structure, the light from the outer periphery light emission part 34 was reflected by the reflection standing wall part 33 from the part opened toward the opening window side of the internal space 3435. Since the effect light can be taken in addition to the light, there is a concern that such effect light may become a disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer-periphery light detection unit 35.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame side light emitting unit L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is first on the one specific virtual plane P. It is made to arrange | position in the position which cannot irradiate the light which progresses. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the light transmittance is extremely low (or 0) with respect to the base portion BL1. Is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). As a result, light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is not easily taken into the internal space 3435.

  Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side And a second right decoration base portion 551b provided by a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decoration base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as effect light, whereas the second right decoration The base portion 551b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a. The right decorative base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably suppressing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decoration base portion 551b. However, only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  On the other hand, the frame side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having a very low light transmittance (or 0). It is in the position which can irradiate the light which advances on the specific virtual plane P. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is provided with the opening window. Therefore, it is difficult for the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  However, since the reflection member 36 has a low width, there is a concern that light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member and heads toward the opening window. Therefore, even in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decorative base portion 531a provided by a material that allows light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side A second left decorative base portion 531b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left decorative base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as effect light. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

  In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. The left decorative base portion 531a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side thereof, thereby suitably suppressing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from traveling to the opening window. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b. These members do not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, the effect light is hardly taken into the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 is not provided with the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a. Rather than being attached to the outer surface (surface that can be contacted from the outside), if attached to the inner surface (surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, from the outside It is expected to avoid the deterioration of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting part 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting part 34a, the right outer peripheral light emitting part 34b) passes through the first left decorative base part 531a and the first right decorative base part 551a and then the above. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531 a and the first right decorative base portion 551 a again, and is taken into the internal space 3435.

  When the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided in the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base portion 551b is provided in the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted, and the second The left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b themselves may function as a reflection member using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the effect light from the frame side light emitting portions L1 and L2 is disturbed only by including the reflecting member (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). While being suitably suppressed, the detection accuracy by the outside ambient light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflecting member (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). Become.

  The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located near the aperture window by using the operation information acquisition principle near the aperture window. As a result, a more dynamic and highly flexible operability using the entire area of the opening window (approximately the entire area visible in the front view of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving portion 3333. It is possible to realize a performance suitable for this.

  Hereinafter, operability and performance that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and the rendering that can be realized by using the special operation receiving portion 3333, and are related in explaining the operability and the rendering. In addition to omitting members that are not present, these are also schematically shown for related members.

  FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed in front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 in front. Is schematically shown. In addition, the arrow in the figure simply shows the movable range of various movable bodies among effect members A to E.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side across the glass plate 192 can contribute to the effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, a movable body A1, A2, B, C, a display portion D, and a board surface light emitting portion E provided so as to be able to emit light at a portion where the game ball can flow down or at other portions are disposed. . The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

  Note that these members are shown as examples for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily match the embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Basically, however, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are “movable effect unit 3100 after lower back, left movable effect unit 3200, upper left movable effect unit 3300, upper and lower movable effect unit 3400, The display portion D corresponds to the “effect display device 1600”, and the board surface light emitting portion E corresponds to “various decorations provided in the game board 5”. This corresponds to “various LEDs mounted on a substrate”. In addition, the board surface light emission part E does not necessarily need to be provided in the game board 5, For example, the member (light guide plate etc.) provided in the front side rather than the game board 5 may be sufficient.

  Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display unit D on which the effect display according to the result of the big hit determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the display unit D of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, it can be controlled so that an effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

  Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case where an effect change is caused on the display unit D by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (a), when the first performance condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect and displayed. The specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the part D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly) If a finger or the like is required in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it is not always necessary to touch it))), and when this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The acceptance of the effect on the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated, an effect change is caused in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination can be executed by the type of the effect change that has occurred.

  At this time, when producing an effect change based on an operation performed on somewhere in the first coordinate area Z1 in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect change is at least displayed on the display unit D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to view the first display area in front view with his / her finger or the like, an effect change occurs at least in the first display area. In the first display area until the first display area is visually recognized from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of shifting their fingers or from a front view. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the change in production. Alternatively, the player keeps his finger on the first coordinate area Z1 and advances the game without confirming the effect change in the first display area, or is positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to select a way of enjoying such as having a third person who has not confirmed the effect change in the first display area, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that if no operation by the player is detected after the specific operation instruction image S1 appears and until a predetermined period elapses (specific timing comes), the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. In addition, the reception of effects for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or an effect change that appears when an effect is received for the first coordinate area Z1 is generated. You may make it complete | finish the production reception with respect to the 1st coordinate area | region Z1.

[Second Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving portion Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed in front view, “second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D” and “third display of the display section D” In addition to setting (controlling) both the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area, the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D, and the third display area The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, in a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the special operation receiver 3333 in the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly, a finger or the like may be provided in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is not necessarily required)) is performed as a physical object. When detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the reception of the effects in the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display unit D A specific effect (effect according to the selected side (coordinate region side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and the expectation degree for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect is Thereby enabling executing the instigation that may be controlled.

  It should be noted that no operation by the player was detected until a predetermined period has elapsed (a specific timing has arrived) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appear. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is ended. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or a specific effect may not be generated. However, when a specific effect that appears when an effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, an operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is received prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable that a display (such as an effect) that is generated when the operation is performed, or a display (such as an effect) that is generated when an operation on the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest without knowing what production is being executed.

  Moreover, in the 1st operation control aspect with respect to the display part D, and the 2nd operation control aspect, not only the production | generation reception with respect to 1st coordinate area Z1, 2nd coordinate area Z2, and 3rd coordinate area Z3 is permitted, but the same. Within the period, the same effect reception may be permitted for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

  For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first production condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate region Z1 and the operation button 410 can be produced and the specific operation instruction image S1 is received. Even when a pressing operation (button switch detection) is performed on the operation button 410 instead of an operation (physical object detection) on the first coordinate area Z1 during the predetermined period in which is displayed The operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and an effect change is caused in the display portion D. Expectation for the result of the big hit determination is caused by the type of the effect change that has occurred. It is possible to execute a control whose degree can be suggested.

  Even when an operation (physical object detection) is performed on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the reception of the effects of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated. An effect change is generated in the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination is enabled by the type of the effect change that has occurred.

  Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second presentation condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all be received. To do. Then, in a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not an operation (physical object detection) for either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3. When a pressing operation on the button 410 (detection of a button switch) is performed, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. The display is switched to and from the third selected image indicating that the image is in the state of being. Then, when either of the second selection image and the third selection image is displayed, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the selection image A display (effect or the like) that can be grasped that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where the symbol appears is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. All the images (second selection image and third selection image) are not displayed, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is ended. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  It should be noted that, within the predetermined period, an operation for another operation means (operation for accepting any determination) can be accepted, and a selection image appears when there is an operation for the other operation means. In addition to generating a display (effect) that enables the user to grasp that the operation on the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side has been accepted, the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection) Both the image and the third selection image) may be hidden, and the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and another operation means may be terminated. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  In addition, as long as it is within the predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate can be used regardless of whether the second selection image or the third selection image appears. The region Z3 can accept an effect. When an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the second selected image and the third selected image appears, The display (effect etc.) on the side where the reception is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image) are not displayed. Thus, the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and further operation means is terminated. At this time, an operation is detected prior to hiding all of the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image). Switching display may be performed so that the selected image (second selection image, third selection image) on the other side appears. After that, a specific effect (selected side effect) is generated in the display unit D, and the control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, not only is it allowed to receive an effect on the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410, The same production reception is possible. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, when the same effect can be received but the operation on the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate By only accepting a single operation (physical object detection) for the area Z3, it is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player. That is, when other operation means are used, “the side according to the preference by the player until a predetermined period after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed. Can not be generated "or" perform at least two operations using a plurality of operation means ", but when a specific operation receiving portion 3333 is used, The display mode according to the player's preference can be made to appear with only a few operations (one time in this production example), so that more complicated performance can be realized with simple operability. Expected.

  In addition, while providing such an efficient operability, at the same time providing an operability that can achieve a desired operation by performing at least two operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can worry about which one should be selected as the desired operation while performing the operation in the process stage until reaching the desired operation. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process stage until reaching the desired operation, it becomes easy to imagine the production situation after the selection, and it is troubled which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period. Will be able to. As described above, since the player can selectively use the operation means with different number of required operations depending on whether the player is ready to make a decision or is in trouble, the gaming interest can be maintained. It becomes like this.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, the display unit D is the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, so that an unprecedented effect can be realized. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 has a larger operation reception range in front view than the display unit D (the coordinate range to be detected is that of the glass plate 192). By providing an effect using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize a more dynamic and highly flexible operability and an appropriate performance. .

[Third Operation Control Mode for Display Unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Among all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect and displayed. The specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the part D, and the specific image that prompts the user to operate to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B in the other display area of the display part D indicate.

  Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation with respect to the glass plate 192) on the fourth coordinate region Z4 in the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it))) and this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123 (b). The coordinate area in which the production can be accepted is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but a large fifth coordinate area including at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 of this example is opposed to the movable body B provided outside the display unit D from the coordinate area facing the fourth display area (not necessarily coincident with the fourth coordinate area Z). Up to the coordinate area to be set, and is set in such a manner as to straddle the movable body B, the display unit D, and the panel light emitting unit E.

  At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed anywhere in the fourth coordinate area Z4 in the special operation receiving unit 3333. Or may be displayed in a vibration mode) so that the specific operation target image S4 can be recognized as being movable by an operation by the player.

  That is, in the third operation control mode, the coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5 with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is retained. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, and the production on the movable body B is started. Realization of directing.

  Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and moved in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object, and the Control that moves the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the detected movement of the physical object is enabled. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of the movement in which the physical object has not yet moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. The inside of the display part D is moved so as to follow the movement in the front view.

  More specifically, with a physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiver 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate area Z5 to FIG. 124 (a). In the peripheral control board 1510, the specific operation target image S4 is moved in the display unit D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is located at the position shown in FIG. 124A, if the specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the display area facing the position, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed. A part of the display portion D protrudes from the display portion D, and the whole cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only on a portion that can be displayed on the display portion D, and the portion that protrudes from the display portion D is present. Is controlled so that the corresponding part of the panel light emitting part E emits light. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the board surface light emitting unit E Thus, control is performed to increase the number of portions corresponding to the light emitting region.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 on the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by an operation by the player. More dynamic and more flexible operability that does not fit in this single unit and performance suitable for this will be realized.

  In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124A, a physical object such as a player's finger is positioned at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate area Z5. In spite of being placed, effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (panel light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate area facing the plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement has appeared. A performance suitable for dynamic operability can be suitably realized.

  When a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124A in the fifth coordinate area Z5, the physical object is not the display unit D but the game board 5 (Here, it is in a state of being placed at a coordinate position facing the board light emitting portion E). However, in this case as well, not all of the specific operation target image S4 are suddenly hidden and only the panel light emitting unit E is caused to emit light, but the specific operation is performed as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D. Control is performed so that the portion of the target image S4 displayed on the display portion D is reduced, and the portion corresponding to the light emitting area of the panel light emitting portion E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display unit D by a specific distance, an effect (here, light emission) is produced only on the panel light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the panel surface light emitting unit E. As a result, an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D can be expressed.

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 has a position facing the physical object. The board surface light emitting section E and the movable body B located in are controlled to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-described effect control performed between the display unit D and the panel light emitting unit E is performed between the panel surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B. Like to do. More specifically, when a physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting unit E) approaches a predetermined distance from the coordinate area facing the movable body B, the physical object In spite of being in the coordinate area facing the board light emitting part E, the effect control is performed not only on the board light emitting part E but also on a member (movable body B) different from the panel light emitting part E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing both the panel light emitting portion E and the movable body B, an effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display) It becomes easy to recognize that a specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D has appeared (moved), and thereby it is possible to suitably realize a performance suitable for dynamic operability. .

  Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the specific operation target image S4 as the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if it has been moved to the appropriate position, and the condition reception in the third coordinate control mode is satisfied, and the acceptance of the effect on the fifth coordinate region Z5 is terminated. In addition, a display capable of recognizing that the condition in the third operation control mode (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) is satisfied is displayed on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Control to start production is executed. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect of causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined manner or an effect of operating the movable body B in a predetermined manner. So that the degree of expectation for the result of can be suggested.

  In addition, when the physical object moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 while the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the third operation control mode (with the finger from the special operation receiving unit 3333). It is desirable to redo from the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). In other words, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically acquires the position information of the physical object regularly regardless of the performance execution state, and thereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate area Z5. Information indicating that the user has moved, information indicating that the user has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

  Further, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object. However, the specific operation target image S4 is not limited to this. For example, the specific operation target image S4 is not limited to this. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

  Further, the fifth coordinate region Z5 may be the entire coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Also, if there is no portion that can be rendered to suggest that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. You may make it perform the production | presentation expression which suggests that specific operation target image S4 exists in a site | part.

  In this example, a board surface light emitting part E capable of effect presentation (light emission) is placed between the display part D and the movable body B, but the board surface light emitting part E is not necessarily provided. Good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D, until the physical object is moved to the coordinate position (or a nearby coordinate position) facing the movable body B, the player Will continue the operation while holding in the head an image in which the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

  Further, on the display unit D, a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B is displayed, and the position where the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object is displayed in the map. You may make it perform the effect display suggested by.

  In addition, although each coordinate area | region Z1-Z5 is described in the figure of FIGS. 122-125, in fact, a player cannot visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in which the effect operation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed are also positioned as the targets of the operation effect. When the player performs an operation on the coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in the front view of the operation receiving portion 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, an effect operation corresponding to the operation appears. Control is possible. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate mode (speed, amount of movement) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth Operation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126 (a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 that faces a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect. At this time, a specific display image is made to appear on the display unit D, or the movable body can be recognized so that the player can recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 can be accepted for production to operate the movable body C. It is desirable that C emit light in the first mode (for example, flash in a flashing mode) or vibrate.

  Then, in a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be able to receive effects, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (specifically, a special operation) is performed on the sixth coordinate area Z6. If there is a finger or the like in the operation receiving unit 3333 and it is not always necessary to touch it))), and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to receive an effect as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The coordinate area to be set is changed not to the sixth coordinate area Z6 but to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to a coordinate position facing the part, an effect is achieved in which the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is in a state of being moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that makes it possible to recognize. In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C emits light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the normal mode).

  However, from the player's side, the movable body C does not know what movable range CT is provided, and the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 after the physical object is detected. There is a concern that even if the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be properly performed. As a result, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves out of the seventh coordinate area Z7 even though there is an intention to perform an operation along the movable range CT of the movable body C (a special operation receiving portion) (Including the case where the finger is released from 3333), the game starts again from the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) against the player's intention, and the game interest may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate area Z6 is set in an enlarged range for at least the first distance in all directions in the front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It is going to be.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, the direction shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C. When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the presentation is accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, the operation can be performed by estimating the movable range CT of the movable body C through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (shown in FIG. 126 (b) ( Original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)) Control to be executed. On this, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is divided into a first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position), and a second drive coordinate area including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2 can be classified into a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position. By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate area corresponding to the determination. Control can be executed.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is controlled. The range of the movable body C is set as a range extending at least a first distance from the sixth coordinate region Z6 in the left, right, and lower directions except the upper side in which the movable range CT extends.

  According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object remains within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Since the movable body C does not move, the movable body C continues to stay at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 where the physical object is detected. Become. That is, in this case, the phenomenon that the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation is accepted for the production (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not redone). Therefore, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object is movable. When the body C is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object only needs to move a second distance shorter than the first distance as shown in FIG. 126 (b). The second drive coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126C is reached from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. That is, in this case, based on the detection of the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (FIG. 126 (FIG. From b)), it moves to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including a portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also has a vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the left-right direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is The movable body C does not move and corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without being moved in the single second drive coordinate area Z7-2. Will continue to stay at the second position. That is, in this case, the phenomenon that the movable body C does not move occurs even though the player's operation is accepted for the production (even though the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is not redone). Therefore, the operation can be performed by estimating the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends through the confirmation of such a phenomenon.

  In addition, since the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 is set so as to extend to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). In this case, the reference that is determined to be appropriate as an operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C after the physical object such as a finger is detected is relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain interest.

  When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. You may make it light-emit by the aspect (for example, green) different from the light emission aspect (for example, blue). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable If the light emission mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2), the player's operation has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress an irritated feeling due to a behavioral delay of the movable body that cannot be avoided in response to a quick operation by a player's finger.

  In addition, when a physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control to move to the latest detection position is performed.

  Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (FIG. When detected within a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. As for the left and right directions orthogonal to each other, there is a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

  In other words, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique capable of instructing the operation direction is used as an operation target, unlike the display means, this is performed without knowing what movable range is provided. You must move the physics object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the production reception is performed in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C. It has also been described above that by expanding the range, the criterion that is determined to be appropriate as an operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT is relaxed.

  However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6. The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from the distance increases. Accordingly, in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive region are arranged in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 is increased, and the deviation from the movable range CT is gradually increased. However, this can be accepted as an appropriate production operation. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while guessing this without knowing what movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. It will be possible to maintain the game entertainment. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not oppose the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

  When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. You may make it light-emit by the light emission mode (for example, red) different from any of the light emission mode (for example, green) when it was located in. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C (When starting to move toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3), the light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green).

  And, for the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is further leftward and rightward orthogonal to the up-down direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends further than the third drive coordinate region Z7-3. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's operation of a finger or the like, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)) to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). In addition, if a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by a player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. In such a case, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. When the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's operation with a finger or the like, the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 ( b)) Expectation (specific result is obtained) depending on whether an effect that moves to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) appears without moving to the fourth position. (It may be a definite one).

  In the peripheral control board 1510, a physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like and detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In such a case, it is determined that the condition in the fourth operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the seventh coordinate region Z7 is ended. When it is determined that the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is set in a region where the effect can be accepted. Will be controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C is not movable to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body C is set in a region where the effect can be accepted. Control to move C to the first position is performed.

  However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C is movable to the fourth position, the movable body C temporarily moves downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127)). (B)) even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot be moved to the fourth position, or the movable body C is temporarily moved upward. It is desirable to show the moving movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))) in order to improve the game entertainment.

  When the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position. The light emission mode (for example, green) and the light emission mode (for example, red) at the third position are different from each other. However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but at a later timing (movable body C). It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp the movement from the first movement to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is desirable that the light emission is terminated after a later timing (a timing at which it is definitely possible to grasp that the movable body C does not move to the fourth position).

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed after moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is ended.

  By the way, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body is movable from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. C can be moved freely. For example, when the physical object is moved back to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 after the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)), the peripheral control board 1510 performs the first drive. Based on the physical object detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)). . Further, when the physical object is moved back to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 after the movable body C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)), the peripheral control board 1510 performs the second drive. Based on the physical object detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

  According to such a configuration, as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)), a driving mode in which the movable body C is moved up and down in small increments is selected by the player. It will be possible to make it appear according to the player's preference, and it will be possible to perform only for the time that suits the player's preference, so that it will be possible to manipulate the “between” until the final result appears in the production, improving the gaming interest It is expected to plan. In addition, after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is ended, and the movable body C cannot be freely operated.

  It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is set after the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) so as to be able to receive an effect until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing comes). When the physical object is not properly detected, the effect reception for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be generated, or the movable body C may be generated without causing such behavior. Control may be performed so as to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

  Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, the first to third positions (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit. In the meantime, the movable body C can be moved freely, but instead, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. You may make it the expectation degree of the big hit suggested so that it is located in the upper side become high. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectations based on the result of the jackpot determination, and positions (first position to fourth position) defined by the selected effect pattern. The movable body C is controlled to be operable. At this time, the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. Sometimes, an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position (a behavior to come and go) may appear.

  Moreover, in the 1st-3rd operation control aspect with respect to the display part D, when making image S1-S4 receivable production | presentation, in order to generate coordinate area Z1-4 larger than these images S1-S4 by front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, the sixth coordinate region Z6 smaller than the movable body C in front view is generated when the movable body C can receive an effect. In other words, the movable body often includes a part having a relatively large amount of movement and a part having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, producing a part having a relatively small amount of movement. It is desirable to remove from the object of reception in order to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, when trying to set the coordinate area in accordance with the size of the image that can be accepted for production, it is required to make a large image in order to favorably maintain the operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may deteriorate, it is desirable that the size of the image that can be accepted for production be set independently from the set range of the coordinate area.

  However, when control is performed to detect the movement of the physical object in a specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and to produce an effect corresponding thereto. For example, the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves and the fourth drive coordinate area does not pass through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 or the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a situation in which a sudden detection occurs at Z7-4 occurs. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object has not moved, and an effect (such as movement of the movable body C) corresponding to the movement should not be executed.

  In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms) is being executed. Within the timer process, the information from the left outer periphery outside light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer periphery outside light detection unit 35b are respectively acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. A specific coordinate region is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is completed in the peripheral control unit steady processing described above. It is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving in (for example, the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4), and control data for the actuator is determined according to the determination result. Set. Then, in the interrupt process every 1 ms, the control for driving the movable body C based on the control data set in this way is performed, so that the movable body C moves from the physical object to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the time when the movement has not been completed, the movement of the physical object follows the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 in front view. Note that the coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions are acquired.

  For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, the inside of the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 The coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 at the timing before the physical object is detected in step S3, and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. If there is no coordinate information indicating that it has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and control is performed so that the movable body C is not operated.

  That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4 is detected in chronological order, for example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C does not move. Thereby, only when there is an appropriate operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333, an appropriate effect can be made to appear.

  In the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether a physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. In the movable range CT of the movable body C, control is performed to move the movable body C depending on whether movement of a physical object having a vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected. It may be. That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

  Note that the coordinate area setting control, the physical object movement detection, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode are, for example, in the above-described third operation control mode. It may be applied to the image S4.

  Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (production reception) regarding the movement after the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not ended yet. While being performed, control is performed to move the production target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the physical object that has already been detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a performance as if the player himself has created a production, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  By the way, in the 1st operation control mode, the 2nd operation control mode, the 3rd operation control mode, and the 4th operation control mode, production reception to special operation receiving part 3333 is coordinates set at that time Limited to area. However, the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 itself is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position and movement of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, one of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart illustrating a control example of the physical object detection information analysis process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation effect reception period that occurs based on the fact that the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect reception period, as described above, based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received. And if a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (re-setting or termination) regarding the coordinate area where the effects can be accepted, control for causing effect changes to the effect objects such as display images and movable bodies, Control to maintain the effect state is performed (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if no physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be received, control (re-setting, (End), control for returning a production target such as a display image or a movable body to the original position (for example, control for moving the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126A) may be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S3301 that there is no operation effect reception period in which a coordinate area that can receive an effect is set for the special operation receiving unit 3333, the analysis content for the effect Analysis is performed with contents different from (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire area of the game board 5. Accordingly, in order to illegally facilitate the winning of the game ball, an act of placing a magnet at a coordinate position facing the various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333, a wire or the like from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It may be assumed that an act of destroying a speaker that makes an intrusion and emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud is performed.

  Therefore, in the process of step S3312, an analysis is performed as to whether there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. I am doing so. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333. When a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode and size of the physical object are detected. Analyzes whether or not it matches the movement mode or size that can appear when a fraudulent act is performed. If it is determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being conducted as a result of the analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that the fraud is being performed is performed, an alarm sound or a warning light is output. Control is performed such that fraud countermeasures are performed (step S3313). If it is not determined that there is a possibility that fraud is being performed, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not performed (step S3313). ).

  As such an analysis procedure for fraud countermeasures (step S3312), for example, when a physical object is first detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range including the analysis reference position and extending from the analysis reference position by a predetermined distance is set, and the detected physical object is within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) To stay on (physical objects hardly move). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some illegal act has been performed in the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method for determining that there is. At this time, if the size of the physical object is a size that cannot be cheated (such as a very thin shape), the cheating is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility of being. As a result, it is possible to suppress false notifications when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

  According to such a configuration, when it is in the operation effect reception period, even if any action is performed, it is not determined as an illegal action, and the analysis is performed only as the effect and the result of the analysis In contrast, if the operation control is not in the operation effect reception period, any action is determined as an analysis target of fraud, and control for fraud countermeasures according to the result of the analysis may be performed. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs and is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, depending on the production situation, It can be regarded as a staging act and cause a specific staging change, or it can be regarded as a fraudulent act and be misreported. In this way, by using one detection information for different purposes (in this case, production purpose and fraud countermeasure purpose) according to the situation of the game and the production, more purposes can be achieved with less detection information. Can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

  In this explanation example, when there is no operation effect reception period that occurs based on the fact that a specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied, no effect change is caused by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although described as a thing, even when it is not in the operation effect reception period (always), the display image is changed by detecting the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, or the movable body is caused to emit light and move. Also good. However, in this case, when it is not in the operation production reception period, in addition to determining all acts as analysis targets for fraudulent acts, it is also determined as analysis targets for production acts and performing control according to the results of these determinations, respectively. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the production change and the fraud notification can appear.

  In addition, in the middle of monitoring whether the physical object remains within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a specific performance condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied. If the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on this, monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) without ending the fraud countermeasure analysis process. It is desirable to continue the operation after the operation effect reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, during the operation effect reception period, in addition to performing the analysis processing for the effect and the control according to the result, whether the physical object remains in the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Monitoring is continued, and fraudulent notification is performed depending on the result of the monitoring.

  By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first production period in which the production reception regarding the first production event (for example, the production of moving the movable body) is allowed, an operation means (different from the special operation receiving unit 3333). For example, you may make it perform control which further produces | generates the 2nd effect period in which the acceptance of the effect regarding the 2nd effect event (for example, the effect which changes a display image) is accept | permitted in the operation button 410).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving unit 3333 is allowed to receive an effect (panel operation reception) related to the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving the movable body). Assume that the first performance period has occurred. Note that in this first effect period, until the timing t2 when the first reception time elapses after the occurrence of the period, the special operation receiving unit 3333 starts moving the physical object. Control that moves the movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the moving direction and the moving amount of the physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while detection (analysis) related to movement has not been completed and is still being continued. (For example, control for moving a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object) can be executed.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first effect period is generated and this is continued without being ended yet. In addition, the second effect in which the effect reception (button operation reception) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is allowed in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333. It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern or a notice effect that is determined to generate a period.

  That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the operation button 410 accepts the effect reception (button operation reception) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image). The control for generating the second production period is performed. And when operation with respect to the operation button 410 is received before timing t12 when the 2nd reception time passed after the 2nd production period generate | occur | produces in this way, the said 2nd production period will be complete | finished at that time. Let Alternatively, when the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period ends when the timing t12 arrives.

  According to such a configuration, the first reception period in which the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is allowed to receive the production related to the first production event, and the production reception related to the second production event. However, both the second production period (here, the operation button 410) allowed in the second production period occurs simultaneously (timing t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). In addition, in the above-described configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period that occurs later than the first effect period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, whether the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated even if the first operation part is being operated? Therefore, it is required to operate the first operation portion and the second operation portion in different modes at the same time, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented presentation performance operability and suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest. Expected.

  In order to suitably realize such performance operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the production reception related to the second production event (the production on the side finished in a relatively short period of time) The reception is performed when it is detected that a predetermined number of operations (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (finite amount of operation) is performed with the second operation part (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, an effect operation that changes the display image) without requiring an operation thereafter. For example, when a single pressing operation is detected with respect to the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required and the effect changes to the display image. This is the case for the control that causes

  On the other hand, with respect to the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that is ended after a relatively long time), at least until the second production period ends, and further thereafter. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation for one operation part, the production reception regarding the first production event is continued without ending, and each time the operation on the first operation part is performed while the production is being continued, It is desirable to perform control that reflects the change in performance according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object. This corresponds to control that repeatedly executes the process of moving the movable body to the latest coordinate position analyzed each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation for the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs behind the first effect period, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it can be suitably ensured that the game is not interrupted, a decrease in the gaming interests due to the interruption is suppressed. In addition, if the second operation part is operated after the operation on the first operation part is interrupted, the second effect period can be terminated at a relatively early stage, and thereafter the operation on the second operation part is performed. Since the production change (second production event) corresponding to the operation occurs without requiring the operation, the operation on the first operation part can be resumed at a relatively early stage. This is suitably ensured for an operation opportunity for one operation site.

  In this case, in the situation where the operation on the first operation part is resumed, an effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation part is just started, and the first operation It is possible to generate a special production situation in which the second production event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, “a production event in which the size of the specific display image changes when an operation is performed on the second operation part is generated, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image reaches the specific position. If it is set to affect (change) the aspect of the production target of the second production event as the first production event, such as “to make a moving production event occur” In a special production situation, it becomes possible to enjoy the second production event while changing the aspect of the production target of the second production event by an operation on the first operation part. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

  Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the effect target of the second effect event when an operation is performed on the first operation part, for example, the effect of the second effect event To change at least one of the moving amount, moving direction, moving speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of a target (display image, movable body, etc.) However, the present invention is not limited to these, and any object that can affect the effects of the second effect event (display image, sound effect, movable object, etc.) may be used. That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect target, the aspect of the effect (for example, the first operation part, for example) The size may be changed in the operation effect for, and the display position may be changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). Moreover, about the 1st production period, it does not necessarily need to be set as finite time, and after the 2nd production period is complete | finished, operation with respect to the 1st operation site | part is received, and 2nd production What is necessary is just to be able to perform an operation on the first operation part when an event occurs.

  Moreover, in the period when both the 1st production period and the 2nd production period occur simultaneously, it is related with the 2nd production event among the production reception regarding the 1st production event, and the production reception concerning the 2nd production event. Only for the production reception, the display for prompting the operation instruction and the display for suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second production period are preferably encouraged to interrupt the operation on the first operation part. Desirable above.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize such a relationship of effects, control for generating the second effect period after the first effect period may be performed. Control is performed so as not to generate the first production period after the second production period.

  In the example described above, both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously. However, when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the first effect period is changed to the first effect period. The first production period may be generated again when the second production period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the above-described operability and performance so as to affect the aspect of the production target of the second production event when an operation is performed on the first operation part. Is possible.

  In the example described above, each time an operation is performed on the first operation part, the control is performed to reflect the change in effect according to the operation. If there is, control for reflecting the change in performance according to the operation may be performed.

  In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, various operation reception effects as described below can be realized by appropriately using the control methods according to the above-described examples.

[Example 1 using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the effect pattern of effect example 1 (the variation pattern of effect example 1) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 1 is displayed on display unit D. It is assumed that the decoration pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to be able to receive the effect. An operation effect period to be controlled is generated.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 determined to operate the movable body A2. Production pattern A2. However, the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the game board 5, whereas the movable body A2 is difficult to view from the player side behind the game board 5. And provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if any production pattern A1, A2 is performed as the production pattern of the production example 1, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. In FIG. 5, a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any of the production patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light and suggest that a coordinate area (not shown) opposite to this should be operated. ing.

  Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the production pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the player to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A1. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (a). After the body A1 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A1 is allowed. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display indicating that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and is expected to have a high degree of expectation for the big hit determination, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific place while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the information shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A1 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted is ended, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the failure to move the movable body A1 to the specific performance position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is low, and the light emission ends in the movable body A1. Will be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the performance pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (c). Control is performed so as to start the leftward movement of the movable body A2 in the form of following. Even in this situation, in the display unit D, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a sliding operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

  Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific location while the production pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a manner to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (c). After the body A2 is moved to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect acceptance for the movable body A2 is allowed. In this situation, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is extremely high. It is desirable to produce effects such as changes in the form and shape of light emission.

  However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific location while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the information shown in FIG. As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the reception of the effect on the movable body A2 is allowed so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted is ended, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move it back. In this case, on the display unit D, a display appears indicating that the failure to move the movable body A2 to the specific production position and the expectation level for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Is controlled to be terminated.

  According to such an effect example 1, when the player performs a slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a) showing that the movable body A1 is operated appears, the movable body A1 is displayed. However, since the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to see, will move in the form of sudden appearance, it is possible to suppress the fall of the game entertainment by a surprised moving effect as if such a production target has been replaced. Can be done.

  Although illustration is omitted, according to such production example 1, within the period from the appearance of FIG. 130 (a) to the appearance of FIG. 130 (c), the player can perform a slide operation. Although the movable body A2 has started to move, this is still in a position where it is still difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and when viewed from the player side, there appears to be a situation where no production change has occurred. It can appear. In other words, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display unit D after causing a disappointment that no effect change has occurred even though the slide operation by the player is properly performed. Therefore, the fall of the game entertainment can be more suitably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect.

  Further, in the production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to the position overlapping the decorative symbol SZ in the changing state. Thus, it is prompted to shift the gaze by the player from the decorative design SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, so that it is difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the manner of overlapping the decorative design SZ is different between when the movable body A1 appears and when the movable body A2 appears, so that the decorative design SZ changes to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if it is a failure to shift the gaze by the player, it is predicted which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size and position of the part in which the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to see As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when missing one of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

  In the production example 1, the movable body A1 is disposed on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5 is provided. Both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed, or both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be disposed behind the game board 5.

  Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are disposed in front of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is disposed in front of the movable body A2 so that it is difficult to visually recognize the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain difficulty in visually recognizing the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the non-moving portion) and the like continuously located on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves.

  On the other hand, when both of the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give pleasure about which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation of the player. It becomes like this. In this case, the part located on the front side of the movable bodies A1, A2 in the game board 5 is caused to emit light, and the operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving part 3333) facing the part is encouraged. It is desirable.

  In the production example 1, the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to have the same movable direction (left direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left direction and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is directed to the left by being prompted by an operation instruction (suggestion image HG1) suggesting the left direction. The movable body A2 moves upwards regardless of the slide operation performed by the person, and the fall of the game entertainment can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprised movable effect. Or, even though the operation on the movable body A1 in which the movable direction is set to the left direction is urged, an operation instruction suggesting the upward direction is made to appear, and the player performs a slide operation in the upward direction. If performed, the movable body A2 that has been made difficult to visually recognize may move upward and appear.

  Moreover, in the said production example 1, when movable body A2 appeared by operation by a player, movable body A1 did not operate | move, However, It is not restricted to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by an operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved by a predetermined distance, the fall of the game entertainment is more preferably suppressed by the surprised movable effect. Become moist. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by an operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, after the movable body A1 moves by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. A certain mobile effect can more suitably suppress the decrease in gaming interest. However, when the operation target by the player is exchanged between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is kept at a predetermined location for a predetermined time (time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined location). It is desirable to perform the production.

  In the production example 1, while the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are caused to emit light. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily emit light. That is, in this case, the timing when the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the movable body A1, or the movable body A2 starts to advance to the front side of the display portion D and returns to the original position. Control to end the light emission of the movable body A1 is performed at a timing (a timing at which the movable body A1 has been moved to a predetermined position) that is easier to visually recognize than a certain time.

  Further, in the production example 1 and other examples thereof, the movable body A2 is disposed on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, but the board surface light emitting unit E is disposed instead of the movable body A1. You may do it. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the movable body in a state that is difficult to visually recognize is caused by causing the panel light emitting portion E located on the front side of the movable body A2 to emit light. An operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

  Further, in the display unit D according to the above-described effect example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130A to 130C, the effect image HG1 has one effect regardless of the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located. The situation (the initial situation where none of the movable bodies are operating) was shown. However, instead of this, the display state of the suggestion image HG1 is changed according to the position where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, and the movement state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggestion image HG1. It may be.

[Example 2 using special operation receiver 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (the variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is displayed on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decoration pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving portion 3333 so that the effect can be received during the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) To generate an operation effect period.

  Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 that is determined to operate the movable body A1, and the movable object A1 and the movable object B are respectively operated. The production pattern AB of production example 2 is included. And in the production pattern A1 of the production example 2, as in the case of the production pattern A1 of the production example 1 described above, FIGS. An opportunity for accepting an operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided in the manner shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the opportunity for accepting the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, the opportunity for acceptance of the operation effect for the movable body B is provided. Accordingly, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if any of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. In FIG. 5, a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is to be performed is displayed. Similarly, even if any of the production patterns A1 and AB are performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light and suggest that a coordinate area (not shown) opposite to this should be operated. ing.

  However, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, when an operation on a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific production event is performed on the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), control is performed so that the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D is not displayed, and the effect reception in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1 is interrupted. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative design SZ on the display unit D is displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to view (such as semi-transparent display), and the light emission state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to make it.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display part D in which the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed in this way, an operation on an operation means (such as the operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving part 3333 is performed. The prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation reception period for a specific effect using the other operation means (such as the operation button 410) is generated. Then, when an operation on another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is received during the operation reception period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG on the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, control is performed so that the movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the production target is operated. In this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D for a predetermined time.

  Then, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, after the movable body B operates in this manner, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display unit D is movable in a coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. A suggestion image HG2 suggesting that an operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is displayed, and a coordinate area (not shown) of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1. The operation effect period for setting (controlling) to be receivable is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the production operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132 (a) appears, the movable body B operates without operating the movable body B. It is desirable to set the expectation level higher in the production pattern AB of the production example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B is operated than in the production pattern A1 of the production example 2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the suggestion image HG2 is different from the suggestion image HG1 shown in FIG. It is desirable that the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is different from the light emission mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) so as to suggest that the production pattern is highly expected. .

  In the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 described above, FIGS. a) (or FIG. 131 (b)) provides an opportunity for accepting an operation effect for the movable body A1 in the manner shown in FIG. 131 (b), so that the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the effect example 1 described above, FIG. 130 (c) and FIG. 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)). ), An opportunity for accepting an operation effect on the movable body A1 is provided, and an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

  In particular, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the suggestion image HG2 that suggests that the production pattern has a high expectation appears, or the light emission mode of the movable body A1 is changed. Since it is made different, this is also a movable effect that appears when an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed in a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is preferably performed in a special execution manner different from the case of the production pattern A1 of the production example 2.

  According to the production pattern AB of the production example 2 as described above, the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is first granted (in this situation, the second operation is performed). Regardless of the part (for example, the second production opportunity for the operation button 410), if the first operation part is operated and the production is accepted, it differs from the first operation part. The second production opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is given, and the first production opportunity is once lost. When the first operation opportunity is operated by operating the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) in a situation where the first production opportunity is once lost, the second production event (in response to the production reception) ( Here, the operation of the movable body B occurs. That is, in this case, it is possible to produce a presentation as to whether or not the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part is given when the presentation is received for the first operation part. A novel operability using the operation part is provided.

  In order to suitably realize such a novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable that the second operation part is always provided in a form that is difficult to physically operate. And when it is judged that the 2nd production opportunity with respect to the 2nd operation part is given, it is difficult to physically operate the 2nd operation part based on having received the production reception with respect to the 1st operation part. It is desirable to control the mode from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and allow the reception of the effect to the second operation site when the mode is easy to operate. Here, the “mode that is physically difficult to operate” is, for example, a mode in which the second operation site (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member and is difficult to operate, or the second operation site. Is a state that is positioned in a state when it has already been operated, and “control from a physically difficult mode to an easily operable mode” means, for example, that the second operation site itself is Control to operate to a position not covered by other members, control to operate another member covering the second operation part to a position not to cover the second operation part, and operation to the second operation part It can be realized as a control for operating to a position different from the state when it is performed. Also, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from the physically difficult operation to the easy operation aspect is not necessarily the time when the presentation is accepted for the first operation part. It may be when a specific time elapses after the production pattern is executed. In any case, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated to give the second presentation opportunity for the second operation part when the presentation for the first operation part is received. This is desirable in order to suggest that the operation target has been changed from the first operation part to the second operation part and that the expectation is increased by the change.

  Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given a first production opportunity, and then the first operation site is operated. Based on the reception of the production, the second production opportunity is given. However, after giving the 1st production opportunity using the 1st operation part (here special operation receiving part 3333) (or displaying suggestion picture HG1), after the 1st progress, the 1st A second presentation opportunity for a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part may be given and the first presentation opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, until the predetermined time elapses, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation part, but the first effect event is ended based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (When the production target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first operation part using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part (for example, different from the first operation part after elapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed) You may make it give the 2nd production opportunity with respect to the operation button 410). In other words, in this case, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the presentation is not accepted by the operation on the first operation part even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed.

  Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed and then the suggestion image HG1 is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the suggestion image HG1 is displayed while the suggestion image HG1 is displayed. The operation instruction image SG shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to depict a state in which the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 having a higher expectation level, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. However, at this time, in the case where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state in which no effect is received for the first operation part, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, translucent, etc. It is desirable to make the display mode relatively difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, a timekeeping image showing the remaining display time of the suggestion image HG1 (remaining time for which the effect is received for the first operation part) is displayed together, and the effect is not received for the first operation part. If the state image shows that the remaining time does not decrease in the state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period during which the effect reception for the first operation part is performed does not decrease. As a result, a game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be enjoyed with peace of mind. In this case, the remaining time does not decrease after the remaining time during which the reception of the effect is received is reduced by a predetermined amount even though the reception of the effect for the first operation part is not performed. If it is shown by the said time-measurement image, more interesting performance can be provided.

  In addition, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the production reception for the first operation part is not performed based on the production reception for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed during the predetermined period (for example, from a color display to a black-and-white display or a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize, such as translucent). You may make it show that a remaining time does not reduce with an image (a display meter does not reduce, but will be in a still state). At this time, it is desirable that the display mode of the image different from the suggestion image HG1 on the display unit D is also changed. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second presentation opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with higher expectation, and the stage reception for the first operation part is performed again. You may do it.

  Further, in the effect pattern of the effect example 2 described above, after the suggestion image HG1 that prompts the operation for the movable body A1 as an effect target is displayed (or in a state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. Although the movable body B does not have to be operated by an operation by the player, for example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained by determining whether a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operating movable body that operates. When such a non-operation movable body is adopted, even if it is decided to operate (a special result is obtained), an operation instruction for the non-operation movable body is not performed and an operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination as to whether the predetermined operation condition for the non-operation movable body is satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution state of the production pattern, other production targets (movable body and display image) Etc.), it is possible to secretly make a decision to operate the non-operation movable body in the state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed. It is possible to have the possibility that a non-operating movable body unrelated to this suddenly operates and the possibility that a special movable body and other production targets may operate simultaneously. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

  Further, when the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation region (a specific coordinate region in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) ) Is not allowed to receive the effect, but can also be allowed to receive the effect in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion where the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. Also good. According to such a configuration, even when the operation site cannot be recognized, it is only necessary to operate the specific images (the suggestion images HG1, HG2 and the operation instruction image S) that appear in the display unit D. A similar effect can be generated, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, at least one of the physical objects that have already been detected while the detection related to the movement since the movement of the physical object was started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed yet. Although it is possible to execute control to move the production target (display image or movable body) in a manner according to the movement direction and movement amount, the movement speed of the physical object is detected when performing control related to the movement of the production target. Then, the level of the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, when realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the special operation receiving unit 3333 produces an effect in a coordinate area facing the portion to be operated. Although the reception is made, it does not necessarily have to be the coordinate region facing the part to be operated, and the production reception may be made in a specific coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333. Good.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, a change in light caused by an operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333 is detected by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35, and this is detected by the peripheral control board 1510. By analyzing, it is decided to determine the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333. For example, the special operation reception is performed using a touch panel installed on the glass plate 192. The operation mode for the portion 3333 (in this case, the mode of the touch operation for the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 is adversely affected.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal from one start port sensor 4002 is in an ON state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is acquired from the random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in the on state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (second special symbol) A second start-port passing process is performed such that the second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" or "8R normal big hit", the big prize opening 2005 Opening / closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big prize opening 2005 or not, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state that repeats 16 times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern (round game) that is closed when the game is received by the count sensor 4005 after 9 game balls have been won in the grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to an 8R big hit game state that is repeated eight times.
-When the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled to a 2R big hit game state that repeats twice.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-shortening control is executed, the right-handed strike is more advantageous to the player than in the left-handed manner, and in the situation where the time-shortening control is not executed, the right-handedness is preferred. As described above, the left hand is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a big win is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a maximum of 8 rounds of long-open big hit game Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, when a big hit is won, the probability (allocation rate of the winning species) is approximately 50%. ) Is a 16-round long-open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained), etc., and the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained when winning a big hit Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is left-handed.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, first, a process for starting the operation of the condition device, a process for resetting a later-described variation number counter, and the like are performed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, according to the winning type of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, a high probability Each set process of a flag and a time reduction flag is executed.

  The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139, which will be described later. 144. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 or a second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the probability variable big hit and 8R probability variable big hit B) is finished. To reset.

  The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control is being executed (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time reduction control (high probability time reduction state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144, which will be described later, is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B) is terminated. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated. Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a jackpot after a low probability short-time state occurs, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Or it resets by the 2nd special symbol stop process which is not illustrated.

  The variation counter is a counter indicating the number of variations of a special symbol since the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 described later. It is updated when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes (for example, counts up) and at least a specific type of big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) It is reset when the big hit gaming state based on is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then, as the processing of step S5236, whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set. Is determined. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the short time flag, the short time Each set process such as a count counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the big hit determination is not won.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is “0” (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process concerning the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second jackpot determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), A second special symbol process process including a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so that the lottery for the second special symbol placed on hold is not lost (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is “0”), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number is continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player can maintain the driving ball (right strike) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the short time state (high probability short time state). Only the lottery (determination process) for the big hit determination random number can be performed continuously without interruption.

  The special game (design variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to a game executed in preference to the special game using the first special diagram (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) through the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be able to decide.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage processing (step S5232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is on and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random hit determination random number, reach determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, variation display pattern random number ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in step S5242 that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is used as a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Next, the first special figure prefetch process for executing the prefetch effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed and the contents of the effecting on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information relating to the winning for prefetching determination, symbol type for prefetching judgment) Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5242 that the first special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5243 to S5245, the first special symbol variation display is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S5234).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol for A random number and a random number for the second variation display pattern) are obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S5252). If it is determined in step S5252 that the number of the second special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly held. In order to achieve this state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

  That is, first, as the processing of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as a process of step S5254, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S5251. To store.

  Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before the variable display of the second special symbol is started. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a change effect described later can be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5252 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S5253 to S5255, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  A command for instructing the number of reserved special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the number of retained special balls changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002. (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of second special symbols held changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of second special symbols held. A command to be performed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). The first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read random number for big hit determination read out the big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the determination process on the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )

  3. The first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 on the basis of the random number for the variable display pattern 1403 and the above-mentioned effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 corresponding to the special symbol The first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

  4). The first special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 138, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5301. As a process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol that is in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302 next. First random number related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in first-out (First-In, First-In) random numbers (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). . Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process that is a determination process for the big hit is based on the read first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), the process ends.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability short time short state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. 140 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313). The jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the game state is low in probability for each type of special random numbers (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). (Low probability non-short time state, low probability short time state) and low probability jackpot judgment table and high used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-time short state, high probability short time state) And a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, it matches with the jackpot determination value indicating that the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers have won the jackpot, 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the first big hit determination random number of the type matches the loss determination value indicating that it is the loss (a big hit probability at a low probability; “1/321”). On the other hand, in order to compare with the jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing In the jackpot determination table at the time of the low probability to be referenced, the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the 65332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the above-mentioned losses. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately “1/321”).

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at high probability referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value and 63634 types of first jackpot determination The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the loss determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63396 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the above-mentioned loss has occurred. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) The number of jackpot judgment values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the jackpot determination values of the jackpot determination table at the low probability and the jackpot determination table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process, and determines that it is a jackpot (step S5315). ), A jackpot flag indicating that the change is won by the jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the player has lost the jackpot, based on the selected jackpot determination table, the read jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process) in this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit is not won (judgment is determined).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the loss occurs, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in a high probability non-short-time state, and when the gaming state is in a high-probability short-time state. And a reach determination table for a low probability state used when the gaming state is a low probability state (low probability non-short state state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state, a reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number is reachable and 71 types of reach determination random numbers are not reachable. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match. However, the reach determination table in the high probability short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the game progress speed in the short-time state. Thus, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability short state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 reach reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than that in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short-time state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability short-time state and the low-probability state The reach determination random numbers are associated with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the high probability non-time-short state is the same as the low probability non-time-short state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) and determines that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). Then, a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. Are compared with the selected symbol determination table to determine a big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, a random number for the first big hit symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) Of the first jackpot symbol) is stored in an associated manner. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second big hit symbol (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) Here, a total of 200 second big hit symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determined based on the first jackpot symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determined based on the second jackpot symbol random number. . More specifically, the allocation rate (allocation) between the probable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the regular jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state are the same, but for the first jackpot symbol The expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the second jackpot design random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be acquired by the jackpot determined based on the random number. ing.

  The following is a concise summary of the specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.

  1. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to the high probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state, a battle effect (battle victory effect) is won for a specific character, Are controlled to the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a low-probability short-time state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state An effect display device that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated and is in a relatively unfavorable state in a low-probability short-time state 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round game) that are closed when detected in 16 are repeated 16 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) to the 16R big hit gaming state, and after this 16R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it will be 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (successful production) ) Will be added, and a relatively advantageous state will be given after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high probability short-time state. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4). The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the grand prize opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600. Opening and closing patterns (round games) that are closed when detected in 8 are repeated 8 times to control the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 8R big hit gaming state, and after this 8R big hit gaming state Is controlled to a high-probability short-time state until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, and an effect on whether the number of rounds exceeds eight (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R jackpot gaming state (failure effect) ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was controlled to a high-probability time-short state, this is a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. The count sensor 4005 indicates that nine game balls have been won after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) after the jackpot symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600 or for a long time. The opening / closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected at 2 is repeated twice to control the game ball to a 2R big hit game state that is difficult to enter the big prize opening 2103. After this 2R big hit game state, Controls the low probability short-time state until the symbol change display is digested 100 times (or wins a big hit within the period until 100 times it is consumed), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R jackpot gaming state In the production display device 1600, a battle production (battle defeat production) is defeated, and in a low probability short-time state, the state is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball is not won at the first start port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 in the second special symbol display 1186 except for the case where there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and big hits (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol are generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the maximum winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), and the opening / closing pattern is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. With a big hit related to the second special symbol, a maximum of 2000 game balls can be paid out by repeating an open / close pattern that opens the grand prize winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 8R probability variable big hit A is determined, the 8R probability variable big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R normal big hit is determined, the 8R normal big hit symbol is changed to the 8R normal big hit symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is decided, the 8R probability variation big hit is decided as the big hit symbol. When the symbol B is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as processing in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 in the second special symbol process (step S5239), the small special symbol ( After the specific symbol stop mode is determined (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the special symbol is lost as the mode when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. To do.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (a big hit type, a small hit, a reach out, or a out of one) as a process in step S5337. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may instruct a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) as the process of step S5338, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner and left decorative symbols → right decorative symbols → The display is stopped in the order of the middle decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a synchronized manner in the same symbol, and may be displayed in a stopped state simultaneously). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle, and right decorative symbols when a type other than 2R normal big hit is won as the big hit. On the other hand, when 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols). In addition, when a reach loss is specified, a design with a reach (a combination of symbols having the same left and right decorative designs of “0” to “9” but having a different middle decorative design; reach lose In the case where the symbol is determined to be out of order, the symbol is determined to be a symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified from the change pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  In any case, when the winning is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the winning effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game After the game is started, an effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S5341), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S5344), and if a reach flag is set (step S5345), a variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346). If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation display pattern random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of this fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), the processing is terminated. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 controls the effect in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a big hit determination random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number) and a big hit symbol random number (first big hit symbol random number, second big hit symbol random number) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result. The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The first variation display pattern random numbers are stored in association with each other. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process in step S5302 among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. The above-mentioned special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the variable display pattern random number with the random number for variable display pattern read out and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Determine the variation pattern. Thereby, the determination process about the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small win is not won, but the small win may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is executed with the random number for the variable display pattern. Has been. For example, in the non-short-time state, 164 types of random display pattern random numbers among the 241 types of random display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed. It is set as a determination value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the random numbers for the variable display pattern is to execute any one of the super-reaching effects having a low jackpot expectation level, and the 18 random display pattern random numbers have a high jackpot expectation level. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

  The super reach production (SP production) has a higher expectation degree of big hit than the normal reach production, and the player who wants to generate the big hit gaming state is the player who is in the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. The expectation of is becoming higher. In other words, such a super reach production has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit, and even if a losing is eventually displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state Can be increased. However, in fact, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation level for the big hit gaming state, a highly anticipated notice effect that is a lottery separate from the variation pattern appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed It is required to do (combine).

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and used to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the non-short-time state and the short-time state And 12 seconds of fluctuation time are set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided in correspondence with the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds to The variation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short-time state. Thus, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the short-time state and in the non-short-time state, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is made during the variation of the first special symbol in the short-time state. In addition to prompting, a time for the player to win a game ball at the second starting port 2004 is secured.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of the second special symbol loss, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) It is possible to suppress the discharge without being subjected to the lottery process.

  In other words, the game ball that has been hit right is supplied to an area directly above the gate portion 2003. When the game ball is received from this area to the gate unit 2003 when in a short time state (such as a high probability short time state), a win as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece related to the opening and closing of the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where it can be successively received one after another at the second starting port 2004 (a short time state in which almost all of the game balls thrown to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if these game balls are accepted, a control is performed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of “approximately 1/32”. Become possible.

  In this example, when the player operates the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the short time state (high probability short time state, etc.) Game balls are often received at the start port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol losing based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the fluctuation time of the short time state (high probability short time state etc.). It can be set to a short 0.1 second. In other words, in this case, when the losing is obtained, the symbol variation will be completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds). Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is possible to prevent such game balls from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes step S5371. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process is terminated.

  When the variation timer is not 0 even though the variation timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), until the variation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 144, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S5381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol indicator 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit gaming state (the time for displaying to the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the short time flag is set, When the time-short flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is further reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process that is the initial value (step S5389). In step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R positive change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R positive big hit command, 8R normal big hit command, 8R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B, 2R normal big hit B) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). Thereby, the jackpot gaming state effect (battle effect or extra challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the low probability time-short state is set (step S5390). And when it is in the low probability short time state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability short time state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability short-time state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for ending the low-probability short-time state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-short game state) (step S5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time-shortening function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is to be started is set (step S5394). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process proceeds to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When updated to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the processing in step S5236, and in the small hitting control processing (step S5240b) described above. The small hit gaming state is executed. Incidentally, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the gaming state is not changed when such a small hit gaming state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing relating to the big hit or the small hit as being lost. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is determined according to the pending status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests “per-common”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process for controlling the machine (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S5402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S5413, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S5414, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in step S5411 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S5421. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S5422. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and the normal symbol variation display stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time hit table determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S5426) ( In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) (step S5425), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected ( In step S5427, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process (step S5428).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure determination table used when the gaming state is short time (high probability short time state) and the gaming state is non-short time. And a non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time short state, high probability non-time short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003, the winning ball is always won by the usual time, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. Controls acceptance. Instead of all 255 types, a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time-saving state may coincide with the determination value per universal figure indicating that it is won per universal figure.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving ordinary figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the ordinary figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won per hit, so the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second start port is opened. It is not possible to control the acceptance of game balls to 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol hit may be obtained even in the non-short-time state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the short-time state, and the normal symbol lottery result is the win. When the movable piece of the second start port 2004 is opened for a time shorter than the time-shortening state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start port 2004, the movable piece is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept the game ball in the second starting port 2004.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that it is normal symbol (step S5429). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected normal symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-usual symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

  While the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby obtaining the peripheral control unit steady process (received command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation in process, effect symbol variation stop process, jackpot display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process: It takes an effect (demonstration effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a. When the control is performed and the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

  Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command, etc., and the decoration symbol change is started based on the determined effect contents. To control. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process.

  Effect symbol variation processing: Various effects determined in the effect symbol variation start process are controlled at each timing during the symbol variation period, and the process flag value is determined when the variation time ends. Update to a value corresponding to the change stop process.

  Production symbol variation stop processing: Control of deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) by stopping the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped. If the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display processing. Update to a value corresponding to.

  Big hit display process: Controls an effect (such as a display effect that informs the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big win symbol until the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control related to various effects during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big-hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the player that the big-hit gaming state has ended) is controlled in a period from the end of the big-hit gaming state to the variation allowed state. . Then, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (variation effect) determination table T1 referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with each of the change numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the change pattern command. Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern Based on (variation effect), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative design is started.

  Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily correspond one-to-one with the change number indicated by the change pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variation effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variation effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may make it do. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is also configured such that a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (variation effect) in this way, performs a lottery (notice effect determination process) based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing the control (process during effect symbol variation) for causing the notice effect won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variable effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. The expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears is suggested by the appearance mode etc. as those that can be combined.

  And conventionally, in such a combined effect, there are cases where a plurality of appearances are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, a timer effect), As a result, it is expected to maintain amusement interests. However, since the announcement effect can be combined only when the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency with which multiple timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. Therefore, it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the game entertainment.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of an effect pattern (variable effect), and a first predetermined numerical value is displayed for the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed. (E.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (e.g., "0 second") or a count effect display, or a standby display (such as in preparation) before starting the count display It is. In other words, in this case, when a count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as a timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect mode (a low-expectation effect mode) or an advantageous effect mode (a high expectation effect mode) to appear to the player. , B, etc.) are targeted for timer production, it is guaranteed that an advantageous production result will surely occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice timer effect performed as a result of the notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. The “timer effect target” is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) as the timer effect. Therefore, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect object is generated.

  In the “timer effect” according to this embodiment, the elapsed time since the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect. If it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning in the notice lottery, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the change effect. In other words, in this case, only the notice timer effect that executes the count effect display as “the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the expected degree of jackpot is added to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command”. First, it is also executed as “the production contents of the production pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command”, so that the expectation degree from the jackpot expectation level indicated by the production pattern determined based on the variation pattern command Count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (accumulating the expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the jackpot expectation level when a specific performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice side timer effect is further executed, the jackpot expectation level is increased by the function of the composite performance. For example, when it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency is inevitably lowered, it is expected to be a big hit when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. The timer effect can be executed with the degree kept at “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  Note that the degree of jackpot expectation when an effect pattern (variation effect) appears in the determination table T1 varies depending on the variation number (and also the effect pattern), and basically the jackpot expectation as the variation number increases. There is a tendency to become higher. For example, in the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation-side timer production in which “conversation notice” is produced as the production content is executed. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table that is referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. However, in the determination table that is referred to in the low-probability short-time state or the high-probability short-time state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself As described above, an effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and can appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice. This is different from the variation numbers 3 and 4. The variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, the variable numbers 9 and 10 execute the variable timer effect for the effect of the conversation notice, 12, the variable side timer effect with cut-in A as the production target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in A and the variable side timer effect with these as the production target is executed. It is different in that it can be done. Further, the variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 17 and 18 are performed on the variation side timer production with the conversation notice as the production target. 20, the variable timer effect for cut-in B is executed, and the variable numbers 21 and 22 execute the conversation notice and the cut-in B, and the variable timer effect for them is executed. It is different in that it can be done. It should be noted that the big hit expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A and B as the effect target is executed than when the variable timer effect with the conversation notice as the effect target is executed. Is set so that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  Note that “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (decorative effect of decoration pattern) is executed, and often has a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-in A and B are allowed to appear at a relatively late stage after the production pattern (decorative production of the decorative design) is executed, and the expectation level is relatively high. This is often an effect (or an effect in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of other effects (cut-in A, B, and later-described accessory A action, B, etc.) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be. In addition, “cut-in” that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed so as to correspond to cut-in A that appears as the content of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as production contents of the production.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the content of the effect (effect pattern) for a plurality of change patterns (change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ) Is assigned as the variable timer production. On this basis, if the variation pattern is “a predetermined type (such as variation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened variation or a low-expected normal reach effect”, a count effect display as a notice timer effect is displayed. While the effect is not won (by increasing the premium level) and the expected level UP when the notice timer effect appears, the change pattern is “change pattern (execution of change side timer effect ( Variation number 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern is the above-described predetermined type (for example, variation) compared to the case where the variation number is not such a count variation pattern. The ratio corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) is made low.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are prepared as the count variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is executed. Since only the variation pattern (variation numbers 5 and 6) which may be set to the number corresponds to the predetermined type (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. In contrast, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation timer presentation is not executed, and four variation patterns (variations) Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined type (variable numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect of the variation pattern is a count effect display (variation side timer effect) that can be performed (count variation pattern effect), it is more noticeable than when the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The ratio at which it is determined that the count effect display (notice side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect contents of the effect becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) without unnecessarily accumulating expectations and lowering the appearance frequency.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). ), The proportion of occurrence of the notice side timer effect varies depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect is not displayed at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variable numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the notice side timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

  Note that when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 is executed, the notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability, the big hit is actually larger than the case of the loss. The notice pattern timer effect is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability in the effect pattern that is won, and the variable number 22 is allowed to appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is displayed in advance according to whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio to be executed as the production contents (notice timer production) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type thereof Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the production pattern in which the production content of the same reach type appears (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer production is included as the production content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable timer effect is not included as the effect content. The ratio of the appearance of the effect (the ratio determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the notice lottery) is increased. In other words, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuating timer effect and notice timer effect) appear in one effect pattern just by expecting a big hit expectation enough to win the one notice timer effect in the notice lottery. As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of the big hit expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Even in such a case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “conversation notice” is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which “cut-in” is the effect target Then, the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers) is made different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. In combination with the fact that “the rate of occurrence of the notice timer effect is different depending on which count variation pattern is present”, the ease of appearance of the notice timer effect is recognized. You can expect.

  In addition, about the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) It may be different from (or at least different from) any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in (count effect display), or the same (or at least the same as) the same mode. .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (notice side count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be produced. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by allowing the player to recognize that the notice timer effect that is set to a high degree appears. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display). About the common aspect as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of aspects (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  Moreover, in order to make it possible to more appropriately recognize that the timer side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the timer side timer effect is executed, and a count display when the variable side timer effect is executed, It is desirable that the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or counting down) is made different. In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, the timer display is kept in focus even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative timer effect is relatively low. It becomes possible to give interest about which of the high-expectation notice-side timer effects is being executed, and to keep the game entertainment during the timer digestion period suitably.

  At this time, in the variation timer production, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer production according to the production target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count display is performed in the form (cut-in) and the mode in which the count display is performed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the notice timer presentation (conversation notice), whether or not the notice timer presentation is being executed. It is possible to add interest by varying the difficulty of the determination. In addition, in the variable timer effect (or notice side timer effect), the count number is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect occur simultaneously, it is easy to grasp whether the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment counts the change patterns corresponding to the change-side timer effect (count change patterns such as change numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.). A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is acquired, the variable side timer effect count display and the notice timer are determined so as to determine one of the plurality of effect patterns based on a random number for the effect. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the performance different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the notice timer performance is being performed is different. Let ’s give it some fun

  In this embodiment, the count display start timing or end timing (total count, or time required for all counts) differing from one variation pattern, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect targets and reach) The content of the production is the same), but multiple production patterns with different count display start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for all counts) (however, they are subject to production of timer production) A plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared and corresponded one-on-one with the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern.

  In addition, even if the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different for the side timer effect, it becomes possible to add interest by making it difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. .

  Also, if the notice timer performance is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display, and if the notice timer performance is executed, it is determined deterministically. It is expected that it will be possible to greatly improve the fun of gaming. In addition, the timer side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, while the variable side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed will vary depending on the effect, making it interesting. Can be granted.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the production target for the variable timer production and the notice timer production, and there are cases where different productions are used as the production target. To control. And, when the same production (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for production in the variable timer production and the notice timer production, compared with the case where the production different in the variation timer production and the notice timer production is targeted. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the big hit expectation is lowered is high, and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect is the first predetermined value. However, at this point in time, a different effect is targeted (the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation). Looks like). After that, since the other count display that has been continued reaches a predetermined value in a manner that it is clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the effect, it is ended first. Even if it is made clear that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production by the timer production on the end side, a different production that can appear afterwards is targeted for production ( It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved while maintaining a sense of expectation that the timer effect is being executed in a mode with relatively high expectations.

  In addition, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice timer effect is determined in advance. It is desirable to cause separate count end correspondence displays (for example, “Count Success!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) to appear at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, a variable side timer effect and a notice side timer effect with “conversation notice” executed as an effect on the variable side or the notice side appearing in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are simultaneously performed. In the variable timer effect, the variable side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production that occurs (such as “count success!” And effects that match the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer production is related to the “conversation notice”. A count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("chance UP!") That occurs as the notice side effect, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect). By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the conversation announcement and the cut-in effects are always executed when they are targeted for the effect of the variation timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value relative to the effect on the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effects to be produced for the variation timer production are incorporated in advance as the production contents of the production pattern (fluctuation production), and only the production pattern is executed, It is desirable that each of the produced effects (a mode with relatively high expectation) can appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to control so that the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) targeted for the effect is selected in the notice lottery. .

  In addition, if each of the conversation notice and cut-in effects is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the notice contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to what aspect (a relatively high-expectation aspect or a low-expectation aspect) to appear as the side effect content, and control related to the appearance is performed based on the result of the determination .

  Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination process using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

  That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, and the like from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, etc. Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation degree when a specific effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

  Next, as the production pattern associated with the variation number, a plurality of production patterns (a plurality of production patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display appearing in the variation timer production) are prepared so as to be selectable. If it is determined, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different count display start timing or end timing is selected based on the success of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display The slower the is, the higher the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired when a special performance condition is established. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable-side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern that appears during the symbol variation (the effect from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the variation stop) is selected in this way, what kind of notice effect is performed within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute additionally (composite) (notice lottery).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for a lottery concerning a notice effect that appears within the execution period (design variation time) of the effect pattern (a notice lottery performed within the effect symbol variation start process). Note that the notice lottery processing procedure described below is merely an example, and the notice lottery process procedure is not limited to this as long as the intended purpose as the notice effect is achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in the lottery for the advance notice, first, it is determined whether or not the change that is waiting to be started (holding to be digested) is a target of a timer pre-reading effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, when the timer pre-reading effect is targeted, the first timer notice lottery is performed (step S5502), whereas when the timer pre-reading effect is not targeted, the second timer notice lottery is performed (step S5502). S5521).

  That is, when the timer pre-reading effect is applied (first timer notice lottery), the notice side timer effect is executed as compared with the case where the timer pre-read effect is not provided (second timer notice lottery). The rate at which decisions are made is set to be high. Note that the ratio may include a ratio determined at 100%. Also, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for different game states, thereby making a decision to execute the notice side timer effect according to the game state. The percentages made (for example, in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the decision to execute the notice timer effect is made at a lower rate (including the percentage determined at 0%) than in the normal gaming state) is different. It has become.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of the timer notice determination table T2 that is referred to in the case where the change (holding to be digested) is not the target of the timer prefetch effect in the normal gaming state (second timer notice lottery). .

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of change pattern command (here, change numbers 1 to 6) is acquired, a notice timer effect is provided. The decision to execute is not made. The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, even in the production pattern in which the production contents of the same reach type appear in the second timer notice lottery (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22), the fluctuation side In the effect pattern in which the timer effect is included as the effect content (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), compared to the effect pattern in which the variation-side timer effect is not included as the effect content (for example, SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 and 16). Thus, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation-side timer effect, notice-side timer effect) can appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the notice lottery, As a result, the opportunity to produce a double timer can be realized without wasteful accumulation of winning expectations (winning the double timer production). The same applies to the first timer notice lottery and other game states.

  However, in the first timer notice lottery, the proportion of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is generally higher than the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer notice lottery, even if any of the variable numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the notice side is compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer notice lottery. The proportion of the decision to execute the timer effect is high.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the timer prefetching effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (low expectation mode, high expectation mode, and confirmation mode) in which the ratio of execution of the notice side timer effect is different in the variation to be prefetched. (Aspect) is executed. In the first timer notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer prefetching effect is being executed, and even if the prefetching is being executed in the low expectation form, the second timer notice lottery is performed. As compared with the timer notice determination table T2 referred to in (1), the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is set to be generally higher. In addition, when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the ratio of the decision to execute the notice side timer effect is generally higher than that in the low expectation mode, and the timer prefetching effect is increased. When executed in the fixed mode, it is set so that a determination to execute the notice side timer effect is always made regardless of the variation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

  If it is determined that the timer side timer effect is to be executed as a result of such timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 If the decision to execute the notice timer effect is not made (NO in step S5503) while the first mission effect lottery is performed, the second mission effect lottery is performed as the processing in step S5551.

  In other words, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started (the longer the time it takes for the timer to spend), the higher the expectation of jackpot expectation. Is set to have However, in this case, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the big hit expectation degree tends to be low. There was concern about a decline in interest.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment displays a “specific display related to the first effect” such as “Make the first effect appear” on the effect display device 1600, and the specific display. When the first effect occurs (appears) during the display of, a special display such as “Mission Success” appears, thereby making it possible to execute a mission effect that confirms that you have won the big hit.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, an effect type (here, a conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. That is, in this case, when the timer effect is executed while the specific display such as “Let the conversation notice (first effect) appear” appears (when the mission effect appears), the count display Even if the count display number (the total number of counts) displayed at the start of the timer is small, the target of the timer notice is to be “conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage”. It is possible to expect that the winner has been confirmed), and the count display will continue even after the end of the conversation notice because the count display count (total count) displayed when the count display starts is large. Even if it is a case, it can be expected that the big hit expectation will be high, so that it is possible to stably enhance the entertainment fun when the timer effect is executed Kill as to become.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in order to achieve a synergistic effect caused by such a timer effect and a mission effect more appropriately, a specific display related to the first effect (a conversation notice should appear) ) Is displayed, the notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Is going to do. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed simply by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear). Will be able to. The first effect targeted for mission display may not be “conversation notice”, and may be executed instead of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

Note that when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Any method may be adopted as a method of increasing the value, but for example, it can be realized by adopting any of the following methods.
a. First, determine whether to perform the mission effect. When it is determined to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the mission effect is not determined. Method for determining whether to appear b. First of all, it is determined whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is determined that the timer effect is performed, the mission effect is set so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when the timer effect is not determined. A method to determine whether to appear

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment employs the above-described method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) in the case where it is determined in step S5503 that the notice timer effect is won, it is not determined that the notice timer effect is won in step S5503. As compared with the second mission effect lottery in the case (step S5551), the proportion of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is increased. It is determined whether or not the mission is displayed within the variation (effect pattern).

  It should be noted that a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) and a timer pre-reading effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode) that suggest that the timer side timer effect is executed. (Mode) can be displayed at the same time. In addition, under a predetermined condition, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) appears higher when it appears.

  In addition, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (hold information that generates the mission effect) is obtained, You may enable it to display over a plurality of fluctuation displays until digested. At this time, if the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (the hold information that generates the mission effect) is a big hit hold information, the change that is executed before the big hit hold information is digested A special notice (successful mission) may be displayed by causing a conversation notice to appear in the display. However, when the special display (successful mission) is displayed in advance as described above (when the successful mission is displayed when the hold information for generating the mission effect is not yet digested), the loss variation display is executed. It is desirable to be limited to when you are. That is, in this case, although the special display (successful mission) is displayed, in the variable display where the special display appears, the losing pattern (lost effect) appears, but in this way, the special display (mission successful) is displayed. In this state, the hold information that is the target of the mission effect is digested and the jackpot symbol (the jackpot effect) is displayed in the variation display, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started while the mission effect and the timer prefetch effect are executed over a plurality of variations, It is possible to realize an effect as if the variation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the variation display in which the count display of the timer effect starts is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) that is referred to when a notice timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) These are figures which show an example of 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (2nd mission effect lottery) referred when a notice side timer effect is not performed in a normal game state.

  As is apparent from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, when the notice timer effect is not performed. Compared to the second mission effect determination table T3b to be referred to, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is set higher. Yes. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired even though the variation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the variation pattern in which “conversation notice” appears as a variation effect. Is set so as not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Has been. That is, since the variable numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach production (reach type with low expectation), both the timer production and the mission production occur in such a low expectation reach production, and the mission is successful. Then, there is a concern that the amusement interest of the game will be lowered because the desire “I wanted to see such a production with a type of reach production with a higher expectation” was not satisfied. For this reason, in the variation numbers 5 and 6, although it is a reach effect in which a variable timer effect with “conversation notice” as the effect target is performed, in either the first mission effect determination table T3a or the second mission effect determination table T3b Also, it is desirable to set so as not to execute the effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation pattern that causes the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. However, these variation numbers are acquired. Even when the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b are set, the mission effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed. Has been. This is because change numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are change patterns at the time of losing, and it is not possible to display the success of the mission (determining that you have won the jackpot) for production. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the change numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit change pattern that causes the “conversation notice” to appear as the change effect, and these change numbers 10, 14, When a specific display related to the first performance (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed when 18 and 22 are acquired, a message indicating that the mission has been successful (confirmed that the jackpot has been won) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (three times) so as to be significantly higher than the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the timer side timer effect is not performed. Yes. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  On the other hand, during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, and 20) in which “conversation notice” does not appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect, the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) When the message is displayed, there may be a production situation with a sense of incongruity such as “The conversation notice cannot be displayed despite the mission being displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission fails.” Absent. Accordingly, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the notice timer effect is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect. ) Is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared to the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the notice timer effect is not performed. Yes. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  However, as will be described later, when it is determined that a hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as a variation effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed, a relatively high probability. Thus, the control is performed such that the probability that “conversation notice” is executed as the content of the notice effect is increased (steps S5509 and S5534 described later). In view of the fact that such control is performed, the “conversation notice” is used as the effect of the fluctuation effect even for the hit fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that do not appear as the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. You may make it perform mission effect with the execution probability comparable as compared with the hit fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) made to appear as contents.

  On the other hand, variation numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach effects at the time of losing that “conversation notice” does not appear as the effect contents of the change effect. Such reach production can be executed in the form of a missed mission production without causing a “conversation notice” to appear. In the first mission effect lottery, the execution probability is set (three times) so as to be significantly higher than the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the timer side timer effect is not performed. Yes. Through such control, when the timer effect appears, it is possible to give an impression that the mission effect is likely to appear. This also applies to each table that is referred to when in another gaming state.

  As will be described later, it is determined that the mission effect is executed by acquiring the reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of losing that does not cause “conversation notice” to appear as the effect content of the change effect. In some cases, control is performed such that the probability that “conversation notice” is executed as the content of the notice effect is zero. This is because in the reach production at the time of losing, it is not possible to display the mission success (definite suggestion that you have won the big hit) for the production.

  According to such a configuration related to the mission effect, the production target of the timer effect (count effect display) is always the second effect (conversation notice) than the first effect (conversation notice) when the mission effect does not appear. It is more desirable to obtain a sense of anticipation than a production with a higher expectation (for example, cut-in or a later-described accessory action), and the production of the timer production (count production display) is the first production. When it is (conversation notice), the expectation cannot be obtained suitably. However, when the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (display the conversation notice appears) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect of the timer effect is the first effect. Since either the (conversation notice) or the second effect (cut-in) can be at least expected more than the expectation obtained by the second effect (cut-in), the timer effect You can enjoy with confidence.

  In addition, when such a specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the design effect (make the conversation notice appear). Since the appearance ratio of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when no icon is displayed, the game is simply displayed with the specific display related to the first effect (conversation notice). A decrease in interest can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that in realizing such effect control, the variable-side timer effect is not necessarily prepared so as to be executable, and may be realized only by the notice-side timer effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and cut-in (or a later-described accessory action) can be executed within one production pattern, and the conversation notice is cut-in (or a later-described role). Appears at a timing before (object movement). Therefore, if the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, the mission may be successful even if the count display number (total count) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is small. A reduction in expectation is suppressed from being conscious. Also, when the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started, the expectation can be suitably maintained only by that, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect appears can be improved. It is expected to be maintained stably.

  Also, as will be described later, the timing for displaying (mission display) the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is the period during which the symbol variation that is the target of the specific display is being performed. It is possible to appear not only in the middle but also in a period in which the symbol variation to be subjected to the specific display is still in a suspended state. In addition, in the situation where the specific indication related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed during the period when the symbol variation that is the target of the mission effect is still on hold, It will be described later that a special display such as “Mission Success” may appear when it occurs (appears).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the notice timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the notice timer effect as the processing of step S5505. .

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the notice timer type determination table T4 referred to in the notice timer type lottery (step S5505).

  As shown in FIG. 152, in this notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the notice side timer effect is executed in the single timer mode or the notice side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode. Random numbers are assigned with different distributions for each variable number. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment refers to the notice timer type determination table T4 based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and the obtained effect random number value is the single timer mode and double timer. The notice timer type lottery (step S5505) is executed by determining to which of the modes is assigned.

  The “single timer” to be determined in the notice timer type lottery corresponds to “a mode in which one notice side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern”, and “double timer”. Is equivalent to “a mode in which two notice-side timer effects with different effects are executed within one effect pattern”. In this notice side timer type determination table T4, effect random numbers are assigned for each variable number so that the big hit expectation is higher when the “double timer” appears than the “single timer”.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute the above-described variation timer effect depending on the type (variation number) of the variation pattern. Therefore, if it is determined that the notice timer presentation is to be executed in a single timer mode when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation appear in one production pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in a double timer (or triple timer) manner. Similarly, if it is determined that the notice side timer effect is to be executed in a double timer mode when the count variation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are included in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in a triple timer (or quadruple timer) mode.

  In other words, in this case, if the number of appearances of the notice timer effect (single, double) is determined regardless of whether the count variation pattern is selected, “appearance of timer effect appearing in one effect pattern” The relationship that “the larger the number, the higher the expectation of jackpot” may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the effect when the timer effect is executed (which aspect is the higher expectation) There is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest.

  Therefore, in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice side timer effect can appear. When a variation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that does not execute the variation-side timer effect is selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation) Accordingly, the SP reach having a relatively high expectation is more likely to select the double timer mode.

  On the other hand, among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice timer effect can appear, variation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation-side timer effects with different production targets. Is selected, only in the case of the SP reach with a relatively high expectation according to the reach type (a character reach with a relatively low expectation, a SP reach with a relatively high expectation). Is selected. That is, in this case, if two quadrature timer effects and two notice-side timer effects with different effects appear in one effect pattern, the type of SP reach that has a relatively high expectation will appear. In this way, it is definitely suggested that the production pattern is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. However, instead of this, if a quadruple timer mode appears due to the appearance of two variable-side timer effects and two notice-side timer effects with different effects in one effect pattern, it is definitely determined that a jackpot symbol appears. It may be suggested.

  When a variation pattern (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22) for executing two variation-side timer representations with different representation targets is selected, the single timer mode is selected in the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505). Even when is selected, the appearance of a triple timer appears when two variable-side timer effects and one notice-side timer effect with different effects appear in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer mode appears, the above-described timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern with a relatively low expectation. When the change numbers 13 and 14 to be selected are selected, the notification that the notice side timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability compared to the change numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to make a triple timer) (See the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

  On the other hand, a variation pattern (variation numbers 9-12, 17-20) for executing one variation-side timer effect is selected from among the variation patterns (variation numbers 7-22) in which the notice-side timer effect can appear. In the case of the character reach (variation numbers 9 to 12) having a relatively low expectation, the selection probability of the mode of the double timer is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation number) having a relatively high expectation is set. 17-20) is set such that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. In other words, in this case, coupled with the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, a triple timer mode (one variation side timer representation and two notice side timer representations, or two variation side timers in one production pattern). When a production and one notice timer production) appear, the rate of appearance of SP reach with a relatively high expectation rather than a character expectation with a relatively low expectation will increase. Will be able to.

  In the notice timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting either the single timer or the double timer is performed as the notice timer presentation type. However, for the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice side timer effect more than triple timer can be executed, and the count display mode of the notice side timer effect is expected. You may make it perform as a lottery process about whether it performs in which of several different aspects (for example, color difference etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 149, after the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed as described above, as a result of the notice-side timer type lottery (step S5505), the single timer mode and the double timer mode are determined. Which of the above is determined to perform the notice timer effect (step S5506), and further is determined to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507 and S532). Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeted for timer candidate candidate productions (preliminary production that can be the production target of the notice timer production) with the contents (table) according to each result of , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
-It is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and when it is in the first processing state where a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made, First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when in the first processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for (step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5509).

If it is in the second processing state that is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined not to be executed (NO in step S5507), First, based on the notice number determination table that is referred to in the second processing situation, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for (step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5524).

If it is in the third processing state that is a double timer mode (NO in step S5506) and that is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532), First, based on the notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the effect contents of the notice effect during execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for the above (step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5534).

If it is in the fourth processing state that is a mode of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and has been determined to not execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532), First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to in the fourth processing status, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. Judgment processing is performed for the above (step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of notice effect appears as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects by the number determined in the determination process, and which of the notice effects is to be the effect object of the timer effect. Is performed (step S5544).

  FIG. 153 shows the reach type when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) has not been made. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a comparison of upper limit numbers of appearances of timer target candidate effects determined according to the processing status (in addition to the first to fourth processing statuses, a fifth processing status and a sixth processing status, which will be described later). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), make the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). ) Is controlled so as to increase the upper limit number of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects as compared with the case where it is not determined to execute.

  That is, whether or not to perform the notice side timer effect, whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, whether or not the reach type is a relatively high expectation reach effect, Whatever the determination result, etc., if the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made, the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is increased as compared with the case where no is performed.

  Note that such processing setting is performed when the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect is executed (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544), or when a later-described notice-timer timer effect is not executed. This is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

  According to such a configuration, when a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, it is expected that the appearance ratio of the notice effect will increase and the average number of appearances will increase, thereby improving the game entertainment. Not only that, but if there are so many notice effects, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation may appear in these notice effects and the mission will be successful. become able to. As described above, the mission display target is required to have a relatively low expectation, such as a conversation notice, but it may not necessarily have the lowest expectation. When the types of effects that can be the effects of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, the type may be such that it is classified into a group with a relatively low degree of expectation. Or, it is a notice effect that appears at a timing earlier than the start of the reach effect because the expectation is lower than this and a relatively high expectation specific effect that appears after the reach effect is started. Also good.

  FIG. 154 is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and is in the first processing state in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5a referred in the process of step S5508 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 154, the table T5a is referred to when the notice timer effect or mission effect is executed, and therefore corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice timer effect cannot be executed. When variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to loss variation patterns (variation patterns that cannot be mission-successful) that cause conversation notices to appear as the contents of variation effects are obtained, T5a is never referenced.

  In addition, since the table T5a is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Also, in the table T5a, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the winning effects among the variable numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variable number 14. Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in the change numbers 10 to 12, as the effect content of the change effect. One timer object candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and when the variable number 14 is reached, two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the effect contents of the change effect. It is like that. Accordingly, in the case of the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the variable number 14, substantially two notice effects are provided. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is actually assigned to the number of notices 3, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 4. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  By the way, the effect pattern (Character Reach + Conversation Notice) that appears when the variable number is 10 has a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (Character Reach + Cut-in A) that appears when the variable number is 11 and 12. As described above. However, in the table T5a that is referred to in the first processing status, the variable number 10 is “the mission success (special display)” is displayed as an effect pattern that is then stopped with the big hit symbol. In view of the fact that it is “executed”, the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). Is used to improve the game entertainment when the mission success (special indication) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the number of notifications is more likely to increase as the variation number has a higher jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  As will be described later, in the character reach when in the first processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation) until the symbol variation is stopped. , A special timer) can appear. However, one of up to five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalizing effect (special timer), and even when a conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to mission success. When four or more candidate effects appear, a notice effect that confirms the big hit will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 7 that is the character reach at the time of losing, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number that is the character reach at the time of losing (cut-in A). 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects can appear (in reality, a maximum of three).

  On the other hand, in the SP reach when in the first processing state, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, The timing at which the cut-in B and the action B action) can appear is reached. However, when the conversation advance notice is selected, it functions as a jackpot effect due to the mission success, and therefore, when the six timer target candidate effects appear, the jackpot confirmed notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 15 that is SP reach at the time of loss, only up to five timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number that is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of loss. In No. 19, only up to four timer target candidate effects can appear (in reality, a maximum of five).

In addition, the example is described below about each effect prepared as said timer object candidate effect.
-Conversation notice: A line of a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation may vary depending on the contents of the line, but when the conversation notice appears, It is set lower than the production (holding change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action).
・ Hold change: Display corresponding to the hold display that has been subject to digestion even during symbol fluctuations performed in response to hold-up (display that corresponds to the hold display when in the hold state, although not already in the hold state) Is displayed, it changes the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has been digested, and the expected jackpot expectation may change depending on the display mode after the change. The big hit expectation degree at the time when the pending change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.
Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effects performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in A appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.
-Action A action: Operates any of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action A action appears is set lower than the action B action.
Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed with respect to the effect that is being performed during symbol variation, and the expectation of jackpot when the cut-in B appears is the role A It is set lower than the operation and the action B operation.
-Action B action: Operates one of the above-described production movable bodies, and the big hit expectation when the action B action appears is another effect (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A , The action A operation, the cut-in B) is set higher. The production movable body that is operated by the accessory B operation may be the same as or different from the production movable body used in the accessory A operation, but the operation is performed when the same production movable body is used. The aspect will be different.

  Each of these effects can be executed as a timer-targeted effect, and before the count display is executed, during, after execution, or during a variable period in which the timer effect is not executed. Can be executed as an effect which is not subject to the timer. In addition, each of these effects may be executable in any of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, such as a blue cut-in A and a red cut-in A, for example. Moreover, about a pending | holding change, you may make it include the premier aspect (special aspect) which becomes jackpot decision when it appears. However, in this case, if a premier aspect (special aspect) appears during the execution of the count display, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the hold change is not executed as the target of the timer effect.

  FIG. 155 shows a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and is in the second processing state in which it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5b referred in the process of step S5523 in that case.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the notice timer presentation is executed, the change number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice timer presentation cannot be executed. When .about.6 is acquired, the table T5b is not referred to. However, since the reference is made when the mission effect is not executed, the change numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss change pattern (the change pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect. , 21 is acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5b, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Similarly, the table T5b is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a single timer, so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected for each variable number so as to be selected. Is allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the notice effect.

  Similarly, in the table T5b, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12, whereas Only a maximum of one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variation numbers 13 and 14 with relatively high expectations. However, in variation numbers 7 and 8, a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in change numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the change effect. Two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as variable effect effects contents when the variable numbers 13 and 14 are reached. It has become. Therefore, in the case of the variable numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the case of the variable numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notices are provided. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the change number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that the production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 3, the change numbers 7 to 7 corresponding to the character reach production are provided. It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable effects are assigned so as to appear most easily.

  Note that, in SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than in character reach.

  In addition, in table T5b, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as table T5a. However, since the table is referenced when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects is smaller than T5a.

  FIG. 156 is a mode of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and is in the third processing situation in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5c referred in the process of step S5533.

  First, as shown in FIG. 156, the table T5c is also referred to when the notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, and therefore corresponds to a variation pattern in which the notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to loss variation patterns (variation patterns that cannot be mission-successful) that cause conversation notices to appear as the contents of variation effects are obtained, T5c is never referenced.

  However, since the table T5c is referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Also, in the table T5c, among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, up to four timer target candidate effects are allocated to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and only up to three timer target candidate effects are allocated to the variation number 14. Not. However, in the variation numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in the change numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the change effect is 1 Two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in) appear, and when the variable number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as effect contents of the variable effect. ing. Accordingly, in the case of the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the variable number 14, substantially two notice effects are provided. It is synonymous with each being assigned.

  Then, for example, in the variable number 14, an effect random number of “400” is assigned to the number of notices 4, and an effect random number of “600” is assigned to the number of notices 5. Therefore, it can be said that among the variation numbers 7, 8, 10-12, and 14 corresponding to the character reach production, the most notice productions are assigned most easily.

  In addition, in the character reach when in the third processing state, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer until the symbol fluctuation is stopped) ) Has come to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit finalizing effect (special timer), and when a conversation advance notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to a successful mission. When 4 or more appear, a notice effect of confirming the big hit (mission success or special timer) will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variation at the time of losing is up to three (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is limited to three). Is not allowed to appear.

  In addition, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot finalizing effect (special timer), the notice number 5 is selected when the variable number is 8, or the notice is provided when the variable numbers are 10 and 12. When the number 4 is selected and the notice number 3 is selected when the variable number is 14, the execution of the jackpot finalizing effect (special timer) is determined. As described above, when the notice timer presentation is executed in the double timer mode, the rate of appearance of the special timer described later is higher than when the notice timer presentation is executed in the single timer mode. In addition to winning the jackpot, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the game will shift to a high-probability short-time state and that a 16-round jackpot game will be executed. In particular, it is a double timer mode and when the mission effect is executed, it is possible to have such a sense of expectation even more effectively. It will be possible to create a directing situation.

  By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variable number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears when the variable numbers are 11 and 12. This is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to when in the third processing status, the variation number 10 is “the mission success (special display) is displayed, and then the effect pattern is stopped with the big hit symbol” In view of the fact that it is “executed”, the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than in the case of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). Is used to improve the game entertainment when the mission success (special indication) is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. . However, in the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10 and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, The variation number 20 at the time of hitting has a higher number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect than the variation number 18 (the number of notifications is more likely to increase as the variation number has a higher jackpot expectation). In SP reach, the appearance ratio (average appearance number) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

  As will be described later, in the SP reach when in the third processing state, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, change on hold, cut-in A, accessory A operation) until symbol variation is stopped , The cut-in B, the action B action) can appear. However, when the conversation advance notice is selected, it functions as a jackpot effect due to the mission success, and therefore, when the six timer target candidate effects appear, the jackpot confirmed notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, up to five variable numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of losing (the total of the number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the notice side is up to five). However, the timer target candidate effect is not allowed to appear.

  FIG. 157 shows an aspect of a double timer (NO in step S5506) and is in a fourth processing situation in which it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5d referred in the process of step S5543.

  First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the notice timer presentation is executed, the change number 1 corresponding to the change pattern in which the notice timer presentation cannot be executed. When .about.6 is acquired, the table T5d is not referred to. However, since the reference is made when the mission effect is not executed, the change numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss change pattern (the change pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect. , 21 is acquired, the table T5b is also referred to. Therefore, in the table T5d, production random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each number of notices.

  Similarly, the table T5d is also referred to when the notice-side timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer, so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected for each variable number so as to be selected. Is allocated. However, for the variation number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the change effect, it is not always necessary to assign two timer object candidate effects as the effect content of the notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be allocated as the effect content of the notice effect according to the effect content, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21).

  Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effects, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects among the variation numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are reached for the winning effects of the variable numbers 13 and 14. Only allocated. However, in variation numbers 7 and 8, a timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect, whereas in change numbers 9 to 12, 1 as the effect content of the change effect. Two timer object candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as variable effect effects contents when the variable numbers 13 and 14 are reached. It has become. Therefore, in the case of the variable numbers 9 to 12, it is synonymous with the fact that one more notice effect is assigned respectively. In the case of the variable numbers 13 and 14, substantially two notices are provided. It is synonymous with the production being assigned to each.

  Then, for example, since the change number 14 is substantially synonymous with the fact that a production random number of “1000” is assigned to the number of notices 4, the change numbers 7 to 10 corresponding to the character reach production. It can be said that among the fourteen, the most noticeable effects are assigned so as to appear most easily.

  Note that, in SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22) having a relatively high degree of expectation, the same relationship as that of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance ratio (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than in character reach.

  In addition, in the table T5d, the production random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as the table T5c, but since the mission production is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission production is not executed. The upper limit number of appearances (average appearance number) of the timer candidate candidate effects is smaller than T5c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), it is determined whether the notice side timer effect is performed in either the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step S5505). S5506), and further, a candidate for a timer with contents (tables T5a to d) according to each result of whether or not a mission effect is determined as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507 and S5532) After determining the number of appearances of the effect (notice effect that can be the effect of the timer timer effect) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), the determined number of notifications of any type as the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects Make a production appear, and then select one of them A determination process as to whether to effect target Ma effect (step S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  FIG. 158 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which a decision to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T6a-1 referred when it is determined to make the number of notices into 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158, this table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of a single timer. Therefore, one notice effect that is determined to be executed as a timer object candidate effect is automatically set as an effect object of the notice timer effect (in the figure, the ○ mark indicates the notice timer effect effect). It is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N timer object candidate effects are determined. A notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as a notice object of the notice timer effect.

  In addition, it is a case where it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, and N-1 of them (1 in the single mode, 2 in the double mode) ) When the following number of effects are targeted for the effect of the timer timer effect (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even when N effects of the same effect combination are selected as the timer target candidate effects: It is desirable that the degree of jackpot expectation varies depending on which of these effects is determined as the notice timer effect. For example, a first effect that appears at a relatively early timing in one effect pattern (for example, a conversation notice) and a later effect that appears at a relatively late timing in one effect pattern (for example, an accessory A) Motion) is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the later effect (for example, the action A action) is performed on the notice side effect than when the previous effect (for example, conversation notice) is selected as the effect object of the notice side effect timer. The ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol (special display mode) is set to be higher when the timer is to be produced (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when a variation number for executing “conversation notice” or “cut-in A, B” is acquired as the contents of the effect of the change effect, As the production contents, “conversation notice” and “cut-in A, B” can be determined. However, as a result, if it is determined that the same effect appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the notice effect, the control is not performed so that it appears separately as the effect content of the notice effect. A process of setting an effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) that appears as the effect contents of the effect as an effect target of the notice side timer effect is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, and S544).

  For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), when the “conversation notice” is determined as the production content of the notice effect with the variable numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, or “cut” with the variable numbers 11 to 14. When “In A” is determined as the content of the notice effect, or when “Cut-in B” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect with the variation numbers 19 to 22, the effect content of the change effect and the effect of the notice effect It is determined that the same production appears in both the contents. However, here, the control to make it appear separately as the content of the effect of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the content of the effect of the change effect is set as the effect object of the notice timer effect. Processing is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the notice effect, this is separately provided as the effect content of the notice effect. The specific effect on the side that appears separately (the content of the effect of the notice effect) may be set as the effect object of the notice side timer effect.

  In addition, this table T6a-1 (number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear), and is also shown in FIG. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the variation effect, or “conversation notice” is selected as the timer target candidate effect (the contents of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (successful mission) is displayed and it is definitely suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

  In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 when the “conversation notice” is executed as the contents of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, and when the “conversation notice” is not performed as the contents of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining “conversation notice” as the production content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when “conversation notice” is determined as the content of the notice effect in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are subject to the “conversation notice”. In this way, when two timer effects target the same effect, the big hit expectation is basically compared to the case where the two timer effects target different effects. This is because the degree is set to be low. As a result, it is possible to relatively reduce the appearance ratio of the special display (mission success) when both the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation are directed to the “conversation notice”.

  This is also the case with the production contents of the fluctuation effects other than the “conversation notice”. For example, among the fluctuation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, the fluctuation numbers that do not execute “cut-in B” as the production contents of the fluctuation effects. Among 15 and 16, 150 production random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 15 at the time of losing, whereas 250 production random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 16 at the time of winning. On the other hand, among the variation numbers 19 and 20 in which “cut-in B” is executed among the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the SP reach, the variation number 19 at the time of losing includes 250 production random numbers. On the other hand, only 200 production random numbers are assigned to the variation number 20 at the time of hitting.

  In other words, in this case, when “Cut-in B” is targeted only for the fluctuation timer presentation at the fluctuation numbers 15 and 16, both the fluctuation timer presentation and the notice timer presentation appear at the fluctuation numbers 19 and 20. Thus, compared to the case where both of them are “cut-in B” as a production target, the ratio of appearance of the big hit symbol becomes higher. As a result, in the situation where two timer effects are counted and displayed at the same time, whether or not those timer effects reach the predetermined numerical value with the same effect target will function as an important effect element. Amusement entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 of the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation) In the mode of the special timer that targets the effects that appear after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the performance pattern instead of the effect that appears in the game It can be decided to execute the notice side timer effect. Although this special timer will be described later, in this embodiment, even if it is decided to generate a special timer in the processing of step S5509, the special timer may not appear, and its execution The execution mode of the special timer, including the presence / absence of this, is determined in the process of the subsequent step S5514.

  Here, the notice-side timer effect may have a relatively high jackpot expectation even if the total number of counts from when the count display is started to when it is small (such as when it is started from the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable side timer effect, control is performed so that the expected level suggested by the timer effect is always lower than when the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, compared to when it is large. May be.

  As will be described later, such a special timer not only definitely suggests that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the performance pattern, but when it appears, it has a high probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot. It can be said that it is more beneficial for the player than a timer effect that is directed to other effects in that the rate at which the game is executed is relatively high. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission effect, the appearance ratio of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling, a sense of expectation when a special display (when the mission is successful) appears more suitably (steps S5509, S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (the number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where a special timer can appear, the variable timer effect (mission success) for the effect of the conversation notice appears. 100 random numbers are assigned to the special timers for the fluctuation numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, while the variable timer effect (successful mission) for which the conversation notice is directed is not appearing. In the variable numbers 8 and 12, only 50 production random numbers are allocated to the special timer.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation) The expectation when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) appears by controlling the appearance rate of the special timer to be higher than when the notice is not made (steps S5524 and S5544). Is more suitably played.

  In addition, when the timer effect is performed in a double manner with the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the appearance rate of the special timer is smaller than when the timer effect is performed in the double manner with only the notice timer effect. It is set to be low. Also, even if the timer effect is performed in a triple manner with one variable timer effect and two notice timer effects, one of the notice timer effects is the same effect as the variable timer effect. In this case, the appearance ratio of the special timer is set to be lower than that in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect target in the notice side timer effect and the variable side timer effect.

  FIG. 159 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a figure which shows an example of table T6b-1 referred when it is determined that the number of notices is set to 1 as a result of performing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach where a special timer may appear, 50 effect random numbers are assigned, and 20 effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 8 and 12. As described above, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is used compared to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance ratio of is set to be low.

  Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is referred to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (the number of notices 1) is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot be successful) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each number of notices.

  In addition, in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, and 22, the variation timer production with the “conversation notice” as the production target appears as the production content of the fluctuation production. When “conversation notice” is selected as the production content, both the variable timer presentation and the notice timer presentation are executed with “conversation notice” as the production target. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1), when “conversation notice” is selected in the variable numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22, the variable numbers “ The production random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of jackpot is lower than when “conversation notice” is selected.

  The contents of the effect of the fluctuating effect other than such “conversation notice” are the same. For example, “cut-in B” that both the fluctuating timer effect and the notice timer effect can be effected in SP reach, Allocation is performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described table T6a-1 (number of notices 1).

  Similarly, this table T6b-1 (step S5524: number of notices 1) is also referred to when it is decided to execute the notice side timer effect in the single timer mode. One notice effect that is determined to be executed as a timer target candidate effect is naturally set as an effect object of the notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (two or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5524: number N of notices), N timer object candidate effects are determined. The same applies to the determination of the notice effect and the determination of one of them as the effect subject of the notice timer effect.

  Timer target notice lottery (step S5534, when the notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode, in contrast to the timer target notice lottery (step S5509, S5524) when the notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode. In S5544), when both the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are the same effect, it is a big hit compared to the effect where the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect are different effects. The production random numbers are basically distributed in the same manner such that the degree of expectation is set low.

  FIG. 160 is an aspect of a double timer (NO in step S5506), and in the fourth processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of table T6d-2 referred when the number of notices is determined to be 2 as a result of performing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

  As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: number of notices 2) is referred to when it is decided to execute the notice side timer effect in the form of a double timer. For this reason, both of the two notice effects that are determined to be executed as the timer object candidate effects are set as the effect objects of the notice timer effect. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer object candidate effects (step S5544: number N of notice), N timer object candidate effects are determined. At the same time, the notice effect is determined and two of them are determined as the effects of the notice timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in other production situations.

  As shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the same effect, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect It is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the case where an effect that is different from is targeted for the effect.

  Also, when one of the two notice effects selected as the notice side effect timer is the same effect object as the variable side effect timer, one of the two notice effects selected as the special notice side effect timer is on the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than the case where it is not the same production target as the production timer.

  In particular, in the case of the variable numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22, when both of the two notice effects selected as the notice side effect timer are the same effect targets as the two variable side effect timers that appear in one effect pattern. The expectation of jackpot is significantly lower.

  As shown in FIG. 149, as a result of such a timer target notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which of the timer target candidate effects should appear, the notice timer performance effects When the target is determined, a count display lottery is performed as the processing of step 510 next.

  In this count display lottery (step 510), each effect determined to appear as a timer target candidate effect is caused to appear at any timing within one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern), and further to the effect object. A determination is made as to which timing within the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) to execute the notice-side timer effect that is counted and displayed. In this determination, when the appearance timing of the effect that is the subject of the notice timer effect is late, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is compared to when the appearance timing of the effect that is the subject of the notice timer effect is early. It is desirable to be performed so that the appearance ratio of) increases.

  FIG. 161 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507), It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number equivalent to a character reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 161, first, as an effect on the change effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which regular production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative design has reached the reach in the background at the time of normal production,-Character reach production period in which the production progresses by switching to a different background from the normal production, and-Winning of the big hit It is determined that each period such as a symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol), as shown in the figure, appears sequentially within a 50 second variation time (period in which symbol variation is performed). (Refer to the lines of “variable time” and “variable PTN effect” in the figure).

  Also, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, after the variable side timer effect is started as the effect pattern at the start of the symbol change and displayed for 10 seconds, the “conversation notice” is displayed. ”And the fact that the variable timer presentation is started again after a predetermined time has elapsed and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in A ”is made to appear.

  As described above, even if it is one variation pattern (variation number), the production pattern is not limited to this, and the variation timer production is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is displayed for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select other performance patterns that cause a “conversation notice” to appear after. Moreover, although this was also mentioned above, selection of such an effect pattern has been performed before the lottery (each process shown by FIG. 149) regarding the said notice effect.

  Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), it is determined in the timer subject notice lottery (in this case, step S5524) while the production periods appear in sequence and the production contents on the variable side are already decided. A determination is made as to at what timing each of the effect target of the notice side effect timer that has been made and the notice side effect timer that counts and displays the effect object. In addition, in addition to the timer target candidate effects that are the effects of the notice-side effect timer in the timer object notice lottery, if the timer target candidate effects that are not to be effected are further determined, The appearance timing is also determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

  For example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524), as shown in FIG. In this manner, it is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the aspect of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation degree of the big hit, and the big hit expectation degree is selected as the number increases. Probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the jackpot winning or fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 7 to 14). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the contents of the effect of the change effect are acquired, the notification effect of the notice effect is also obtained in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524). When “conversation notice” is determined as the production content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the effect content of the variation effect, the count indication of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variation effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the contents of the notice effect are “suspended”. If “change” is determined, it is determined in either of the changes 1 to 5 that the hold change is to be executed and the timer side timer effect is executed, and “cut-in A” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If it is, it is determined which cut-in A and notice side timer effect are to be executed in any of the cut-in A1 to A3, and “act A action” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If the action A action 1 to 4 is executed, it is determined whether the action A action and the notice timer production are executed respectively. If Ma "is determined so that the determining whether to perform the announcement side timer effect in any aspect of special timers 1 and 2.

  In this embodiment, in the selection of any of the changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3 and the accessory A actions 1 to 4 in the figure, the smallest number of aspects is the highest hit expectation degree. The selection probabilities are set so that the big hit expectation increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are effects that indicate that the big hit symbol (special display mode) always appears.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment has three timings at which the notice-side timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although it is prepared (at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F), the appearance timings of them are a plurality of types of timer object notices (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in) A, an accessory A operation, and a special timer). Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, a little before the appearance timing of the notice E2, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of count display totals are prepared as the notice side timer effect appears ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and which of the count display total number is displayed, it is predicted which production is the production target. The structure is difficult.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds at a timing that comes slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds or 30 seconds, the notice timer effect with the total number of count displays can appear. However, when a notice timer effect with a total count display of 10 seconds appears, it is difficult to predict which of the conversation notice 3 and the hold change 3 is being executed only in the character reach effect pattern. Even when the notice timer effect with the total count display of 20 seconds appears, either the hold change 4 or the cut-in A2 mode is executed only in the effect pattern of the character reach. It is difficult to predict.

  In this regard, when a notice-side timer effect having a total count display of 30 seconds appears at a timing that arrives slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the plurality of appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is displayed. If it sees, only the aspect of the action A operation | movement 2 can be performed. However, looking at the SP reach effect pattern (see FIG. 162) described later, the mode of the action A action 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, so the appearance timing of the notice E2 is a little. Even if the timer side timer effect with the total count display of 30 seconds appears at the timing of the previous arrival, the timer side timer effect can be performed in any manner, including whether it is a character reach or an SP reach. It is difficult to predict what will be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the notice timer production appears, it is unknown which production is the production target (the big hit expectation varies depending on the type of the production to be produced). Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained until the count display of the timer effect becomes a specific numerical value (0 in this case). In this embodiment, when a notice timer effect with the same count display total number appears at the same timing, the effect target is basically a conversation notice (unless there is a balance with a mission effect or the like). When the jackpot expectation is the lowest, the jackpot expectation is set to gradually increase in the order of the hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, when the notice side timer effect appears, a plurality of count display totals (the big hit expectation varies depending on the length of the number of seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. When the notice timer effect appears, it becomes possible to give an interest about which count display total number is, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the notice timer effect appears. .

  In this embodiment, even if it is a notice side timer effect that appears at any timing, the effect target is made difficult to predict at the time of appearance, but one effect target for the total count display count It is also possible to include a mode in which the production target is set to be predictable by associating only (for example, a special timer). Further, the appearance timing at which the notice timer effect may appear may include an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is made the effect of the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, The side timer effect and the notice timer effect are counted for the same number of seconds, or the count display is terminated at the same timing. However, as described above, the end timing of each count display is actually made different even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is used for the effect on the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. One of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect reaches the specific numerical value (0 in this case) first and is terminated, whereas the other count display is continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), it is described as if the timer effect count display is made in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is “seconds”. Is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for the change in the number on the count display may be different between the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, or the time required for the change in each number in the count display that appears in the change-side timer effect is constant. It does not have to be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when “special timer” is determined as the effect contents of the notice effect, the notice timer effect in either of the special timers 1 and 2 is used. Is going to decide what to do. In other words, in this case, after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach), when 20 seconds have passed (during the jackpot game execution period), the count display is set to a specific numerical value (here, 0). Will be reached. After this, an effect (for example, a hit type for shifting to a high-probability short-time state or a hit type in which a 16-round jackpot game is performed) is started that suggests that it is a type advantageous to the player as a jackpot type. However, such a special timer mode is set in step S5514 described later.

  In this embodiment, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511). It may be set in step S5514.

  In addition, when the count display is started after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display, not the timing at which the variable display according to the hold information is started, the timer pre-reading effect described later is not executed. Alternatively, an aspect (for example, during timer preparation) that is displayed in a timer pre-reading effect described later may appear (for example, appear at a predetermined probability) over a predetermined time until the count display is started.

  FIG. 162 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the fluctuation number equivalent to SP reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, as shown in FIG. 162, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side,
・ Normal production period during which regular production is performed,
-Normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background of the normal production,-Character reach production period where the production progresses by switching to a different background from the normal production,
・ The SP reach production period that appears in the form of the progress of the production, and the decoration design is stopped to show the winning of the jackpot (the jackpot design, the lost design) Each period such as the symbol stop period is determined to appear in order within a fluctuation time of 90 seconds (period in which symbol fluctuation is performed) ("fluctuation time" in the figure), (See “Variable PTN Production” line).

  Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, after the variable side timer effect is started as the effect pattern at the start of the symbol change and displayed for 10 seconds, the “conversation notice” is displayed. ”, And after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable side timer effect is restarted and displayed for 10 seconds, and then“ cut-in B ”appears.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), even if the variation pattern (variation number) is one, Is not limited to this, but it is also possible to select other effect patterns such as starting the fluctuating timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol change, and displaying the “conversation notice” after counting it for 5 seconds. ing.

  In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when “conversation notice” is determined as the effect of the notice effect in the timer object notice lottery (here, step S5524), As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in any of the conversation notices 1 to 6 whether the conversation notice and the notice timer presentation are to be executed. In this embodiment, among the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the aspect of the conversation notice 1 is the aspect with the lowest expectation degree of the big hit, and the selection is made so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher as the number increases. Probability is set. Accordingly, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the jackpot win or fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 15 to 22). It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

  However, in the same manner, when the change numbers 17, 18, 21, and 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, the notice is also given in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When “conversation notice” is determined as the production content of the production, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation announcement performed as the effect content of the variation effect, the count indication of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variation effect without causing the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The control to be performed is executed (mode of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, the timer target notice lottery (in this case, step S5524) shows “pending” as the contents of the notice effect. When “change” is determined, it is determined which of the change changes 1 to 7 to execute the hold change and the notice timer production, and “cut-in A” is decided as the notice contents of the notice effect. In the case where the cut-in A and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed, it is determined whether the cut-in A or the notice-side timer effect is executed, and “act A action” is determined as the effect content of the notice effect. If the action A action 1 to 4 is selected, it is determined whether the action A action and the notice timer effect are to be executed, respectively. In the case where “In B” is determined, it is determined in which of cut-in B 1 to 5 the cut-in B and the notice-side timer effect are to be executed. "" Is determined, it is determined in any of the modes B operation 1 to 4 whether to execute the combination B operation and the notice timer presentation.

  In this SP reach example as well, any change selection of hold changes 1-7, cut-in A1-5, accessory A operation 1-4, cut-in B1-5, accessory B operation 1-4 in the figure. Also, the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expected degree of jackpot, and the selection probability is set so that the degree of jackpot expectation increases as the number increases.

  In the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the notice timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed are prepared (at the start of change, notice E2). A little before the appearance timing of the announcement, a little before the appearance timing of the notice F, a little before the end of the normal reach production period, a timing at which the SP reach production period starts within the character reach production period), and a notice timer at these timings It is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 161 in that it is difficult to predict which effect will be produced when an effect appears.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, a mode (for example, a timer for 40 seconds for cut-in B) in which only one production target is associated with the total count display count and the production target is set to be predictable, or a notice is given. The appearance timing at which the side timer effect may appear includes an appearance timing at which only one count display total appears (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period starts).

  Thus, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the notice effect or the notice timer effect produced in the timer object notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of notice effects produced in the timer object notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effect that is designated as the notice object of the notice timer effect, the appearance time of the effect that is not the object of the notice timer effect Etc. are also determined. In addition, when the notice timer effect is executed in the double timer mode, at what timing each of the two notice timer effects and the effects to be produced appear (two notice timer effects) (Including whether or not the count display is executed at the time of overlap) is further determined.

  However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of the notice effects determined in the timer object notice lottery, whether or not it is a double timer mode, and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are executed. Depending on the processing status such as whether or not, it is desirable that the notice effect determined in the timer target notice lottery, the appearance time of the notice timer effect, etc. be determined in different modes. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, if a conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the start of fluctuation, there will be a lack of dramatic excitement. It is desirable to make it easier to select a conversation notice that appears at a later stage. In addition, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when a situation in which the count displays proceed simultaneously is performed, rather than when each count display is executed in a period in which each count display does not overlap within one effect pattern. The selection ratio is higher when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously than when the situation where each count display progresses simultaneously does not appear. It is desirable to do. Further, when the number of the notice effects produced by the timer object notice lottery is two or more, the appearance times of the notice effects are determined so that the notice effects do not appear at the same time.

  It should be noted that the timing at which the notice-side timer effect can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, slightly before the appearance timing of the notice F, slightly before the end of the normal reach effect period, the character reach effect period Among them, the timing for starting the SP reach production period is within the period during which each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation) can be performed. It is desirable to set. In other words, in this case, the notice timer production is started even if the notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, or the notice effect is performed even if the notice timer presentation is not started at a particular timing. It can be expected that the decrease in the entertainment interest will be suppressed. Further, since a notice effect appears at a specific timing, and an effect situation in which a notice side timer effect is started may also occur, it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In this case, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change (at a specific timing), the notification effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the notice side timer effect is started is higher than the time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the state of the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery becomes a special timer as the process of step S5511. It is determined whether it is possible.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, in addition to the timer target candidate effect (notice effect that can be the effect object of the notice side timer effect), non-target The non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and the non-target notice F can be executed as the notice effects (notice effects that cannot be the subject of the notice timer effect). Of these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice side timer effect In the situation where the count display is performed, the expectation of jackpot is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

  In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. While there is a relationship in which the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol (a specific symbol aspect) appears is lower than when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed, it is counted A notice-side timer effect (count effect) so that the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol (a specific symbol aspect) appears is higher than when the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. Display) can be executed. Therefore, the timer-side notice effect (not subject notice E2 (during the count display execution period) in which count display is performed in a manner that greatly increases the degree of expectation when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears in this way. The timer effect) at which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a “special timer”.

  That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is While being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a higher expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect). Accordingly, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect of the timer side timer effect (count effect display), the non-target notice E2 (the first effect) before the count display is exhausted. It will be possible to have an interest in whether or not a single production) will appear, thereby maintaining the game entertainment in the period until the count display is digested and a predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. It is expected to be planned.

  In addition, when the count display is started with a small number of counts with a notice side timer effect, the big hit expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with a large number of counts with a notice side timer effect, By realizing such control related to the special timer, even if the count display is started with a small total number of counts with a notice timer effect, the non-target notice E2 is being executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility of appearing, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premier mode in which the jackpot is confirmed with the effects (conversation notice, cut-in, actor action, etc.) that are the targets of the subsequent timer effects. It is desirable to control so that the rate of occurrence of becomes high. Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is a condition that the non-target notice E1 appears. It is supposed to appear in Further, the non-target notice E3 can appear on the condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 have appeared, and in this embodiment, a jackpot symbol always appears when the non-target notice E3 appears. I am doing so. According to such a configuration, when the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice-side timer effect is being performed, the user is interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest during the count digestion period.

  However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as so-called step effects, and are not necessary for realizing the above-described effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. The target notices E1 and E3 are not necessarily prepared. Further, the order of appearance of the non-target notice F after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is not limited to this. For example, the non-target notice F (second effect) appears after the non-target notice F (second effect) appears. The target notice E2 (first effect) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may appear first among all the notice effects, or may appear last among all the notice effects. May be set appropriately. Further, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related to (implying) the type of reach effect executed in the variable display.

  In addition, when the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 is performed in any of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in a mode with the highest expected degree of jackpot, even if the count display is not performed, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than that of the non-target notice F. . However, when comparing the jackpot expectation degree (expected degree including all aspects) expected when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is not performed with the jackpot expectation degree expected when the non-target notice F appears, It is required that the big hit expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

  In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the state where the count display is performed (in the case of a special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including a mode with low expectation of big hit In addition, it is desirable that the big hit expectation is higher than the non-target notice F regardless of which mode appears. That is, in this case, since the non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation of jackpot, an effect situation in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is dramatically increased is created. Even if it appears disappointing for a moment, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in a surprise manner by confirming that the count display is executed. In this sense, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low expectation of jackpot even in such a special timer situation, and the non-target notice E2 can be executed in any mode including the low mode. It is desirable that the expected degree of appearance of the jackpot symbol be the same even if the above is executed (further, whether or not another notice effect is generated). Note that the degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 is caused to appear in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set so that a highly expected aspect among the plurality of aspects is likely to appear.

  In addition, when the count display across the non-target notice E2 is executed, for example, even when the count display starts with any of the different total counts (for example, “10” and “5”), the same number (for example, It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when “1”). Also, at this time, among the candidates as the total number of counts that appear at the start of the count display (for example, “20”, “10”, “5”), less than half of the candidates with the smallest total number of counts (for example, “5”) It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when the number (number less than 2.5) is reached. In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the count display finishes being exhausted, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during the period until the count display is exhausted.

  Note that the non-target notice F may be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, but in a special timer situation, the non-target notice F has the highest jackpot expectation. Even if it appears in the form, it is required that the non-target notice F is set so that the big hit expectation is not higher than the non-target notice E2 (for example, the aspect with the lowest big hit expectation).

  Further, the non-target notice E2 may be allowed to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the start of the variable display. That is, in this case, even when the count display appears with the same total number of counts at the same time, there are cases where the non-target notice E2 is straddled and when there is no straddle. It is expected to maintain.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears within the count display execution period among candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern). Such a mode is not included.

  As shown in FIG. 149, if it is determined in step S5511 that the notice timer presentation effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 is performed. When the first timer non-target notice lottery is performed as the process of step S5525 and it is determined that the notice timer presentation effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the process of step S5525 The second timer non-target notice lottery will be performed.

  The case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, an effect mode (for example, FIG. 161, conversation announcements 2, 3, hold changes 2-4, cut-in A1, 2, and accessory actions 1, 2, etc.) are selected, and whether or not the production mode can be a special timer. Are classified in advance.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of table T7b.

  As shown in FIG. 163 and FIG. 164, in the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512, S5525), it cannot be a production target of the notice timer production based on the big hit result or fluctuation pattern (variation number). A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F prepared as effects is to be executed.

  Among these, the table T7a (first timer non-target notice lottery) referred to at the time of the special timer has the notice E2 compared to the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when not the special timer. The big hit expectation degree when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) to perform is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is higher than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected. ing.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) that is referred to when the timer is not a special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode for executing the notice E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected. The jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  In this embodiment, when the table T7a that is referred to at the time of the special timer is compared with the table T7b that is referred to when the timer is not the special timer, the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers, and there is a change in the jackpot expectation level. However, when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected, there is no change in the jackpot expectation level, and even the production random number distribution changes. It is not the same.

  According to such an effect by the special timer, when the count display is executed in a mode (special timer mode) straddling the non-target notice E2, a mode of straddling the non-target notice F without straddling the non-target notice E2 ( Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode that is not a special timer), the ratio of the high-expected performance mode that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the jackpot symbol appears when the design effect is stopped The ratio comes to be high.

  Furthermore, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, the one symbol in which the count effect is not executed. In the production, the non-target notice F (second production) is not executed, and the ratio of appearance of the jackpot symbol is higher than when the non-target notice E2 (first production) is executed. Even if the (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode across the non-target notice E2 (first effect). Is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed within one symbol effect and straddle the non-target notice F (second effect). Counting in two ways So the proportion of big hit symbol appears is higher than when it is the row.

  That is, in this case, even if the “non-target notice E2 (first effect)” and the “count effect” are executed, the count effect is “non-target notice E2 (first effect)”. "Non-target notice F (second effect)" that is executed to suggest that the degree of expectation has been further increased without straddling the "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" ”Is more expected when“ non-target notice F (second effect) ”is not performed than when“ non-target notice F (second effect) ”is performed in one symbol effect. Will be higher. Accordingly, the production target of the count production (non-target notice E2 (first effect) and non-target notice F (second effect) are different effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, the action B, etc.) are not set, and the “non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) that are not originally related to the“ count effect is ended. Until the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, or even if the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears after the count effect ends, the non-target notice F (first effect) It is possible to be interested in, for example, “2nd performance) is further executed”, and thus, the display of the game in the period until the predetermined display (timer target candidate performance) is performed after the count display is digested. To maintain It will be waiting.

  In this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not executed as the count effect, the count effect is not executed. When the count effect straddles the non-target notice F (second effect), the relationship related to the expectation is reversed from the relationship related to the expectation when the count effect does not straddle However, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) may be executed as the effect targets of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the effect about whether the count effect crosses the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

  In addition, either the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as a count effect effect object, and the other is executed as a count effect effect object. It may not be.

  In addition, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is advantageous to the player as well as the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the count effect is straddled the notice F (second effect). It may be configured such that the rate of transition to a different gaming state (such as a high probability short-time gaming state) is increased. At this time, the rate of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (such as a high probability short-time gaming state) may be 100%.

  Further, as described above, the count effect is executed in any one of a plurality of modes (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which counting is started, and the like). In this regard, the count effect of the specific mode is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), and to straddle the notice E2 (first effect). In addition, it is desirable to execute such that there is at least a case where it is executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even when the count effect of the same number of seconds is started, either the case of straddling only the notice E2 (first effect) or the case of straddling only the notice F (second effect) Since it becomes possible to advance the count effect while it is unknown whether it is, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

  Still further, the count effect of the specific mode is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), and to straddle the notice E2 (first effect). In addition to being executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect), it may be executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) straddles. It is desirable to have it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) appear over the entire period from when the count effect is started to when it is ended. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count effect of the specific mode is executed, but within the same symbol variation. It may be prevented from appearing in.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the ratio that the big hit symbol appears is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). It was configured as follows. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that there is no change in the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears, regardless of which aspect the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a completely independent performance that is not affected by the performance such as “which aspect appears as a count effect”, and the count effect is executed. It is possible to suitably improve the performance.

  On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), it is possible to cause a change in the ratio at which the jackpot symbol appears according to which aspect the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, the aspect as the count effect is expected to be a big hit, depending on whether the target of the count effect is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect). Since it is possible to vary the performance of the influence, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained during the period in which the count effect is being performed.

  However, even if the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is the aspect with the highest expectation among a plurality of aspects, the expectation level when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. For example, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, among the count effects of a plurality of modes, at least some of the count effects are configured so that they may straddle the notice F2 (second effect) but not the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of modes as count effects that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of aspects as count effects that can straddle the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on which aspect the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more aspects of the count effects that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect).

  The notice F (second effect) is executed prior to the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is issued after the notice F (second effect) is completed. As described above, it may be executed. At this time, when a count effect straddling this appears when the notice F (second effect) is executed, compared to when a notice effect F (second effect) is executed but a count effect straddling this is not shown, It is desirable to increase the rate at which the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect) appears. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, even if this is ended over the notice F (second effect) instead of the notice E2 (first effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is displayed. It becomes possible to expect that the count effect that straddles further appears, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes an effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this regard, it is desirable that the notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect straddling the notice E2 can appear, even if the notice pattern F (second effect) does not appear. According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the appearance of the count effect that straddles the notice E2 (first effect). It becomes like this. However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) is executed as compared to when the notice F (second effect) is executed but the count effect straddling it does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which the stride count effect appears is low.

  In addition, a plurality of modes are provided as modes of count effects (total number of counts, display modes, timings at which counting is started, etc.) that are possible to straddle the notice F (second effect). As described above, even when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period in which the count effect is executed is also determined. Interestingness can be provided, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained while the count effect is being performed.

  In addition, the aspect of the count effect (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can span the notice E2 (first effect) is prepared in a plurality of modes. As described above, when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, it is desirable that the notice E2 (first effect) is always executed within the period in which the count effect is executed. . According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired manner, it is suggested in advance that the count effect greatly increases the expectation level across the notice E2 (first effect). For this reason, it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment while the count effect is being performed.

  When the timer non-target notice lottery (the first timer non-target notice lottery or the second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed and it is determined which non-target notice is to be executed, step S5513 is performed. It is determined whether or not it is determined that the above-mentioned special timer is to be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in a situation where a specific type of reach effect (character reach) is selected, the notice timer is based on the result of the big hit determination (winning or fluctuation pattern, etc.). An effect (count effect display) is started, and the count display can be controlled to continue even after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). That is, in this case, the count display will continue even after the effect pattern (effect display) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is finished and the display is made non-display. It becomes difficult to predict the fluctuation time (reach type) of the game, for example, an effect in which the count display started during the symbol change is related to the effect in the big hit game state after the symbol stops It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to make the production development after that interesting.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, a big hit game start interval period or a big hit game after the symbol is fixedly stopped) Period), the number of rounds (16 rounds) that have a large expected value of the amount that can be obtained as a prize when appearing, or the first special effect in which the ratio of winning the type to shift to the high-probability short-time gaming state increases. It is possible to execute the second special effect that increases the ratio of execution. Note that these ratios may include 100%. Then, the timer-side notice effect on the notice side for the effect that is started after the appearance of such a jackpot symbol (special display mode) starts before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears and counts it. The display is controlled to be continuously executed even after a big hit symbol (special display mode) appears.

  That is, in this case, the count display of the notice side timer effect started before the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is not terminated when the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, but the jackpot symbol (special display mode) When the specific numerical value (0 in this case) is reached after continuously being executed even after appears, the first special effect or the second special effect appears. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, not only does it definitely suggest that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) will appear in the performance pattern, but when it appears, a high-probability short-time gaming state or a 16-round jackpot game Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  However, in order to realize such a special timer, first, in addition to winning the big hit in the big hit determination, the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a short game state with a high probability or a 16 round big hit game) And when it is determined that it is the specific type, the special timer may be controlled to appear with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that it is not the specific type. Desired.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, next, as a process of step S5514, whether or not to make the special timer appear is executed. The execution mode of the special timer is determined including the presence or absence.

  For example, in the process of step S5514, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high probability short-time gaming state or a type that generates a 16 round big hit game). As a result, by determining that the special timer does not appear with a predetermined probability when the big hit is not a specific type, when the special timer appears, the degree of expectation that the big hit is the specific type is increased. Will be able to. The expectation may be 100%. Further, when it is determined that the special timer does not appear, other notice effects (timer target candidate effects, non-target notice) and notice side timer effects may appear instead of the special timer.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after the decision to execute the special timer in the timer target notice lottery is performed, the type of jackpot is determined and the special timer is executed based on the result. Whether to execute a special timer in the process of step S5514 by performing the timer target notice lottery based on the type of jackpot, in addition to the jackpot winning, is determined again It may not be determined again whether or not.

  In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period or jackpot game period after the symbol is fixed and stopped) You may make it perform in either of the some aspect from which the expectation degree which is a special classification differs. That is, in this case, when the special timer appears, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in a highly expected manner among a plurality of aspects. It will be.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the effects (first special effect or second special effect) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. However, in the example shown in FIG. 161, it is made to appear at the timing when 20 seconds have passed, but a plurality of timings after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the first after 15 seconds have passed) You may make it appear at a timing and the 2nd timing which 30 seconds passed). That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode that reaches a specific numerical value (0 in this case) when 15 seconds elapse (or shortly before) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol When 30 seconds have passed since the (special display mode) appears (or just before that), either the second mode that reaches a specific numerical value (0 in this case) is selected and made to appear.

  At this time, it is set so that the ratio of the special type jackpot is higher when the stage appears at the second timing than when the stage appears at the first timing, and the jackpot is the specific type. Sometimes, if it is executed so that the ratio of causing the special timer to appear in the second mode is higher than that in the first mode, how long the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears will continue. It becomes possible to have an additional interest. Note that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, when the production does not appear at either the first timing or the second timing, the ratio of the special type jackpot is set lower than when the production appears at the first timing. .

  For the special timer, in the execution period of the variable display prior to the appearance of the jackpot symbol (special display mode), for example, it is displayed as “Preparing timer”, and “Preparing timer” is displayed. The count display may be started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) has appeared. In other words, during the big hit game, the time required for digestion of each round game varies according to the progress of the game, so in the execution period of the variable display before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears. If the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and further to set the effect to be produced. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of “timer preparation” is maintained until a specific round game in the jackpot game is started. In addition, by causing the count display to start in accordance with the start of the specific round game, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game so that an effect to be rendered is executed. It becomes possible to set to. At this time, the display such as “Preparing timer” may not be performed until the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

  Also, when the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is made to appear in this way, it is different even during the execution of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is made to appear. You may make it start the count display of the notice side timer effect. As for the other notice side timer effect, the effect that the count display is consumed and the effect to be rendered appears before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, or the jackpot symbol ( It may be one (double special timer) in which an effect to be produced appears after the count display is exhausted after the special display mode) appears.

  It should be noted that the production contents that are different from the production during the variable display and the production during the jackpot game appear, and usually the production at the time of production switching different from any production (for example, opening production etc.) is executed between them. Often done. In this respect, the timer display is set so that the count display does not reach a predetermined value within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, and the count display is not displayed within the switching period. It is desirable to make the player recognize that the two effects (in this case, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested for the elapsed time, and when the count display is displayed again, the count display is hidden. It is desirable to control so that the value is smaller than the numerical value (not countdown, but more when counting up).

  Then, whether the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514), or if the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer target notice lottery or count is performed as the processing of step S5515. After the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. Thereby, drawing data corresponding to the effect determined in the notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect in the effect symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the timer side timer effect is not won (NO in step S5503), various lotteries (notice side of the notice side timer effect) are performed. A timer target candidate effect (notice) with a content (table) according to whether a decision to perform a mission effect is made as a result of the second mission effect lottery without performing a timer type lottery or a single lottery (step S5552). An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, and S5564) for a notice effect that can be an effect of the side timer effect is performed.

More specifically, one of the following processes is executed.
When the notification processing is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552). First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the processing state is the fifth, the number of timer target candidate effects during the execution of one effect pattern is set as the effect contents of the notice effect. A process for determining whether or not to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5554).

When the notification processing is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). First, based on the number-of-notice determination table that is referred to when the sixth processing status is in effect, the number of the above-mentioned timer target candidate effects during the execution of one effect pattern as the effect contents of the notice effect A process for determining whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect by the number determined in the determination process (step S5564).

  Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed. When the effect is determined, the upper limit number of appearances (average appearance number) of the timer target candidate effect is larger than when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. I try to control it.

  FIG. 165 shows a fifth processing situation in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5552) is made. It is a figure which shows an example of table T5e referred in the process of step S5553 when it exists in. Also, FIG. 166 shows a sixth case in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of table T5f referred in the process of step S5563 when it exists in a process condition.

  First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, the loss variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission cannot be successful). When the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired, the table T5e is not referred to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the loss variation pattern (the mission success can be made) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to (no variation pattern) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, effect random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

  Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the notice timer presentation is not executed, and in these process situations, the notice timer presentation is produced. It is not essential to select any one of the timer candidate candidate effects that can be targeted. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (the number of notices is 0).

  In addition, among the contents of the same reach effect (character reach and SP reach) in the table T5e and the table T5f, the variable number where the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the change effect varies. There is a higher percentage of timer candidate candidate effects being selected compared to variable numbers that do not show timer candidate candidate effects (conversation notice or cut-in A) as the effects of the effect, In the variation number 7 that is the reach, only up to three timer object candidate effects can appear, and in the variation number 15 that is the SP reach at the time of loss, only up to five timer object candidate effects can appear. The points that are not performed are the same as the table T5a described above.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149, how many timer target candidate effects appear as the contents of the effect of the notice effect when in the fifth and sixth processing situations where the notice timer effect is not executed in this way. After the determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) is performed, the determination process (steps S5554 and S5564) regarding which type of notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect is performed by the determined number. . However, when it is determined that no timer target candidate effect is caused to appear as a result of the notice number determination process (steps S5553 and S5563) (notice number 0), in the timer object notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564), One processing result that does not select any of the timer target candidate effects regardless of the variation number is always selected.

  FIG. 167 shows the fifth processing situation in which the notice effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). FIG. 16 shows an example of a table T6e-1 that is referred to when it is determined that the number of notices is 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 (step S5554). FIG. 168 shows a fifth case in which the notification effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6e-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5553 in processing status (Step S5554).

  Also, FIG. 169 shows a sixth case in which the notice timer operation is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-1 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 1 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in a processing situation (Step S5564). Further, FIG. 170 shows a sixth state in which the notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552). It is a figure showing an example of table T6f-2 referred to when the number of notices is decided to be 2 as a result of performing processing of Step S5563 in a processing situation (Step S5564).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations are determined not to execute the notice timer effect. Since all of the N notice effects that are determined to be executed as timer target candidate effects are not set as effect objects for the notice timer effect, all of them are normal. This is executed as a mode of the notice effect (in the figure, the x mark indicates that it is executed as a mode of the normal notice effect).

  As shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to in the fifth and sixth processing situations produce the same effects for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Since the change numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22, and 22 corresponding to the change pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect contents of the change effect are acquired, it is executed. A production random number is assigned to each variable number so that a conversation announcement is not selected as a notice production to be performed. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, variation numbers 11 to 14 and 19 to 19 correspond to loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot be successful) in which cut-ins A and B appear as the contents of the effect of the variation effect. When 22 is acquired, an effect random number is assigned to each variable number so that cut-in A and B are not selected as a notice effect to be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f that are referred to when the fifth and sixth processing states are present are referred to when the notice timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the announcement (here, a special timer) based on the premise that the announcement timer production is performed is not included in the announcement production to be selected.

  In addition, in the table T6e that is referred to when in the fifth processing status, since it is referred when execution of the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is determined, FIG. As also shown, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the “conversation notice” are acquired as the contents of the fluctuation effect, or “the conversation notice is indicated as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect)” When “” is selected (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed and it is definitely suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

  Also, in the table T6f that is referred to when in the sixth processing status, it is referred when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, so the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The fact that production random numbers are assigned to each of the numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns to be performed (variation patterns in which the mission cannot be successful) is also described in Table 6a described above. Is the same as

  As shown in FIG. 149, even when it is determined not to execute the notice side timer effect in the process of step S5503, after the timer subject notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) is performed in this way, Which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F that are prepared as effects that cannot be the target of the notice timer effect based on the winning results or variation pattern (variation number) of the big hit A determination process (third timer non-target notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

  Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, the table is basically the same as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer. When the mode of executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the big hit expectation is lower than when the mode of executing notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

  After the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554 and S5564) or the third timer non-target notice lottery ( After the notice effect determined in step S5555) is set in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. Thereby, drawing data corresponding to the effect determined in the notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect in the effect symbol variation process.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined in step S5503 that the timer side timer effect is not to be executed, the timer target advance lottery and the third timer non-target advance lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it as However, if it is determined not to execute the notice timer effect in the process of step S5503, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F in relation to the notice timer effect. The timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed in one lottery process.

  In addition, the above-described special timer mode (non-target notice E2 is set so that the big hit expectation is lower than the non-target notice F in a situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed. In the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is performed, the relationship with the notice side timer effect is also adopted in the case of not adopting the big hit expectation degree compared to the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3, F, the timer target notice lottery and the third timer non-target notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the notice timer effect, the determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the notice effect is performed. After determining in what manner the effect is to be performed, the presence / absence of execution of the notice timer effect and the execution mode may be determined.

  By the way, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a winning (accepting a game ball) occurs at the start opening 2002, 2004, whether to perform a pre-reading effect on the hold information corresponding to the winning The determination process about whether or not is performed (steps S5245 and S5255). In this respect, in this determination process, the hold mode that changes the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display that is the target of the pre-reading effect based on the information on the big hit determination or the fluctuation pattern included in the hold information. Lottery for change effects (existence of execution, lottery for display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone effects over multiple variations (lottery for execution status, execution mode (color, number of continuous executions, etc.)), etc. In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold information is the target of “timer pre-reading effect”.

  Here, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect in which when the change display that has been put on hold (the change display of the effect target) is being executed, the proportion of the notice-side timer effect that appears within the change time increases. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, “Preparing a timer”) is displayed at the start timing of the variable symbol display that starts after the winning timing (the timing when the timer pre-reading effect is won). Etc.) is displayed. Note that the reason why the predetermined image (for example, “Preparing the timer”, etc.) does not appear at the timing of winning the prize (the timing when the timer pre-reading effect is won) is to indicate which hold information corresponds to the timer pre-reading effect. This is to make it difficult to recognize.

  According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it may be suggested that there is a high rate of occurrence of the notice side timer effect over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is expected to maintain the gaming interests over a plurality of variable displays. However, among the preceding effects (prefetch effects), including such timer prefetch effects, it is a type of continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When performing a production (preceding period production), if the same type of production (preceding period production) and its execution period may overlap, the production becomes too complex and what is targeted / purposed There is a concern that it will not be possible to understand whether it is a production, and the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, when determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning a prize), the preceding period effect corresponding to other previously held information that has been won is not being executed and waiting for execution. Judgment is also made as to whether or not it is in the state. And the preceding period effect such as the timer pre-reading effect is newly provided at least on the condition that the preceding period effect according to the other on-hold information previously won is not executed and is not in a waiting state. It is possible to make a decision to generate the error. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the two preceding period effects are overlapped, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer pre-reading effect, a continuous continuous pre-reading effect that causes at least a part of a stop symbol to appear in the same manner (color of numbers, etc.) over multiple variations, or a background image over multiple variations It is possible to employ a pre-read zone effect that changes the character to a special mode. In the above process (prefetching determination at the time of winning a prize), among these preceding period effects, the same type of preceding period effects do not appear overlapping, and even if they are different types of preceding period effects, these execution periods Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Among the pre-reading effects, for the type of effects (for example, a hold change effect, etc.) that are performed over a plurality of variable displays by identifying which hold display is supported, the execution status of these preceding period effects It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of whether or not it is possible to appear, but if a new prize occurs when the preceding period production is being executed or is waiting to be executed, a new prize will occur when it is not in that situation It is desirable to perform the pre-reading determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the effect of the type (for example, the hold change effect) is reduced as a pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning compared to the case where the winning is performed.

  As described above, while a preceding period effect such as a timer prefetch effect (an effect of a type that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported) is executed. Even if a new winning of a game ball is generated, the prohibition control is performed so that this does not occur for the preceding period effect corresponding to this, so that the two preceding period effects interfere with each other. Decline in interest can be suppressed. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of the preceding period effect being performed as the preceding effect is reduced by the amount that the preceding period effect is subject to prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be degraded. The

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is executed while the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information has not yet started, first, the specific effect is displayed. Information indicating that the status is restricted is set. Then, when the hold information is newly stored when the information is set by the previously stored hold information, at least the special symbol variation display corresponding to the previously stored hold information is ended. While the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed until, the newly stored after the end of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information The preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is controlled to be executed.

  That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is not allowed at the time when the hold information is newly stored, the game is then advanced and stored first. In a gaming situation in which there is no concern that production interference with the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information has occurred, the execution of the preceding period effect is permitted once it has been determined that the execution is not allowed. As a result, it is possible to suitably maintain the frequency at which the preceding period effect is performed while performing the prohibition control on the preceding period effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest.

  More specifically, in the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new winning occurs, first, the first special reservation is made. Based on the counter value by the number counter or the second special reservation number counter, it is determined what is the holding order (digestion order) of the new winning. For example, in the case of the first special symbol prefetching process, first, the hold information corresponding to the new winning is stored in any of the first special symbol hold storage area a to the first special symbol hold storage area d. Determine if it is in a state. And after this, it is stored in the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the variable display is being executed, and the hold information that is in a state where the variable display is not executed. Determine if there is something. As a result, even if there is specific holding information that is the execution target of the preceding period effect, the execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is not completely prohibited, In the period after the variable display according to the hold information is completed, control is performed such that execution of the preceding period effect according to the new winning is permitted.

  Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed game situation as an example.

  FIG. 171 (a) stores hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and three hold information (all are the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not yet executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7a referred in a 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the state which is being held. FIG. 171 (b) shows the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the two pieces of hold information (both in the first special symbol) in which the variable display is not executed. It is a figure which shows the example about table T7b referred in the 1st special figure prefetch process, when a new winning (1st special symbol) generate | occur | produces in the memorize | stored state.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, on-hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and three on-hold information in which the variable display is in an unexecuted state (whichever And a first special symbol) depending on whether one of them is the target of the preceding period effect, or none of which is the target of the preceding period effect. It is possible to determine from which timing the corresponding hold information can be the target of the preceding period effect (the number of prefetchable fluctuations).

  For example, in the table T7a, all of the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is in execution and the three pieces of hold information in which the variable display is not executed (all are the first special symbol). Is not the subject of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (first special symbol hold storage) A variable display according to the second hold information stored in the area b), a variable display according to the hold 3 (the third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b), and The new winnings were targeted over four variable display periods with the variable display corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning (fourth holding information stored in the first special symbol holding storage area d). It is possible to execute the preceding period production There is determined (determination that prefetching variability number is 4). That is, in this case, the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is performed at the timing after the variable display corresponding to the running state is finished and the variable display corresponding to the first hold information is started. Execution of the preceding period effect for is permitted.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold information in the state where the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display corresponding to the hold 2, the change display corresponding to the hold 3, and the new It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning can be executed over the three variable display periods with the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the winning prize (the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 3). Determination). That is, in this case, the timing after the fluctuation display in the running state is finished, the fluctuation display according to the first hold information is further finished, and the fluctuation display according to the second hold information is started. Thus, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is permitted.

  Here, even if the hold information in the state where the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 1, the change display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the four fluctuation display periods of the fluctuation display corresponding to the new prize and the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning ( It may be determined that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4). However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect that starts with the variable display corresponding to the hold 1 are continuously executed. Whether the preceding period effect is the same effect (whether the previous preceding period effect continues), or is another preceding period effect newly started (whether the previous preceding period effect has ended)? Since this makes it difficult to distinguish, the method of setting the preceding period effect as a prohibited period so as not to newly occur in the first variable display after the preceding period effect ends (the method adopted in the table T7a). It is more desirable to adopt. Such a method is employed not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table not shown).

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period effect, two change displays of the change display according to the hold 3 and the change display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning can be executed over the period (determination that the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 2). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is further ended, and the third display At the timing after the start of the variable display according to the hold information, execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning is permitted.

  In addition, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period effect, the preceding period for the new winning is only the variable display period corresponding to the holding 4 corresponding to the new winning. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the number of prefetch fluctuations is 1). That is, in this case, the variable display in the running state is ended, the variable display according to the first hold information is ended, the variable display according to the second hold information is ended, and the third hold information is displayed. The preceding period for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new winning at a timing after the variable display according to the game is further ended and the variable display according to the fourth hold information is started. The execution of the production is allowed.

  Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period effect, it is determined that the preceding period effect for the new winning is not executable (the number of pre-reading fluctuations is 0). Judgment). That is, in this case, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display corresponding to the hold 4 corresponding to the new winning is not permitted.

  On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is the target of the preceding period effect, and the number of prefetchable fluctuations obtained as a determination result is smaller than that in the table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the description will be omitted. In addition, tables similar to these are also prepared at the time of holding 2 winning or at the time of holding 1 winning, but the explanation is omitted.

  Incidentally, it may be assumed that there are two pieces of hold information that are the targets of the preceding period production at the time of winning the hold 4, etc., but in this case, either To determine the number of prefetchable fluctuations. For example, at the time of winning the hold 4, if the variable hold and the hold 2 are the targets of different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the later side of the holding order is the target of the preceding period effect. “The number of prefetchable fluctuations = 1” is determined.

  Further, as described above, the control related to the prohibition period of the preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. This is done for the purpose of setting a prohibition period for this type of performance based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of effect (holding change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (read ahead) Even if the number of possible fluctuations = 0, the type of effect (hold change effect) that identifies which hold display is supported is not prohibited.

  Moreover, even if it is in the prohibition period of the preceding period effect, among the timer prefetching effects, for the timer prefetching effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode, which will be described later, the notice side timer effect appears. You may make it appear because certainty is not calculated | required.

  If the hold information on the second special symbol side is included in the hold information in which the variable display is not executed as the prohibition control of the preceding period effect, the hold information on the second special symbol side is preceded. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, control is performed so that a new preceding period effect is not started until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is ended. Good. At this time, it is not necessary to set the next variable display period after the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the second special symbol side as the prohibition period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next variable display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

  In addition, with regard to the processing for confirming the pre-reading production status set for hold in this way and determining the pre-reading variable number according to the result, a new winning is generated each time the hold is used. It is desirable to do it every time.

  In the first special figure prefetching process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetching process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the prefetchable variation number is thus determined, the determined period (prefetching is possible). The number of fluctuations) is determined as to what kind of preceding period effect is to be executed (including whether or not it is executed).

  For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the hold information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, the types of the preceding period effects include a plurality of specific preceding displays that indicate that there is a high possibility that a pre-reading zone effect that displays related background images across multiple variations and a notice timer effect is performed. It is possible to prepare a timer pre-reading effect or the like displayed across the variation as a selection candidate. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, a determination process as to how the preceding period effect of the determined type is executed is performed.

  172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect is determined in a situation where the prefetch variable number is four. It is. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer prefetch effect is determined in a situation where the prefetch variable number is three. It is.

  As described above, the timer pre-reading effect is an effect that, when appearing, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect appears is high when the hold information that is the target of prefetching is digested, and the periphery according to this embodiment In the control MPU 1511a, the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode, or the like, in which the ratio of the notice side timer effect appearing is different.

  Here, the first preceding mode is, for example, a display in which a first mode such as “timer occurrence premonition” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the timer prefetching effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability that the notice timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

  In addition, the second preceding mode is, for example, a second mode such as “timer occurrence chance” displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer pre-reading effect is executed in the second preceding mode, a notice side is displayed. The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

  The third preceding mode is, for example, a third mode such as “Preparing timer” displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the timer prefetching effect is executed in the third preceding mode, the notice timer The performance is always executed (even if it is not 100%, it may have a higher probability than the second preceding mode) (step S5502).

  Then, based on the information related to the big hit for prefetch determination, the information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc., it is determined in which execution mode the timer prefetch effect is executed. For example, in a situation where the number of prefetch fluctuations is 4, with reference to tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), prefetching corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 is performed. In the situation where either one of the modes is selected based on the information and the production random number assigned to the information and the prefetch variable number is 3, tables T8b-1 and T8b- shown in FIG. 2, one of the modes is selected on the basis of the prefetch information corresponding to the variable numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random numbers assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variability display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started in the state where the first preceding mode finally appears. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the variable information display of the hold information is in the hold 1 state. When the state is 3, the timer prefetching effect does not appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is the first preceding when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode (prediction of occurrence of timer) that is displayed even in the hold 1 state. Hold this timer prefetch effect when dynamic display is in the state of the hold 3 and displayed in the first prior embodiment (feeling of timer generator) 2, aspects to be continued in a state of hold 1

In the table T8a-1, the following six modes can be used as modes for starting the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state where the second preceding mode appears in the end. It is prepared.
The timer pre-reading effect does not appear in any manner when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the state of hold 3 and hold 2 and is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the variable information on-hold information is in the hold 1 state. In this state, the timer prefetching effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the second preceding mode when the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the hold 2 state. A mode in which (timer occurrence chance) is displayed and this is continued even in the hold 1 state. A mode in which the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) when the fluctuation display is in the hold 3 state and this is continued even in the hold 2 and hold 1 states. When the change display of the hold information in the state is in the hold 3 state, the timer prefetch effect is not caused to appear in any manner, and the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is in the hold 2 state The timer pre-reading effect is displayed when the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (predicting the occurrence of the timer) and the variation display of the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 1 state. Is changed from the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) and is displayed. The timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence) when the change display of the hold information being held is in the hold 3 state, and this is continued even in the hold 2 state. When the change display of the hold information that is the target of the production is in the hold 1 state, the timer pre-reading production is changed from the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance). Mode to be displayed ・ When the change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is in the state of the hold 3, the timer prefetching effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of occurrence of timer) and the timer prefetching effect The timer pre-reading effect is changed from the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (timer generating channel) when the change display of the holding information that is the target of the holding is in the holding 2 state. A mode in which the display is changed and displayed in the hold 1 state.

  Note that the timer pre-reading effects of the first and second preceding modes are displayed in the hold 1 state and then continuously displayed after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. Moreover, you may make it a form change further in the fluctuation | variation display started after the said hold information was digested. Further, when the notice timer effect is started in the variable display, the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect may be hidden, but the notice timer effect is started. Even so, the display is continued even after the notice side timer effect is started, or after the notice side timer effect is started. If it is made non-display at a predetermined timing thereafter, it becomes possible to add interest. Note that if the timer-predictive timer effect is not executed even though the timer pre-reading effect is executed in either the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect, the non-notification is made when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of the non-display is the same as the timing of the non-display (such as the predetermined timing described above) when the notice timer presentation is performed.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the first predecessor mode (predicting the occurrence of a timer) or the second predecessor mode regardless of the timer prefetching effect that increases the execution ratio of the notice timer effect when it appears. The timer pre-reading effect of (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are made to appear as different effects. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, in the state where the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode are displayed, the timer pre-reading effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode. This is not adopted for the display mode. In addition, in the situation where the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (during timer preparation) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (prediction of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears. Or, in the situation where the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) appears, the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) appears. Can be generated.

  Therefore, in a situation where the number of possible pre-reading changes is 4, referring to table T8a-1 shown in FIG. Referring to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172 (b), the execution mode related to the timer prefetching effect in the third preceding mode (timer preparation) is further determined. It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect in the state where the third preceding aspect finally appears. As a mode in which the variable display is started, only the following mode is prepared.
-When the change display of the hold information that is the subject of the timer pre-reading effect is in the hold 3 state, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (in preparation for the timer), and this is indicated as hold 2 and hold 1 Mode to continue even in the state

  However, in the case of the third preceding mode, not only the above-described one mode, but also in the case of the on-hold 3 or the on-hold 2 state, no timer pre-reading effects appear, From the above, it may be possible to select a mode for displaying the third preceding mode.

  According to such a configuration, the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding mode (timer generation premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is executed, and the timer of the third preceding mode (timer generation chance). When the pre-reading effect is executed, both the timer pre-reading effect of the first preceding mode (preliminary occurrence of timer) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and the timer pre-reading effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) are both Each case will be executed. And, when both the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding mode (timer occurrence premonition) or the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) and the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparing) are respectively executed, Because it is in a situation that it is definitely suggested that the notice timer performance will be executed, enjoy the production such as whether to change from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode with a margin or a sense of security. Will be able to.

  Moreover, you may control so that the timer prefetching effect of the 1st preceding aspect, the timer prefetching effect of the 2nd preceding aspect, and the timer prefetching effect of the 3rd preceding aspect may appear simultaneously.

  In addition, it is desirable that the timer pre-reading effect in the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is continuously displayed even after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress) is not displayed when the notice side timer effect is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect is adopted as an aspect of displaying “timer being prepared” in the effect display device 1600. You may make it employ | adopt as a mode which starts the count display toward the effect (effect which appears in the unexecuted fluctuation display) made into the effect object of a timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time during which the state of the hold 1 is continued (the remaining change time of the special symbol that is in the variable display state when in the hold 1 state), and the hold 1 is digested and the change display is displayed. The count display will be performed over the total time from the start to the start of the effect targeted for the notice timer effect, and the timer prefetch effect (third preceding mode) and the notice timer The effect is executed as one count display in which two variation displays are connected.

  In this regard, when the third preceding mode is realized as one count display connected to such a notice timer presentation, the count display is not executed in the hold 3 or the hold 2 and the count display is performed in the hold 1 state. It is desirable to perform. That is, if the count display is started when the status is on hold 3 or hold 2, depending on the number of holds when the status of hold 1 is reached, “the effect that is targeted for the effect of the notice timer effect ( By changing the “Remaining time until start of production in unexecuted variation display”, it is possible to properly execute count display (count display until reaching a predetermined number) for the production. This is because there is a concern that it will disappear.

  The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are shown in the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b). The table T8a-2 is basically in the same relationship as the table T8a-2.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment determines the hold change effect in the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure prefetch process (FIG. 136: step S5255). Processing is also performed. The hold change effect means that the hold display is changed in any manner by changing the hold display mode corresponding to the hold information acquired in accordance with the prize to any of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode. Depending on whether it is displayed, the expectation of jackpot when the hold display is digested is suggested.

  More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the mode of displaying white blinking, the mode of displaying in blue, and displaying in green Can be displayed in any one of a mode to display, a mode to display in red, and a mode to display in rainbow color. Is low, and the expectation degree of jackpot is gradually increased in the order of blue, green, and red. If the display is held in a rainbow-colored display mode, the probability that a jackpot symbol will appear when the reservation is stopped is 100. % Is set to be a relationship. In addition, the big hit expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode, but the big hit expectation when the normal hold is displayed should be lower than the mode displayed in white blinking. Alternatively, the display mode may be the same as or higher than the mode of blinking white.

  Therefore, normally, for example, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, the first performance situation with a lower degree of expectation of jackpot is provided than when displaying in green or red. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the control that can provide the second effect situation in which the big hit expectation is increased when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears instead of green or red under a predetermined condition. Can be executed.

  FIG. 174 shows a case where there is nothing that causes a jackpot symbol to appear in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the normal time hold change table T9a referred. In addition, FIG. 175 has a jackpot symbol that appears in the hold information in which the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the change display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows special time holding | maintenance change table T9b referred to at times.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new win (accepting a game ball) at the start port 2002, 2004 occurs, the first special figure prefetch process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure In the pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the hold information stored before the new winning and the variable display is in execution and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold) 1 to Hold 3), it is determined whether there is one that causes a jackpot symbol to appear (one that has been determined to win the jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination or the prefetch determination). As a result, when it is determined that there is nothing that causes a big hit symbol to appear, a normal time table T9a (set in a relationship in which the big hit expectation degree gradually increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color. By executing the hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), for example, when a mode of displaying white blinking or blue appears, for example, the first effect state having a lower jackpot expectation than when displaying in red is obtained. To be provided.

  However, it is determined that there is one that causes a jackpot symbol to appear between the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the variable display is in a running state and the hold information that is not in a variable display. When this occurs (when a rare event occurs), the second change situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special time change table T9b (FIG. 175).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special-time hold change table T9b, first, red and rainbow colors related to the hold display mode are acquired as hold information corresponding to the new winnings. The production random numbers are distributed so that any of the “prefetch information” and “prefetch information regarding the variation pattern” indicates any of them.

  In addition, as for the green color relating to the hold display mode, even if the change pattern (change numbers 7 to 14) in which the production random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special time hold change is performed. In the table T9b, the production random numbers are distributed so as not to be selected. In this regard, when the pre-read information regarding the fluctuation pattern is equivalent to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b. In comparison with the change table T9a, the production random numbers are distributed so that the probability of the appearance of green is lower both when winning and winning the big hit.

  On the other hand, with regard to white blinking and blue relating to the hold display mode, the special-time hold change table T9b has a higher appearance probability both when winning a big hit and when defeating, compared to the normal hold change table T9a. The production random number is distributed. In addition, regarding the blinking white and the blue color relating to the hold display mode, even if the variable numbers 1 and 2 are not selected in the normal hold change table T9a, they can be selected in the special hold change table T9b. In this way, the production random numbers are distributed.

  According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high degree of expectation in which a jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a timer timer effect for the actor B action appears in the SP reach variation pattern) is executed. If a new win occurs during the game (under certain conditions), if a green or red appearance appears as a hold display corresponding to the new win, a jackpot symbol will appear in the high-expected performance being executed. It is difficult to have expectations for the second stage, but when a white blinking or blue mode appears, it is relatively easy to have the expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the high expectation stage during the execution. Will be able to provide.

  In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effect, the remaining time during which the hold 1 state is continued (the state of the variable display when in the hold 1 state) Over the time that is the sum of the remaining variation time of the special symbol) and the time from when the hold 1 is digested and the variation display is started until the production that is the production target of the notice timer production is started. The count display can be executed. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears in the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the variable display ends before the count display reaches the predetermined value and the next variable display is started. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved in combination with the control using the special time hold change table T9b.

For example, suppose that the count display (or timer preparation in progress) of the notice side timer effect appears during the execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach) in the situation where the blinking white or the blue hold display appears as the hold 1 Thus, the second game progression can have a sense of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear rather than the first game progression described below.
-The notice timer timer effect is directed to the effect in the hold 1 for which only a low expectation level (blinking white or blue) is shown, and the hold is performed after the running variable display (for example, SP reach) is finished in a losing manner. The first game progress / notice side timer effect in which the variable display according to the hold information of 1 is started is not the effect in the hold 1 in which only the low expectation level (blinking white or blue) is shown, and the change being executed Second game progress that is directed to the production in the display (for example, SP reach)

  In other words, the notice timer performance with a high expectation level (for example, a jackpot symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, but the notice timer effect with a low expectation (for example, appears Even if there is a case where the effect in the hold 1 of white flashing or blue) in which the jackpot symbol does not appear with a probability of only a few percent, the possibility of the jackpot symbol appearing is greatly reduced. However, according to the above-mentioned second game progress, it is special because the chance increase by avoiding the occurrence of such a production situation and the fluctuation display during execution are big hits. Referring to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175), the chance display is increased due to the expectation that the hold display of hold 1 is in a flashing white state (high appearance probability) or blinking blue. The notice timer performance with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is that the effect of “the effect in the running fluctuation display during the run” is directed as if “the running fluctuation display is a big hit”. As the chances will increase with the double, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the third predecessor mode of the timer prefetching effect may be executed not as a count display but as “timer preparation in progress”. In other words, in this case, it is possible to recognize that the notice-side timer effect for the effect in the variation display is executed at the time when the state in which “timer is being prepared” is displayed is switched to the count display. Therefore, when there is a holding display that is blinking white or blue when the count display appears, it can be expected that a big hit symbol appears in the variable display.

  On the other hand, if “Timer preparation” is not displayed and the count display is started in a situation where a green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, the notice timer performance is performed. Not only does it make it difficult to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the fluctuation display, but also a timer on the notice side to raise the expectation level for green and red (especially red) hold display. The production will not work. Therefore, if “Timer preparation” is displayed in a situation where a green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is consumed. It is hoped that the count display will not start, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained within the period until the count display (notice side timer effect) is started.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, when an effect with a high jackpot expectation appears in the variable display during execution, a new winning is generated and the hold display in any aspect such as white blinking, blue, green, red, etc. It is possible to predict whether or not a jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display during execution, so that a decrease in the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  In addition, such a hold change effect using the special time change table T9b is executed for a hold display corresponding to a new winning, but the effect target is actually “new Rather than "whether the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display of the hold information (hold information that has changed hold) according to the winnings", "holding information that is stored before the new winning (holds not subject to hold change) It functions as an effect of “whether a big hit symbol appears in the variation display of (information)”. Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new winning occurs or the above-mentioned preceding period effect is prohibited, the special time change change table T9b is determined by the hold information that has been won later. When the hold change effect using is executed, it becomes possible to function as an effect as if the prefetch effect was generated afterwards for the hold information for which no prefetch effect was executed. It is expected to reduce the entertainment interest of not being performed.

  In the special time hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected for some reach types. However, as with the red mode, any variation pattern may not be selected. . In short, if the rate of appearance with a high expectation that can appear as a hold display is a low rate (including 0) compared to the normal hold change table T9a, white is displayed when the count display appears. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when there is a flashing or blue holding display.

  In addition, the pending change can be generated at a winning time, at the start of the change, or at a predetermined timing during the change, and the number of changes may be generated a plurality of times. That is, in this case, even when the count display of the notice timer effect is started in the variable display according to the hold display that is blinking white or blue, the white blink or blue may change to green or red Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest. In this embodiment, the display corresponding to the pending display that is the subject of digestion even during the symbol variation performed in accordance with the pending digestion (not already in the suspended state, but in the suspended display when in the suspended state) As described above, the corresponding display) is displayed, and the display mode corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change).

  However, when such a hold change effect using the special time change change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated while the specific effect with high expectation is being executed during the execution of the variable display, and the prize is won. When the hold display corresponding to the red color is generated, the big win symbol is displayed in a variable display in which a specific effect with a high expectation level (for example, a timer effect that is directed to the action B action) is executed. There may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is a concern about a decline in the amusement of entertainment.

  Therefore, a new winning occurs during a period in which a specific timer effect that is directed to at least the action B action is being executed (during a period in which a highly anticipated specific effect is being executed). Even if it does, it is desirable to control so that the hold display according to the winning does not appear in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of change in hold is hidden. Further, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state for the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

  However, in this case, the hidden display that has been hidden is not continuously hidden until the variable display is terminated. For example, within the period of the variable display, for example, a hit effect or a loss ( It is preferable to display a hold display that has been hidden after the timing at which a loss effect that suggests a big win is displayed, and to display the mode of change of the hold. According to such a configuration, even if the on-hold display corresponding to the new winning is red, it is already suggested that the game is lost, so that the on-screen display is not reduced. Because of the red color, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by including hold information with a high expectation level for jackpots in the hold.

  In addition, the control related to the non-display of such hold display does not cover all timer effects (notice effects), but relatively large hits such as those for the effect B action among the timer effects. It is desirable to execute only a specific timer effect with a high degree of expectation (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation).

  Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time change change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer prefetch effect is executed in the third preceding mode (eg, during timer preparation) while the blue hold display appears. In the case of being played, it is desired that the game progress in which the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display before the blue hold display is consumed. In this regard, even if the game situation is such that the game progress is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the change or the change corresponding to the blue hold display is not started. In the variable display where the count display (timer effect) starts and the jackpot symbol appears before the blue hold display is digested so that a throbbing feeling about whether the count display starts in the display is given The count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the change display than the ratio (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started in accordance with the start timing of the change display It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started becomes higher. Note that the ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to perform control so that the ratio at which the count display (timer effect) is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change display is started as compared with the case where the red hold display appears. . Note that the ratio may include 100%.

  The count effect (holding change effect using the special time change change table T9b) that causes a chance increase in such a double is, in essence, “holding information displayed in the second mode among a plurality of modes (for example, In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the red pre-read hold), the hold information (for example, the blue pre-read hold) displayed in the first aspect is digested. The ratio of the big hit symbol (specific display result) being derived and displayed is higher than the variable display of the identification information that has been started ", but" at least the specific count effect is executed within the period during which the variable display of the identification information is executed " Hold information that is later in digestion order than the variable display in the execution state (when the specific count effect is being executed within the variable display execution period, it is not yet executed) Is displayed in the second mode (for example, red pre-read hold), the hold information is displayed in the first mode (for example, blue pre-read hold). The ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display in the execution state is lower than the case.

  According to such a configuration, when a red pending display (second mode) is being displayed for a variable display that is late in digestion order and not yet executed, a specific count is included in the variable display that is already in the execution state. Assuming that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is ended, a blue hold display (first mode) is displayed for a variable display that is late in digestion order and not yet executed. When the count display of the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the variable display that is already in the running state, an effect mode with a lower expectation appears as the effect object. The ratio will be high. That is, in this case, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not the red hold display (second mode) appears with respect to the variable display that has not yet been executed functions as an important effect element. Through this special effect relationship between the count effect and the pre-read effect, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect. Expected. In this sense, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, it is still being executed, triggered by a new winning or a change change effect (for example, an effect of upgrading a blue hold display to a red hold display). It is important to enable the pending display for the variable display not appearing in any of a plurality of modes such as the blue pending display (first mode) and the red pending display (second mode). It can be said that there is.

  According to the special effect relationship between the count effect and the pre-read effect, when a red hold display (second mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, If the count effect is not ended with the variable display of, and the display is continued until the next variable display after the next time, the ratio of the high-expected effect appearance appears when the count effect ends, so the specific count effect ends. You will expect not to be. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (first mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, it is less likely that the count effect is ended with the variable display being executed. Since the ratio of appearance of a production mode having a high expectation degree when the count production is finished is higher than when the count production is finished, it is expected that the specific count production is finished early.

  However, the count effect does not necessarily have to span a plurality of variable displays, and may end within one variable display where the count effect is started. Even in such a configuration, when a new winning occurs while the count effect is being executed, the blue hold display (first mode) and the red hold are displayed for the variable display that has not been executed yet. Since which one of the display (second mode) appears can function as an important performance indicator for the count effect, there is no special effect between the count effect and the prefetch effect. Through the relationship, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period from the start of the specific count effect to the end thereof.

  At the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of hold indications are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, pre-read hold such as green or red) (for example, a situation in which the pre-read hold is not changed) Even if appears, it is possible to execute a process of causing a specific mode to appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, a process of changing from normal hold to red hold). According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, it is assumed that a plurality of hold indications are displayed, but an effect situation (for example, a situation in which the pre-read hold is not changed) has appeared. However, there is a possibility that the display can be changed to a hold display having a specific form (pre-read hold such as green or red) until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (the specific display result in the variable display in the execution state) Since the possibility that the ratio of deriving and displaying is high can be shifted from a high ratio to a low ratio), the game entertainment from the start to the end of the specific count effect is suitably maintained. To be expected to do.

  However, at this time, a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display by the specific count effect, and when the count display is displayed in the first mode and the count is digested, the second mode is used. A process of causing a specific mode to appear on the hold display before the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, normal hold) It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the processing to change from red to red is performed. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to “pending display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) during the counting period”. Recognize “high possibility” and predict from the remaining count value “high possibility that the specific count effect will continue until after the next symbol variation starts” Therefore, it becomes possible to provide interest by comparing the results of the recognition and prediction.

  On the other hand, when a specific count effect is started, when a plurality of hold indications are displayed but none of them is in a specific state (for example, a state where the pre-read hold is not changed), During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, the process of changing from normal hold to red hold) may not be executed. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect may change to a hold display having a specific form (pre-read hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (in the execution state). From the state in which the ratio of the specific display result derived and displayed in the variable display is likely to be shifted from the high ratio to the low ratio), the specific count effect is started and ended. It will be possible to provide a sense of security.

  In addition, a plurality of hold displays may be digested sequentially until a predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses, and a plurality of symbol variations may be sequentially digested. According to such a configuration, even if the third on-hold display is red on-hold in the situation where the specific count effect is started, the symbol variation corresponding to the third on-hold display is started. Since the specific count effect may reach a predetermined value during the execution period, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect ends.

  Further, during a period in which the specific count effect is being executed, after the symbol variation is stopped (temporarily stopped), it is possible to execute a process for changing the symbol variation to the variation state again. According to such a configuration, for example, when a change in symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) while a pre-reading hold has appeared for a variable display that has not been executed yet, the identification in the execution state is specified. Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol variation is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect is ended. Become.

  Moreover, in the example of the production related to the above-mentioned “double chance up” (holding change effect using the special time change table T9b), the hold display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count effect, or the front of the hold display. It is possible to move the movable decorative body or display another display image so as to cover the hold display so that even if a change occurs in the hold display, it is difficult to notice this. It is desirable to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest when it occurs.

  In addition, a “first mode that requires a relatively long time” and a “second mode that requires a relatively short time” are prepared as a “specific count effect” and an “effect pattern (fluctuation time of a symbol)”. A plurality of effects based on the result of the big hit determination “a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first aspect) but longer than the relatively short time (second aspect)” You may make it select and execute from patterns. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next change depending on which aspect (first aspect, second aspect) the specific count effect is executed. Or will not be continued, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the above-described example of production related to “double chance up” (holding change effect using the special time change table T9b), “holding information displayed in the second mode among a plurality of modes (for example, red) In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the pre-read hold), the start is made by digesting the hold information (for example, blue pre-read hold) displayed in the first form among the plurality of forms. "The ratio that the jackpot symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed is higher than the variable display of the identification information displayed", but "at least the specific count effect is executed within the period during which the variable display of the identification information is executed" On hold information that is later in the digestion order than the variable display in the execution state (when the specific count effect is being executed within the variable display execution period, it is not yet executed) When the pre-read hold for the variable display is displayed in the second mode (for example, red pre-read hold), the hold information is displayed in the first mode (for example, blue pre-read hold). In the variable display in the execution state, the ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed is lowered '' when executing the symbol variation in a shorter time than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect, There is a case where the symbol variation is executed in a longer time than a predetermined time required for the specific count effect. However, in this case, for the “specific count effect” described above, “the effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect (the remaining time until a specific effect change occurs for the specific effect) by updating the count value according to the passage of time. However, it may be executed as, for example, an “effect that suggests the remaining time related to a specific effect by an image change according to the passage of time”. In short, if the remaining time can be suggested, it is possible to provide an interest in whether the symbol change will be completed before this remaining time is digested, and a decrease in the entertainment interest Can be suppressed.

  Note that the “specific count effect” is not “an effect that suggests the remaining time related to the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time”, but “the change in the image corresponding to the elapsed time as the remaining time related to the specific effect, etc. Realization by other depictions, such as “effects suggested by”, is different from the above-described example of “double chance up” (holding change effect using special time change table T9b) (counting) You may make it apply with respect to (production).

  In addition, with regard to the “specific count effect”, the suggested “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect” ends before the digestion is completed, and the effect change with respect to the specific effect is completed. May occur. At this time, it may be possible that an effect change that cannot appear when the “remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to a specific effect” is exhausted without being terminated in the middle. These modified examples are also applied to an effect example (count effect) different from the above-described effect example related to “double chance up” (holding change effect using the special time change table T9b). Also good.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new winning is made during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. When the hold information corresponding to this is newly acquired and the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started and this is being executed, the ratio that the notice timer effect is executed is the above Control that can execute the timer pre-reading effect (control related to the change effect) is performed differently depending on the newly acquired hold information (new winning).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a processing procedure for processing performed to realize such a changeable effect. Note that this process is performed when a pre-payment (game ball is received) at a specific starting point during a period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1 or table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. ) May occur, or within the period prior to the completion of the hold information that is held before the winning (hold information on which the information related to the production is erased / reset) is digested It may be performed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether the hold information corresponding to the new winning indicates the specific game information as the process of step S5601. The specific game information may be, for example, “game information that causes a highly anticipated specific variation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested” or “the new game information”. It may be “game information to win a big hit when the hold information is digested”. Here, for convenience of explanation, “game information to win a big hit when the new hold information is digested” will be described as the specific game information.

  As a result, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new winning indicates the specific game information, the process is stored before the hold information corresponding to the new winning as the process of step S5602. When at least part of the information related to the effect is deleted and the change effect is performed with respect to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode) among the held information Reset to contents.

  For example, when the first predecessor mode (prediction of timer occurrence) is set as the timer prefetching effect, when the hold information that is the subject of the timer prefetching effect is digested, the notice timer effect is produced with a probability of approximately 20%. When the second preceding mode (timer occurrence chance) is set as the timer prefetching effect, a probability of approximately 80% is assumed when the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is digested As described above, the notice-timer timer effect is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least a part) of information related to the timer prefetch effect is deleted, or a table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern (such as SP reach) or the notice lottery is determined. Settings for changing to something different from the normal time (setting of a change flag, etc.) are made. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, so that the first predecessor effect (prediction of timer occurrence) and the first Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer occurrence chance) is set, the notice-side timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50% in the processing of step S5502 (FIG. 149). Further, when determining the contents of the production pattern, the notice production, etc., for example, a table (not shown) at the time of the changing effect is referred to based on the setting of the changing flag, and various effects are performed in a manner different from the normal time. Will be executed.

  Then, after the modification process (step S5602) for the pending presentation information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect is performed in this way, the background image is displayed as the background image when the change effect is performed as the process of step S5603. Process to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect) appearing as the timer prefetching effect is also hidden. That is, in this case, when a new winning occurs (or after the winning is generated until the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is digested), the background image is the background at the time of the changing effect. If the image is suddenly changed to the image, the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode that has appeared until then is not displayed, but the background image at the time of the change effect itself functions as one mode of the timer pre-reading effect. Become moist. Then, during the period in which the background image at the time of the dramatic effect appears, whether or not the notice timer effect appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is digested (whether it is a frustration). It becomes possible to have a great interest, and this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest during the period when the timer prefetching effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5601 that the hold information corresponding to the new winning is not indicative of specific game information, whether or not to execute a change gaze effect next as the process of step S5611 Judgment processing is performed. This change gaze effect is an effect that changes the background image to the background image when the change effect is performed in the process of step S5603, although the modification process (step S5602) is not performed on the above-described hold information. That is.

  If it is determined in the process of step S5611 that the first change effect is not to be executed, the current timer pre-reading effect (first preceding aspect, second preceding aspect) and various effect determining aspects are to be continued. The process (FIG. 176) is terminated without performing any process related to the change effect.

  In such a configuration, when a new winning occurs during the period in which the timer prefetching effect (table T8a-1 or table T8b-1) of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed (in a specific starting area). When a game ball is accepted and game information corresponding to the game ball is newly acquired), when the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is started and this is being executed, the notice timer effect is displayed. The notice side timer effect can be executed so that the executed ratio varies depending on the newly acquired game information (holding information). In other words, in this case, if the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, it is not the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect but the new information. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific variation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a big hit, or information indicating that the type of the big hit is to shift to a high probability short-time gaming state, etc. ), The rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect changes, so that it is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. Expectations for other effects can be given before the variable display is executed, and a decrease in the gaming interest in the period can be suppressed.

  In the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetch effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the hold information is not the target of the timer prefetch effect. Depending on whether or not the newly acquired hold information is specific game information, after performing the modification process (step S5602), before the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is digested In addition, the background image is changed to the background image at the time of the change effect, and the display related to the timer prefetch effect is hidden. In other words, in this case, until the change-over effect is started, the subject of the effect is a timer pre-reading effect, and an effect situation is provided that gives a sense of expectation to the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect. On the other hand, after the change production is started, the main subject of the production is changed to the change production, in order to give a sense of expectation to the newly acquired hold information including the timer pre-reading production. It will be shifted to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the subject of the production flexibly when a hold with higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect is acquired, and it has already been set It is avoided that the production time for the hold information with high expectation is lost due to the production.

  Such a changeable effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetching effect indicates that a big win is won. That is, in this case, since the main subject of the production moves to the newly-held winning hold information, the jackpot production will appear in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise-like production will be realized. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of gaming.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired in the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the process related to the above-mentioned change effect is executed (FIG. 176). However, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer prefetching effect of the third preceding aspect is being executed, the process (FIG. 176) relating to the above-mentioned change effect may be executed. .

  Further, the background image at the time of the change effect may be continued even after the change display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer prefetch effect is ended. That is, in this case, the hold information that is digested after the end of the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer pre-reading effect, functions as a single change effect.

  Further, such a changeable effect may be executed on the condition that the new winning is generated and the specific condition is satisfied even when the timer prefetching effect is not executed. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the notice lottery for all the hold information stored before the new winning is changed to a table different from the normal time. Settings (such as setting of a change flag) are made, so that the appearance probabilities of various effects change as long as the change is not a change effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the rate at which the notice side timer effect is executed at the time of the change effect is changed. However, when the change flag is set, by changing the effect pattern different from the normal time, You may make it change the ratio in which production is performed. As a result, even if a variable number that does not cause the variable timer effect to appear when the variable effect is not executed, the variable timer effect appears when the variable effect is executed, or the variable timer effect appears when the variable effect is not executed. Even when the number is changed, it is possible to perform control so that the variable timer effect does not appear when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, when such a change effect is performed, even if the timer effect appears when the change effect is not executed, the variable timer effect may not appear when the change effect is executed. If there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment, there will be a special lottery when a lottery is performed for a special notice effect that cannot appear in normal times (when the change effect is not executed). You may control so that an effect may appear.

  In addition, the rate at which the notice-side timer effect is executed in the variable display that was the target of the timer pre-reading effect at the time of the change effect is not necessarily constant (here, 50%). It may be controlled differently depending on whether or not a big hit symbol appears in the variable display that has been.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 177 and FIG. 178, the contents of the effects of the above-described timer effect example will be described in detail. Here, the processing examples relating to the above-mentioned effects are merely examples, and for example, effects other than the above-described types may be executed as the contents of the notice effects, Appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, the production examples described below may include those that do not match the processing content of each production described above, but are within the scope of the same technical idea and within the scope of implementation by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. In addition, the “timer effect” below basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which a change display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state. FIG. 177 (B) shows that two winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the holding information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the holding which is won first is held. The on-hold display corresponding to 1 indicates the normal on-hold mode, and the on-hold display corresponding to the second on-hold hold 2 is displayed in red. FIG. 177 (C) shows the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) after the decorative symbol SZ that has been in the variable display state in the production state shown in FIG. ) Shows the production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. In addition, in this production example, as clearly shown in the figure, even in a situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of change display (hold 0 state) is shown, it is shown at the time of hold 1. Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in a change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street.

  Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIGS. 177 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display. Although the pre-reading effect may be executed in any of the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode as described above, the holding pre-reading is performed in the rendering state shown in FIG. 177 (C). The appearance of an effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variation display) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect (example here) Then, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect).

  FIG. 177 (D) shows that one winning occurs during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the holding information corresponding to the winning is normally held as a holding display corresponding to the holding 2 The production status displayed in the form of is shown. However, if the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, jackpot information) and satisfies the above-described change effect execution condition, FIG. 177 (E) shows. As described above, the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

  As described above, a change effect is a change made by changing the contents of hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored and held before hold information (here hold 2) that causes the change effect. It is something to digest. On the other hand, the above-described change gaze effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, jackpot information) and generates the change gaze effect. The contents of the hold information (here hold 1 here) that is stored before the information (here hold 2) and is in the hold state are put on hold without modification. That is, in this case, since the ease of occurrence of various effects will be different when the hold 1 is digested depending on whether the change effect or the change Gase effect is performed, It is possible for the player side to estimate whether or not the hold indicating the game information is included (whether the change effect or the change gaze effect is performed), so that the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed. It is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to these effects so that no hold change occurs regardless of the result of the jackpot determination in both the change effect and the change gaze effect.

  Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2 is after the change display of the hold 0 that is not the target for altering the hold information has ended. In addition, it is desirable that the change display of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information is before the start of the variable display. In this regard, in this embodiment, by executing the control related to the change effect when the hold display of the hold 1 is not yet shifted and displayed after the losing symbol is stopped by the change display of the hold 0. As shown in FIG. 177 (E), as well as modifying the hold information for hold 1 (especially information related to the effect), the timer pre-reading effect and the change state of the hold (red) displayed so far are displayed. The background image is not displayed (displayed in a normal hold mode), and the background image is changed to the background image when the change effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, “change”) is displayed for a predetermined time.

  In such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer pre-reading effect that has appeared until then until the variable display of hold 0 is terminated continues to be displayed without starting the count display. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer prefetching effect is the hold 1.

  In FIG. 177 (F), after the change effect background shown in FIG. 177 (E) appears, the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested by shifting the hold information. The production status is shown.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started. The timer effect count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. Similarly, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display related to the first production (here “conversation notice”) (here, “make conversation notice appear”) is displayed. Has been. The timing at which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) may appear before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. It is possible to appear at an appropriate timing.

  Note that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 177 (D)). A partial display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays “Take a conversation notice to appear” in the so-called ticker mode (slide video) is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

  In this production situation (FIG. 177 (F)), the timer production starts counting with a relatively small number of counts such as “10 seconds”. There is a high possibility that it will be the target of the timer performance, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. However, in this effect state (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific indication (conversation notice) that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types that are the effects of the timer effect appears. It is expected that the target of the timer production will be “conversation notice that appears relatively early” and that the mission success will be confirmed to be a big hit. For this reason, the decline in the entertainment interest is suppressed.

  Moreover, as described above, the timer effect appears with a probability different from the normal time when the change effect is executed. For example, when the timer pre-reading effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (prediction of timer occurrence), the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 20% under normal conditions. On the other hand, the timer effect appears with a probability of approximately 50% when the change effect is executed. Therefore, when the timer effect appears in the background of such a change effect, the change effect (the change of the appearance probability of the timer effect is not a constant change effect (generally 20%) where the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change). The expectation that about 50%) is being executed, and in turn, the expectation for winning the jackpot (because it is determined that the holding information for the jackpot is included at the time of changing production) is increased. However, in this case, if the timer effect does not appear in the background of such a change effect, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, not the change effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. As a result, the degree of concern that the change gaze production (approximately 20%) is being executed increases.

  In addition, when the timer prefetching effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer preparation in progress), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in the normal time. When the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of approximately 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect does not appear in the background of such a change effect, the change of the appearance probability of the timer effect is not a change effect (generally 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It is definitely suggested that the performance (generally 50%) is being executed and that the holding information for winning the jackpot is included. However, at this time, if a timer effect appears in the background of such a change effect, it is not a change effect (generally 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but a change effect that does not change the appearance probability of the timer effect. As a result, the degree of concern that the performance (approximately 100%) is being executed increases.

  FIG. 178 (G) shows a timer related indication indicating that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined value (here, 0) and has reached the predetermined value (here, 0). The display status (here “Yukuzo”) is shown. Note that the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) suggesting that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached may appear after the timer effect count display is hidden.

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), the count display reaches a predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed. It is a situation that is definitely suggested that the situation is about to appear now, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is drawn to whether or not a conversation notice appears as the production.

  FIG. 178 (H) shows a conversation notice (in this case, after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer related display are hidden) "It may be a chance")) shows the production situation. Immediately after this, a special display indicating that the mission was successful appears in the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear).

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), since the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) indicates that the mission was successful, it is definitely suggested to win the jackpot.

  In FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is successful in FIG. 178 (H), the change display is stopped by the losing symbol even though the special display (here, “Mission successful!”) Appears. The production situation is shown.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display related to the first presentation (here, “conversation notice”) (here, “make the conversation notice appear”), the hold information that is the subject of the presentation (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the hold 1), and the hold information (FIG. 178 (I In the situation shown in (), it is possible to appear in advance even within the variable display period corresponding to the hold (0). Moreover, the timing at which the first presentation (here, “conversation notice”) is displayed and the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears, is also the holding information (the big hit) Within the variable display period according to the hold information (hold information that does not become big hit) before the variable display under a predetermined condition. Can also appear in advance.

  According to such a configuration, even though a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Appears in the mission effect, and it has been definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, the fluctuation display ends with a losing pattern. Since it will be (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after that, when the next variation display is started, the variation display ends (stops) with a jackpot symbol, so that a sense of happiness after being dropped into despair is given. . As a result, it becomes possible to add a dramatic inflection even after it has been definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, so that it is possible to maintain the gaming interest until the big hit symbol is stopped become.

  However, when the special display appears in advance as described above, there is a concern that a complaint on the player side with respect to the hole side may occur at the time when the variable display is ended (stopped) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of a loss variation in which a special display appears in advance, the ratio that the pre-reading effect that extends to the next variation display (a variation display that becomes a big hit) is executed within the execution period of the variation display does not appear in the special display. It is desirable to set it higher than the time. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), after the mission is achieved in FIG. 178 (H), the timer is displayed within the period until the change display is terminated (stopped) with the losing symbol. A new look-ahead effect will be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission is successful before the timer effect count display is started, the variable display displays the losing symbol in the variable display, and the variable display in which the timer effect count display is started appears. It is possible to achieve an effect as if the variation display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a complaint on the player side with respect to the hole side when the variable display is terminated (stopped) with a lost symbol.

  However, the look-ahead effect that spans multiple variation displays (up to the variation display that is a big hit) may not necessarily be executed. In this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the hold information in which the jackpot symbol appears. It is desirable to continue to display a special display (in this case, “Mission successful!”) That appears within the execution period of the variable display in which the losing symbol appears, even after the digestion is started and the variable display is started. In this respect, if such a special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is continuously displayed until the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display where the jackpot symbol appears, it will be produced before the jackpot symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 178 (K), an effect image that is definitely suggested to win a big hit as an effect in the effect pattern, because there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest without a typical inflection. It is desirable to hide the special display (in this case, “Mission Success!”) At a timing prior to the occurrence of. As a result, after the special display (here, “Mission Success!”) Is hidden, the effect image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (determined to win a big hit as the effect content in the effect pattern) Until the appearance of the suggested effect image), the feeling of anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot symbol increases somewhat, and the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the effect state where the jackpot symbol is stopped) It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until).

  In FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect for 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) changes. Until it appears, the count display of the 30-second timer effect ends, a timer-related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, and an effect that is the target of the effect has occurred Needless to say.

  Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

  FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero. In FIG. 179 (B), three winnings are generated during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), and the holding information corresponding to those winnings is stored, and the holding which is won first is held. An effect in which the hold display corresponding to 1 is in the normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the 2nd winning hold 2 is in red, and the hold display corresponding to the 3rd winning hold 3 is displayed in blue. Indicates the situation. FIG. 179 (C) shows a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) after the decorative symbol SZ, which has been in a variable display state in the production state shown in FIG. ) Shows the production situation in which the hold information stored in the hold 1 is digested and changed to a change state. In this production example as well, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and is in a variable display state (hold 0 state), it is shown at the time of hold 1. Display control is performed so that the player can recognize the hold display mode (hold 0 display). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in a change mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. Street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, for the sake of convenience of explanation in FIGS. 177 and 178, the movable body for production KT omitted is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, “a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom-front front movable effect unit 3500, It corresponds to `` movable member '' etc.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information that was in the hold 1 state in FIGS. 179 (A) and (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Alternatively, the hold prefetching effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation display. The pre-reading pre-production effect may be executed in any of the first preceding aspect, the second pre-preceding aspect, or the third pre-preceding aspect described above. The appearance of the effect means that any of the hold information of the hold 0 (in the variable display state), the hold information of the hold 1 or the hold information of the hold 2 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect. (In the example here, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold pre-reading effect).

  Here, as an aspect of the hold pre-reading effect, the count display may be executed from when the corresponding hold display (here, hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), the count display is the predetermined numerical value (here, “0”), as well as an event that the decorative display of the decorative symbol SZ may end. Since the event that the variation display of the decoration symbol SZ ends before the time reaches the point can occur, even if the count display is being executed, the target of the timer effect is any hold information It becomes difficult to grasp whether or not.

  However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding mode (predicting timer generation), the second preceding mode (timer generating chance), and the third preceding mode (timer generating chance) is displayed as the mode of holding pre-reading effect. Can be done.

  In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information 1 is in red in the hold information 0, 1, 2 and is in the hold display mode with the highest expectation level for jackpot. In view of this, it is desirable from the player side that the timer prefetching effect is for the hold information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red hold display. In other words, in this case, the combined effect indicates that the expected degree of winning the jackpot is higher in the hold information 1, so that the hold 0 in the normal hold mode and the blue hold 2 in the low expectation state are prefetched by the timer. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in any of the hold information 0 to 2 as compared with the case where the expectation degree of jackpot is dispersed as a target of the production. In addition, if the blue hold 2 with low expectation becomes the target of the timer prefetching effect, there is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment, so the blue hold 2 with low expectation is the timer for maintaining the game entertainment. It is also important to develop the production so that it is not the target of the prefetching production.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when a new winning occurs when the holding information (hit holding) in which the jackpot symbol appears is stored, not the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174) but the big hit holding time. The hold change effect is executed with reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time change change table T9b). In the hold change effect using the special time change change table T9b, when the big hit hold is already included (when the red hold 1 is a big hit), red and green are unlikely to appear as the hold 2 mode. The blue and white blinking modes are relatively likely to appear. Therefore, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer prefetching production is for the hold information 1 and functions to increase the big hit expectation level, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation level is set to the timer. Because the chance increase by avoiding the decline in the gaming interest by making it a target and the hold information of the hold 1 of the red mode is a big hit, the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) is referred to and the blue mode Increased chances by expecting that the hold display of hold 2 is in a blue (high probability of appearance) production state (the notice timer production with a high jackpot expectation is “production within the variable display during execution” Is a production target, and it also functions as if it supports the fact that “the variable display during the execution is a big hit”). From becoming cormorants, it is possible to improve the game playability.

  Therefore, in the production situation shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and (C), when a new winning is generated, a blue or white blinking on-hold display is newly generated, or a green or red on-hold display is displayed. If a new occurrence is confirmed, it is possible to recognize whether or not a jackpot hold is included, and it can be said that the stage is in a production situation in which a new winning is encouraged.

  In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ in the running state is maintained while the timer pre-reading effect mode shown in FIG. After the end (stop), the hold information stored in the hold 1 as a result of the shift operation of the hold information is digested to show a change state.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D), the player is subject to the timer pre-reading effect in the hold information of hold 0 (in a variable display state) that is in red and in blue. It becomes possible to recognize that the information is one of the hold information of the hold 1 and hope that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the hold 0 which is a red mode.

  In this effect example, the timer effect is also displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case of the timer prefetch effect (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, the partial range (left portion) of the dialogue part of the female character in the conversation notice is hidden by the timer effect that is preferentially displayed.

  FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer pre-reading effect ends and the timer effect count display is being executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D). .

  However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer prefetch is for red hold information) ) Is an extremely high level of interest for players. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display that is in the running state is made so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that such count display is in the running state. Control can be made so that the movable body KT for the production is moved forward and positioned for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is executed, and it is confirmed whether the timer effect count display is executed while the player is feeling excited. By making it difficult, it is possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of throb.

  In order to suitably realize such an effect, in the situation where the timer effect is being executed but the count display is not yet executed (for example, while the timer pre-reading effect is being executed), the aforementioned movable body for effect KT It is desirable to control so as not to move (move). That is, in this case, since the movable body KT for the effect suddenly moves where the player does not care about the existence of the movable body KT for the effect, the count display becomes difficult to see. With such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing, it is possible to increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

  The operation effect by the effector movable body KT may be made to function only as an effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the timer pre-reading effect among the timer effects and makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. You may make it function also as object notice E2 (1st production). That is, in this case, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not an object of the timer effect and is not originally related, but the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during the count display. By becoming (FIG. 179 (E)), for example, a higher jackpot expectation level is shown than the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)), and the game entertainment is improved. Will be able to.

  As described above, this non-target notice E2 (here, the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT) is desirably executed in any of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. In a state where the display is not executed, it is desirable to show the big hit expectation degree depending on which of the light emission modes (blue, green, red) appears when the movable body KT for production appears. At this time, when the production movable body KT operates in the red light emission mode, the expectation degree of big hit may be higher than the cut-in production shown in the next production situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation when the action effect is generated by the effector movable body KT is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). Is required. However, as described above, when an operation effect is performed by the movable body for production KT during the execution of the count display, regardless of which of blue, green, and red appears as the light emission mode, the motion for the production is performed. It is desirable to control so that the degree of jackpot expectation indicated by the action effect by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during the count display, attention is paid not to what kind of aspect appears in the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT but to the operation effect itself by the effecting movable body KT. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests depending on the mode when the production effect is generated by the production movable body KT.

  By the way, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance increase has succeeded because the subject of the timer prefetching production is not the blue hold 2 but the red hold 1. In addition, the chance increase due to the execution of the non-target notice E2 (here, the operation effect by the effecting movable body KT) during the execution of the count display is also successful. Therefore, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the variation display is not likely to win the big hit despite the fact that there is such a high expectation situation, the game entertainment will be enhanced originally. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will be significantly reduced in the expected variation display. In this regard, in the above-described special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) that is referred to when a big hit hold (including hold 0) is included, a green or red state hold when a new winning occurs. Since it is difficult for information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning is displayed in red in the production state shown in FIG. 179 (E), a jackpot hold is included. There is a possibility that the player will be exposed to the fact that it is not.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during a period in which the count display of a specific timer effect that is considered to have a high degree of expectation is executed among the timer effects, or in a period thereafter. Even if an error occurs, the mode (flashing white, blue, green, red, rainbow) is difficult to recognize, and even if the hold display that has already been displayed is further changed to hold, the control becomes difficult to recognize. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), the hold 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by their shadows, making it difficult to recognize the hold display mode. May be hidden. As a result, even if a count display with a high degree of expectation is being executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the appearance of a green or red hold display when a new winning occurs. become.

  In FIG. 179 (F), after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, An effect situation is shown in which an effect (cut-in effect by a teammate character) that is an effect of a timer effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), even in a situation where an effect (cut-in effect by a teammate character) that is an effect target of a timer effect is being executed, the holds 1 and 2 are still hidden and are shadowed by the shadow. The mode of hold display is difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 180 (G) shows the variation display when the teammate character wins the enemy character after the effect (cut-in effect by the teammate character) that is the target of the timer effect in FIG. 180 (F) is executed. It shows the production situation that is shown to be confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol.

  In the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitely suggested that it will be a big hit, no matter which mode appears as the mode of the hold 1, 2, the game entertainment is lowered There is no such thing. Therefore, the hold 1 and 2 that are difficult to recognize are displayed in a recognizable manner as to which mode appears after the effect indicating whether or not the big hit is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In other words, in this case, even if it is shown that the change display is confirmed and stopped due to losing because the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the hold 1 and 2 modes can be recognized at that time. Since it may be recognized that either one of 1 and 2 is a red or rainbow-colored aspect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. This count display is performed with the remaining count number remaining (the count number displayed at the start of the count display) even in the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and stopped and the variable display is terminated. (With more counts remaining than the smallest count number (10 seconds)), and without any effects that are the targets of the timer effects being generated, continue even after the change display ends. It is executed as the special timer effect described above.

  However, after that, during the period in which the opening effect is executed in the effect state shown in FIG. 180 (I), the timer effect count display is not displayed. Thereby, the change display (symbol effect) ended in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J). It becomes possible to recognize that the productions are not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the production newly started in this way with a fresh feeling.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is secretly executed as time elapses even during the period in which the timer effect count display is hidden (the opening effect execution period). When the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the jackpot game that is started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. Like to be. This will create a production situation as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer production reaches a predetermined value has suddenly decreased, so it counts in a state where the player's feelings are not ready It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is preferably avoided that the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display becomes rutted.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the big hit game. At this time, a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) that suggests that the predetermined numerical value (0 in this case) has been reached appears in the same manner as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

  FIG. 180 (K) shows that after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed. An effect situation in which a specific effect (corresponding to the first special effect and the second special effect described above, and “CHANCE” in the drawing) is executed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (K), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment can execute a specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect (“ When “CHANCE” is displayed), the jackpot type in which the winning jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, a type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or a high-probability time-short game state after the jackpot game ends) It is shown that the degree of expectation is high. Note that the ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect is executed, the count display is continued until after the big hit game is started, not only is the big hit confirmed, but the winning big hit is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player. A certain level of expectation will also increase, so that it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Then, after this, an effect that the teammate character fights against the enemy character is performed in a specific round game or the like, and as a result, the teammate character wins (FIG. 180 (L)), the jackpot type in which the winning jackpot is advantageous to the player. It will be shown that. When the teammate character is defeated in the performance, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type advantageous to the player.

  Thus, when the result of the performance during the big hit game appears, the game proceeds with the content according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or after the jackpot game is over, it is controlled to a high probability time-short state. On the other hand, when the result of losing the teammate character is obtained, the big hit game is finished in eight rounds, or after the big hit game is finished, a gaming state (for example, a low probability of lower probability) than the high probability short-time state. It is controlled in a short time state.

  Here, the content of the specific effect (display of “CHANCE”) shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to an effect in which a teammate character fights against an enemy character in a specific round game. For example, it is possible to set an effect content for the ally character to acquire a weapon in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K) and execute an effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game. For example, in the specific performance shown in FIG. 180 (K), it can be implied that the possibility that the teammate character has won in the subsequent battle has increased.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is executed, and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described. Note that the effects described below can be executed in appropriate combinations between the effects, and can also be executed in appropriate combinations with the effects described above. Further, in each of the following effects examples, a case is described in which it is executed as a notice timer effect, but it may be executed as a variable timer effect instead of a notice timer effect. That is, in this case, the contents of the effects according to the following effects are determined in advance as the effects of the variation pattern.

[Timer exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) ) Are prepared, and any of these effects is set as a timer object (count object) (timer object notice lottery), and a timer effect is displayed for the timing at which the effect object targeted by the timer appears. Execute. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation (object A notice), special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation (Advance object B notice)) is performed without knowing which is the target of the timer, and in such a production situation, the production mode (timer target notice) It is possible to display which suggests which effect mode (not determined as a timer object in the lottery) (timer object exclusion effect).

  That is, in this case, at the stage of digesting the remaining count in the timer effect, a guessing material as to which effect mode is the timer target is provided. For example, when a low-expected production mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as a production mode that is not a timer object, the possibility that a low-expected production mode appears as a timer object at that time is excluded. Therefore, although it is a stage where the remaining count in the timer performance is being digested, a high-expected performance mode (for example, an accessory B action) appears as a timer object, so that the game entertainment can be expected. It is expected to improve this. In addition, when a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, an action B action) is suggested as an effect mode that is not subject to the timer, at that time, the timer effect cannot be expected. It becomes possible to pay attention to the effect, and it is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, while the remaining count is consumed, the expectation for the timer effect can be appropriately changed without changing the aspect of the count display itself.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "No timer character reach" are selected in a situation. FIG. 181 (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object exclusion effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 15, 16 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "no timer SP reach" are selected in a situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (any one of “pending change 5”, “actual object A operation 3”, or “special timer 1”). Is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer exclusion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510)) is selected. When any one of “holding change 5”, “actual object A action 3”, and “actual object B action 1” is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

  However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). Alternatively, the determination may be made based on the fact that a special result has been obtained in a predetermined effect lottery based on the result of the jackpot determination or the like. As will be described later, the timer-excluded effect may appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed afterwards (relative to the timer target advance effect) (whether it is executed or unknown), the effect that does not appear as a timer object It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. In addition, when the timer target exclusion effect appears when the timer effect has not yet been executed (even when the timer pre-reading effect display is not displayed), the timer effect is thereafter compared to when the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the ratio of execution is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an advance suggestion that the timer effect is executed.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “holding change 5” or “actual object A operation 3”, 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation started. At around timing, a count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“holding change 5” or “actual A operation” 3 ") appears.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the example where the timer effect is executed in the mode of “holding change 5” or “object A action 3”, 20 seconds after the start of the symbol variation is also the same. The count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing when the time has passed, and after the count display becomes “0”, the production mode (“holding change 5” or “object” A operation 3 ") appears.

  In this case, in these cases, the timer effect is not yet executed (the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed) at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. First, the timer exclusion effect can occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is indicated that “conversation notice” is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer target is displayed. Can be grasped by the player that is restricted to any one of the pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, and accessory B operation. That is, in this case, a low-expected production mode out of a plurality of production modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A action, special timer, cut-in B, and action B action) is not a candidate for timer. (A high-expected production mode can be expected to be a candidate for the timer), so the player wishes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Thus, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state.

  In the period in which the count display is in an unexecuted state (in this example, the period from when the symbol variation is started until 20 seconds elapses), the above-described timer prefetching effect (the first preceding mode, the second mode) The preceding mode and the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

  Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target exclusion effect can occur in accordance with the start of the count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effect (conversation notice) already excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect are excluded. For example, if the second timer target exclusion effect indicates that the “special timer” is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is suspended, cut-in A, accessory A action, cut-in B Then, the player can grasp that the action B has been narrowed down to one of the actions B. In this case, among the plurality of production modes (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, and accessory B operation), the production mode with a big hit is selected from the candidates for the timer target. Since it is possible to recognize that it has fallen off, it is possible to make a sense of anxiety about whether or not a highly anticipated effect will appear as a timer object after the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

  Next, the third timer target exclusion effect can occur at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation. In the third timer-excluded effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) already excluded in the first and second timer-targeted effects are further excluded. For example, if it is indicated that “Cut-in B” is not a candidate for timer, the candidate for timer is narrowed to any one of pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, and accessory B operation. It becomes possible for the player to grasp this.

  Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), and the production mode ("holding change 5 ", A change in hold occurs, and in the case of" act A action 3 ", an action A action occurs) is executed as a timer target effect.

  By the way, in the timer effects of “pending change 5” and “object A action 3” shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the timer effect in this manner (timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds elapse) is executed. It can be seen that there are only three types of timer announcements: conversation advance notice, hold change, and accessory action. In other words, in this case, an experienced player confirms that a timer effect has been generated in such a manner that the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing of 40 seconds after the start of symbol variation. , Hold change, cut-in A, accessory A action, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B action, but not one of conversation notice, hold change, accessory A action It is assumed that you will see through. At this time, if there are cases where two effects are excluded by the timer-excluded effects, among the effects of conversation advance notice, change on hold, and accessory A action, any effect is displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer-excluded effect so that at least two effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

  According to such a timer-excluded effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or when the count display is being executed, it is inflated to an expectation or anxiety (which effects are excluded from the timer object). Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the same as the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). The timing is set in accordance with the arrival of any of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates.

  For example, when looking at the time charts shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when 45 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, even if the count display subsequently becomes 0, the “object A operation” is displayed as an effect for the timer. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. As described above, in the timer effect, each timing (usually 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case). Etc.), the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer-excluded effect, even for beginners, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (in this example, start of variation) 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.), and the timer effect can be enjoyed to a high degree by recognizing that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed down. .

  Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of “special timer 1” (the count display having a count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the symbol change of the character reach). In the example), every 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, Each of the timer target exclusion effects will be executed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of “act B action 1” (the count having the count number of 70 seconds in accordance with the start of the SP reach symbol variation). In the example where display is performed), every time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed.

  In addition, the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment suggests one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive after the start of symbol variation. I did it. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer exclusion effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability every time these timings arrive based on the type of variation pattern, the result of jackpot determination, etc. The timer target exclusion effect may appear, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from those timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer exclusion effect may be made different at a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the start of symbol variation (for example, the timing at which the first timer-exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) If the ratio at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is higher than the later timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur) It is possible to digest the count display over a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not a timer target. However, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is executed at the timing when the first timer-excluded effect can be generated, and when the timer-targeted excluded effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer-targeted excluded effect can occur (Or even if the timer exclusion effect is executed at any timing), it is desirable that the ratio (expected degree) of appearance of the big hit symbol is the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer-excluded effect appears at an early timing (while the rate of execution of the timer-excluded effect is increased) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to fluctuate). Because it comes to be aware of what to do, it is expected to improve the game entertainment at the beginning of the production.

  In the case of realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the target of the timer based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “reserved change 5” of the character reach). Determining whether to generate an exclusion effect, and at what timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), a maximum of three timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) Process. Next, at each timing when it is determined that the timer target exclusion effect is to be generated, a determination process is performed as to which effect mode is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149 or after step S5510 and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible to carry out based on the processing result information.

  Or you may make it perform the timer object exclusion | determination effect for exclusive use (only for conversation notice) which suggests that a specific production | presentation aspect (for example, conversation notice) is not a timer object. That is, in this case, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “reserved change 5” of the character reach, etc.) A determination process is performed as to whether or not to generate a dedicated timer target exclusion effect at which timing.

  In any case, when the performance mode suggested as the performance mode that is not subject to the timer is a relatively low-expected performance mode, the suggested performance mode is a relatively high-expected performance mode. It is desirable that the proportion of the highly anticipated performance mode appear as a timer-targeted performance is higher than that of the above. According to such a configuration, when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect that excludes a low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, at least at a specific timing among the plurality of timings, only a specific performance mode (for example, a “conversation notice” which is a low-expected performance mode) may be suggested as a performance mode that is not a timer target. You may set as follows. That is, in this case, when the timer-excluded effect is generated at a specific timing, it is understood that a specific effect mode (for example, “conversation notice”, which is a low-expected effect mode) is not a timer target. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to maintain the game entertainment interest with a sense of expectation that the effect of the timer target is a highly anticipated effect mode.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer target, but two or more effects that are not a timer target under a predetermined condition. You may make it suggest the production | presentation aspect. For example, if two low-expected effects are suggested, it is possible to greatly enhance the game entertainment at the stage of digesting the remaining count in the timer effect.

  In addition, with respect to “display suggesting which presentation mode is not a timer target”, the count display starts within a period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the effect that is the target of the timer is executed, and to maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode is not subject to the timer”, if the display is maintained after the effect that is subject to the timer is executed, the timer effect It can be used as a material for remembering which production mode the subject of is.

  In addition, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, “display that suggests which production mode is not the target of the timer” is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is digested (for example, a specific timer When a timer effect of a type is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (when a specific count value is reached before the count display reaches a predetermined value) (when the count display reaches a specific count value, etc.). May be maintained while the count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case) and the effect targeted for the timer is executed. In other words, in this case, the remaining count of the count display will be digested without knowing when the “display that suggests which direction is not targeted for the timer” will be hidden, It is expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become rutted). In order to obtain such an operational effect, for the “display indicating which presentation mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the count display reaches a predetermined value and becomes a timer target. It is desirable to maintain the non-display state even after the production mode has appeared. However, even if the “indication suggesting which effect mode is not targeted for the timer” is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode not targeted for the timer is displayed as the effect targeted for the timer. It is important to control so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind unless the memory about the hidden display mode is forgotten. In addition, with regard to the “display that suggests which effect mode that is not a timer target” is hidden, the display after the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer mode target mode appears. After maintaining the non-display state (for example, after the elapse of a predetermined time), check that the player's memory is correct so that the symbol is displayed again at a timing before it is confirmed and stopped. It is desirable to be able to do so.

  In addition, when a timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state, a “display suggesting which effect mode that is not a timer target” appears, the predetermined effect condition is When satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while the timer effect (count display) is not executed. In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to give a sense of tension regarding the timer effect before the count display is started, and it is possible to provide a sharp effect.

  Note that, as will be described later, “displays suggesting which presentation mode is not a timer target” is shown in FIGS. 198C to 198K and FIGS. 200B to 200J. In addition, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that the production mode does not occur when the count display becomes zero. Other methods include, for example, a method in which the name of the effect mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a cross mark is added thereto, or a conversation notice or cut-in is performed at a timing before the count display reaches zero. To show that the female character or male character used to perform the conversation has died and suggest that the conversation notice and cut-in cannot be executed, and the hold display is monochrome before the count display reaches 0 Shown that the color change cannot be displayed and the combination of the objects A and B fails at the timing before the count display reaches 0. Thus, a technique suggesting that the action A and B cannot be performed may be employed. The point is that a special mode that cannot appear at the timing before the count display reaches 0 when the timer display is selected is prepared, and this timing at the timing before the count display reaches 0. If an effect that is not a timer target, such as a conversation notice or a hold change, is executed in a special mode, it is possible to realize a “display suggesting which effect mode is not a timer target”. .

  In addition, when a timer-excluded effect is generated, a highly-expected effect mode is more likely to appear as a timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value, compared to when the timer-targeted excluded effect does not occur. By controlling in this way, it can be expected that the game entertainment is improved more suitably when the count display digests the remaining count.

  By the way, when it is suggested by the timer object exclusion effect that the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination is not a timer object, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced as compared with the effect mode (special timer) of the hit determination. Therefore, if it is indicated that the winning appearance mode (special timer) is not subject to the timer, even if any other mode of appearance appears when the count display reaches the predetermined value, You may make it a fluctuation | variation be surely stopped by a big hit symbol.

  Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the jackpot symbol appears regardless of which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). You may make it a ratio (expectation degree) become the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as a timer object when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The timer effect can be ended early at the time when the time is consumed. As a result, it is possible to shift attention to other effects while the remaining count of the count display is being digested, so the effect design that increases the types of effects that appear per unit time can be created. Can be encouraged.

  In addition, when two or more count displays (timer effects) appear within one symbol variation period and a timer-excluded effect is executed, if an effect situation occurs in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer It is desirable to perform control so that an effect mode that is suggested not to be a timer object in the target exclusion effect does not appear as the timer object in any timer effect (count display).

  In addition, with respect to the production mode suggested that the timer target exclusion production is not targeted for the timer, even if it is at a timing different from the timing at which the count display reaches the predetermined value, it does not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so as not to appear even as an effect that is not a timer target).

  In addition, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, it may be possible to perform a predecessor effect indicating whether or not the timer target effect is suggested. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined aspect does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined aspect appears in the preceding effect.

  In this embodiment, the timer-excluded effect is executed in accordance with one of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing at which the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, what is necessary is just to perform a timer object exclusion effect according to one of a plurality of predetermined timings, and it is not always necessary to perform it according to these timings. However, it is desirable that the timer-excluded effect is not executed during a specific effect period such as a period in which the remaining count is low, even within the period in which the count display is being executed.

  Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed to be performed over the entire period during which the count display is performed, or the period during which the count display is performed. There may be a case where the execution of the timer-excluded effect is not allowed in a certain period of time. By preparing such a special timer type, when the timer type appears, it is possible to concentrate on digesting the count display and enjoy the original timer effect. It becomes like this. In order to obtain such an effect, when a timer-excluded effect is not in a special period, an effect mode different from that in the special period is caused to appear in the special period. It can be said that it is important that the player can recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type is not allowed to execute the timer-excluded effect over the entire period during which the count display is being executed, the timer display is concentrated in the period before the count display is started. Therefore, it is desirable to allow execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

  It should be noted that the above-described period of non-displaying the “display suggesting which presentation mode that is not a timer target” is controlled as the same period as the period during which execution of the timer target exclusion stage is not allowed. Also good.

  Further, when the count display in the timer effect is performed in any of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, the first display It is good also as controlling so that the ratio with which a timer object exclusion effect is performed becomes high compared with the case where count display is performed in a mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed according to the count display mode, and it is possible to focus attention on the effect during the count display according to the count display mode.

  The timer exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is irrelevant, and the variation pattern type or jackpot You may make it perform based on the special result being obtained by the predetermined | prescribed effect lottery based on the result of determination. As will be described later, the timer-excluded effect may appear within a variation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good.

  In addition, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears when the timer effect has not yet been executed (even when the timer pre-reading effect display does not appear), the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. After that, it is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an advance suggestion that the timer effect is executed. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding aspect or the second preceding aspect of the timer prefetching effects. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed is not started and is still in the hold state, a specific effect mode that is not set as a timer target in the timer effect can be suggested. A specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer, with the speculation of whether the timer effect appears due to the symbol variation in the inside, the timer effect appears due to the symbol variation in the hold state, or the timer effect does not appear. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the timer performance occurs.

[Timer first advance effect]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a counts the predetermined effect (the accessory B operation) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B), and displays the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect appears. The process is executed up to a predetermined value within a period during which the design effect is performed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the period effect is specified within the period before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears in the period during which the symbol effect is performed. By making an effect using a decorative member appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is counted (timer target advance effect).

  That is, in this case, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by focusing on what kind of effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value.

  FIG. 182 shows an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object advance effect performed when the fluctuation numbers 15 and 16 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "no timer SP reach" are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when one of the specific timer types (first timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). A timer target advance effect is executed. In the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, as the effects of the timer, the combination of the combination A used in the “combination A operation” and the combination B used in the “combination B operation”. An effect such as an “actual article A & B operation” for operating both is performed.

  However, the timer-first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, FIG. When one of the timer types selected is selected, the timer target advance effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant, and a special effect lottery based on the variation pattern type or the result of jackpot determination is special. You may make it carry out based on the result being obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target advance effect may appear in a variation pattern in which the timer effect is determined not to be executed, or may appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, when it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed afterwards (for the timer target advance effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the timer effect count display It is possible to indicate in advance which type of effect mode that appears when becomes a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target advance effect appears when the timer effect is not yet executed (even when the timer prefetch effect display is not displayed), the timer target advance effect does not appear after that. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is increased so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect suggesting in advance that the timer effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is set at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation. The count display is started, and after the count display becomes “0”, the effect mode (“act B action” or “act A & B action”) that appears as a timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the form of the advance timers 2 and 5, the count display with the count number of 70 seconds is started in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is “0”. After that, an effect mode ("act B action" or "act A & B action") that is a timer object appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the modes of the advance timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer prefetch effect (the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, or the third preceding mode) is performed in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation. At the same time, the timer pre-reading effect is displayed and the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed at the timing when 50 seconds have passed, and the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started. After the display becomes “0”, an effect mode (“act B action” or “act A & B action”) appears as a timer target.

  In this respect, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the timer effect is not yet executed (even the display of the timer prefetch effect is displayed). The first timer target advance effect can occur even though it is not in the state. In the first timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is set at the first position or in the vicinity thereof. An effect of making a rattling vibration (function B rattling) is performed.

  That is, the “object B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timer 1 is an “effect that displaces the accessory B from the first position to the second position”, and is the timer object effect of the advance timer 4. The “act A & B operation” is “the effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position and displacing the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position”. The timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the effect is used, but an effect (the accessory B rattle) different from any of these effects is performed. According to such a configuration, although the timer effect is in a stage before the execution, the possibility that the timer effect is performed after that can be suggested, and the target effect in the timer effect is It is possible to suggest which effect mode is used (indicating that the effect is using the accessory B). Also, in the first timer target advance effect, by using the accessory B, an effect (the accessory B rattle) different from the timer target effect (the accessory B operation, the accessory A & B operation) is performed. While the target effect in the timer effect is suggested to be an effect using the accessory B, it is concealed as to how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value and the timer target performance is performed.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target is displayed while the timer effect is being displayed. A first-out effect can occur. In the second timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is changed from the “first position”. An effect (moving action B in the middle of accessory B (small)) is performed to “displace to the first halfway position between the first position and the second position”.

  That is, the second timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the “act B action” and the “act A & B action” is used, but the effect different from any of these effects (the accessory) B middle operation (small)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (implying that it is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the second timer target advance effect, the effect B (operation B intermediate operation (small)) that is different from the timer object effect (object B operation, accessory A & B operation) is performed using the accessory B. As a result, while suggesting which direction the target effect of the timer effect is, the action B is operated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is performed.

  In addition, in the second timer target advance effect, the first timer target advance effect (roughness in the vicinity of the “first position”) is more than the effect range (“first position” to “first”). Displacement from “first position” to “second position” that appears when “act B action” or “act A & B action” is performed. ). Therefore, by comparing the first timer target advance effect and the second timer target advance effect, the feature B is displayed in the timer target effect ("object B operation" or "object A & B operation"). It will be possible to provide speculative material on how to operate.

  Further, in the case of the advance timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the timer object is displayed for the third time while the timer effect is being displayed. A first-out effect can occur. In the third timer target advance effect, for example, the accessory B used in the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” that is the timer target effect of the advance timers 1 and 4 is “first” from the first position. An effect (moving action B on the middle of the accessory B (large)) is performed to “a second intermediate position between the first intermediate position and the second position”.

  In other words, the third timer target advance effect is common in that the accessory B used in the “act B action” or the “act A & B action” is used, but the effect different from any of these effects (the accessory) B middle operation (large)). According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching the predetermined value (when the remaining count is consumed), which effect mode is the target effect. It becomes possible to suggest (implying that it is an effect using the accessory B). Also, in the third timer target advance effect, the effect B (operation B intermediate operation (large)) is performed using the accessory B, which is different from the timer object effect (object B operation, accessory A & B operation). As a result, while suggesting which direction the target effect of the timer effect is, the action B is operated when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is performed.

  Moreover, in the third timer target advance effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from “first position” to “second midway position”) is larger than the first timer target advance effect. It is becoming larger and closer to the range of effects (displacement from “first position” to “second position”) that appears when “act B action” or “act A & B action” is performed. Yes. Therefore, by comparing the first to third timer target advance effects, the actor B operates in any manner in the timer target effects ("object B operation" or "object A & B operation"). You will be able to provide more speculative material about what to do.

  On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, the “work B rattle” at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), Each effect such as “actual action B midway action (small)” and “actual substance B midway action (large)” is performed as the first to third timer target advance action. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 2 and 5, the timer target advance effect is produced in the situation where the count display digests the remaining count at any timing of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Will be done.

  On the other hand, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at the timing Ta <b> 1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta <b> 2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta <b> 3 (for example, 57 seconds), Each effect such as “B object midway action (small)” and “Accessory B halfway action (large)” is performed as the first to third timer target advance action. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the advance timers 3 and 6, at each timing of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is in an unexecuted state and the timer prefetching effect is displayed. The first and second timer target advance effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is executed when the count display is in an unexecuted state, but the timers 1 and 4 are not displayed even when the timer prefetch effect is displayed. Compared to, the rate of occurrence of events such as “Timer target advance effect was executed but timer effect itself was not executed” is reduced, so the player has a higher expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer target advance effect.

  In each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target advance effects are executed. After that, after the timer target effect is executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

  In addition, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the start of the symbol variation, the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” It was decided to produce using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target advance effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are determined based on the type of variation pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, etc. The timer target advance effect may appear at a predetermined probability every time it arrives, or the timing for executing the timer target advance effect may be selected from these timings. At this time, the execution probability of the timer target advance effect and the selection ratio of the content of the effect may be made different for a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

  When realizing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the target of the timer based on the result of the big hit determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, “first-out timer 1” of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether to generate a first-out effect, or at which timing to generate a timer-target first-out effect. Next, determination processing (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed as to which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target advance effect at each timing at which it is determined to generate the timer target advance effect. Note that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149 or after step S5510 and before step S5511 is performed. It is possible to carry out based on the processing result information.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process regarding whether to generate the timer target advance effect, or at what timing the timer target advance effect is generated.

  As described above, the timer target advance effect refers to the timer target within the period before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears in the period during which the symbol effect is performed. It is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted for the timer by causing the effect using the specific decorative member used in the production of the peripheral, and the peripheral control according to this embodiment The MPU 1511a prepares three timings Ta1 to Ta3 as timings at which such timer target advance effect can appear.

  Accordingly, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, referring to the table T10 shown in FIG. 183, the winning information, the information regarding the type of the variation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to these information, Based on the timing Ta1, the timer target advance effect is executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or the timer target advance effect is not executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3).

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, “No timer target advance effect is executed at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ None ”” in the drawing ”) as selection candidates for execution of the timer target advance effect. “Perform timer target advance effect only at timing Ta1 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 ”” in the figure) ”,“ Execute timer target advance effect only at timing Ta2 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. "Ta2") "," Timer advance effect is executed only at timing Ta3 of timings Ta1-Ta3 ("Ta3" in the figure) "," At timings Ta1, Ta2 of timings Ta1-Ta3 A timer target advance effect is executed (in the figure, “Ta1 2 ”)”, “execute timer target advance effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“ Ta1 & 3 ”in the drawing”) ”,“ timer targets at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of timings Ta1 to Ta3 Selection candidates such as “execute first-out effect (“ Ta2 & 3 ”” in the figure) ”and“ execute timer target first-stage effect at all timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 2 & 3” in the figure) ”are prepared.

  In the example of the table T10, when the count display is in an unexecuted state and the timer pre-reading effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target advance effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target advance effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target advance effect may be performed at these timings.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the ratio of execution of the timer target advance effect is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. In addition, the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act A & B”, compared to when the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act B”. The timer target advance effect is set so as to increase, and the number of times the timer target advance effect is executed tends to increase.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at least at any of timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, the timer target advance effect appears. The determination process for the production type is further performed.

  FIG. 184 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T11) about which type of effect mode to be generated at this timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any one of timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, any type of production mode (“object B rattle”, It is determined whether or not “the action B halfway action (small)” and “the action B halfway action (large)” are caused to appear at one timing that has been determined as described above.

  FIG. 185 shows an example of the content of the determination process (table T12) regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at the timing when the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at any two timings of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T12 illustrated in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, any type of production mode (“object B rattle → role "B B rattling", "B B rattling → Operation B halfway (Small)", "B B halfway (Small) → Bing B middle (Small)", "Battery B rattling → B "Intermediate action (Large)", "Intermediate action B (Small) → Action B intermediate action (Large)", "Intermediate B action (Large) → Intermediary action B (Large)") It is determined whether to appear at each of the two determined timings.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that “actual object B rattle → actual object B rattle” appears, “actual object B rattle” is determined at any of the above two determined timings. This is executed as a timer target advance effect, and when it is determined that the “actual object B rattling → actual object B midway action (small)” appears based on the table T12, At the earlier timing of the timing, “act B B rattling” is executed as a timer target advance effect, and at the later timing of the two determined timings, the “act B in the middle (small)” Will be executed as a timer target advance effect.

  FIG. 186 shows an example of the contents (table T13) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode to be generated at those timings when the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3. FIG.

  That is, when it is determined that the timer target advance effect is performed at all timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU 1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the variation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the production random numbers assigned to the information, any type of production mode (“object B rattle → role "B B rattling" → "B B rattling" → "B B rattling → B action in the middle of B (small)" B "Operation (Small)", "Action B in the middle (Small)-> Action B in the middle (Small)-Action B in the middle (Small)", "B "Operation (Large)", "Battery B rattle → Midway action B (Small) → Midway action B (Large)" “Intermediate action B (Large)”, “Intermediate action B (Small) → Intermediate action B (Large) → Intermediate action B (Large)”, The action B intermediate action (large) → the action B intermediate action (large) → the action B intermediate action (large) ”) is determined at each of the above-determined three timings. It will be.

  For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that “object B rattle → object B rattle → function B rattle” appears, at any of the above three determined timings, "B object rattling" is executed as a timer target advance effect, and a determination is made to cause "object B rattling → function B midway action (small) → working object B midway action (large)" to appear based on table T13. Is performed, the “object B rattling” is executed as the timer target first-stage effect at the first timing among the three timings determined as above, and among the three timings determined as above At the second timing, “actual action B halfway (small)” is executed as a timer target first effect, and the above three timings are determined. And executes the "character object B middle operation (large)" as the timer object first out effect in the third timing.

  In the example of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same manner (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. The determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio) depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target advance effect to appear. For example, if the determination process is performed in such a manner that the ratio at which an effect mode having a large effect range is selected increases as the timing at which the timer target advance effect is determined to appear is later, the timer It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the target effect is performed based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target advance effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the timer object is operated by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect in a front view. In order to obtain such an effect, it is preferable to make it difficult to visually recognize the count display during the execution of the first-stage effect (the action B intermediate operation (small), “the operation B intermediate operation (large))”. In this way, if the timer target advance effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target advance effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target depends on the type of effect that appears at that time. Or will feel that there will be enough time left before the timer-targeted performance will be performed (when the range of the performance is large) ( When the output range is small), it is expected that a gap from when the accurate remaining count can be grasped thereafter can be expected to have fun. At this time, the count display may be hidden during execution of the timer target advance effect, and the count display may be displayed again when the timer target advance effect ends.

  However, if the specific decorative member (in this case, the accessory B) is operated in a manner that overlaps the count display of the timer effect in a front view so that the count display is difficult to view while the timer target advance effect is being executed ( Or, if the count display is hidden, the count display reaches the predetermined value even though the timer target advance effect is being executed, and the timer target effect is being executed. There is a concern. Therefore, it is desirable that the count display is made difficult to visually recognize during execution of the timer target advance effect, while the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display is continuously executed. That is, such a count sound is output when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and is not output when a timer target effect is performed. By continuing to output the count sound during the performance, it is expected to suppress misunderstanding that the timer target performance is being executed.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol appears is selected, the timer target advance effect has a larger effect range compared to the case where the variation pattern in which the big hit symbol does not appear is selected. It is set so that the ratio at which the aspect is selected is high.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act A & B”, and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect is “act B”. In comparison, in the timer target advance effect, the ratio that the effect mode having a large effect range is selected is set to be higher.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing is late among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, compared to when the timing is early among the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the production mode having a large production range in the timer target advance production. Is set so that the rate of selection is high. Therefore, it is possible to infer whether or not there is not much time remaining until the timer target effect is performed based on the size of the effect range that appears in the timer target advance effect.

  Further, in the examples of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time passes, the range of effects in the timer target advance effect (the action B rattle → the action B midway action (small) → the action B halfway action (large) ) Is set so that the current situation is maintained (the character B is rattling → the character B is rattling, etc.), but the reverse (a mode in which the effect range is narrowed) does not occur. That is, in this case, as the time elapses, the timer object “action B operation” or “object A & B operation” is approached to an effect range that appears when the operation is performed. By confirming the effect, it is possible to recognize that the remaining time until the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” as the timer object is reduced.

  Further, in the timer target advance effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used. For example, the timer target advance effect may be performed using a different decorative member (for example, the accessory A) without using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used during the accessory B operation). That is, in this case, the timer target advance effect functions as an effect that suggests the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. And when realizing such a timer target advance effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer target advance effect (the accessory B rattle, the accessory B midway action (small), the accessory B halfway action (large)) In addition, it is desirable that the ratio (accuracy) that appears when the type of the suggested effect reaches the predetermined value depends on the number of executions. For example, when the type of production (action B midway action (large)) with a large production range appears, the timer target advance is compared to when the type of production (composition B with rattling) with a small production range appears. The effect using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the effect (the accessory B operation, the accessory A & B operation) may be increased when the count display reaches a predetermined value. When the number of executions of the timer target advance effect in the variation is large, the effect (special item B) using the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used in the timer target advance effect is smaller than when the number of executions is small. The ratio of appearing when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of effects modes including “the accessory B operation” and “the accessory A & B operation” (“the accessory B operation”, “the accessory A & B”). Performing an effect using a specific decorative member (an accessory B) as a timer target advance effect on the premise that any of the effects other than “operation” can appear. It was. However, on the premise that only the “object B operation” or “object A & B operation” is prepared as an effect mode using the accessory B, a specific decorative member (object) An effect using B) may be performed.

  For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, only the “object A & B operation” can appear as an effect for the timer target, and the specific decorative member (the accessory B) is used as the timer target advance effect. When the used effect is performed, only a part of the decoration member (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect (the accessory A & B operation) is used in the timer target advance effect. That is, in this case, it is suggested that the “effect using the accessory B” appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target advance effect, while the “effect using the accessory B” is displayed. It becomes more difficult to predict the whole picture (using the accessory A in addition to the accessory B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the accessory B when the count display reaches a predetermined value by a plurality of timer target advance effects (the accessory B rattle → the accessory B halfway operation (small) → the accessory B halfway operation (large)). Even if an effect approaching the range is executed and its prediction is possible, the presence of the effect A as well as its presence range is concealed, so the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value It becomes possible to suitably maintain the content of the target effect (the accessory A & B operation) in a concealed state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as a timer target advance effect.

  According to such a configuration, the timer target advance effect is performed using only a part (the accessory B) of the accessories A and B that are used in the “object A & B operation” that is the effect of the timer. Of course, in the timer target advance effect, the effect range of the accessory B in the “object A & B operation” using only a part (the accessory B) of the accessories A and B used in the “object A & B operation”. Only part of the effect will appear (the action B in the middle of the action B (small), the action in the middle of the action B (large)). Then, after such a small production range is gradually expanded by a plurality of timer target advance effects, the “object A & B operation” which is the production of the timer target is performed, so that only the feature B in a larger production range. In addition, since the effect using the accessory A also appears, the novelty when the timer target effect is performed is lost by performing the timer target advance effect while digesting the remaining count. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target advance effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to be completely coincident with each other as long as it is possible to suggest which effect mode appears as the timer target effect by the timer target advance effect. For example, in the case where a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged in a front view as fan-shaped features, This is a case where the specific decorative member used in the above is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the specific decorative member used in the timer target performance is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, a fan-shaped accessory was used as a timer target advance effect at a stage before the effect using a fan-shaped accessory was performed as a timer target effect (while the count display was being executed). It is possible to produce an effect.

  In this embodiment, an accessory is used as the specific decorative member. Instead, a display means may be used as the specific decorative member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, an effect similar to the effect using the above-mentioned accessory is realized by increasing the display range (effect range) or changing the display content. It is possible.

  Incidentally, it is desirable to end the “effect using the specific decorative member” performed as the timer target advance effect after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specific decorative member is an accessory, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position after the lapse of a predetermined time, and when the specific decorative member is a display means, Control to hide the display as the timer target advance effect is performed. At this time, the predetermined time required for the timer target advance effect is desirably shorter than the time required for the effect (timer target effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different presentation modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target advance presentation, the specific decorative member used in the timer target presentation can be kept in a choi that is not very satisfactory. Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by waiting for the count display to reach the predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the count display is not displayed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B) A count effect in which at least one of the operations and the like appears can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, the first effect mode (for example, conversation notice) appears among the plurality of effect modes. Even then, the count display is redisplayed after that, and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the count display is redisplayed, the count display is hidden again, and a second effect mode (for example, an accessory A operation (an accessory A advance notice)) appears among a plurality of effect modes. (Revival timer production).

  That is, in this case, after the first effect mode is shown as if it was a timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, which is different from the first effect mode. Even if the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears and this is hidden, Then, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer object will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. In the situation, it is determined that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and “conversation notice” is performed at the previous timing and “act A action 1” is performed at the later timing. FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the revival timer effect performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected.

  In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 1 but also a plurality thereof) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the resurrection timer effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the recovery timer effect is not performed, and the recovery timer effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), if the timer type of “object A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. The selected “object A action 1” includes a plurality of effect modes (“object A action 1-1”, “object A action 1-2”, “object A action 1” including the mode of the resurrection timer effect. -3 ”or“ Accessory A operation 1-4 ”). The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of the “acting material A operation 1-1”, after the count display with the count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol fluctuation, A “conversation notice” that is not subject to the timer is executed when the timer elapses, and the timer is subject to a timer when the predetermined value is reached and the count display is hidden when 40 seconds elapse. The “object A operation (object A notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of the “act A action 1-2”, the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and then the predetermined value is reached when 20 seconds have passed. The “conversation notice” (first production mode) that is not subject to the timer is executed while the count display is hidden and the count display is displayed when the “conversation notice” is finished. The timer effect will be continued again, and the count display will be hidden again after a lapse of a predetermined time (40 seconds after the count display with a count of 20 seconds has started). The “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “act A action 1-3”, after the count display with the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have passed. While the count display is not displayed, the notice E2 (first effect mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect is executed, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. The count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and the count display is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time (after 40 seconds from the start of the count display with a count number of 12 seconds). Is not displayed again, and the “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is the object of the timer, is executed.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “acting material A operation 1-4”, after the count display with the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have passed. When the count display is not displayed, a notice E1 (first effect form) as a non-target notice that cannot be a timer-targeted effect is executed. The notice E1 (non-target notice) When it is finished, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and counts after a lapse of a predetermined time (40 seconds after the count display with a count number of 8 seconds is started). The display is hidden again, and the “object A operation (object A notice)” (second effect mode), which is a timer object, is executed.

  That is, among a plurality of presentation modes prepared in correspondence with the “object A operation 1”, the “object A operation 1-2”, the “object A operation 1-3”, and the “object A operation” The aspect of “1-4” corresponds to the rebirth timer effect. In these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden between the time when the count display is started and the time when the timer target effect (the accessory A operation) is performed. Since the notice of conversation, notice E2, or notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

  In this regard, in the mode of “Combination A operation 1-2”, a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, change on hold, cut-in A, combination A operation, special timer, cut-in B) that can be adopted as a timer object. , The action B action, etc.), the resumption timer effect is targeted for the effect (conversation notice) having a lower jackpot expectation than the effect that is the target of the timer (action A action). To do. In other words, in this case, after an effect (conversation notice) with a low expectation of jackpot appears as an effect for the timer target, it is indicated that the effect (conversation notice) is not a timer target effect (count display) ), And an effect (action A action) with a higher expectation level than the effect (conversation notice) appears as a timer-targeted effect (second effect mode) (the count display is hidden again). Display), it is expected that the recreation of the game will be improved by such reversible performance.

  In addition, in the mode of “act A action 1-3” or “act A action 1-4”, there are a plurality of performance modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Or the like) as a target (first effect mode). In such a configuration, the timer effect is not terminated at this timing when an effect mode (here, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that cannot be adopted as the object for the timer appears as if it is an effect for the timer. Will be suggested to continue. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of the “act A action 1-4” is executed is low in expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being terminated at this timing. By functioning as an effect that suggests, it becomes possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment. It should be noted that a plurality of presentation modes (for example, the notice E1, the notice E2, the notice E3, the notice F, etc.) that cannot be adopted as the timer object can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

  In addition, in each of the “object A operation 1-2”, “object A operation 1-3”, and “object A operation 1-4” according to this embodiment, it appears when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), as the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a 40-second production timer is secretly set for control, and count While the display is once hidden, the timer for the effect is continuously updated to perform the timer target effect (40 seconds after the count display starts). (Action A action) appears. According to such a configuration, any one of “Combination A operation 1-1”, “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” is selected. Even when the accessory A action 1 is executed in this manner, the timer display effect (the accessory A action) can be made to appear again with the count display hidden again at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation.

  And in such a revival timer effect, “the count display that appeared before it was once hidden” and “the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed” are different counts. It is important to make it possible to recognize that the same count digest is being used, not to indicate that the timer performance has continued in the middle. .

  For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “actual object A operation 1-2”, when the count display with the count number of 20 seconds becomes “0 second”, the count display is not displayed. The “conversation notice” is executed, but after the “conversation notice” is completed, the count display is displayed again with a minus notation. It expresses how the count digestion is not over and continues.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of “actual material A operation 1-2”, the count digestion is secretly continued while the count display is hidden, The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count is digested for the time that has been hidden. More specifically, in the mode of “acting material A operation 1-2”, the count display is not displayed at “0 seconds”, and the count display is displayed again after the non-display state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, the count digestion by minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2 seconds”.

  In each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the timer target effect is thus executed.

  When realizing such a resurrection timer effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the result of the jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, or the mode of timer effect (for example, “Role A action 1” of the character reach). Thus, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the revival timer effect is to be generated or in which aspect the revival timer effect is to be generated. Note that this determination processing is performed based on the result information of each previous process, for example, after step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 and before step S5511 is performed. Is possible.

  FIG. 187 (b) shows that when the timer type of “object A action 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the “object A action 1” is included in the mode of the revival timer effect. It is a figure which shows the example about the content (table T14) of the determination process about which of the some production | presentation aspect is performed.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when “Character A action 1” of the character reach is selected, the “act A action 1” is changed to “the accessory A action 1-1”. , “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” are executed.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first refers to the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b), and allocates the winning information, the information regarding the variation pattern type, the information regarding the timer type, and the information. Based on the production random number, any mode of “Combination A operation 1-1”, “Combination A operation 1-2”, “Combination A operation 1-3”, and “Combination A operation 1-4” With this, it is selected whether to execute the timer effect.

  As a result, if it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in any one of the “actual material A operation 1-3” and the “community A operation 1-4”, the processing in steps S5512 and S5525 is performed. Based on the determined type, the type of non-target notice is determined. For example, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “object A action 1-3”, it is determined in step S5512 and S5525 that at least the notice E2 is executed as a non-target notice. Therefore, if it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of “object A action 1-4”, at least the notice E1 is executed as a non-target notice in the processes of steps S5512 and S5525. A determination will be made.

  In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect for the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer object is executed, the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer object are displayed. Compared to the case where the targeted revival timer effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher. In addition, when a revival timer effect is performed for an effect mode with a high expectation among the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as a timer object) E1 and E2) are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than that in the case where the resurrection timer effect is performed for a performance mode with a low expectation. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to

  According to such a revival timer effect, a low-expectation effect mode (first effect mode) appears once by non-displaying the count display, which temporarily gives a disappointment to the player, but subsequently counts The display is redisplayed and this is continued, and the count display continued after the predetermined time is not displayed again, and an effect mode (second effect mode) having a high expectation level appears. This makes it possible to give surprises and surprises to the player who was paying attention to the count display temporarily while giving a sense of regret by continuing and reversing the count. Can be suppressed.

  In this sense, an effect mode with a high degree of expectation (second effect mode) is executed as an effect using two different decorative members, and an effect mode with a low degree of expectation (first effect mode) is used. It is desirable to execute as an effect using only one of the two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto) in order to express the reversal property due to the resurrection timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members may not necessarily completely match when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, in the case where a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory” are arranged to overlap each other as viewed from the front, This is a case where the decorative member used in the aspect is a “relatively small fan-shaped accessory” and the decorative member used in the second rendering aspect is a “relatively large fan-shaped accessory”. However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the performance performed as the first performance mode is less expected.

  Also, in such a revival timer effect, “count display that appeared before it was once hidden” and “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. In order to make it possible to recognize that the same count digest is being performed instead of digesting, while the count display is hidden, the count sound is It is desirable to continue to perform over the “count display that appeared before the display” and “the count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

  In this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. However, the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times within a period during which one symbol variation is performed. It may be executed over a wide range. At this time, each time the count display is hidden, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed. Then, as the number of times the revival timer effect is executed within the period in which one symbol variation is performed, the production mode (production type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) with high expectations as the production of the timer target It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing high.

  In the rebirth timer effect, the time until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears after the count display is hidden and the redisplayed count display is again hidden. It is possible to recognize whether or not the timer-targeted effect is in a state where the length of time until the second effect mode (the accessory A operation) appears is made different. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, in order to improve the game entertainment as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect is executed for an effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer object As compared with the case where the revival timer effect for (notice E1, E2) is executed, a higher-expected effect mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) appears as the timer target effect. It is desirable to control the ratio to be high. In addition, when a revival timer effect is performed for an effect mode with a high expectation among the effect modes (notice E1, E2) that cannot be adopted as a timer object, an effect mode (notice that cannot be adopted as a timer object) E1, E2) compared to the case where the revival timer effect is performed for the effect mode with a low expectation level, the effect mode with a high expectation level (effect type and effect content (cut-in It is desirable to control so that the rate at which the aspect)) appears.

  Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, the first effect mode appears after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and is not displayed, and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is finished, the count display is redisplayed, and this is negatively counted. When this reaches a specific negative value and this is made non-displayed, the second effect mode appears. If the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear in the non-display state, the count display is not displayed when the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear. Each count value at this time may be set appropriately.

[Timer suppression control]
In other words, the effect that is the target of the timer effect (count object) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, the specific effect that is executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern Production (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.), predetermined production (for example, hold change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning a prize Prepared. However, among these, a new prize is awarded when the count display reaches a predetermined value in a situation where the “specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the variation pattern” is the target of the timer effect (count object). If a certain effect (for example, a change in hold) occurs due to accidental occurrence, a predetermined effect has occurred in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as the target of the timer effect. However, it may be difficult to grasp whether a predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect that has nothing to do with the timer effect (confusion). ) Missed specific effects (for example, conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A action, cut-in B, action B action, etc.) Rikane no.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a specific type of timer effect with the specific effect as a timer is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the specific type of timer effect reaches a predetermined value When there is a relatively large first period, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed when a new winning occurs, but the first period ends, and the count display in the specific type of timer effect is a predetermined value. When the remaining time until reaching the second period is relatively small, even if a new winning occurs, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not permitted (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect with a specific effect as a timer is executed, the count display is displayed as the target of the timer effect while allowing the generation of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize. It becomes difficult to grasp whether a predetermined effect has occurred in relation to reaching a predetermined value or whether a predetermined effect has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused) Can be suitably avoided.

  FIG. 188 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer object suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the situation.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation is started. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the specific effect that is the target of the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a period until the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”) before the count display reaches a predetermined value (“0 seconds” in this case) after the symbol variation is started. (First period) allows display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to timer when a new winning occurs (allowable period), but after the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “5 seconds”) In the predetermined period (second period), even if a new winning occurs, timer target suppression control that does not allow display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is performed (suppression period).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, a suppression period (second period) in which display of a predetermined effect is not permitted is expressed as “a count display is a specific count value ( For example, “5 seconds”) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and the specific effect as a timer is executed (terminated) ” It is supposed to continue until “the period after the specific performance ends”. That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) and the specific effect that is the object of the timer is generated, the production of the effect itself is suppressed, so that it is the object of the timer. The specific effect comes to function as a valuable effect occurrence opportunity, and the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved, and the game entertainment when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”) is suitably maintained. That is expected.

  However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the end of the specific effect as the timer target. At this time, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is not permitted is ended.According to such a timer target suppression control, the symbol variation is stopped after the suppression period ends. In the period until it is made, display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer is allowed again when a new winning occurs.

  By the way, as described above, in the suppression period, even if a new winning is generated, display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is not permitted. However, in this case, there is a concern that a game that does not generate a new prize is performed by the player during the suppression period in which display of a predetermined effect is not permitted even if a new prize is generated, and as a result, the speed of game progress per unit time This may cause a disadvantage on the hall side.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if a new winning is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect due to this is not permitted, but the display of the predetermined effect that is not permitted is not allowed. Does not discard the display of the predetermined effect itself, but controls to delay (carry over) the timing of the display until the suppression period ends. According to such a configuration, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by this is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect is suitably executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

  In addition, when a new prize is generated within the allowable period and a predetermined effect is displayed, sound output is performed in accordance with the display of the predetermined effect, whereas a new prize is generated within the suppression period and the predetermined effect is displayed. In the case where the display of the effect is delayed (carry over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable that the sound output corresponding to the display is not performed when the predetermined effect is displayed. As a result, the display of the predetermined effect can be performed secretly at a timing different from the normal (at the time of winning), and when the predetermined effect is displayed while the player does not know, the surprise performance is improved. It is expected to improve the game entertainment interest by granting.

  In addition, regarding the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the start of the execution period of the production that is the target of the timer to the timing after the end of the execution period, It is desirable to control so that it does not necessarily occur when an effect is performed.

  For example, when a timer performance is performed, such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability, and when a big win is won by a big hit determination, compared to when a big hit is lost (losing) Thus, if the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period is increased, a predetermined effect caused by the winning occurs when a winning is generated aiming at the timing before and after the timer target effect is performed. (Whether or not there is a restraint period and it is highly likely that you have won the jackpot) It will be suppressed that the game which is not made is performed.

  In addition, the rate at which the suppression period is generated varies depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer (for example, conversation advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). In this way, when a prize is generated within a period prior to the presentation of the timer-targeted presentation, whether or not a predetermined presentation resulting from the prize is generated (the suppression period has occurred and the specific type of presentation is generated) To see if there is a high possibility of being executed as a timer target), and a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period is suppressed. Will come to be.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) that is referred to in timer object suppression control when the ratio of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the timer target effect. .

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc. are prepared as timer target effects. .

  In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree, the lower the rate of occurrence of the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect. It is set so that the higher the degree of the production mode is, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the production for the timer target.

  More specifically, when the timer-targeted production is “conversation notice”, the suppression period is not necessarily generated, and when the timer-targeted production is “cut-in A”, the suppression period is 20%. When the timer-targeted production is “cut-in B”, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the timer-targeted production is “working thing A operation”. In some cases, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the performance of the timer target is “act B action”, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%. When the production is “special timer”, a suppression period is always generated.

  According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation level of the big hit, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer-targeted effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility of missing a performance mode with a high expectation level for jackpots. To put it the other way, the lower the expectation level for jackpots is, the more likely it will be missed. It becomes possible to proceed with the production while keeping what is being kept secret, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained until the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), regardless of whether or not the big hit is won, the generation ratio of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the production mode that appears as the production of the timer target. Yes. Therefore, even when the big hit is won or lost, the suppression period can be generated at the same rate as long as the type of effect mode appearing as the timer target effect is the same. .

  By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the timer target effect is “pending change”, the suppression period is surely generated even though the jackpot expectation is a relatively low effect mode. I am doing so. That is, the “pending change” according to this embodiment can be displayed as a specific effect that is not a timer object when a new winning occurs, as well as a specific effect that is a timer object. Therefore, if there is a case where the suppression period does not occur when such a “pending change” occurs, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, “pending change (fluctuating symbol) Change of hold display corresponding to ")" and "hold change (change of hold display corresponding to the pending symbol)" due to a new winning may occur at the same time, there is a concern that they may be confused is there. Therefore, it is desirable to always generate the suppression period when the timer target effect is “pending change”. However, as described above, the “holding change” also has a higher possibility of overlooking the same as the “conversation notice”, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, there is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is low. If the aim is to advance the production while keeping the appearance of it secret, control may be performed so that the suppression period does not occur even when the production of the timer target is “pending change”.

  In the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the rate at which the suppression period is generated varies depending on the type of the production mode that appears as the production of the timer. However, in addition to this, the production of the same type Even if it is an aspect, you may make it further vary the ratio which a suppression period generate | occur | produces with the timer classification determined by count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

  For example, even when “conversation notice” is selected as the effect for the timer, the “conversation notice” is “conversation notices 1 to 4” shown in FIG. 161, and further “ It is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the suppression period varies depending on which of the conversation notices 1-6. In this case, the generation ratio may include 100% or 0%.

  In addition, the production subject to the timer is any one of “conversation notice”, “holding change”, “cut-in A”, “special timer”, “object A operation”, “cut-in B”, “object B operation”. In this case, the suppression period may be generated not only in a predetermined period before and after the execution of the effect for the timer, but also in the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. In particular, when the performance of the timer target is the “special timer” with the highest expectation level for jackpots, the above-described suppression period must be generated over the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. ”May be increased in expectation of being performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect due to this is not discarded, and the timing for performing the display ends when the suppression period ends. However, the display of the predetermined effect itself may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer production targeting new timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the design effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, etc.) that are prepared as candidates for counting. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) can be performed in a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, after preparing a “specific effect mode” as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, When the “mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) until then is newly started.

  That is, in this case, the count display as the timer effect is executed in the form of being divided into the first count display and the second count display. The time required to digest one count display (the first count display or the second count display) can be shortened, and the monotony during digestion of the count display is eliminated and the game is enhanced. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  FIG. 189 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect for the new timer performed when the variable numbers 7 and 8 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “No timer character reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. Time for explaining the specific contents of the timer effect with the new timer performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected in the situation It is a chart.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one pattern is prepared for the type of “timer effect with a new timer as an effect” for each variation pattern. A plurality of types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) having different generation timings (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of symbol variation) and end timings are prepared. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: Step S5510).

  In the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect” shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, the first count display with a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, a “specific effect mode” that is a timer target appears. After the “specific production mode” appears in this way, a new count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far is newly displayed. To start this (new timer). In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever a “specific production mode” appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared so far. ) To be displayed and started. However, even if the first count display becomes the predetermined value in this way, only by newly starting another count display (second count display), the execution of the effect targeted for the timer is executed. May feel as if they were entrusted to them, and there is a concern about the decline in the entertainment amusement.

  Therefore, in the “timer effect with the new timer as a production target” according to this embodiment, first, as the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, “Failure production” that does not show any expectation is to appear. In other words, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having a degree of expectation as an effect for the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, combination An unfortunate production situation is generated as if it failed to generate the object B movement, etc., but in this production situation, the second count display is newly started. As a person, he / she feels that he can challenge the failed timer performance again and is expected to improve his / her gaming interest through such feelings.

  However, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after the “failed production” is not ended within the symbol variation period, and the remaining count is calculated. The symbol stop (big hit symbol or lose symbol) is performed without digesting. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what kind of expectation will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), Since it will be possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation at the point when the symbol stop (winning of the big hit) is displayed earlier, without causing any decline in the entertainment interest of the game The timer effect can be ended. In the symbol stop that appears before the second count display is completely exhausted, in addition to the lost symbol, a jackpot symbol can also appear, especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no entertainment at all There will be no decline.

In other words, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost no period of symbol variation (at least half) despite the fact that no effect with the expected degree appears as the timer object. Count display (first count, second count) over the above period)
-In addition to performing an effect (the effect that the first count reaches a predetermined value) that makes it possible that an effect with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle stage,
・ By providing a configuration in which the newly started second count display is stopped with the count remaining, the expectation that the timer-targeted production will soon occur will be almost completely Will be able to last for a period of time. In addition, as described above, it is a mechanism that suitably suppresses a decrease in the entertainment enjoyment attributed to the fact that no production with expectation is generated in either the first count display or the second count display. Street.

  On the other hand, in the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect” shown in FIG. 189 (b), as in the example shown in FIG. The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, a “specific effect mode (failure effect)” that is a timer target appears. After the “specific production mode (failure production)” appears in this way, a count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared until then is displayed. The point that it is newly displayed and this is started is the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) within the symbol variation period. It is supposed to be. In this regard, “timer effect with a new timer as the target of production” means that, as described above, the expectation that the timer-targeted effect will soon occur without causing any effect with the expectation as the timer target to appear. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the period of symbol variation, an effect with an expected degree should appear. I do not. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period, a process that does not simply cause an effect with an expectation to occur appears. The expectation that the production will soon occur cannot be sustained.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) within the symbol variation period, The count display is not hidden and is maintained as it is at a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches the predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's side, when an effect corresponding to the second count display reaching the predetermined value (count target effect) appears. Since it seems that the state is not strange, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of expectation that a timer-targeted production will soon occur until the symbol is stopped. Even with such a configuration, the interest regarding the big hit expectation can be completely lost when the symbol stop (hit a big hit) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. As a result, the timer effect can be terminated without causing any effect to appear without deteriorating the gaming interest.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for the player who has confirmed the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect”, what happens when the failure effect or the second count display occurs? There is a concern that it will be overlooked that there will be no production. Therefore, only when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the second count display reaches the predetermined value). A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Or you may make it the ratio which a special production produces increases. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different purpose from the first count display, and is the big hit symbol stopped during the period when the second count display is using the remaining count? It becomes possible to add interest of no. In this sense, the display mode (form, position, size, etc.) of the first count display and the second count display may be different from each other.

  Note that the special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves the remaining count and is in a running state. However, in view of generating a special effect as an effect corresponding to the second count display, after the big hit symbol is stopped, after the second count display is hidden (the second count display leaves the remaining count) Even if it is in a state, it is desirable to execute a special effect after it is hidden. And it is desirable to continuously display the special effects executed in this way including the execution period of the jackpot game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the “timer effect with the new timer as the effect”.

  Special effects may be generated within the symbol variation period. In this case, it is desirable that a special effect is executed after the big hit symbol appears (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) within the symbol variation period and the second count display is not displayed. However, the big hit symbol may appear within the symbol variation period (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state), and the second count display may be hidden after executing a special effect.

  And if the occurrence ratio of special effects (including 100%) is increased when the big hit symbol is stopped while the second count display is digesting the remaining count, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is displayed, the second count display may be hidden and the symbol may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, while the second count display is being performed, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest. However, even if a big hit symbol appears when the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is not displayed, the ratio of occurrence of a special effect remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

  When realizing such a “timer effect with a new timer as a production target”, a “failure production” that does not show any expectation degree is caused to appear particularly when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. Is different from the above-described timer effect that causes other effects to appear (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) (these (In addition to the lottery), the “timer effect using the new timer” will be performed based on the fact that the specified effect condition that has nothing to do with the result of the jackpot determination or the type of variation pattern is satisfied. It is desirable to make this determination. That is, in this case, when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, both the big hit and the loss can be stopped (the situation where the big hit symbol may appear according to the probability of the big hit lottery) It is possible to generate a “timer effect as an effect target”, and thereby it is possible to cause a failure effect that has no expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the timer target effect will soon occur without causing any effect with the expectation level to appear as the timer target over the period in which the symbol variation is performed.

  However, if it is not required to exhibit such an operational effect, the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure production without any expectation. , It may be executed as another effect mode (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, action A operation, cut-in B, action B operation, etc.). In this case, through the same processing as the case of performing the above-described timer effect in which other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) appear. The “timer effect with the new timer as the production target” is executed.

  In FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first fluctuation pattern (without timer character reach) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failed effect” reaches a predetermined value. In FIG. 189 (b), in the example in which the second variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first variation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol variation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear. In the example in which the variation pattern (no timer SP reach) is selected, the symbol variation may be stopped before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. Further, when a variation pattern different from these variation patterns is selected, a “timer effect using a new timer as a production target” may be performed.

  In addition, for the first count display, a timer-targeted effect is about to occur as a count display having a shorter count than the second count display that can be stopped during the display of the count display. It is desirable to maintain a sense of expectation to do.

  In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the “failure effect” is performed, if the symbol display is stopped before the count display is completed, either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol may appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs regardless of the “failure effect”, it is desirable that the big hit symbol always appears if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completed.

  The first count display has a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds) as the count number, and may be executed in any one of them. The first count display and the second count display are different count displays that are executed only in one mode (for example, 40 seconds) regardless of the count number executed in the first count display. It is desirable to be able to recognize that it is executed.

  Further, in view of the fact that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, the period when the first count display is performed and the period when the second count display is performed The display mode (including color differences and effects) of the background image, etc., may be different from when it is in (including the period when the display reaches the predetermined value and is maintained) desirable. In such a process, even if the reach effect is generated during the period when the first count display is performed and the background image is shifted to the reach effect, the second count display is executed until then. The second count display is executed even when the reach effect is generated and the background image for reach effect is generated within the period in which the second count display is performed. The display mode different from that which has appeared at that time is maintained even during the reach production period, and is maintained until the second count display is not displayed.

  In the “timer effect with the new timer as a production target” according to this embodiment, as the “specific production mode” that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, The “failure effect” that does not show the expectation level was made to appear, but instead, another count start suggestion suggesting that a count display different from the count display that had been executed so far will be started. An effect may appear. In this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the another count start suggestion effect, or the degree of expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of effects modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation) prepared as candidates for counting within the period during which the symbol effect is performed. , Cut-in B, accessory B action, etc.), a timer effect in which a count display is performed up to a predetermined value for the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display is a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). A hell timer mode (first timer mode display) in which the proportion of the appearance of a high degree of expectation as an effect of the timer object (the effect type and the content of the effect (such as a cut-in aspect)) appears is relatively low, When the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which a high-expectation production mode appears as a timer target production can be displayed. (Timer mode production).

  That is, in this case, when the remaining time of the count display is consumed, one of the timer mode displays having different degrees of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed, and this is the predetermined value after the count display is started. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it reaches “0” here.

  FIG. 190 is an aspect of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which it is determined that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5507). Timer mode effect that is performed when variation numbers 15 and 16 (refer to FIG. 148) corresponding to “no timer SP reach” are selected and it is determined that “cut-in B1” is performed as an effect for the timer. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (actually, not only cut-in B1 but a plurality) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). In addition, the following processing relating to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer mode effect is not performed, but the timer mode effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the timer type “cut-in B1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the next process as the selected “cut-in”. “B1” is a plurality of production modes (“Cut-in B1-1”, “Cut-in B1-2”, “Cut-in B1-3”, “Cut-in B1-4”) including the mode of the timer mode production. Judgment processing as to which is executed is performed. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, in the form of “cut-in B1-1”, when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation. “Cut-in B (cut B notice)”, which is a timer object, is executed while the count display is hidden by reaching a predetermined value (“0” in this case).

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-2”, 20 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specified The hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count digestion is in progress when the count value (here, “30”) is reached, and 50 seconds have elapsed since the count display started. When it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the “Cut-in B” that is the target of the timer is executed while it is hidden, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode) The display of “display” is not hidden but is maintained after “cut-in B” is hidden.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-3”, 18 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (in this case, “32”) is reached, a heaven challenge effect is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of the failure to produce the heaven challenge, the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is performed, and when a predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached after 50 seconds from the start of the count display. While the count display is not displayed, “Cut-in B”, which is the target of the timer, is executed, but this is not displayed for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). Since without being to indicate the "cut-B" was hidden even the display is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B1-4”, 18 seconds have passed after the count display with the count number of “50” is started in accordance with the start of symbol variation, and this is the first specific count. When the second specific count value (in this case, “32”) before the value is reached, a heaven challenge effect is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress. As a result of the successful heaven challenge production, the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is performed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display started, and the predetermined value (here, “0”) is reached. Then, while the count display is hidden, “Cut-in B” which is the target of the timer is executed. For the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), After the "cut-B" without being in the non-display is hidden even the display is maintained.

  That is, among the plurality of presentation modes prepared corresponding to “cut-in B1”, the modes of “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” are timers. It corresponds to mode production. And in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode occurs while the count digestion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while either display of the timer mode appears. Will be. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, the timer effect can be given performance by the timer mode effect related to the timer effect.

  More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the proportion of the effect type with a higher expectation as a timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode appears. As the ratio of the high-expected aspect appears as the aspect of the cut-in B that is the target of the timer (the contents of the effect) becomes high, it is impossible to wait for the timing when the count display reaches the predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more closely watched. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the timer target effect itself cannot be expected compared to when the heaven timer mode appears. Thus, it becomes possible to turn the gaze toward the player, so that even if a low-expected production mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, the same effects as the effects of the timer target when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed Even when a mode appears, it is desirable to control so that when the heaven timer mode is displayed, when the effect mode appears, the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing when the symbol stops thereafter is higher.

  In addition, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, “cut-in B1-2”, “cut-in B1-3”, and “cut-in B1-4” modes), the timer Even after the target effect is executed and hidden, the display relating to the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, after the timer presentation is finished, the presentation can be performed with the timer-related presentation being displayed, and the presentation situation in which the timer presentation is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol is stopped in a state where the player recognizes whether or not Note that the display in heaven timer mode and hell timer mode is not displayed before the count display reaches the predetermined value (before the timer target effect occurs) or the symbol stop is displayed. The display may be hidden at the previous timing, or the display may be maintained even when the symbol stop is displayed, and may be hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

  Further, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during the execution of the timer prefetch effect). In addition, when the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display is not executed, the timer effect is not necessarily generated after the effect is performed until the symbol is stopped. It may not be allowed to. However, when performing heaven timer mode or hell timer mode display or heaven challenge production in the state where the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those productions are not executed in the state where the count display is not executed, It is desirable to increase the rate at which the timer effect is executed before the symbol is stopped, and to execute it as an effect that suggests in advance that the timer effect is executed.

  In the form of “cut-in B1-3” and “cut-in B1-4”, the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first. While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the “cut-in B1-2” mode, the count display becomes the second specific count value. When the count display becomes the first specific count value, the hell timer mode is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, it is possible to first pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur, so the count display is the first specific count value. It becomes possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when it becomes.

  In addition, when the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the rate at which a highly anticipated effect mode appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the timer mode effect itself does not occur and the case where the hell timer mode occurs, the rate at which a highly anticipated effect mode appears as an effect subject to timer will be different. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to further pay attention to whether or not the hell timer mode is generated when the count display becomes the first specific count value.

  On the other hand, when the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as the timer mode effects when the count display reaches the first specific count value. As a result, the timer mode effect type that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value can be further watched.

  According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value) Since the timer production (count value) and the production related thereto can be interesting and watched even when the time is reached, the game entertainment during the period when the count display is executed Can be suitably maintained.

  In each example shown in FIG. 190, the timer effect count display sequentially reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value, and when the predetermined value is reached, the timer target effect is executed. The symbol fluctuation will be stopped.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, not only the cut-in B1 but a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific As a timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190), it is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed. However, as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510), cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared instead of cut-in B1. Then, it may be determined which timer type is selected from these candidates. This processing method can be similarly employed in processing related to execution of other effects (for example, a resurrection timer effect).

  In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the heaven timer mode is displayed and the timer target effect is performed, the specific type of effect (cut-in B) is compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of content with high expectation (such as cut-in B performed with a color with high expectation) was increased. However, instead of this, when the heaven timer mode is displayed, if the timer target effect is performed, compared to the case where the hell timer mode is displayed, a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change) , Cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) may be such that the proportion of the high-expected performance type appears. Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, as a timer target effect, the rate at which an effect type with a high expectation level appears may be high, and the rate at which the content with a high expectation level may be increased.

  In addition, a specific effect type selected from a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is selected as the timer target effect. If a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must be generated within the count display execution period. Also good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode is generated can appear without performing the heaven challenge effect.

  In addition, an effect may be provided that indicates that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is necessarily generated within a period before reaching the second specific count value at which the heaven challenge effect is executed.

  In addition, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the heaven high probability mode in which the rate of success in the heaven challenge production (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher when the heaven challenge production occurs than in the normal time. You may make it transfer to. That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the probability of occurrence of the heaven challenge effect itself when the heaven timer mode is not displayed is lowered (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect or the timer The probability that the mode effect is not generated is increased), or the expectation of the timer target effect itself generated in the heaven timer mode is lowered as compared with the normal time, thereby realizing the heaven high probability mode.

  Moreover, in the heaven challenge production, a period during which the operation by the player can be accepted is set, and the result of success or failure in the heaven challenge production based on the operation by the player during the period (the heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes occurs) may be displayed.

  In addition, if the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as the heaven challenge effect is generated at the same time as the count display of the timer effect is started, the count in the count display is displayed. It is desirable that the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than when the heaven challenge effect is generated when the number of executed is relatively large. . In other words, in this case, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest with the expectation that the production will soon occur immediately before the appearance of the production that is the subject of the timer production, and the production that is the subject of the timer production appears. When it takes a long time (count number) to do, it will be expected to maintain amusement interest by expectation that the heaven challenge production will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer target effect is executed. In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is the lowest and the timer target effect already executed. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in the form of a follow-up.

  Further, a heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as the target effect of the timer effect, the success rate in the heaven challenge effect (the ratio displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed In the symbol variation period, the ratio of the high-expected effects (for example, the action B action) among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates, although not targeted for the timer, is the effect. It is desirable to make it higher than when it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the design effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, etc.) that are prepared as candidates for counting. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) can be performed in a timer effect that hides the count display in accordance with the timing at which it appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect during the execution of the count display (desired effect having a predetermined expectation is desirable, but not necessarily limited thereto). When it is executed, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and the output related to the count display is not performed until the predetermined value is reached, and this is performed in the middle of the execution of the predetermined effect. Any of the production modes for which output is to be stopped is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  According to such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped halfway and the output related to the predetermined effect is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is maintained until the count display of the timer effect is performed and this reaches a predetermined value (counting period).

  FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed when the specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing condition.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in a specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation is started. Display starts. Then, after the count display becomes “0”, the timer target effect which is the timer target appears.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time when the predetermined effect appears. It is determined whether the situation is in a predetermined production situation. And as a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, it is supposed that the output concerning the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the control for executing the predetermined effect is performed. The “predetermined specific effect situation” used for determining whether or not to stop the output related to the timer effect count display is, for example, the timer effect count display being executed. This is an effect situation in which contention occurs between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, such as when a predetermined effect is executed using an area.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is displayed even after the output related to the predetermined effect ends. The count display is not output again. On the other hand, even after the peripheral control MPU 1511a stops outputting the count display, the time since the count display is started (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly measured internally. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have elapsed since the count display was started), it is determined that the timing at which the output display is stopped reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The target production appears.

  According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, the output stop state related to the count display is maintained, but if the count display is not stopped, the predetermined value (here, “0”) is set. When the timing that should have been reached has arrived, the timer target performance appears. In other words, in this case, it is expected to improve the game entertainment when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise performance that the timer effect that seemed to have been interrupted by the execution of the predetermined effect was kept secret Will come to be.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined control is performed. When the production situation at the time of the production appearance does not exist in a predetermined production situation, the output related to the count display of the timer production is continued until it reaches a predetermined value without stopping, and the count display is digested. In this situation, a predetermined performance is executed.

  More specifically, the predetermined effect is “an effect that causes an enemy character to appear in a specific area”, “an effect that attacks the specific area”, or “display when the effect fails in a specific area” If the player performs such a predetermined effect while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will have a timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there may be a concern that there may be some adverse effects on the performance (for example, the expectation level of the timer performance is lowered). Therefore, when there is a production situation that may cause such a concern, the output of the timer production count display is stopped and the predetermined production is executed, so that any adverse effects on the timer production are produced. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect without producing an image as if it is exerted (effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer target effect is made to appear in a surprise manner while maintaining the output stop state related to the count display. Therefore, such a predetermined effect is used. Thus, it can be expected that the gaming interest will be improved on the contrary (the production mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

  However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped every time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself deteriorates, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered. Is done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when executing the predetermined effect, there is a space (an area where no effect is output) in an area different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output. In some cases, the predetermined effect is output not in the specific area but in a vacant area while maintaining the output of the timer effect count display without being stopped (FIG. 191 (c)). ) Production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that cancels the count display of the timer effect in the middle of the process, and when the predetermined effect is executed, the game entertainment is reduced. Will be avoided.

  Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, after the timer target effect is executed, the symbol variation is stopped.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for realizing such count output stop control.

  As shown in FIG. 192, if it is determined that a predetermined effect is to be executed based on the result of jackpot determination or the type of variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment First, when the timing for generating a predetermined effect has arrived within the symbol variation execution period, a determination is made as to whether or not a specific effect is in place prior to starting the output of the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

  Here, the “specific production status” means that when a predetermined production is newly output, an area necessary for newly outputting the predetermined production is other various productions (here, a count display of a timer production). As described above, this is a situation in which all of the above are used, and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 201G and 201H described later, a “bullet firing effect” by a cannon corresponds to a predetermined effect. In the bullet firing effect, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area, and the lower area in the display area are selectively used as bullet discharge destinations. Usually, the unused area is used to produce a bullet firing. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), which will be described later, an area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect is other various effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right) Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer-excluded effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no room for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned “specific production situation”. If the bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, the production that is already in the output state (for example, a count display) at the bullet launch destination is broken or destroyed by the fired bullet. (There will be a conflict regarding the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production), and as a result, there is a possibility that the big hit expectation will be lowered. Was also mentioned above.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that the specific production situation is in place before starting the output related to the predetermined production (YES in step S5701), it is already different from the predetermined production. The output in the output state (here, the count display) is stopped (step S5702), and a process related to output of the predetermined effect is performed using the empty area created thereby (step S5703).

  On the other hand, prior to starting the output for the predetermined effect, when it is determined that there is no specific effect status (NO in step S5701), other effects are included in the area necessary for effect output. Since there is an unused area that is not used, processing for outputting a predetermined effect is performed using the unused area without stopping output of an effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

  Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, an effect mode advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the rate at which appears. For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and (c), when the production mode of FIG. 191 (b) in which the production of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output related to the count display is stopped, It is desirable to perform control so that the ratio of appearance of a high-expected performance mode (production type and content of performance) as a timer-targeted performance is higher than when the production mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

  Note that the processing in step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one processing. For example, if the processing data in which the output data of the count display is stored is overwritten with the output data of the predetermined effect, the output related to the count display is automatically canceled, and the output is stopped in the state where the output is stopped. It is possible to perform output related to a predetermined effect.

  In this embodiment, the output for the count display is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed when in a specific effect situation. However, the effect to be output is not limited to this, The output related to the production may be stopped.

  In the process of step S5702, an effect type for which output is to be stopped is selected from a plurality of effects (in an output state) that use an area necessary for outputting a predetermined effect, and output of the selected effect is stopped. Then, a predetermined effect may be output. In this case, it is desirable to set a priority in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for output cancellation, and to select an effect type for which output is to be canceled based on the priority. About this priority, it is desirable to set beforehand on a program on the basis of whether it is a production more important to a player. As a result of determining the priority order, when all of the other effects in the output state have higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the output of the predetermined effect is not performed. .

  Then, the production types for which output is to be stopped are executed as a plurality of productions that are related and connected to the production contents (for example, timer production that is connected by the count display and the timer production production). Among the effects, the predetermined effect is produced before the output is stopped during the effect that appears earlier (for example, while the count display is being executed) and before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started. When is terminated, it is desirable to execute an effect that appears later without stopping output.

  In addition, for the effects and output effects that are subject to output cancellation when executing the specified effects, in addition to effects by image display, effects by action of actors, effects by music, effects by panel lamps, etc. Good. In addition, when the predetermined effect is executed, the output or the predetermined effect that is the target of output cancellation is a combination of at least two or more of the effect elements such as the image display, the accessory operation, the music, and the board lamp. In the case of being executed as a combined performance, it is only necessary to stop outputting at least one of the combined performance elements. For example, when the predetermined effect is a “bullet firing effect” shown in FIG. 201 (G) to be described later and the effect to be output is “combined effect of image display and board lamp”, the combined effect Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the panel lamp is maintained, it will adversely affect the effect of the panel lamp outside the bullet as the image display in the display area. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition by production) will occur.

[Timer plus production]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first counts at least one of a plurality of performance modes (for example, conversation advance notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). The count display can be displayed within the period during which the symbol effect is performed, and the count display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then this is not displayed and the count target effect appears in the non-display state. Production can be performed. In this regard, in the count effect, after the count display that has reached a specific count value (for example, “0”) is not displayed, not only one of the plurality of effect modes appears, but also a specific count value (for example, “0”). ]) By re-displaying the count display with a count value larger than that, an effect of continuing the count effect can be executed (timer plus effect).

  That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, “0”) and this is not displayed, the count display is not displayed. Since there is a possibility that the count effect will continue to be displayed again with a count value greater than the specific count value (the possibility that a higher expectation effect mode will appear), the count display is It is expected to maintain the game entertainment after being hidden.

  FIG. 193 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer plus production performed when a specific fluctuation number (timerless SP reach) is selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only cut-in B2 but also a plurality) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. 162), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer plus effect is not performed, but the timer plus effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), if the timer type “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the selected as the next process. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the mode of the timer plus production. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example of “cut-in B2-1” in the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation, 40 seconds have elapsed. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, in the form of “cut-in B2-2”, a count display in which the count number is significantly smaller than that in the form of “cut-in B2-1” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change. Yes. In general, in such a timer effect, there is often no effect during the period from when the count display is executed until the count display reaches a predetermined value. The Therefore, in the timer plus effect (“cut-in B2-2” mode) shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a relatively small first count value (here, “4”) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation. After displaying the count display with, and making it non-displayed, in the non-display state, the first double-compatible effect is displayed for a time longer than the time during which the count display was displayed (here, 4 seconds). (For example, for 9 seconds).

  Here, in the first double-compatible effect, first, the effect of cut-in B is used as an effect (first timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, “4”). Execute. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears as a mode of cut-in B. Thereafter, an effect (second timer target effect) is executed as to whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a manner that the count value is larger than the first count value. In addition, as an effect about whether to re-display the count display, for example, whether a specific display image (count-up image) appears or whether a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates It can be realized as an effect such as no.

  It should be noted that in the effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display (count up effect), each time the count display in the non-display state is redisplayed, it is executed prior to that, but a specific display An effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable character (count-up character) is made different according to the number of times the image is redisplayed. It is desirable to do so. When a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is redisplayed, the count-up effect is given to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory). For example, it is desirable to be used for other effects such as big hit determination. However, in this case, in addition to changing the operation mode of a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a different movable accessory is further operated. In order to make it possible to grasp that the count-up effect is not being executed, it is desirable to perform the movable effect in cooperation with them.

  According to such a configuration, two different effects (first timer target effect (cut-in B) in which the degree of expectation is indicated) as a target of the count “4”, the second on whether the count display is displayed again Since a timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, when a relatively short time count display (count “4”) is executed, it is possible to enjoy a timer target effect over a longer time. become able to. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the time required for the count display to be executed while maintaining the total time as the timer effect, and to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment in the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Become so.

  In this regard, in the aspect of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the first double-compatible effect appears, and the first result appears when the effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in such a manner that the second count value (here, “5”) larger than the count value is given. However, in the first double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is prepared, and the count display is not redisplayed when the effect pattern appears. It is desirable to end the timer effect at this point.

  Thereafter, when the count display having the second count value (here, “5”) is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-corresponding effect is displayed in the count display in the non-display state. Is executed over a longer period of time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time during which it was displayed (here, 5 seconds).

  In the second double-compatible effect, first, the effect of cut-in B is used as an effect (third timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the second count value (here, “5”). Execute. However, in the third timer target effect, an aspect (a character wearing a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears as a cut-in B mode. Thereafter, an effect (fourth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the second count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, “5”) that requires a longer time than the first count value (here, “4”) is executed. However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, while maintaining the total time as a timer effect, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment in the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value while extending the time required for counting. Become.

  In this regard, in the aspect of “cut-in B2-2”, an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display in the second double-compatible effect appears, and the second result appears when the effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in such a manner that a third count value (in this case, “7”) larger than the count value is given. However, even in the second double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to re-display the count display is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not displayed again. It is desirable to make the timer effect end at the time.

  After this, when the count display having the third count value (here, “7”) is hidden, the count display is displayed for the third double-compatible effect in the non-display state. It is supposed to be executed over a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (in this case, 7 seconds).

  Here, even in the third double-compatible effect, first, as an effect (fifth timer target effect) corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, “7”), the cut-in The effect of B is executed. However, in the third timer target effect, an aspect (a character wearing a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears as a cut-in B mode. Thereafter, an effect (sixth timer effect) regarding whether or not to re-display the count display in a manner having a count value larger than the third count value is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, “7”) that requires a longer time than the first and second count values (here, “4”, “5”). However, in exchange for this, the effect of cut-in B will be executed in a mode with higher expectation than the first and second timer target effects. It is expected to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest in the period until the predetermined value is reached.

  In this regard, in the “cut-in B2-2” aspect, an effect result that fails to re-display the count display in the third double-compatible effect appears, and at this point, the timer effect ends. Will be. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer, but before the cut-in B according to the aspect appears. Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed a plurality of times, and the effects corresponding to the count display are executed a plurality of times, the timer effect is started and ended. It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to earn the scale of the entire production, but the total time that the count display is displayed is itself more than the total time that the count display is hidden. Since the timer target effect is executed in a mode with a higher expectation every time the count display is hidden, the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game entertainment interest for a long time. Will be able to.

  Moreover, in the mode of “cut-in B2-2”, every time the count display is hidden, the expectation level is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). Since the state of going is expressed, the multiple count display can be executed as one timer effect for “cut-in B”, and the finally displayed effect (red) It becomes possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura is an effect of the timer effect.

  In the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in re-displaying the count display is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is re-displayed and the timer effect is displayed. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times that the count display is redisplayed has been reached, it is not an effect of cut-in B that has been executed up to that point, but an effect different from this (the expectation level is greater than any aspect of cut-in B It is desirable to recognize that the maximum number of times has been reached by executing a special effect that is not prepared as a timer target candidate. In this case, the effect on whether or not to re-display the count display after the special effect is executed does not appear, but the time required for the special effect is the double corresponding effects (two It is executed over a longer period of time than the effect that the timer target effect is executed), suggesting that the expectation is higher than the effect that has appeared so far (cut-in B by a character wearing a red aura). This is desirable in order to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

  FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

  The timer plus effect may be performed in the manner shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the mode shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display with the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to the count “4” corresponding to “4”) (the effect during the 4-second timer) is executed.

  Here, in the production corresponding to the count “4” (production in the 4-second timer), the production period corresponding to the time required for the first count value (in this case “4”) to be consumed is set. Within the effect period, a timer effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined manner (such as a character wearing a blue aura).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the timer object in the situation where the count display is being executed, so that it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion. .

  In addition, when such an effect corresponding to the count “4” (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer) is ended, the count display of the count “4” also reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). Easily recognizes that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, “0”) simply by confirming the count-corresponding effect (4-second timer effect) without confirming the effect count display. Will be able to.

  Then, after the timing at which the effect corresponding to the count “4” (the 4-second timer effect) is finished (after the count display of the count “4” reaches a predetermined value), the first count value ( Here, an effect (first count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “4”). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the first count-up effect, the second count value (here, “4”) larger than the first count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of “5”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”). An effect corresponding to “5” (a 5-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer), an effect period corresponding to the time required for the second count value (here “5”) to be consumed is set. Within the production period, timer-targeted productions such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing a green aura) that has a higher degree of expectation than the above-mentioned production corresponding to the count “4” (production for a 4-second timer). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing for ending the effect corresponding to the count “5” (the effect at the time of the 5-second timer) has come (after the count display of the count “5” reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here Then, an effect (second count-up effect) as to whether or not to re-display the count display is executed in such a way as to have a count value larger than “5”). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to redisplay the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect ends at this point without redisplaying the count display.

  However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in re-displaying the count display appears as a result of the second count-up effect, a third count value (here, “5”) that is larger than the second count value ( Here, the timer effect is continued by re-displaying the count display in the form of “7”). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having the third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”). An effect corresponding to “7” (7-second timer effect) is executed.

  Here, in the effect corresponding to the count “7” (the effect at the time of the 7-second timer), the effect period corresponding to the time required for the third count value (here “7”) to be consumed is set. Within the production period, timer-targeted productions such as cut-in B appear in a mode (such as a character wearing a red aura) with a higher degree of expectation than the above-mentioned “5” -adaptive production (five-second timer production). Will be allowed to.

  Then, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here Then, there may be an effect (third count-up effect) regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display in such a way as to have a count value larger than “7”). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the “effect regarding whether to re-display the count display” in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the count display is performed as a result of the effect. When an effect pattern that fails to re-display appears, the timer effect ends at this point without re-displaying the count display.

  In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing at which the count “7” corresponding effect (7-second timer effect) ends (after the count display of the count “7” reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself suggesting the possibility of no appearance. Thus, even when the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to re-display the count display appears in the count-up effect. The timer effect comes to an end at the time.

  According to the count-up effect according to such a modified example, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed in advance corresponding to the count value. Since a count-corresponding effect (cut-in B or the like) having an effect content for a certain amount of time is started, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during execution of the count display. Further, when such a count-compatible effect is finished (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect is given as to whether the count display has a larger count value to be displayed again, and these two effects are alternately performed. Since the timer effect is executed and continued by appearing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is only performed in the timer effect and the effect is not performed at all. To be able to maintain.

  In this modified example, a count-corresponding effect (for example, count “4”) having effect contents for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, “4”). While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display is also digested (count down from 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0). However, as described above, the count corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect) according to this modification is finished at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, “4”) ends. Since the count display is executed, only the count value at the time of appearance (for example, “4”) is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is performed. It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the countdown (→ 0), in order to encourage attention to a count corresponding effect (for example, a count “4” compatible effect).

  And in each example shown to FIG. 193 (a), (b), after a timer effect is performed in this way, a symbol fluctuation | variation will be stopped.

  Of the timer plus effects, the effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display is set based on the fact that an effect acceptance period of a predetermined time is set and the player performs an operation within the period. An effect suggesting that the display is redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display is not redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. In other words, in this case, after the successful performance appears, the count display is redisplayed in the form of increasing the count number and the timer effect is continued, and when the failed performance appears, the count display is redisplayed after that. Absent. When such an effect is adopted, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period, an effect result (success effect or failure effect) that is predetermined at a predetermined timing after the elapse of the period is obtained. Will be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double compatible effects is set to the same time, but it corresponds to each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”). You may make it set mutually different time as production time to perform. For example, each time the count display is redisplayed, as the count value of each count display gradually increases, the time required for this will also gradually increase as a double compatible effect corresponding to each count value. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the scale of the overall production can be suitably extended while maintaining the game entertainment.

  Moreover, in the effect about whether to re-display the count display, when displaying the effect result, a plurality of effect modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is re-displayed as the count number increases. Either of them may be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the count display is redisplayed, the count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display is displayed appears. The count display having a count value larger than the count value when the count display is displayed may not be displayed again. In other words, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by simply redisplaying the count display when a predetermined effect image appears thereafter. I can expect it. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is an effect with a higher expectation as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the rate of appearance (which may be 100%) is increased, the game feeling is further improved in combination with the increase in the speed feeling from when the count display is displayed until the timer target effect appears. Will be able to. When re-displaying in such a count display with a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect is gradually shortened from when the count display is first displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the gaming interest by such an accelerated timer effect.

[Timer staging production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, any one of a plurality of presentation modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is selected. Count display is executed within a period during which a design effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect mode that is a count target among the plurality of effect modes is caused to appear. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be hidden after the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value. There is a case where it is not displayed over the first time and a case where it is not displayed over a second time longer than the first time (timer stagnant effect).

  In other words, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of performance modes appears as a count target. Since it may be hidden for a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until any one of a plurality of production modes occurs, and the tension until the production subject to count is executed Can be sustained.

  FIG. 194 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which a decision is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the fluctuation | variation numbers 7 and 8 (refer FIG. 148) equivalent to "No timer character reach" are selected in a condition.

  In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 2 but also a plurality of them) may be selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161) The following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing relating to the timer stagnation effect is not performed, but the timer stagnation effect is performed regardless of which timer type is determined. You may make it perform the following process regarding.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of “object A operation 2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the following processing. Whether to execute the selected “object A action 2” in a plurality of effect modes (“object A operation 2-1” or “object A operation 2-2”) including the mode of the resurrection timer effect The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or a predetermined lottery result.

  Among the examples shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the mode of “actual material A operation 2-1”, after the count display with the count value “30” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, When the second has passed, the “object A operation (object A notice)” that is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is not displayed when the predetermined value is reached (here, “0”). Is done.

  On the other hand, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the count display with the count value of “10” is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol fluctuation, and the count is counted after 5 seconds. When the value becomes “5”, it is not displayed, and when the non-display state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is displayed again with a count value of “4”. After that, when 2 seconds pass and the count value becomes “2”, it is again hidden. When the non-display state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is restarted with the count value of “1”. 1 seconds later, after reaching “0”, the “object A operation (object A notice)” which is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

  According to such a mode of “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a count display with a count value of “10” starts a predetermined time after the start of the symbol variation. In spite of this mode, as in the case where the count display with the count value of “30” is started, a predetermined value (here, “30” is passed when the count display is started). 0 ") and the timer target performance is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect that makes it non-display for a predetermined time (timer stagnation effect) occurs while the count display is digested, Will be stagnated by that amount of time, and it will be expected to be executed as a timer effect that requires the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. . And as described above, in the timer production, the longer the time required for this, the higher the proportion of the appearance of the timer-targeted production aspect tends to be higher. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time of the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time during which the count display is not displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest while the count display is executed. .

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”). The count display is not displayed over a period (a period between the count value “5” and “4”) over a second period (16 seconds) longer than the first time. Period (a period between the count value “2” and “1”) can appear, but the count display is “non-displayed” regardless of the length of the time (the first time and the second time). When returning from the “display state” to the “display state”, the count value advances (changes) only for a specific number (here, “1”) which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the time during which the count display is maintained in the “non-display state”, the longer the count progress speed is stagnated by that time, and the higher the degree of expectation of the production mode. Because it is expected to become, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the mode of the “actual material A operation 2-2”, as the count value in the timer effect progresses, the time that the count display is kept in the “non-display state” becomes longer when the count display is hidden. It is supposed to be set to. In other words, in this case, even when the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed, even if the count digest is about to end (a situation where the predetermined value is reached soon), If a timer stagnation effect appears, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased and the expectation level will be greatly improved. Therefore, the game entertainment will be suitably maintained over the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to.

  Further, in the mode of the “act A action 2-2”, after the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed again, and the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily displayed again so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated at this point without executing the timer target effect can also appear. May be. When this effect pattern appears, the percentage of symbol fluctuations that stop at the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed when a predetermined value is reached. The frequency of occurrence of this itself can be increased. In addition, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), there is a case where the symbol variation is stopped with the big hit symbol while waiting for the count display to be displayed again. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by realizing such a surprise effect.

  Further, in the mode of “act A action 2-2”, the total time during which the count display is hidden (22 seconds) is longer than the total time during which the count display is displayed (10 seconds). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is being executed.

  FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the risk level at which the count display is not redisplayed. It is Table H1 shown according to the count value when being displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the type of timer effect including the mode of timer stagnation effect and its execution mode are applied based on the result of jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, etc. so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to perform processing.

  According to such an aspect shown in Table H1, the maintenance time tends to become longer as the count value progresses (as it approaches the predetermined value), whereas it is not displayed. There is also a tendency that the risk that the timer effect ends without the count display being re-displayed while being displayed is gradually increased. In other words, in this case, if the count value is not displayed at a stage where it has not progressed much, the total time for the timer performance is small but can be extended firmly with a low end risk, whereas the count value is large. If it is hidden at the advanced stage, the end risk is high, but the total time for the timer performance can be greatly extended, so the performance as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes as the count value progresses As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest while the count display is executed.

  In Table H1, one non-display time is associated with each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are associated with each count value, and the timer stagnation occurs at any one of these non-display times. An effect may be generated.

  Also, at which timing (count value) during the count display is executed, the count display is not displayed, and the number of times the display is not displayed depends on the result of jackpot determination, the type of variation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a determination based on the start of symbol variation.

  Moreover, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to this may be performed while the count display is not displayed. For example, when the count value “6” is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6” is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value “2” is not displayed for 16 seconds. If the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “2” (the effect different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value “6”) is performed for 16 seconds, It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the non-display state. Further, at this time, an effect as to whether or not the count display is redisplayed in the non-display effect may appear, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect result. .

  More preferably, during the period from when the count display is started until it reaches a predetermined value, when the count display is in a display state, an effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests a big hit expectation is newly added. If it is not started, and the count display is in a non-display state, an effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit can be newly started, and the remaining count is a concern. It is possible to enjoy an effect different from the timer effect. In addition to the expectation increase due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect itself, it is possible to enjoy the expectation increase due to the performance effect different from the timer effect, and the expectation for the timer stagnation effect is increased. It can be made even higher.

  Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, a new timer is set before the timing at which the count display in the non-display state is advanced and the count display in the non-display state is displayed again is reached. It is desirable that the effect count display reaches a predetermined value and the target effect appears. In addition, you may make it perform the effect which re-displays the count display which is in the non-display state as a target effect of a new timer effect.

[Progressive production leading to timer production]
As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs count display up to a predetermined value within a period during which the design effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as effect candidates corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series including the above-mentioned timer target effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) The timer-related effect is started before the count display reaches the predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches the predetermined value (a progress effect that leads to the timer target effect).

  That is, in this case, since a series of timer-corresponding effects corresponding to the timer effects are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, the game entertainment is suitable until the count display reaches the predetermined value. To be able to maintain.

  FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect.

  As shown in FIG. 195, a timer effect is being executed with a specific timer type within the symbol variation period, and the count value of the count display reaches the first specific value (here, count “6”). Assuming that the progress has been made, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first develops a progress effect (a series of timers corresponding to the timer target effect) that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). Production).

  Here, in this illustrative example, as shown in FIG. 195, as a timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), a cut-in by an ally character is performed. A display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this explanation example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed during the count digestion period before the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, count “0”). The process of reaching the situation is displayed as an effect image (a progress effect that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect).

  For example, in this explanation example, the count value of the count display before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”) is the first specific value (here, count “6”). When it becomes, as a production corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person who seeks help from an ally character is displayed.

  Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, count “3”) before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, count “0”). As an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG2 depicting a situation in which a friend character accepts a request from a person seeking help and faces an enemy character is displayed.

  That is, by sequentially causing such display images SEG1 and SEG2 to appear while the count display is progressing toward a predetermined value, when the count display further progresses and reaches a predetermined value, cut-in (here, It is possible to expect the display image SEG3-1 to be displayed in which a friend character wears an aura to defeat the enemy character). Can be suppressed.

  However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even when the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count “3”) appears, the cut by the teammate character when the count display reaches the predetermined value. There is also an effect pattern in which a display image SEG3-2 depicting the appearance of the ally character escaping before the enemy is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attach a star as to which effect appears as a timer effect in a period before the count display reaches the predetermined value, while the count display is the predetermined value. Since it will not be possible to specify the production mode that appears when reaching the value, the game entertainment after the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained. Note that the display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may necessarily appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In this regard, in this explanation example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) appears, or after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the second specific value (here, count “3”) is displayed. After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display does not further progress and is terminated halfway before reaching the predetermined value. According to such a configuration, the progress of the count display is carried out while there is a risk that the timer effect will end prematurely without the timer target effect appearing while such an effect appearing before the predetermined value is reached. Will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway is not necessarily prepared, and the timer display may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 that is cut-in by the ally character, Although illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image connected to different display images (for example, cut-in by different characters) prepared as timer target effects. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (F) and 205 (G) to (I) described later, one of the three teammate characters shown in FIG. 204 (D) seeks help. A request from a person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

  Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3” is displayed). ") May be displayed instead of the display image SEG2 as a display image corresponding to")). When the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when a predetermined value is reached. Production progress will be made so as to be connected to a display image (for example, cut-in by a different character) different from SEG3-1. The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 that is cut-in by the teammate character.

  Note that it is desirable to determine on which route the effect progresses while the count display is being executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the variation pattern, or the like when the symbol changes. When an effect pattern that does not execute the timer target effect appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped in the big hit symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed when the predetermined value is reached. By preparing, it is possible to increase the frequency of the timer effect itself.

  In addition, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count “6”) appears, the count display continues until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, count “3”). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count “6” is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count “6” is displayed for the time period during which the counts “5” to “4” are digested. The count display is not displayed while the display image SEG1 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes “3”, and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count “3” is displayed for the time for which the counts “2” to “1” are digested. The count display is not displayed while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes “0”, and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count “0” is executed. It becomes possible to enjoy the progress of production corresponding to the count number without worrying about counting toward the value.

  Note that the display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1, and the like may be displayed as a still image or a moving image that requires a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

  In addition, the time for displaying the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value, the time for displaying the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. It is desirable that the times are set as different times.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the progress effect connected to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effect connected to any of the plurality of types of timer target effects are prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only in some cases, it may be possible to execute a progress effect that leads to the specific timer target effect before the count display reaches a predetermined value.

  In the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed when the count number is “6”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining specific count is a relatively small first specific count (for example, “3”) and when the remaining count is a relatively large second specific count (for example, “6”). When the progress effect connected to the timer target effect is executed when the progress effect related to the timer target effect is made executable and the remaining count is the second specific count number (for example, “6”). If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the performance will be more advanced as the number of counts continues as if the jackpot expectation is high, making the game entertainment more suitable To be able to maintain.

[Timer operation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a count display up to a predetermined value can be executed within a period during which the design effect is performed, and the count target effect that is the target of the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be accepted during the execution of the count display, and within the period, the operation means (for example, the operation button) 410), when the count display reaches a predetermined value, any one of a plurality of operation-time effect modes having different ratios of appearance of high-expected effect modes (for example, cut-in B) as the count target effect. To generate. In addition, as a period during which the production can be accepted, a first period from when the count display is the first count value to the second count value, and a third count value that is counted after the second count value is counted. The second period from the time to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. On this basis, during the symbol effect period in which it is determined that a high-expected effect mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect, the count display is the second from the first count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the first period up to the count value and the effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value, When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period up to the count value and the effect is received, the specific operation-time effect is obtained as a result of the effect reception. The occurrence ratios of the modes (for example, the mode suggesting that the ratio of the high-expected specific effects appearing as the timer target effects is high) are made different ( Timer within the operating performance).

  That is, in this case, even if it is determined that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as an effect corresponding to the count, the count display is from the first count value to the second count value. When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated from when the count display is the third count value to when the count display is the fourth count value Since the ease of occurrence of the operation mode is different, the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from when the count display is the first count value to when the count display is the second count value. Should operate the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or both Work unit (e.g., operation buttons 410) it is possible to have fun in game strategies such should manipulating.

  For example, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which a specific operation-time production mode is likely to occur, the production risk that the specific operation-time production mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even if the specific operation-time effect mode is easily generated, it is difficult to have an expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) within a period in which a specific operation-time effect mode is unlikely to occur, there is a higher risk that the specific operation-time effect mode does not appear. When it appears that the specific operation-time effect mode is less likely to occur, it is easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-corresponding effect.

  Then, until the count display reaches a predetermined value during the two periods having different characteristics (from the first count value to the second count value and from the third count value to the fourth count value). Therefore, it is possible to maintain an enjoyment of the game during the digestion of the count by giving interest to how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods. That is expected.

  FIG. 196 (a) is a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and the second process in which the decision to not execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) is made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the operation effect in a timer performed when the specific fluctuation number (no timer SP reach) is selected in the situation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is supposed to run. However, in view of the fact that the operation effect within the timer functions as “an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a specific effect appears as a timer target effect”, a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed even when the timer type in which another effect mode appears instead of the cut-in B as the timer target effect is not performed. Execute. When the timer type in which an effect with a lower expectation than cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined, the effect is produced as compared to the case where the timer type in which cut-in B appears as a timer target effect is determined. When the reception is made, the ratio of occurrence of a specific operation time effect mode is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), if the timer type “cut-in B2” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects the selected as the next process. A determination process is performed as to whether “cut-in B2” is executed in a plurality of production modes (“cut-in B2-11”, “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the operation production in the timer. The determination process is preferably performed based on the result of the big hit determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

  In the example of “cut-in B2-11” in the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation, 40 seconds have elapsed. When a predetermined value is reached (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed, “Cut In B (Cut B Notice)” is executed.

  On the other hand, the mode of “cut-in B2-12” also has a predetermined value (40 seconds after a count display with a count value of “40” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol change). Here, “0”) is reached and “cut-in B (cut-B notice)” which is a timer target is executed while the count display is not displayed. However, in the form of “cut-in B2-12”, the same as the first period from when the count value of the count display is “35 (first count value)” to “25 (second count value)”. Regarding the operation effect within the timer when the operation button 410) is operated in the second period from when the count value is “15 (third count value)” to when it is “5 (fourth count value)”. The display of suggesting that the reception of the effect is in an allowable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image as a display that suggests that the stage reception is permitted, “25 (second count value)” from the time of “35 (first count value)”. By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from “15 (third count value)” to “5 (fourth count value)”. Is also feasible.

  That is, in the form of “cut-in B2-12”, either the first period (count value is “35” to “25”) or the second period (count value is “15” to “5”). When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during the period, an effect is accepted as an operation effect within the timer, and the proportion of the occurrence of a specific effect with a high expectation as a count target effect varies based on the effect acceptance. One of a plurality of operating effects is generated. In addition, about the some operation time production | generation aspect, it is possible to employ | adopt as a mode which lights a predetermined lamp in either blue or red (specific operation time production | generation aspect), for example, the aspect lit in blue When it appears, the ratio that the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect is the lowest, and when the aspect that lights up in red (specific operation effect mode) appears, the ratio that the specific effect with high expectation appears as the count target effect Can be set to be the highest.

  In FIG. 196 (b), it is determined which production mode appears as a production mode during operation when the production is accepted during the first period and when the production is accepted during the second period. It is a figure which shows the example about the table (table T16) referred when doing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (a specific operation mode) is prepared as an operation mode.

  In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), when an effect is received during the first period in an effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, “ 30 (100/100) is selected in blue (low expected mode) and 70/100 (in red) (high expected mode) is selected, and the presentation is accepted during the second period. Then, blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a rate of “70/100”, and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a rate of “30/100”. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the first period, it is possible to suppress the presentation risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear, but the red (highly expected mode) is likely to occur. Even if only this amount appears, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as an effect to be counted. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, the production risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear is high, but red (highly expected mode) is less likely to occur. However, when this only appears, it becomes easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in an effect pattern in which an effect mode with a lower expectation than “Cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect, for example, when an effect is received during the first period, “50/100 ”(Blue) (low-expected aspect) is selected, and“ 50/100 ”is selected (red) (high-expected aspect). Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of 90/100, and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of “10/100”. Therefore, when red (high expectation mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that an effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which “cut-in B” appears as a timer target effect is selected. become.

  In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods of the first period and the second period are generated within the fluctuation time. You may make it generate | occur | produce at least one of a 1st period and a 2nd period based on the classification of a pattern, or a timer classification. For example, when only the first period is generated, the risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear when an effect is accepted is suppressed, but the degree of expectation when red (highly expected mode) appears is also low. An operation opportunity is given only under a single condition that it does not become high, and when only the second period is generated, there is a high risk that red (highly expected mode) will not appear when the production is accepted However, an operation opportunity is given only under a single condition that the degree of expectation when red (high expectation mode) appears is high. That is, in this case, depending on the preference of the player, even if it is desired to operate on the first period side, an operation opportunity is given only on the second period side, or even if it is desired to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether to operate within the period on the unfavorable side while the count is digested It is possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest during the game.

  Further, in the first period and the second period, the display indicating that the effect acceptance is allowed may not be necessarily performed. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state in which it is unknown whether the stage reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the stage reception is allowed in either the first period or the second period. Since the display is advanced, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interested, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is executed.

  Moreover, about the 1st period and the 2nd period, it is desirable to set the same time length in which production reception is permitted in those periods. According to such a configuration, reception of effects is allowed for the same period of time in either the first period or the second period, so the count value is a specific number (here, “10”). ) Can be provided as a “thinking time for operation”, and the game entertainment can be maintained during the period in which the count display is executed through the addition of such a production element. It becomes like this.

  In addition, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the operation by the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the reception of the plurality of times. As a result, the rate at which an effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as a count target effect may be increased. However, in this case, even if the production is accepted a plurality of times, the easiness of appearance of the finally produced production mode is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer concealment effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a count display up to a predetermined value is executed within a period in which the symbol effect is performed, and a timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the present invention, during the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display.

  That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the count target effect is counted so that it is difficult to visually recognize the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the front effect will be performed, the remaining time until the target effect is executed, for example, the count value by the count display can be grasped only by skipping (during the count front effect by decoration) It becomes difficult to grasp and the interest in the count display can be increased.

  In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear through the count forward effect by the decorative body has been raised, so about the decline in the entertainment interest by making the count display difficult to see Will be expected to suppress this.

  FIGS. 197 (a) to (c) are aspects of a single timer (YES in step S5506), and a decision is made not to execute a mission effect (make a conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer concealment effect performed when the specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing condition.

  In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, a count display with a count number of “30” is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. After the count display becomes “0”, a timer target effect that is a timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

  Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the example of FIGS. 206B and 206C described later, the effect movable body KT is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. It can be realized as a count erosion effect for positioning this. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be anything as long as it makes the count display relatively less visible at the time of production than at the time of non-production.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is difficult to visually recognize) until the count value becomes “10”. In the effect state, the ease of appearance of a specific effect with a high expectation as a timer target effect is suggested by an operation mode or a light emission mode by a decorative body.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count front effect by the decorative body is finished, the count value is changed from “10” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible. Then, one of a plurality of effects forms appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of “30” at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The display starts, and after the count display becomes “0”, the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. Further, the point forward effect is displayed by the decorative body on the front side of the count display during the count display, as in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a).

  However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count front effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count front effect by the decorative body is ended. The count display progresses from “15” to “0” in a state where the count display is easily visible, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, a count display with a count number of “25” is displayed at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The timer target effect that is the target of the timer appears after the count display becomes “0”. As in the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the count display.

  However, in the example of the timer effect shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and the count forward effect by the decorative object is ended. The count display advances from “20” to “0” in a state where the count display is easy to visually recognize, and then any one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a timer target effect.

  By the way, as described above, in the timer effect, the higher the count value when the count display is started, the higher the rate at which the effect target having a high expectation level appears as the timer object effect. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the count front effect is generated by the decorative body, the count front effect is ended, not the count value when the count display is started. The relationship is such that the higher the count value when it is made easier to perform, the higher the rate at which a production target with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer production. The ratio may include 100%.

  For example, in the above-described effect examples in FIGS. 197 (a) and (b), the count value when the count display is started in any effect pattern is “30”, which is the same as FIG. 197 (a). In the example of production, the count value is “10” when the counting forward production is finished and easy to see, whereas in the production example of FIG. 197 (b), the counting forward production is finished and easy to see. Since the count value of “15” is “15”, the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) has a higher rate of appearance of a highly expected effect as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, when a count forward effect occurs during execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that appeared at the start of the count is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect ends. Since the size of the game is refocused, it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment during execution of the count display.

  For example, in the effect example in FIG. 197 (c) described above, “25”, which is a relatively small count value, is displayed at the start of counting, but is relatively large at the end of the effect when the count forward effect ends. The count value “20” is displayed, and the proportion of the highly anticipated effects appearing as the timer target effects is higher than in the example effects of FIGS. 197 (a) and (b). Yes.

  In other words, in this case, if a count forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that an effect with a high expectation as a timer target effect appears higher than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

  However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, a relatively large count value is also displayed at the end of the count forward effect compared to when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the value appears is high.

  Moreover, in the production examples in FIGS. 197 (a) to (b) described above, since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from when the count display is started until the count forward production occurs, the count display is executed. It is possible to maintain the game entertainment interest by making the player aware of the possibility that the count forward performance may occur over a long period of time.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), a plurality of times are prepared as the time from when the count front effect is started until it is ended, and therefore the count front effect is started. At this point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment until the count forward effect is ended.

  In addition to the count display being executed, the count forward effect appears during the period before the count display is executed, for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in which the ratio of appearance of the timer effect increases when it appears. It may be. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application that makes it difficult to visually recognize the progress of the count by causing the count forward effect to appear during the count display and aims at the fun as the effect, than before the count display is started. It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is executed in the period within one symbol variation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect is finished, and the timer prefetch effect is executed. When the count forward effect ends, the rate at which a highly anticipated effect appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the count display is executed when the count forward effect ends. It is desirable to set as follows.

  In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer prefetch effect is being executed, the timer prefetch effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and the timer prefetch effect is displayed. During the execution of the timer, the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer pre-reading effect, and during the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer pre-reading effect. It is desirable to perform. That is, in this case, for example, the decorative body moves to a different position depending on whether the timer pre-reading effect is being executed or the count display is being executed. When the timer pre-reading effect ends when the position is in the position, the count display is started at a position different from the timer pre-reading effect that has been difficult to view. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect is generated while the timer pre-reading effect is being executed, the count display is started at a stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and has not been finished. Even so, since the count value of the count display can be made easily visible from the start, there is a possibility that the production value as the size of the count at the start of the count may be impaired. You will be able to enjoy the count forward performance while being excluded.

  In addition, with regard to the count forward effect, it is in a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has elapsed since the count display was started, rather than a relatively early stage where the time has not elapsed since the count display was started. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the count forward effect is executed.

  In addition, if the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is relatively small, it is impossible to expect the count value that appears when this effect is ended. In addition to this, there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target effect, so the count forward effect is terminated before the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In this case, it is desirable not to newly execute the count forward effect.

  Further, the count front effect may be performed in such a manner that the decorative body is positioned on the front side across the count display when a plurality of count displays are executed.

  Of the timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer target exclusion effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When an effect is executed, the current count value can be substantially dewed by the related effects even when the count forward effect is being executed by the decorative body, and thus the count display is visually recognized. It will be possible to predict how much count progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing a count forward effect by a decorative object only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, a timer object exclusion effect, a timer mode effect, etc.) is obtained when a specific count value is reached. Or the counter display is made difficult to visually recognize by performing the count forward effect in such a manner that the decorative body is positioned in front of the position where the predetermined effect movable body (timer target advance effect) appears. It may be difficult to predict how much the count has progressed.

  The number of decorative bodies that produce effects on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front effects may be performed so that a plurality of decorative bodies are positioned on the front side of the count display. In this case, in addition to a mode in which a plurality of decorative bodies are all positioned on the front side of the count display, any one of a plurality of modes such as a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorative bodies is positioned on the front side of the count display The count forward effect may be selectively executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 198 to FIG. 207, various aspects of the above-mentioned timer effect itself and the contents of the effect will be described in detail for various effects performed in relation to the timer effect. Here, the processing examples relating to the above-mentioned effects are merely examples, and for example, effects other than the above-described types may be executed as the contents of the effects. These may be changed as appropriate as long as they are within the scope of the same technical idea. Accordingly, in the production examples described below, there may be some productions that do not match the production contents of each production described above, but within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are changed as appropriate. In addition, the “timer effect” below basically means that the count display is executed in the notice timer effect or the variable timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning including timer prefetching effects. In addition, as a mode of “count display”, “seconds” is counted in the following, but is not limited thereto.

  FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which a change display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero. ing. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for the sake of convenience of description, the specific decorative member SDY for performance that has been omitted is shown in the drawings. The specific decorative member SDY may be, for example, “backward behind-bottom movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. Is equivalent to "movable member of"

  FIG. 198 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 198 (B), when the timer effect (count number) is displayed and the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value, The candidate for the type of effect that can appear as is displayed, and while the count display is executed, it is unclear which of these candidates will appear as the effect of the timer target, but any of those candidates is a timer target It is possible to recognize that it appears as a production. Note that “conversation” in the figure corresponds to conversation notice, “hold” in the figure corresponds to hold change, “cut A” in the figure corresponds to cut-in A, “Corporate A” in the figure corresponds to the action A, “Malce” in the figure corresponds to a special timer, “Cut B” in the figure corresponds to cut-in B, “Combination B” in the figure corresponds to the accessory B operation.

  FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the above-mentioned timer target exclusion effect is executed when the count shown in FIG. 198 (B) reaches “60”.

  Note that, as described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as a timer target in which it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is (in the timer target notice lottery, the timer target Display that suggests at least one (two or more may be suggested) of the production mode not determined as.

  Here, as described above, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, in which the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) and is prepared as a candidate for the timing at which the timer target effect may appear. There is a relationship that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are narrowed as 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc.) have passed since the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds and 20 seconds from the start of the change) that are prepared as timing candidates at which the timer target effect can appear. , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern in which a timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of “70”, but has another count number such as “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, or “50”. An effect pattern to be displayed can also be generated. Of these, assuming that a timer effect having a count of “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). The predetermined value (“0” in this case) is reached at the same timing, and for example, “conversation notice” appears as an effect for the timer. On the other hand, if a timer effect with a count other than “10” appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the “conversation notice” will not appear as a timer target effect. When the count number is left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C), the “conversation notice” is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as a timer target. It can be said that the candidates that can appear as production were narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since there is an effect situation where the count display is executed with the count number of “60” left, at this timing, it is substantially determined from the effect candidates for the timer target. It is desirable to perform an effect (timer-excluded effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation notice) is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately represent the performance situation where the player is placed.

  However, in the first timer target effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that “special timer” is not selected as the timer target effect at this timing, instead of “conversation notice”. Yes. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear during the digestion of the count that "the effect indicating that the big hit is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer target effect. It is possible to feel anxiety about whether a highly anticipated performance appears as a timer target.

  In addition, in the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display image corresponding to the “special timer” (the secret) is locked among the display images displaying the candidates for the target effect of the timer effect. The padlocks that are in the state are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display such as “LOCK !!” is suggested to indicate that the “special timer” has not been selected as an effect for the timer.

  FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer-excluded effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). Yes.

  As described above, the timer mode effect is an expectation level as an effect of the timer object when the count display becomes a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). Hell timer mode (first timer mode display) with a relatively low rate of appearance of high performance modes (production type and content of production (cut-in mode, etc.), and timer object when count display reaches a predetermined value One of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which a high-expectation production mode appears as a production is displayed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, the heaven challenge production is performed as to whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and the heaven challenge production appears. At this point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode always occurs.

  In addition, in the heaven challenge production, there is a high possibility of entering the hell timer mode or the possibility of entering the heaven timer mode (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, which is dominant) In this case, after such an effect, it is suggested whether the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode occurs.

  Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed with the effect type excluded in the timer-excluded effect being shown, any effect type in the timer-excluded effect is determined. Whether the hell timer mode is likely to occur, depending on whether it is excluded (whether it is a production type with a low expectation level or a production type with a high expectation level), or heaven It can be said that the present situation is such that the timer mode is likely to occur with a certain degree of accuracy.

  FIG. 198 (E) shows the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) as a result of successful heaven challenge production shown in FIG. 198 (D) (for example, result of angel winning victory against the devil). It shows the status of the performance being performed.

  In this performance situation, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it has been shown that the ratio of appearance of a highly anticipated performance mode as a timer target performance has shifted to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display). It is. Therefore, when the timer target exclusion effect is performed in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), a result advantageous to the player (here, a low-expected effect among the plurality of effect types is a timer target effect). ) Is suggested, and the expectation when the timer exclusion effect is generated can be increased.

  On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, the timer target exclusion effect is executed while the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) appears as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In such a case, the ratio of the result indicating a disadvantageous result for the player (here, a high-expected effect is not selected as a timer-targeted effect among a plurality of effect types) is increased. Anxiety when the production occurs can be heard.

  In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as a count display mode, but a mode of the decorative symbol SZ that is changing or related to it. This makes it possible to recognize that the state has shifted to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) without overlooking other effects while the remaining count is consumed. In this case, the current timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

  FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times when the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed after the appearance of the first timer exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). The timer-excluded effect is executed, and when the count display is “20”, the fifth timer-target excluded effect is executed.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), five types of effects among the seven types of effects prepared as timer target effects candidates are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effects (5 types of effects). Therefore, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two effects (holding change, accessory B action) occurs. It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of effect candidates (holding change, The ratio of the production with the higher expectation in the action B) is higher, and the expectation until the count display reaches the predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden after the timer target effect shown in FIG. 198 appears until the timer target effect appears. According to such a configuration, if it is not memorized that the heaven timer mode is displayed, it becomes unclear which occurrence ratio of the remaining production candidates is high, and it is counted as a price not concentrated on the production. It is possible to give a sense of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

  In FIG. 199 (G), after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the time before the timing at which the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears appears. By producing an effect using a specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is targeted for the timer. This shows the production situation where the timer target advance production suggesting that the timer is being executed.

  That is, in this case, since the timer target advance effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect may appear as the timer target effect. It is possible to provide further information for determining whether the cost is high.

  And in this example, since the “actual object B halfway action (small)” is executed as the timer target advance effect, it is specified among the effect candidates (holding change, accessory B action) narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect It can be recognized that there is a high possibility that the “act B operation”, which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (the accessory B), is executed as a timer target effect (may be 100%). It becomes like this. As described above, the “actual object B midway operation (small)” means that the “object B operation” which is the effect of the timer is “the specific decorative member SDY (community B) is from the first position to the second position”. When it is “displaced”, it means “the effect that the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position”.

  However, in this explanation example, as the content of the effect related to the “act B action”, the first effect with a relatively low level of expectation that only displaces the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, in addition to displacing the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) from the first position to the second position, the second, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, that displaces the accessory A from the third position to the fourth position. Production contents are prepared, and the production related to the “act B action” is executed with any of the production contents.

  In this respect, in the heaven timer mode according to this example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when the “object B action” is selected as the timer target effect, the content of the effect is relatively high. Even if the production type that appears as a timer-targeted effect is completely narrowed down by the timer-targeted first-order effect, the heaven timer mode is displayed. As a player, a useful function is played.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target advance effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is counting. The timer target advance effect is provided so as to overlap the count display, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such timer target advance effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) used in the timer target effect is in a state where the effect is being executed. In combination with the fact that it is not the timer target advance effect during count digestion, there is an effect situation that is easily misunderstood when the timer target effect is being executed after the count display reaches the predetermined value and this is hidden. Will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not the timer target effect but the timer target first effect, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B) is used as the timer target first effect. After that, even if no display relating to the timer target advance effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory) is used as the timer target advance effect. It is expected that the timer target effect is generated with the recognition that B) is used. When the timer target advance effect is executed, the count display may not be made visible, but may be hidden until the timer target advance effect ends.

  FIG. 199 (H) shows a specific count value (here, “0”) whose count display is before a predetermined value (“0” here) after the timer target advance effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed. 3 ”), a timer that suppresses the production according to the prize even though a new prize is generated and it is determined that the production execution (holding change) is decided according to the prize. The effect situation in which object suppression control is performed is shown.

  That is, as described above, in particular, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), it is very unlikely that “hold change” is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target advance effect. In other words, because there is still a “pending change” as an effect candidate for the timer, a holding change corresponding to a new winning may occur near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the pending change may be mistaken for the timer target effect, and as a result, the timer target effect itself may be overlooked. In addition, when “hold change” is executed as an effect for the timer, it is executed for “hold 0” in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether the effect is for the timer. However, there is a great possibility that these pending changes will be misidentified in situations where the remaining number of counts is small.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period (here, the count number is relatively long) until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value. The remaining time until the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first period is over, although the pending change corresponding to the occurrence of a new winning is permitted. When the second period is relatively small (here, the period after the remaining number of counts is “3”), even if a new winning is generated, a change corresponding to this is not allowed. Thus, the above-mentioned concern is solved (timer target suppression control).

  FIG. 199 (I) shows that the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the timer object suppression control shown in FIG. After the display (in this case, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (action B operation) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), it is shown that in the heaven timer mode, the action B action that is the effect of the timer is compared with the content of the first effect with a relatively low expectation. It shows a state of being executed as the second performance content with a high degree of expectation. However, in this case, as it is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, the accessory B is used for the production of the second production content. The specific decorative member TGY is a position on the far side in front view than the specific decorative member SDY used for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most (at least It is designed to produce at a position where more than half of the area overlaps.

  According to such a configuration, which of the first effect content with a relatively low expectation and the second effect content with a relatively high expectation is being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the effect state). ) Can be made difficult to determine, and this encourages concentration on the timer target performance. In order to obtain such operational effects, the second performance content may be any material that can be produced on the back side with respect to the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B). Instead of the combined effect of the member SDY (the accessory B) and the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A), the specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (the accessory A). It may be executed as a combined effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (the accessory B).

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new winning is generated, a pending change is generated accordingly. This is not done, and the hold display won in FIG. 199 (H) is maintained unchanged.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the “actual B movement” among the “holding change” and the “subject B movement” left as the candidate effects for the timer target is executed as the timer target presentation. Is displayed ("B" in the figure is blinking), and "Pending change" is a display that can be recognized that it is not an effect for the timer (" “Pending” is displayed).

  FIG. 199 (J) shows an effect situation when the timer object suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time elapses after the timer object effect is executed in FIG. 199 (I).

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the timer-targeted effect is executed, there is no concern that this is a timer-targeted effect even if “holding change” is executed. Accordingly, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the display of the hold whose execution has been carried over although it has been decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. This is suspended and changed at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new winning that is subject to a hold change occurs near the timing at which the timer-targeted effect is executed, the hold-change is properly displayed while clearly indicating that it is not a timer-targeted effect. Be able to run.

  In the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the on-hold display different from the changing on-hold display (hold 0) is changed to blue. However, in view of the special time change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, such a blue hold display has appeared. Since it is clearly stated that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the change is higher than the case where the red on-hold display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), which effect type is excluded by the timer-excluded effect even though a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer-targeted effect was executed. In addition, a display indicating which of the timer-targeted effects was continuously executed. In addition, the display indicating that the timer is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed. However, the display suggesting that the timer is in the heaven timer mode is a mode in which the decorative symbol SZ is displayed in a reduced manner in accordance with the reduced display in the reach display mode.

  In this explanatory example, each display that is continuously executed in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is also executed continuously in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (199)). K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in a state where the symbol is stopped (a state where the jackpot symbol appears), the timer effect was executed in the effect process so far, or the effect targeted by the timer effect It is possible to recognize that the “act B action”.

  Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 and 199 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. .

  FIG. 200A shows an effect situation in which a change display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being four. ing.

  FIG. 200B shows an effect in which a timer target exclusion effect is executed even when the timer effect is not executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200A. Indicates the situation.

  In this timer target exclusion effect, it is indicated that the “act B action” is not a candidate for the timer target, so that when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the timer target candidate has a conversation. It becomes possible for the player to know that the selection has been made to any one of the advance notice, pending change, cut-in A, action A operation, special timer, and cut-in B. That is, in this case, a relatively high expectation aspect among a plurality of effect forms (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation) is the target of the timer. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player has fallen out of the candidate, the player wishes that the timer effect does not occur within the variation, and the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state. You will be able to stimulate the game entertainment when you are.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a display that suggests various effects that are prepared as timer-targeted effect candidates when performing the timer-target excluded effects. Is not executed, and a display indicating that at least “act B action” is not selected as an effect for the timer is displayed. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the “act B action” is not a timer target effect, but it is unclear what other types of effects are available as timer target effects. The Rukoto.

  In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “15”, and the count display (here, countdown) is started. The production status is shown.

  Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this explanation example, after displaying that at least the “act B action” is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200B), the display is changed to the timer effect ( This is continuously displayed without being displayed until the (count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started while the display is displayed. In such a configuration, how much of the timer effect has a degree of expectation since the count display is started (here, a timer effect in which the “object B operation” having a relatively high degree of expectation is not executed). Will be able to recognize.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 200B and 200C, when a display suggesting that at least the “act B action” is not selected as the timer target effect appears, this is continuously displayed. Although the aspect concerning the display is different from time to time, it is not necessarily required to be different, and may be the same.

  FIG. 200D shows the timer effect when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200C reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the count display is not displayed. The production situation in which “conversation notice (first production mode)” prepared as a production candidate is being executed is shown.

  That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that an effect such as “may be a chance” as “conversation notice (first effect mode)” is being executed as an effect object of the timer effect. Become. However, the “conversation notice” shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect form of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is not displayed. When finished, the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 200 (C) is displayed again and continued (revival timer effect).

  That is, in this case, after the “conversation notice (first effect mode)” appears as if it is a timer object (count object), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect Since the second presentation mode different from the mode is indicated to be a timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when a relatively low level of performance appears and this is hidden. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed thereafter, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  FIG. 200E shows the count display that has been hidden after the “conversation notice” executed in FIG. 200D with the count display being hidden is displayed again. The effect situation which continues this is shown (revival timer effect).

  Here, in such a revival timer effect, while the count display is not displayed (FIG. 200 (D)), the count digest is kept secret, and in the example of FIG. 200 (E), The count display is redisplayed from the state in which the count has been digested for the amount of time that has been hidden (here, 2 seconds). That is, in this case, after the “conversation notice” is completed, the count display is displayed in a minus notation (here, “−2”), and is displayed again. Now, it is possible to express how the count digestion has not ended and this is being executed continuously. As a result, the “conversation notice” that appeared in FIG. Be able to recognize.

  In addition, in such a revival timer effect, “count display that appeared before being temporarily hidden” and “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed” are different counts. In order to make it possible to more reliably recognize that the same count digest is being performed rather than digesting, the count sound is displayed even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continue to perform over the “count display that appeared before being hidden” and the “count display that was once hidden and then re-displayed”.

  When the count display is executed in minus notation (here, “−2”), a display (for example, “−2 (remaining 18)”) that can recognize how many counts remain is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches “−20 (remaining 0)” as a predetermined value (when minus count is performed for 18 seconds from “−2”), this is not displayed and the timer target effect is executed. Become so.

  FIG. 200 (F) shows an effect situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) is generated while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, the mode is shifted to the heaven timer mode. .

  With the appearance of such timer mode effects (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still in progress (the situation where the count display is being executed). Can be recognized. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating the state of the heaven timer mode is not associated with the decorative symbol SZ but in the display area. Is displayed as a stamp notation on the left side.

  FIG. 201 (G) shows another effect (not related to the timer effect) while the count digest is being executed after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode in FIG. 200 (F). The production situation in which the “cannon chance production” is generated as the predetermined production) is shown.

  That is, in this “cannon chance effect”, an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value (−20 in this case) and the output related to the count display are set to a predetermined value (here −20). When the “cannon chance effect” is executed, any one of the effect modes in which the output is stopped in the middle stage is selectively made to appear (count output stop control).

  More specifically, in the “cannon chance effect”, after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, from the cannon image, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, the right area in the display area An effect in which a bullet is fired by selectively using an area that is empty (unused) among the area and the lower area as a bullet firing destination (a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201 (H)) Is to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area necessary for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is other various effects (count display (upper left area), Reach fluctuation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)) are all used, and the bullet firing effect (FIG. H) There is no room for new output (a specific production situation), and if a bullet is fired in such a specific production situation, The production that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be damaged or destroyed by the bullet that has been fired (there is a conflict in the production output between the timer production and the predetermined production) Striped ), And more big hit expectation degree or not from being dropped, concerns such as may have occurred as a result.

  Therefore, in this explanation example, when the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, when there is a specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)) in which there is no room for output, Out of the areas that can be used as bullets (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area), the output corresponding to the count display using the upper left area is a predetermined value ( In this case, the output is not interrupted until -20), and output is interrupted in the middle of the process (count output abort control).

  FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet firing effect is executed while the output is not performed until the output for the count display reaches a predetermined value (−20 in this case) and the output is stopped in the middle of the output.

  In this way, when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the output related to the bullet fire effect is different from the case of the resurrection timer effect described above. The count display of the timer effect will not be output again after the end. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly counted, and this is a predetermined value (Fig. When the value (−20) when 35 seconds have passed since the count display is started at 200 (C) is reached, it is determined that the timing at which the output stopped count display reaches a predetermined value is reached. The production is made to appear.

  FIG. 201 (I) shows a cut-in A (cut-in effect by a teammate character) as a timer target effect after the timing that should have reached a predetermined value has been reached if the output display is not stopped. Shows the state of performance. It should be noted that the cut-in A is executed as the “second effect mode” in relation to the resurrection timer effect.

  According to such an effect progress, after a bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, a predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is maintained but the output of the count display is not stopped. When the timing that should have been reached, the timer-targeted performance appears. In other words, in this case, an improvement of the game entertainment when the timer target effect appears due to the surprise that the timer effect that seemed to have been interrupted by execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) was kept secret It is expected to plan.

  In the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), for example, when the display related to the timer mode effect is not performed and the left area is empty, the timer effect count display (upper left area) The output is maintained and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the timer effect count display and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are executed simultaneously, and the timer effect count display continues after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) ends. The operation is continued until a predetermined value (−20 in this example) is reached.

  As described above, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is to output the bullet using any one of the plurality of areas. Even if the bullet is fired toward any of these areas, the bullet The jackpot expectation shown by the launch effect (predetermined effect) is the same with no change.

  And also in this example of an explanation, it is related with the display which shows the production type excluded in the timer object exclusion production performed in Drawing 200 (B), and the heaven timer mode displayed in Drawing 200 (F). With respect to the display, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

  Next, various examples of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. .

  FIG. 202 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero.

  In FIG. 202 (B), the timer effect is displayed with the count number “3” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  In FIG. 202 (C), after the timer effect count display shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura). At this time, since the count display is also in a non-display state, for the player, the timer effect is ended by the appearance of “cut-in B”, which has a relatively low expectation (blue aura). Will come to recognize. However, in this effect example, after the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. An effect (second timer target effect) about whether or not to appear further appears.

  202D shows whether or not the count display is redisplayed while “Cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C is displayed. The effect situation in which the effect (second timer target effect) is being executed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display, an operation system effect that allows the player to operate for a predetermined time. If the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed or a second effect indicating that the count display is not redisplayed is displayed. An effect result (not shown) is made to appear. In addition, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG prompting the operation of the operation button 410, the first operation when the operation button 410 is operated is displayed. The operation expectation image SKG that suggests the ease (ratio) of appearance of the effect result is displayed. About a ratio, you may make it include 100%.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), among the plurality of performance modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the performance mode in which the first performance result is most likely to appear (i.e., the friendly ally Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode with a relatively low expectation (blue aura), the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that the player is strongly aware that the timer performance will be continued. Moreover, in the timer plus production according to this embodiment, a count value larger than the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value “3” shown in FIG. 202B) is given. Since the count display is re-displayed in the form, it is expected that an effect mode with a higher expectation will appear further as a timer target effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. (The display is not hidden), and the effect (second timer object effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. The timer object effect (the first timer object effect shown in FIG. 202C) The “cut-in B (blue aura)” as the first timer target effect) is hidden, and then an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed. Also good. However, in this case, the effect is switched from the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202C to an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display. It is desirable to allow the player to recognize that the timer effect has not ended and is being continued (or possibly continued).

  FIG. 202 (E) shows a count number with a timer effect of “5” after a first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed in the operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (D) appears. Is displayed again, and the production status is shown in which the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In the operation system effect, in addition to the case where the player's operation is accepted within a predetermined time, the case where the player's operation is not accepted within the predetermined time, the same effect result (first) The production result and the second production result) appear after the end of the predetermined time.

  In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here “0”) and a timer related display (here “Yukuzo”) is displayed, The effect situation where the effect (cut-in B) used as the effect object of the timer effect is performed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), “cut-in B” as a timer target effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high expectation (red aura). That is, in this effect example, the target effect is executed as the same type of effect in the first count display and the redisplayed second count display, and in the second target effect, the first target effect. It is made to perform in the form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with higher expectation. According to such a configuration, when the same type of effect is executed as the timer target effect, it is recognized that the timer display is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times that the count display is redisplayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with higher expectation, and the timer target effect is generated. From the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  FIG. 203 (G) shows an effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display while “cut-in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed. The performance status being executed is shown.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), it is easier for the first effect result to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D) among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG. An appearance mode (a friendly ally character) appears. Therefore, in a situation where “cut-in B” as a timer target effect has been executed in a mode with a relatively high expectation (red aura), the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that the situation is to raise awareness. As described above, after the count display reaches the predetermined value, on the other hand, the effect (cut-in B) having an aspect (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as the timer target effect. On the other hand, an effect (an operation expectation image SKG) having a relatively unfavorable aspect (a senior friend character) is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more the number of times that “cut-in B” is changed to an advantageous mode for the player on one side and the count redisplay is repeated, the more Since the operation expected image SKG having a disadvantageous aspect is likely to appear and the rate of redisplay is reduced, the game entertainment is enhanced and tension is felt each time the count is redisplayed. Both can be suitably imparted.

  As a result of such an effect, if the count display is not redisplayed, the timer effect is terminated at that point, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

  Next, various examples of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. .

  FIG. 204 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the normal gaming state with the number of holds being zero.

  In FIG. 204 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “10” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, generally, the longer the time required for counting the count, the higher the rate at which an effect with a high expectation appears as a timer target effect. When a count display having only “10”) is displayed, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in this production example, while performing the count display, the production of the production to hide the count value for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated by that time, so that the count is digested. The timer stagnation effect that maintains the sense of expectation by extending the time required can be executed.

  204 (C) and (D) are displayed when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, “5”). The production situation is shown.

  In other words, in this effect example, when the count display reaches the first specific value (here, “5”), if the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type ( A conversation notice, a hold change, a cut-in A, an action A action, a special timer, a cut-in B, and an action B action) start to appear (progress effect that leads to the timer effect), While the effect is executed, the count display is hidden. The progress effect connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value and is not displayed.

  In this effect example, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help for a teammate character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from a person seeking help are sequentially displayed as progress effects leading to a timer target effect. It has become so. Here, when the display image SEG11 or the display image SEG12 is displayed, it can be narrowed down to some extent which type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but it specifies which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows a situation in which three teammate characters accept a request from a person who seeks help, but it is predicted that someone of the three teammate characters will confront an enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear who of the three ally characters will confront the enemy character (for example, which one is cut-in A or B).

  204E is displayed again with the count value of “4” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204C and 204D is completed. The production situation is shown.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is between “10” and “5”, the count value is incremented by “1” every time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from “5” to “5”. When progressing to “4”, until “the progress effect connected to the timer target effect (first time)” that appears when the count value becomes “5” ends (here, 6 seconds), The count value is not developed, and this can be stopped. In order to stagnate the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, “5”).

  204 (F) and 205 (G) are displayed when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to the second specific value (here, “2”), and this is not displayed. The production situation when it is turned on is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden a plurality of times until the count display reaches a predetermined value. Thus, each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is displayed. Progressive production that is connected to is to be executed. The progress effect connected to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value and is not displayed.

  In this effect example, as a progress effect that leads to a timer target effect, a display image SEG13 that shows the intention of a friendly friend character of the middle age among the three friendly characters depicted in FIG. A display image SEG14 depicting the appearance of the teammate's ally character facing the enemy character is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 and the display image SEG14 are displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as a timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) It is not possible to specify whether or not a red aura is worn.

  FIG. 205 (H) shows a count value of “1” after the “progress effect connected to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. The re-displayed status is shown.

  According to such a configuration, when the count value is advanced from “2” to “1”, the “progress effect that leads to the timer target effect (second time) that appears when the count value becomes“ 2 ”. ) "Is completed (here, 14 seconds), the count value is not developed and can be stopped.

  In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. Thereafter, an effect situation is shown in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, an effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, so that it is suitable for amusement entertainment until the count display reaches the predetermined value. To be able to maintain. In addition, while the effect related to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnated, so that the time required for the digestion of the count can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

  Next, various aspects of the timer effects themselves shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effects will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. . In FIGS. 206 and 207, for the convenience of explanation, the movable body for production KT omitted in the other drawings is shown in the drawing. The movable body KT may be, for example, “a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-middle movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom-front front movable effect unit 3500, It corresponds to `` movable member '' etc.

  FIG. 206 (A) shows an effect state in which the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the number of holds is 0 in the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 206 (B) shows that the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40” during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), and the count display (here, countdown) is displayed. The production status to be started is shown.

  Here, in the timer effect, generally, the longer the time required for counting, the higher the proportion of the effect that is expected to appear as a timer target effect, so that such a large number of counts (here, When a count display with “40”) is displayed, there is a concern that the tension cannot be suitably maintained while the count number is consumed. Therefore, in this effect example, while performing the count display, a count forward effect is generated by a decorative body in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. As the count value when it becomes easier to visually recognize again, an effect with a high degree of expectation is likely to appear as a timer target effect.

  FIG. 206 (C) shows a state in which the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time while the count display is executed with the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B). This shows the production situation (counting production with a decorative body) that continues to stay. FIG. 206D shows an effect state in which the count front effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206C is finished and the count display is easily recognizable.

  According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body) and seems to be redone as a count display with a smaller count value. Since the performance can be provided, there is a concern that it is not possible to appropriately maintain the tension while the count number is digested.

  Further, in such a count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easily visible when the effect ends, and as a result, the expectation level as a timer target effect There is a concern about the decline in the entertainment of the game due to the fact that it is difficult for the high performance to appear. Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the movable body KT (decorative body) also has a plurality of effect modes (expectations different in expectation in the lottery separate from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect). For example, it is desirable to make any one of the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emission mode, etc. appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult for an effect with a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target effect, the big hit expectation is high due to the effect on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is another lottery. If this is done, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this regard, in this production example, since a relatively large count value such as “35” is maintained and the state is easily recognizable, the expectation for the timer production is maintained thereafter. In this state, it can be expected that the count display is continued.

  FIG. 206E shows the operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. FIG. 206 (F) shows an effect situation where an operation by the player is accepted at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E) and the effect result appears. ing.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player during the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”). As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To appear.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “23”, and as a result of the production, the operation-time production mode that is most advantageous to the player ( Since Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from when the count display becomes the first count value (here, “30”) to the second count value (here, “20”), when the player does not receive an effect, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  FIG. 207 (G) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears, and displays to the player. FIG. 207 (H) shows the effect situation where the operation opportunity by the player is accepted at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G). The production status is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, if there is an operation by the player even in the second period from when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). As a result of the acceptance of the effect, a plurality of operation effect modes with different rates of appearance with a high expectation as the timer target effect (for example, Daikichi, Yoshi, Evil, etc. in descending order of appearance rate) ) To appear.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), the player performs an operation when the count value reaches “8”, and the result of the effect is a special operation effect that is most advantageous to the player. Since the mode (Daiyoshi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment is maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period from when the count display becomes the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”), when an operation by the player is not accepted, The count display is advanced without any production result appearing.

  However, in this effect example, when the count display is in the first period from when the first count value (here “30”) to the second count value (here “20”), the operating means ( For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410) and an effect is accepted, and when the count display is the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). When the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated during the second period until an effect is received, a special operation-time effect mode (Daichi) The rate of occurrence is different.

  More specifically, when an effect is received during the first period, the occurrence ratio of a special operation effect mode (Daiyoshi) is relatively high, and an effect is received when during the second period. And the occurrence ratio of special operation-time effects (Daiyoshi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in the first period, it is possible to suppress the production risk that the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation-time production mode (Daikichi) Even if this appears as much as it is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high expectation will appear as a timer target effect. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the second period, a special operation-time effect mode (Daiyoshi) is generated, although the production risk that the special operation-time effect mode (Daikichi) does not appear increases. When this appears as much as it is difficult to perform, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated effect will appear as a timer target effect.

  According to such a configuration, the count display is the first count value (here, “30”) from the first count value according to the player's preference and the production status such as the degree of expectation shown in other productions. Whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period with a low production risk until the time of 2 count value (here, “20”), the count display shows the third count value (here, “15”). )) To the fourth count value (here, “5” in this case), the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated bullishly in the second period with high production risk, or both It becomes possible to make the game strategy such as whether to operate the operation button 410 interesting.

  In FIG. 207 (I), the count display is further advanced after the effect result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears and reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer related display (here, “Yukuzo”). ) Is displayed, an effect situation in which an effect (cut-in B) that is an effect object of the timer effect is being executed is shown. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

  In each of the count effects described above, the count target effect is not immediately executed when the count value reaches a predetermined value (in this case, “0”). To be. In this respect, a display mode suggesting which effect is to be executed as a count target effect within a period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed. May appear. According to such a configuration, even when a situation in which a plurality of effects appear in parallel when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any of these effects is subject to the count effect. You will be able to enjoy without misunderstanding what is running as.

  In this regard, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) to when the count target effect is executed, instead of the display mode described above, “the count target effect does not have a one-to-one correspondence. It is desirable that a “specific display mode” commonly used in different count target effects may appear. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects will appear, but when a display mode that should originally appear as a count target effect is performed It is more desirable to make the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears higher than. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk that it is misunderstood which effect is being executed as a count effect, which effect is guaranteed while the ratio of jackpot symbols is guaranteed to increase. Since it can be interesting to find out whether or not it is being executed as a count effect, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as a count target effect is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) until the count target effect is executed. Even if a specific display mode appears, the count effect target is such that “one of the M (two or more) effects less than N is executed as the count effect target”. It is desirable to be able to narrow down which of the effects is executed in order to make it interesting to find out which effect is being executed as a count effect.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, the explanation regarding the automatic channel sound control which is a part thereof will be described later. Thus, next, automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background is briefly explained.

  In a general pachinko machine, an effect that attracts the player's interest is output by outputting various sounds from a speaker in each scene as the game progresses. For example, even for reach that should improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds depending on the type and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel including the respective reach is assigned in advance to each sound to be output in each scene. It is played back using the channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is an empty channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the empty channel due to channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds) for the purpose of realizing a variety of sound effects by effectively utilizing empty channels and enhancing the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while dynamically assigning and managing each channel to each sound to be output, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in the present embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . This will be specifically described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
208 (A) and 208 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with respect to the present embodiment. FIG. 208A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assigning playback channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button pressing sound” shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that has started playback until any end of the playback. As a channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and sound are assigned exclusively as a pair so that sound overwriting does not occur. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so as not to suffer from the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that would interfere with overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. This sound definition table manages the definition of playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting and output type setting for each sound classification and sound name. Yes. Since the playback channel number has been described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  211A shows an example of a production time chart, FIG. 211B shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. 211C indicates that playback cannot be performed when attempting to play back each sound. An example of a problem is shown. In these FIGS. 211A to 211C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 211 (A), the game state along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, in the order of “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “big hit” It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be “medium”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 in FIG. 211 (C), a new opening sound is received during the playback time of “first half notice A” (“hold” shown in the figure). 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “first half notice A”. "Is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the" first half notice A "sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 in FIG. 211 (C), a new sound is generated during the playback time of “full screen notice” (“hold” shown in the figure). 208 (B), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the “holding winning sound” is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen notice”. "" Is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound stops (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 212A and FIG. 212B each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as this embodiment.

  FIG. 212A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel classification as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel classification is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed and variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned in accordance with a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to “sound control by automatic channel method”).

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. The “reproduction ch” shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of allocation of playback channels for each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned a priority. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure should not be muted in the middle of the sound that has been started to be played back until the end of playback. On the other hand, the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the figure does not cause a problem even if the sound that has started playback is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for specifying a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If the sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, it is reproduced immediately if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

  If there is no empty channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as that of the sound being played back, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and plays a new sound. On the other hand, the production control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound classification and sound name, the playback channel number, left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, etc. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying an AUTO group (also referred to as “playback priority”), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound Manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group represents which AUTO group among the AUTO groups in which a plurality of sounds exist. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the sound that should be played with priority, while the lower the numerical value, the sound that should be played without priority. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority, for example, notification sounds having a priority of “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”) A sound effect with a priority of “20” (“big hit fixed sound” and “button press sound”), a BGM with a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10” Sound effects (such as “full-screen notice sound effects”), sound effects with a priority of “05” (“first half notice sound effects” to “second half notice sound effects”), hold winning sounds with a priority of “01” It is said. As a result, for example, when a notification sound is to be reproduced in a state where there is no empty channel, there is no need to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and a lower priority sound (for example, a reserved winning sound) The notification sound is preferentially played back using the channel that is playing back.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, setting “0x00” indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and setting “0x80”, for example, indicates the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L. The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as described above, the initial value of the upper and lower pans is, for example, the upper and lower pans of a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . The initial value of the upper and lower pans is managed as pan information. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is set in the third byte (0x1FF if 0xFF). ) Is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided on the gaming machine, and is always played at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect”. “1” is set for each “sound”. When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source by such a seek point is exceeded, the maximum number of sounds that can be registered can be registered.

  The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority order. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop left symbol”, “stop right symbol”, “stop middle symbol”, and “big hit” Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. In FIGS. 215A and 215B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), the game state is sequentially changed along the horizontal axis, “first half of change”, “second half of change”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop” and “ It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be “big hit”.

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the “normal BGM playback” sound is played all the time in the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, if there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “holding winning” shown in the figure) and an attempt is made to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this reserved winning sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), for example, the sound of “reach BGM playback” is played all the time on the playback channels 00 to 01 ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, if there is a start winning (corresponding to “holding winning” shown in the figure) and the player tries to play the reserved winning sound as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without being overwritten by the pending winning sound (corresponding to the “reserved sound reproduction” shown in the figure).

  In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound having the highest priority of “25” as a new sound ( As shown in FIG. 215 (B), it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as a result of searching for an empty channel. Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels that are reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the reserved winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the figure) is set. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the reserved winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 216 shows an example of work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number during playback, an automatic assignment group, a priority at the time of automatic assignment, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a piece of information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that a setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”. The sound number during playback indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played back when “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, when “0”, the channel is fixedly assigned, while when “1”, the channel is automatically assigned (“sound control by automatic channel method” described later). Equivalent). Here, for example, if the automatic allocation group is “1”, it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is “2”, it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration time when the desired reproduction sound is registered as “0”. Note that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of sounds being played when trying to play a new sound in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of the automatic assignment are being played. Used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left and right pans and the top and bottom pans described above.

  FIG. 217 shows an example of an empty channel search process when sound control is performed when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 217, the channel is also abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request for reproduction of a new sound (step S1100A), the production control program checks an automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is “0”, fixed allocation is performed. And start playing a new sound on the designated channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that the allocation is automatic allocation, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (mono) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A). ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound in the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound having the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound in the (mono) channel being reproduced It is determined whether or not a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The production control program terminates the processing if there is no channel of reproduced sound that is equal to or lower than the priority of the new sound in such a (mono) channel being reproduced, while Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are multiple corresponding channels, the production control program is playing the sound with the longest playback time since registration based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when there is not a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel that satisfies a desired condition (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, in the above-described step S1106A, when the production control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When it is determined that there is an empty channel, the effect control program selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (stereo) channel of the sound being reproduced has the same or lower priority as the priority of the new sound (step) S1124A) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten with the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when there is a production control program, it determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

  The production control program starts outputting the new sound with a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, and when there are a plurality of corresponding channels, Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the new sound starts to be reproduced on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such empty channel search processing will be described in a more visually understandable manner.

  FIG. 218 (A) and FIG. 218 (B) to FIG. 221 (A) and FIG. 221 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a normal BGM playback request with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, normal BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00-01.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 02 to 03 in response to the request for playback of the sound effect of the first half notice_A whose priority is 05. Therefore, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for a button pressing sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 04 to 05 to the playback channels. Since there is a vacancy, playback of the button press sound is started in stereo using these playback channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice_B having a priority of 05 is generated, and plays channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06.about.07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a play request for a big hit definite sound with a priority of 20 is generated, and sets the playback channels 08 to 09 to be performed. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the big hit definite sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first notice_C having the priority of 05 is generated, and the reproduction channel 10 Since there is a vacancy in .about.11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10-11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing a reserved winning tone with a priority of 01 is generated, and sets the play channels 12 to 13 to the search. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to the retrieval channels 14-15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for reach BGM with priority 15 is generated, and playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 is generated, and there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03. Therefore, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the processing as described above, the production control program next, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), is triggered by the occurrence of a request to reproduce the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10, Since there is a free space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 1 with priority 25 is generated, and FIG. As shown, since there is a space in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request to reproduce the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 is generated, and plays channels 04 to 05 ( Since this corresponds to “non-reproduction (empty)” in the figure, there is an empty space, and the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for playing an accessory announcement sound with a priority of 10 is generated, and plays channels 12-13. Since there is a vacant space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12-13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel and triggers playback channels 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacant)” in the figure), the reproduction of the reserved winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproducing the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 is generated, but there is no empty channel. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “holding winning sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

  In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is searched. Will be played on the playback channel found in the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can an empty channel be effectively used as described above, but also each of the sounds scheduled to be output is made as much as possible using each channel including the empty channel. Since it becomes possible to reproduce, it is possible to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

  FIG. 226 (A) and FIG. 226 (B) to FIG. 227 (A) and FIG. 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a left symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the performance control program searches for an empty channel when a request to play a right symbol stop sound with a priority of 15 is generated, and free channels are created in the playback channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel triggered by a request to reproduce a medium symbol stop sound with a priority of 15, and plays channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel triggered by the occurrence of a big hit BGM playback request with a priority of 15, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the big hit BGM playback is started in stereo using these playback channels 00 to 01.

  When the sound replacement playback according to the priority order occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played back before the replacement in the playback channel after the playback is completed. Needless to say, it can be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed as an example using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels, but the present invention is not limited to this, You may make it perform sound control as follows by a combination.

  FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams showing examples of channel assignment variations in sound control based on the above-described two types of channel systems or combinations thereof.

  FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel assignment in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described so far as a comparative example with the embodiment described above, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described so far, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since sound control by these two channel assignments has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by an automatic channel system by assigning channels to the maximum number of playback channels using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). . FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels while using one automatic channel group, and sound control is performed for the some reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel assignment is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for a part of the playback channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (F) is a diagram showing the assignment of channels to the maximum number of playback channels using one automatic channel group to perform sound control by the automatic channel method, and the sound by the fixed channel method described above for some playback channels. Although the control is performed, it is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of reproduction channels is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 235 and subsequent drawings.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped, empty channels are allocated or output channels are replaced based on a pre-specified standard. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority order. Therefore, unlike conventional control methods in which sound is output by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so control related to sound output can be simplified and development efficiency can be improved. It becomes.

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC with a small number of channels, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as the automatic channel method, the sound allocation to each channel is dynamically changed so that a lot of sounds can be played back by effectively utilizing the empty channels. Since diversified gaming machines in recent years select and output hundreds or thousands of sounds, the management of sound sources may be complicated.

  In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a preliminary announcement effect redundantly or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically assigning a plurality of sounds and playback channels for each group, it is possible to reliably output the sound. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing the sound into types.

  Furthermore, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the effect sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority or the sound that is always output is output in the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes in accordance with the result of the start winning or change display is displayed. Output in automatic channel mode.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to effectively use empty channels by the automatic channel method and to prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Moreover, since it becomes possible to classify according to the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data becomes easy.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described below.

[15-1. Sound control with fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods]
In the present embodiment, unlike the example described above, the number of channels in sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes channels that reproduce sound using a fixed channel method and channels that reproduce sound using an automatic channel method. . In addition, channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, this will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Configuration of playback channel]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in the present embodiment. As described above, the sound source control of this embodiment uses 32 channels, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for channel numbers, “classification” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “purpose of use” of each channel. Note that “remarks” is added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is that the channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  Further, the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the channels of the automatic channel system with channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  A channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0”, and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound that is used by all manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is the sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is activated. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used for outputting BGM during a game or waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  In the present embodiment, not only stereo output but also a plurality of sounds are output at the same time, thereby improving the sound quality of BGM. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as will be described later, since BGM can be output also on channel 20 (and channel 21), four BGMs can be output simultaneously using a maximum of 8 channels (4 pairs). It has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. For this reason, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, the control can be simplified as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of an empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing sound output when the notice effect is executed. In the notice effect, the sound selected by lottery according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, etc. is output each time. As described above, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound output each time based on the predetermined condition.

  In this embodiment, unlike the example described above, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound during the notice effect is AUTO group 1.

  When a sound is output during the execution of the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, empty channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is an empty channel, setting is made so as to output the sound designated from the empty channel. On the other hand, when there is no empty channel, based on a predetermined condition, the used channel is released and a new sound is output, or the output of the designated sound is stopped. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. This is used when four sounds are superimposed and BGM is output, or when a specific performance sound is output. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect that is output by the automatic channel method.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, as in the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels for outputting a hold sound. The on-hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning are output from channels 24 to 29 as will be described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 play sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot determination even if there is no empty channel in channels 24 to 29, and draw the player's attention. Can do.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Also, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel system channel is assigned when output is continuously continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in an abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, the automatic channel method is applied to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., thereby preventing the sound from being output while there is an empty channel, and a channel with a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of empty channel search processing in the case of executing control for outputting sound according to the present embodiment. FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 230 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. Note that description of common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 230, it is determined whether or not there is an empty channel in the channel of the same group when the new sound is the automatic channel method in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B. That is, even if different groups of channels are available, if the same channel group is not available, the results of step S1108B and step S1120B are “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on the predetermined condition is stopped, and the new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, a channel selection condition for stopping sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. The production in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel for switching sound output (stopping or releasing sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the present embodiment. . As a specific selection condition, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound with higher importance is prioritized. The attributes include, as will be described later, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume, the amount of change in the sound being played back, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection, Includes remaining playback time. Each condition will be specifically described below.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A in FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. Thus, by selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of reproduction, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is terminated, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire performance. For example, an effect with a shorter playback time is selected because an effect with a higher expectation can be achieved with an effect with a longer playback time. On the other hand, the influence on the subsequently executed effects may be minimized by canceling the effects having a long playback time. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time without depending on the playback time from the start of playback.

  Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the playback time. In addition to this, for example, the sound output of a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progression ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being played. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output can be a highly important effect, and therefore, a channel with a small volume of sound being output is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume of sound being output may be preferentially selected and the player may be made aware that a new performance will be executed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being played back. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a sound to be faded in or faded out is output can be a more important effect, and a channel with a small amount of volume change is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel on the basis of a dynamic change of the sound image localization position (pan pot). For example, a channel with less change in the dynamic sound image localization position can be considered to be a more important performance that can produce a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the left and right sound output of a stereo speaker. Select with priority. On the other hand, it is possible to preferentially select a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) number is selected. At this time, the priority order may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect output with stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher expectation. On the other hand, since the monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of empty channels is not enough even if the channels that output the monaural sound are opened, a channel that outputs stereo sound is selected to increase the number of empty channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may be higher in importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment can be performed may be higher in importance.

  In addition to the above-described conditions, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. In addition, by assigning unique priorities to all sounds, the production data may be set so as not to have the same priorities.

  In the table shown in FIG. 231, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example. However, these conditions may be applied independently, or a plurality of conditions may be applied in combination. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example in which channel assignment control is performed based on priority assigned to newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an example of an effect for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the timing at which the sound effects are reproduced, and (B) shows the channel through which each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of sound effects in the example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display is started. At this time, when an instruction instruction for the effect button is displayed on the display screen and the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C is generated while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 233, the priority order of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority order of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority order of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the announcement effect with a low priority is executed repeatedly in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppressed volume value. Reduced.

  The contents of each notice will be described. For example, the first notice_A is an effect in which a character appears. A character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and a button press sound is reproduced when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), and the first half notice_B is started, and the effect from the channels 10 and 11 in stereo. Sound is output.

  In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and a sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily displayed. The sound is muted (blackout effect). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started from time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

  Thereafter, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced with the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output with the volume V_B. Also, since the priority order of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority order of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  Note that if the priority order of the notice effect that is executed later is lower than or the same as the priority order of the notice effect that is being executed, the volume does not have to be lowered, and even if there are few sound effects that are output at the same time It is not necessary to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen is darkened until time t5, and sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  In addition, the output of the effect sound effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B that are muted from time t3 is resumed at time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until time t4, but since t5> t4, reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Furthermore, the first half notice_C ends at time t8, and the first half of the change ends.

  Note that during the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (subvolume) for each channel may be set to 0, the main volume for controlling the volume of the overall effect sound effect is set to 0, and the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when outputting a new sound and reducing the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. Alternatively, the volume of the sound being played back on the same channel may be lowered in the channel method (fixed channel method, automatic channel method). Further, the volume of the sound being played back on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
By configuring as described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to preferentially output a sound having a high priority. Sounds with a high priority are, for example, sounds that are surely transmitted to players and game hall employees, such as notification sounds and warning sounds, and the expectation that the result of variable display is a big hit is high. Sound effects to increase the expectation of the game, or sound effects that have a high stage effect and can improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it becomes possible to easily manage production data related to production sound effects by classifying each channel used for sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, for example, by suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. Further, by making a stable game possible, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, channels of the automatic channel method are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) for outputting a sound effect of a notice effect and a group (AUTO group 2) for outputting a sound effect related to holding. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced simultaneously. In particular, during the first half of the change, there may be a case where output of the effect sound exceeding the allocated number of channels may be requested by executing a pre-reading notice of the pending change together with the change notice. In such a case, it is possible to maximize the fun of the game by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while replacing the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. .

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the effect of notifying the expectation level by changing the hold display of the variable display and accompanying the output of the effect sound effect can greatly increase the player's expectation and be executed reliably. . In this embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect relating to such a hold display (hold sound) from the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to reproduce more reliably independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the notice effect with variable display, since the number of effect sound effects that are output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2, the output of effect sound effects is stopped. The possibility of being reduced. Moreover, even if it is a case where it is canceled, the output of the effect sound with a low priority is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by reliably executing a highly effective effect that increases the player's expectation.

  In this embodiment, a channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and a channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As described above, the automatic channel method makes effective use of a finite number of channels by searching for available channels, and gives priority to output effects and high-priority sounds by setting priorities. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when a sound is continuously output as in BGM or when a sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a gaming machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of sound, each channel can be used effectively, and further appropriate control according to the sound output status can be performed. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is only necessary to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a designated channel is not searched without searching for an empty channel. The sound should be output directly to. On the other hand, as described above, in the automatic channel method, it is possible to make the best use of empty channels and to preferentially output a sound with a high effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume for each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Also, the effect being executed can be continued while the volume is lowered without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the previously executed effect with the lower priority is continuing even after the effect with the higher priority is completed. Moreover, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, it is possible to make the effect of the specific effect stand out. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation of production can be increased and the interest of a game can be improved.

[15-2. Modification of sound control with fixed channel method and automatic channel method]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset. In this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modification in which the number of channels set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Example of production]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be temporarily allocated. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, nine divisions), and different scenes are displayed on each divided screen. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of effects in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half of the fluctuation after the occurrence of reach.

  In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect (multi-screen effect) for displaying different scenes on each screen is executed. Then, any one scene is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously. The scene may be selected by lottery or selected by the player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, a channel for outputting BGM is reassigned, and the channel arrangement is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control in a modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration when a multi-screen effect is executed. The default configuration in FIG. 236 (A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 229 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the channel arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel system channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels adopting the automatic channel system assigned to the AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because even if a different notice effect is executed during execution of the multi-screen effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all BGM corresponding to each scene is reproduced while all scenes are displayed. At this time, if all BGMs are output at a normal volume, the sound volume becomes too high, and therefore the sound is output with the sound volume set lower than normal. When a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and playback of other BGMs is terminated. . When the player selects a scene, for example, the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the BGM volume of another scene may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Indicates.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 236 (B) at the timing when execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_2 is smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene for which the effect is to be continued is selected (time t13), the BGM volume corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the second half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

  Note that, after the end of the multi-screen effect, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channel may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in this modification, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half fluctuation.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the contents of the effect, it may be changed when the gaming state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a short time state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above-described configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed ch” in FIG. 228 (F)) that performs sound control by the fixed channel method and automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. 228 (F) “corresponding to“ variable AUTOch ”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. As a result, more notification sounds, BGM, or sound effects can be made reproducible depending on the situation. For example, in a situation where no game is played, more types of notification sounds are output. Flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects to be reproduced for production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control over sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, the example in which the channels are grouped and the sound to be output is managed by being associated with each group has been described. Also, if the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound that is sounding is stopped based on the predetermined condition and a new sound is output, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound being output belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which when a sound is newly assigned to a channel for output, control is performed such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel.

  In the state before the occurrence of reach after the start of the special symbol variation (during the first half variation), the output of the sound of the BGM being played and other effects is regulated (muted) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a representative effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after the elapse of a predetermined time after the output of the sound effect is restricted, the darkening of the screen is canceled, and the sound output by the BGM or other effects is resumed, whereby the newly output sound (the sound concerned) The effect including the output of the player is conspicuous and the player's attention can be drawn to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which assignment of a new sound to an empty channel is not performed, but the assignment of a channel from which sound effects are output is not canceled and a new sound is assigned. In this case, in order to return the output of BGM or the like to the state before regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when sounds from different groups are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped and a priority order is set for each group. A description will be given of a case in which sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a higher priority when a sound is output from a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group indicating the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into three groups of three.

  For each group, a group volume priority order and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In this embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an aspect in which the volume of another sound being played is changed when the sound is played on a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the other sound being reproduced. When “0” is set, control is performed to mute other sounds being reproduced. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the other sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. It should be noted that control may be performed so that the volume is set larger than usual by setting a numerical value of 100 or more.

  Further, each set value will be described with reference to FIG. 238. Also in this embodiment, channels of the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system are mixed as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or is always output is assigned. In the automatic channel, grouped effect sounds are assigned according to the type and importance of the production.

  In fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to “1”, which is the highest. Further, since “0” is set in the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced with the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced by the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or a game hall employee as shown as a reference reproduction sound. This may be an alarm sound for notifying that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or an alarm sound for clogging a ball or the like. That is, when a sound is output from the fixed ch1, because of an illegal act or a failure, the output of the effect sound is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority order is set to “4” which is the lowest in FIG. In addition, since “−1” is set in the suppression volume value, even if sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch 2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. Sound played on fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games, and in normal games, production effect sounds that draw the player's attention in response to the execution of special symbol variation display while BGM is being output, etc. Is output.

  In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in the reference playback sound. The big hit definite sound is a sound for notifying that the result of the variation display is a big hit at a predetermined timing such as at the time of starting winning a prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it has been determined that the game will shift to a high probability state. Can be made.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that is output in a silent state while suppressing the output of other effect sound effects when executing the blackout effect described above. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot sound and V winning sound are output in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is concentrated on the blackout effect by setting the sound effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout sound effect is output. In addition, after execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the change. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half change, and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half change. It may be.

  In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. In addition, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sounds are played in the AUTO group 2, all sounds being played in the groups whose priority is “4” or less are halved (50% Output). For example, the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has the group volume priority “4” as described above, so that the volume is halved and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at the normal volume. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half notice sound effect and a second half notice effect sound.

  In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Similarly to the case of AUTO group 2, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when sound is played back in AUTO group 3, a group whose priority is “3” or lower is being played back. All sounds are halved. For example, when a notice sound effect is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, it may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the original volume). May be.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of start winning, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button pressing sound for notifying that the effect button has been pressed, and the like. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same, the sound is output as it is with a normal volume. Therefore, even if the AUTO group 2 blackout effect is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, sounds belonging to the AUTO group 3 are output. For example, when a game ball enters a start winning opening, a pending winning sound is output even when a blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, the volume control procedure in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of group volume control processing for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to this embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control part steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control part power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a new sound reproduction request (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing from step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the channel group from the sound number of the sound for which reproduction has been requested, and the volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 238, the suppression volume value and group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1406 is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (step S1404). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order have been registered (the result of step S1404 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1406 are executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound with the highest priority currently being reproduced are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  The control for the sound being reproduced will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the sound parameter that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has not been registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. When the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues a new reproduction request. The group volume priority order of the sound is compared with the group volume priority order already stored in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The volume of the sound with the noise is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new playback. The requested sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Furthermore, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound that is already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the suppression volume value and group volume priority are It is determined whether or not the area has been registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority order are not already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this process ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the processing has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority order in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in time series, where (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 240 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output on the fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority “4” and a suppression volume value “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the normal BGM sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, sound output at the time of the winning winning is omitted), the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is “3”, and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is “No”). . Since no parameters were recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first half notice are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is the result). “Yes”). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested for new reproduction and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”). A predetermined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being played back and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half notice A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the normal BGM volume is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is “2”, and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is changed to the blackout effect. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

  Furthermore, since the group priority of the effect sound of the normal BGM and the first half notice A being played is lower than the group priority of the effect sound of the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). The blackout effect is muted because the suppression volume value is zero.

  Further, the second half notice B is started during execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority order of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority order of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second half notice B is started in a silenced state, Continue until is finished.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, a reserved winning sound is output (time t24). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority order is the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and output in a predetermined volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect is being executed, the pending winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the blackout effect parameter recorded in the work area is deleted (step S1422), and the restricted volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to predetermined volumes. Thereafter, the output of the sound of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect having a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect having a low group priority. Furthermore, volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that multiple performances are in progress at the same time. By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without impairing the effect.

  In addition, when a new high priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound during playback is suppressed, in the embodiment described above, the volume of the effect sound during playback is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. The volume of other effect sound is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out from the timing when the sound with high priority is output. Also good. In this case, the start value (the volume currently being played) and the time to reach the target value, the amount of change may be specified, or the target value based on the production contents such as the length of the reproduction time of the production effect sound. You may make it set the time to reach and the amount of change. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out. If the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target It is also possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched by setting a long time to reach the value.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output, such as a big hit confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time, It is possible to make the newly produced effect sound more prominent without destroying the game tempo.

  Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound is finished and the output of the other effect sound is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume during regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the normal BGM output is suppressed to 50% during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but when the normal BGM output is resumed, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume currently being reproduced. Then, the volume is controlled to 50%, and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, although this embodiment demonstrated the effect sound effect as an example, it can be applied similarly also in the case of an alarm sound or a notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound having a high importance (priority order) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only a production effect sound but also a notification sound having a relatively low importance (priority order) ( For example, the output of a ball clogging notification sound) may be regulated. On the other hand, if an illegal act is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, output of the notification sound is interrupted, and a high-priority (priority) notification sound (alarm) Sound) may be output with priority.

  Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set for the sound output time like the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or the notification is resolved. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is resolved, other notification sounds are output. . At this time, the next highest priority sound may be output to restrict the output of the remaining sound, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)
In the above, the control of the sound output redundantly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Next, a control example for controlling the sound volume based on the sound output time (long / short) will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table for each sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect indicating volume (volume) control for each total sound reproduction time (output time) in the present embodiment. For each sound effect, a used playback channel (ch), a total playback time, and a suppression volume value are set.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed ch 1, fixed ch 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

  The total playback time is the time from the start to stop of the sound effect output. When the total playback time is set to -1, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the sound effect to be output elsewhere. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total reproduction time is any other number (positive number), it is the reproduction time of the sound effect. Note that the unit of the total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

  Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of other sound effects that are output simultaneously. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound is continuously reproduced without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− Output (except for sound effects set to 1) is suppressed (mute). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. In the present embodiment as well, in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment, channels of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method are mixed, and the assigned sound effects are also the same. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch 1, when these sound effects are played back, All sounds are muted. The sound played on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying outside such as a player or an employee of a game hall, and is caused by an illegal act or occurrence of a malfunction. Cannot be suppressed, and output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  Since the total playback time is set to “0” and the suppression volume value is set to “−1”, the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in games.

  The sound effect assigned to AUTO group 1 has a total playback time set for each sound effect (play time) and a suppression volume value of “0”. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in production, and other sounds are muted and output alone. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, etc., as shown in FIG.

  The sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3 have the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value “50”. When a sound is reproduced, all other sound outputs being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). Thus, for example, as specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 that can make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM, for example, the first half notice sound effect or the second half notice effect Examples of specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning a prize, a hold changing sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and an effect button being pressed. For example, a button press sound for notification.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In this embodiment, the output of the sound effect reproduced in duplicate is controlled according to the sound effect playback time. FIG. 242A and FIG. 242B are flowcharts showing the procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure of sound effect output control in this embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for playing a new sound (step S1501A). When there is no new sound reproduction request (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing from step S1530A is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request for playing a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a identifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound that has been requested to be played, and The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, when control is not performed on the sound being reproduced, the processing from step S1506A is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when control is being performed on the sound being played back, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further controls the sound requested to be played back. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time of the sound requested to be played. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “No”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1”. (Step S1510A). When the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new The volume of the playback sound is prohibited from being suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Furthermore, the work number is overwritten with the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the sound suppression volume value for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is not “−1” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the total playback time of the sound held in the work area. It is determined whether “−1” or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). When the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

  When the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested for new playback is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested for new playback The volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area for all sounds being played (step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. The volume is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of step S1526A and step S1527A for all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing after step S1530A (step S1528A).

  When the volume control for the sound requested for new reproduction and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process has ended (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this process ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erasing is performed (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1533A and S1534A), and this process is terminated.

  The above is the processing for controlling the sound volume based on the total sound effect playback time in the present embodiment. Next, sound volume control will be specifically described along a time series. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume according to the present embodiment in time series. (A) shows the execution timing of the production, and (B) shows the volume of each production. FIG. 243 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and the normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output at fixed ch2, and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. Normal BGM is loop reproduction in which reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the special symbol variation display (dynamic display) is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on channels belonging to the AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is “No”).

  Further, since no parameters are registered in the work area at this time (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the sound number, total playback time, and suppression volume value of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Furthermore, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), the total reproduction time of the first half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and new The parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a reproduction request has been made has already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”, the result of step S1521A is “No”, and the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, since the normal BGM is being reproduced at this time and the volume has not been suppressed, the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), and the normal BGM volume is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value “50” of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the sound effect parameters of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total playback time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of Step S1504A is “Yes”), and the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is being output (Step S1506A). The result is “Yes”).

  Furthermore, the blackout effect sound effect requested for new reproduction has a total reproduction time of “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is “15000” (the result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is “50” and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect requested to be newly reproduced is “0” (step The result of S1521A is “Yes”), and the work number is overwritten with the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new playback request has been made, the suppression volume value “0”, and the total playback time “8000” (step S1522A).

  In addition, since the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total reproduction time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (black in the result of step S1523A is “Yes”). A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound effect (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and “0” for the sound effect volume of the blackout notice effect effect already recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the start winning opening during execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the reserved winning sound is received (time t33). The reserved winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time is “2000” and the suppression volume value is “50” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameter of the blackout effect sound effect is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is “0”, and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound requested to be newly reproduced is “50” (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total reproduction time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total reproduction time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the pending winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even when the output of the reserved winning sound is finished (time t34), the blackout effect sound is continuously output because the parameter of the blackout effect sound is recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so the blackout stored in the work area The parameter of the effect sound is deleted (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A in which the sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed at the time of reproducing the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects being played and to make a specific effect (for example, blackout effect) stand out, Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while a specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed If the output of the sound effect continues until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to make the execution of the specific effect stand out. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a new sound is generated when there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will deteriorate due to the appearance of the unintended sound output in the production design.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no channel space (the number of empty channels is 0), a preset value is set. Based on the priorities, the control of the sound output with lower importance is selectively discarded, thereby avoiding the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and reducing the entertainment interest. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to make technical ingenuity in the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) and how it is difficult to appear.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to enable more channel resources to be assigned to the effect sound (effect sound), various kinds of signals that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed. As for the notification sound, it is possible to adopt a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is adopted for outputting various kinds of notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) of a finite number of channels prepared by using various notification sounds excluding the production sound (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) as sound control by the fixed channel method. An example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the above-mentioned manner is shown. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. is doing. Here, for the convenience of explanation, only the definitions for the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of other notification sounds, effect sounds, and the like is omitted. In addition to the definition based on the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the production sound is defined based on the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 213 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X for output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having the low priority order to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. Will be.

  The left and right pan initial values represent sound image localization initial positions of left and right speakers, which are combinations of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output separately from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and for example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are set. The difference in volume output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the sound image localization of sounds by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting values of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is produced in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when “0x00” is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that only a pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the sound volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback for repeatedly playing the target sound (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure), or 1SHOT playback for playing the target sound once (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the figure). It represents whether or not. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each notification sound exemplified in FIG. 244, notification conditions, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition (release condition) where the notification is terminated for each notification sound type. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any notification sound, but this is used as much as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a measure for maintaining in the state and forcing a subsequent notification sound output.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state where there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed). This is to notify that there is. As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet has been detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed. As the notification time, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” is 60 seconds from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (corresponding to six notification sound repetitions). On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are continued until the release condition “re-power on” is satisfied. It has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility of a fraudulent act due to a dodging action is high). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) for notifying that the player is in the state) and the count sensor 4005 (first big prize opening sensor or second big size) despite not being in the big hit gaming state (state where the big prize opening is opened) Notification sound for notifying that a state in which detection by a winning prize sensor) has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening a large winning opening in a closed state and winning a game ball) is performed. 3 (Large winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has been performed, and the notification sound belonging to the first notification group These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “boost vibration detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , “Vibration detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as a notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of the occurrence, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps The execution of the lighting by is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “A boo-boo prize abnormality has been detected” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. A display (for example, “A big prize abnormality has been detected”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as notification time, While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed in 60 seconds (corresponding to six repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is detected, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. About lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). Moreover, about the notification sound used as the object of a loop process, the notification sound 1 called "boo boo" which plays the role which alert | reports that it belongs to the 1st notification group (state with the high possibility that the fraudulent act was performed). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any of 3 to 3 and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which of the notification contents is adopted. The warning sound is a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a severe unfair situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to do so.

  In other words, when reporting information belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to fraud It is important to speed up the initial action. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (the fraudulent acts are It is expected that the initial response of the hall side response to the fraudulent act will be expedited. In addition, a message sound for informing which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of “boo-boo”, or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side is performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility of fraudulent acts due to door opening). However, there is a possibility that the door may be opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side). As a notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds after the detection by the door frame opening switch 618 (corresponding to three repetitions of the notification sound). ), The display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closing detection (door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until “detection that the door frame 3 is closed)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), a state in which the main body frame opening switch 619 detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed by opening the main body frame, a notification sound 5 (frame opening) for notifying that there is a possibility that the main body frame is opened by an abnormality handling measure on the hall side) It is considered as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium possibility that some sort of fraud has been performed and this cannot be denied, and for notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, those notifications The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to a common one.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “the frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the body frame opening switch is used as the notification time. The loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) after the detection by 619 is ended, whereas the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 As for lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619. Until the detection of it) "is satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. About the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an aspect). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (injustice) A combination of sequential output with alarm sounds used in either of the notification sounds 4 and 5, such as “ping-pong ping-pong”, which plays a role of notifying that the possibility of the occurrence of the error is moderate) Yes.

  In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent acts) It is important to be able to perform abnormality handling on the hall side to a certain degree of speed. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for informing which notification type is output is output. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing appropriate games will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as “ping-pong ping-pong” follows the message sound, although it is an alarm sound different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so as to make it difficult for a person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. In the case of belonging to the third notification group, the lighting mode is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group so that it is difficult for the person who is playing an appropriate game to feel disgust. By performing notification by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality handling measures on the hall side will be accelerated to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side with respect to the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a in spite of the non-time-short state. Passing is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate manner (left-handed)) This is to be notified. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “please return to left-handed” )) Are executed. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please return to the left” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time-saving state. The detection is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) after the detection by the gate sensor 4003.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower tray 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (lower pan) The notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) for notifying that the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the ball is to be removed is provided to guide the game in order to properly advance the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is assumed that it belongs to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set in common. It is said.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “please remove the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, “please remove the ball on the lower plate”) and a loop process for repeatedly outputting an alarm sound such as “please remove the ball on the lower plate” as a notification time, and a game board Both the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are finished in 20 seconds (corresponding to repeated notification sounds for two times) from when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), when the detection is performed by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279, the sensor 2401, When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds has been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. Data is assigned to channel X, and a sound corresponding to that is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated for repeating the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silent data as a set. It has become. And, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are all configured to output silence data for the same time, the notification sounds 6 and 7 function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the hall side, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the portion of the silent data, not the portion of the message sound that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop processing while assigning it to the channel X.

  Incidentally, although there can be silence in the notification sounds (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, these are very short to make a “between”. It is clear that it is a time thing and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent part (third notification group) having a relatively long time and having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” or “ping-pong ping-pong” is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. Thus, it is possible to make a notification regarding the game guidance without feeling disgusted.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 244 and FIG. 245, for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, the priority order is set to be the same, but the priority order is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do it. In addition, loop playback in which the target sound is repeatedly played is adopted as the playback type setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1SHOT playback in which the target sound is played once may be adopted. . In addition, “boo-boo” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” that is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are connected with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data that combines the message sound and the alarm sound is created at the time of output. After that, it may be assigned to the channel.

  FIG. 246 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), if there is a magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 within the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating the presence of magnetic detection is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the state of the updated notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. Is detected, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and its notification mode is set. (In this case, the notification sound reproduction in the “loop of magnet detected”) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On this basis, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again as a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and display within the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetic detection” And lighting by various lamps arranged in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), at the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in the state of loop playback, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I won't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is output (reproduction state), when the timer (60 seconds) has not expired, a sound corresponding to vibration detection is set. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “Boom vibration detected”) Playback is to be executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. The light emission mode generation schedule data according to the above is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-described in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. In the lamp lighting, although the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection already in the set state will be reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be reflected in various types. It is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data contents. Even if it is reflected, there will be no change in lamp lighting.

  After this, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have elapsed from timing tα1, a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) being timed up. The loop process to be executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) At the timing tα3 that has been increased, the loop processing is terminated at a time when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, and when the notification sound is good.

  At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the rest By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boobo vibration” is assigned. ”Is detected” loop), the notification sound playback is executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) expires, “Boo-boo vibration is detected. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “boobing vibration”) in the notification sound such as “Done”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied (FIG. 246 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here “Boo-boo”) and the sixth message sound (here “magnetic detected”) have finished playing, the seventh alarm sound (here Then, it is possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if “boo-boo”) was reproduced. As a result, “Boo-boo magnetism was detected” and “Boo-boo vibration was detected” would be connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the alarm sound 1 ends with “Boo-boo magnet” and the alarm sound 2 starts with “Motion detected”, an unknown notification such as “Boo-boo magnet detected” The occurrence of content that may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the “boo-boo” alarm sound and ends and the message sound is Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is finished at a halfway timing and the reproduction is stopped. If it is a notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at halfway timing, you will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal. By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 within the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. When it is understood that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. Notification sound playback in the mode (here, “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started, and a timer (30 seconds) is set for timing the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open). .

  When the notification sound 5 (frame open) is assigned to the channel X, sound generation schedule data corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lamp lighting are also executed. The in-liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the release condition of the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “ And “lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group)” are executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tβ1 and the notification sound “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is used for a process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is understood that the door opening detection information is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side that has already been assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) in a state where the channel X is not assigned is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) ends, when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, it corresponds to the door open detection. Set the schedule data for sound generation, and assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after), but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the door opening appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes. When the lamp is lit, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the set state is reflected in each lamp emission, and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data contents. In any case, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After this, at timing tβ3 when 30 seconds have elapsed from timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is issued based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame opening). The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “The frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) for the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the time tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, By assigning the notification sound 4 (door opening) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Will open the notification sound in the “Ping-Pong” loop.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) times out, “door opens. It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing from being played back at a halfway timing (for example, timing such as “door is open”) of the notification sound such as “Ping Pong”.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (b)) When the third message sound (here “the frame is open”) and the third warning sound (here “ping-pong ping-pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, smooth notification sound switching can be realized as if "the door is open") has been reproduced. As a result, the situation is such that “the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize the notification contents in a tense situation. Generation | occurrence | production can be suppressed suitably.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at time tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at a halfway point, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 246 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is in spite of being in a non-time-saving state within the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right-handed detection in a non-short-time state), In the control MPU 1310a, information indicating that a right-handed detection has been detected in a non-time-short state is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the short time state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It becomes like this. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, When the right-handed detection information is detected, the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (not shown) for starting notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-handed”) and counting the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

  Regarding right-handed detection in a non-time-short state, in this embodiment, information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command. Only the information that the gate sensor 4003 has detected that the ball has passed is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 has been performed in a non-time-short state. And processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-short state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state is copied to various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). It becomes like this.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to right-handed detection in the non-time-short state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-described display in the liquid crystal is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes a notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up), which is a release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to run. In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group having a low possibility of fraud, importance is placed on avoiding the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set. It will never be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “please return to the left”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ2 when the notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in the state where the loop sound is being played back since 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tγ1. It is assumed that the full-bottom detection sensor 279 detects that the lower pan is full in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, information indicating that the lower pan full has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is detected. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the information (lower pan full tank detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received in the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the information on the detection of the lower pan full is included, the alarm sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is displayed on the channel in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full tank at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not subjected to the expansion process in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or just after that), a timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not been set yet) Second) is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, when the timer (20 seconds) has not timed up, the lower pan is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, and assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (in this case, “Pull the ball on the lower plate. The notification sound reproduction is executed in the “loop”.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), but for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower pan full. The schedule data is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is executed. Yes.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

  After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is issued based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) being up. The loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “Return to left-handed” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the time tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “please return to the left” has been reproduced twice.

  At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the full lower tray. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (ball guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here) Then, the notification sound reproduction in the “please remove the ball of the lower plate” loop is executed.

  In other words, at timing tγ2, while setting the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tray is not set, but is set when timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound “please remove the ball in the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head and the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , So that the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing of the notification sound such as “Please remove the ball from the lower plate” (for example, “Please remove the ball from the lower plate”) and will not be played back. Can be encouraged.

  According to such a configuration, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied (see FIG. 246 (c)) When the second message sound (here, “Return to the left”) is finished playing, the third message sound (here, “Remove the ball on the lower plate”) Smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced can be realized. As a result, “please return to the left” and “please pull out the ball on the lower plate” are connected at a strange place, and the occurrence of a situation where the notification content cannot be recognized is suitably suppressed. Will be able to.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, silence data of 5 seconds is sandwiched. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected by the absence of an alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized is preferable. It will be possible to avoid.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (a), when there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, With respect to processing according to magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), processing similar to that described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Accordingly, at timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), the timing t-2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed since the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as “Booming magnetism has been detected” is in a loop reproduction state. In FIG. 9, it is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even if door opening detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continued.

  In general, the lower priority processing is similar to the case where the same priority processing described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) is overlapped. Only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud has occurred. It can be said that it is hard to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group with a medium possibility of fraud”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at timing t-2, neither the alarm sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. Only set the flag according to the detection of door opening. Then, at timing t-3, based on the flag being set, a notification sound 4 (door opening) timer corresponding to the door opening detection and a sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are respectively obtained. As well as setting, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . Note that the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting in response to the detection of the door opening are started from the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, while the alarm sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” was detected during the loop playback, the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening, but “Boo-boo magnet was detected. "From the timing t-3 when the alarm sound loop playback ends, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played back for 30 seconds, and the" door is open ping-pong ping-pong " That is, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound is reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group. Although it is a content (here, a “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” loop), it is expected to promote recognition that the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound “Boo-boo magnet detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation The notification to which it belongs can be recognized at an early stage that it has been terminated. On the other hand, the alarm sound “ping-pong ping-pong” is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that it is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (b), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback. It is assumed that the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is detected in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. For this reason (see FIG. 244), even when right-handed detection in a non-short-time state occurs, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continued.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as the case where the processing of the same priority level described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) to (c) overlaps. Only the timer is set, and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is performed. No schedule data is set. At time tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is set, and the remaining time The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the “return to left-handed” loop).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “The door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the notification sound that does not include the warning sound “Please return to the left” at a good timing. Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound is output, the 5-second silence data is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding to that is output (silence output). It is like that. Therefore, even with such silence data, the type of notification sound that has been reproduced so far has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It becomes like this.

  FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 when no notification sound is output. As for the processing corresponding to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Is called. Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 at which the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has timed up. Then, the loop process will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are executed continuously until the door closing is detected as a door opening release condition.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at time tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, step S112 It is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed in the process of FIG. In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in either sound or lamp lighting. The output contents are not reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in either the sound or the lamp lighting, it has been set so far at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection at the timing tε2. Are kept in a set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has a higher priority than the respective data are respectively set. Put it in a state. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) corresponding to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output for any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tε2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (processing at the time of opening the door) does not perform any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “Boo-boost magnetism detected” is started, and a timer for notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-Bou magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as “boo-boo” is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly transmitted to the hall side. That is expected.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of processing when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ1 when no notification sound is output, right-handed detection in the non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed within the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that there is a right-handed detection in the non-time-short state (left-handed guidance processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 246 (c) is performed. Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “please return to the left” is started, and timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is continued.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at time tζ2 in which a notification sound such as “please return to the left-handed” is in a state where the loop sound is being reproduced since 20 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tζ1, It is assumed that the door opening detection is performed by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opening) according to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the detection of the door opening, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. In addition, since the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for each notification, priority is given during the execution of the notification with a low priority. Even in the case where a high-priority notification is generated, the in-liquid crystal display on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, with respect to the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a method for preventing the output contents from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-handed detection in the non-short-time state that has been set until then at the timing tζ2 A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state from the set state may be performed.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state but also the sound-generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state. The screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection as well as the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection having higher priority than this are maintained. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Thus, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is made so that the output contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, the low-priority processing in the execution state (left-handed guidance processing) is performed without any operation. The notification content can be changed based on the priority order between two different processes (left-hand guidance process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) As the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as “door is open ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp lighting are continuously performed until the door closing detection which is the release condition of the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the detection of door opening that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since the notification sound is first played from the message sound (the door is open), the person who is playing the appropriate game will not feel disgust, Notifications belonging to the second notification group are made by the alarm sound of “Ping-Pong”, and it is expected to promptly notify the hall side that it has been switched to a situation where there is a possibility of fraud. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 244 are to be output, various processes are performed by performing the above-described processes according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (channel saving type control structure). However, as described above, the notification sound belonging to the second notification group having a medium fraud possibility may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly reported only by the control based on the priority order.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraud but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraud. is there. In other words, if there is an abnormality detection that is likely to have been fraudulent, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state may be maintained due to the convenience of the hall (recovery of various errors, etc.). It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing depending on the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIG. 248 to FIG. 253, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priority order, the special condition is also taken into consideration to further improve the state of the gaming machine. Notification in a manner that enables appropriate expression is realized. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also included. Set state. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 is reached.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the magnetic detection in which the priority for notification is relatively high at the timing tα13 when the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of door opening is completed and the channel X is in an empty state. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door started from timing tα11, although the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, regarding allocation to various lamp operations. At timing tα13, the lamp emission mode is switched according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at timing tα13, sound generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to channel X, and screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to magnetism detection are also included. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. To be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection, the display and the emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the alarm sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is finished and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening to end. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet is instantaneously in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a cold state. Therefore, there is a concern that it is insufficient as a countermeasure only to perform the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, even if any countermeasure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is finished at the timing tα14, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of door opening” in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. Special processing to reassign to is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the end state is played back in a form connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, so that there is a great discomfort in the hall. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that “when the magnetic alarm is over, all of the alarm sound playback has been completed, and it is finally possible to make it inconspicuous that fraudulent acts have been performed.” Because the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that should have ended is played, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected to recognize that further fraudulent activities are too risky It becomes like this.

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, A process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound that is assigned to other channels and the other game sounds are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period for which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal It is a period in which the conditions of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced) are satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. A process for suppressing the volume of the production sound and the other game sounds (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process (a process for reducing the volume to a specific value) that suppresses the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the other game sounds is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period, the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the volume of the other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of reducing the value to a value lower than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be further accelerated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, when the door opening detection is finished at timing tα16, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening that was already in the finished state was played back in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, there was a possibility that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing of opening the door is terminated, tα16, the volume of the effect sound during the fluctuation of the symbol and the other game sounds may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 248, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, the in-liquid crystal display corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The start period and the end period of the lamp light emission in a mode corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door are all made different, although the start period is the same. As described above, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds by operating them so as to have different roles for the notification sound, display in liquid crystal, and lamp emission. However, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormal content, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening is completed, right-handed detection in a non-short-time state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at timing tα23. Assume the case. However, in this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 248, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-short state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, the suppression mode of the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the detection of door opening has ended, it is extremely malicious even if frame detection is detected rather than right-handed detection in a non-time-short state by the gate sensor 4003. Therefore, when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection already in the end state is not reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door opening detection is ended at the timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. There is no such thing as being played back in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 and opens it, and then detects the door opening. In response to the end of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when attempting to secretly place an improper purpose magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. The possibility of being in the situation entered is assumed. However, after timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is in a non-illegal state where the door frame 3 is closed and no magnetic detection occurs, the magnetic detection is performed in spite of being in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound is played sufficiently until the timing tα35 arrives, and it is considered that it plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is freed when the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cooled. Sometimes, a magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced, but without falling into such a situation, it is within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that a more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, the notification sound 1 A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed until 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed. Can be played continuously. In this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet has been detected” is continuously reproduced over a period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And finally, the loop processing is not finished at the timing when the notification sound such as “We detected boo-boo magnetism” is good, for example, the loop processing is finished at half-way timing such as “Detect boo-boo magnetism” As a result, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted attention by creating a sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 at which 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was made, the notification sound reproduction has already been reported for the notification time (30 seconds). The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection is set again, and special processing for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection”, and the midway such as “detecting the boo-boo magnetism”. It is played back in a form linked to “notification sound playback according to magnetism detection” in which the loop processing is terminated at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening that has already ended is increased, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall. It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is ended, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is completed, an attempt is made to secretly place an improper magnet inside the door frame 3 in a state where the warming is cold. Even though the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the magnetic anomaly notification sound is reproduced accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is greatly shaken without suffering from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility of more malicious fraud. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is reproduced in a manner further linked to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60 for notifying the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and counting the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) Second), and at a timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Boo-boost vibration has been detected” is not terminated at a good timing, for example, the loop processing is not completed at a halfway timing such as “Boo-boost vibration is detected”. Since the process will be terminated, it will be expected that everyone will be attracted with a great sense of incongruity in the hall.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) “for sound generation according to the door open detection” A special process is performed in which “schedule data” is set again and the notification sound is reassigned to channel X. In this case, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives by setting the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening). Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state is further connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection” connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. In addition to being played back at the same time, it is played back in a form linked to “playback of notification sound in response to vibration detection” at which the loop processing is terminated at an abrupt timing such as “detecting booby vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection already in the end state becomes high, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was reproduced in the middle, and appeared in the hall It will be expected that everyone's attention will be gathered with a greater sense of incongruity.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the detection of the opening of the frame is completed, not the door opening detection. Assumed.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the detection of the frame opening is a situation where there is a high possibility that some sort of fraud is being performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of fraud, the door frame 3 should be opened. Even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnets. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used for the ball side to eliminate the clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that has already been in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By reproducing in the form of “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hole and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also according to the magnetic detection. Each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) is also subjected to a special process for ending them.

  According to such a configuration, while performing a function against fraud appropriately, in the event of erroneous detection on the hall side, only the body frame 4 is closed, and notification processing corresponding to frame opening detection and magnetic detection ( Notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, and lamp) can all be terminated, so that it is expected to quickly maintain the atmosphere in the hall by speeding up the response on the hole side to false detection. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 253, the frame opening detection is also performed when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. Not only for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to detection of opening of the frame, but also for each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) according to magnetism detection You may make it perform the special process which complete | finishes.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. If it is determined that the setting value (player setting value) by the player is reduced with respect to the volume of the speaker, and if it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting of the speaker volume by the player Processing to increase the value (player set value) is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, a volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is output at the volume value after the decrease. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. It is possible to grasp how much the volume has been changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is lowered and when it is raised. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20” which is the same as the button press sound) referred to when there is no empty channel, and the output volume of the production sound ( The change in the volume of the audible sound can be transmitted more reliably.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period before the game is started (the demo display etc. Not only during the period that can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept, and more important effects appeared By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value flexibly at times, the game entertainment is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 in the situation in which channel assignments of various effect sounds are made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as magnetic anomaly or door opening, a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. At this time, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, and the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value can be executed. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound is assigned to a channel among a plurality of types of notification sounds, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Thus, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific notification sound is assigned to the channel at the normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-informing state, and there are no free channels to which no sound data is assigned before the end of channel assignment (notifying state) of a specific notification sound. Risk tends to be high. If there is no free channel to which no sound data is assigned before the end of the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound, any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, after that, even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data cannot be assigned to the channel and reproduced. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Concerning the concerns about the vacant channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel assignment of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production, so as to the notification process under the progress of production even if any channel method is adopted It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to ensure cost reduction and improvement in reliability required for the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the operation is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“Pi!” Or “Pi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin and the risk of vacant channels being lost is promoted.

  However, while the pachinko machine 1 is capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the notification process under the progress of the performance is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the notification process under the effect progress caused by the error detection or the notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) is executed, the sound volume is appropriately set according to the content of the effect progress. It is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the presentation during the period in which the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being performed, the output volume (possible) After changing the setting of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the sound volume to an appropriate value. However, in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Thus, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that the effect sound cannot be output properly because there are not enough empty channels even though the notification process under the effect progress is finally finished.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when an operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player can accept the change of the set value (player set value) of the sound itself. When the effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is finished, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the setting value (player setting value) in accordance with the progress of the presentation while the notification process under the progress of the presentation is being executed, a new operation can be performed. Even when the notification process under the effect progress is finished, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be changed at once. As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages as soon as the notification process under the progress of the production ends, and a situation occurs in which the empty channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  In addition, according to the said structure, when performing the batch change of the output volume to a player setting value, when the notification progress under effect progress is complete | finished, the game in the period when the notification processing under effect progress was performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, etc., the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output with the sound (for example, "BEE!") Of the special aspect different from.

  Furthermore, in order to more preferably resolve the shortage of empty channels when the notification progress under the effect progress is completed, the number of changes in the player setting value during the period during which the notification progress under the effect progress is being executed, or by the player Regardless of the number of operations or the like, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) at once as the notification process under the progress of production is finished. . According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) will be described.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the notification progressing progress notification process according to the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to explaining the processing from when the effect progress notification process is executed until the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively, the contents of the effect progress notification process will be described with reference to FIG. A brief explanation will be given. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are illustrated, and description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 254, in this example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the production sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) for the volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanation example, although the process relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, prize winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud. When the notification process regarding any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode that is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process regarding any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode on the higher suppression level until a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected. ) Is not terminated and this is continued.

  In this explanation example, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period of time during which the process of suppressing the volume of sound is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) according to abnormality detection is played to when it is terminated Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed, the degree of suppression The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode on the lower side. However, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, when the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is terminated in the first volume suppression mode that is the low suppression level.

  On the other hand, when the notification process related to any one of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 is performed. Therefore, no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound).

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. The output volume of the production sound in one suppression mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed are not necessarily different. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (volume of an audible sound). However, the end condition of the process to be suppressed is different in a case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to make it.

  FIG. 255 shows the contents of the processing related to volume adjustment that accompanies the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while no abnormality detection has occurred and the process related to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example, the player setting value is varied by “1” within a range of “1” to “5” by an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set as a player in a state where the above-described suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value is “3” out of “1” to “5” with respect to the volume of the production sound, and no notification flag is set. Assume that the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60”, which is 20 times that volume. Also, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and that the big hit determination has not been performed and is in a state of waiting for a start winning prize, an effect selection left button 331 is imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is displayed to indicate that the volume can be adjusted through these operations. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. The The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect that is a reach effect that is executed with the background image changed. In the case of the above, at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a later-described second volume value display OH2 may appear when the player performs an operation without displaying. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 255A, when an operation with the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by “1” each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by “20”. In addition, whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the current set values is “1” to “5” that is the range of the player set values is indicated by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255C) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume (audible sound volume) is reduced. The person set value remains “1” (the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if assigned to the channel, the volume is set to “ It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to “0”. The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment processing according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed), but also the variation of symbols corresponding to the jackpot determination after the game is started. Even during the period of execution, the player is allowed to accept. For example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration allows the setting change to be made possible.

  That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice in association with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times the volume. While the setting has been changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80”, which is the volume after the change, and in the second operation, The value has been changed from “4” to “5”, and the output volume of the production sound (audible sound volume) has been changed from “80” to “100”, which is 20 times that, Volume adjustment completed at “100”, the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the range of the player setting value is “1” to “5”. Thus, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by gauge display is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify the current set value for the player set value range of “1” to “5”, and even under a tense situation where a more important performance appears. The purpose is to prevent operation mistakes such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical value range of “1” to “5” is regularly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change in the player setting value. Is displayed to show the current player setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed when there is an operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C). The display is turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 is selected. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”). When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Accordingly, it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as an operation to be repeatedly performed on the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is “5” which is the maximum value. become.

  On the other hand, FIG. 256 shows that the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection occurs during the symbol change execution period and the process related to the notification sound is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 256 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (A). In this situation, when a start winning is generated and a jackpot determination is made, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong”, and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ “When the door is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation period, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is used. An effect progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 256 (A). The sound output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player setting value). The contents of the performance are developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation on the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such an effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume of the production sound that is lowered to the value (here, “10”) (the volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the setting value (player setting value) by the player regarding the volume Accepting the change of itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point It is as described above that they are collectively changed.

  That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state in which the sound volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the effect progress notification processing (output volume to a specific value) As shown in FIG. 256 (D), when the processing ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflecting all the operations up to that point is reflected. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation. However, the first specific value (here, “10”) should be changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  As described above, the notification process under the effect progress is completed by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the entertainment interests until then. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (“10” → “100”) in association with the completion of the notification process under the effect progress, the output volume changes. Regardless, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, although the notification process under the progress of the effect due to the error detection or the notification due to the convenience on the hall side (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate effect due to the lack of empty channels It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to enjoy the video.

  On the other hand, FIG. 257 shows the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection when the state detection generated in FIG. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding the volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). In this situation, when a start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result or fluctuation of the jackpot determination is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). Based on the type of pattern, the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern. In addition, while the decorative design SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the magnetic detection that belongs to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to this is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnet was detected” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  Also, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol variation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in accordance with this, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. Notification processing under the progress of production for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 257 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The production contents are developed under the volume value (in this case, mute).

  In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”). ") The output volume of the production sound that has been reduced to (the volume of the audible sound (mute) in this case) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value for the volume (player setting value) itself Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-described production progress notification process (process for reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is finished. As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the reach effect being executed in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Although the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is the original value (game) It can be seen that a predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) that is lower than 20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice, until the above-described effect progress notification process (the process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the volume of the effect sound Is not changed, and the content of the performance is advanced with the volume of the second specific value being maintained.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the second specified. Since the value (here “0”) is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5” even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself is changed from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating that the current setting value is “4” among the player setting value ranges “1” to “5” is indicated by a gauge display. This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed in the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted. In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current setting value has changed from “4” to “5” in the range of player setting values “1” to “5”, and the first volume value is also displayed. In the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from “4” to “5” and displayed.

  Incidentally, in this example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The notification process under the effect progress that suppresses this is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (in this case, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of magnetism detection while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH has returned to the state in which it is executed again. When the process of reducing the value to the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) in which all the operations up to that time are reflected in accordance with the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from “3” to “4” corresponding to the first operation and “5” corresponding to the second operation during the execution process of the effect progress notification process. Because of the change, the output volume (audible sound volume) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here “0”), and the second operation. However, the second specific value (here “0”) is changed to “100” reflecting all the operations up to that point.

  Note that when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. Yes. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. However, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, the production sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued in the notification process according to the door opening. It is supposed to be.

  In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the notification process under the effect progress is being executed. Therefore, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest until the notification progressing process is finished. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production, and the empty channel is insufficient or free due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. The occurrence of such a situation is preferably avoided.

  In addition, in this example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed in a lump (“0” → “100”) when the notification process under the effect progress due to the magnetic abnormality is terminated. In spite of the change in the volume, the channel assignment of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which it is not possible to enjoy an appropriate effect due to a lack of empty channels, even though the notification process under the effect progress due to notification due to erroneous detection has finally ended. The occurrence of this can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in Fig. 244, for the notification sound in response to the door opening such as "door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and the notification sound in response to magnetic anomaly such as "Boo-boo magnet was detected" Since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification process under the effect progress is not executed. Therefore, during the notification, the player setting is performed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, for these notification sounds 6 and 7, as shown in FIG. 244, since “1” (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the volume initial value, regardless of the player set value, It is always played back at the volume set at the initial value.

  Among the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the object of the volume adjustment by a player.

  In addition, for each process described in FIG. 256 and FIG. 257, state detection is performed not only during the period of symbol variation execution, but also before the symbol variation is started and over the start and end timing of symbol variation. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

  Also, in each process described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Whenever the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “Pi!”) Is played at the volume after the change.

  Moreover, although the process demonstrated in FIG. 256 and the process demonstrated in FIG. 257 differed in the production | presentation sound suppression aspect during the period when the production progress under notification process is performed, about this suppression aspect, it does not necessarily exist. The output sound volume (audible sound) of the production sound is suppressed in one mode between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the sound volume may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification process under the progress of production, the output volume of various game sounds (the volume of audible sounds) is suppressed. Among these game sounds, a game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds such as a sound (winning sound) played in response to winning a prize may be played with the initial value set volume without being affected by volume control. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state as the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) that is played in response to the winning of a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable to play the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the notification process under the effect progress is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no channel space by adopting the channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content etc. with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) It was proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make this difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation in which there is no vacancy in the channel to which the production effect sound (production sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the channel assignment of the production sound, various technical matters are performed at a stage before the situation where there is no vacant channel (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to give some ingenuity. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormality content only with a single channel with respect to various notification sounds is not necessarily employed. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. In addition, when the automatic channel method is employed, the above-described control based on the priority order may not necessarily be employed, and a process for discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Moreover, each example demonstrated below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an act of praying with the hand holding the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” has been performed. It can be detected by detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined value that does not indicate any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel over a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is performed in this way, even if special performance conditions such as a jackpot finalizing effect and a pre-reading effect are established as a result of the game ball being received at the specific winning opening, At this point, no special sound corresponding to the performance is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to end, an effect of assigning a special sound to the channel and reproducing it can be executed (post notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned to the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to a specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to winning.

  As for special sounds, for example, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound that is executed only when winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly anticipated effect mode (for example, in the effect determination based on the jackpot determination according to the winning (for example, Predictive announcement sound that is executed when a highly anticipated announcement effect that is performed during the execution of a reach production is selected, or when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by a prefetch judgment according to a prize It is possible to exemplify a pre-read notification sound or the like that is executed as an effect, but in essence, it is assigned to a channel and output when a special determination result is obtained by determination by a predetermined determination means according to winning Anything can be used.

  FIG. 258 shows that when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, a special sound (for example, a quine) corresponding to a so-called pre-reading effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state where the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a determination that a special sound is to be output (a determination that a pre-reading effect will be performed) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation process ensured in advance from time.

  First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation process, a general prefetch effect that is a well-known technique will be briefly described.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a winning is made to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the winning. , First and second start opening winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a start opening (first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second start opening winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S 5231 to S 5234), pre-reading processing for executing the pre-reading effect on the winning start opening side is also executed (FIG. 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure prefetching process, information required for determining whether or not the prefetching effect is executed and the contents of the effecting on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information relating to the winning for prefetching determination, symbol type for prefetching judgment) Information, information related to the variation pattern number for prefetch determination) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side suggests in advance the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol as described above. It is an effect to do. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining the presence / absence of prefetching and the contents of the presentation on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, The information is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information suggesting the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the determination process as to whether or not the big hit is won and the symbol variation is not digested, and information obtained from the prefetch command when they are put on hold ( Expectations on whether the jackpot determination that is put on hold will obtain a special result based on information related to the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side and information related to the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side) It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree in advance.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which a start winning has occurred, and performs control related to a hold display and a pre-reading effect according to the start winning in the situation. After that, by updating the special symbol processing flag based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned variation start processing, variation pattern setting processing, variation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment shown in FIG. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the pre-reading effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, a relatively low expectation blue color and a relatively high expectation red color). Whether to perform a specific pre-reading effect that suggests the prefetching expectation level depending on whether it is displayed, and a mode (for example, blue, red, or when it is determined not to perform the pre-reading effect) according to the result of the determination In the normal display mode), the hold display is performed. As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a pre-reading effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a pre-reading effect, when a hold display (including a jackpot confirmed hold display) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a quine) may be output in accordance with the pre-read execution. Many. However, since such special sounds (pre-reading effects) are played at game ball winning timings that occur irregularly, a game ball winning occurs at a timing when there is no vacant channel, and pre-fetching is determined. If there is a win, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the pre-reading determination is won and the hold display appears in a highly expected manner (blue or red). There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 wins the game ball and outputs the special sound (prefetch effect). Channels that can be assigned in advance from the time when the special sound is not output (more precisely, the determination that the special sound is output (the determination that the pre-reading effect is performed) has not yet been made). It is possible to execute channel reservation processing to be secured in

  For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations that are currently on hold (the number of holds) is 0, and a normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. If the player is in a situation where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable state, the player usually wins a game ball at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in order to increase the number of holds. A game (handle operation) is performed as described. As a result, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winnings, and the big hit determination is made. Each time the game is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effects according to winning is performed.

  Here, as the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, in the order of winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first winning (first hold), the second winning ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. When a pre-reading determination is won and a pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (e.g., a cure) is output at a timing at which the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when winning and pre-reading determination is performed). A hold display with a mark will appear.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is also, for example, in the order of winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first win (first hold), the second win ( Assuming that the second winning), the third winning (third holding), and the fourth winning (fourth holding) have occurred, processing relating to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the holding has occurred. However, when a pre-reading effect is performed after winning the pre-reading determination, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (winning timing), but this is kept waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, quine) is output after waiting for the channel to be channel-reserved to become available. In addition, about the hold display with a specific aspect, you may make it appear in synchronization with the timing which outputs a special sound (for example, a quine), or it may make it appear at the timing when the hold which wins prefetch determination occurred. Good. However, when a hold display having a specific mode is caused to appear at the timing when a hold that has been won for the prefetch determination occurs, a prefetch effect when the channel reservation process is executed and a time when the channel reservation process is not executed In any of the prefetch effects, it is desirable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held around the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is not shown. However, this is detected as an object, and this is used as a trigger to start channel reservation processing.

  For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player is holding his hand around the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). A process of assigning and reproducing “sound” to a predetermined channel is performed. For example, the countdown sound starts from “30” and ends when the countdown counts down to “0” every second. In addition, during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, an effect in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600.

  However, the “shrine torii (prayer mode background display)” in such a display area and the “countdown sound” in a predetermined channel hold the player in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. This can be triggered only by the trigger (detection by the sensor), and it is not related to the content of the performance (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the symbol variation being executed, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be appropriately changed to other contents. However, by performing such processing, the display and sound are predetermined for a predetermined time (30 seconds). The channel can be maintained in a usage state (in this case, a “countdown voice” usage state that does not indicate any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends for a predetermined channel is assigned (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed in this way, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first win (first hold), the second win (second hold), the third win (third hold), and the fourth win (fourth hold) occurred. Then, processing related to the pre-reading effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown audio” is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the determination result (prefetching win) that the prefetching effect is performed as a result of the determination according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a quine) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cuin) in the waiting state in this way is output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning time at timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated during the period from the start of the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) by the player's own intention until the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no winning, but a special determination result is not obtained even though a winning has occurred (the pre-reading effect was not won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown sound” ends is special Sound is not played.

  According to such a configuration, the player holds his hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation process) from his own intention to the end (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-fetching win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (cuein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” It is executed as a post-announcement effect that is output aiming at the timing when the channel is vacated and the channel is vacant. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of an empty channel even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. In addition, even if a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (cue) corresponding to this is generated at a timing when at least one channel is vacant. Since reproduction is aimed at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (cuein) is generated at timing tY12, and a special determination result (read-ahead) within a relatively long period of timing tY11 to tY12. It will be possible to easily recognize whether or not (winning) has been obtained.

  In addition, when outputting a special sound (cuein) as such a post notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at timing tY12 for reproduction. However, if the special sound (cuin) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown sound” has been assigned, the channel reservation processing and the post-announcement effect corresponding to it can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it can be realized, and it can be said that it is beneficial in that the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, for the prayer mode background display in which “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the “countdown audio” playback ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. Even after the end timing arrives, it is continuously displayed. This is based on the fact that a person who requests execution of such a channel reservation process tends to hold his hand again to generate the channel reservation process every time the number of holds decreases. It is considered that there is a benefit when holding your hand over the display of “Shrine Torii” as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of the announcement will increase) Yes, the prayer mode background display is continuously performed until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, release operation by a button). However, in actuality, even if “Shrine Torii” is displayed as a background image or “Shrine Torii” is not displayed as a background image, the player holds the hand When this is sometimes detected, only a process of maintaining a predetermined channel in an assigned state for a predetermined time is performed by a predetermined sound (countdown audio), and therefore the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of “countdown audio” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the notification sound is terminated.

  In addition, when the player holds his hand again during the period of the timing tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the reproduction time of the “countdown voice” until the predetermined time (30 seconds in this case) elapses from the detection again. May be extended so that a special sound corresponding to the pre-reading winning is outputted when the timing comes.

  In addition, such prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol variation is in the changing state but also when the symbol variation is not in the changing state. You may make it do. The specific action may be an action to be detected by a contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to an action to be detected by a non-contact type sensor.

  However, when a special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-announcement sound, the first time winning (first hold), the second time winning ( (2nd hold), 3rd win (3rd hold), 4th win (4th hold), it will be difficult to know which special decision result (prefetch win) was obtained, so prefetch win There is a concern about the decline in the entertainment interest of the game due to being suspended and not recognized. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (second hold) (3 hold), it is also possible to make it different depending on which hold of the fourth winning prize (fourth hold) wins. However, in this case, since the content changes from the sound (in this case “Cuin”) that is played in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not being executed, it is possible to know that the pre-reading is won. There is concern that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is given at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, and fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) is obtained, a process of varying the playback time of the special sound (herein “cuin”) starting from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, however, a special sound (herein, “cue”) is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, a case where a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) that is won at a relatively early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once. If a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is played twice. As a result, a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the third winning (third hold) winning at a relatively late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when a special sound (here “Cuin”) is played for 9 seconds, “Cuin” is 3 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that is won at a very late timing among timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since it takes 3 seconds to play “Cuin” once, when playing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced as many times as possible, and a sound of a form such as “Cuin / Cuin / Cuin / Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained between timings tY11 to tY12. It becomes possible to predict whether a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained by winning at any timing between tY11 and tY12. In this example, the shorter the playback time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special determination result (prefetching win) was obtained with the winning that occurred at an earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. The longer the playback time of the special sound from timing tY12 is, the longer the timing of tY11 to tY12 between timings tY11 to tY12 is indicated, the more special judgment result (prefetching winning) is obtained. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first winning is generated between timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the winning. However, in this case as well, depending on the timing at which the winning occurs. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special determination result is obtained in the first winning, the special sound is “Cuin” 1 regardless of the winning timing. Set the playback time for the first time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set as the playback time for the second time of “Cuin” regardless of the timing of the prize, and the special judgment is given in the third prize. If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of “Cuin” regardless of the winning timing. If the special result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four times of “Cuin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a pre-reading win is obtained, “cuein” is reproduced as a special sound. However, the first determination result (for example, with a relatively high degree of expectation) is determined by the pre-reading determination when winning. Depending on whether a low prefetching win) or a second determination result (for example, a prefetching win with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained, the playback content as a special sound may be changed. For example, when the first determination result (for example, prefetching with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination at the time of winning a prize, “Cuin” is played as a special sound, whereas the prefetching at the time of winning a prize is performed. If the second determination result (prefetching winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if “Dokan” is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction of whether or not the pre-reading win was obtained in the winning prize, the first determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively low expectation) and the second determination result (the pre-reading win with relatively high anticipation) as the pre-reading win It is also possible to predict which one has been obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “cuin” or “docan” as a special sound also in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, depending on the determination result.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first determination result (prefetching win with a relatively low expectation) in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second determination result (relatively high prefetching win) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that has been won at a very late timing. In this case, however, the special sound is reproduced in the “cuin” manner for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the “docan” manner for another 9 seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the first winning ( It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetch determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the prefetching was won in the prefetch determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that was won at a very late timing. It is possible to grasp. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching win with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the prefetch determination in the first winning (first hold) that was won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) is the second It is possible to predict that a determination result (prefetching with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when the first determination result (pre-fetching on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002, “cuin” is reproduced as a special sound. , “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound when the second determination result (prefetching win on the second special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in accordance with the winning at the second starting port 2004. . In this case, in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning at the second starting port 2004 is performed. It is desirable to reproduce “cuein” or “dokan” as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “cue” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing is a win to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first determination result (the first special figure side of the first special figure side) in the pre-reading determination corresponding to this It becomes possible to predict that the pre-reading win) was obtained. In addition, by confirming that the special sound playback time itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading win is also determined in the pre-reading determination in the fourth winning (fourth hold) which is won at a very late timing. Can be grasped. Furthermore, according to the fact that the first determination result (the pre-reading win on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination in the first winning (first hold) that is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been played in the “docan” mode after the one-time “cuein” played is finished, the fourth winning (fourth hold) is on the second start port 2004 side It is possible to predict that the second determination result (prefetching win on the side of the second special figure) has been obtained by the prefetch determination in accordance with this.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in a case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball is received at a specific winning opening while performing the channel reservation process The case where the pre-reading winning in the pre-reading effect is obtained is exemplified. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262 is basically a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received at a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that has the technical characteristics in itself, which can avoid the fact that a channel shortage occurs and cannot be output when a special sound is output when the judgment result is obtained Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the pre-reading win in the pre-reading effect.

[Channel usage restriction]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of empty channels is monitored while the game is progressing. The ratio of restricting the execution of processing related to output is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least some of the game sounds, the execution of processing related to the output is limited from the stage before the number of empty channels becomes zero, and the processing is executed as the number of empty channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of empty channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, whenever the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the hold state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), Determine the availability of the channel during the execution period. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the channel usage restriction rate (channel restriction level) is lowered until at least the relevant symbol variation to be judged is finished, and the channel availability is reduced. When there is no room in the situation, increase the rate at which channel usage is restricted (channel restriction level) at least until the relevant symbol variation, which is the subject of determination, is terminated, and limit channel limitations based on such symbol variation as one unit. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes zero during the execution period of the symbol variation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as channel restriction levels, and the ratio of restricting execution of processing related to game sound output increases as the level value increases.

  FIG. 263 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for such processing for setting the channel restriction level.

  Assume that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 within the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, as the processing in step S3101, the value of the previously set channel restriction level is reset. Note that the reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is finished.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the first half of the production pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the first half of the period (for example, the period from the start of the design fluctuation to the start of the reach production, Specify “X”, which is the number of empty channels (minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the channel is most empty within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when the design is stopped without starting reach production) To do. Further, as the processing of step S3103, based on the type of the latter half of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel within the latter half of the fluctuation period (for example, the period from the start of reach production to the stop of the fluctuation of symbols, etc.) “Y”, which is the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) based on the timing when the empty space becomes the smallest, is specified.

  However, when an effect pattern that stops the symbol without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol variation is selected, the symbol variation corresponding to the “second half of the variation” is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process of step S3103 itself, or the maximum number that can be set as the number of empty channels “Y” in the process of step S3103 (a number that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

  Then, in step S3104, “X” specified in step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in step S3103. Among these “X” and “Y”, On the basis of the value on the side where the minimum number of empty channels is smaller (the side where the number of empty channels is not sufficient), the channel restriction level is set until at least the relevant symbol variation to be determined is finished. As a result, the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level from the start to the end of the symbol variation to be determined. Therefore, it is expected that the number of vacant channels is hardly reduced to 0, and that it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to appearance of an unintended performance mode.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the “minimum free channel number” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half (step S3102) and the second half (step S3103). I am going to do that. This is because the production contents in the first half of the change (such as the period from the start of symbol change to the start of reach production) are shared by multiple production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). This is because it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary to specify the minimum number of free channels by specifying the minimum number of free channels in the first half of the fluctuation. .

  However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel restriction level need not be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of empty channels (the minimum number of empty channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channel is most empty during the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  In addition, the “minimum number of vacant channels” here is a sound automatically generated when the production pattern (production content) to be judged progresses (for symbol stop-related or big-hit determination according to BGM-related or big-hit determination It shows how many channels are left in an empty state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (such as a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a hold winning sound (first The production patterns (production contents) to be judged such as the sound associated with winning at the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004), the ordinary electric production sound (the sound accompanying the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), etc. are developed. Various kinds of sounds that are not necessarily executed simply by being included are not included as judgment targets.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing an example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level and the value of the channel restriction level set separately for the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3104. .

  As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, among the various game sounds, the block winning sound (the winning to the general winning opening) is first selected as the sound subject to channel use restriction. ), On-hold winning sound (sound associated with winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), general electric effect sound (sound accompanying effect according to the determination of the normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the period of symbol fluctuation when there is not enough room in the free channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds Channel usage restrictions may occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, the process of step S3104 sets the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation with an empty channel is performed, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) None of them are limited, and if there is a prize at the general prize opening during execution of the symbol variation, a block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and played, and the first start port 2002 or If there is a winning at the second starting port 2004, the reserved winning sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel and reproduced, and when an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, The electric sound is assigned to a predetermined vacant channel for playback, and when the volume is adjusted while the symbol variation is being executed, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is sent to the vacant channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 6 to 11, the process of step S3104 performs the channel restriction based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to “1”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which the pattern variation with a slight margin is executed in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Sound)), a channel use restriction (25% restriction) is generated for the block winning sound. In other words, in this case, when there is a winning in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning is paid out, but the block winning sound is set to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening, and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any one of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which there is a relatively small pattern change in the empty channel, and the four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are adjusted. The channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds of the block winning sound and the reserved winning sound among the completion sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above, when there is a winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during execution of the symbol variation, the quantity corresponding to the winning is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start opening winning prize processing are performed, the reserved winning sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning at the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

  On the other hand, when the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation where symbol variation is performed with no room in the empty channel, and four sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment complete) that are subject to channel use restriction The channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the restriction on the block winning sound described above and the restriction on the pending winning sound, even if an effect corresponding to the determination of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, Is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment is performed according to the operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, for the general electric effect sound and the volume adjustment completion sound, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data and do not play the normal electric effect sound or the volume adjustment completion sound itself. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of the empty channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Execution of related processing is restricted, and the percentage of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, so the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation is suitably suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, but other “sounds associated with winning a prize” "," Production sound related to normal determination ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". In other words, even if a restriction on channel use is generated during the execution of symbol variation, the effect on whether the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not limited, so it is executed appropriately. The decline in the entertainment interest when restricting the use of the channel is suppressed.

  In the above configuration, multiple types of game sounds that are candidates for restriction on channel use are prepared (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (as the minimum vacant channel number is smaller, the number of types of sounds subject to restriction on channel use is increased). However, a method of limiting the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of empty channels decreases. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating another example of the restriction content determined separately for the channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, depending on the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the channel is used. A limited lottery is held as to whether or not to apply a limit. However, here, a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) Etc.) is limited only to the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is set to 0/100, The restriction process related to channel use is not executed for a specific game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) to be restricted.

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is imposed in the restricted lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100, and when the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100, and the channel restriction level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the same probability is 100/100. In this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restricted lottery is obtained, the restriction process related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even in such a configuration, when the game is progressing and the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels to which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number, the number of free channels is reduced. Compared to the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of at least some of the game sounds is increased. In other words, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of available channels decreases, the occurrence of a situation where the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol variation is preferred. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, by checking whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, the minimum free channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. It becomes possible to estimate the possibility that there is no room in the number, and it is possible to prompt the game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) corresponding to the estimation.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265, after performing determination processing for various notice effects based on the effect pattern, the number of minimum vacant channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects, and the specified minimum vacancy is determined. Although the channel restriction level is set based on the number of channels, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the maximum number of sounds that can be assigned to a channel at the same time during the symbol variation period can be estimated in advance for each effect pattern. Keep it. Then, when the production pattern is determined, the channel restriction ratio may be increased as the channel shortage in which the production pattern is classified in advance is more likely to occur. That is, in this case, when a specific type of performance pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there are actually no button operations or many channels are not used without various winnings, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a surplus in the number of channels, there will be a situation in which the execution of processing related to game sound output may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation. It is extremely useful in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of the number of being zero, and even when such a process is executed, “the number of empty channels in the pattern fluctuation is relatively When the number is low, the rate at which execution of processing related to game sound output is restricted increases, and when the number of free channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively large, it is related to game sound output. The rate at which the execution of processing is restricted is low ", and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained because it is a phenomenon that is not particularly uncomfortable from the player side. become. Also, in this case, by checking whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause a shortage of channels.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction corresponding to the channel restriction level may be executed each time. Or, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific production mode is executed over a plurality of symbol variations, the channel restriction level remains unchanged at a specific value over a plurality of symbol variations, and the channel restriction level is set. Accordingly, channel restriction may be executed.

  By the way, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, the sound that is subject to restriction on channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1, Only “sounds related to winnings”, “production sounds related to normal judgment”, and “sounds related to volume adjustment” were adopted. However, since these sounds include those that occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize a restriction process that can secure an empty channel more effectively, It is desirable to adopt “effect sound” as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “effect sound related to the big hit determination”, there is a concern that the effect sound may not be reproduced, resulting in an effect lacking in excitement. In some cases, if the jackpot symbol is stopped, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 and other examples thereof, among the “effect sounds relating to the jackpot determination”, only the “effect relating to the symbol variation that is in the reserved state and will be digested in the future” If the channel usage of the sound is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation being executed Therefore, it is possible to adopt a production sound with a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is put on hold, the hold is usually performed. A determination process is performed as to whether or not a pre-reading effect is to be performed with respect to the jackpot determination made into a state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a pre-reading effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot determination that has been put on hold is to win the jackpot; Become.

  However, when the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about vacancy (such as when the minimum number of vacant channels is 0 or 1, symbol variation is being executed) In the case where “the effect sound corresponding to the effect relating to the symbol variation that will be digested in the future” is targeted, winning to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs and the jackpot determination corresponding to this is suspended. Even if it is in the state, the determination process for the pre-reading effect itself is not executed with respect to the jackpot determination put on hold, and both the pre-reading effect and the effect sound corresponding to this are not performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and anxiety occurs in the vacancy, the channel portion assigned to the production related to the future symbol variation that is not the symbol variation being executed is being executed. It is possible to supply effect sounds related to fluctuations in performance, so that effects with high occurrence frequency are restricted without any adverse effect on the effects related to the result of the ongoing symbol fluctuation. Will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only “the effect related to the future symbol fluctuation in the unexecuted state”, and even if the symbol fluctuation is subject to restriction, it will be restricted if it is suspended in the future. Since the effect during design change (the contents of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not made is always executed, the decrease in the game entertainment effect due to the effect being restricted is also suitably suppressed.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the effect sound is restricted (no sound output) among the effects (effect display, effect sound), the effect lacks excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and anxiety about the vacancy occurs, a prize is awarded and the jackpot determination is put on hold. Sometimes the judgment process for the pre-reading effect is not executed itself, and both the effect display related to the pre-reading effect and the effect sound are not performed, so a special result (pre-fetching win) cannot be obtained in the pre-reading judgment. It is only the same production situation as when it was played (the hold display when the pre-reading production is not executed), and it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the gaming interests due to the production execution lacking excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when the winning combination and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the determination process for the prefetch effect itself is not executed, and the effect display and effect regarding the prefetch effect are performed. I did not do both with the sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when “effect sound related to jackpot determination” is to be restricted, determination processing for prefetch effects is performed when winning, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during symbol variation arrives Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect, but restricts them, and when a specific timing arrives during the pattern change, only the effect display and the effect sound are limited to the effect display. This may be done by canceling. That is, in this case, an effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from the case where the “effect sound related to the big hit determination” is not the restriction target (normal time), and a special display is performed. Since the pre-reading effect will be executed after showing as if the result (pre-reading win) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the decline in the game entertainment effect by not outputting the production sound according to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

In addition, as a process related to future effects in situations where channel use is restricted, the judgment process for pre-read effects is performed when winning a prize, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during symbol variation has arrived Until it is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the pre-reading effect are not executed, and these are restricted, and when the specific timing comes during the pattern change, the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound A configuration in which only this restriction is canceled and this is performed is defined as the first restriction processing.
When the second restricted process is used, the game is advanced when the determination processing for the prefetch effect itself is not executed when winning and the effect display and the effect sound regarding the prefetch effect are not performed. In particular, when symbol variation is performed in which the number of empty channels with no sound assigned is less than a predetermined number, compared to when symbol variation in which the number of empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. The ratio of execution of either the first under-restricted process or the second under-restricted process is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first under-restricted process was performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted process is performed is “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the greater anxiety arises due to vacancy, it is not the first under-restricted process that restricts only the effect sound but restricts both the effect display and effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second under-restricted process increases, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more appropriately suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, A process of ending assignment of a specific game sound to a channel can be performed in a state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is finished in this way, it is possible to execute a process of increasing the volume of another game sound that is continuously assigned to the channel (channel special release process).

  According to such a configuration, the usage state is aimed at a timing in a situation where it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel assignment mode of the game sound (the state where the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppressed state)) The number of channels in the channel is reduced (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, in order to output important game sounds more reliably, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this, the number of channels in use is reduced. This makes it difficult to be aware of this, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the fact that specific game sounds are no longer output.

  FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect has been developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 The “normal BGM playback” sound corresponding to the playback is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 (in this case, stereo playback), and the sound corresponding to the performance A displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 is displayed. The “effect A playback” sound is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 and played (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in the reproduction state (normal BGM reproduction, production A reproduction), the “production A reproduction” sound is a stage where a predetermined production pattern is in the middle of the production. At timing tk13 (in the middle of symbol change execution), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback ends. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of production, the content of the production of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by ending the assignment of the production sound from the channel and quickly changing it to an empty channel. When progressing, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it becomes impossible to allocate and reproduce new sounds due to insufficient channels.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is in the stage of production (in the middle of the execution of symbol variation), when the production sound is unassigned from the channel and changed to an empty channel, There will be a decrease in the number of effect sounds in the playback state, and there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is reduced by that amount.

  Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 before the timing tk13 at which the playback ends. Over the period from “timing tk12” to the arrival of “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “playing effect B” according to the effect B displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 The playback channels 08 and 09 are assigned to be in a playback state (in this case, stereo playback). Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “production B reproduction” is in a reproduction state in this way, timing tk13 at which reproduction of “production A reproduction” ends. As the sound arrives, a process (volume suppression process) for reducing the volume is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the “effect B playback” are assigned to the channel.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of “effect B playback” in this example is output as an effect sound corresponding to a step effect whose effect contents can be developed up to four times. After the production contents have been developed three times (step 1, step 2 and step 3) in sequence, the production is executed as to whether or not the production contents are further developed according to step 4. Thus, a process of reducing the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to the channel. In addition, when this volume suppression process is finished and when the high expectation aspect that further develops to the effect contents according to step 4 appears when the volume is returned to the normal volume (relatively high expectation effect), While the specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content in step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the step does not develop into the effect content according to step 4 but the effect content according to step 3 When a low-expected production mode in which the production ends is produced (a production with a relatively low expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of “production B reproduction”.

  According to such a configuration, the effect design is made to arrive at the timing tk13 aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the “playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends, the number of channels in use has decreased (the “playback A playback” sound is in a non-playback state). It is possible to make it difficult to notice.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation (step) Within the period (period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops) that is connected to any of the production contents (the production whether or not to develop to step 4). A volume suppression process is executed, and the “production A playback” sound is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ends. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B ("production B playback" sound). Because the production A (the sound of “production A playback”) comes to an end, the volume of the production sound that was targeted for volume suppression, including the sound of “production B playback”, was then restored. Even if the sound of “production A playback” is not reproduced, the production content with relatively high expectation (production content developed into step 4) and the production content with relatively low expectation ( It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced by attracting interest to which of the production contents) that has not developed into step 4).

  In addition, in the volume suppression processing according to this illustrative example, the volume is lowered while each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” is assigned to the channel. The volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) is continuously played at the normal volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of effect sounds is reduced while the sound volume of some effect sounds (“normal BGM playback” sound) is being played normally without being suppressed, and thus the sound is discriminated. Since the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound comes to an end while the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is no longer reproduced, it can be made more difficult to notice. It becomes like this.

  Still further, in this example, the reproduction of the “effect A reproduction” sound is not finished immediately after the volume suppression process is performed on the plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed after the volume suppression process is started. The reproduction of the sound of “production A reproduction” is terminated after waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, there is a possibility that the player will be interested in the production sounds A and B in which the change of “volume reduction” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. Therefore, when the state that does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already faded. Therefore, the sound of “production A reproduction” is aimed at such timing. By finishing the reproduction of, the sound of “production A reproduction” can no longer be reproduced, making it even more difficult to notice.

  In particular, in this example, the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process is decreased in stages, and the reproduction of the “effect A playback” sound is ended after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it is possible to make it harder to notice when the sound of “production A reproduction” is not reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the reproduction of the “production B reproduction” sound is started in the state where the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the “effect B playback” sound is being played back, the playback of the “effect A playback” sound is started. May be terminated.

  Further, the effects A and B are not necessarily effects accompanied by the effect display in the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 at which the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced comes from the development of the variation pattern (production pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the reproduction of “production B reproduction” is started, and the sound of “production A reproduction” is reproduced while the sound of “production B reproduction” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, it is not always necessary to reduce the volume of the effect sound to be subjected to the volume suppression process in a stepwise manner. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned in stages. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a level lower than normal, it is difficult to notice that the reproduction of the “production A reproduction” sound has ended. Is possible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, a specific effect sound (here, “normal BGM playback” sound) according to the effect pattern is excluded from the volume suppression process, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the reproduction is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. Conversely, the sound of “production A reproduction” may be maintained without necessarily reducing the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is reduced. While the player is interested in the “production B playback” sound, the playback of the “production A playback” sound is terminated, and then the “production B playback” sound is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of the plurality of effect sounds that have been targeted for volume suppression is returned, the content of the effect with a relatively high expectation (step 4) The effect “playing effect A” is played back, attracting interest as to whether the content of the effect that develops to a higher level) or the content of the production with relatively low expectations (the effect that does not develop into step 4) appears. Can make it harder to notice Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” is performed (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the value is returned to the normal value), even if a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs in order to maintain the interest in the sound of “production B reproduction” more appropriately, It is desirable not to play the corresponding reserved winning sound. Further, even when a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetch determination when a winning at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 occurs, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetch effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 266, sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within a period in which the production sound is reduced in volume, and when the production period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in a state where the volume is reduced until then. In addition to this, the volume of the production sound that was being played was increased (returned to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel until the end of the period was added to the channel. You may make it newly allocate and reproduce | regenerate (reproduction | regeneration with the normal volume). According to such a configuration, when the volume is returned, it becomes more interesting whether or not the special effect sound is played back, and it is further noticed by the fact that the “play effect A playback” sound is not played back. Can be difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume recovery is reduced than before the volume reduction, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation is reduced. Is assigned to a channel and played back (played at normal volume), so that it is the same before or after the volume is restored, or more (2 or more performance sounds for the channel). It is also possible that the player remembers the feeling that the degree of expectation has been reduced, because it is possible to make it possible to use the channel (when newly assigned). It will be avoided. In this case, the special effect sound may or may not be played when the volume is restored, and it is suggested that the expectation is relatively high when the special effect sound is played. It is desirable to do.

  Note that when a special effect sound that was not assigned to a channel when the volume is restored is newly assigned to a channel for playback, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound for “effect A playback” It is desirable to assign a special performance sound to the. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is to be executed. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265 As the effect of “effect A” is adopted, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of vacant channels due to symbol variation is less than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in the situation where there is a margin in the number of empty channels so as not to make the user feel uneasy about the lack of channels, the “production A” can be continuously output without being terminated halfway. become.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. To perform the process. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, a state where the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to a predetermined channel and is output in a suppression mode or silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, A special effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special performance may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound according to the operation detection, although the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is set to a state of being output in a suppression mode or silence. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which channel usage is likely to be afforded. Therefore, providing an opportunity for the player to output special performance sound without anxiety such as “Maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output special performance sound”. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("BGM playback" sound) is assigned to a channel and is output in a suppressed manner or silence, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to a player (generating an effective period of production reception), a sound (“ It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate (generate a valid period for the production reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) to a state of being output in a suppressed manner or in silence.

  However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. This is undefined (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if an operation (production reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the “BGM playback” sound in advance so as to start playback of the sound in accordance with this indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when an operation is performed by the player, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”. It is also conceivable to perform the process of reproducing. However, the “BGM playback” sound is played in accordance with the contents of various effects and the timing of the symbol stop until the specific effect pattern is stopped after the symbol is stopped. When an operation (production reception) is performed at an indefinite time (depending on the player), when the operation (production reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. There is a concern that so-called sound misalignment will occur between the various effects and symbol stop timings thereafter, and the game entertainment will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data (BGM playback) sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, normal fluctuation sound data, sound data for the first half of the super reach production, sound data for the second half of the super reach production), etc. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. If assigned to a predetermined channel in a time-series manner, playback is started by being assigned to the predetermined channel from the timing before the effective period of effect reception within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. Thus, reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state for a predetermined channel over a long period until the timing after the above.

  In this regard, in a certain section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output in silence compared to other sections When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Time period) within a time series in which the valid period of the production reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the above-mentioned production reception occurring within the special period (partial section), the special period from the special period (partial section) The sound of “BGM playback” is displayed as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with the period after the (partial section) ends (other sections). Reproduction is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data of the first half of the super reach effect, The sound data of the second half of the reach production is assigned to the predetermined channels in sequence according to the time series defined by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and the volume is not adjusted from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppressed state or state (special period) output in silence”. In addition, when an operation by a player is accepted in the “suppressed state or state that is output silently (special period)” created in this way, it is specially performed in a non-suppressed manner by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “in a state of being output in suppression mode or silence (special period) regardless of the production reception” Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in such a way that the special effect sound is reproduced while being reproduced. Since the data content of other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is played back, it becomes possible to return the sound of “BGM playback” to the output in a non-suppressed mode secretly. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when the player receives an operation in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of “BGM playback” is output in silence, the special performance sound is not suppressed by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. However, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 267 is a time chart illustrating an example of an assignment state of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 267, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing ts11, the identification that the presentation is progressing on the game board side presentation display device 1600 The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the production pattern is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and is already played back (in this case, stereo playback). The sound of “BGM playback” is, for example, one sound data (one piece of data over the entire period of symbol variation from the start to the end of symbol variation when it is determined that a specific performance pattern is executed) (Sound material) may be reproduced based on sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period May be sequentially reproduced based on sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and 267 (b), one sound data ("BGM playback" sound) assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and in a playback state is special. Silent data content is set at timing ts12 before the timing ts13 when the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) for which an operation opportunity that causes the production of sound is given occurs. The playback state is set for a part of the section. As a result, without adjusting the volume from the initial value for the “BGM playback” sound, the sound can be output without sound while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content, and there seems to be room in channel usage. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of production reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides an opportunity for the player to output the special performance sound in a state where anxiety such as “Maybe the channel is not available and the special performance sound may not be output” is removed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example is a timing ts16 at which a partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is ended even when there is no operation by the player. At time ts15 before arriving, the period is ended so that the player's operation is not accepted for production. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing during the operation valid period, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state within a partial section set as silent data content. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by the player can be generated while an atmosphere is provided in which the use situation of the channel is likely to be sufficient. It should be noted that the operation effective period is ended not only when the player does not perform an operation but at the timing ts15, but also when the player receives an operation. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case of the operation by the player at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound “BGM playback” is assigned based on the acceptance of the effect. , 03 is assigned to a special effect sound for reproduction on channels 08, 09 different from.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is “SY”, and the operation effective period ends at this maximum time. When the time from the end of a section in which silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” to the end (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF” Even if an operation by the player is accepted at any timing of the above, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It is possible to output the “BGM playback” sound as a non-suppressed form in the form of being mixed into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time until the sound of “BGM playback” is output as a non-suppressed mode after the reproduction of the special effect sound is started according to the timing when the operation by the player is accepted, the time varies. The output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of “BGM playback” in a non-suppressing manner (the sound of “BGM playback” is restored in a non-suppressing manner by intermingling with the special effect sound) The period of time when it is difficult for the player to notice that the “BGM playback” sound is not restored as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted, and the user feels uncomfortable by returning after a predetermined time. It becomes difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound “BGM playback” is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the production sound for BGM playback, the sound “BGM playback” is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. While in the state, the reproduction of the special performance sound comes to an end.

  In the example described above, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). Although it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrows according to the timing of acceptance, the timing ts16 arrives when the special performance sound is in the playback state, regardless of which timing it falls into. It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM playback effect sound is set as the “BGM playback” sound is started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 267, “a sense of incongruity caused by returning after a predetermined time without returning the“ BGM playback ”sound as an unsuppressed mode when an operation by the player is accepted” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM playback in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section while paying attention to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, when the player's operation is accepted, the special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, the specific effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is used. The special effect sound may be generated based on the fact that the effect is accepted only when the condition is satisfied. Even if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at timing ts14, and when an operation by a player is accepted within the operation valid period, the production is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the BGM playback sound is secretly set to the playback state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is in the playback state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the example shown in FIG.

  However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than that when the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section in a state where the playback of the sound or the like is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing for returning the BGM playback sound to the playback state in the normal section is the playback of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound). It will be set so that it will arrive after ending. According to such a configuration, a silence period (according to the operation timing) from when a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound or the like) ends to when the BGM playback sound returns to the normal state playback state. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect with a high degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during the silent period, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.), the BGM playback sound is not restored to the playback state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a losing manner. Also good. In this case, at timing ts12, the assignment of the BGM playback sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be made an empty channel.

  In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM playback by performing a movable effect that operates a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect. This is desirable for secretly shifting the playback sound to the playback state in the normal section.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of “BGM playback” is output silently in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as it is output at. Here, examples of the suppressed mode include a mode of reducing the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, the “BGM playback” sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data itself. Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state of being output in a suppressed manner or silence (special period) simply by playing it. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period of silence in the sound data of “BGM playback” assigned to a predetermined channel. For example, at time ts12, the sound of “BGM playback” You may make it perform the volume adjustment which reduces a sound volume to a specific value (it may be mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is accepted at timing ts14, a process of increasing the sound volume of the “BGM playback” from the specific value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) is triggered by the acceptance of the effect. Do not. If the specific performance condition is satisfied, the volume of the “BGM playback” sound is increased from the specific value while the special performance sound is being played when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if a specific performance condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” is specified while a predetermined performance sound (failed performance sound, etc.) is being played, as in the above-described another example. A process of raising the value from the value (a process of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the sound volume of the “BGM playback” sound may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failed effect sound, etc.) (A process for returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (such as a failure effect sound) from a specific value. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process is made to make it difficult to assign a new sound to an empty channel over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16 at least. It is desirable to make it. Note that such a restriction process has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation being executed, such as a block winning tone, a pending winning tone, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment tone, etc. It is desirable that a specific game sound is a restriction target, and that the specific game sound that is the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel and is not reproduced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is transmitted on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. So that it is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a speech, etc.) and a timing ts12 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played, and BGM playback is performed. It is desirable that the sound is output in a suppressed manner or silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silence state. Note that the playback state of a specific effect sound is terminated before the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special performance sound is not output.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM playback is output from timing ts14 at which a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the production sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silenced state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM playback into these effect sounds, and the sound of BGM playback is usually changed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such an under-suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. “BGM playback sound” is used as the restriction target, and the smaller the number of symbols, the smaller the number of minimum vacant channels. You may make it make the ratio by which the said operation sound output process under suppression is performed high. According to such a configuration, the BGM playback sound is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a surplus in the number of empty channels so as not to feel uneasy that the special performance sound is not output due to a lack of channels. Will be able to.

[Channel assignment cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which no sound data is assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. Executable (channel assignment cancellation operation). In other words, in this case, an empty channel will be created in response to the player's operation. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite performance sound and special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment cancellation operation) in this example is not limited to “button operation”, and examples include an act of praying while holding the hand against the pachinko machine 1 with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. In short, it is based on a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect any state change that occurs when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) that is the detection target is performed. Any process may be used as long as it detects the sound assigned to the channel and removes the sound from the channel and ends the reproduction.

  FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when processing related to such channel assignment cancellation operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect has been developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 "BGM1 playback" sound (for example, effect sound effect played during the execution of the super reach effect) is assigned to the playback channels 00 and 01 and played (in this case, stereo playback), and The sound of “BGM2 playback” corresponding to the production mode (for example, one piece of music that is continuously played back across multiple variations in a short-time gaming state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback) ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds in the reproduction state (BGM1 reproduction, BGM2 reproduction), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). The channel assignment is forcibly terminated at the time when is detected, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, when the timing tw12 is reached, an effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is received. An allowable reception period can be generated up to timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) that is a detection target such as “operate a button and secure an empty channel” in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 An operation instruction image for prompting to perform is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection by a predetermined detection means is not performed. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed until the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed from the playback channels 02 and 03. Even after timing tw13 arrives, this is continuously reproduced. Further, at the timing tw13 when the acceptance period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed.

  Further, at timing tw13, processing is performed in which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproduced. In this example, since the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance without changing the reproduction channels 02 and 03 to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the empty channels are reserved. A predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) can be assigned to the channel and played back. However, if the other channels are not reserved in advance, there is no empty channel to which a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be reproduced and output. Concern will arise.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13 and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means. Show.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the playback channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is made. The sound “BGM2 playback” is removed. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance a free channel (playback channel 02, 03) that can function as a target for assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. The concern that the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) cannot be reproduced and output is resolved. In addition, the playback state of the sound “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated when detection by a predetermined detection means is performed, and in this case, the music or speech as the sound of “BGM2 playback” is exhausted to the end (or Since the playback ends at a halfway point without being played back, the player feels that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player. As a result, it becomes possible to easily wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is reproduced.

  It should be noted that at the timing tw12a when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (Operate the button and secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the reception of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is ended.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), at the timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as the empty channels, but other channels (reproduction channels 10, 11), a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to be reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definitive sound) is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and reproduced.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on detection by a predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in another channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and played back. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, the effect sound (here, different from the predetermined effect sound) Even if BGM2) is allocated, the allocation state is canceled at that time triggered by a specific action detection (channel allocation cancellation operation) such as a button operation, and therefore one channel (specific channel) is assigned. It is possible to play “BGM2 playback” sound and a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit definite sound) only by using them, and to effectively use a playback channel which is a limited resource. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), the predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing after the timing tw13. Then, a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit confirmation sound) may be reproduced.

  Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot definitive sound, an effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear, an effect sound that suggests that the player has lost the jackpot, and the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of the effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that the player has lost the jackpot, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no effect sound is output, and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, when a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is detected, the sound that ends channel assignment is not a sound that is output in any of a plurality of forms, but is output in only one form. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and does not cause any trouble. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), a reception period in which the reception of a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted is generated when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives. Not limited to. For example, at least during a period in which a specific sound as a target to be excluded from channel assignment is in a playback state, a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is allowed to be accepted, and the channel assignment of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. You may make it cancel. In this case, for example, a predetermined sound after the specific sound is put into the playback state, a predetermined timing at which a predetermined time elapses, and the state of the empty channel reserved in advance is maintained for a predetermined time, and then another sound is output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be allocated and played back.

  In addition, as a method for canceling channel assignment of a specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a method for making a channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel assignment of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) in the form of overwriting the same channel. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound when the specific action is accepted and forcibly ended, at an earlier stage than when the specific action is not forcibly ended.

  In addition, at least during the period from when the reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the empty channel created by the reception of the effect ends, a new sound In order to prevent the channel from being used unnecessarily, a specific game sound (for example, a winning sound, a hold-change sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. that is not related to the effect of whether the big hit symbol appears within the symbol variation) It is desirable not to output the pre-reading effect sound or the like.

  In addition, the specific sound to be forcibly terminated ("BGM2 playback" sound) is played as a non-loop effect sound such as music or speech that is played back only for a predetermined time without being looped. It is desirable to make it easier to remember that a free channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. .

[Abnormality notification while a performance according to a performance pattern is being performed]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that this occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal condition occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to this is not necessarily output, thereby accelerating the reduction of the risk that there will be no more free channels due to that much room. Is expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though it is at a timing at which the predetermined movable decoration body should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred”) and a game The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “abnormality occurred in the back movable effect unit 3200”) can be executed. In addition, it is desirable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. It may be an aspect that identifies which abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to which of the groups. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100 and the like) , The back-side movable effect unit 3200, the back-left movable effect unit 3300, the back-right movable effect unit 3400, the back-upper movable effect unit 3500, the back-under-movable effect unit 3700, etc.) The display at the time of abnormality in the display area is performed in such a manner that it can be specified which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refers to movable decorative bodies that have different drive sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and it is highly possible that there is no error on the part of the player. Therefore, if the notification process may be executed prominently during the period in which various games (such as symbol variations and jackpot games) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, It will have a negative impact on the player, and it is an amusement for the player. Not only that, the number of empty channels is not enough for the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, so the player may feel uneasy about not being able to output a new sound. There is concern about a decline in the entertainment interest.

  However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a side where it is difficult to assume a situation where the mobile decorative body suddenly fails when not operating at all. Then, when the movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all, it is abnormal when the movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. If there is a possibility that it is in a detected situation and the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not output in spite of being in such a situation, fraudulent acts may be promoted. If you are a big player, you may be concerned about the decline in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed and detected. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute a notification process (output of a notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) by the pachinko machine 1. However, during a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern (effect pattern)) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 When a movable body abnormality is detected while a movable decorative body is operated based on a performance pattern during a big hit game or the like, a notification process (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. Note that the external output of the information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (hall side notification) is not performed in an obvious manner and does not adversely affect the performance, and may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, even in a period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a situation in which a failure in the movable decorative body is unlikely to occur (by the peripheral control board 1510). Abnormality of moving object in process of moving movable ornament body by effect control (moving body driving process of moving movable ornament body based on variation pattern (effect pattern) or effect pattern during big hit game)) In the event that a failure occurs, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed. In the case of occurrence, the notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormal notification sound is not performed, so that the person who performs the illegal action is restrained from performing the illegal action. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control control of the effect sound for the channel, and the occurrence of the abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected. It is suppressed from being exerted. However, even if the stage timing for operating the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated as long as the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. Production is not executed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an action to move the movable decorative body to a specific position (origin position)) to restore the movable decorative body from the abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration body is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable decoration that operates the specific movable decoration body is performed, the specific movable decoration is started. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at an earlier stage, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect that operates the specific movable decorative body.

  It should be noted that the movable decorative object is identified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation (the movement to move to the specific position (origin position)) is performed on the movable decorative object. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the timing variation ti11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over a period up to timing ti14. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period for receiving the effect), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect (FIG. 269 (b)). (See FIG. 269 (a)). An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for reproduction.

  Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, since the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined based on the information whether a specific movable decorative body is at a specific position (original position). As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a manner defined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to a specific position (original position), and when driving for the specific movable decorative body is completed, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, If it is determined based on this information that the vehicle is returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process is terminated. However, when it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the specific position (original position) in the movable body driving process, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. Then, the movable body driving process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  With such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs the rendering operation from the timing ti13. In this example, the specific movable decorative body is applied to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period during which the rendering operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot work. In FIG. 269 (b), a dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is finished, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is the movable Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that it has occurred due to a failure of the decorative body, in this illustrative example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality has occurred. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the performance being executed.

  At timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position). In the case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, the normal movable effect can be executed. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery has failed. In this case, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the symbol variation after the next time, even when the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable ornament based on the effect pattern has arrived, The effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, especially when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body is activated (emitted) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected to curb the entertainment interest.

  As described above, when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same variation pattern (specific production pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When it occurs at a timing different from when a specific movable decorative body is operated by effect control (effect pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 270 shows that the movable body abnormality is not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the big hit determination in the period in which the pattern variation is performed, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows those examples about the allocation condition of each channel when detected, and the condition by the side of a movable decoration body.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern whose effect has been developed on the display device 1600 is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  As described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum, and the timing ti14. Can occur over time. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation effective period (effective period of presentation reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body is moved by some external force at the timing ti <b> 11 a before the timing ti <b> 12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation (the operation does not operate based on the rendering pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). In FIG. 270 (b), the dotted range indicates a period in which a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, at the timing ti11b, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed.

  At timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history will be erased, and after that, it will be possible to execute a normal movable effect without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period of the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation effective period, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state, and therefore the rendering operation of the specific movable decorative body is The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, causing an abnormality. The various light emitting units including the lamps mounted on the movable decorative body only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period of the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is determined by the restoration process. If it is eliminated, the usual production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) including the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is executed. In this example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is being performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including a specific movable decorative body are in a state where restoration processing is being executed, even if an operation by the player is accepted within a period from timing ti13a to timing ti14, a specific operation is performed. Although the effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery has failed. is doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoration operation is not performed and the game and performance are developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  In addition, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body although it is not the timing at which the specific movable decorative body is operated based on the performance pattern according to the result of the big hit determination It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality is detected when a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) by a fraudulent action such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body has not been resolved by some external force even in the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, various effect sounds according to a specific effect pattern are assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect contents, and the abnormality notification sound is reproduced over a predetermined time in the reproduction channels 00 and 01. Will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ The occurrence of an abnormality in the inside movable effect unit 3200 ”is executed. In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, a part of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are in a normal mode in accordance with the progress of the production contents. The light will be emitted.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol variation, the period during which the control related to the rendering operation of the movable decorative body based on at least the variation pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the operation, it is unlikely that an illegal act has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, when the abnormality of the movable body suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern is not executed, it is highly likely that an illegal act is performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it is more important to output the notification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, but the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a when the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. It was decided to do. However, at timing ti11b, a movable body abnormality is detected despite the fact that a specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the production pattern, and even this alone causes fraudulent acts such as a sticking action or a wire approach. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility of being interrupted, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed.

  In short, regarding the notification process in response to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, “the specific movable decoration body is in spite of the fact that the specific movable decoration body is not performing the production operation based on the production pattern. "A failure has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the rendering operation based on the performance pattern". It is important not to be executed as a sufficient condition, so that it is possible for a person who performs a fraudulent act to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed, while being executed for a legitimate player It is expected to avoid having an adverse effect on the production. The condition for performing the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body within the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: “The specific movable decoration is not performed by the specific movable decoration body based on the production pattern. For example, “failure in restoration processing performed in response to the occurrence of an abnormality” or “occurring when the occurrence of an abnormality is in a specific situation” It is possible to adopt these as further conditions.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the specific movable decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated according to the production pattern, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger. It may not be determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body within the process of operating the decorative body in accordance with the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decoration body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed. In other words, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at timing ti17, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body. In the example of FIG. 270, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body at the timing ti11b, thereby detecting the abnormality of the movable body.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the specific movable decorative body is illustrated as performing the stage operation at the timing when the player operates. It is also possible to perform a production operation.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the case where the abnormality notification is not executed on the sufficient condition that "the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing the production operation based on the production pattern", after that, However, even if the abnormal state is not solved and remains, it is desirable not to notify the abnormality as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game or performance be developed while maintaining the abnormal state without causing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the winning, there is no vacant channel to which sound data is assigned In a situation where the number of empty channels is 0, a special sound corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered due to the fact that it cannot be output. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies with different drive sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality (Sound data) is assigned to a channel and played back, so that the number of channels used is not increased unnecessarily even when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. It was. In addition, the movable body abnormality means that the movable body is in a state where it cannot operate properly, and is the same as that exemplified in “abnormality notification while an effect according to an effect pattern is performed”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable ornaments mounted on gaming machines has increased, and the game can be obtained simply by associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable ornaments. It is becoming difficult to properly inform the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and abnormality notification sounds that differ depending on which of the groups the movable decorative bodies have an abnormality are made to channels. By assigning and reproducing, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification while an effect corresponding to the effect pattern is being performed” (see FIG. 269 and FIG. 270). Is performed. Therefore, even in this example, even when various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) are generated and detected, notification processing (output of notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (symbol variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are being executed, a process (variation pattern) for operating the movable decorative body by at least the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510. When a movable body abnormality is detected while the (moving body driving process for operating the movable decorative body based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is being performed, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 ( Notification sound output, abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

  However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, only one abnormal sound data assigned to a channel and put into a reproduction state is associated with a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, a process for performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to promote a reduction in the risk that a channel will be freed up and there will be no free channels. As a result, it becomes possible to quickly return the abnormalities of each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel use time by improving the efficiency of the processing when the abnormalities occur. . Note that the contents of the restoration process and the processes at the time of success and failure are examples of the above-mentioned “notification of abnormality during the production according to the production pattern” (see FIGS. 269 and 270). ).

  Here, as an aspect which divides a some movable decoration body into two or more groups, it is calculated | required that it is an aspect suitable for alerting | reporting the state as the said pachinko machine 1, for example, it is provided in the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable ornaments (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back Right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. Depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, it can be transmitted to the hall side whether or not an abnormality has occurred, or whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the panel side that is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a higher possibility that fraudulent acts are performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by performing the notification sound output based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the abnormality of the movable body is not noticed by the player side depending on the type (unpleasant feeling). Without any change), the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of high possibility of fraud can be secretly transmitted to the hall side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment as well, in the event that a movable body abnormality has occurred, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this example, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the “notification by display” is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of abnormality than the case of the “notification by sound”, but is superior in the information transmission function for informing the details of the abnormality in more detail. Have the same properties. Therefore, in the “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in such a manner that the information transmission function is more effectively performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” using the difference in properties. In particular, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the groups thus uniquely divided belongs to the movable decorative body.

  That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on whether there are any abnormalities in the movable body, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same even though the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same. Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ”,“ a second notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are the same even when any abnormality of the movable body occurs. ”And“ a third notification mode in which an abnormality notification sound to be reproduced and a notification content to be displayed are different from each other even when any movable body abnormality occurs ”occur. It becomes this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 271 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 271 (a), the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the timing change tj11 during the period when the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed. The sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to the specific performance pattern in which the performance has been advanced is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (in this case, stereo playback).

  In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur over the period up to the timing tj15. And if operation (for example, operation button 410) by a player is detected within this period (period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) will be ended by using this as an opportunity. Production control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation effective period (effective period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. Alternatively, the presentation control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that an operation by the player is accepted at timing tj14. Therefore, at timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, the movable body driving process is executed to perform a movable effect that causes the specific movable decorative body to perform an effect. An effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are moved by some external force at a timing tj11 (operates without being based on the effect pattern), and the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform an effect operation. A case is assumed where abnormalities of these movable bodies are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 271 (b) and FIG. 272 (b), which will be described later, a dotted range indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration process is performed to perform a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred. Accordingly, in relation to this restoration process, even if an operation by the player is received at stage tj14, a specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. The movable body abnormality is detected with respect to the frame side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed so that the operation periods do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. On the other hand, the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated. Therefore, the restoration process is simultaneously performed at the timing tj12, so that the rapid recovery of each movable decorative body can be performed.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed over a long period from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, those restoration processes can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the operation is effective. Regardless of the timing at which the stage is received (effective period of the stage reception), the stage is processed so that the stage operation is not performed when the stage is received.

  In other words, in this case, if there is a production reception within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being performed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative body cannot be produced using this as a trigger. Even if a production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is completed, it is possible to perform another operation with another board-side movable ornament that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process. The concern of interfering arises. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any one of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any one within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if an operation by the player is accepted at the timing, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed on the channel. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In other words, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, after all the restoration processing has been completed (all restoration processing has been completed successfully), Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is allowed.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Processing is performed so that whether or not to perform a production operation triggered by this when the production is accepted depends on when the production is accepted within the operation valid period (effective period of the production acceptance) It becomes.

  That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the rendering operation after the restoration process is completed (the restoration process is successful). Inevitably arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are in the process of restoration, there is no concern of interfering with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, any operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, a specific movable decorative body effect operation is performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is applied to the channel. In the light emission mode when various movable light emitting units perform the movable effect, including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred, the sound produced when the effect is performed is played back. Light is emitted.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing when the restoration process is ended. Therefore, when an operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Then, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process), the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even if it is in progress, normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission) is also included, including production operations of specific movable ornaments. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not arrive after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation effective period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. Effect sound (operation effect sound) is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification process according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are provided when a notification sound is notified in accordance with the abnormality of the movable body. , C, and a plurality of frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F provided on the door frame 3 side, and the abnormal movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there are any.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot normally occur as a proper game is progressing, and cannot occur as a result of fraud. There is a high probability that all movable decorations have been tampered with manually, and so on. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself can be troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it was detected that the movable body abnormality occurred for the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, respectively. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration process on the board-side movable decorative body side and the restoration process on the frame-side movable decorative body side are simultaneously started as described above, whereas the notification sound output is movable on the frame side. The common alarm sound for the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, but the common alarm sound for the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is assigned to the channel. The output is stopped.

  That is, the time for which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common on the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, among the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the “board-side movable decorative body A, By assigning only the panel side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the “board side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the panel side movable decorative body A, B, and C side” is generated. The restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended while the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are being reproduced. Since the output request of the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F” after the output of “sound” is ended, it is avoided. The notification process can be ended in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the panel side movable decorative body A, B, C and the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F are being restored. The “board side common decorative alarm sound corresponding to the board side movable decorative body A, B, C side” is assigned to the channel and reproduced over the period up to the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B, C are finished. Thus, the “frame side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame side movable decorative body D, E, F side” is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the assignment control of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification mode by display in the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above “notification by sound” is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the notification sound described above. The above-mentioned grouping is performed in a mode different from the above, in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and a different display is performed depending on which of the groups uniquely divided in this way is abnormal. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body E corresponds to this. The “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” remains maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body ends first, depending on the execution situation related to the restoration process of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, The “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed later may be terminated first.

  According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. The movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process for these movable decorative bodies is executed simultaneously. As a result, for a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state, the total time required for the restoration process can be made shorter than that of the movable decoration body that corresponds to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound of the notification sound is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing corresponding to each group is performed simultaneously. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side and (The frame side), the restoration process can be executed independently for each group, and a plurality of movable decorative bodies (DF) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example) Among them, if it is selected as a movable decorative body that can be operated without being affected by each other's operation state and all can be restored simultaneously, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the functions and effects described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body be made at a predetermined timing or every predetermined time. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decoration body to be detected. For example, when an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decoration body, Other methods such as performing detection may be employed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the specific movable decorative body is exemplified as the stage operation at the timing when the player operates, but the specific movable decorative body is performed at the specific timing determined by the stage pattern. It may be allowed.

  Of the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and reproduced for a predetermined time. During this reproduction period, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to a specific value (0). You may make it perform the process to reduce.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, a movable body abnormality occurred in each of the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F within the period during which the symbol variation was performed. Although the description has been made assuming that the situation is assumed, the symbol variation is not necessarily executed. That is, during the execution of the big hit game or when the special symbol game is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board side movable ornaments A, B, C and the frame side movable ornament D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, restoration processing is performed so that the operation periods of all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side do not overlap each other based on a predetermined order. It was. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even if they are operated simultaneously are included in the panel-side movable decorative body, the panel-side movable decorative bodies are arranged based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  In the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether a movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are detected. Although it is assumed that the timing at which the determination is made is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F. Even when the determination is made, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is completed at an earlier timing than the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the “common alarm sound on the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C” ends, the “frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It is possible to avoid a request for output of the corresponding frame side common abnormality notification sound.

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, the movable body abnormality has occurred in the board side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. You may make it be the processing structure determined to have carried out. However, in this case, when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are performed. And wait until it is determined that the movable body abnormality has occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, and then correspond to the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C side. While the notification process is performed, it is desirable to perform the restoration process for the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In addition, as a result of waiting for the determination process whether the movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the panel side movable decorative bodies A, B, C. In this case, the restoring process of the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed while the notification process corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[Automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, an operation effect may be performed a plurality of times according to each operation by prompting a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410). However, in recent years, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of such multiple operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Auto multiple operation function (automatic) that makes it possible to show the appearance when multiple operations are performed simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time. Equipped with a continuous hitting function).

  In such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as so-called long press is performed. ) Is a player who is not good at operating multiple times (slow hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest of a player or the like, or to encourage the use of the function by various players. However, when the player is in the operation state, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) when the effect is accepted every time a relatively short time elapses, it is the same for the player. Even if you intend to perform an operation with a single press, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained with a single press) may become slightly longer or shorter, resulting in multiple receptions. Occurrence (multiple operation sounds are generated), production reception occurs only once (one operation sound is generated), and the number of production receptions for a single operation is stable There is a concern that the amusement interest will decrease due to the uncomfortable feeling caused by not doing it.

  In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous hitting function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case of an operation by a single press, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) due to the reception of the effect is made. Etc.) only once. After the first production change (for example, operation sound) is generated, no new production reception (operation sound) is generated until a predetermined interval time longer than the predetermined short time elapses. Then, after waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, an effect change (operation sound) when an effect is accepted every time a predetermined short time elapses is repeatedly generated. In other words, in this case, since there is a time margin between the time when the first production reception (operation sound) is generated and the time when the second production reception (operation sound) is generated, a single press is performed. Whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time just by performing an operation by so-called long press while avoiding the uncomfortable feeling due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by It is possible to produce a presentation that looks like this.

  However, from the player's side, this gives itself a time allowance between the time when the first effect is received (operation sound) and the time when the second effect is received (operation sound). It is useless in operation production, and the number of production receptions (operation sounds) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when performing operations by so-called long presses) There is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced due to the slow feeling.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation with respect to the operation means is long. As in the case of operation (long press, etc.), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, a feeling as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. The player can be made to remember (such as feeling as if fast hits are being made). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the performance when the operation is performed by a single press (whether it is a single production change or multiple production changes). Even if it exists, it becomes possible to maintain suitably the frequency | count of occurrence of the production change (for example, operation sound etc.) per unit time.

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. Also, in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the performance in response to the operation on the button 410, The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated in the form following the white specific sound output in the figure when there is no production acceptance when the operation button 410 is not operated. It is. The volume and tone color of these specific sounds are not different from each other and are preferably the same.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single operation). In this case, it is assumed that one operation is performed. Therefore, at timing tx11, detection (determination) that an operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed. A process of starting output of a display accompanying the operation (display pattern during operation) is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is released from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), a specific sound (for example, “picone”) associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittent in that situation. Can be output automatically.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Even if the player does not detect any operation until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, “picone” ”) Is output, it is possible to intermittently output a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), five times (N times) from when the grace time TY1 is started until it elapses. It is set to have a length of time that can output a specific sound of minutes (for example, “picone”). As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound (a sound corresponding to the production reception) accompanying the operation Is at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection and thereafter 4 times (N−) when the automation time TY2 elapses even without operation. 1) (total number of times with a specific sound).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the grace period is output during the fifth specific sound output). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends is reached, processing (output interruption processing, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at the timing tx13 (for example, “pico”) And the specific sound that has been output until that time tx13 (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the first to fourth specific sounds) The output (sound waveform) in the same manner appears. In other words, if the specific sound accompanying the operation may be interrupted, it may become ambiguous whether the operation has been accepted for multiple times or not, and in the end, the operational feeling as if the operation has been made multiple times. However, according to such a configuration, such a concern may be caused by the player becoming difficult to remember the game. It is expected to be solved appropriately.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even when the predetermined validity period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period after the grace period TY1 starts, Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined effective period ends, it is avoided that the number of stage receptions is not stable when an operation by a single press is performed. Needless to say, it is possible to make the player feel as if the operation has been performed within a period exceeding the predetermined effective period, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment. In this sense, a display (such as a remaining time display for which the valid period is continued) is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined valid period is being continued or has been terminated. In addition, it can be said that it is more preferable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) under the condition that it can be recognized that it is in the finished state.

  In addition, regarding the “specific sound output accompanying the operation” in the figure, rather than the signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, the volume waveform of the specific sound that is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses (other sound outputs This is a conceptual illustration of the excluded waveform). As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required to finish outputting the specific sound of the previous output to the end, and the specific sound of the previous output is obtained. On the other hand, the sound data of a new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and continuously, as if fast repeated operation is being performed It is expected that the player will be able to memorize such a sense.

  By the way, as a specific sound reproduction type, in addition to a mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1SHOT” in the drawing) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is selected. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Moreover, the aspect which reproduce | regenerates the several specific sound output intermittently as one sound data may be sufficient. In the case of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, it is not always necessary to output all the specific sounds as the same single sound, but they are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), regarding the display output on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is displayed after the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand leaves and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display contents of the operation-time display pattern are developed multiple times in that situation. It has become something that can be made.

  For example, assume that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is ended at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). It is. In this respect, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order over a period from the timing tx11 until the set grace time TY1 is up. By executing this, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

  The contents of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set as, for example, the mode shown in FIG. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 274, “display scene 1” is a video depicting the situation where the ally character is holding the sword and is about to pull out the sword, and “display scene 2” is the ally This is a video depicting the situation from when a character is extracted until the character is cut off, and “Display Scene 3” is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the first mode. "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a teammate character having a meeting with an enemy character with a sword in the second mode, and "Display scene 5" is a third scene in which the teammate character and the enemy character are in a third state. This is a video depicting a state where a sword is being held in a manner.

  After displaying the operation display pattern associated with the operation on the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed while the specific sound is intermittently output. The player can be made to feel as if the content of the battle with the character has been developed in response to a plurality of operations. In addition, about each display scene 1-5, it does not necessarily need to be a moving image, and may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (such as a hold display and an operation instruction image) may be displayed. One of these effects displays may include an image that changes effects (such as color changes) every time an effect is received by an operation by the player, but recognizes whether or not an effect has occurred. In order to make this difficult, it is important that the image is displayed as a smaller image than the display pattern during operation.

  Here, in the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace period TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), the period from the start of the grace period TY1 to the passage thereof At least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are set to have a length of time that can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, at least five (M) display contents of the operation-time display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the operation detection timing, and thereafter four (M-1) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even in the absence of operation. The display content is developed over the total number).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 when the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). Unlike the case of the specific sound, the display pattern at the time of operation is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without displaying it until the end. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display pattern at the time of operation where the production content has progress is interrupted in the middle of the display scene. It is expected that the player will be given an impression that it may have been able to be further developed, thereby prompting further operation by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the display pattern at the time of operation (each display scene) and the grace period TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace period TY1 starts and ends. It can be said that it is more desirable to prompt the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage further operations by the player, only a part of all display scenes 1 to 5 are displayed between the start and end of the grace period TY1. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the predetermined effective period ends and no new operation is accepted for production during the period from the start of the grace period TY1 until the lapse of the grace period TY1, the predetermined effective At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace period TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. This will be described later.

  The display scenes 2 to 5 are displayed and progressed sequentially according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the mode of operation. May be set in advance according to the time (automated time TY2) from when the specific sound is output until it is output again, or set regardless of the time (automated time TY2) It may be a thing. In this sense, display contents such as switching to another display or occurrence of a new display are included in the contents of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, the display scene 1 is “from a state where a sword is held, There is a display change due to “video depiction of a sword pulled out”, and a display change due to “an effect occurring when an ally character fights against an enemy character” is inserted in the display scene 3. More desirable. If display scenes having such display changes are used, it is possible to make the display change in each display scene appear to have occurred due to the effect reception, so the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be resolved without strictly matching the above. In addition, a plurality of display scenes do not necessarily have to be prepared as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. It is assumed that the operation in the long mode to be maintained at is performed. Accordingly, at the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation is performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed based on the detection (determination). The process of starting the output of the accompanying specific sound and the output of the display accompanying the same operation (display pattern during operation) will be performed.

  Also, in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the case of the non-operation period (period from the timing tx12 to tx13) described above, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A sound (for example, “picone”) can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order. The display content of the hour display pattern can be advanced in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the operation maintenance period (period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Monitoring is periodically performed (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detecting a falling edge in the detection signal). As long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and the periodical monitoring is performed, “every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process for outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) and a process for sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order are performed. In other words, in the operation maintenance period (period from the timing tx21 to tx22), “when the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and it is determined that the operation is detected. Based on a process such as outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) based on “the operation detection state is determined each time the automation time TY2 elapses, and the operation detection state is indicated” Processing such as “progress display contents based on determination” is not performed, and “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. And “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. It is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which it is determined that the (operation state) has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. Set grace time TY1. However, in this case, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”” every time the automation time TY2 elapses ”) and“ a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed in accordance with a predetermined time and order. The “sequential output processing” is continuously executed over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends after the timing tx22 at which the operation state is ended. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22), the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) across the transition timing, the specific sound can be output intermittently in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the display pattern during operation can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, the specific sound output mode at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively generated. The processing mode (program) related to the output of the specific sound can be made common among them. Similarly, the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the display pattern during operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are respectively displayed. In creating them, the processing mode (program) for outputting the display pattern during operation can be made common among them. In other words, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has ended. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) is changed to the situation where the player's hand is released from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation-time display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  As a result, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation button 410 is performed in a so-called long press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently output. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if it was being performed (such as a feeling as if fast hitting was being performed). As a result, while striving to stabilize the responsiveness of the performance when the operation is performed by a single push (whether it is a single production change or multiple production changes), any operation mode (single push, Even if long press) is employed, it is possible to favorably maintain the number of production changes (specific sounds) generated by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and in a so-called long-pressing mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change occurs in (b)), actually, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one effect is accepted at timing tx11, and the white in the figure is specified accordingly. Whereas sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four receptions are received every time the automation time TY2 elapses from timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without a cut is made four times. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. When the type of effect that causes the effect result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one effect reception has occurred, a specific effect result appears. I can't expect much. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, the reception of the specific sound without the black in the figure is intentionally performed even when the reception of the production is not generated, so that the reception of the production actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation that can not be expected very much that a specific production result will appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if a player who is not good at (such as slow hitting speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much production reception has occurred only by confirming one specific sound output at a time, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how much production reception has occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, then the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied within the predetermined validity period and a specific production result appears, the teammate character and the sword A depiction of just making a meeting with will appear. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific performance result is a depiction of how the teammate character wins the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle, and the specific performance result within a predetermined effective period. It is desirable to display the result of the failure at the end when the ally character is depicted as having been defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword battle.

  As described above, when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-pressing manner (FIG. 273 (a)) and when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressing manner (FIG. 273 (b)), the specific sound accompanying the operation is intermittently output over a plurality of times, and the operation display pattern accompanying the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule and progressed. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating a plurality of times is prompted to perform the operation with confidence. However, in practice, during the predetermined effective period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-press mode, and when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, 1 It is important for improving the game entertainment to let the player remember the feeling of operation in which the production reception is generated by one operation. However, if the operational feeling that the reception of an effect is generated by one operation at a time is completely reflected as an effect, a player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than a player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the production performance is as if it is, it is required to achieve both production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) having such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operational feeling that the reception of the production has occurred by one operation at a time, the operation is performed as an immediate operation with respect to the operation. Focus on the fact that “whether sound is generated (or changed) when operated” is a more important parameter than “whether display is generated (or changed)”. Each time the operation on 410 is performed in a single press mode, a specific sound corresponding to the production reception is output in accordance with the operation timing.

  For example, now, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner in a period of timing tx31 to tx32 in a predetermined effective period. Suppose. Then, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment uses the detection as a trigger to generate a new specific sound with respect to the previous specific sound (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a way that the sound data is overwritten on a specific channel. As described above, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode, such output is performed while the specific sound is intermittently output a plurality of times. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. It is possible to explicitly indicate that the specific sound has been newly output and the production has been accepted at the timing when the performance is performed.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single press mode or when the operation is performed by a long press, the output of the specific sound of the previous output is completed to the end. The automatic time TY2 is digested before the time required for the time elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel with respect to the specific sound of the previous output. This is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automated time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a multiple hitting operation in a single-pressing manner. When the operation timing by an irregular player is reached, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to preferably remember the operational feeling that the production reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, even in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), every time the operation button 410 is operated, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state) during the predetermined effective period. Thus, a process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this respect, in the period of the timing tx31 to tx32 when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple hitting operation in a single press mode, the operation is continued every time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not it is in the (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has ended, and a predetermined time length is set accordingly. A grace period TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace period TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace period TY1 is canceled. Thus, the operation button 410 is returned to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period from timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 is in an operation state or a non-operation state, a process for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in an operation state is performed. A state transition is performed rapidly between a state in which a grace period TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after repeated striking operations for six times between timings tx31 to tx32, the user is tired from repeated striking operations, and thereafter, the operation is repeated. It is assumed that the time required has become significantly longer. If a player who is not good at such multiple operations cannot perform a continuous hit operation multiple times after the timing tx32, the number of stage receptions is greater than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern about the decline of the game entertainment interest by being reduced. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is generated each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state ends. As described above, the output process is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repeated operation is significantly increased, at least a grace period TY1 after the previous operation state ends. If it is possible to perform repeated operations within a shorter period of time, it is possible to output a specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently so that the player feels as if fast repeated operations are being performed. It becomes like this.

  For example, when it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operation state has ended as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. From then on, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly increased, a specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player. By performing the processing, the specific sound accompanying the operation is output continuously and intermittently. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure under the situation where no production reception is occurring.

  In this respect, black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only during the grace period TY1 after the previous operation state ends. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (does not time up) based on the operation. Accordingly, at timing tx34, the white specific sound (the 10th specific sound) in the figure is output in response to the production acceptance in the form of cutting off (suspending) the specific sound in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to a state in which processing for periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated at timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring. Based on this determination, a grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again. When an operation by the player is finally performed at timing tx36 before time TY1 expires, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In this way, a white specific sound (15th specific sound) is output in the figure.

  As described above, even after the timing tx32, even if the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased, the repetitive operation is performed within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state ends. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed and the specific sound in the figure in the regular period when the operation by the player is not performed Are output, so that the player can remember the feeling as if a quick continuous hitting operation is being performed so that the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. Therefore, according to such an aspect relating to the output of the specific sound, it is possible to secure an operational feeling that an effect is received by one operation at a time, and a player who is not good at multiple operations. Even in such a case, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently by the output of the black specific sound in the non-operating state. , Production fairness) is expected to be compatible.

  However, even when the specific sound is output in such a manner, the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined effective period is a plurality of times. If a player who is good at operation and a player who is not good at multiple times of operation make a difference in the aspect of the progress of display contents, eventually it will be more than the player who is not good at multiple times of operation. There may be a performance as if a player who is good at multiple operations is advantageous, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be lowered. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the display time pattern for the operation is not advanced step by step in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, display contents can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, after the timing tx32 in the predetermined effective period, it is assumed that the time required for the repetitive operation has significantly increased. However, until the set grace time TY1 expires, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again and the setting of the grace time TY1 is cancelled. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up and ended within a predetermined effective period does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in such a manner as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation time display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 as the operation-time display pattern are determined in advance regardless of the operation state even though the speed of the continuous hitting operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed sequentially according to the scheduled schedule, and this makes it appear that the performance fairness is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations. Will be able to.

  However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is the same, the number of times that the presentation reception accompanying the operation is actually generated is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that you will be different from your favorite players. Therefore, in order to cause a specific effect result to appear within a predetermined effective period, an effect lottery is performed every time an effect reception is requested, or every time an effect is received, and a specific effect is determined according to the result. If there is a type of production that makes the production result appear, the player who is good at multiple operations is more likely to make a specific production result appear. The significance is kept. In other words, while maintaining the significance of such production, the fairness of production between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained in the production of sounds and displays. Therefore, it can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests of a player who is not good at multiple operations.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, even if the repeated hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automated time TY2) at which the presentation is received when the operation by long press is performed, the mode for the progress of the display pattern during operation is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which button deterioration is accelerated by performing a quick hitting operation too quickly.

  Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 275 (b) assumes a case where the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace period TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined effective period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 is timed up is reached, and the timing tx37 (specific end timing) starts from the timing tx31. The dynamic display output (processing for sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace period TY1 ends when in the output state is reached. Even if the specific sound in the output state is cut off at the timing tx37 (for example, “pico”), the process (such as the output interruption process or the process of interruption by overwriting with another sound) is performed. Even after the timing tx37 has arrived, the output (sound waveform) in the same manner as the specific sound that has been output so far appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) when the grace period TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is If the operation of the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel the feeling that a fast repeated operation is being performed so that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the tenth specific sound output is interrupted twice, the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice, and then the black specific sound in the figure is output intermittently again. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. In the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), the specific sound is output intermittently in this way. On the other hand, in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at timing tx37. . Then, after that, it is apparent that the progress of the display content is started again from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the white specific sound is output again.

  FIG. 276 shows a predetermined effective period during which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given in the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic hitting function) described in FIGS. It is a time chart which shows the example of the effect which appears when operation is performed within this predetermined effective period (timing tx41-tx48), when the specific effect pattern which generate | occur | produces is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 276, at a timing tx41, a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity for a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and at a timing tx42 within the predetermined effective period, by the player Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display accompanying the operation (display pattern at the time of operation), respectively. Processing to be started is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. Processing to be output can be executed.

  In other words, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a specific sound output that is black in the drawing even under a situation in which no operation is performed on the operation button 410 and no effect is received. In this figure, the black specific sound output is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production acceptance occurs (in this production example, the same mode) ) Is output. As described above, the display contents at the time of operation appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 are also developed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation. Therefore, from the player's side, even if an operation by a long press or an operation by a plurality of times is performed within a predetermined effective period, the player recognizes how much production reception is generated by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within a predetermined effective period, a specific sound output that is white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, it is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when there is a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) after the start of the predetermined effective period, two consecutive hit operations at timings tx42 and tx43, and from timing tx44, Each time a long press operation is performed, a total of nine presentations are received, and a specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (in the figure, the first to ninth) ), The number of receptions of productions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started, it takes a long time that the operation in the single operation mode cannot be said to be repeated, and the timing tx46. , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the reception of the production for two times occurs, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice over time (in the figure, the tenth) , The eleventh white specific sound), the number of times of production acceptance per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern at the time of operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined effective period is started by performing the black specific sound output described above. It is continuously output in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scene is merely switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these If you just check the output status, there will be a small number of production receptions per unit time. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of a special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when a white specific sound output occurs in the figure, a relatively early period (timing) after the start of a predetermined effective period. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined effective period is started. It is possible to predict to some extent how much production reception has occurred through the output status. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to a certain extent which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment of a player who is not good at multiple operations will be suitably maintained. In this sense, a special sound can be generated when a specific sound output is generated, but is output based on an output condition that is different from the generation of the specific sound output. Even if the specific sound output occurs, it is required to output the special sound in a manner that does not necessarily occur.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect is received may be changed according to the number of effects received within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output with white outline or the specific sound output with black outline in the figure is generated.

  Moreover, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, it has a time from when the specific sound is output until the sound is muted, or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to twice the “automation time TY2”. In addition, when a new special sound is output when the previous special sound is output, it is desirable that the previous special sound is cut off (interrupted) to output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effect can be enjoyed as when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation by a long press, the number of players performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced. There is a concern that the significance as an effect of requesting a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 276, in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48), in the period after the player's operation is started at least at the timing tx42, the player's operation is long pressed. Of the state that is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and the state that is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48), the state is performed as the single operation mode. Only when a specific display condition is satisfied, display of a specific image (specific display) is allowed.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform an operation as a mode of a single operation rather than an operation by pressing and holding at least. Performing a turning operation (such as repeated hits) can have a production meaning, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  Moreover, in this effect example, in order to confirm the specific image, it is not necessary to operate as a single operation mode, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the difficulty of appearance of the specific image itself is increased, it is possible to operate multiple times (such as continuous hitting) without using the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple hitting) function every time a predetermined effective period occurs. ), It appears that it is challenging to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and it can be operated multiple times without using the automatic repeated (automatic multiple operations) function. It is expected to promote understanding of the surroundings.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice as long as the “automated time TY2”) has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received. In addition, a display of a specific image within a predetermined effective period (the specific display condition) is that a predetermined effect lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has passed is obtained as the “specific display condition” ( Specific display). In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the big hit is determined in the big hit determination (or the production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within the predetermined effective period (high expectation degree of the big hit is high) In the case of production status), it is possible to get a performance hit with a probability of 70%, whereas when a big hit is lost in the jackpot determination (or operation within a predetermined effective period) No matter how many times it is performed, in the production situation where the success display cannot appear (in the production situation where the big hit expectation degree is low), it is possible to obtain the production hit only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when a display of a specific image (specific display) appears within a predetermined effective period, it is suggested that the expectation level that a jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained. The above-mentioned “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automated time TY2 ”without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect is received) is generated. 2 times the time) ”and“ Achieving per-effects in the specified effect lottery ”is adopted as the“ specific display condition ”and when this is satisfied A display (specific display) of a specific image may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the types described above, the aspect of the predetermined effect lottery is, for example, in an effect situation where the success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined effective period (the effect situation where the degree of expectation of jackpot is low). An effect situation where a success per chance is obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), but a success display cannot appear no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined effective period. When it is in a production situation where the degree of big hit expectation is low, an aspect in which a production hit can be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform a barren operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined effective period. In this case, as the specific display, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined effective period ends without the success display.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect is received when a specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is displayed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on the condition that a state in which no operation is performed by the player (a state where no new production reception has occurred) is maintained. Yes.

  In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, at least a specific number of production receptions are required in order to make a specific production result (success display) appear within a predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). The appearance condition is satisfied at timing tx47 when the eleventh production reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the success display to appear as the display pattern at the time of operation is performed. As the contents of this success display, the content of the repetitive portion (display scenes 3 to 5) in the operation display pattern, such as destroying enemy characters that had been fighting with swords in display scenes 3 to 5 It is desirable to be related. Also, when a success display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is high in the big hit determination.

  Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the eleventh presentation acceptance (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, at that time, the predetermined effective period is ended and a new presentation acceptance is received. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at the timing after the timing tx47, a white specific sound or special sound in the figure is not newly generated, and a specific display does not newly appear.

  FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 276. However, although the operation in the single operation mode by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it repeats taking a long time which cannot be said.

  As shown in FIG. 277, even if the operation in the mode of the single operation by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined effective period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously output intermittently, and the display pattern at the time of the operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such a production mode, even if the operation is performed only 4 times within a predetermined effective period, it is possible to create a production situation as if about 20 continuous hitting operations are performed. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who seriously performs the continuous hitting operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous hitting operation and the game entertainment interest is lowered.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined effective period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific performance result (successful display) within the predetermined effective period. When “EU” is the minimum number of production receptions required to appear, these numerical values are set so that the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] is satisfied. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is repeatedly performed at the last minute when the grace period TY1 elapses and the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, The number of production receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) that is required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success indication) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are present will be suitably maintained. In order to obtain such an effect more reliably, the number of times of production reception (EU) required at least for causing a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined effective period, Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up the numerical value.

  In this regard, in this production example, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to make a specific production result (successful display) appear within a predetermined effective period is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”. Since it is “11 times” which is twice or more the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined valid period ends. Become. That is, in this case, a failure display appears due to an insufficient number of operations, so that it is an effect situation in which it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment allows the display of a specific image only when it is in a state where it is performed as a single operation mode and a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this respect, in this production example, when the above-mentioned “specific non-operation time” required for displaying a specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these values is set to be In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to cause a specific display to appear every time an operation is performed within a predetermined effective period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined effective period is within the predetermined effective period. The number of production receptions (EU) that is required at least to make a specific production result (successful display) appear is reduced. In other words, in this case, a direct selection function for performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk that the specific production result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. Since it is not possible to easily and repeatedly try to make it appear, it will be possible to improve the performance of the game, as the performance of the attempt will be enhanced. It becomes like this.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of causing the failure display to appear as the operation display pattern is performed. As the contents of this failure display, the contents of the repetitive portion in the operation display pattern (display scenes 3 to 5), such as defeating the enemy character who had been in a battle with the sword in the display scenes 3 to 5, and It is desirable to be related. Also, when a failure display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low in the big hit determination.

  On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined effective period is ended, regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. However, this is not cut off (interrupted) as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted while the success or failure indication is displayed, and then the success or failure indication will be displayed. The relationship is set so as to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, a grace period TY1 is set after the player's operation state ends, and the black specific sound output in the non-operation state is output until the grace period TY1 elapses. Although it is performed at least four times or more, the number of “specific sound output without black in the figure” that occurs when in a non-operating state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time that is at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output that is black in the non-operating state is at least twice or more. Since this occurs, it is possible to make it feel as if the continuous hitting operation (multiple operations) is continued even in the non-operating state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 and 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character just makes a battle with the enemy character with the sword appears. Therefore, specific display in which the big hit expectation degree is shown in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2 may be performed. According to such a configuration, if there is a case where a specific display is overlooked, the non-operation state cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace period TY1 elapses. However, it is possible to provide an effect of selecting between the disadvantage of being wasted in vain and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Further, in this embodiment, continuous operation is permitted in such a manner that the production reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the production reception is performed when the operation by the long press is performed. Thus, it is possible to realize an operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous hitting operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the display pattern at the time of operation is the same as when the operation by long press is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform a high-speed continuous hitting operation, and this is expected to suppress the excessive operation on the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of breakage or the like. Will come to be.

  In addition, in order to make a specific effect result appear within a predetermined effective period, when performing an effect that requires at least a specific number of effects to be received, only an operation by long pressing is performed within the predetermined effective period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number so that the reception of the production more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the reception of the production more than the specific number of times occurs only by performing an operation by long pressing over a half of the predetermined effective period.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice the “automated time TY2” has elapsed without receiving a new effect from the timing when the previous effect was received. In this case, the display of the specific image (specific display) is made to appear, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within a range that is at least twice the “automated time TY2” and that has a grace time TY1 as an upper limit (below the grace time TY1) is used. In the non-operating state, in the state where the specific sound with blackening in the figure is output more than once (the state that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the non-operating state) It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) has appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operating state (the number of outputs of a specific sound without black in the figure) has reached a predetermined value. Is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine has been described in which the tray unit 320 includes the rendering operation unit 400 that can be pressed by the player and can present the rendering image to the player. With reference to FIGS. 278 to 329, a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate will be described. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 279 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 described above will be described, the same components as those described above will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword production operation unit 5000 houses a sword part 5010 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, a sword part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decorative body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 is configured.

  The sword decorative body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath portion 5020 can be moved in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword direction and the sword insertion direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a state where the sword part 5011 is stored in the sheath part 5020, and the sword part 5011 is in a sword state where the sword part 5011 can be visually recognized by the player in the sword production. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword state can function as an operation means for receiving a sword insertion operation by the player and returning to the sword state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to perform a sword effect with the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting presence / absence of a sword preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of an extracted book effect.

  The production pattern described here includes a pattern in which the sword book production is performed after execution of the sword preparation transition production, a pattern in which the sword book production is performed without performing the sword preparation migration production in advance, and a sword preparation migration production in advance. There is a pattern in which no sword book production is performed, there is a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed, and there is no pattern in which the sword book production is performed. Two patterns of the form with an aura member and the form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 280 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is selected in accordance with the type of variation pattern determined in the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, multiple types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation at the time of big hit, a variation pattern for small hit variation at the time of small hit, and a variation pattern for deviation variation at the time of outage, and variations that have advantageous results for the player The pattern is set so that the probability of executing the sword preparation transition effect is higher as the pattern is higher. Specifically, the sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% for the variation pattern for big hit variation, is executed with a probability of 30% for the variation pattern for small hit variation, and when the variation pattern for outlier variation is used. It is executed with a probability of 20%. Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed is higher than when the reach effect is performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), execution / non-execution of the sword book effect is selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect. When the sword preparation transition effect is executed even if the types of the variation patterns are the same, the probability that the sword main effect is executed is set higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is set such that the probability that the extracted sword effect will be executed increases. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword preparation effect is executed is higher when the sword preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for deviation variation, the probability that the sword book effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed with the variation pattern for small hit variation. Note that, in the case of the big hit variation pattern, the extraction effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition effect.

  In addition, when the sword book effect is executed, the sword preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability that the sword book effect in the form with the aura member is higher as the variation pattern is advantageous to the player. It is set to become. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the extracted sword effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by sword decoration body movement)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect (the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) itself that can accept a sword insertion operation by a player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281). 282), an aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with a member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of an integral decorative body (FIGS. 283 and 284).

  FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword state, (C) the second sword state. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 282 is a longitudinal sectional view of the blade portion 5011 extracted from the sheath portion 5020 for easy understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030.

  The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade part 5011 is housed in the sheath part 5020 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword movement in the sword preparation transition effect is only visible from the player by removing only the portion of the blade 5011a that fits on the hand of the blade part 5011. Becomes the first sword state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword operation in the sword main production is a second sword that is largely visible from the player by further removing the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020. It becomes a state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second extracted state can function as an operation means that can accept a sword insertion operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided in the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 is in the first sword state (FIG. 281 (B)) from the sword state (FIG. 281 (A)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) inside the portion 5020, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in a changing process in which the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 281 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first extraction state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, when the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into a linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 are stopped at positions where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011 (open state).

  Further, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on the blade shaft 5011b is included below the blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. By emitting these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword part 5010) is changed from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state, the closed state is opened and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state after being deformed is shown, this is not restrictive. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (including not only the mode of maximum operation but also the mode of stopping the operation on the way) ).

  FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the blade operation of the sword decorative body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. (A) State of blade insertion, (B) First blade state, (C) The second sword state is shown. FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 284 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 283 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the horizontal direction, it moves in the vertical direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword state (the state of the sword delivery). Operates according to the first sword state (second sword state). Thus, the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) can be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to be seen as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely accommodated state) is accommodated in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 284 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is located below the blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 in the fully accommodated state, and is a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011, and the surrounding aura member 5036. A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b which are provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b which mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) such that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and both the pinions are engaged. It is converted into the upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade portion 5011 to form the second sword state. The aura member 5035 at this time is in a complete appearance state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light emission.

  Here, the blade part is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword part 5010) (the blade state ⇔the first sword state ⇔the second sword state) with respect to the operation timing of the aura member 5035. Although the example which unites 5011 was shown, it is not restricted to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state. Final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means (not only the full appearance state that is fully operated, but the midway appearance that is stopped in the middle) It is only necessary to be able to include a state with an aura member in a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade part 5011 so that it is not visually recognized by the player from the state where the sword is inserted into the first sword.

(Example of sword production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285 to FIG. 290, a sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decorative body 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the effect pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the figure) in which the extraction effect is not executed) The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described with respect to the effect pattern ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the extracted sword effect is executed. 285 to 289 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. A reach state is formed (FIG. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the reach decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and an effect image suggesting execution of a sword effect (movability of the sword decorative body 5001) is displayed in the center display area. Specifically, after an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) where two samurai face each other and start living, an image (Fig. 285 (X2)) where one samurai holds the handle and holds the sword in the sheath (Fig. 285 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect which suggests that the sword ornament 5001 moves is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword state (FIG. 281 (A)).

  Next, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword preparation transition effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face with the eyes of the samurai who holds the sword in the above-mentioned image is displayed, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed as time passes. At this time, the sword decoration transition effect is performed by the sword ornament 5001 changing from the sword state to the first sword state. In addition, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the sword book effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than when the sword preparation transition effect is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect will be executed by the movement of the sword ornament 5001. In the sword preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decorative body 5001 in the first sword state up and down, the player may be expected to further change the sword decorative body 5001 to the second sword state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decorative body 5001 in the first extraction state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decorative body 5001 may maintain the sword delivery state and continue to display the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) described above.

  Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword production effect is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A )) To the open state (FIG. 282B), the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword state is visible from the player from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the part of the blade 5011a. However, as described above, the aura member 5030 has the blade 5011a of the blade part 5011a. Since it is provided below, there is no fear that the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even if the aura member 5030 operates maximum. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state functions as an operation means that can accept a sword operation by the player, and at the same time, has an expectation depending on the form of the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  After the sword preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword book effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative design is on the left decorative design in the center of the screen along with the image that the samurai gives up at the timing when the central decorative design that has been variably displayed is stopped. In addition, the display is stopped and displayed in a stop mode different from the right-side decorative design, that is, a deviating mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the first extracted state to the stowed state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the stowed state. That is, the reach effect is terminated without the sword ornament 5001 functioning as an operation means.

  On the other hand, when the extracted sword effect is executed, after the sword preparation transition effect is completed, an image in which the sword cutting is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decorative body 5001 is the second extracted sword. It becomes a state. Here, in the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state, the form with the aura member that is visible in the form in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 and the aura member 5030 are not visible. There is provided an aura memberless form in which the blade part 5011 that is not deformed can be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIG. 287 and FIG. 288, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 that is in the second extraction state is a form without an aura member will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai who closed his eyes in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image of cutting out the sword that was held and cutting the opponent's samurai is displayed (FIG. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the blade part 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by a sword, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 from which the player jumps out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting an operation of pushing the blade 5011 downward so that the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the blade operation of the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect that prompts a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword in the same form as the second sword state of the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with a message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 287 ( A3)). In the sword decorative body 5001, the LED on the internal LED board 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. In addition, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of rai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in front of the previous rai cut scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). (Refer to FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

  When the player holds the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 during the operation effective period and performs a sword storage operation to place the blade part 5011 in the sheath 5020, and the sword decorative body 5001 is in the sword storage state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect ends with a symbol type winning notification (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed in a flashy manner (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, with the image of the opponent's samurai defeated and the conclusion of the Iai, the central decorative symbol is the same as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen, that is, the big hit (here "7") It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of place, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the central decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol at the center of the screen, together with an image in which the opponent's samurai is not defeated at the timing of the stop display and the conclusion of the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here "6") Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 289, the case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extraction state is in the form with an aura member will be described. When the sword book effect starts, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1) and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible from the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but this is not restrictive. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second extraction state so that only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form the form with the aura member. The sword ornament 5001 only needs to be in the form with the aura member in the second sword state before the operation effective period is started. However, since the sword decorative body 5001 is already in the second extraction state in which the player can perform a sword operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that an erroneous operation by the player is induced. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword state to the second sword state is performed as in this example, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword state. It is preferable that the operation effective period is started immediately.

  Also, the images in FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above. I am trying not to judge whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decorative body 5001, the player can grasp whether the form is with the aura member or without the aura member. Accordingly, the sword decorative body 5001 can be focused before the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without confusion. Can do. Note that the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time do not have to be the same as described above, and may be images that are similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword ornament 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye colors and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation valid period, the sword image in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the form with the aura member same as the sword decorative body 5001. It is displayed (FIG. 289 (B3)). The subsequent effects are the same as those in FIG. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect image in FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashy than the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 and the operation effective period in the sword production effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword book effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the gait effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the extracted state (time t1). At this time, when the production pattern with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state. However, even if the aura member 5030 is in the open state, the aura member 5030 is played in the game. It is provided so that it cannot be visually recognized by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword state, the player knows whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 further changes to the second sword state, and if it changes, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. I can't. However, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the sword book effect is executed and the possibility of becoming an aura member-attached form increases, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced. In addition, even if the extracted sword effect is not executed, the sword movement suggesting effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state can be captured.

  When the sword preparation transition effect is finished, the sword book effect is subsequently started, and the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2). Thereafter, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation effective period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of living together effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword insertion operation by the player is detected during the operation effective period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 returns from the second sword state to the sword state by the sword insertion operation by the player. Then, the preset operation effective period ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby completing a series of living effects ( Time t5). Note that the operation valid period may be ended by detecting an operation by the player, as indicated by a one-dot chain line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword state to the sword storage state as the operation effective period ends.

  Here, a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decorative body 5001 enters the second sword state until the operation effective period starts (time t3-t2) is a mode (aura member) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state. As a mode confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not it is an attachment mode, a light emission mode, etc., a period longer than the operation effective period (time t4-t3) is secured. That is, even when the operation unit (sword unit 5010) that can be operated by the player is in the operation position (second sword state) that functions as the operation means, the operation reception is immediately started (the operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. Thereby, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword decorative body 5001, and inflates the expectation in the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with the aura member, the expectation increases), or the mental preparation As soon as the second sword state is reached, the operation validity period starts and the state of the operation means cannot be confirmed, and it is not possible to confirm the aspect of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

  Further, the sword effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is performed in a series of living effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decorative body 5001 is obtained. The operation effects (time t3 to t4) as the operation means are related effects. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and the variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decorative body 5001, thereby suppressing a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform performance by the conventional operation means. Can do.

  In addition, although the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself and the aura member 5030 deform | transforms the blade part 5011 in the example of the above-mentioned production, the aura member 5035 is the sheath part of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided with a frame side member (aura member 5035) and becomes an integral decorative body.

  In this way, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operation means that can change (deform or combine) the aspects of members (sword part 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the general decorative movable body. is doing. And the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 (sword storage state, first sword state, second sword state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 can suggest the expectation that the change display has an advantageous result for the player due to the change of the aspect of the sword decorative body, and the player's interest in the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  Further, before the sword ornament 5001 enters the second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation is suggested by changing the state of the sword ornament 5001 from the sword state to the first sword state. is doing. Further, the expectation is suggested by causing the aura members 5030 and 5035 to appear in the state change from the first sword state to the second sword state. Thus, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the appearance of the first sword state or the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword state to the second sword state (operation position). The player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, the expectation is high when the operation position is moved after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance. In this mode, there is a concern that an erroneous operation that the player may operate even though the operation means is not yet in an operable position when the player grasps it, but the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is operated. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the above-described erroneous operation can be prevented.

  In the first sword state described above, only the blade 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visible in the single-sword state. At this time, the amount of extraction in the first extraction state is set to be less than the maximum extraction amount in the second extraction state (operation position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in a fully appearing state when it enters the second extraction state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword state, the player has a higher expectation at the time of the first sword state, Increase interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, when the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first extraction state, it is a form with an aura member (high degree of expectation) at the stage of the extraction preparation transition effect. Since the player can grasp and expect great expectations, the disappointment when the sword book production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword preparation transition effect is performed, the player's feelings are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword book effect, and an effect with a high gaming interest can be provided.

(Variation 1-Extraction using a control button)
In the following, referring to FIG. 291 to FIG. 294, the sword effect is executed in the reach effect, and the sword decoration operation of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. The case will be described. FIGS. 291 to 293 are examples of stage transition diagrams of the sword effect of the first modification. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 of Modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the description similar to the above-mentioned extraction effect (FIGS. 285-290) is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed and no sword book effect is performed, and after the sword preparation transition effect is executed About the production pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4)) in the drawing, the screen transition of the production display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 are performed. The transition and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, the gait effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and an effect suggesting the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 291 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the image display operation button is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It should be noted that the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword preparation transition effect and the sword main effect are not performed and the result is a losing result, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the deviation (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the operation button 410 are not changed.

  In addition, when the sword main effect is performed after the sword preparation transition effect is executed, when the player presses the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the first sword state. A drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white character “Tengu” is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 292 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which a friendly samurai is about to touch the sword. (FIG. 292 (F2)). Next, a sword book effect in which the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) is started (FIG. 292 (F3), FIGS. 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with the aura member) by the sword main effect, immediately before FIG. 292 (F2) and immediately after 293 (G1), the image of lightning running on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 292 (F3) is interrupted and displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 (whether it has an aura member or not) ) Along with the strength of lightning, the degree of expectation that will win in the Iai will be shown.

  The subsequent effects are the same as those shown in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3), and 288 described above. When the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decorative body 5001 is attached to the player. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the above operation, an operation effective period in which the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is detected effectively is generated. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword insertion operation within the effective period of operation (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the player is notified of the symbol type (success, miss) by the sword operation by the player (FIG. 293 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to a timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword ornament 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts a state change of the sword ornament 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect is urged to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 starts to change state, and first changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state. Here, in the first extraction state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword ornament 5001 is operated to operate as the operation means. When an effective period occurs, an operation promotion effect is made to prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 (time t3), and the player operates within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative pattern in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). Note that if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation effective period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decorative body 5001 is in the final form (the first form) You may make it deform | transform and change a state at a stretch in the form with the aura member of a double sword state. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword state to the second sword state changes according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, changes to the second sword state after the first sword state and a certain time has elapsed. It may be. In addition, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword ornament 5001 is second when the operation effective period ends. The sword is returned to the sword state.

  In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword ornament 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 by the player. The sword decoration body 5001 extraction operation start timing is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the sword decoration body 5001 insertion operation start timing is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tx). As described above, since the movement of the sword decoration 5001 is reversed (the sword operation and the sword operation) depending on which operation means of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, mutual operation is effective. Periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation effective period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword ornament 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decorative body 5001 functions as the operating means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is deformed and changes its state, and the form with the aura member is provided. To the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, effect images corresponding to the deformation and state change of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIGS. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 293 (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, so that the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased and the interest of the game can be increased.

(Modification 2-Stage aura extraction using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, based on the first modification, the appearance degree of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001, specifically, the uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIG. 295 to FIG. 299 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword effect of the second modification. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect as the above-mentioned.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 steps. The aura level 0 indicates a complete accommodation state (FIG. 284 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player. The aura level 3 is a fully appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is visible to the maximum extent by the player as a result of the aura member 5035 being combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second extracted state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state of the sword. 284 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears to be visible to the player by two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

  Here, there are no production patterns (Z1 to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which no sword preparation transition effect is performed or no sword book production is performed, and there is no sword preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword book effect is performed, and an effect pattern (in the drawing) in which the sword decorative body 5001 becomes a final form (a form with an aura member in a complete appearance state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once. (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4)) to be performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword ornament Explain the operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described first modification, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decorative body 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410, but in the second modification, the operation button 410 is operated step by step by a plurality of operations. A step operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 is performed.

  First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed or the sword book production effect is not performed, that is, the sword decorative body 5001 does not change its state even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

  In addition, although there is no sword preparation transition effect, the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member by one operation of the operation button 410. ), The operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected after the same effects as in FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) in the first modification (FIG. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)). Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the second sword state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decorative body 5001 is united with the blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade part 5011 in the sword state, and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second extracted state, it completely appears. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 296 (I1)). Although the form with the aura member of the sword decorative body 5001 of the first modified example is configured by the aura member 5030 and the modified example 2 is configured by the aura member 5035, other effects are the same as those of the first modified example. 292 (F1) (F2) → Tracing the same effect transition as FIG. 293 (FIGS. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  Further, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword book effect is performed. In the effect pattern in which the operation button 410 is required to be operated a plurality of times and the aura level of the sword decorative body 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decorative body 5001 after the first operation is in the second sword state from the sword state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) that is not visually recognized by the player. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

  Next, an operation effect of the second operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 297 (J2)). And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the next production will be performed according to the preset aura levels 0-3.

  First, when the set aura level is “0” (that is, in the case of no aura member configuration), the aura member 5035 maintains the fully accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. In the display area of the display device 1600, the staged operation effect is terminated (hereinafter, there is no operation button 410 operation request), and it is notified that the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second extracted state is returned. An image (here, white letters “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 297 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. 293 in the effect mode (color, sound, etc.) corresponding to the aura level 0. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the fully accommodated state to the 1/3 appearance state. Become. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in green indicating the aura level 1.

  Next, an operation effect of the third operation button 410 is started. When the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 remains in the 1/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, the message “Izai” on the blackout screen) (White character) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in the form with an aura member in the state of 1/3 appearance, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect decorated with light emission is performed (FIG. 298 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. And if operation of the operation button 410 by a player is detected, the following effect will be performed according to the preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (After this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image that informs the user of returning to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword state (in this case, “Izai” on the blackout screen) ) And an image showing the aura level are displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in the appearance of 2/3, and in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) of the above-described modification 1 → FIG. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when an operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image indicating an aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect ends (after this, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is obtained. An image notifying that the user is returning (in this case, a white character “Iza”) is displayed on the blackout screen, and an image indicating an aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to that in FIG. 292 (F2) in the first modification described above in FIG. 292 (F2) in FIG. The effect transition is traced (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIG. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In the above description, the range of visibility from the player is increased by changing the degree of uniting of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 at the operation timing when the aura level is increased. Not limited to. Even if the aura level is increased, the aura level is fixed without increasing the appearance level of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Izai” is displayed on the blackout screen), the determined aura level. You may be made to perform the stock-type coalescence which unites the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011 at a stretch so that it may become the appearance according to a level. Further, the object whose degree of appearance is increased in stages is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (the blade part 5011). For example, the state of the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) may be changed stepwise from the first sword state to the second sword state.

  As described above, in the second modification, since the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decorative body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in a movable state, it is surprisingly novel. Operation effects can be provided, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the stage is developed step by step by giving multiple operational opportunities to the player, it is possible to impress the player with great involvement in the stage and prevent the interest in the stage from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is reported so as to be recognizable even in subsequent effects, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation effects.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the sword decorative body 5001 described above. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword state is the It can operate up to the front center.

  When the changing pattern forms the reach state, the display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the bag is stationary in a state (initial state) visible from the player above the display area. Yes. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach production, after the image of the princess heading in the back of the kite is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image that suggests an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect period for accepting the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 starts when the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is started, and the player is prompted to operate the sword decorative body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also good. When a player's sword operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword extraction operation by the player refers to an operation in which the player grasps the handle 5012 of the sword decorative body 5001 in a sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, a sword operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation that allows the player to feel an operation different from his / her own sword operation through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as movement or vibration of the sword 5010 (or handle 5012) moving up and down. That's fine. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even when the player removes his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, unnecessary contact with the sword decorative body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) can be reduced, and failure or breakage of the movable body can be prevented. Can do.

  In the sword operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but according to the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword operation. You may do it.

  When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initially State) and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword state at the timing when the detection notification operation ends. You may do it.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is centered on the front surface overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). The drop display is movable so that only the hold display area is visible (all fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)), and then the princess's shadow is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. 5001 is maintaining the second extraction state (FIG. 301 (D2)) Note that a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time may be provided. The shadow color, the size of the shadow, and the comments that are displayed afterwards may be used to suggest the expectation level of the lottery result by Hime Reach (such as the winning expectation and the game profit when winning)

  Then, after the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the second sword state by the player's sword operation, that is, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, The sword decorative body 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decorative body 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the total fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has good visibility is displayed. An image of a princess who is surprised when the bag is removed is displayed (FIG. 302 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword operation has been performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current variable display is a hit, the hit with the smiling princess is notified. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) and (E2)), and an image for notifying the disagreement is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it comes off (FIGS. 302 (F1) and (F2)).

  When a player's sword operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the movable effect that the sword ornament 5001 moves to the center in the front left / right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the player cannot move because the player is holding it, an announcement or display such as “Please release the sword” is performed. Even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decorative body 5001, the performance itself proceeds, but the sword decorative body 5001 is operated by the player at the movable motion timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decorative body 5001 (FIG. 301 (D3)). When held in the performed position, it causes a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 has been moved in the left-right direction, the effect that is executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) have progressed. Since it is comprised so that game progress may not stagnate. Note that the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword ornament 5001, or is configured not to perform the movable effect. May be.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decorative body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword decoration operation (vertical movement) of the sword decorative body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operation position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. It can be moved in the left direction). That is, based on the sword operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword operation has been performed, increasing the player's operation value and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means can be operated in a stepwise manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right after operation) depending on the player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The left and right movable effects of the sword decorative body 5001 are effect display for the purpose of performing an effect that is integrated with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decorative body 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. Alternatively, a left-right direction movable effect that is displaced to the left (left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decorative body 5001 of this example is an upward / downward motion (a sword operation for pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from the bottom), the sword decorative body 5001 that is performed after the operation is based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 operates in a direction (left and right direction as in this example) different from the operation direction (in this case, the vertical direction) at the time of the player's operation.

  Also, when a player's sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player accurately determines the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword ornament 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, when the movable effect cannot be executed by contact with the sword decorative body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to release the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation effective period. Even after the operation means has been detected and notified, even contact is prohibited, so that the operation value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword decorative body 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 that is used in many ways. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern (A (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that a variation being executed is a big hit and an operation of the operation button 410 are performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In this reach effect, when the variation display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303 (A)), first, an operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. An operation promotion effect is started to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an expectation suggestion effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation to the operation button 410 by a player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting the big hit expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). Thereafter, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-reading effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation (FIG. 304 (N2)), the display is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A character that changes the held display may be displayed.

  Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the player presses the operation button 410, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 303 (M1) in which an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting a sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the message “Title chance to extract the sword” and the explanation of the operation “Take me a sword” message) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decorative body 5001 at this time has a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time has passed after entering the second sword state and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a knives operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, when the result of the current variation display is out of order, when the player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decoration pattern stop state “767” of the decorative symbol) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

  As described above, the pressing operation of the operation button 410 enables various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effects of the other operation means (sword ornament 5001). The subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and the decrease in the willingness to operate and the decrease in the game interest can be suppressed due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

  In the series of reach effects, the first operation (press operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (press operation and sword operation). The player is requested based on the above operation (the pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest that is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not appear instead.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. The operation means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword ornament 5001 rather than the operation button 410 having a lower expectation than the first sword ornament 5001. Is desirable.

(Other performance pattern 3 using sword ornament 5001)
Next, another reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310. 306 to 310 are diagrams for explaining screen transition of the effect display device 1600, state transition of the operation button 410, and operation transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) does not move based on the pressing operation, and is displayed in a deviating manner, the display is re-varied from the deviating manner and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1)-(P4) in the figure → R when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given or R when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In this case, when the display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306A), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , The message “Move the movable body with a single button stroke” is displayed (FIG. 306 (B)), then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. The prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 306 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light emission. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a previously set effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one stroke (one time) but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation effective period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do it. Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes an operation target later, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed in state from the sword storage state to the second sword extraction state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) moves and is a big hit, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is in a fully dropped state from the initial state. Is moved so as to become (FIG. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 that has been de-duplicated with the specific decorative member SDY (playing object) is displayed with an image (decorative symbol of the decorative symbol). Message of stop mode “777” and “great” is displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is only allowed to move by being stopped in small steps. Not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern with a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a rocking manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1)). The decorative design is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in a deviating manner (“767”) or a revived pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a revival start image ("Madaja") indicating that the variability display has not yet ended from the swinging display of the decorative pattern in the off-state in FIG. 308 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 308 (P3)), the decorative symbol is again reached and reduced in the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is displayed at the center of the screen. An operation effective suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a friendly samurai) is displayed (FIG. 308 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed eyes of the samurai are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). Thereby, the player raises a sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed blinking manner, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing from the sword insertion state to the first sword extraction state. The operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the set production pattern, and the specific decorative member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001. (Samurai character) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is an operation target is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern for which the sword ornament 5001 is an operation target.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmed image) in which sweat is blotted on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 309 (R1)). The operation of the operation button 410 is started while the operation button 410 is light-decorated while the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) continues to move in small increments, and an operation that prompts the user to press the operation button 410. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, if the operation button 410 is operated the required number of times, it is no longer decorated with light emission.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player presses the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative design displayed at the upper right of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible from the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), at this time, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the decoration symbol. Next, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is restored from the all-dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is displayed on the screen. An image for notifying the jackpot is displayed in the center (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) (FIG. 309 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of order, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small decorative movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword decorative body) in which the samurai who has closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens his eyes. (Determined image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state with the aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp that the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 is effective based on the image of the display area. At this time, whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, etc. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved in small increments, when the predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword state is reached and the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to perform a sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of order, when a player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is not dropped based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is again given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest that is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect without being displayed instead.

  In addition, in the above-described FIGS. 300 to 310, three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword ornament 5001 are given, but various effect modes may be combined. Thereby, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword ornaments)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 311 to 325, a pseudo continuous effect using the sword decorative body 5001 whose form is changed in stages according to the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (revariation) will be described. Pseudo-continuous production is an effect that temporarily changes the display of decorative symbols and re-variates them, and is performed in response to pseudo-continuous variation along with pseudo-continuous variation in which temporary suspension and re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. Here, the above-described temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears as if it has stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern for performing pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, a pseudo-continuous effect of an effect pattern that can be selected by lottery of effect contents by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Explained.

(Form of sword ornament)
First, with reference to FIG. 311, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example is demonstrated. The form of the sword decorative body 5001 up to the above has been provided with two types, the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member, but here, the form in which the sword part 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle part 5012. Are provided.

  FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decorative body 5001 here is provided in a two-stage form change by deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3. From the left and right side portions of the sheath portion 5020, the player It has an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, and its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction as in the aura member 5030 described above. 311 (A) to 3 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword storage state, and sequentially show the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. The sword decorative body 5001 is in any form of stage 0 form to stage 3 form according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the stage 0 configuration is a configuration in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 281 (A) and FIG. 283 (A), and no operation is required for any of the constituent members. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath part 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle part 5012 spreads and moves from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here can change the form without causing the sword decorative body 5001 to be in the second extracted state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can do.

(Example of simulated rendition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 312 to FIG. 325, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a diagram for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the main control board 1310 causes the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. A pseudo-continuous effect is performed when any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo-continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weakness) corresponding to each of six types of variation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected, When the variation pattern is a sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern), the sword LV2 weak variation pattern (sword LV2 strong variation pattern) is selected, and the variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern). ), The sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, and the pseudo resurrection LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Selected.

  In the production pattern, the number of times of quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) (1 to 3 times), the presence / absence of operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 according to the number of times of continuation, and the operation opportunity are given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). The production pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to the number of continuations of pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) 1 to 3 times. Further, “weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (semi-drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). In addition, the “pseudo sword LV1” gives a selection operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and continues selection of pseudo-sequential fluctuation (re-variation) by selecting the player not to operate. Indicates that the performance can be obtained. In addition, the “pseudo resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern that gives the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 for the first time of pseudo ream fluctuation (revariation). This indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is again performed after the end of the fall effect of the special decorative member SDY (a glimpse) based on the first operation opportunity of the variation. The details of the contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) increases, that is, as the shape change of the sword decorative body 5001 progresses, and the specific decorative member SDY The lower the fall position of the object), the higher the expectation degree is set. However, when the fall position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is a half fall, the number of times of continuous continuous fluctuation (revariation) is 1 It is set so that the expected degree is the same as when the specific decorative member SDY (striking object) is dropped all the time with a small production pattern. Specifically, the expected number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 performance pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the total falling sword Expectation level of LV1 strong performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 times, expectation degree of semi-falling sword LV2 weak performance pattern is 40%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) duration is 2 The expectation level of the sword LV2 strong performance pattern for the first and last drop is 50%, the expectation level of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern for the half-fall sword LV3 is 3% The expectation of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of 3 times of variation) and the total falling sword LV3 is set to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation varies depending on the selected variation pattern even if it is the same effect pattern, and the degree of expectation is set higher as the variation pattern has a higher expectation level. The expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% respectively when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern. It becomes. In addition, the expectation level of the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern is 47% and 74% when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 strong variation pattern and when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, respectively. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the expectation degree of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo-continuous effects of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 312 to 319 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of transition of effects of pseudo-continuous effects common to all effect patterns. FIG. 313 to FIG. 315 are diagrams showing transition examples of effects regarding whether or not an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given while pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is being performed. FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 (the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character)) during the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) common to all the effect patterns. is there. FIG. 317 and FIG. 318 are diagrams showing an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating an example of effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. FIG. 321 to FIG. 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) in the pseudo-continuous effect. FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) 322 is a sword LV2 weak performance pattern (sword LV2 strong performance pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern), and FIG. 324 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern). FIG. 325 shows a pseudo resurrection LV1 effect pattern. Below, it demonstrates along the example of an effect transition in case a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed in the effect before a variable display is started and it will be in a reach state.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the heel is visible from the player above the display area (initial state) ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword is in the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and 3 (C), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification “100 chances if you can defeat 100 bodies” message, Samurai Is displayed to indicate to the player that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a quasi-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are changed again for the player. Inform you. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. Thus, since the form of the sword ornament 5001 and the effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) are notified at the time of temporary stop display just before the pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) starts, the player It is possible to grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

  When the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above. In addition, the pseudo continuous sword pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so as to act on the sword decorative body 5001, and the change of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes in form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The shape change of the sword ornament 5001 at this time is the timing at which the player's line of sight moves to the sword ornament 5001 from the effect display in which pseudo-variation (revariation) is started and moved toward the sword ornament 5001. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). It should be noted that the shape change timing of the sword ornament 5001 may be before the start of pseudo-variation (re-variation). For example, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed together with the display of the pseudo-continuous sword at the time of FIG. Alternatively, pseudo continuous variation (revariation) may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state while being enlarged and displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is the second sword decoration sword decoration body 5001 that is enabled to be operated by the player being used as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the player is displayed. Subsequent effects include a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is effective in operation (an effect pattern with “LV1” in the name) and a pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is not effective in operation (name). To “LV2” or “LV3”). Below, an example of an effect transition is demonstrated in order about nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak production pattern / Sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that makes the sword decorative body 5001 effective as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of the effect transition will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (G ), An operation confirmation image (image with a samurai eye open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for the player to request an aggressive operation is given is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, an expectation notification effect by a fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) is performed according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), when a player's sword operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) ) Is moved from the initial state to the fall state. Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. An expected degree notification image (“100 body defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the total fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by a later-described half-fall state. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Here, the expectation degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Further, when the set production pattern is a “weak” production pattern, when a player's sword operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-dropped state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps with the upper half region of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view. . Then, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword state by the player's sword insertion operation and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is returned from the half-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the above-described FIG. 312 (B). An expected degree notification image (“50 body defeat!”) Is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001. Similarly to the “strong” performance pattern, the expectation notification image at this time is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  If no sword operation by the player is detected within the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the set production pattern is a “strong” production pattern or a “weak” production pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has ended without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  When the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. The Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. Thus, by operating when the sword decorative body 5001 is required to be delivered, the player can perform the reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object). Can be greeted. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have a different expectation every time, so that the player's willingness to operate is suppressed, and further, the decline in the game interest for uniform production is suppressed can do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 321, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decorative body 5001 in the first stage is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an opportunity to operate. When the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. When there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak production pattern / Sword LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 313 and FIG. 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decorative body 5001 is not provided at the operation opportunity provision timing of the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). After tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggesting image shown in FIG. 312 (G). A continuation image indicating that the samurai's eyes are closed is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second quasi-continuous change (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, at the temporary stop display just before the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and effect level (number of quasi-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second quasi-continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  When the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is cracked left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 313 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form of the sword decorative body 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 2 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing a result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the person is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

  Here, when the set production pattern is the sword LV2 weak production pattern or the sword LV2 strong production pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for requesting an aggressive operation is given to the player is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the same second sword state (stage 2 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation valid period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 314 (V4)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. In addition, when no sword operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 does not depend on whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 322, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak production pattern and the sword LV2 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 2 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. And when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 If the player feels thrilled and makes the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), An operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak production pattern / Sword LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 314 and FIG. 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that makes the sword ornament 5001 effective as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. An example of effect transition when there is The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the sword LV3 weak production pattern or the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the sword ornament is applied at the operation opportunity giving timing of the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) shown in FIG. 314 (V1). Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed, and the second extraction state is displayed. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 314 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the third quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is displayed on the pseudo-ream sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) and the sword decorative body 5001. The sword decorative body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of temporary stop display just before the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) starts, the form and the production level (number of pseudo continuous variations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). Since the notification is made, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, when the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is started, the pseudo continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved and displayed toward the sword decorative body 5001 so that the effect display acts on the sword decorative body 5001, and a re-variation of the decorative design is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative part 5012b protrudes above the first decorative part 5012a so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 314 (V8)). It should be noted that the shape change timing from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form of the sword ornament 5001 and the state change timing from the sword state to the second sword state may be set to be simultaneous. In addition, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 may not be changed every time according to the number of pseudo-continuous changes, and may be changed in a plurality of stages collectively when the final stage is reached. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the sword ornament 5001 changes at a stroke when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword ornament 5001. Impressing the powerful movement, it can attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player as the operating means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

  Here, when the set production patterns are the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (revariation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the eyes of the samurai are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) indicating that an operation opportunity for the player to request an active operation is given is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). . Then, while the operation effective period of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword decorative body 5001 to be stored in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 3 form) as the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!”. (FIG. 315 (X4)). Then, when a sword operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, an expectation notification effect is performed by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended. If the player does not detect a sword operation during the operation valid period, the effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed indicating that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has been completed without performing the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle). (See FIG. 318 (W2)). In other words, the player is prevented from grasping the expectation of the variation display result when the player does not detect the sword insertion operation within the operation valid period. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword after the operation valid period ends. Here, the runaway image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation).

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 323, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak production pattern and the sword LV3 strong production pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed and the second pseudo continuous variation (revariation) occur. In the period T2 in which the sword ornament 5001 is not given an opportunity to operate, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) is performed. Give the operator an opportunity to operate. And when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle object) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) ( FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 312 (G)), the sword ornament 5001 in an operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the second pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo-sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo-sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 317 and FIG. 318, the sword ornament 5001 is made effective as the operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), but the pseudo continuous change is made by selecting that the player does not operate. An effect transition example in the case where a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire continuation (level change effect) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  When the set production pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given at the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) operation opportunity provision timing. . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for requesting the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) to FIG. 313 (T1), the operation area shown in FIG. 313 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image (a message “Opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for requesting the player to select whether or not to perform an operation from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1 )). Then, the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect that prompts the user to select the sword ornament operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword image in the same second sword state (stage 1 form) as the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation valid period are shown together with a message “Please select whether you want to place the sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern). Subsequent transition of effects greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player performs a sword operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the basic effect pattern sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is followed.

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed ends, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned from the second sword state in the first stage to the initial sword state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Is it an opportunity ...”) is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (glare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, getaway!” Indicating that the pseudo decoration variation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation valid period. When detected, the operation is detected in the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern) of the basic performance pattern as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3) is displayed in a normal manner with a decorative pattern (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern of the normal mode at the same timing as the timing predetermined in the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect the sword operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation effective period during which the operation is performed is completed, the operation pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-described FIG. 317 (Z2) to the continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation. Then, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern, FIG. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIG. 314 (V5) to (V8) ) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 316 (U5) is followed.

  In this way, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) has a greatly different effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is a sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and reach the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, you will not only be able to acquire the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach a reach effect without knowing the degree of expectation you know if you were operating it originally . Further, when the selected variation pattern is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect by continuing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) as in the case of the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if an operation is performed, an effect (continuous change in the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 due to a level-up effect) caused by continuing pseudo-variation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is missed and the form of the sword decorative body 5001 is initialized. It will return to form. The operation at the selection operation opportunity is the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 that is not known to the player, and the operation during the operation effective period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that results in disadvantageous operation results. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in game entertainment that results from a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), in the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation). When the player operates the sword ornament 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form when the selection operation opportunity is selected to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword ornament 5001, the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is increased to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, the number of operations set in advance in the production pattern is required, but in this example, an opportunity for two operations (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance. The granting ends at the opportunity, and a novel effect that more reflects the player's intention can be provided. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate with respect to an operation effect that does not appear instead, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 can change from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set according to the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the player's operation, the initial form to the stage 1 form You can see only the changes until you reach the reach. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected variation pattern (the set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, when the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character). . If the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped, and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the form is further changed (leveled up) to become the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or higher than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable that the degree of expectation is higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 320 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the variation pattern, but is not limited thereto. For example, the expectation degree of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own selection feeling, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the variation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the first stage is formed in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (revariation) is performed. Is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by an operation of the player is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. Further, when the variation pattern selected at this time is a sword LV3 weak variation pattern or a sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since three quasi-continuous variations (revariations) are inherently provided, a specific decoration is provided. After the fall effect of the member SDY, the normal pattern variation is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern. When the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo continuous variations (revariations) are continued, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. In the period T2 during which (revariation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 during which the third pseudo variation (revariation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And enable the player to have operational opportunities. And when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) falls half by the player's operation is performed. Moreover, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a fall effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) completely falls by the player's operation is performed. If no player operation is detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed for either effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → FIG. 317). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) continues (when set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern), The decorative body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword state with the end of the operation effective period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the second quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it increases the throbbing feeling of the player (see FIG. 314 (V1)), the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) without generating an operation effective period for effectively receiving the player's operation. Is returned to the sword state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament undergoes the third pseudo-continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

  Then, simultaneously with the start of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) changes from the initial state to the half-dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” performance pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) changes from the initial state to the total fall state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. An expectation degree notification image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the sword operation during the operation valid period and the quasi-continuous variation (revariation) is not continued (when the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV1 strong variation pattern is set), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword state to the sword state as the operation effective period ends, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Pseudo Resurrection Sword LV1 production pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 319, after following the same effect transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, and appearing as if entering the reach effect as it is, the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is restored. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

  When the set production pattern is a pseudo-resurrection sword LV1 production pattern, as in the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, the above-described FIG. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) to (T3) Follow production transition. If an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the same effect as in FIGS. 316 (U3), (U4), and (U5) described above is shown in FIG. After following the effect transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo continuous variation by the pseudo continuous sword design is resumed. If no operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword storage state with the end of the operation valid period, as in other production patterns, In place of the above-described FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2), the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 without the effect of dropping the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

  The resumption and resumption of the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) is performed at the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. Is temporarily stopped with a pseudo-sword design that is not prepared for the left and right decorative designs, specifically, a pseudo-sword design in a form indicating the form and production level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001. As a result, the player is notified (FIG. 319 (UA4)). The sword image and effect level 3 of the sword decorative body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo continuous sword pattern at this time. At this time, there is no change in the sword decorative body 5001, and the initial form (sword storage state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of temporary stop display immediately before the start of the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) in the stage 3 form (FIG. 319 (UA4)), the form and effect level of the sword decorative body 5001 in the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of pseudo-continuous change (re-change) and face it.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) described above is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the effect display is applied to the sword decorative body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. The sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decorative part 5012a, and the second decorative part 5012b are operated so that both decorative parts can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body. (FIG. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually moved from the sword state to the second sword state. The state changes to (FIG. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decorative body 5001 changes its shape at once from a plurality of stages from the initial form to the stage 3 form, it can impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) that can be operated by the player is made effective as an operation means, and the above-described FIG. 315 (X1) to (X5) are given. When an operation by the player is detected after tracing the effect transition, the specific decorative member SDY (in accordance with whether or not the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, is not illustrated. The type of the fall effect of the 簾 (character) is determined. When the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is once in a semi-dropped state, so that the level is raised and the above-described FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → An expected degree notification effect by the entire fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the semi-drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

  In the case where an operation by the player is not detected at an operation opportunity for enabling the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as an operation means, the operation effective period ends as in the case of other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decorative body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword insertion state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character), and the pseudo continuous variation (revariation). A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (revariation) is terminated.

  In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern described above is followed, and when the quasi-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is jumped over and the stage 3 form The same level of performance as the third stage (the third pseudo-variation (re-variation) production in the basic production pattern) will be performed, so the player will be surprised and reach with greater expectations than the other production patterns. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous change (re-change), or the subsequent fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) becomes a semi-fall, the player does not feel distracted. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-variation (re-variation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320 (B) and FIG. 325, the operation execution timings of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is made effective as the operation means in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed. Give players an opportunity to operate. At this time, regardless of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the drop effect (expectation notification) that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) falls half by the player's operation Production). Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, after the first quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) is finished and once the display of the decorative pattern variation is returned to the normal mode, the third quasi-continuous variation (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the shape of the sword decorative body 5001 is changed to the stage 3 form. Then, the stage 3 form sword ornament 5001 is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, if the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is performed in the period T1, the fall effect (expectedness notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is completely dropped by the player's operation. Production). Moreover, when the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) is not performed in the period T1, the fall in which the specific decorative member SDY (Samurai character) falls half by the player's operation. Production (expectation notification production) is performed. Note that when there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form simultaneously with the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 312 (E)). Thereafter, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. No, after raising the player's thrilling feeling and allowing the player to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. 313 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword insertion state and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) changes from the initial state to the semi-dropped state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first quasi-continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318). (See W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decoration pattern of the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4)). )reference).

  At the same time as the quasi-continuous change (re-change) is resumed, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). After that, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? No, the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 in the operable state (second sword state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the second extraction state to the sword insertion state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is changed from the initial state to the fully dropped state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the revival pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the total fall in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expectation degree notification image of the expectation degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown in the drawings, if the specific decoration member SDY (a combination object) is not dropped in the first pseudo continuous change (revariation), the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is moved from the initial state. It changes to a semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the expectation degree notification image corresponding to the semi-falling is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword insertion operation during the operation effective period, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the second sword state to the sword storage state with the end of the operation effective period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change shape. Then, at the end of the quasi-continuous change (revariation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 318 (W2 )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect using the sword decorative body 5001, the pseudo continuous change frequency is 2 times and 3 times in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed a plurality of times. If it is less than that, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state every time the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is made, and the player can operate, but an operation effective period is provided. (Without giving the player an opportunity to operate), and returning to the sword state. For this reason, since the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decorative body 5001 becomes operable, the player is interested in the sword decorative body 5001 as the operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is characterized in that the sword decorative body 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword decorative body 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a beneficial effect for the player by the player's operation. Make the player's choice of operation carefully. Therefore, interest can be given to the operation in the sword decorative body 5001, and a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the sword ornament 5001 can change in form step by step until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation valid period is generated), the player's expectation and interest are increased step by step. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. It should be noted that during the period from when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the operating state and the second sword extraction state (operating position) to when the operation effective period is generated, the player operates the operating mode at the operating position (form, light emission, movable Etc.) is preferably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can check the operation mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, so that the operation effective period is generated as soon as the second sword state is entered, and the mode of the operation means cannot be checked. It is possible to dispel the concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by shifting to the operation effect.

  In addition, although the stage change of the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 was shown with the form, it is not restricted to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emission mode or operation mode of the sword ornament 5001, may be changed in stages in correspondence with the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change).

(Application to pre-reading production)
In the above description, the sword effect in the pseudo-reach reach effect has been described, but it can also be executed as a pre-read effect. The case of applying to pre-reading effects will be described below. In the following, an example will be described in which the third hold is a prefetch effect target and the katana LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetch effect pattern.

  When a hold that is a prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 312 (B) to (F) described above are performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. Note that the sword decorative body 5001 is different in that the second sword extraction state is limited when an operation opportunity is given (operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effects as those shown in FIG. 312 (G) → FIG. Further, in the next fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effects as the above-described FIG. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. Is called. Note that, as described above, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state in the pre-reading effect only when the operation effective period occurs. Here, the operation effective period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 that is the target of the pre-reading effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decorative body 5001 shown in FIG. To the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetching effect is ended.

  The state change of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword state to the second sword state is limited to the generation timing of the operation valid period, but even if the gradual form change is performed at the end of the change display, the next change display It may be performed at the start. In the pre-reading effect, the same effect as the pseudo-reach reach effect is achieved.

(Indication before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggesting effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 is effective in operation or the sword decorative body 5001 is effective in operation among a plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse). . Specifically, the operation effective period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (the black object) is positioned at the initial position as an suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggesting effect using the specific decorative member SDY (the black object). There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation effective period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and a sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410) In the case where the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) that generates the operation effective period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is positioned at the initial position even during the operation effective period. Is performed, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled with a probability of 70% (including a step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation | movement of the specific decoration member SDY (a glimpse) in the 1st suggestion pattern and the 2nd suggestion pattern of the suggestion effect before operation is demonstrated.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIG. 326 and FIG. 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach | attainment effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed when it determines that operation is effective. In this reach effect, an operation button that is determined in advance to be validated by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 when three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)). The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means of 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) maintains the initial position. Further, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are not changed.

  Then, an operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is validated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is made effective at a higher rate than the sword decorative body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed with the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the state of the sword into the second sword state (form with the aura member), so that the player can perform the sword insertion operation.

  In the above-described FIG. 326 (C) or (D), when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected, The specific decorative member SDY (glazing accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
In FIG. 328, when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled during the reach effect as in the first suggestion pattern described above, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. In FIG. 329, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is once enabled and the sword decoration 5001 is not enabled. It is a figure shown about the suggestion effect before operation of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes operation effective.

  As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, there is an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is displayed together with the display of the operation effect suggestion image. It operates in a small fall state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) that is determined to be effective in advance in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is validated, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is in the suggested position, the sword decorative body 5001 is made effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword decorative body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation effective period for the sword decorative body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (moving accessory) is operating at the suggested position. Is generated. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword insertion operation of the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with an aura), so that the player can perform a sword insertion operation. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, there is a case where the pre-operation suggesting effect is executed with the second suggestion pattern although the rate is low. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved from the state operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) may be moved from the state operating to the suggestion position without being returned to the initial state to the entire fall state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation on the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective in operation is detected in FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-described FIG. 326 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the current variation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the combination object) is released. The image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “brilliant” message) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the present variable display is out of order, the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is not moved while maintaining the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the outage. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In addition, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the operation efficiency of the sword decorative body 5001 is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the motion, so that the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is attached. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, In addition to the basic pattern in which the effect transition of FIG. 328 (AA1) → (AA3) described above is followed until the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the operation button 410 is once enabled, and then the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is performed before the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the display of the operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to that of FIG. 328 (AA1) described above and the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) are performed (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the player detects a pressing operation of the operation button 410 during the operation effective period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 described above is not performed, and the switching suggests switching of the operation means that is effective. The suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state (aura-equipped form), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation means that is effective for operation is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001. A switching notification image (a message of “chance to pull out a sword” “a message of having you put a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 329 (BB4)). In the meantime, the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) has been moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword ornament 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 327).

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect) in the above-described FIG. 329 (BB2). It is only necessary that the sword ornament 5001 is operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern is not limited to the second suggestion pattern, but may be selectable when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle character) is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is enabled. ) Can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. In the second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state in which the expected validity is high and the specific decorative member SDY (a spear object) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, it is suggested before the operation. The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is also used for the result notification after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 327), a series of falling effects are made from the up and down movement of the suggestion effect before the operation. It can be shown in the production of this, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the entertainment interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse), that is, the expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body is effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the lighting of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword decorative body 5001 to the second extraction state, but also the operation means to be effective in operation is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is activated once (or after it appears that the operation is validated) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is located at the suggested position, D) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it can be expected that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 may become effective thereafter. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is effective is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 326 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (glare) is viewed from the initial position in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to operate in a small fall state (suggested position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move in small increments between the initial position and the suggested position. In addition, when the operation effective period is generated thereafter, the specific decorative member SDY (saddle) is returned to the initial position (still). As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player provides an operation effect suggestion by the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the sword decorative body 5001 is operated effectively. The player strongly desires that the operation valid period is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (a combination object) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggested position. The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Produce with a pattern. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Based on the establishment of a specific performance execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation related to privilege provision). 100% or 0% may be expected for the privilege grant suggested as a result of the specific operation time effect.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for providing a privilege when operated) In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include another operating means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There are cases where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) (when a specific performance execution condition is satisfied when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation opportunity is not performed. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (givenness expectation degree) related to privilege grant is higher than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. 100% or 0% may be expected for providing the privilege suggested when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decorative body 5001).

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is performed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the stage is in a previous stage where the stage has not yet been performed and the operation is just being performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation related to the provision of a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). So that even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), the game entertainment can be improved through such operation-related productions. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such a stunning property. In the case where the operation opportunity is given, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (production reception is possible),
The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled after the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is enabled (allowing for receiving the effect). ) The first production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is activated without producing the “specific operation-related production” (production reception is possible). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode for generating a valid period (production reception period) are prepared, and the operation on the operation button 410 is validated (production) by executing one of the production modes. An effective period (production reception period) to be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when a period in which an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs. Regardless of the case in which a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) can accept the production occurs, it is common (specification prior to the occurrence of those periods) ) Operation-related effects can be executed, so that it is possible to have an interesting aspect as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can be accepted. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that such a common (specific) operation-related effect corresponds to one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started. An effect reception period will be generated. At least when the effect starts to be produced, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period. It is desirable to keep secret.

  Hereinafter, several production modes that can be adopted when such a common (specific) operation-related production will be described. In each of the following explanation examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means that are targets of common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any production reception period occurs after execution of a common (specific) operation-related production. ) If any production reception period occurs without the execution of the operation related production, the content of the production may be omitted. However, the content of the production in the case where any production acceptance period occurs without executing the common (specific) operation-related production is as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 appears without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the game is executed, or common during the jackpot game execution period A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each effect described below can be executed in combination with each other, which will be described later, as appropriate, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each effect described above. Is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each of the effects described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Thus, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform effects of different examples described later. The same can be said between the productions of different examples described later.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 330 and 331, after a specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can receive an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production (1st production aspect).

  FIG. 330 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 330 (b) progress, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display prompting to operate any one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) in a state where each area is stopped and displayed (in this case, a character display such as “operate”) and an effect reception The production situation in which a bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period appears.

  According to such a production mode, although the operation can be received for at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which of the productions can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) is the same in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means before the operation can be accepted for the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001). Common (specific) operation-related relations as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c) over a period until an operation on at least one of (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for production. The production is executed.

  Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the content of the production of the specific operation-related production is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). Middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration image may be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more surely conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for the production, the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration 5001 It is more desirable that the time required from the execution of a specific operation-related effect (production start) to the generation of the effect reception period is set to be the same when the reception period occurs.

  In addition, as an operation instruction to be displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any of the operation means (“operate” Etc.), or always operating a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means regardless of how each of the operation means can receive a production. It is also possible to perform a display prompting the user. In short, even if an operation instruction is given, the same effect mode appears in both the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the situation where the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can receive the production.

  Also, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is concealed whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted. Even when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted for production, and also when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted for production (when in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 may be in a non-light-emitting state, or light emitting means may be provided on the sword decorative body 5001 side to provide a connection between the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. 330C appears is that only the operation of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 with respect to the operation buttons 410 is performed. Whether it is in the first situation where it is possible to accept the production, whether it is in the second situation where only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is acceptable, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Both are set to be in any one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs among the plurality of situations, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation where an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate of occurrence of

  In this effect example (first effect mode), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first condition (the operation button 410) or the third condition (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is present. Is performed (whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or the second situation (sword ornament 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when “GG” in the figure is made progress), an effect is accepted and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the operation effect, regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display effect. ("Chance!") Is executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and making any of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception In addition, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation regardless of the situation shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute control for setting the operating means to the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), the operation is performed in response to the effect reception even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. It is possible to execute control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side that is not performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect is received as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and an operation effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the button 410 is not operated and the sword decorative body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the production reception is generated and the on-stage operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is executed. ”Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the performance situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword operation on the sword decorative body 5001, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in the sword position in response to the performance reception. Instead of returning to the (sword state), it is possible to execute control to maintain the blade position (sword state). As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword position (sword state) to the sword position (sword state) based on an operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword state. Occasionally there will be a performance during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side, the sword ornament at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to learn the actual feeling that the operation effect due to the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 side is being executed.

  Then, after the operation-time effects (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) are performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 331 (e), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side is selected. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated (sword insertion position (sword insertion state)). Control to return to is performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  330 and FIG. 331, according to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 330 and FIG. 331, specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001). 5001) is the case where the production can be accepted and the case where the production cannot be accepted, the common (specific) operation-related production starts, and the common (specific) where the production is started. While an operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 can be receivable at the same time, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the other operation means (for example, the operation button 410) have effects respectively. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) can accept an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is in effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can be receivable without being accepted, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related rendition is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decorative body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production, the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the production. You will be able to be confused as if not. That is, in this case, when an effect is received, it becomes possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decorative body 5001, which is the side with a higher rate of expectation. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to add interest about which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is consumed by the amount of such erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the production (the side where the production reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed, Although the reception of the production required for the execution of the production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is not established, the operation is detected, and the operation on the side where the production can be accepted based on the detection. You may make it perform control which ends the production reception period with respect to a means at the time. According to such a configuration, since there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost, it is urged to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

  Also, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side. However, the operation effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decorative body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) If an effect on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the game entertainment can be improved more appropriately.

  Further, when preparing another production mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other production mode. When the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001). In either case, it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c). That is, in this case, when there is an operation on the first operating means when the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is set while the common (specific) operation-related production is performed, When another production mode is executed as an operation-time production, while a common (specific) operation-related production is performed, the production reception period related to the generation of the other production mode is not set (No. When an operation for the first operation means is performed during the time period for receiving the effect for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be performed. In short, when an effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when making another production | generation aspect appear as an operation time production, in addition to the production aspect performed with the operation time production | generation on the 2nd operation means side, it does not make the said other production aspect appear, but 2nd operation The operation-time effect may be performed as effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 It is supposed that the setting is made so as to correspond to any one of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the presentation is accepted, the same operation-time effect appears. In the third situation, the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that an effect or another effect aspect (different from the operation effects in the first situation and the second situation) should appear. However, in the example of the production, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  In addition, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), the player does not perform an operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the player has not performed the operation is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Second production mode]
FIG. 332 to FIG. 335 are executed as effects indicating the progress of the effect until a specific operation-related effect appears in either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears as a result of the above, it is suggested that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production (2nd production aspect) suggested that the production reception period with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 generate | occur | produces among these.

  In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal gaming state, the display of variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 332 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image of the lightning image IZ acting on these images BTG and SYG is depicted. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 can receive the production, suggesting that operations on any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decorative body 5001) will soon be able to receive the production. Will be able to.

  In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 332 (b) progress, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. There is an effect of pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

  In other words, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are “the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press against each other, An effect is received for the operation button 410 when an effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effects shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and (c) are “the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001. This is equivalent to a “specific operation-related effect that can appear before the occurrence of these periods”.

  Note that the left diagram in FIG. 332 (c) depicts how the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right diagram shows the sword decoration image SYG displayed. Describes the prevailing situation of remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance situation changes with time.

  FIG. 333 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. An effect depicting the above is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will soon be granted while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the production (the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 among the operation means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect accepting period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is made to emit light, and the operation on the operation button 410 is prompted.

  It should be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 333 (d) are not progressed through the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effects. There is a case where an effect is developed (for example, an effect is developed from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)). However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher.

  In addition, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 through a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio that the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without passing through (FIG. 333 (d)). It is desirable to increase the value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the dramatic delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  FIG. 333 (e) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. This is a depiction of the performance during operation.

  The operational effect shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as in FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second according to the reception of the presentation even though the operation is performed on the operation button 410 by the player. The same is true in that the control for reciprocating between the positions (control for setting the operation state) can be executed. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “hot heat!” Suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of presentation modes, and to display one of these presentation modes according to the reception of the presentation, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and any of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 333 (f). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword ornament 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed (the reach effect is started). Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-operating state (sword storage state)) at an earlier stage. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decorative body 5001 has at least half or more of a period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable that the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword state) is continued over a period of time. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is within the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  In other words, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is executed that suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be accepted for production (the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “Take out the sword” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state in which the effect can be received (that is during the effect receiving period for the sword decorative body 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 including the sword decorative body 5001 (the sword decorative body 5001 itself may be turned on) is turned on. By doing so, an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is urged.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is not progressed through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.), and without the specific operation-related effect. There is a case where an effect progress (for example, an effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) may occur. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without passing through the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege be higher. Still further, when the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without performing the specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than the case, and the expectation for granting a privilege is made lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 334 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the sword decorative body 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a depiction of the performance during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. In 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, although the production mode such as “Intense heat !!”, which indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the production reception, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. “Chance!” May be displayed. Similarly to this, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, there is an effect mode that does not perform the operation of displacing to the front side of the display area, and any of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. Thus, the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), based on the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the effect aspect of the sword ornament 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plural aspects ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible, and the degree of expectation required for granting a bonus such as a big hit depends on which of these forms appears The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decorative body 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is maintained in the sword state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decorative body 5001 is kept in the sword state and thereafter the sword decorative body 5001 is brought into the sword state (for example, during the period when the reach production is performed). An operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and at that time, an operation-time effect according to the operation to the state of the sword can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to two operation steps for one operation means (sword decoration body 5001), and the first step operation (operation to the sword state) and the second step operation are performed. Since the operation effects are performed according to each operation (operation to the sword state), not only when the operation on the operation means (sword decorative body 5001) is performed, the first stage In the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword state) is performed to the time when the second operation (operation to the sword state) is performed, it is expected to favorably maintain the gaming interest for the operation. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation have different contents.

  Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage is performed, the sword decorative body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. In this case, it is desirable not to be given the second stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained at a position where the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state) can be given (the sword state) in the operation stage production corresponding to the first stage operation. You may make it perform as an effect which suggests the expectation degree of no. That is, when the sword decorative body 5001 is not maintained in the sword state but returned to the sword state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword state to the sword state). It is clear that it will be said. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  As a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 334 (h)) corresponding to the operation at the first stage, if the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state, when a predetermined time has elapsed (reach effect) Control is performed to return the sword decorative body 5001 to a non-driven state (sword storage state)) at a stage prior to the start of). In this case, however, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its operating state (reciprocating) over a period of at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side until it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance in the sword state. In addition, regarding the sword decorative body 5001, the power consumed by stopping the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) to prevent the driving force from being applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). Thus, an effect depicting the state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the predetermined time has elapsed since the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) or FIG. Or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. Note that which content of the effect appears is determined in advance in the determination process of the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)). Here, the lightning image IZ is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), an instruction display prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in FIG. Thereby, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is.

  FIG. 335 (k) shows that as a result of the development shown in FIG. 335 (j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in 靄 MY, and even its outline is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggested that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) appears. Thus, it becomes possible to give a suspicion that the production reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (in this case, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is clearly shown for which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  In FIG. 335 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 335 (k), the outer shape of 靄 MY approaches the sword decorative body 5001 (sword decorative image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a performance that depicts the appearance.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur depending on the outer shape of the 靄 MY. Will be able to.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) from FIG. 335 (k), and until which of the plurality of operation means the production reception period occurs is clearly indicated. This suggests that the remaining time is less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i) further progresses and 靄 MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 334 is displayed. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 will remain, so that the game entertainment is maintained. Will be able to.

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 333 (d) and 335 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by 靄 MY (FIG. 335 (k)), and further When the production progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 334 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) So that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and (k) is also concealed from which of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) in the production example (second production mode) with the operation button 410 provided as operable operation means, FIG. 333 (e) As in the effect situation shown in FIG. 4, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where no operation by the player is performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side that has not been operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 336 to 339 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal game state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 will soon be able to receive an effect.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are adopted as such a predetermined movable member, and the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated respectively. Thus, it is easy for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 to be ready to receive an effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is supposed to be recognizable. Here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position. Each of them at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, it is an operating means that still has time left until the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time until the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the symbol change ends, It can be suitably maintained.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600 but by each operation by the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 336 (b)). After the start, basically, the same production progress as the second production mode is made.

  For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The production contents are as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are operated from their initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are different from the initial position (position when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state where driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is extended as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and an operation opportunity is immediately given, When the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally ended, it is necessary to operate the operation unit on the side where the effect can be accepted at least to the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related effects are further extended for the time required for such operations, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced by such an extension.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (non-drive position) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is made to position as an operation state (state which applied driving force) in a different position (for example, intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is ended and an effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur The operation means on the other side can be moved to the initial position only in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the extension of the operation-related effects. Also, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. Except for being displayed as corresponding to “410”, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are moved to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. These are positioned as operating states (states where driving force is applied) at positions different from the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and 336 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driven position). In contrast, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are different from each other, so that their matching will be soon. It can be suggested that the illustrated effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a movable operation button 410 "at a certain time, the content of the production is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-drive), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Become so.

  As an effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first performed. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”) You may make it display the bar display which shows the remaining time of a reception period. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, so that the deviation of these modes is soon filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 337 (g), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. Except for the fact that the instruction content is “push in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, the effect as described with reference to FIG. It is the contents.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving), the extension of the operation-related effects is preferably suppressed. Will come to be.

  In addition, as the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (desirably displayed in a manner moved to the operation position”). After performing the display effect, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display for prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (characters such as “push”) Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is different from the “mode moved to the operation position”. As described above, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effects is displayed as a mode different from the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 at that time. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

  When the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driven position).

  After such an operation-time effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 338 (j), a reach state can be formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. Except for being displayed as corresponding to a certain movable operation button 410 ", the contents of the production are as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively in the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that there is still no possibility that an effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will still occur. Will be able to.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is performed, the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l). The contents of the street will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable to make the outer shape of 靄 MY closer to the sword decorative body 5001 at the operation position than the sword decorative body 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG. It can also be said that the production suggests that a production reception period for the body 5001 occurs.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is kept such that the outer shape of the heel MY does not necessarily approach the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG). ) Is set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and (l) also conceals which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In this effect example (third effect mode), the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decorative body 5001 are different drive sources. Alternatively, the same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” appears as a production result in which a specific operation-related production is performed, The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the operation on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG imitating a sword ornament 5001 (second display mode)” appears as a result of a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When an operation opportunity is given only to the sword decorative body 5001 of the body 5001 and an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received, an effect during operation on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination While either one of them is made to appear, even when the sword-playing side operation is performed, based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination, the production at the time of success (specific decoration member SDY is operated) and the production at the time of failure (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is caused to appear, and the contents of the effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

  It should be noted that the operation effect on the button side and the operation effect on the sword accessory side are the same effects on the display effect performed on the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it be contents.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples related to a specific operation-related production, the production operation is given to which of the plurality of operation means is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is given. An operation opportunity was given to the system. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of the operation that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means, regardless of which effect results appear, such as pushing between the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state, or a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword state is placed in the sword state with respect to one operation means. The operation may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword state and the extracted state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any manner in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decorative body 5001 be operated in the sword insertion state or the sword extraction state when an effect result indicating whether or not to perform the operation is shown.

  In addition, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the symbol variation execution period, when the symbol variation is in the hold state (which was digested before this) You may make it perform the effect suggested from the execution period of a symbol fluctuation. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in a suspended state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable to operate each of a plurality of operating means provided.

  In the above-described second and third effect forms and other examples thereof, as specific operation-related effects, a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images are not necessarily displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while it is suggested that an effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period occurs. Accordingly, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means, or the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. Either BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) or a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of a specific operation-related effect. When the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ) that has been executed is executed as the content of the effect, the specific operation-related effect is determined for which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestion. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one of two rocks. When lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When lightning falls on the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock, so that the effect can be advanced to the effects shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on a rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, it is possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIG. 333 (d) and FIG. 334 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the effect progress as effect content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, there are specific cases in which a production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and a production reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the time required from the time when the operation-related effects are executed (the effect start) to the time when the effect reception period occurs. Moreover, it is desirable to set the production reception period to occur for the same period of time even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means after a specific operation-related production is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated according to which of the effect modes is performed. You may make it the ratio set with respect to the specific operation means among several operation means differ. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third production modes and other examples thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production. When operating the operation means on the side (FIG. 333 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operation means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, the time when the operation is performed is not used as a reference, and the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated until the operation is ended depending on at which timing in the production reception period the operation is performed. It is desirable to vary the length of time.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the time remaining in the effect reception period is short, and the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has struggled by operating the operating means on the side that is not shown in the specific operation-related effects. Therefore, depending on at which timing in the production reception period it is operated (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that has not been operated is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time until (“even if the operation means on the side indicated by a specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was received and the effect during the operation was executed” If the time length for appealing the player to the player is made different, the game interest can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, when none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. All may be operated.

  Also, during the period from when the specific operation-related effect is started to when the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect that suggests the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed (here, It is possible to operate the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) more reliably based on the stage reception within the stage reception period after the specific operation-related stage is performed. It is desirable to make it possible.

  Moreover, it corresponds to any one of images that can appear in the effect result after the start of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period related to a specific effect (an effect such as operating a specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to produce a special production mode as if the production result was shown and the production result ended even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production was performed. During this time, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. When a specific operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received, a predetermined effect is performed based on the reception of the effect. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the high-expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of a specific operation-related effect, the expectation is relatively high among a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game entertainment when the player knows that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In addition, when the specific operation-related effects relating to a plurality of operation means are in the middle of being performed, if an effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of these operation means, When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Even when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) appears as a production result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect between the start of the production of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and more privilege is given than when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  Further, in each of the above-described production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, an production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation was performed before is performed. According to such an automatic button effect state, an effect at the time of operation is generated without operation every time an effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. When the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even in such a case, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

  However, even in the case where the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. When the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period, it is desirable that the special operation production is not executed (automatic button function does not function). After this, even if an effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect reception period. Even if it is not, it is desirable that the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated (automatic button function to function) is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above.

  In addition, regarding the setting change related to on / off of the automatic button effect state, for example, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not performed by the operation of the operation button 410 but also during the period when the symbol variation is being performed. It is desirable that For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the automatic button effect state is in the off state and the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is not generated, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period occurs for the operation button 410 when the effect state is on, and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, an operation effect according to the operation is performed, and an automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an on-operation effect by an operation by the player while the on state of the automatic button effect state is maintained, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. In the production reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation is performed on the other operation means by enabling the operation on the operation means other than the operation button 410 as well as the operation button 410, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to cause a change in the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third rendering modes and other examples thereof, as a rendering result in which a specific operation-related rendering is performed, a button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 or a sword decorative body 5001 is simulated. In the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (production reception is received) for the operation button 410. Period) and when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as an operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 340 (a) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). Display mode) and display the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). Also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both are suddenly switched to the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is Therefore, a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword in the display area shown in FIGS. 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h) is used. Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the provision of the operation opportunity is made using substantially the entire display area (until other effect images such as a background portion where the degree of expectation is suggested) is displayed. To be done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first image having a shield (button image BTG simulating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design is held. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it implicitly suggests which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. As described above, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) do not need to be prepared as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 itself. It is desirable that the operation means be displayed as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape or a part of the design.

  Further, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (first display mode) and the effect image TG using the entire display area as described above are produced. You may make it perform also as the production | presentation which suggests a different expectation degree depending on which (2nd display mode) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. You may make it suggest an expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  In addition, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (desired to have a relatively high expectation), a specific When an operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after a later-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect) is displayed (it is desirable that the effect state is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and a button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is not executed (for example, after a prelude effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect) is not executed. When displayed, the operation reception period for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG as well as another operation means (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in a performance situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give an interesting aspect of the operation different from the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively highly expected production situation, and to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a “specific operation-related effect is executed relatively It is desirable to suggest that there is a production situation with a higher expectation than when it is in a production situation where the sword decoration image SYG appears in a production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means occurring at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and according to the operation on the operation means (operation button 410). It is desirable that the effect during the operation is executed.

  On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a performance situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (the operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is not performed. Although the operation means different from the means is operated, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even when an effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period is executed. It is desirable to make it so that the automatic button function works. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. The operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be obtained even if no operation is performed even when the production reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means. It is desirable that only the same operation-time effects as when operated are executed, and the special operation effects that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

  However, within the effect reception period, another operation time effect (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the above-described automatic button function before another timing. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and a specific timing has arrived. In addition, it is desirable to prevent the effect during operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) from appearing. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and each of the effects described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). If a sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without a specific operation-related effect being executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect acceptance period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It becomes.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and other examples thereof, “the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)” or the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is performed. If any one of the “sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (second display mode)” is displayed and the presentation is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation-time effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content that is suggested to have a relatively low expectation level. One of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the first operation effect is the button image BTG (first For the sword ornament 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, an effect image (a sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high expectation as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in the production result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the timer effect described above (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer-targeted). is there. In other words, in the timer effect for which “granting an operation opportunity to the operation means” is produced, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (in this case, “0”), an operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the performance during operation. In this case, in the “operation opportunity for the operation means” prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when an operation is performed on the operation means, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery One of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as an effect target of the timer effect, the proportion of the effect results that are advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect effect is not given. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect with the effect of “granting an operation opportunity for the operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)” appears, the “target operation opportunity for the operation means” is selected. A specific operation-related effect using “grant” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment at the time.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed until just before the effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). However, it is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and there is a concern that attention will be distracted and the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is set to an unexecuted state, and the count value It is desirable to start the “specific operation-related effect” after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). In addition, the following timer effects are equivalent to the above-mentioned notice side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 341 (a) shows that the effect display device 1600 displays a variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a normal game state with a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is zero. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 341 (b) shows an effect that the timer effect is started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not yet been executed, and it is unknown which effect the timer effect is targeted for. Yes.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (unknown state) in which it is unknown which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count reaches “0”) and is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the “specific operation-related effect” is started to be produced. At the time when the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the count value is not “0” and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which one is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (granting an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), the effects are sometimes Since overlapping in series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the timer effect count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is in an unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it may not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the entertainment interest of the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”) until a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001) that the timer effect is an effect object is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect is “the provision of an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 (operation opportunity by“ sword ”)”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword storage” ”Will be given the opportunity to operate”), the “specific operation-related effects” will begin to be produced in the production situation recognized by the player, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the display “1” is performed on the effect display device 1600. Also, it may be displayed continuously.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, count “0”), the sword ornament 5001 moves in a predetermined operation (here, (Reciprocating operation in the vertical direction) is performed, and this also indicates that “granting an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword ornament 5001” is the target of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is “granting an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001”, but also when another effect is the effect object. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect of, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the production to be produced is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is made to be executed at the same time or earlier than the timing at which the production suggesting the production type is started, and the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to do so.

  FIG. 341 (d) shows the effect situation where the “specific operation-related effect” has been started.

  In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also hidden. Further, the predetermined operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to perform the production suggesting the production type that the timer production is the production target and the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 before the production of the specific operation-related production starts. Even after the operation-related effect is started, the execution state may be continued.

  Then, after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, the effects are developed in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to (h). The contents of these effects are shown in FIG. ), FIG. 334 (g) to (i), or FIG. 336 (d) and FIG. 338 (h) to (j), the details are omitted.

  In addition, as a timer effect performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 or a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is the effect. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly before this), and continues after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, a privilege is granted ( The degree of expectation for the big hit is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, but at the time when the effect situation where the effect is developed simultaneously appears, Regardless of which of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect value thereof is the same (expectation required for granting a bonus (big hit)) The same). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, so even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, It is possible to avoid the situation where it is difficult to understand whether or not to pay attention to the situation and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the game entertainment, when an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect are simultaneously developed appears, the bonus is given more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), first, a display that suggests the type of effect target (in the effect display device 1600) “Sword”) is performed, but such a display that suggests an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific effect is selected as a timer object among a plurality of effects that can be a timer object, a display that suggests which effect is a timer effect may not be performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001, there is an operation opportunity for any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it was granted. However, prior to giving an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (before an effect reception period occurs), a first sign effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 Or before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001 (before the production reception period occurs), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may appear. When performing these precursor effects (first predictor effect, second predictor effect), the time required for the effect (predictor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a bonus when an effect appears, in order to enhance the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as a precursor effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating an operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which an operation opportunity is given, for example. A specific image is displayed, such as expressing the state of being trapped. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image) that is difficult to view by overlapping the specific image. Then, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). It is possible to execute as an effect that makes it appear to be exposed. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursor effect will be described later.

  At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectation levels related to the privilege grant (big hit), In the progress of the sign effect that the button image BTG is gradually exposed, it is possible to have an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 It is important that each is executed as different production contents. In addition to the contents of the effects, it is desirable that the time required for the effects is different.

  Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the provision of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that it is a superordinate concept that includes it. As for the indication effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, a plurality of effect modes are prepared and the sign effect is performed in any of these effect modes as described below with reference to FIG. 342. Depending on whether or not the indication reception period that occurs in response to the indication effect has a length, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the indication effect is performed. It is more desirable to make it.

  FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the contents of effects for each type of effects when a plurality of types (prediction effects A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as the warning effects.

  First, in the example (prediction effect A) shown in FIG. 342 (a), the sign effect A is started when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The production reception period (valid period) T1 will be generated.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign effect A (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (predictive effect B1), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, The sign effect B1 is started. This precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation) When an operation opportunity is given to the means, it is not executed), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Is supposed to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as “Press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B1. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the sign effect B1 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (b). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a time length different from T1 (here, a short time length). Thereby, it is suggested how long the production reception period generated corresponding to the precursor effect has a length depending on which mode (the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B1) was performed. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment at the time when the precursor effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (prediction effect B2) shown in FIG. 342 (c), the sign effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. The sign effect B2 is also executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), not a “specific operation-related effect”, like the sign effect B1. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a time length different from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1). Production reception period) T3 is generated.

  It should be noted that in this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display prompting an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the sign effect B2 (character display such as “press”) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period Display) is displayed. In addition, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the sign effect B2 is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (c). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed in spite of the execution of the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation for granting a bonus (big hit) Since it is suggested that the production reception period (effective period) T3 having a length is generated, a production situation as if a specific operation-related production was performed is generated, and the sign production B2 is It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for the provision of benefits differs between when the effect reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, for the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect mode appears until the intermediate timing after the start of the effect, and different effect modes appear after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance as to which of the production reception period (effective period) T2 and the production reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and the timing of starting the presentation effects B1 and B2 is also started when a different time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (predictive effect C), the predecessor effect C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect reception period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the predictor effect C is performed, even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the same time length is obtained. The held production reception period (valid period) T4 occurs.

  Even during the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display for prompting the specific operation means on the side shown as a result of the sign production C (character display such as “press”) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-mentioned operation effects (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f), 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. To be done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the sign effect C is the effect reception period corresponding to the sign effect A as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and (d). (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, even if the length of time required for the warning effect C itself is shorter than the warning effect A, if the warning effect is executed as the “specific operation-related effect” described above, Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same length of time as in the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the game entertainment at the time of the precursor effect C is suitably maintained. Will be able to.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 342, the length of the production reception period (effective period) is associated with the types of the indication effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby producing the production reception period. The length of (validity period) was suggested. However, the production reception period (effective period) can be set by changing the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2 or the like) having a predetermined length of time for each type of sign production. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related production is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as that at the time of the specific operation means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of operating at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operation position in accordance with this, FIG. In the example shown in (h), the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state where the sword decorative body 5001 is operated at the operation position (sword extraction state). Has been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating its appearance. If the result of the performance is displayed even though a specific operation-related performance with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed, the range of the performance will be remarkably narrowed. Concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344, an effect image (for example, a button image) simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). With regard to BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, and is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 343 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effects regarding the effect contents when the precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when the predictor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, in FIGS. 343 (a) to (c), the contents of effects when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed are shown. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 side. If the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword ornament 5001. It should be noted that in the prelude effect (the predecessor effect in another example is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is to be provided is given, an effect image imitating the operation means Is not necessarily displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decorative body 5001 since the sword decorative image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. It comes to be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content about which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity is soon given to the sword decorative body 5001, it is possible to recognize that the sword decorative image SYGa has a low expectation as the sword decorative image SYG, or the expectation degree. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 343 (b) shows an effect result in which a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in an effect state with a relatively high expectation. It will be suggested that the production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as a sword decoration image SYGa). .

  FIG. 343 (c) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to operate (“push in” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when the production reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received within the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword state. Maintained. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracted state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword ornament 5001) Are stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to 343 (g) show the contents of effects when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal gaming state, the effect display device 1600 is performing a variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), if the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” is started as shown in FIG. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to these.

  FIG. 343 (e) shows an effect situation in which the sign effect as the “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this effect situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 as the effect result of the “specific operation-related effect”. Has been. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (button image BTG or the like).

  FIG. 343 (f) shows an effect example when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push-in”) prompts the sword decorative object 5001 to operate. "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period). In addition, when an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 occurs, the sword decorative body 5001 changes from the sword state to the extracted state, and the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the extracted state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword extraction state (sword decoration image SYG). In contrast, the sword decorative body 5001 is configured to continuously perform the upward displacement slowly over the period until the presentation reception period ends, and is different from each other. I try to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decorative body 5001, the production reception is performed when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the sword storage state. Based on the reception, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the example of FIGS. 343 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated so that the sword decorative body 5001 is stopped.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG are displayed in the effect receiving period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG is set in the stopped state. The other side is continued in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the range of the effect can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the production when the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  Note that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a predecessor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword ornamental image SYG imitating the sword ornament 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation It is possible to provide further performance. About this technique, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also in each above-mentioned production aspect other than the production example of FIG. 343, and those other examples.

  And when giving such two performances with respect to a specific operation-related effect, first, as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used. Whether it appears or is recognizable, and it is unclear whether the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the contour is drawn) Display in a recognizable display state, etc.) so that it appears as the production progresses. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the side effect image that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined) It is desirable that the state is released and the color can be confirmed, for example, to appear sequentially with further progress in production. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect development, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected under a predetermined condition (for example, the operation means is changed). The button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG can be recognized as appearing as a result of the specific operation-related effect. Whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is high in expectation or not is unknown (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). Further, it may be possible to generate an effect pattern for further effect development. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, the white state of the sword decoration image SYG) To make it possible to confirm the color. In this case, the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is a display mode with a higher expectation (for example, red) than when the display mode is a lower display mode (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. In other words, in FIG. 344 (a), a sign effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started, but the sign effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) having a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 Is depicted, and suggests which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am doing so.

  FIG. 344 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this production situation, the first character (production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and the second character (sword decoration) is displayed. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display that prompts the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated is in a non-displayed state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (characters facing each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) The effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e) show examples of effects when an effect reception period occurs for the sword ornament 5001, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting the sword decorative body 5001 to be operated (a character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts to move from the sword state to the sword state. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword decorative body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword state to the sword state only after a relatively short period of time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to be. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained in the sword state until at least the presentation reception period ends, and the player Will wait for the operation (operation from the sword state to the sword state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to (e), the movement of the sword decorative body 5001 (movement in the linear direction) is completely different from the movement (rotation in the rotation direction). In the lowering operation), the second character draws the sword decoration image SYG down, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword removal state. The operation is to be performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) within the production reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the display of the bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected, and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the passage of time. Further, the sword decorative body 5001 is also moved to the sword state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)). However, even if the loop process is performed, the operation is maintained without being affected by the loop process. In addition, when the operation to the operation subject character 141 is performed to the operation object role 141 within the effect reception period, the effect is received, and a predetermined operation time effect is performed based on the effect reception, and the above The loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Moreover, the process which ends the said production | presentation reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decorative body 5001 and the sword decorative image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The operation modes (operations responsible for accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is completed. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues the operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect continue until after the effect reception period occurs ( For example, the background can be continued and executed, and the range of the production can be widened, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 344, the contents of the effect (display where the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect was performed. The effects (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) differing from each other while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the performance during the presentation reception period. In this sense, also in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in order to further improve the performance by providing a direct connection between them. In addition, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting a privilege, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  It should be noted that, for a prelude effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. You may be made to suggest whether a mode with a high expectation appears as an operation time production when a production reception is made in a period. You may make it suggest the expectation degree concerning privilege provision using the background image which appears when a precursor effect is performed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 344, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, an effect is received in the form of changing both the contents of the effect and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect. When the presentation within the period is executed, but the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect are changed. It is also possible to execute an effect when an effect reception period occurs.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 that was started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The operation performed may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and thereafter the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001), when a display for changing a background image is performed when an effect reception period occurs, and when the background image is changed There may be a case where the display is not performed. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed at the time of the production reception period, the expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed at the time of the production reception period. It is desirable to make it.

  Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the production is performed. When an effect is received, the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation-time effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), a sword decorative body 5001 (or an operation button) is provided as a movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. As a result, a state of success when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side. While the production situation at the time of failure where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the production-time production (for example, a specific production-related production) In the operation effect after the sign effect that is not the operation related effect), either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side according to the result of the effect If there is a successful production situation that only works, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described each production mode and specific operation-related productions according to other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the production, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the production. As a result, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a), the button is displayed in a mode in which a princess character is added (specific effect mode). When the image BTG may be displayed and the button image BTG is displayed in this manner, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is greater than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. If it is made high, it will become possible to maintain suitably the game entertainment at the time of the button image BTG being displayed as an effect result of a specific operation related effect.

  In addition, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation related to privilege provision be higher than when displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 345 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b) shown in FIG. 345) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation-related effect. )) May be prepared. In this case, when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect, the expectation level related to the privilege grant is set to be the same when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG and the sword can be provided, as well as providing an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect. Regardless of which one of the decorative images SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific production mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, in order to allow such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) to appear, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the specific effect mode is in a stage where the specific operation-related effect effect result (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. From (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) ) Appears, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same expectation). That is, in this case, the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, so that it is like a “prediction effect by the princess character” even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a performance with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples of the sword decorative body 5001 is such that the sword part (the pattern part 5012 and the blade part 5011) can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decorative body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes, and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. You may make it perform the said specific operation related effect as an effect about. The sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are both supported by a single body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be operable (operable), and Even if one side of the sword part (the handle part 5012, the blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). Is formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error is likely to occur on the player side. In particular, even in the case where an operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 (and its If an instruction prompting operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an error in operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode will occur on the player side. Become. In other words, in this case, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error while the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. If the production reception period ends before the production is accepted even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed. There is a concern that the entertainment interest will be reduced.

  The sword decorative body 5001 has a mode such as “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode such as “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reverse relationship. In an operation unit that can provide an aspect, if an incorrect operation is performed when an operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform an appropriate operation, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operational opportunities is increased.

  Therefore, when the specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect on whether an operation opportunity according to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the production reception is performed properly and the production during operation corresponding to the production reception is executed.

  FIG. 346 and FIG. 347 show an effect example when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  In FIG. 346 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword part of the sword decorative body 5001 is operated from the sword state to the sword state. An image OX and a second effect image TX simulating a second operation mode for operating the sheath portion of the sword decorative body 5001 to move in the horizontal direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time, and it is suggested that an operation opportunity according to any of these operation modes will soon be accepted. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 346 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b) progresses, the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is made to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect reception period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect reception period for the second operation mode is generated.

  Note that in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), a display such as “push” can be visually recognized if the first effect image OX remains dominant. Thus, the display such as “slide” is made visible when the situation becomes dominant while the second effect image TX is left. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the state of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that the display is erroneously recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the production reception period has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 346 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is within the display area. An effect depicting the state left in is performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed, a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) does not occur, and in the first operation mode When the operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect is generated.

  In other words, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), an effect reception period relating to a specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as “push”) and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) is displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword state to the sword state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is performed instead of the first operation mode. The production situation when performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, even when the effect reception period related to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is made effective. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the production reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received, assuming that there is an operation error by the player. (Here, “You can leave it as is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed over time so that the player can regain calmness (here, “settled and pushed in”). It is like that. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it becomes possible to sequentially notify with a short word, so this is suitable even if the player side is in a panic state. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is notified that this is properly rendered. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 347 (g) shows that the appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (production acceptance period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIG. 347 (e) and FIG. 347 (f). As a result, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect according to the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decorative body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decorative body 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operating state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (operation error state), the production reception is appropriately performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when an operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, notification is made that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). In other words, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player is in a panic, so it may be counterproductive to report complex contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the reception period, a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received is not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to perform simple notifications such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed such that a specific notification is made based on the operation being made and no effect during operation is made. Therefore, it can be expected that the operation is switched to the appropriate operation.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation in which an operation is erroneously performed before the production reception period occurs in a specific operation-related effect. For example, when there is no operation instruction related to the second operation part (for example, the sheath part), the first operation part is in a state where an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath part) is performed on the second operation part. It is also assumed that there will be a production reception period related to a specific operation-time effect only on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case as well, how the player side operates There is a concern that it may become unrecognizable.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding whether an operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation part (sword part) or the second operation part (sheath part) is performed, Although the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit 2 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation on is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted. This specific notification may be “message display indicating that it is only necessary to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state”. Alternatively, simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound may be used. In any case, by checking a special situation in which a specific notification is given based on the operation and no effect during the operation is performed, the operation is performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect to get a chance to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001 is moved leftward) while the operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part). Even if the stage for receiving a specific operation-time effect occurs only on the sword part) side, a state in which an operation is performed on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) (sword decorative body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which 5001 is moved in the left direction), an effect is received and the above-mentioned operation effect is performed according to the operation. It becomes.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the production reception period occurs, and the production reception is generated while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period, even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, the stage reception will be made properly, so the operation error will occur before the stage reception period occurs. When this happens, the decline in the game entertainment will be suppressed.

  However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding whether the operation opportunity is given to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is made in the period immediately before the occurrence of information, information will be mixed with the information (indication indication, etc.) notified within the production reception period, and the player will be more confused There is a concern. Therefore, in the period until the production result is displayed when the production result that suggests that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is the final production-related production that is displayed. The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. Even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, there is a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed, and the first period and the second period are sequentially followed by the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described production example, when performing specific notification, an expectation degree related to privilege provision may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the sword decorative body 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and the other examples thereof, the sword decoration body 5001 itself has its production mode changed to any of the above-described multiple modes (for example, FIG. 311). The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 1 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the above-described plurality of modes, and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it make it. Alternatively, the sword decorative body 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described modes when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), or a sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 (step 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image SYG is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG can be given some interest. In other words, the performance is poor when there is a production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a mode different from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance when there is a performance reception period.

  At this time, the aspect expressed by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the stage performance during the stage reception period can be improved. It is desirable to ensure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. Display it. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it can be understood that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decorative image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment at the time of the production reception period is suitably maintained.

  In order to obtain such operational effects, it is only necessary that the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of rendering modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of performance modes on the sword decorative body 5001 side may be one. Moreover, when preparing a several production | presentation aspect as the sword ornament 5001, it is not necessary to change a form as these several production | generation aspects.

  However, if the mode of the sword decorative body 5001 and the mode of the sword decorative image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may have an unpleasant feeling that a false display is made. There is concern, and this may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the form of the sword decoration body 5001. When a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special form instead of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decorative image SYG is changed by further deforming and combining the sword decorative image SYG. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since it is in the form of realizing a stylistic expression that is difficult on the structure of the sword decorative body 5001 by the sword decorative image SYG, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the display is false. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by providing performance beyond the imagination of the player when viewing the structure of the sword ornament 5001.

  Even when the sword decorative image SYG is given a special mode in this way, the sword decorative image SYG is provided for each mode (here shown in FIG. 311) prepared as the mode of the sword decorative body 5001. It is desirable to be able to perform display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration image SYG is only displayed when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to indicate that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in another mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, with respect to a technique that allows the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for other effects (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 312 to 319). You may make it apply.

  For example, if it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1), the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 348 (a) in addition to the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2). A production pattern for production development is prepared. When the production progresses to the production pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display area of the production display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1). A continuation image (image with the samurai eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decorative body 5001 that has been in the second sword state is in the sword state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, informing the player that the decorative symbols will be changed again (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001 are shown. By displaying in the form of the pseudo continuous sword symbol, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has a form of the sword ornament 5001 in the fourth pseudo-sequential change (re-change). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed. This special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot change. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath part is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) in the display area is changed to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 has three stages. It will change from a sword state to a 2nd sword state while maintaining.

  After that, an operation effective period for generating the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, and at the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for urging the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decorative body 5001 is in the second sword state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decorative image SYG) simulating the sword decorative body 5001 in a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation effective period is displayed together with the message “Put the sword!” (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when the player's sword operation is detected during the operation effective period, the fall of the specific decorative member SDY (a saddle character) is caused according to the set effect pattern. The expectation notification effect is performed, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo continuous variation (revariation) has ended.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is operated within the symbol variation. The first sign effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given and no operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 can be executed. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third sign that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursor effects are executed as different contents of the effects, but as the contents of the effects, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion where the effect image appears,
-After that, display an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side to which an operation opportunity is given at a position that is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first sign effect, a display effect by “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (display effect that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second sign effect, “flame” is displayed as the specific image. Display effect by “effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, the display effect by the “water effect” (the effect image imitating the operation means is used as the specific image) It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by changing the type of the specific image, such as performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decorative body 5001, and the “water effect” When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third warning effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed. Will come to be.

  And when performing the precursor effect (at least one of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means with the specific image is obtained. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to view. When such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and low expectation. An operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the display mode (for example, blue) is not certain, so that the effect during the effect reception period is given. Can be improved. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), it is certain that the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot hold the performance, the performance during the production reception period can be improved.

  FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 350 is an effect example when the first sign effect is performed with the same contents. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 349 and FIG. 350, an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed will be described. However, this effect example is not the first sign effect but the second sign effect or the third sign effect. It is also possible to apply to the sign production.

  In FIG. 349 (a), in the normal gaming state, the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. The production situation is shown.

  FIG. 349 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first sign effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a).

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” is gradually changed from the display area to non-display after the start of the effect at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the specific image itself has a higher transmittance). Or the area where the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, at time t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is A button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 (a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed respectively. FIG. 349 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the rate at which the effect at the time of operation is performed in a mode with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), there is a situation in which the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is received. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a way that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG has the first display mode and the first display mode. It is possible to advance the production without having certainty about which of the two display modes is displayed.

  In addition, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), the button image BTG cannot be surely displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” occurs while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 349 (d)). In such a situation, the operation of the operation button 410 can be performed while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. In other words, in this case, the operation time effect is executed in the form in which the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period (timing t2 to t3) from when the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden. ), It is possible to provide performance by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the stage performance during the stage reception period (timing t2 to t4) throughout the period, the period during which the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform effect display that is not performed during the period from the timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as “press” is displayed, but for example, at a timing t2 to t3. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period in the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) is more preferably improved. Will be able to.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize appears first, and after the predetermined time, the effect situation is difficult to visually recognize. Until this time, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting an operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state that is difficult to visually recognize before the effect reception period occurs, an effect pattern (third sign) that changes the display mode of the button image BTG to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, as the button image BTG is in a production situation that is difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to provide fun that makes the value of gazing at the button image BTG higher. It can be suitably maintained.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to visually recognize by the “cloud effect”. It was decided to display so that the visibility was maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 may be difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, the player can have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without having certainty of the display mode without being able to grasp the remaining time of the presentation reception period well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented performance.

  In addition, in any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, when such a performance is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the sign effect is started. Even if the length of time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clearly displayed after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the image is visible (time until the specific image is not displayed) to the same time. Further, when such a performance is applied to any one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started As for the length of time until the image can be clearly seen (time until the specific image is hidden), a plurality of these are prepared so as to have a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a technique for making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation unit itself may appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. May be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, it appears in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or an effect image imitating an operation means may be displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize while performing a different display as a precursor effect. Also good.

  When a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. ) May be executed only when it occurs. That is, at the time when the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. Since an effect reception period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, if there is a case in which it is delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player The production reception period may end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the player's operation on the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the production, the processing (automatic production function) that causes the same change to the production as when the player's operation is accepted within the production acceptance period can be executed. Yes. According to such an automatic button effect state, a post-operation effect is generated when an operation is performed, without being operated every time an effect acceptance period occurs, thereby suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate it. Will be able to. As for the automatic production function, when this function is activated, the same production reception is performed as when the operation was actually performed, so that processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed, or the production reception is generated. The same processing as when there was an acceptance of production may be performed.

  In the embodiment related to the “automatic rendering function” described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, renderings, settings, and the like may be used in appropriate combinations or replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during a period in which the demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “automatic button effect state setting” displayed in the button is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. Note that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or may be operated a plurality of times in combination with an operation with respect to the operation button 410 and an operation with a different operation means.

  On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by simplifying such operation, It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred. If there is a case where the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game entertainment may be lowered. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to be operated once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. As a result, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is actively performed regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred, the automatic button effect state is entered. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a mistaken setting. It should be noted that it is desirable not to set the automatic button effect state even if an operation is performed in a long press state when at least the effect acceptance period occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is also used as a method of canceling the setting. Different operation modes are required between the displayed period and the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the automatic button effect state setting can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is selected and the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When “cancel automatic button effect state” displayed in is selected, the automatic button effect state is canceled.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. By simplifying such an operation, The setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled while keeping a close watch on the effect progress during the pattern change. However, unlike the case of setting to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if it is not a long-pressing operation mode). The automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that this has been done (just by operating in a single operation mode). That is, if any operation is performed on the operation button 410, it can be said that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. It is expected that the game entertainment will be favorably maintained by canceling the state setting and quickly returning to the normal performance state.

  Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation buttons 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 or the like is set) Even if an operation by the player (operation on the sword ornament 5001) is not accepted within the production reception period, an operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the effect when the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, a period in which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be accepted for production occurs, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) regarding whether a period during which an operation on the sword decorative body 5001) can be accepted is generated, the effect result Even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 can be accepted, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs when being controlled in a specific production state (automatic button production state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed within the first side production reception period, it is possible to execute automatic processing that causes the same change to the effect as when the operation on the first operation means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means)
A second-side effect acceptance period in which a second operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001 or the like) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When this occurs, an automatic process is executed to cause the same change to occur when the operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect acceptance period. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if any of the first side production reception period and the second side production reception period occurs, the first specific time elapses after the period has occurred. Automatic processing by one automatic presentation means or automatic processing by second automatic presentation means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the first side production reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. The automatic production function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of any of the second side production acceptance periods set as Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, when the first side production reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect receiving period has occurred, the automatic processing by the first automatic effecting means is executed. You may make it perform presentation progress within a design fluctuation so that there may be a case. According to such a configuration, when it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side rendering acceptance period, a timing different from this is assumed. Since the production is accepted and the post-operation production is automatically generated, it can function as a surprise production.

  In addition, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol variation period than when not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). The ratio at which the effect reception period is generated may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period is increased, so that the frequency of forgetting operation within the production reception period is also increased. Since the post-operation production is executed by the function functioning, the production reception period can be generated at a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), it is desirable that both the production reception period for the first operation means and the production reception period for the second operation means increase. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the generation ratio is different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance conditions are satisfied within the production acceptance period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means),
A process for establishing the condition for receiving the presentation based on the operation performed by the player within the period for receiving the presentation is executable (player operation receiving means),
When the player does not perform an operation within the production reception period, a process for establishing the production reception condition can be executed without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means )
However, the specific timing within the production reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period elapses after the production reception period starts. To do. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself to operate until the automatic performance function is functioned, and the option for causing the reception of the performance by the operation of the player is left. The game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side production reception period has occurred. When the progress of the presentation within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic presentation means may be executed when a time different from the above has elapsed, the “specific time” or the “specific time” Any of “time different from” is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side production reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect during the effect reception period. Then, a process of generating a post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, in this case, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

  Similarly, an effect reception period for an operation means (such as a sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 is generated during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Even when an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating an post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the effect and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. In this case as well, with regard to “post-operation effect according to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration within the effect reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when an operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire (specific effect) to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation. A desire to end the situation). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both an operation for ending a specific performance state and an operation for accepting an operation, and as a result, an operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an operation button to which an operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period The process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process that can change the effect by simply performing an operation on 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (just by operating in a single operation mode) (Processing for performing post-operation production) is performed, so that the desire to advance the production depending on the player's own operation by terminating the automatic button production state (specific production state) is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the production state.

  However, regarding the setting change (setting change to the automatic button effect state or canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting of the sword decorative body 5001 can be changed without requiring any operation. In other words, the sword decorative body 5001 has a lower frequency of operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the symbol change execution period. The degree will be increased. Therefore, the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), thereby giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time of the game and maintain the entertainment interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which a demonstration screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 (operation buttons) among the plurality of operation means. 410 or other operation means) can be operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without requiring an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For this purpose, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 refers to the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding thereto appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword ornament 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. It becomes like this.

  The plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes “automatic operation that generates an operation-time effect without operation within the effect reception period” when in an automatic button effect state. In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the “production function”, the special operation means that are not the target of the “automatic production function that generates the operation effect without operation during the production reception period” May further be included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and if an operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, The degree of expectation for the big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if there is a situation in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted will appear if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if it is an effect different from that when the effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, an effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410 (an effect reception period in which an expectation is suggested when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, or an expectation is indicated when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even when a production reception period or the like occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated (operation in a long press mode) when the operation reception period for the operation means different from that of the operation button 410 is within an automatic reception effect state. In the middle of the production reception period, the “automatic production function that generates the production effect during operation without operation during the production reception period” is activated, and the original production reception (operating means different from the operation button 410 is operated). If there is a player who is not familiar with the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred, or the operation button 410 It may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from that has occurred, and this may reduce the entertainment interest This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the warning effect prior to the generation of the effect reception period, but control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when not being performed, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) It may be possible to execute as a different display mode. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether there is a production state in which the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed in the effect receiving period. However, when the production reception period occurs, at least the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed so that the specific image is directed toward the specific area where the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image where lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed (a sign effect) outside the region. In other words, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, the movement of the production image different from the specific image is confirmed, and the “specific image suggesting the remaining time” in a non-display state will be watched. , It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the specific presentation acceptance period ends without the player's operation in time, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the results of the jackpot determination including the following explanation examples are included. Based on the progress of the game or effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation may be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or production, for example, “While being controlled in the normal gaming state, it is controlled as an automatic button presentation state, but the big hit gaming state Control mode such as “Auto button effect state is canceled when transitioned to high probability short-time state” or “Auto button effect state is generated within the symbol variation execution period, and symbol variation in the execution state is completed Control mode such as “Generate an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence” or “Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are performed” It is possible to adopt a mode such as a control mode. Further, the pachinko machine 1 that is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic performance function functions may be a predetermined timing after the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or the remaining time of the production reception period remains. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-described automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing thereafter, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the production reception period remains, the above-described automatic production function functions in the same manner as when there is an actual operation. At the time point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation production will occur even if no operation is performed when the automatic button production state is controlled, the period until the production reception period ends (production reception It is important to cause the above-described automatic performance function to function at a specific timing within a period and start a post-operation performance according to this. In other words, in this case, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function despite the arrival of a specific timing within the performance reception period, a post-operation effect is generated by the player operating after the specific timing has arrived. Anxiety when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, “If the automatic button effect state is not controlled, it is erroneously controlled. It may be difficult to confirm the presentation after the operation ”or“ The automatic presentation function may not work due to some trouble and the presentation may not be confirmed after the operation ”). Will be able to.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use combining suitably.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise thereof, in a specific production state (automatic button production state), usually, when the specific production state (automatic button production state) is not controlled. When an effect reception period that can occur is generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if no operation is performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs during the specific display effect, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, the automatic production function may not function during another production reception period set when a specific display production is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to experience the VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation effect is saved by the function of the automatic effect function. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably enhanced. Note that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function always works) occurs. It is possible to expect Even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic performance function is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start a post-operation effect according to this.

Moreover, after preparing at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
If the first specific effective period occurs when the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific effective period has occurred. While the function is activated to end the first specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect according to this,
If a second specific effective period occurs when the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific effective period occurs The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing when elapses to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation performance in accordance with this,
When the third specific effective period occurs when the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the operation is finished, each processing such as preventing the same post-operation effect from appearing when the operation is performed may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first time from when the effect reception period occurs is the first. When the predetermined time elapses, the automatic production function described above functions, or when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has not elapsed, the automatic production function described above does not function, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above cannot be performed in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs For example, when the above-described automatic rendering function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described need is satisfied when the second predetermined time has elapsed. It is possible to make the presentation progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic presentation function is functioning or whether the above-described automatic presentation function does not function in the first place. The first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operation state (so-called When a single operation is performed), an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

  Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. Thus, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) can be displayed. In such a case, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). Further, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. In addition, the post-operation effects that are generated when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effects.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, at which timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function worked (when the effect is accepted, as the effect acceptance period The automatic presentation function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (the area changes in this case) over time) that shows the remaining time of the production reception available period so that it can be recognized. You may make it generate | occur | produce the post-operation production in the state which displayed this instead of making it non-display. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” that is continuously displayed when the automatic performance function functions, the production reception period is set to the first specific effective period ( The period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period has occurred, and the second specific effective period (relative to the generation of the production reception period). It becomes possible to recognize whether the automatic production function is functioning when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has elapsed.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the generation acceptance period occurs) and the second specific effective period ( The degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the occurrence of the automatic production function when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the production reception period has occurred (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous) It is desirable to do so. In this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degrees are different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case of functioning, the “bar display” may not be hidden, and the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where it is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600. For example, it is executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. Also good.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation to be an operation target) suggesting an operation means to be an operation target within the effect reception period. Even if the above-described automatic rendering function is activated, the post-operation rendering is generated while the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. It is desirable to make it. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. When the above-described automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described first specific effective period, or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different big hit expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are displayed. Can be confirmed at the same time, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect need not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

  In addition, when an operation that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) without an image. However, in this case, when “Operation system effect” is executed but “Other specific effect unrelated to this” is not executed, “Operation system effect” and “ It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “specific production” is in the production situation in parallel. In other words, when there is an effect situation in which “operation system effect” and “another specific effect unrelated to this” are in parallel, the “operation system effect” is not accepted and the post-operation effect is not executed. In addition, since “another specific effect unrelated to this” is in the execution state, the decline in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed, whereas the “operation system effect” is executed, but “another effect not related to this” When there is a production situation in which the “specific production” is not executed, if there is a case where the production operation is not accepted and the post-operation production is not executed, no production will be executed. Therefore, a decline in the entertainment interest is inevitable. Therefore, when there is a performance situation in which “operation-related effects” are executed but “other specific effects not related to this” are not executed, “operation-related effects” and “other specific effects not related to this” are specified. By making the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be higher than when the “production” is in a parallel production situation, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the operation system production occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the warning effect that is performed before the production reception period occurs, the production that the operation means to be operated is operated, etc. are executed as “operation system production” or production related thereto. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as “another specific effect”, for example, if it occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is high, and it is possible to provide the performance in a sense of tension. In this regard, if the “other specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the predicate effect), the “other specific effect” may be repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when “another specific production” is executed is high This makes it possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not the production reception period occurs.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously, Until it reaches the 1000th change in loss), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the production reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the above-described automatic production function is made to function and a case where the above-mentioned automatic production function is not made to function. On the other hand, when there is a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously) In the case of reaching the 1000th loss fluctuation), when the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) reaches the specific value, the operation means (one of a plurality of operation means) is operated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the reception period, the above-described automatic performance function is operated and there is an operation by the player within the reception period. You may make it perform the process which always produces | generates the same post-operation production as time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time an effect reception period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though there was no operation by the player as if he felt the responsibility so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss variation is digested sequentially and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss variation), the loss variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, “operating”, etc.) that is different from a display image (for example, “operate”) that has appeared during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, up to 999 loss fluctuations) It would be desirable to make it appear, such as “If I am troublesome, I will act for you”. In addition, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit gaming state) is satisfied. Within the (effect pattern), an effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (one of the plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the big hit determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on behalf of you, etc.)), and even if there is no operation by the player within the period for receiving the production, the automatic production function described above will function and respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always generates a post-operation effect.

  It should be noted that, when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 times the loss variation is executed continuously, You may make it display the remaining fluctuation | variation number until it reaches | attains the 1000th loss fluctuation | variation.

  Also, during the symbol variation, the first operation is performed during the symbol variation until the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value when in the specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the pattern fluctuation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value In addition, it is possible to cause the presentation to progress so that only one of the presentation acceptance period for the first operation means and the presentation acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is suitably suppressed that the production acceptance period has occurred and the expectation is given to itself. Become moist. However, this example of the performance is "Despite the fact that the player has been encouraged to operate every time the production acceptance period occurs, In view of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is always realized as an effect that makes the automatic effect function work even if there is no operation by the player, as if it had felt the responsibility so far, In order to prevent further expectation, an effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001).

  In addition, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means. The second effect acceptance period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user cannot occur when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and when in the specific performance state (automatic button performance state) It becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interests of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the production reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Display a spear image imitating the operation means (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) (a spear image display means)
-After the production reception period has occurred, if an operation by the player is performed while the spear image is displayed, a post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・ After the production reception period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives without any player operation while the spear image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the 摸 image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) in which the post-operation effect is executed in the “mode advantageous to the player” when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to do this. According to such a configuration, the expectation can be recognized whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. The post-operation effect can be generated.

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the automatic effect described above, the player is not involved with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the target of the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that it is impossible for the player side to grasp which operation means corresponds to the automatically generated post-operation effect. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, a spear image (an operation target suggestion image that suggests an operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic rendering function described above is functioning, it is desirable to generate the post-operation rendering in a state in which the haze image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the generation of the post-operation effect. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic As in the case where the effect function is activated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least a region different from the region in which the spear image is displayed in the effect display device 1600, or light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or a movable decorative body It may be executed as an operation by.

  At this time, when the cocoon image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, the expectation level (摸 image) suggested in the effect reception period even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The haze image that is continuously displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs When the automatic processing by the first automatic rendering means is executed when a different time has elapsed, the time from when the post-operation rendering is performed until the haze image is hidden should be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, or whether a post-operation effect has occurred due to automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is not, it is possible to recognize at which time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect until the haze image is hidden. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, The degree of expectation that is obtained may be different.

  In addition, when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either a mode (for example, a low-expected display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation level or a high-expected display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation level) can appear, and a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if no operation is performed within the period for receiving the production, the production is always accepted (the automatic production function is always functioning), and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when an operation is not performed within the effect reception period, an effect is received (the automatic effect function is functioned), and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. When and where Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if forgetting to operate when a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the game entertainment will decline due to the fact that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the user forgets to operate it, it is assumed that the game entertainment will not decrease so much, so a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. If forgetting to operate sometimes occurs, by making sure that the automatic production function is functioned within the production reception period, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate, but a low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation) If you forget to operate when an image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate it by not allowing the automatic production function to function during the production reception period. And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) It may be prevented from appearing. In addition, any of three or more display modes may appear during the effect reception period.

  And in each characteristic technique demonstrated below, you may make it implement by applying suitably also about the other example concerning these automatic button production | presentation states.

[Suggestion suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if no operation is performed by the player within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied), It is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the operation was performed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when an operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted An effect pattern in which a process (automatic effect function) for generating an effect is not executed can also be generated. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the symbol variation is larger than when the automatic effect function functions. , The process of producing the effect within the symbol variation can be executed so that the expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the expectation degree (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation on the operation button 410 is not intentionally performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.). The above-mentioned effects (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 330 to 350) about whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted) occurs. ))). In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects are compared to the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the above-described ratio of the automatic effect function is increased when there is no operation (acceptance effect) within the reception period. At this time, the rate at which the automatic performance function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect acceptance period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-described automatic effect function is highly functional. As a result, it is possible to more suitably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in a specific operation-related effect, there is an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001 as compared to a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 as the effect result. In the case where it is shown that the symbol is given, the expectation degree that the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state is set higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 has a ratio that the above-described automatic effect function functions when there is no operation (effect reception) within an effect reception period that occurs in response to a specific operation-related effect. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set so that the same ratio is obtained when it is indicated that an operation opportunity is given and when an operation opportunity is indicated for the sword ornament 5001.

  According to such a configuration, an effect situation with a relatively low expectation (implying that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic performance function to function It becomes possible to maintain suitably. In this way, the game entertainment can be enhanced by paralleling two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects.

  Hereinafter, specific examples of effects in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

  FIG. 351 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the performance status being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  FIG. 351 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351 (a). As shown in the figure, in a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific production reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect receiving period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the effect. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation and “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation). Either one will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production state shown in FIG. 351 (b), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within a specific production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. Thus, the automatic production function described above does not function, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted for the production within the specific production acceptance period. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific performance reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within a specific effect reception period is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 351 (e), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the above-described automatic production function functions” or “the above-described automatic production function”. Is determined (selected) based on the result of jackpot determination when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in the specific effect reception period. The above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big win is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-mentioned production reception function that the automatic production function functions” Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 60% during a specific production reception period, and the automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the specific production reception period is generated as the “production reception period in which the automatic production function described above functions”, The period of occurrence of the jackpot symbol is higher when the symbol variation is stopped than when the symbol variation is stopped than when it is generated as the “Performance reception period during which the automatic production function is not functioning” Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received, when an effect reception period in which it is determined that a high-expected aspect (such as “Intense heat!”) Appears as a post-operation effect, the automatic effect function functions. When the production reception period occurs, it is determined that a mode of low expectation (such as “chance!”) Will appear as a post-operation production. The rate at which functions work is relatively low. Therefore, when the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button production state, whether or not the automatic production function functions when the operation button 410 is not intentionally operated within the production reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether a jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. In other words, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In the presence of a risk that could cause dramatic demerits, the novel directing effect of causing the player to exercise a direct selection such as “do not perform any operation on the operation button 410 within the period of receiving the production” As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even if the automatic presentation function functions when the operation button 410 is not operated during the presentation reception period, the post-operation presentation is expected. Low-level aspects (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, so even if the automatic production function is functioning, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Such stunning expectations (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic performance function, suggestions based on the mode of post-operation effects) will realize a stunning performance, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming entertainment Expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated during the production reception period, the production reception is only performed. In this case, there is a possibility that an aspect with high expectation appears in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (c) (the situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production after the operation does not appear) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (d) (the automatic production function). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be lower than when an appearance with a low degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect.

  FIG. 352 and FIG. 353 show effects that the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 352 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is 3, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the performance status being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously.

  FIG. 352 (b) shows an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 332 to 335 are started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 352 (a). . That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects exemplified in FIGS. 332 to 335, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decorative body 5001. A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, it is concealed which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. . However, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation, As a second performance result having a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decorative body 5001 is in a state to be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity is shown.

  FIG. 352 (c) indicates that, as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation. An effect state indicating that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred is shown. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”). A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Having a relatively low expectation degree or “hot heat!” Having a relatively high expectation degree) having a different expectation degree in the display area while performing a production operation. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect is received without using the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when no operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the production acceptance period (when production acceptance has not occurred), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic performance function is not functioning, and the above-described automatic performance function is functioning at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. There may be a situation where the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Effects within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to be functioned is higher when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period than the reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). It is possible to execute a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “an appropriate operation cannot be performed within the effect reception period and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. It is possible to provide the interest about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic performance function functions.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until it is finished, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) indicating that the ratio of functioning of the automatic performance function is high continues. To appear.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. As long as the production reception is performed, the post-operation production that should have occurred is not executed. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), the above-described automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur). In the case of the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where it is not.

  Further, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 352 (e), the operation is not performed on the operation button 410 within the performance reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed during the reception period and the effect was received is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode displayed in the display region is the same in both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific production reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 is to be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). An effect state indicating that the effect is received appears and an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. In this production situation, as shown in the drawing, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 (here, “ A character display such as “Put a sword” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in an operation state, which also prompts the operation on the operation button 410 and moves the sword ornament 5001 from the operation state to the original position. Is allowed to operate.

  Here, assuming that an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is received within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 353 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect receiving period shown in FIG. 352 (c). The same post-operation effect as that performed is executed. However, when an operation for the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (g), an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for an effect within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c). Among the multiple modes with different expectations compared to the time (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low level of expectation or “hot heat!” With a relatively high level of expectations) The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is accepted during the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and returned to the normal production state, and the specific production reception period also consumes the remaining time. It is the same as the case of the production reception period shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period in the effect state shown in FIG. 353 (g) (the effect reception did not occur). In the case), although the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c) occurs, the reception of the production is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not doing so, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state (FIG. 352) indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. Even if (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-described automatic performance function to function is not changed by this (the performance result of the specific operation-related performance). The expectation that the function will function can be suitably maintained. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggesting the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results in parallel, resulting in an unfavorable effect result on one side. It will be possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above is performed. Expectation will be lower than when it works.

  When the above-described automatic performance function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 353 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 has not been received in the production reception period. The post-operation effect that would have been generated is not executed as long as the effect is accepted. Then, the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after a specific production reception period occurs. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. Even in the case where there is not, the above-described automatic performance function is performed when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b) (when production reception does not occur). It is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher than when it does not function.

  Moreover, when the above-described automatic performance function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353 (i), even though no operation is performed on the sword decorative body 5001 within the production reception period, The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation was performed and the effect was received within the effect reception period is executed. In other words, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the reception of the effect within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (such as a glimpse) is effected and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense!”) Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation within the effect acceptance period In both cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (j), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed a predetermined time after the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production occurs.

  It should be noted that an effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ As in the case of an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect being executed, whether or not it is generated as “the effect reception period during which the automatic effect function is not functioning” At the time of execution, the decision is made (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic performance function is allowed to function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production. However, the automatic production function described above functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big win is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, “the above-mentioned production reception function that the automatic production function functions” Period "or" production reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function "is generated, and when a big hit is determined as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the loss is referred to, Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, the automatic production function described above does not function at a rate of 20% during the production reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related production, and 80% The automatic production function described above functions at the rate of.

  Similarly, an effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is also generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”. In such a case, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than the case where it is generated as “the stage for accepting the stage where the above-mentioned automatic stage function does not function”. Which of these periods is to be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

  The post-operation effects are generated in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and the specific operation-related effect is not executed. It may be executed as an effect different in the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). However, even if it is executed as a different effect, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decorative body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decorative body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 352 and 353, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 332 to 335 will be described. The “effect using the function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 330 to 350.

  Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted, the “setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted” state before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that it is generated at least when it is in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (b) (the production situation where the specific operation-related production is started), and this is continued until the production reception period. According to such a configuration, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is confirmed after confirming that the specific operation-related effect is started, the automatic button effect state is not accepted. It is now possible to provide “directing using the automatic directing function” for only those who are continuously playing games while maintaining the state of the game. It is possible to provide stunning value for what to do.

  Further, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )) In the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG or the blue sword decoration image SYG) or the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG or the green sword decoration). The image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the “production reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function functions” is generated compared to when the first display mode appears It is desirable that a certain ratio be higher.

  Further, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, or an effect reception period (FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. You may make it be in the state where the production | presentation reception period when a function functions is generating.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that should have been confirmed as long as the effect is accepted (operation on the operation button 410) within the effect acceptance period. In order to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to perform a stunning selection such as “Do not deliberately operate the operation button 410 within a staging reception period”. As a result, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not “effects using the automatic effect function” are applied, an effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 330 to 350 and FIGS. Is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect receiving period (such as FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side becomes confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate effect is received within the effect reception period. Although it may happen that the operation cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”. Is expected.

  In particular, in the example of FIGS. 352 and 353, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, it is considered that the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions is set to be relatively high. For example, whether or not the automatic production function functions so that the production reception period is set to have a longer time than the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. It can be said that it is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game by maintaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, the timing at which the automatic production function is activated comes when the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period in the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production”, the automatic production function is to arrive when a second time longer than the first time has elapsed since the occurrence of the period. It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not the function is longer.

  In addition, the period from the start to the end of the period for the stage reception period that occurs without the execution of the "specific operation-related stage" and the stage for reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related stage" Even if it is made to differ, about the bar display which shows the remaining time of a production reception period, this is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is decreased. It is desirable to only vary the speed. That is, in this case, even if the production reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related production” occurs, the duration continues for the same time as the production reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related production”. As a result, it is possible to make it seem like it is, and coupled with the “fuzziness” of being continued for a longer period of time than expected, it is possible to maintain a stunning performance as to whether or not the automatic performance function works. To be able to.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is generated without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first production reception period than the one production reception period (production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) of the automatic effect function varies depending on the type of the effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is the “first automatic button effect state”, the distribution ratios (“50% -50%”, “10” differ depending on the type of the effect reception period. % -90% ") and the" second automatic button effect state "set differently, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to function regardless of the type as the period. The third automatic button effect state may be further prepared so that any one of these effect states can be set including the normal effect state where the automatic effect function does not function. Also, a normal performance state in which the automatic performance function does not function is not prepared, and a game is always performed in an automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Or production may be executed.

  In addition, the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the first effect acceptance period (first The above-described automatic performance function functions at the timing within the production reception period) to end the first production reception period and generate a post-operation production corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the first production reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first production reception period occurred (the first production time) The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing of the first production reception period), and thereafter the first production reception period is terminated without performing the post-operation production (after that, the post-operation production is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period. The production reception period is ended and a post-operation production corresponding to the production reception period is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second effect acceptance period or The above-described automatic performance function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third performance reception period, and then the second performance reception period or the third time without performing the post-operation performance. The production reception period is terminated (after that, the post-operation production is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function can function at a relatively early stage in the first production reception period where the ratio of the automatic production function to function is low. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time to allow the player to receive the production by his own operation until the end of the first production reception period. You can play games with heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the higher side where the automatic production function functions, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage. Providing a game with a sense of tension even though the proportion of the automatic production function is high, because there will be little time left for the player to operate when it does not function Will be able to.

  In addition, about the said modification, in the 1st production reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic production | generation function functions at the timing (timing in the 1st production reception period) when 1st predetermined time passed, and when it does not function However, in the second presentation reception period and the third presentation reception period, the automatic presentation function described above always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second presentation reception period). You may do it. Even in such a configuration, if the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function does not function by any chance (for some trouble), the time for the player to operate it Since it is considered that the player has a delusion that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  Further, in addition to the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other production examples, control to the automatic button production state (specific production state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may be always provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined rate.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. However, after controlling to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode where the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (I want to end the automatic button effect state) Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is performed. After an operation corresponding to the process of finishing the automatic button effect state and receiving the effect, the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given the operation opportunity within the period only needs to be operated once. Production (processing that can cause a change in production) is performed (operation unification control in the automatic button production state). As a result, even if a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production acceptance period, the loss of operation opportunity is avoided and the production mode is switched. Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, only the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to be set. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. Only the button 410 is permitted to cancel the setting. On the other hand, in the state in which the production reception period is occurring, when an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is given during the production reception period. Then, a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process that can cause a change in the effect) in accordance with the effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state where an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 is generated, the operation is not received, and the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play games with their own game technique, such as, “While maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the player can perform the operation only when he / she wants to improve the effect”. It can be envisaged that some people wish to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 further includes special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decorative body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the automatic button effect is generated. A process for ending the state (a specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect are performed (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state), but control to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the period for receiving the performance related to the specific effect when Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated during the effect reception period. If you want to perform rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the special operation means should be operated during the effect acceptance period. Thus, it is possible to realize a game desired by the player simply by properly using the operation means.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 356.

  FIG. 354 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 1, and the decorative display SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows a state in which an effect reception period for receiving a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred under the reach state being formed. As shown in the figure, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button "Setting in progress" appears continuously.

  Also, as shown in the figure, during this presentation reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 (here, the lower display) An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the presentation reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to be given an operation opportunity is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in actuality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also a special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 in which no change occurs is allowed to be operated.

  FIGS. 354 (b) to (d) show that the operation is not performed on the operation button 410 within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), but the above-described automatic production function functions, so that the production reception period. It shows a state in which the post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted is executed. It should be noted that when the above-described automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and special operation means (indicated as “PUSH” in the figure). Button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 354 (c) and 354 (d)) with different expectations are obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of symbol variation (determined based on the result of jackpot determination), first, as shown in FIG. 354 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) To display the smoke image. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 354 (c), the specific production image shown in FIG. 354 (b) (here, explosion) As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 354 (d), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to (d) appears as the basic effect progress when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-described automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being finished unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be developed depending on the player's own operation (the automatic button effect state is A desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position, a process for terminating the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in the button production state). It should be noted that when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for the production, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is ended, the above-described automatic production function is disabled, and the special operation means ( The operation opportunity for the button 1410 (“PUSH” in the drawing) is also lost.

  Even when the operation button 410 is operated within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 355 (e), the operation is performed within the production reception period and the production reception is performed. First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 355 (f), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a higher production result, as shown in FIG. 355 (g), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed.

  However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of terminating the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355 (e) to 355 (g), after the operation is accepted for the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this example, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestion display (here, “auto button release”) appears (see FIG. 355 (e)).

  Further, as described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emission state but also special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure) in which no change has occurred is described. Button) 1410 is allowed to be operated. And this special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 “operates itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode to be switched). As described above, it is prepared in order to make possible a tricky game technique such as “progressing the production in the future”.

  Therefore, even when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 356 (h). In addition, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is first displayed as a post-operation effect in response to the operation being performed during the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to the production result having a relatively low expectation, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h). As the smoke image by) gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, “Okichi” fortune) that suggests a relatively low expectation result will be displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, as shown in FIG. 356 (j), the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h) gradually disappears. In the course of this, an effect image (here, “Nakakichi” fortune) that indicates a relatively high expectation effect result is displayed. It should be noted that when the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is accepted, the effect reception period generated in FIG. The function cannot be performed, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

  However, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. The process of ending is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356 (h) to (j), after the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (in this case, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. When the operation is performed, the above-described automatic performance function functions (FIG. 354 (b)), or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 355 (e)). The production can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 356 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 354 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355 (e)), a sparkling effect display is additionally displayed. I try to do it. Instead of the sparkling effect display, an effect using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally performed.

  According to such a configuration, the content of the change in the effect that occurs when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect receiving period related to the fortune effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, an operation is performed on special operation means (button labeled “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 during the effect reception period related to the fortune effect. The contents of the production changes that occur in some cases are made different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) appears, “the operation for the operation means is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It can be recognized while enjoying the post-operation effect that “the setting is not canceled and this is continued”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), even when an effect image (here, “good-fortune” fortune) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed. A production (here, a sparkling effect display) can appear.

  Further, such a special effect (here, a sparkling effect display) is added to the post-operation effect described above at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When an effect appears additionally, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of a big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to perform an operation not on the operation button 410 but on the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410. There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (the button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is operated within the period for receiving the effect generated in FIG. 354 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect receiving period generated in FIG. 354 (a), or by the function of the automatic effect function described above. It is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is lower than in the case of the above.

  According to such a configuration, “the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button indicated as“ PUSH ”in the drawing)” 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued ”, there is a dramatic demerit such as“ it can be suggested that the rate of jackpot symbols appearing significantly due to symbol variation ” Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment is suitably maintained by causing the player to exercise such a stunning selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), the above-described production disadvantages are generated even though the same production mode as the example shown in FIG. 355 (f) appears. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol variation is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the production mode is shown in FIG. 354 (c) and FIG. 355 (f). By making it the same as the case, the third party who is not operating the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection has failed. As a result, it is expected to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, no matter which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), FIG. 354 (b) and FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 356 (h) and the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. You may make it display in either the ratio with which the production | generation aspect (here Nakamichi's fortune) with high expectation appears, or the multiple aspect from which the ratio which a special production appears differs.

  In addition, even if any production selection is performed within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and production modes with different expectations. (Here, “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi” fortune) may appear directly as post-operation effects. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 356 (i)) in which the production selection has failed appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when any of “Kiyoshi” or “Nakakichi's fortune” appears as a post-operation effect.

  In addition, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation even during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), and to be used to determine whether or not to take the effect risk described above. May be.

  Further, the special operation means (button indicated as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, other operating means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, in the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), is a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be production reception occurs? Or, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) is executed as to whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted is generated. May occur as a result.

  Further, in the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. A reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for special operation means (a button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is not given are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) occurs, the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) are performed more than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the rate of appearance until the symbol variation is stopped becomes high. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appear depends on which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested performance.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means are allowed to receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) is being controlled, and any operation means is operated within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, for which of the plurality of operation means the automatic rendering function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change as when the rendering was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as “a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated”. If there is a production reception period of, “whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear” or “whether a production result with a lower expectation may appear” Based on the above, the process of enabling the automatic performance function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can produce the production with the possibility that the production result with lower expectation may appear" (stable side automatic production Process).

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is made for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not appear when the automatic production function is activated, the occurrence of a situation such as “the production mode with the lowest expectation appears by the automatic production function when you forget to operate” It can be preferably avoided.

  Hereinafter, the stable automatic production process in the automatic button production state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

  First, a description will be given of an effect example when a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the normal effect state occurs. In FIG. 357 (a), in the normal performance state, the number of holds is 3 and the variation display of the decoration symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decorative body 5001 under the reach state being formed. An effect state in which an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period starts is shown. In this production situation, although both the production reception for the operation button 410 and the production reception for the sword decorative body 5001 are not yet effective, the operation button 410 and the sword have been used since that situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decorative body 5001 is moved to the extracted position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorative body 5001 should be operated. In the effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed.

  FIG. 357 (b) shows that the player receives either a special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357 (a) (press operation of the operation button 410 or sword operation of the sword ornament 5001). The production situation in which the production acceptance period that can be selected by the user) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect situation shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG is displayed). Correspondingly, a downward arrow and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 357 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the operation means are capable of receiving the effects.

  That is, in this effect example, when an effect is received for the operation button 410 within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b), first, an effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed as an effect after the button operation. After being displayed (FIG. 357 (c)), as a performance result suggesting that the smaller the number of defeated, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number of defeated, the higher the degree of expectation is. And the effect (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) that causes either “100 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when the big win is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at the rate of “40%”, and the rate of “60%” is shown in FIG. 357 (e). As shown in FIG. 357 (d) at the ratio of “60%”, the ratio of “40%” is displayed at the ratio of “60%”. Thus, it is possible to cause the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) to appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 within a special effect reception period, first, it is displayed that an effect is received for the sword decorative body 5001 as an effect after the sword side operation ( FIG. 358 (f)), “1 body defeated”, “100 body defeated”, “100 body defeated” and “ An effect (FIGS. 358 (g) to 358 (i)) for causing any one of “777 body defeat” to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword side operation when winning a jackpot, the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and the rate of “50%” is shown in FIG. 358 (h). The production mode shown in the figure appears, and the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”. In the production after the sword side operation when the player is defeated in the jackpot, the rate of “40%” 358 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 358 (h) appears at the rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 358 (i) at the rate of “0%”. It is possible for an aspect to appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the production mode in which the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the production after the button side operation or the production after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode with a large number of defeats. Also, when the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), and the production mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later). Expectation may be different, but it should be the same.

  In such a configuration, a special production reception period allowing the production reception is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special production reception period is generated. Because it is possible to generate different operation effects (effects after button side operation, effects after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the production reception period of As a result, the monotonous performance can be improved, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In particular, the same expectation is not shown regardless of which one of the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means) is operated, but the sword ornament 5001 (first Only when the second operating means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 358 (g) shown in FIG. "I want to see the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (effect after the sword operation) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain amusement interest by giving conflicts and stimuli.

  In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. In this sense, the appearance risk of “one-body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (g) is eliminated, and the post-operation effect is relatively stable. In addition, the post-sword-side operation effect is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here) among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is operated within a special effect reception period. Then, it will function as a post-operation effect relatively including disturbances in the sense that it has the appearance risk of “an effect mode of“ one body defeat ”” shown in FIG. 358 (g).

  Furthermore, in this production example, during the period from when the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (a) appears until the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b) appears (in this case, during the special production reception period) The production mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the production mode appears, the production mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decorative body 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation level (here, a production mode of“ one body destruction ”shown in FIG. 358 (g))” is low. The production progress can be executed in this way. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until the risk that the “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the production mode of“ one body defeat ”” shown in FIG. 358 (g)) may appear, Because it is possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIGS. 357 (ab) has appeared as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. Thus, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs.

  In the normal performance state, when the special performance reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs but no special reception is made within the special production reception period, the automatic production described above is performed. The function does not function, and the effect progresses without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 359 (a) to 359 (e) show examples of effects when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (a), FIG. 359 (ab), and FIG. 359 (b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. An effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started appears, except that a display indicating this (in this case, “auto button is being set”) appears continuously in the effect display device 1600. Until the end of the special performance reception period until the end of the special performance reception period (FIGS. 357 (a), 357 (ab), and 357 (b)). Progress.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), “the effect result with lower expectation (here, the figure) 358 (g) is activated for the operation button 410 that is different from the sword ornament 5001 on the side that can produce an effect that may cause the appearance of “one body defeat” shown in 358 (g). The process to be performed (stable side automatic production process) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b). Thus, the same change as that in the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is accepted within the special effect reception period is caused to the effect. Accordingly, as the post-button side operation, first, it is displayed that the operation is accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 359 (c)), and the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, an effect of causing either “50 defeats” or “100 defeats” based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 359 (d) and 359 (e)) ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of effects that can occur when an effect is received for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within a special effect reception period. The production mode (in this case, the production mode of “one body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function functions. Thus, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as “the rendering mode having the lowest expectation appears by the automatic rendering function”.

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic performance function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to maintain the automatic button performance state. However, as described above, during the special production reception period, the production mode shown in FIGS. 359 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the production mode appears. , The sword-side post-operation effect while the ratio of occurrence of the “low-expected specific effect mode (here, the“ 1 body defeat ”effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g)”) is low. Since an opportunity to enjoy the game is given, it is expected that the sword decorative body 5001 is preferably urged to be operated.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, a special period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted for production and a period for which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is produced is simultaneously generated and ended simultaneously. Although control is performed as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to generate these periods simultaneously. For example, if the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted for production and the period during which the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted for production are overlapped in some of those periods, the periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern is selected from among the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, “the operation means that a plurality of operation means can be accepted, and the effect varies depending on which operation means is operated. The special production reception period such as “executed” may be generated without fail. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern, “Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and also a special effect reception period occurs. You should be able to come up with a stunning strategy that presupposes that a special production reception period will occur, such as `` Do you need to set the automatic button production state before you do? '' . For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice effect was performed in what kind of effect (expected degree)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a judgment material for “which of a plurality of operation means should be operated within the special production reception period”, and the game until the special production reception period occurs This also makes it possible to maintain this favorably.

  However, even when a specific production pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410 within a special production reception period, or when there is an operation on the sword ornament 5001, an automatic production function is further provided. Which direction of appearance will appear when the function is activated is determined by lottery (determination) based on the result of the big hit determination at the start of symbol variation or when the reception of an effect occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even if there is a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001. When there is an effect state in which an effect display (FIGS. 357 (a) and 359 (a)) suggesting that a special effect acceptance period is started, the setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to occur. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that “a special production reception period in which the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword ornament 5001 is started. Even if you try to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue to play games while maintaining the automatic button effect state It is now possible to provide “stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state” only for those who are in the state, and the production for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state Will be able to provide value.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 358 (g)” that can appear when the post-sword side operation is performed is displayed on the button side operation. Although it was decided to execute as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, for the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation”, the post-button-side operation production is It may be executed in the same manner as the performance mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, “50 body defeat” shown in FIG. 357 (d)). Even if “the specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears as a result of the action, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the post-button operation is performed appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation buttons It becomes difficult for a third party who does not know which of 410 and sword decorative body 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is a remarkably low performance situation. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect state such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” appears. Despite this, depending on whether the production status is caused by an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword ornament 5001, the design variation (the design variation in the execution state) ), The degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear will be different, so it will be even more interesting as an effect using multiple operating means. It becomes possible to.

  However, this is the case where the “specific effect mode having the lowest expectation” in the post-sword operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear even when the post-button operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “highest expectation special effect mode” in the post-sword operation, a unique effect mode (for example, different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-button operation is performed) (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (i)) It is desirable to execute this.With such a configuration, “the specific performance mode with the lowest expectation” is the post-sword side operation. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that the third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 has been operated is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. When a “special performance mode with the highest expectation” appears in the post-sword side operation, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that there is a production situation where the degree of expectation is extremely high. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decorative body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the sword side operation). Anything can be used as long as it is recognizable. For example, uniqueness among other effects may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp light emission.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of the post-sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 358 ( i)) can appear, and when the “777 body defeat” effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIGS. 357 (d) and 357 (e)). , FIG. 358 (g), FIG. 358 (h)), the rate at which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) is higher. This percentage may be 100%. However, the “777 body destruction” effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) does not necessarily have to appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) is made higher than the appearance rate of the production mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) by the amount that the expectation level of the production mode shown in (g) is lowered. It becomes.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the post-button operation effect (FIGS. 357 (c) to 357 (e)) and the post-sword operation effect (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)). ), A common performance mode (here, a “100 body defeat” performance mode) can appear, but a common performance mode should not appear. Also good. In addition, only the display change appears in the post-button-side operation, whereas in the post-sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, a movable body operation, lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. Further, the post-button-side operation and the sword-side post-operation may not be common as the content of the effect regarding the number of defeats, and the content itself may be executed as different effects.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 357 to FIG. 359, first, for any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 when the production is accepted, including when the production is accepted by the function of the automatic production function. Although the display (FIG. 357 (c), FIG. 358 (f), FIG. 359 (c)) suggesting whether or not the production has been accepted appears, the expectation is suggested without causing the display to appear. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, as a result of the post-sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)), the “777 body defeat” production mode (FIG. 358 ( When i)) appears, it is related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIGS. 357 (d), 357 (e), 358 (g), and 358 (h)) appears. The rate at which the production (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related production appears, the operation means (the sword decoration body) on the higher expectation side It is desirable to increase the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to favorably perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the production risk is high.

[Production reception process according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And a process of generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the reception of the effect by the operation, and an effect reception that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the fact that the operation is accepted by the operation. It is possible to execute a process related to a plurality of different operation effects such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect suggesting the degree of expectation) different from the one expected effect That.

  In such a configuration, the type of effect as an expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs according to the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the game entertainment at the time of operation, but also to increase the game entertainment from the generation reception period to the operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the effect reception period that permits the effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When an effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed, or an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed within an effect acceptance period in which an effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, the effect acceptance is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation button 410 is operated even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period Can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect state in which the first display effect is displayed within the effect acceptance period appears. The first display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is operated when an effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears in the effect reception period. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect receiving period, the user is worried about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without any problems.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect does not occur. And
An effect situation in which an effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) and allows an effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 is generated and the first display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, a process for generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for ending the automatic button effect state are performed (the effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). See progress),
An effect situation in which an effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state), permits an effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 361 described later). See Production Progress),
An effect that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state), does not generate an effect reception period that permits an effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and displays the second display effect. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button The process of ending the effect state is not performed (see the effect progress shown in FIG. 362 described later),
An effect reception period that is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state) and that allows an effect reception (operation) to the operation button 410 does not occur, and the first display effect and the second display effect When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation where none of these are displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect) None of the above is performed, and each process such that the process of ending the automatic button effect state can be performed is performed according to each effect state (effect reception process according to the display type).

  According to such a configuration, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, the first display effect appears. If the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the second display effect appears, the type (first operation) as the expected effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation (effect reception) The expected effect (post-operation effect) itself does not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, as well as making the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect different. There is a possibility that the process for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type when in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

  FIG. 360 shows the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period while the automatic button effect state is controlled. The example of an effect when the 1st effect pattern which can be set as "the effect reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appears. (First display effect).

  If an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted at timing tb12 prior to the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (c), the symbol variation (in the execution state) based on the effect acceptance. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, “Nakakichi” fortune) is executed (first expected effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol will appear in the symbol variation). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 is also received without digesting the remaining time. It will end at the time. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled” (in this case, “auto button is being set”) that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) "Is also hidden.

  In this case, however, the first post-operation effect (the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception) is generated at the timing tb13 as shown in FIG. 360 (d), regardless of which effect is received during the period of the timing tb11 to tb13. The first expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the midst of execution so that the game entertainment is suitably maintained over the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the effect is accepted. This is desirable.

  FIG. 361 shows that the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361 (a)) in the symbol variation execution period is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. The example of an effect when the 2nd effect pattern which can be set as "the production reception period which accepts" is performed is shown.

  In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. , “Haunted OBK with a gift box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, when “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation is necessarily generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 361, the ghost OBK with a present box can be displayed within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, and the period before the timing tb23 in the period in which the ghost OBK is displayed. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 at the timing tb22, this is accepted, and as shown in FIG. 361 (c), the jackpot symbol is changed by the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the running state) based on the effect acceptance. A second post-operation effect (character display of “Intense heat” in the figure) suggesting the degree of expectation to appear is executed (second expectation effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 is terminated when the effect is received without using the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the display indicating that “the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here“ auto button is being set ”)” that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be.

  It should be noted that, regardless of which presentation is received during the period from timing tb21 to tb23, at timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361 (d), the second post-operation presentation (second) generated by the reception of presentation. In order to maintain the game entertainment favorably over the period from timing tb21 to tb23, regardless of the timing at which the presentation is received, it is assumed that the expected production) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution. Is desirable.

  FIG. 362 is for controlling the automatic button effect state to generate the second post-operation effect in the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362 (a)) in the symbol change execution period. The example of an effect when the 3rd effect pattern which displays "a ghost OBK with a present box" is performed, although the production reception period of no.

  In the third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the production situation in which the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation production in which the degree of expectation is suggested even if the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not necessarily generated, an instruction display prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (an arrow display in a downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 362, the ghost OBK with a present box can be displayed within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33, but the ghost OBK is displayed as shown in FIG. 362 (a). In such a period, an “effect reception period allowing the reception (operation) of the operation button 410” does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361 (a) and 361 (c), even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed, the operation after the operation corresponding to the operation is performed. The effects (first post-operation effect and second post-operation effect) do not appear, and the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed over the period of timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred. In this case, basically, the process for terminating (releasing the setting) the automatic button effect state is performed, but even if the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, the process is shown in FIG. When the operation button 410 is operated in such a production situation (the production situation where the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed), the process of generating the post-operation production and the automatic button production state It is assumed that the production is advanced so that none of the processing to be terminated is performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 361 (c) is displayed when the mode shown in FIG. 362 (b) (the ghost OBK with a present box) which is the same mode as FIG. 361 (b) is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in anticipation of the occurrence of the post-production (second expected production), the production does not change, but the automatic button production state is not canceled. This can be continued. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
Even in the state where the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is validated, and when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the detection timing is “within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed”. When it is within the period of time tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed, the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing when the ghost OBK with a present box is displayed is displayed. If it is not within the period of tb21 to tb23, a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
-Adopting a method such as a method of not detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 when the haunted OBK with a present box is displayed. It is possible, and any implementation method may be used.

  FIG. 363 shows that the period from timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363 (a)) of the execution period of symbol variation is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. Although the above-described first effect pattern that can be set as “allowable effect reception period” is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 is shown.

  As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display for prompting an operation to the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13. Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (c), at the timing tb12 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the running state) based on the function of the automatic effect described above. A suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, “Okichi” fortune) is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, continues. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12 ′, as shown in FIG. 363 (d), the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function at the timing tb13. It is desirable that the expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to favorably maintain the game entertainment over the period of timing tb11 to tb13.

  FIG. 364 shows that the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 364 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is controlled as “automatic button effect state”. Although the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as “allowable effect reception period” is executed, an example of effect when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23 is shown.

  As described above, in the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410” has arrived, as shown in FIG. In the device 1600, “a ghost OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when the “ghost box with a present box” is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (an arrow display in the downward direction or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) appears. There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timing tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function Thus, the same change as that when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is caused to the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364 (c), at the timing tb22 ′, the expectation degree that the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the automatic effect described above. A suggested second post-operation effect (character display of “hot heat” in the drawing) is executed (second expected effect). However, in this case as well, the production reception period that has occurred from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic production function functions without using up the remaining time, but the automatic button production state continues without being canceled. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22 ′, the “display indicating that the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here,“ auto button is being set ”), which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is continued. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22 ′, as shown in FIG. 364 (d), the second post-operation effect (second state) generated by the above-described automatic effect function at the timing tb23. It is desirable that the expectation effect) is not finished yet and is in the middle of execution in order to favorably maintain the game entertainment over the period of timing tb21 to tb23.

  Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is not affected within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the production reception period for generating the second post-operation production does not occur in the first place, the automatic production function described above cannot function, and the automatic button production state is also canceled. Needless to say, it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 are executed with different contents. Depending on whether the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed, the type (first operation) as the post-operation effect when the operation is performed The expectation effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear even if the second display effect appears as well as the expected effect (second expectation effect) and the second expectation effect). There is a possibility that the processing to end the automatic button effect state is not performed. Accordingly, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to suitably improve the game entertainment when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  In addition, about a 1st display effect, there exists a some effect aspect from which a degree of expectation differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG and the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, a button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

  Moreover, about the 1st expectation effect, there exist a some effect aspect from which an expectation degree differs, and it may be made to be able to be performed by either of these effect aspects. In addition, the second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having contents that are not related to each other. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected production, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the expectation degree due to the character display Is suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as an effect by a movable effect or a lamp display, the contents may not be related to each other.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the second display effect appears as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the symbol variation execution period, the “effect for the operation button 410” is displayed. The second display pattern and the second display pattern that are preliminarily determined (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of symbol variation) that the “acceptance period for allowing reception (operation)” to occur occur. A third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process that is performed at the start of symbol variation) that “the effect reception period that allows the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” does not occur. It was decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance that the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” when the second display effect appears, A determination (lottery) is performed as to whether or not the second expected effect is generated based on the fact that the effect is received within the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410”, When the specific result is obtained in the determination, the second expected effect is generated, and when the specific result is not obtained in the determination, the second expected effect is not generated, so that FIG. The example of the effect shown in FIG. 364 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, the “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) for the operation button 410” may not occur. The above-described third performance pattern may be further prepared in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of symbol variation).

  When the second expected effect occurs as a result of the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. As a result of the presentation acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410, the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) may be higher than when the first expected rendering occurs. desirable.

  In addition, when the second display effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) described above is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearing during the period higher. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) will be performed, and it is possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

  360 to 364, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed and the second display effect (FIGS. 361 (b) and 362). The above-described automatic performance function is made to function both when (see (b)) is displayed. However, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is not necessarily generated even if there is an operation, the above-described automatic operation is not performed. If the effect function is made to function, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function is left to perform the operation. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b) is displayed. When the second display effect is displayed, it is not known whether the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not be generated.

  Further, in the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, an “effect reception period permitting the operation reception (operation) to the operation means” is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do it. Further, in the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect reception period allowing the operation reception (operation) to the operation means” or by the player. Even if an operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect that the ghost OBK is displayed at the timing tb23 or the timing tb33 may be continued.

[Automatic hitting function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. However, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a predetermined operation means a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly pressing the operation button 410) and generates a presentation reception each time the operation is performed, and a plurality of operation effects are performed in response thereto. May be. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes a problem how to make the above-described automatic effect function function when a specific effect acceptance period in which such an operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is used during a specific effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given. Even if the predetermined operation means is maintained in the operation state for a relatively long time without performing the operation multiple times, an effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press etc.) It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When the operation state is maintained, a presentation is accepted every time a predetermined time elapses, and a post-operation presentation corresponding to these is generated multiple times. It is feasible.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting) is given when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated during the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically operated in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. As in the case where the multi-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) is activated, a process for generating an effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous hitting function is activated when an operation by a so-called long press is performed within a specific effect receiving period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Thus, when at least the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as that when the automatic continuous hitting function is activated appears even if the long press operation is not performed within the specific effect acceptance period. Therefore, even when the automatic effect function is made to function when a specific effect reception period requiring a plurality of operation receptions in the automatic button effect state occurs, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. The player can enjoy the production without feeling dissatisfied with the occurrence frequency.

  FIG. 365 (a) shows a period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the control is not in the automatic button effect state. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect reception period to which is given” is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. The example of the production when performed over is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in this effect example, each time the operation button 410 is operated in the single operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Whenever it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (in this case, rising detection is performed), an effect is received according to the operation, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the reception. . Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), the specific time from the start of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception to the end thereof. There may be a new production reception (operation detection). In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed when the effect is received is interrupted, and a specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is newly generated. Thus, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when operated by the player. Note that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time has elapsed since it was started unless a new effect is received again during execution of the specific effect. Become.

  FIG. 365 (b) shows the operation period of the timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the control is not in the automatic button effect state. A specific production pattern that can be set as a “specific production reception period” is executed, and an operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific production reception period The example of the effect when operation with respect to the button 410 is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 365 (b), in the specific effect receiving period (timing tc11 to tc13), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state with respect to the operation button 410 is maintained in a long press manner. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) when Auto-strike function) is executed. As this processing (automatic continuous hitting function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed on the condition that the operation button 410 is in an operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, It is possible to execute the process as “a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on reception” ”. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 366 (a) shows a period of timings tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period to which“ is given ”is executed, and an example of the effect when no operation is performed within the specific effect receiving period is shown.

  First, when no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is never executed and at timing tc13. At that time, the specific production reception period ends.

  On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, as shown in FIG. The automatic production function described above functions at a timing tc12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the production reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function generates a new specific effect (e.g., every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described auto-strike function functions. Processing to generate post-operation effects) is executed.

  In addition, as this processing (automatic effect function), for example, “operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (based on reception of the effect) is performed”. It can be executed as a process such as “generation of post-operation effect”. Further, when the above-described automatic performance function is activated at timing tc12, the automatic repetitive strike function is used, and this is used so that “operation detection (production reception) is performed each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection is performed. A process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) based on (effect reception) may be performed. Then, when a specific performance condition is satisfied, such as the number of times that operation detection (production reception) is performed on the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the production is received. In addition, a production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested in response to the specific production condition being satisfied is caused to appear, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without digesting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 366 (b) shows the operation period of the timing tc11 to tc13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled. The specific effect pattern that can be set as the “specific effect receiving period” is executed, and the operation on the operation button 410 is long pressed in the state where the above-described automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect receiving period. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), as in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, and thereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. After the occurrence of, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function functions (or by causing the automatic continuous hitting function to function). The process to be executed is executed.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long press manner at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected when the automatic button effect state is set, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the reception of the effect is not made even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. In this way, the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is prevented from occurring at the timing tc12a, and the process (predetermined time t1) is executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled. This is continued without ending the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time elapses.

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, an operation by long press at any timing when in the state Even if is started, there is no longer any delay in the progress of the production due to a change in the rhythm or tempo of the specific production (post-operation production) triggered by the operation, and it was already in the running state. The process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a manner that is inherited until after the operation mode by long press is started. Therefore, even in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect acceptance period, the player can operate without worrying about the adverse effect on the effect in the execution state. This makes it possible to perform an operation by the player. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), although the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, the effect situation is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a). The same aspect appears as the aspect of the specific effect appearing within the specific effect reception period.

  It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is taken over after the operation mode by long press is started. It can be executed in the form of an auto-tapping function that functions when a long press operation is performed within the specified production reception period, and a function when no operation is performed within the specific production reception period. The same process (a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions is performed. It is none other than.

  However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is consumed, and the fact that the operation state is in the operation state. On the condition that the above determination is made, the process (process for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) that has been executed since the automatic button effect state has been continued is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is not in the operating state at the time when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is consumed, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Rather, the process that has been executed since the automatic button effect state was entered (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

  In the example of production using the automatic repetitive function shown in FIG. 365 (b) and the automatic production function shown in FIGS. 366 (a) and 366 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set with reference to the timing when the specific production ends. The process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of time (the first mode as the automatic continuous hitting function and the automatic effect function) is executed, but instead, the timing at which the specific effect starts is used as a reference As described above, a process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) after the elapse of the predetermined time t2 (second mode as an automatic repetitive function and an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end, but preferably, from the start of the specific effect to the end. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in a manner that is interrupted. Even though no operation is performed, it is possible to feel the sense that a single operation is repeatedly performed at high speed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the timing tc12 when the automatic effect function functions (in the period of timing tc11 to tc12), at that time. The automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). At this time, the first specific effect is generated according to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses if the operation is a long press mode. A process (automatic striking function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed, and if the operation is a single press mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Each time a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the production reception is performed when the specific production is in the middle of execution, the specific production in the middle of the execution is interrupted in response to the production reception. Although the new specific effect is generated, a new specific effect corresponding to the reception of the effect may be generated in parallel with the specific effect that is in the middle of execution without ending.

  As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when a new single operation is performed and a production is received when the previous specific production generated by the single operation is in the middle of execution, When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated in response to an effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or auto repetitive function) is in the middle of execution Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has changed from the original position to an operation state by a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection. The process (the process of generating a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. After this, if the operation state is maintained when a predetermined time has elapsed with reference to the previous specific effect (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is changed to the predetermined time). The processing that is generated every time elapses) is further continued, so that the player can end the automatic button effect state while preferably continuing the operation system effect in the execution state from the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which an operation system effect is performed by the operation of, and it is expected that the player participation consciousness will be raised.

[Setting process related to automatic button effect state according to effect pattern type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) Settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and by simplifying such operations, settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be maintained while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during symbol variation. To be able to do it.

  However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the symbol change execution period, the processing load increases due to a setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol change. There is a concern that it will adversely affect the determined production progress. In this regard, the types of “effect patterns executed based on the result of the jackpot determination” are at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” and “operation Since the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the prompt indication is displayed cannot be set” is prepared, the setting and release of the automatic button effect state are not necessarily executed promptly depending on the type of effect pattern. In some cases, there may be no problem. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, it is during the symbol variation execution period. By changing the processing mode related to the setting and release of the automatic button effect state, an increase in processing load during the symbol variation execution period is suppressed.

  FIG. 367 is a symbol variation in “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) and an operation for setting (setting operation) are performed within the symbol variation execution period . The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

  As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the first effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation is started with the “effect pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state is in a state where the automatic button effect state can be released (a state in which the release operation is allowed). .

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Is done.

  Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is detected. When an operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect is received, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without digesting the remaining time Will be. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received. It is not accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect receiving period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received and the effect after the operation is executed, and the automatic button effect state is canceled. Acceptance as an operation is also made, and the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific effect acceptance period ends in this way, although the symbols are changing. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It will be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

  In this production example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the automatic button production state is set, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped, The next symbol variation is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the performance progress is made with the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  In this manner, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367, the specific effect is included in the period during which the first effect pattern is executed in a state where the automatic effect effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed. When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that symbol variation has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is controlled. In addition, by performing the release operation before the specific production reception period occurs, it is possible to cause the specific production reception period to be generated in a state where the automatic button production state is released, and the player himself operates It is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the desire to be generated arises. In the production example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific production reception period is started, but the release operation is performed after the specific production reception period is ended. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set” is set, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed. Is also allowed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the end of the specific effect acceptance period, but the setting operation by the player within the period before the start of the specific effect acceptance period. Even if this is done, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs. By performing an operation on the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. This is also possible, and it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the user wants to enjoy the post-operation production by the automatic production function.

  In order to obtain such effects, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) related to the effect contents in the first effect pattern. Even if it is obtained, it is desirable to always generate this during the specific performance reception period. In addition, a specific effect display can appear within the symbol variation period, and when the specific effect display appears, a specific effect reception period always occurs before the symbol variation in the execution state is ended. It is desirable to make the production progress. According to these configurations, it is possible to recognize that the specific production reception period occurs by confirming the production contents appearing within the symbol variation execution period, and until the specific production reception period occurs. It is possible to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  At this time, as for the specific effect display, it is possible to give an indication as to whether or not the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the determination is made for selection regarding whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Still further, the specific effect display includes at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display. When the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It is permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by an operation by the player after the specific effect acceptance period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by an operation by the player between the time when the second specific effect display appears and the time when the specific effect acceptance period occurs, the specific effect It is possible to favorably maintain the game entertainment from when the display appears until the specific production reception period occurs.

  FIG. 368 shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display for prompting the operation appears cannot be set” ) ”Is started, and an example of processing when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) and an operation for setting (setting operation) are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation It is a time chart which shows.

  As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set. Assume that symbol variation is started in “2 effect patterns”. Then, in this effect example as well as in the case shown in FIG. 367, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed), although the symbol variation is being executed. Production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

  In this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Is done.

  That is, it seems that there is little merit to end the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the symbol variation in the hold state is digested, there is a high possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set” appears. At this time, there may be a desire to return to a normal performance mode (a desire to end a specific performance state) in which the performance can be developed depending on the player's own operation.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is set is being executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. In addition, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern for which the specific effect acceptance period is set” is still on hold. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect acceptance period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) has to be performed without rushing.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is performed at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set and is not controlled in the automatic button effect state is being executed. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is in the operation state from the original position and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (2 seconds in this case)), at least the second effect pattern The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed) during the period in which is executed. Instead of this, even when the operation button 410 is detected based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is performed. The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

  In other words, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. In addition, even if the operation is performed, the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is executed. In view of such a fact, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed. However, it is considered that there is no problem if the automatic button effect state is set before the specific effect acceptance period that can occur after the next symbol variation is digested.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is being executed, the setting operation by the player was performed within the period. However, until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the automatic button effect state is not set, and the symbol variation corresponding to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol stop (losing) When in the symbol stop state (timing td24 in the figure), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, even if an operation by the player is performed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not permitted, and the set timing is Since it was carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to a setting change related to the production state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player) Such a situation can be suitably suppressed.

  And in the production example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was stopped, the automatic button production state is set and the state is put on hold. The next symbol variation that was present is digested (variation start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol variation is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the performance progress is made with the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, in a state where the second effect pattern is in the execution state in a state where the second effect pattern is not being controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated at any timing, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. Then, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in processing load due to a setting change relating to the effect state that was not determined at the start of symbol variation occurring during the symbol variation execution (by an operation by the player). It becomes like this.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the next symbol variation in the hold state is started after the symbol variation of the second effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is stopped. However, when the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is stopped (losing symbol stopped), even if the next symbol variation is not in the hold state, the automatic button is used when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped). The production state is set.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when a setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect acceptance period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern The automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is stopped. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in short, the automatic button within the period during which the second effect pattern is being executed. Any setting may be used as long as the setting timing is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or within the period during which the next symbol variation is being executed. In other words, when the next symbol variation is started, if there is a production situation such as “It is decided to change the setting related to the production state within the symbol variation”, the production is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it only needs to be advanced, an increase in processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of symbol variation is preferably avoided.

  In this case, even if the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stopped) or the next symbol variation is executed It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the set period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, the determination as to which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed is performed. It is possible to carry over the timing at which the automatic button effect state is set after the symbol is stopped without performing.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is in the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the second effect pattern was ended. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol variation is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol variation. If the second effect pattern is terminated while the button is not in the on-hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop).

  Further, apart from “the second effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation to appear cannot be set” (second fluctuation pattern), “the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display to prompt the operation appears cannot be set. 3 effect patterns (winning variation) "are further prepared, and when the player performs a setting operation within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol stop state or the jackpot game execution period The automatic button effect state may be set in the screen.

[Prohibited period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  However, if the specific process related to the production such as the production setting is allowed at any time during the symbol change execution period including the setting process to the automatic button production state, the tension will be reduced. There is a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game will be lowered due to the lack of performance. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol variation corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when a specific production reception period has not occurred, a specific process related to production such as production setting is performed by an operation by the player. In an allowed gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibition period during which a specific process relating to the above-described effect is not allowed to start during a period from when the symbol change is started to when the specific effect acceptance period occurs is preferably started. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, even when the specific production reception period has not occurred, the operating means (such as the operation button 410) while the prohibition period has not occurred. ) Is required to be performed, and it is possible to favorably maintain player participation consciousness with respect to games and performances.

  Hereinafter, although the example of the effect which adopted "the setting processing to an automatic button effect state" as "specific process regarding an effect" is explained in full detail, as an "specific process regarding an effect", it is not restricted to this, For example, effect mode ( You may make it apply as other processes, such as the process which changes the production mode (the 1st character becomes a leading role) to other production modes (the production mode in which a 2nd character becomes a leading role).

  In FIG. 369, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period (specific effective period) in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears” can be set. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of fluctuation, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when the effect is advanced with the third effect pattern. FIG. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the first effect pattern described above.

  As shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (a), when there is an effect state that is not controlled in the automatic button effect state, the “third effect effect period during which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started at “Pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the progress of the effect as the third effect pattern is made in a state where the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). .

  However, in this effect example, when symbol variation is performed in “a third effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears” can be set, timing te11 (before the specific effect acceptance period occurs) In FIG. 369), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370 (b), an image in which a chain is wrapped around a padlock is displayed and a button lock effect is displayed in which characters such as “auto setting invalid” are displayed. Has been.

  The prohibition period thus generated is terminated when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 has arrived. However, no matter how much operation (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 370 (c) and (d), the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. ) Is designed to prevent any changes.

  When the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not displayed, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is permitted. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 370 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 370 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 370 (f), the stage is set as the stage for accepting an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001, but the stage for receiving an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (f), the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set. The automatic production function described above does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect acceptance period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set” is executed in the effect state shown in FIG. 369, before the prohibition period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to the automatic button effect state, it is possible to generate the specific effect acceptance period in the state set to the automatic button effect state. The automatic production function described above can be made to function at a specific timing within the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the pattern change is not the timing when the operation button 410 enters the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). However, in this case, when the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the arrival of the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369, after the timing te11 occurs. Thus, the setting to the automatic button effect state can be permitted. Accordingly, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. Is desirable.

  FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period related to setting of the automatic button effect state) related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect setting”.

  That is, as described above, in the production example described above with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, if a prohibition period occurs at timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (for example, 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed after the second (second) elapses, the setting operation is not accepted and the specific effect (prohibited image) is displayed. Is designed to prevent any changes.

  However, in the following modification example described in detail with reference to FIG. 371 and FIG. 372, the prohibition period is “one requiring a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) from the occurrence to the end”. Are the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player for ending the prohibition period early This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 in that a process that can allow an operation (operation 410) is executable.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (a), when there is an effect situation that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, a “specific effect reception period during which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that symbol variation is started with “3 effect patterns”. Then, in this modification as well, during the symbol variation execution period, the progress of the presentation as the third presentation pattern is in a state where the automatic button presentation state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

  In addition, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. The prohibition period that is not performed is started, and in this prohibition period, a specific effect (an image during prohibition) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is also displayed. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to 370.

  However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 371, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a after the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) is reached (period in which cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how much operation (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed within the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 372 (c)). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed since the prohibition period occurred), the operation by the player When (operation with respect to the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute processing that can end the prohibition period early.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibition period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), first, the timing te11a arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period in which cancellation is impossible) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (d), an image NJG that suggests the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modified example, when the timing te11a arrives, such an image NJG appears (see FIG. 372 (d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be canceled ( From the timing te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that the prohibition period has been canceled (timing te11a to te12), and the remaining time is indicated in the prohibition period. Can be made to function as an effect on whether or not to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within a period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, the operation button 410 enters an operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. Thus, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

  Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period ends early due to the first operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. Can be executed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (e), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is destroyed and characters such as “successful release” are displayed, thereby causing an effect change. Thereby, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period is ended early, if the second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here “auto button is being set”) accompanying the effect setting appears.

  Thereafter, when the above-mentioned “prediction effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 372 (f)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (Refer to FIG. 372 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 is set, but an effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is set. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in the state set to the automatic button effect state, If the player does not perform an operation until the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic performance function will function. However, even if it is the example of production shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372 (g), the invalidation period is first performed by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalidation period is allowed to be released. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370 (f), unless the process is set to the automatic button production state by performing the second operation in the state where the early termination is performed, Needless to say, the same production situation will appear.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific production reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the “prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is ended. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not permitted” is ended (in a manner linked to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect acceptance period occurs while the opportunity to set the automatic button effect state remains disabled. It becomes possible to raise player participation consciousness when there is no production reception period.

  In the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted”, when production reception is performed within a specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. You may make it make any one of several production modes in which the ratio which the production aspect of comparatively high expectation appears as a post-operation production, the ratio which a big hit symbol appears by the symbol fluctuation in an execution state, etc. appear.

Moreover, in the production example shown in FIG. 371 and FIG. 372, based on the result of the big hit determination,
When in the third state where the effect image shown in FIG. 372 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, “padlocks” having different ratios (expectations) in which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state. , Etc.)), and the appearance of one of the multiple appearance modes with different conditions of destruction
-When it is in the 2nd state where the production image of Drawing 372 (d) appears, when it will be in the above-mentioned 3rd state, "a specific 3rd production mode (a plurality of 3rd productions") Among the modes, a plurality of second performance modes (for example, “a plurality of performance modes with different colors of the image NJG”) having different ratios (expectations) of “appearance that is most advantageous to the player”. Make one appear,
-When it is in the 1st state where the production image of Drawing 372 (b) and (c) has appeared, when it will be in the above-mentioned 2nd state, "specific 2nd production mode (multiple Of the second presentation mode, a plurality of first presentation modes (for example, “a plurality of presentation modes having different background image colors”) that have different ratios (expectations) appearing. It is desirable to execute processing such as causing any one of “ According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other while the effects are advanced within the prohibition period or the process for early termination of the prohibition period is executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming interests during the prohibition period can be suitably maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is increased by promptly ending the prohibition period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect that the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period is movable. It is desirable to be able to be executed as a production mode for operating the decorative body. A predetermined movable decoration body is operated when a specific third performance aspect among a plurality of third performance aspects appears, and a predetermined movable decoration is displayed when a third performance aspect different from the specific third performance aspect appears. The body may not be operated.

  In addition, with respect to the effects illustrated in FIGS. 370 (e) and 370 (f) and FIGS. 372 (f) and (g), the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) is displayed. The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted occurs or whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword ornament 5001) can be accepted occurs. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350).

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific production reception period is necessarily generated after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period. After the “prohibition period during which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated, the symbol variation stops without generating the specific effect reception period. An effect pattern that can be performed may be prepared.

  In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, for the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not permitted”, the production pattern (for example, the super reach state) with a relatively low expectation degree of jackpot It is desirable that an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot (for example, an effect pattern in which a super reach state occurs) has a higher appearance ratio than an effect pattern in which no occurrence occurs. That is, in this case, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state over a predetermined period is forcibly lost despite the appearance of the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. It becomes possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness for winning the big hit will be increased.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it is unavoidable that the player who wants the automatic button effect state will not be able to avoid the interest, so FIG. 371 and FIG. As shown, when a certain amount of time has elapsed, the player can cancel the prohibition period early, and when it is released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to a state that is allowed again. It is desirable to make it.

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as a touch panel, a sword ornament 5001, and a cross key in addition to the operation button 410. In addition, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation object different from the operation object used when setting to the automatic button effect state, or when setting to the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibited period is ended early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the operation mode (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, in FIGS. 369 to 372, an example of an effect that employs “automatic button effect state setting process” as the “specific process related to the effect” is shown. Not limited to. However, with regard to the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of the type of symbol variation performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means may be operated within the symbol variation execution period. It is desirable that it can be executed by operation.

[Automatic rendering function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-described example is applied). Even if is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic rendering function) for causing the same change to the rendering as when the operation is performed. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even if it is during the symbol change execution period, an operation on a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) The settings related to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation makes it possible to perform the setting related to the automatic button effect state while keeping a close watch on the progress of the effect during the design variation. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation provided between the original position and the operation position so as to be operable by a predetermined driving force. Means (here, sword ornament 5001), and in an automatic button effect state (specific effect state), by the player within an effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, sword ornament 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic rendering function) that causes the same change as that when the operation is performed to the rendering can be executed.

  By the way, when the production reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated, for example, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the player is given an opportunity to operate to move to the operation position first and operate the movable operation means in the moved state. In this operation opportunity, the production reception may be performed by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, when such a production reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), and thereby the movable operation means (here, If there is a case where the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. There is a concern that a post-operation effect cannot be generated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, Even if the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position and an effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs, the automatic button effect state is controlled. If a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the production reception period, a process (automatic production function) that causes the production to produce the same change can be executed. .

  According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, the movable directing function can be used by using the automatic effect function. A post-operation effect using the operation means can be appropriately made to appear.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and it cannot operate, the operation itself on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) Since it is in a difficult situation, if an operation to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button The setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and eventually the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and No matter which production reception period occurs, the same production change is caused as when the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 here) on which the operation opportunity is given is operated. Processing can be executed (automatic rendering function). On this basis, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be set only by operating the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). It is supposed to be.

  That is, in this case, not only on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) that may not be able to operate when an abnormality / failure occurs, only by operating the general push-type operation button 410, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) during the symbol variation execution period, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set by operating the operation button 410. By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001).

  In order to suitably ensure the operability at the time of such an abnormality / failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) used for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) It is important that it is provided as an operating means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the restoration process described above in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say that.

  However, even if an abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) remains in a stopped state, an abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player side to recognize that it is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The restoration operation for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to normal (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-described processing content. For example, a restoration operation (an operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) to the original position is performed. The process is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until the original position is properly returned.

  According to such a configuration, the movable operation is confirmed by confirming that the restoration process is started with respect to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state or failure. Furthermore, as a result of the restoration process being performed, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position, so that the movable operation means (here, the sword is displayed). The player side determines whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the successful restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state in which an abnormality / failure has occurred due to the failure of the restoration process is continued. Be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has continued continues, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Thus, even if there is an abnormality / failure in the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operating means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is not affected. It is possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) in a state where an abnormality / failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, an effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) cannot be properly generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special performance reception periods can be generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). No matter which production pattern is selected and executed based on the result of the big hit determination, the maximum time required for the restoration processing for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) (restoration operation (5 (Time when second operation) is repeated up to the upper limit number (for example, 3 times)) and the time required for setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here 2 seconds) It is possible to execute a process for producing a presentation so that the special presentation acceptance period is not generated only after the passage.

  According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started with an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable operation is started. Even if an abnormality / failure occurs in the means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special performance reception period occurs. Since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is appropriate. Can be generated. In other words, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect acceptance period occurs in a state where abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the special effect is generated. The same change as that when the operation with respect to the movable operation means is performed within the reception period is caused to the effect.

  FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in this example of the effect process, when an abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001), the movable operation means (here) Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation for the automatic button effect state requires 2 seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) is included. It takes 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect acceptance) Period) and 10 seconds (post-operation effect) are allotted a time longer than “30 seconds”, and 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) are added to “17”. Unless the effect is advanced so that the special effect acceptance period is generated at a timing later than “second”, the pattern change (in the state where the abnormality / failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001)) It is not possible to ensure the above-described performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period is started.

  Therefore, in the figure, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (design variation times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is allocated, only the effect progress in which the special effect acceptance period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the production patterns D and E to which a time longer than “30 seconds” that is the above-described addition time is assigned, a special production acceptance period can be generated, but symbol variation is started. By making it possible to execute only the performance development that cannot cause the special performance reception period at the timing before “17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation))”, To ensure the above-described performance when the design variation (the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period) is started in a state where abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001). I have to.

  In the example related to the effect process, the special effect acceptance period can be generated in all of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than the above-described addition time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect acceptance period may be generated only in a part of the plurality of effect patterns to which the time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in reality, if the special production acceptance period may occur immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, the restoration process will fail. If the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed immediately after recognizing the fact, the special effect acceptance period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is not realistic because it cannot be done. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above time setting values are not designed in consideration of such time values, it can be said that there is no effectiveness with respect to the above-described effects.

  In this respect, the design including such a time value is that a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 Seconds), or a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received when an operation means to which an operation opportunity is given is maintained in an operation state for a predetermined time or more and a post-operation effect is generated. In the effective period (production reception period), even if the operation is started after the effective period is started, the operation and the long press are repeated a plurality of times / appropriate times until the effective period ends. Can be done over.

  In view of such a fact, in the above time setting, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) or long press effective periods (for example, 10 seconds) are used. It is desirable to make it. That is, in this case, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect acceptance period, “15 seconds (restoration process)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation effective period or long press effective period)”, A time longer than “36 seconds” or “38 seconds” obtained by adding “3 seconds (special effect reception period)” and “10 seconds (post-operation effect)” respectively, and “15 seconds (Restoration process) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation effective period or long press effective period) ”are added, and a special performance reception period is generated at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ” In this way, the effect is advanced, and only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as the effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  It should be noted that the multi-operation effective period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds) are not necessarily generated in the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated with a different production pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation effective periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds). Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) can generate both a valid operation period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press effective period (for example, 10 seconds), these effective periods It is desirable to set the longer side of 2 instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  In the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, it is required to digest the symbol variation one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, each time setting described above This design may not necessarily be performed. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period may occur during a period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, even during a period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001), the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player. It is desirable to be able to obtain. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means is in a period during which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the post-operation effect can be realized. This process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time reduction function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time reduction function is not enabled. In this case, the design for each time setting described above is used. Will not be performed.

  Further, in the example of the effect process described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operation means may be executed as one of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. . When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the “effect using movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs a specific operation-related effect, a special effect reception period, and an effect after operation. The Rukoto.

  Further, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) is generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if no operation is performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword ornament 5001) at least during the symbol variation in the normal game state. The special reception period that is given does not occur, but the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure is generated. Is possible. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) that is not the target of the above-described restoration process in the case of abnormality / failure is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operation means (here, the sword decorative body 5001) may be provided without performing the design for each time setting described above. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

  Further, in this example of the effect process, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the player's operation, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a possible gaming machine.

[Moveable performance triggered by the establishment of conditions different from the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received at the start port (first start port 2002, second start port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the big hit is won, the big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained after executing the symbol change in which the big hit symbol is displayed is executed, and after the big hit game, the player is advantageous. It is possible to control the game state (short time state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a provides effects according to the result of the determination related to winning (for example, various other notice effects such as timer effects, operation effects, pre-read effects, in addition to effect patterns) As described above, the game entertainment is maintained until the big hit game is performed.

  However, only by performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that it may be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate over a long period of time.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the display contents and the movable content in the effect display device 1600 are also obtained even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. It is possible to execute a process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decorative body. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode exceeding the category of symbol games, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the following methods listed below can be envisaged as methods for generating the above. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the symbol game start condition is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted. However, a situation where the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is “0” and the number of holds) The above-mentioned another condition must be able to be satisfied even if the condition is “0”, and even if the other condition is satisfied in the situation, It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
・ Performance lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuations periodically, and that a specific result is obtained by this production lottery is the above-mentioned method of “establishment of another condition”. A method of setting the above-mentioned number to reach a predetermined number, “establishing another condition”. Time is measured (for example, when the power is turned on) by RTC (real-time clock) function or arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or main control MPU 1310a) Measure the time from the above), and the above-mentioned “establishment of another condition” means that the measured time reaches a predetermined time

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is used, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, the change timing will arrive In general, it takes a relatively long time (for example, several hours), so that the display content or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite the long time. If there is a situation that can not be done, there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set in advance as the start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. In a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not in the original position even though it should be in the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the design fluctuates. When the corresponding restoration operation time has arrived, the movable decoration body can be started to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even if a predetermined restoration operation time arrives, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time within a specific state can be started without starting a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation. .

  That is, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on the fact that a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game is established, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state can be started, the movable body abnormality is detected in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. It is expected that the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed by being restored.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 374, an example of processing contents when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 374, for convenience of explanation, “when the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time using the RTC function, an RTC state in which different display content appears ( The specific state) is generated and the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (specific state) is described. As described above, the method for causing a change in the display content and the behavior of the movable decorative body in the effect display device 1600 when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. Even when other methods are adopted, it is possible to appropriately employ each technique described below.

  Assuming that there is a state prior to the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time (until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on the above, it is possible to execute processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the flow of the game so far is achieved by sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the basis of the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol variation. You can have a sense of expectation that will change. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes). If a big hit is won between the occurrence of the period (RTC state) and the end of the period, the progress of the production by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) has not occurred (normal state) ( It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, a condition that is not related to the state of symbol variation is established even at timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) timing Rt2. Based on the establishment of the condition (the establishment of the first condition), it is possible to execute a previous display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the second condition is established). That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the time Rt has arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing according to the occurrence of the RTC state (the behavior of the movable decorative body) is executed. . The “previous display” can be executed, for example, as a display “RTC state soon” or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations are the results of the jackpot determination. Is not based on the game (no expectation of any big hits) will be suggested to the player in advance, so it is preferable to avoid a decline in gaming interests due to misrecognition by the player Will be able to.

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least in the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only a display (display that does not conform to symbol variation) that does not show any expectation is displayed as the display content in the effect display device 1600. In order to prevent the display of the decorative design (effect pattern) itself, it is not displayed. That is, in this case, only the display that does not show any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) appears as the display contents in the effect display device 1600, and the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. Since the processing to be started is started, it is expected to more suitably avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to a recognition error by the player.

  Here, “pre-display that appears at timing Rt1” and “movable body operation that appears at timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display that does not conform to symbol variation” and correspond to “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. To do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated regardless of the execution state of the symbol variation at those timings (including the execution / non-execution). However, depending on the execution situation of the symbol variation, the situation in which the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are not ready to operate (the movable decorative bodies A, B, C are in the original position despite the timing Rt2 has arrived). It is feared that the process of sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be performed even when the timing Rt2 finally arrives.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the movable ornament A, the movable ornament B, Although a movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, the movable body operation time (in this case, when the RTC state occurs) in the RTC state described above is reached during the execution of such a movable effect. In some cases, at least one of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation comes, various movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 as well as the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are provided. It is possible to execute a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in this movable abnormality determination (abnormal determination), a predetermined amount is determined with respect to the movable decorative object that is the determination target in a form following the abnormality determination process. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), it is possible to recover the movable decorative body in an abnormal state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable body operating time within the above-described RTC state arrives during the execution of the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (such as an operation of moving the movable decorative body to the original position). If there is at least the movable decorative body A, B, or C, the movable decorative body that is in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-described “behavior of the movable decorative body in accordance with the design variation”. Can be assumed.

  As the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation”, for example, symbol variation start timing (time to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when symbol variation starts), symbol variation It is possible to execute (execute restoration processing based on command acquisition) as at least one of the stop times (when to acquire a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, first, at least “the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived, and then the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operating time in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, the movable decorative bodies (movable decorative body A and movable decorative body B used within the period). The movable decorative body C) is prohibited from being used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, so that the movable object operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (the movable ornament not conforming to the symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol fluctuation side.

  However, at this time, there is a concern that the game entertainment may be lowered if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at timing Rt1, only a display that does not indicate any expectation level (display that does not conform to symbol variation) is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. As described above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 arrives, The display that is not shown again (display from the timing Rt1) is not hidden at this time, and this is changed over the period until the timing Rt2a at which the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt <b> 2 to Rt <b> 2 a, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated and the symbol variation is actually performed, the effect display device 1600 has a decoration. Only the display in which the design pattern is hidden and no expectation is shown. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable ornament according to the occurrence of the RTC state (here, the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C) is advanced. It can be expected that the lowering of the game entertainment due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is suitably suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when timing Rt2a arrives). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display without any expectation (display from timing Rt1)” that has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can be made to appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, The display showing the expected degree of the production pattern and the notice production is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the “timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs has arrived. As long as it is within a period until the movable decorative body finishes operating in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) depending on the movable body operating time in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game due to the prohibition of the movable effect on the symbol variation side The decline in interest will be suppressed.

  As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether the situation should be prohibited at the start of symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure), and if it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (figure Among them, the C fluctuation) itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (a movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, the moving decorative body is moved according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state after the arrival of the RTC state (specific state) timing Rt2 in the middle of the corresponding symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation in the figure) Even if the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in a specific manner is completed, the movable effect ( Execution of at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is not permitted.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing at which the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state appears is the timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. There is concern about the decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, the production privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if the big win is won between the occurrence of the RTC state and the end, the special production mode is controlled. Etc.) is not generated at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol variation (C, D variation in the diagram) after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state is targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make the specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, until the timing Rt2 arrives, the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution is finished (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ) “After the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can also be assumed that the “period until completion of sequential operation by C” elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a has not arrived, the state in which “a display in which no expectation degree is indicated (display from the timing Rt1)” appears is maintained. This is the example shown in FIG. 374, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after timing Rt2) is the target of the RTC production privilege. Because it is not.

  Furthermore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 374, at least “after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movable body operating time in the RTC state. In this case, the restoration process is triggered even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived (the period until the completion of the sequential movement by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). By prohibiting this so as not to be performed (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not conforming to symbol variation) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the behavior of the movable decorative body) cannot be performed by the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation corresponding to the symbol variation side is performed. The processing to be performed is prohibited, and the processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the abnormal operation of the movable body is restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without being received, and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body is more reliably executed. .

  In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the game state is controlled in the normal game state and the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is being performed according to the big hit determination, It is assumed that the timing Rt1 arrives. As described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display “RTC state soon” appears in the background display of the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (losing) in the figure) is completed during the period from when the “RTC state is about to be displayed” to the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Variation (variation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol variation is in the middle of the process. At the timing Rt2, the three movable movable behaviors that do not conform to the symbol variation are observed. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. It should be noted that “display not conforming to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (losing) in the diagram) is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, “three movable decorative bodies A, R2 are generated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, This is prohibited so that neither the moving effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, although the symbol variation (B variation (losing) in the diagram) is being executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display in which the degree of expectation is displayed), the movement effect on the symbol fluctuation side (movable body operation in which the degree of expectation is indicated), and the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side are controlled as a period in which none is executed (first) One limit). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expectation) This is controlled as a period in which neither the movable body operation in which the degree is indicated) nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (second restriction).

  It should be noted that such control at timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both the design change side effect display (display indicating the degree of expectation) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the degree of expectation) are not executed) Even if the symbol variation in the period is not a loss variation, but is performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit variation), it is executed. That is, in this case, no expectation effect is executed, and the big hit symbol suddenly appears at the timing Rt2a when the sequential operation by the three movable ornaments A, B, and C is in the middle of execution. Therefore, the player who was expecting to be in the RTC state can enjoy the fun as a surprised performance exceeding the expectation. In addition, after the big hit symbol appears in this way, the big hit gaming state is generated while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated.

  In addition, as described above, for the display from timing Rt1 (only the display of the decorative symbol is not performed and no expectation is shown), the symbol variation that was in the middle of execution when timing Rt2 has arrived. The display is not displayed at the timing Rt2a to be stopped, and instead, a specific background (such as “RTC state”) after the occurrence of the RTC state is displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (in the diagram, variation pattern C) is newly started in a state in which a specific background (such as “RTC state”) is displayed, an effect display (expectation level indicates the variation pattern) is started. Display) will be executed as usual. However, with respect to the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, the timing Rt2a has arrived. Will also be maintained in a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the big hit determination, Although the display in the liquid crystal display, sound, and lighting of the lamp are normally performed, the corresponding movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the three movable decorative bodies A and B are moved depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. , C until the completion of the sequential operation (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) ”, the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation (here, the symbol variation start) Even if the time and stop time come, this is prohibited so that the restoration process (a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state) is not performed. . Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at timing Rt2a, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of symbol variation (in the diagram, B variation (lost)) and symbol variation (in the diagram, C variation (lost) )) Start time (restoration operation time) comes, but at these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing is never executed.

  However, in the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (timing Rt2 to Rt5 ′ at the time of abnormality), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. It is determined whether or not. In the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body A is, for example, after the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined presentation position (first position) and then at the predetermined presentation position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state. Based on the determination result, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body B is, for example, after the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (second position) and then at the predetermined effect position. This can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

  Next, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. In the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state. Based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. Processing to operate (operation at normal time) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode applied to the movable decorative body C is, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined effect position (third position) and then is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374 (e), when the timing Rt5 comes after the operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) is generated. The “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state, a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state Can be executed. However, while a series of movable body operations (in this case, sequential operations by the three movable ornament bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence of the RTC state are being executed, a predetermined value is applied to the movable ornament body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, the player will be awakened, and there is a concern that the gaming interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. The operation is not performed independently as an operation different from the sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C, but is performed as an operation in a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state itself can appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state. Thus, it is possible to favorably avoid a decrease in gaming interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is assumed that it is determined that the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, on the basis of the result of the abnormality determination, not the process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormality including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B It is possible to execute a process of operating in the operation mode (special operation). After that, without returning the restored (restored) movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is finished, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body C A process of operating the body C in a normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred is generated. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. When the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operating mode. It is possible to restore the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred while preferably maintaining the rendering mode at the time of occurrence of the RTC state such as “sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C”. That is, in this case, since one of the operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be performed, it is possible to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The fall of the game entertainment at the time of performing is suitably avoided.

  Note that the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially performed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. It starts when it is in the middle of the stage and continues until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is completed. Therefore, the stop timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) and the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the next symbol variation (D variation (losing) in the diagram) have arrived. In this case, since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration process is executed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), the “special mode including the restoration operation” when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoration operation” is described as “normal operation”. What is necessary is just to restore the movable decorative body B by the operation mode different from the “mode” (return to the original position), and for example, it may be the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, only a display (for example, “the RTC state is about to appear”) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears at the timing Rt1. The display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display differs depending on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC ready state”). You may make it switch to. However, even if the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to cause a new display to appear, a display that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation) It is important that a display that does not conform to

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. However, even when an abnormality determination is made when the movable decorative bodies A and C are operated, Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special manner including a restoration operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific manner is set as the generation time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy the condition based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, “Display” and “Behavior of movable ornament not conforming to design fluctuation” are started. However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function not conforming to symbol variation on the main control MPU 1310a side, "display not conforming to symbol variation" or "behavior of a movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation" May be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 374, “the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs (here, 3T This is forbidden so that the restoration process on the symbol fluctuation side is not performed during the period until the completion of the "sequential operation by one movable decorative body A, B, C". It is made difficult to cause a situation in which the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the (specific state) cannot be performed due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is in the execution state. In particular, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and as a result, the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state) may arrive. That is, in this case, the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed even during the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it is not executed.

  FIG. 375 is a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 374. “In the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are shown. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 374 in that the restoration process is not executed.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, in the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timing Rt1 to Rt2), the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or The restoration process) is not executed itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display not conforming to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state soon”) is made, this is restored. It will never be left in an abnormal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived. As described above, the process (the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is performed separately, and there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 374 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 374 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the process related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is executed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the above-described abnormality determination prior to executing the process relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. In such a case, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a manner that delays the arrival of the movable body operating time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is “a situation in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”. By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the above “special mode”. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 375 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state is generated, “the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body is performed. Suppose that it is determined that there is an abnormality in one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of the abnormality determination when “is not started yet”. Then, while maintaining the “situation in which the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is maintained. Will be restored.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375 (e) and (f), compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal, The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (in the figure, the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b), but the period generated by such a delay (in the figure, the timings Rt2 to Rt2b) is used. Thus, the movable body operating time in the RTC state can be reached after the abnormally determined movable decorative body is restored. Thereafter, when the movable body operating time comes within the RTC state, the processing described above with reference to FIG. 374 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. is doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (e). When the timing Rt5b comes after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the normal state, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to symbol variation”. ”Behavior” is ended, and the prohibition state (prohibition state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), an abnormality has newly occurred in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (f). After the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in a mode according to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” at the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibition state for the restoration processing on the symbol variation side (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b) ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, if an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination Each of the operations in the special mode is executed.

  According to such a configuration, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (here, three Sequential operations by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 375, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence (sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C here). In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased, a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state (in this case, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C). ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be executed in a normal state. The restoration operation for a plurality of movable decorative bodies may be executed in parallel. In this case, the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, if the player may feel that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state, it will be an amusement. There is concern about the decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state”. It is difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, an indication (error code or the like) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 375 (f), (g) as well as in the example shown in 374 (f), the restoration operation (restoration process) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period during which the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode (in the special mode operation according to the second abnormality determination). The display (error code, etc.) indicating that it is in progress will not appear. In addition, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is finished, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is finished, and FIG. The display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings at the timing when the sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is finished. There is no such thing as causing any change. These also indicate that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state so that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of occurrence of the RTC state” is performed. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

  In FIG. 374 and other examples thereof, and in FIG. 375 and other examples thereof, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, three or more, etc.) that is also used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is not limited to the above, based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition) What is necessary is just to operate | move by a specific aspect in the movable body operation | movement time within the specific state to generate | occur | produce.

  In addition, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation time in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operably provided body). Operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, and the like, and board-side movable ornaments provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the front front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decoration member SDY (a spear accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

  However, for example, in FIG. 374 and another example thereof, or in FIG. 375 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which “operation not conforming to symbol variation” is performed.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display that does not indicate any expectation level (until the timing Rt1 is displayed). "Display)" is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the diagram) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, the frame side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 and the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operating means is used within a period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed. In spite of being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame side movable decorative body that is also used as an operation means depending on the production pattern, There can be a situation where the production is confusing. In addition, in the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a (further, the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if symbol variation (C variation (losing) in the figure) is performed, an operation opportunity is not given within the period.

  Therefore, the specific operation means (the frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state where it is subjected to a specific operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state, and according to the result of the jackpot determination for the specific operation means. When the production time for giving the operation opportunity has arrived, the production display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation means. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to receive the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is assumed that the operation opportunity was originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make an appropriate suggestion to the person. In addition, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality by performing an operation on a specific operation unit in an operating state by preventing the production of an operation on the specific operation unit. Expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation to the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment interest of the game due to the fact that the production is not progressed may be lowered. Therefore, among the frame side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative body 5001 provided so as to be operable), the operation effect within the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is performed. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high operation effect generation rate within the symbol variation within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when operated (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) are executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be operable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001, etc.), the symbol variation according to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) having a relatively low occurrence rate of the operation effect in the interior of the movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operating time in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state. For example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for the operation opportunity grant according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decorative body 5001).

  Also, a frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent from the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform an operation by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 374) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 375) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In addition, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being influenced by the operation (delay or the like). In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are used as a panel-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is restored, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the movable decorative body is provided on the door frame 3 side. The operation by the frame side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decorative body with a relatively low generation ratio of the operational effect within the symbol variation). 5001)) When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot determination is executed. Even if, at least the “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the pattern variation (the start of the production pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing (here, the frame side movable decoration) in the production pattern It is desirable to make settings related to each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and other examples thereof, and in FIG. 375 and other examples thereof, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, When an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (according to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the production can be accepted, the production at the time of occurrence of the RTC state can be improved without sacrificing the production on the symbol variation side.

  Further, as described above, in view of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only by the symbol variation after the symbol variation first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, As for the operation (operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation by the sword ornament 5001), the execution can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation to be digested first after that is inevitably started, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is equivalent to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ), It is possible to provide a margin for completing operations that do not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Further, when the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, When performing the determination, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is used instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation in the normal state in the form of performing the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the above-mentioned operation, or performing the restoration operation and subsequent to this. In this case, the “special mode including the restoration operation” also restores (returns to the original position) the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, a minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  Then, the operation at the time of occurrence of the RTC state by the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is “normal mode”, “special mode including the recovery operation”, and “restoration operation”. As long as the operation is not completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is used as long as the operation is not completed. Therefore, it is more desirable to make settings related to each production pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not arrive. According to such a configuration, when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated when the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is generated. Regardless of whether the operation is executed in a normal mode or an abnormal determination mode, the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, an operation opportunity can be given.

  When an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) is accepted, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the presentation reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation (RTC) by the frame-side movable decorative body is given. Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It becomes impossible to receive the production, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will decline. Therefore, when the time from the above-mentioned timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, C in the normal mode is “special time”, the big hit determination As long as neither of the “specific time” and the “special time” have elapsed since the symbol variation started (the effect pattern started) Each production pattern (internal operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the production pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable ornament (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001) does not arrive). It is desirable to perform the setting related to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is also in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. It is desirable that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case with respect to a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A having a fast operation order or a movable decorative body having a long time required for the restoration operation). When it is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is prohibited, but a movable ornament different from the specific movable ornament (for example, the operation order is slow) When the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or a movable decorative body having a short restoration time is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. Processing (restoration operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the operation, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state.

  In addition, after the RTC state occurs, a timing when a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started and an operation of the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a state where the specific state has not occurred) When the restoration operation time to be performed (for example, the start time or the stop time of symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the state of production, there is a concern that the game entertainment will be reduced.

For example, it is assumed that the “symbol fluctuation start time” described above is set as the “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Now, as shown in FIG. 376, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is started, an effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the symbol variation is performed on the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the processing to advance the effect and symbol variation is started (based on the fact that the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) To perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the progress of the production concerning the “specific production pattern in which the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the design variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation in which the processing to be performed is performed in parallel will appear.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific performance pattern can be executed, the performance pattern (relatively expected) that is pairwise with the specific performance pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. And in the production pattern which is a pair relationship (production pattern with relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of “a specific effect pattern (a relatively high expectation effect pattern) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a design variation” is performed. The In this way, by providing two effect patterns (effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are paired in terms of performance, a specific timing tm2 is provided. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display about whether to operate) or not. Can be executed, and the play entertainment is suitably maintained by such performance.

  However, if the process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 comes after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing It becomes apparent that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation in which it is impossible to perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the entertainment interest will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, the progress of the effect relating to the “specific effect pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to be operated at the specific timing tm2” among the effect patterns, and the specific movable decorative object are predetermined. When a situation in which a process for performing a restoration operation (a restoration process based on a restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation) occurs in parallel with each other, a specific time tm2 until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. The “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body” is ended. In addition, as "a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body", various methods can be adopted, but in the following description, "whether the abnormal state is resolved, A description will be given on the assumption that “a process in which a restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached” is executed.

  More specifically, with regard to “a process for causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time required to be different will be different. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) simply by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable ornament, “predetermined restoration for a specific movable ornament” is performed. The timing tx at which “the process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored). As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is deferred to a later timing. At the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is executed once again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decorative body will be displayed. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed before the specific timing tm is reached regardless of the restoration situation. It becomes like this.

  In addition, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is performed once, x time is required, so that the relationship of “x time × n times <time of timings tm1 to tm2” is established so that one time The upper limit number n for repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be terminated before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. If a situation occurs, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 comes regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is not restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it can be suitably maintained as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decorative body is stopped at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, it may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (in the case where the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined performance is being performed, there is a directing effect as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined production may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In addition, as a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative object operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as `` nothing '', it is possible to exemplify a `` display effect that appears in advance in a manner that inquires whether or not a specific display result appears ''. When it is provided as “acting based on the reception of an effect by an operation by the player (or receiving an effect but not operating)”, “the effect of causing a specific display to prompt an operation by the player” Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the normal state has been achieved. In this way, even when there is an abnormal state at the start of fluctuation (or the “restoration operation time” such as when the previous symbol is stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation has arrived after restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be equipped with movable decorative bodies that perform a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure. With such movable decorative bodies, it is longer until the restoration process is completed. Often time-consuming. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or in an effect pattern that is paired with this, when the effect pattern is started Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the pattern change is started (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this accelerates the deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It can also be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is started. When the special production pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, while the special production pattern is produced, while the special production pattern is developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special production pattern is performed) Control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not to operate) does not appear. As shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (d), as a result of the arrival of timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the progress of the rendering related to the special rendering pattern. And when a situation in which a predetermined restoring operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least during a special performance pattern (period until the symbol is stopped) Does not end the restoration process, but continues it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not completed at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed, a restoration process in a more serious manner (for example, normal diagnosis after restoration is performed). This special function pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored in this way as a player. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent performance with confidence. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the winning combination is lost. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 appear a unique display mode such as “This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the restriction that “the abnormality must occur in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. For this reason, it is possible to perform restoration processing in a more serious manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special performance pattern is finished, if there is a case where the performance pattern according to the new symbol fluctuation is performed without interruption, the next restoration operation time (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) will arrive. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continued, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not in the original position). Will be. If a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within a time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and failure to adequately handle abnormalities may also accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (b) and (d), the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated, but this is continued in the form of the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, even if there is any hold during the execution of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, “even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, Since the restriction of “the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated, the restoration process in a more serious manner can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 377 (c) and (d), as a result of starting a new symbol variation when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is being executed, the new symbol variation is performed. As a case, “a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the design variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (c), the timing is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the state of the game and the effect after the special effect pattern is ended (and the situation of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 in the next symbol variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digestion of the special performance pattern), the specific movable over a relatively long time until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  In addition, after a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is finished, a situation in which a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis production pattern) is continuously executed appears. Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and straddle three or more symbol variations (production pattern) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

  In the example shown in FIG. 377, at a timing tx at which “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament” is completed, the specific movable ornament is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the situation is reached. As described above, since one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made returnable, and a specific movable decorative body can be made to produce an effect at a specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, a specific movable decorative object is abnormal at the timing tx even though the one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained from the timing tx until the next fluctuation operation is finished and the next restoration operation timing comes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directivity of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot variation, the jackpot symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) arrives, If the restoration process for a movable ornament of a certain number of times is started several times, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. There is a concern that the game entertainment will be lowered by the repeated restoration process on the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is set in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) has reached the predetermined upper limit number. In spite of this, when the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, only a special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body has been brought into the abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not been restored from the abnormal state although the predetermined upper limit number has been reached. Even when the +1 ”-th restoration operation time comes, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being finished. As described above, with respect to an aspect in which one restoration process is continued in a manner straddling the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count for is handled as a single restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, with respect to such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the backside decoration unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 side) In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200 and the specific decorative member SDY (eg, a decorative object), the frame side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner as described above. The However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation buttons 410 that are operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) In some cases, restoration (return) may be performed in a manner different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol variation is performed A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. In addition, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “a process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position with a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “Process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))”, “Character display for prompting operation (“ press ””), and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ”(See FIG. 341 (f))”. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, an operation to push in) and an effect is received, the “specific decorative member SDY (a decorative object) ) And the like (see FIG. 341 (g)) and “Process for causing display content to change (see FIG. 341 (g))”. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is rendered in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377.

  However, “operation for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” in such an operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. The “sword decoration body 5001 is in a normal state with respect to“ a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 ”and“ a process for performing a display for prompting an operation ”. It can be executed at any time and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player views the “display for prompting operation” and the sword decorative body 5001 is operated and received an effect, “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (a glimpse)” and “processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decorative body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decorative body 5001 receives an external force due to an operation by such a player, and the operation part moves, so that the abnormal state It may occur when the problem is resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, and the like) that is also used as an operation means. In the state described with reference to FIG. 376 and FIG. 377, when the abnormal state is reached, the frame side movable decorative body (operating means) is applied with a driving force for returning to the original position. Restoration processing) is performed at each timing of “the above restoration operation time (here, the start time of symbol variation)” and “after an effect is received by an operation by the player within the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. It can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body is aimed at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the symbol variation, but also a different original timing (during the variation period) Among them, aiming at the frame side movable decorative body (operation), the external force (operation by the player) is applied and the abnormal state may be resolved) Since the process of restoring (returning) means) is performed, it is expected that the original position return of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. .

  FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position when the sword ornament 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable ornament (operating means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 378, an effect pattern of a movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during a period when the symbol variation is performed) is executed. At timing tm21, it is assumed that “a process for moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed. When the sword ornament 5001 is located at the operation position, “characteristic display such as“ processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 ””, “display for prompting operation (“ push ””), and an effect reception period If the player has operated the sword ornament 5001 and received a production (timing tm22) while the display of the remaining time is being executed), the “special decorative member SDY (a saddle accessory) etc. “Processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body” and “processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600” are respectively performed. In the example shown in FIG. 378, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIG. 376 and FIG.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 at the timing tm22 at which the presentation is accepted in this way, and the sword decoration 5001 is not returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and this cannot be restored to the original position. At this time, a determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are made. However, an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. Regarding the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications is performed. This is because the sword decorative body 5001 is “placed by the player's hand (the door frame 3)”, and if the sword decorative body 5001 is informed of the abnormal state, the repair work from the abnormal state is performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)”, and this has become an abnormal state This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped as a player, and simply highlighting the fact that the movable performance is not executed may promote a decrease in the gaming interest. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body while performing the “process for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the presentation at timing tm22. However, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing this process as usual with respect to the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600”. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, when the timing tm23 is reached, the symbol variation that has already been put on hold is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is displayed. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern according to the change. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time). The timing tx at which the “process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” started at) is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status) As described above, the process ends until the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the restoration operation timing (here, when the symbol variation starts) has arrived for the sword ornament 5001 as well. It is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the body and an operation (applying a driving force) so that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “process for causing the sword decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it is started).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated, and the moving effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a rush when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started / finished is the same as the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started / terminated. However, only one of these timings may be the same, or any of these timings may be different.

  As for “a process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 377, when a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue after the end of the special effect pattern, the symbol variation that is in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately consumed (eg, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished but can be executed in such a way that it can be continued. It is desirable that the processing for causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” also strides the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It will be executed in the form, but it will be ended regardless of the restoration situation between the time when the next symbol variation is started and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  Also, after the sword decorative body 5001 is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then a special effect pattern ( When a situation in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears is executed, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 are terminated at timing tx, respectively, but the restoration fails. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the moving effect by the specific movable ornament is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed with the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament remaining in an abnormal state. Thus, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force is applied to a specific movable decorative body (a driving force by a motor or the like is not applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 within a specific performance pattern. Even if the position is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the staged action by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that this is an abnormal situation in which an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2. Even in the case of such a low-reliability situation, there is a high possibility that this will fail even if a specific movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and becomes abnormal again, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor a display notification associated therewith be performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 fails and the notification is made whenever an abnormal state occurs again, the player will misunderstand that the abnormal state cannot be resolved. Therefore, the above-described notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality that has changed from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are restored by a restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, symbol variation start time) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body has returned from an abnormal state. Now, while only the sword ornament 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 378, the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25. If an effect is received by an operation by the player, it is possible to expect a possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by an operation by the player, the sword decorative body 5001 is thereafter used as the original. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that a movable effect by a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the reception of the performance, a period (one time) in which a process of applying a driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed. Is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body is returned to the original position). It is desirable that the process be terminated before the process is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the few chances that the possibility of return of the sword decorative body 5001 that could not be recovered by such external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decorative body 5001 is in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the state (returning operation with respect to the sword decorative body 5001) has failed, the sword decorative body 5001 is used as the original for a period after the end of the movable performance by the specific movable decorative body. By making it easier for the player to recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return it to the position (returning the sword decoration body 5001 is performed again), It is desirable to encourage help. However, even when this return processing fails, it is desirable that neither a specific notification sound nor display notification accompanying this be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decorative body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful. The sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the design variation is stopped at timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operating means is set with respect to the panel side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the presentation is accepted) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as an operating means is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by a player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since there are many opportunities for position return and various modes (modes that return only by applying driving force, modes that return using at least external force) are used, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility of playing is increased, and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is accepted by the player's operation, the symbol variation start is started. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with different contents (different operation modes) from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. In other words, since the sword decorative body 5001 is restored using external force (operation by the player) for the process, it is possible to perform the process with a different content from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the process is executed in a simple manner such that the return process is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the return status, and when the return fails, it is more serious at the next restoration operation timing. It is desirable to perform a proper return process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 378, the restoration operation time (in this case, the symbol variation start time) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) comes. Even when the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword ornament 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the player's operation, the sword ornament 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to remain at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the presentation is accepted is performed when the return possibility of the sword ornament 5001 that could not be returned by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, “a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decorative body 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))” and “a display for prompting an operation (“ push ””) and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (see FIG. 341 (f)) ”is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up.

  Further, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword decorative body 5001 is pushed in the state where the sword decorative body 5001 is located (operated to a specific detection position), and when the sword decorative body 5001 is in the original position (to the specific detection position) If the operation means is provided so that there is a case where the second operation opportunity is given to be operated), even if the production reception is generated at the second operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state A driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity with respect to the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state without applying the driving force for returning to the original position. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the presentation is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of operation of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, regarding the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in an abnormal state is received by the player's operation, the effect is not necessarily received. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been done. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol variation start time (and the timing after the reception of the effect) is exemplified as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. The timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives at least on the condition that the symbol variation is executed. For example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration processing is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The restored processing is terminated until the timing tm2 in the specific production pattern that has been reserved is reached, or is executed so as to be straddled before the end of the special production pattern that has been reserved. Each process described above is performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may vary depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be made so that the frequency of appearance of a special performance pattern (restoration / diagnosis performance pattern) is higher than that in the above.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 etc.) used as an operation means or a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) is sometimes performed, as shown in FIG. 377, the abnormal state is observed over a period until the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation. It is possible to continue to execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, symbol variation start time) arrives while one restoration process is being continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed again. It is not started, and one restoration process that is already in the running state is continued without being terminated. Therefore, the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is movable. It becomes a problem at which timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends, after the new restoration operation timing (next This is continuously executed without ending even when straddling the symbol variation start time). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body after the timing tm11 elapses and before the new restoration operation timing (the next symbol variation start timing) arrives. In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both method 1 and method 2”, or “both method 1 and method 3” is employed to restore the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to perform.

  Method 1: If at least “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body” When a new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) ) Is newly started, restoration processing for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation time (the next symbol variation start time) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective, and triggered by this timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are performed simultaneously appears. There is no concern that interference may occur between these movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the next symbol change start time) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative element) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the next design change start time). Body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) that has not yet been restored is treated as effective. In this respect, since the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) is started, since one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is to be completed, these are restored. There is no concern that interference may occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 3: If at least “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a panel-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (next symbol variation start time). The restoration process is not executed, but after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable ornament to be completed, the restoration operation time that comes after that is triggered by another movable ornament (frame side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (starting time of the next symbol variation) is the same as the restoration process for the specific movable ornament already in the execution state and another movable ornament that is not yet in the execution state. As long as one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is not completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, it will be treated as invalid. No processing for the abnormal state is executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body becomes abnormal when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, so that it is expected to suppress the rate of progress of deterioration as these movable decorative bodies.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) can be operated by driving the operation buttons 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as effects according to the pattern game by the main control MPU 1310a. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect in which an expectation level related to privilege provision is suggested not only by an operation but also by driving). However, if such operation-time effects can be executed, but if any abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation-time effects can be experienced by the player in the manner intended by the designer. As a result, there is a concern that it may lead to a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as a part of the maintenance related to whether or not the operation-time effect can be performed, an operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period and an automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect in the mode intended by the designer, so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

  Specifically, an operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword ornament 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. It should be noted that the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize a more reliable confirmation operation for each member, there is no overlapping period between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword ornament 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). And preferably generated sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation check periods (arbitrary operation check period and automatic operation check period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 is pressed. Based on such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, while the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 is being executed, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction. The pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 379, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state protruding from the normal state is performed by the operator (player or hall). This can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation confirmation period, which will be described later, is satisfied, an arbitrary operation confirmation period is started. When the pressing detection state (operation detection state) is monitored, and the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 protrudes based on the pressing detection (operation detection) To change. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period is satisfied (even while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time. In some cases, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated after the elapse of a predetermined time. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the optional operation check period. The confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be given, and the operation effect using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with peace of mind.

  Then, after pressing the operation button 410 to make it protrude, when the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed and a normal state is detected before a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the normal operation state is restored again, and the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated when a predetermined time elapses. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcedly returned to the normal state by driving after the predetermined time elapses. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to be in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is ended. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) occurs when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured such that the generation condition is satisfied when the demonstration effect is executed in order to avoid occurrence of overlap with the operation effect. Specifically, in the demonstration production, there is no entry into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 for a certain time after the production set in the fluctuation pattern is finished, and the production set in the fluctuation pattern is performed. This is an effect waiting for the customer when it is not started (the information regarding the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received for a certain period of time on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side), and is suitable for avoiding the occurrence of overlapping with the effect during operation. In this way, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect, the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period is generated, and thereby the boring time that the effect set in the variation pattern is not started is displayed on the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time as to whether or not it is normally detected and operated.

  The demonstration effect is started when an instruction (for example, demonstration effect) by the main control MPU 1310a is given when there is no entry into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not progressing. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side and received to generate a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) on the peripheral control MPU 1511a side. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 1310a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a side, and by receiving it, a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation) is performed. (Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the operation effect and confirming whether the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to perform and provide an operation-time effect using the operation buttons 410 with more peace of mind.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is provided with an LED (each LED of the operation button internal decoration member 432), whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred, and a progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (an arbitrary operation confirmation period). In accordance with the state of the operation button 410), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. When an arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on with a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (light emission mode A for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is possible). ). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as when the operation button 410 is not pressed once. However, light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is being performed). Thereby, even after the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded, it is possible to notify the outside that further pressing of the operation button 410 is requested. After that, when the operation button 410 is in a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on at least once until the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although it is the same color as the case where it is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-described light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emission mode C for the confirmation period suggesting completion of the optional operation). Thereby, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the optional operation confirmation period does not occur, the operation button 410 may emit light in a predetermined manner, for example, in a manner different from any of the light emission modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. This can be illustrated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the completion of the arbitrary operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player, and the operation button 410 is in a normal position. An automatic operation confirmation period is provided for confirming the origin so as to be located at the position. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is first moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and is operated so as to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating at a normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced during execution of the effect using the operation button 410.

  The arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the predetermined time of “10 seconds” is set as the arbitrary operation confirmation period as described above, the time required for a series of operations is a short time of “5 seconds” as the automatic operation confirmation period. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates to confirm the origin regardless of the player's pressing, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the optional operation confirmation period, if the player does not press down, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press down in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. While it is possible to allow players and hall managers to check carefully over a long period of time in a situation where there is no such situation, it is possible to quickly terminate the operation confirmation (automatic operation period) of the drive system that does not require long-term confirmation This is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation operations of the drive type operation means can be increased.

  In the standby period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 or the second is selected by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the LEDs on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted when the effect is presented. In the peripheral confirmation period, when either the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 or the second button decoration unit 411b is lit, but either is pressed. Depending on how the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on (for example, light emission modes such as brightness and color) are different. For this reason, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it can be confirmed whether or not the press is recognized normally, and the frame side lens 417 and the first It can be confirmed whether or not the two-button decoration portion 411b is normally lit, and the drive type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). In addition, it is possible to execute confirmation of related members in the vicinity thereof.

  Further, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and is not in the protruding state, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration unit 411b are not lit, and a series of operation check periods is shortened. It becomes.

  In addition, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. Yes. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. For this reason, in the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether the vibration motor 424 operates and the rendering operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by vibration during the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

  In addition, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is established in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a normal state. There is a case where the operation button 410 is not in a normal position because it is not detected as a normal state. As a cause, for example, when a malfunction occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It is possible that this is the case. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, and control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 380 (A), during a period other than a series of operation check periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of an effect based on the variable pattern), or a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally at the end of the symbol variation (when the production based on the variation pattern is completed) or at the timing when the demonstration production described above is started (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) If it is determined that the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded (not the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Is called. According to this, even if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the change pattern, and the change pattern This prevents a misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have been operated as part of the production based on the above. In addition, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and there is a decrease in interest in the effect. To prevent it.

  In addition, when it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period of the confirmation operation period using the execution time of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. When the control is in the protruding state and the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of the series of operation check periods), the operation check period even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when it returns to the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is performed with priority. On the basis of this, the entire series of operation confirmation periods may be started in a delayed manner.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), in a series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), and the end of the symbol game. It is not determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the change pattern). Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation whether or not the operation button 410 is pushed out during the arbitrary operation confirmation period described above, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period. This is because the protruding state 410 is maintained so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded during the operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated at the end of the operation check period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 is performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation confirmation period elapses, the abnormality does not occur without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormality detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword production operation unit 5000 described above should be in the sword insertion state, the abnormality is not in the sword insertion state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 and abnormality detection.

  The sword decorative body 5001 can be changed between a state where the blade part 5011 is stored and a state where the blade part 5011 is exposed (second blade state). In the above-described production example, the state between the sword state and the sword state (first sword state) is used as the production using the sword ornament 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. Do not use. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state and a sword position sensor that can detect that the blade part 5011 is in the sword state. ing. The sword decorative body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the sword state to the sword state. In this example, the sword state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can extract the blade part 5011, and the extracted state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot extract the blade part 5011. .

  In addition, an effect using the sword ornament 5011 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 381 (A), in the production using the sword ornament 5001, an operation reception period during which the sword ornament 5001 in the state of sword can be extracted is generated within the production time. Within the operation reception period, the blade portion 5011 that is in the state of sword insertion is set in the sword state according to an instruction (for example, display of “Take out the sword”) in the display area or the like of the game side effect display device 1600, thereby providing a predetermined effect. The result can be obtained. When the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 and puts the blade part 5011 into the sword state within the operation reception period, control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state at the end of the production time is performed. Done. Also, if the player does not extract the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period and the blade part 5011 remains in the sword state, the sword state of the blade part 5011 at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect that has a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410 described above. Yes. That is, when an effect using the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the sword ornament 5001 can be extracted with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in a normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 381 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be positioned in the bladed state outside the operation reception period, but the period other than the operation reception period that is not in the bladed state is a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 when the blade part 5011 is in the sword state or in a state between the sword state and the sword storage state outside the operation reception period. It has become. In this example, the state of the sword position sensor described above is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the state of sword insertion), and the state of sword insertion in the above-described predetermined period (outside the operation reception period) Measurement) is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381 (C), in the operation reception period, unless the player removes the sword decorative body 5001, the blade part 5011 should be positioned in the sword state. Is determined to have reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. Done. That is, in the operation acceptance period, when the player removes the sword ornament 5001, the blade portion 5011 is positioned in the sword state, so that the sword ornament is only in the state between the sword state and the sword state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decorative body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword position sensor is in the ON state (the state where the blade portion 5011 is in the sword insertion state). . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade part 5011 to the state of the sword in the sword restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  Further, the operation reception period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001. In the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, sword restoration control is performed to return the blade part 5011 to the sword state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and the player can remove the sword decorative body 5001 during the remaining period. For this reason, even when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of extracting the sword ornament 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position) is determined at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the variation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the demonstration production described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001 is determined during an operation reception period during which the sword decorative body 5001 can be extracted. For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid the situation where the player cannot remove the sword ornament 5001 as much as possible. Further, the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation button 410. Thus, it is possible to prevent a performance result in such a highly expected performance from being missed.

  In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state has reached a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example), except when the player removes the sword ornament 5001 within the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, but only when the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword state at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001. You may make it judge. For example, the blade part 5011 is in the state of being delivered at the start of the operation reception period, and after the operation reception period starts, the player does not know whether or not the sword decorative body 5001 should be completely removed, and the blade part 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the blade is left for a predetermined period in a state between the state and the sword storage state. .

  In addition, when an instruction is given on the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 regarding the extraction of the sword decorative body 5001, the instruction is continued regardless of the occurrence or resolution of the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 within the operation reception period. You may make it perform. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decorative body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. The instruction in the display area or the like of the game side effect display device 1600 is continued even during “until time” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sword state”. Also, if the player removes the sword decorative body 5001 according to the instruction during “until the end of the sword restoration control”, the sword restoration is performed because the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the production of extracting the sword decorative body 5001 from being hindered due to an abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001.

  In addition, although the blade restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade portion 5011 cannot be returned to the sword state due to a foreign object or the like. In this case, one cycle of blade restoration control that should be completed in “0.5 seconds” may be repeated a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state will continue beyond the operation reception period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result presentation may be derived at the end of the reception period, and further, the blade restoration control may be continued after the result presentation is derived. Thereby, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decorative body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment will be lowered without hindering the progress of the production.

(Operation button abnormality judgment timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 382 (A), when a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), when the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern). At the time of starting the demonstration production described above, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Control is performed to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the change of the special symbol is started, so that an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the change pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-center movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that the player cannot operate (cannot touch), and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (display position) displayed on the front surface of the display area 1600. These movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 382 (B), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (the variation pattern) At the timing of starting the demonstration production described above, the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition, but at those timings, If it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and if it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position), an abnormality has occurred. Control is performed to determine and return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least at the start of the variation of the special symbol, so the effect using the movable decorative body as an effect based on the variation pattern When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the production from being cut off. In addition, during the performance based on the variation pattern, if a movable decorative body remains in front of the display area of the game side performance display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the display area is not visually recognized. However, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by returning to the non-operating state at least when the change of the special symbol is started.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the timing of controlling to a normal state or a protruding state, the player can inhibit the change to the state, whereas the movable decorative body is It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and the player cannot inhibit the change to the state at the timing of controlling to the non-operating state or the operating state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 increases the chance of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred, compared to the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be detected at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern. Inhibition can be prevented.

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, while the frequency of using the operation button 410 is high, when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the variation pattern, participation in the effect is hindered due to the occurrence of an abnormality. Can be prevented.

(Operation button abnormality occurred during operation)
Next, an operation effect that is performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 384 is an operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The production operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not operated so as to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is moved to the normal state by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in a normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined projecting start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the projecting state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is projected by the projecting position sensor. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in a normal position.

  In addition, the presentation operation unit 400 is provided with a press detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 is pressed. Based on such detection by the pressure detection sensor 440, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in a protruding state is pressed to a normal state. .

  Further, as the effects set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation level (expected expectation of big hit) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

  First, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state 410 is changed to a protruding state. Further, in the operation acceptance period, as an instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state, an instruction by display on the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, projecting Display of the operation button 410 in a state, a message display of “Pushing out the protruding operation button!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, voice of “Push out the protruding operation button!”) Is performed in combination.

  In the operation reception period described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Thus, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done. In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Also, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. Although the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is an abnormal protrusion, the instruction effect B informs the player that the position is equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (For example, a display showing a projection of the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as “This is a protrusion of the real thing! Press the operation button without worrying!”), And voice instructions from the speaker (for example, , "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying!" As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 that is in a normal state does not change to a protruding state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using a certain operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using an operation button 410 in a protruding state, and further an operation in a protruding state There is a possibility that the player may be hesitant to operate the button 410. However, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation is performed by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, so that the operation button 410 that is at least protruded from the display or the sound. It is possible to recognize that the used effect is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the expectation level for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different effects as described above, but inform the player that the protrusion is an abnormal protrusion but is equivalent to a normal protrusion. If it is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to a normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. In addition, when the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is moved to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an operation reception period in which detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of this, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not it is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. In the operation acceptance period, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation instruction C for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in a normal state) The operation button 410 in a state is reproduced, a message “Press the operation button!”, Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “Press the operation button!” Voice) is combined. Is called. In the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in a normal state, the pressing (operation) can be detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally. Also, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D during the normal operation described above is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. This instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 ( For example, a display showing a copy of the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as “This protrusion is irrelevant, but press the operation button!”, Or a voice instruction from a speaker (for example, “This protrusion is not related. Etc. ”is performed in combination. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is abnormally protruded, but the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is performed. In addition, since the instruction effect at the time of normal operation is performed by the sound from the speaker, it can be recognized from the display and sound that the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. . Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be ended. Note that the instruction effects C and D at the time of normal operation are not limited to those having different effects as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not positioned equivalent to the normal protrusion. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

  In addition, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period, The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is displayed within the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the performance using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state during the operation reception period. It is not locked to the mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, is the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? The operation button 410 in the protruding state cannot be recognized, but depending on whether or not the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state when it is pressed. Can be recognized.

  Note that when the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 that is in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is displayed in the same manner as the operation reception period when the performance is performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (when the effect based on the variation pattern starts), the symbol game Control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state at the time of the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern) at the start of the demonstration effect.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, the instruction effect during the normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is a less expected effect than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the expectation degree for the performance cannot be confirmed due to the fact that it is not, the player will hardly suffer any disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in a normal state during the operation reception period when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. The operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism to return to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked. It is possible to keep the abnormally protruding state from being locked. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an abnormal protrusion occurs regardless of whether an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state or an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because, for example, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, by leaving a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410, You can call attention.

(Notification when operation button abnormality occurs)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 385 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the operation state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And changeable. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 385 (A), when an effect is performed using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the pressure detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state within the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, although the operation button 410 protrudes abnormally, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Even when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done.

  Even when the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the operation acceptance period, the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts at the start of variation (based on the variation pattern, as will be described later). At the start of the production), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the variation pattern), the timing at the start of the demonstration production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods) Thus, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, during the operation acceptance period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player is not intentional. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence noticeable.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 outside the operation reception period, the response is different from that in the case where an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, during the execution of the demonstration effect described above other than the operation reception period, the automatic operation confirmation period described above is also provided, and the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing during the automatic operation confirmation period. The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is positioned at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385 (B), in the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is moved up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is in a normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is projected, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating to return from the projected state to the normal state.

  However, if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, Does not return to normal. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruded state, and the abnormally protruded operation button 410 is returned to the normal state unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state returns to the normal state. Control is repeatedly performed. If the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state when the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (in this example, five times), The automatic operation confirmation period ends, and after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, the pattern as after the end of the operation reception period described above At the beginning of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (when the production starts based on the variation pattern), at the end of the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the game of the game (when the production ends based on the variation pattern), At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

  In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of “an error has occurred in the operation button”), and blinking of a lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 Is notified to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 (for example, by flashing the lamp / LED more intensely than in the normal performance).

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period. Not done. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect is provided to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410. That is, outside the operation confirmation period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation button 410 is not requested to operate as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and is alerted to such an actor.

  In this example, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appealing to the outside is suppressed rather than the effect that is notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the automatic operation confirmation period. Thereby, even after the end of the operation reception period, it is possible not to be disturbed by the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 and to pay attention to the effect related to the game progress (effect based on the variation pattern). it can.

(Confirmation effect at the time of abnormality of movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing the flow of effects when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  In the game board 5, around the game board-side effect display device 1600, a back-bottom-back movable effect unit 3100, a back-upper left-movable effect unit 3200, a back-left-movable effect unit 3300, a back-upper-center movable effect unit 3400, a back-bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that the player cannot operate (cannot touch), and are in a non-operating state (standby position) where the player stands by around the game side effect display device 1600, and the game side effect display device It can be changed to an operation state (display position) displayed on the front surface of the display area 1600. These movable decorative bodies change from the non-operating state to the operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rear back movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. And a driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating states.

  As shown in FIG. 386, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of production based on the variation pattern), when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game ends (based on the variation pattern) At the time of the start of the demonstration production described above (at the end of the production) (timing prior to the start of the series of operation confirmation periods), the movable decorative body should be positioned in a non-operating state without satisfying a predetermined operation start condition. However, at those timings, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and it is determined that it is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the displayed decorative symbols and background images are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is flashed violently. Thus, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is confirmed whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600, a display such as “Press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game” is performed. Unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also display contents such as decorative symbols and background images remain hidden in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. In addition, effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are not performed.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect that notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect that confirms whether or not to advance the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. End. Then, after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but display contents such as decorative symbols and background images are displayed in the display area of the game effect display device 1600. As a result, the display contents such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the body frame 4 and sound from the speakers are produced. For example, when an effect for operating the movable decorative body is performed after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display area display, lamp / Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker are not changed, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. Thereby, the fall of the interest by the movable decoration body not operating can be suppressed. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body not operating from the non-operating state occurs. It has been broken.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation reception period for the effect using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed). Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be displayed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the used effect is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that a predetermined effect result can be derived without moving the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. The effect that is not present can be the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

  Also, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is An effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to advance the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred, but when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, You may make it perform an effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during the execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be ended even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Multiple movable object interference avoidance operation)
Next, an interference avoidance operation in the case where an abnormality has occurred in any one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 387 is a time chart illustrating the relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. When this occurs, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In the state where the operation button 410 is protruded, if the player performs an operation so as to push in until the position is in the normal state, the operation button 410 is again locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  In addition, an effect using the operation button 410 is set as an effect set in the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 387 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. When it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state according to the instruction.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state as the operation reception period ends. At the end of the operation reception period, if it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded, and the operation button 410 in the protruded state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the opened state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be protruded without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be protruded and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other. There is a possibility that further troubles may occur between 410 and the operation button cover 419. For this reason, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control for avoiding the interference is performed so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387 (B), control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state when the operation reception period occurs, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, If it is determined that there is no error, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and control is not performed so that the operation button 410 in the normal state protrudes (control that causes the operation button 410 to protrude). Is prohibited). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Note that even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not enter the open state when the operation reception period occurs. Does not perform the control for setting the operation button 410 in the normal state to protrude (prohibits the control for the operation button 410 to protrude).

  In addition, when the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own touch after the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the control is performed such that the operation button 410 in the normal state is protruded by allowing the operation button 410 to be in the protruded state. As described above, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other but the interference state is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is projected. Thus, in the remaining period of the operation reception period, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in a protruding state. For this reason, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation reception period, the player can press the operation button 410 in a protruding state by self-help efforts. It is possible to prevent the participation from being hindered. Note that after pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to a normal state. The situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

  When the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger even though the operation button cover 419 has not been opened at the time of the operation reception period, However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, when the operation reception period ends, control to return the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed, and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state thereafter, the operation button in the open state Control for returning the cover 419 to the closed state is performed. This prevents a situation in which the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere later again.

  On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened when the operation reception period occurs, and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not projected. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in a protruding state. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which an abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved. This prevents the situation where the operation button cover 419 interferes.

(Operation when operation button abnormality occurs according to game state)
Next, an operation when the operation button 410 is abnormal when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 388 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-short-time state and the short-time state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated. The case where it will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated, and the operation button 410 is operated. As shown, the operation button 410 can be changed to an open state where the operation button 410 is exposed. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is closed, and an open position sensor that can detect that the operation button cover 419 is open. ing. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state from the open state to the closed state.

  As with the operation buttons 410 other than the present example, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the rendering operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the rendering operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the short-time state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 protrudes by the spring mechanism. The production operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruded state to the normal state.

  In this example, in the non-short-time state (normal state), it is possible to perform an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is performed when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. In the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-short-time state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, the control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the opened state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in a normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in an open state, only control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to a closed state is available. Is done. Also, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as other than this example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts (at the start of the production based on the variation pattern), the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game This is the timing at the start of the demonstration effect described above, when the change ends (when the effect based on the change pattern ends).

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period during which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation reception period is in a protruding state when the operation reception period occurs. A predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction. As long as the time is short, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

  Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in an open state and the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Then, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is performed. Note that when the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruded state. Only done.

  As described above, the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state in the non-short-time state (normal state), whereas the operation button cover 419 is in the open state in the time-short state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-short-time state and the short-time state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, the operation button is used when an effect using the operation button 410 is performed at a position corresponding to the gaming state by changing the return destination position of the member where the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating 410 from being hindered.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, image display, and the like, and in order to enhance the entertainment of the game, various effects are tried. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510 that is an effect control device based on a command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game. To do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in a single direction.

  In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique that realizes various types of effects using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with this scenario data, there is an advantage that various presentation displays can be easily realized by simply switching the scenario data. The scenario data may include BGM designation. In this case, the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output by outputting the BGM designated by the sound source IC.

  However, game machines are demanding more elaborate effects. In the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as sound output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, the BGM cannot be changed while the image display according to the scenario data is being executed. Further, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, the image display and BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect is finished, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM has been played, and it is an effect that gives a sense of incongruity. The lighting / flashing of the lamp is controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display, depending on the gaming state, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting / flashing linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in the peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each component that executes an effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing presentation control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). The layer will be described. In this embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as the background and the character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to display an image on the liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (motion) of the character is the same, it is possible to share the layer for displaying the character. Thereby, the capacity | capacitance of presentation data (scheduler data) can be reduced, or development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required in accordance with the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. It is data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal design block data” for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling lamps, accessories and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, a function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the rendering device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits rendering device drive data to each rendering device based on the rendering device control information. Each rendering device performs an operation based on rendering device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the production control unit 5020 is configured in software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the production control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. Note that the effect control unit 5020 may be configured as a separate arithmetic circuit and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each function described above will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules relating to effects. Also included is an effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of the mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into 3 times each 8 bits. The main command buffer 5110, which is output in response, receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command, If it is determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information representing contents related to the effect among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, presence / absence of a game ball at the start winning opening, the result of special drawing lottery, a special symbol variation pattern (variation time), and the like can be included in the main command. In addition, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success or failure of a stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the type of gaming machine and the contents of the effects.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the content of the main command, and determines whether the command is related to the effect. When it is determined that the command is related to the effect, the command is transferred to the effect control unit 5020.

  The effect control unit 5020 specifies the layer that is the target of the effect control from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. And a block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lamp lighting / flashing, action of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing a liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification symbols. included.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame period (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update period. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the effect display devices (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The built-in sound source VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display devices (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method in which character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command is developed on a frame buffer at a specified position.

  When the production block number is determined, sub production block control unit 5320 executes sub production block data corresponding to the production block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing lamp, sound, and motor effects, and includes one or a plurality of sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub effect scheduler data, the lamp, sound, and motor effect devices perform operations defined in advance in the sub effect scheduler data.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 corresponding to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various production devices includes a sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the production device at intervals of one frame and a sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the production devices at intervals of 1 millisecond. included. Thus, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the presentation according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the presentation device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output and the action of the accessory with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is 1 ms unit, it becomes possible to quickly cope with a malfunction in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, for example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lamp lighting / flashing, and action of an accessory are performed. explain. The production control by the sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, an outline of control according to the type of the rendering device will be described.

  First, a case where an effect by sound (sound) output is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. When a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameter. Multiple schedulers can be activated. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound effects with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and sound can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, a case where an effect using a lamp is executed will be described. If the sub effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. When a lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be started, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates lamp driving data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp driving data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the data to the serial control IC 5150. By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the output of the lamp data is the next operation to create the lamp data against the increase in the lamp control processing time due to the increase of the lamp system or the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, the processing related to the creation of the ramp data may be completed within the processing cycle.

  Specifically, when the ramp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated lamp driving data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on and blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling lighting / flashing of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Finally, the case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If scheduler data for driving device control is included in the sub effect block data, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for driving device control (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the driving device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameter. As in the case of sound output, a plurality of schedulers can be activated, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data to each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle of all motor data transmission. Output. This is because the latch signal output timing is after the completion of serial transmission of all motor data. As the serial transmission time of motor data increases, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the overall processing time for each frame period. This is because there is not enough. In this embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is reduced to 0 by shifting the timing of latch signal output corresponding to motor data serial transmission. However, a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor drive data, effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, you may provide the call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the process specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once the other scheduler data specified by the call function is executed, the process of the original scheduler data is continued. Will be executed. By doing this, it is possible to utilize general-purpose contents in various scenes, just like calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect specific to the gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lotteries are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the contents of the presentation during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general function contents can be used in various scenes by the call function, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching the production contents according to the gaming state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the conditional branch function, determines the gaming state based on the main command and executes the effect contents according to the gaming state. . By doing so, it is possible to deal with a variety of gaming states that branch with a single scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during a game, the presence / absence of a player's operation of a button, and the like. A spinning reel stop state may be used for a spinning-type game machine, and a winning state for a start winning opening may be used for a pachinko machine. Further, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

  The content of the effect after the conditional branching can be variously configured. For example, after the conditional branching, it may be configured to be completely separated into two or more processes. Moreover, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, you may comprise so that it may return to the process before a branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after a process of outputting a sound effect temporarily when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without any sense of incongruity.

  As described above, the game machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can also be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like prepared with a bitmap of characters and the like to be displayed on the screen can be configured.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case where the main effect control is a sub effect executed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effects scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 corresponding to the effect device at the time of effect execution. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

  Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include “SPLAY” for reproducing a phrase, “STOP_PH” for stopping a phrase being reproduced, “VOL_PH” for setting a volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control designated by parameters or the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 accepts the execution of the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels is described as 4 for easy understanding. The sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether to output in stereo. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a designation of whether or not to reproduce repeatedly. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  As described above, in FIG. 391, the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment is shown by taking sound output control as an example. The sub effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub effect block data and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each effect device is called and processed by modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from when the main command is received until the scheduler data is acquired will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram illustrating a configuration until data necessary for presentation control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is acquired. As described with reference to FIG. 390, when the effect control unit 5020 receives a main command from the main control board 1310, the effect analysis unit 5020 analyzes the command by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020 is based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to a hold effect), and a game instruction layer (game instructions). Based on the analysis result of the command analysis module 5200 for each of the communication layer, the communication error layer (the layer that performs communication error notification), the notification layer (the layer that performs various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (the layer that performs abnormality notification). The production block data number corresponding to each layer is acquired and updated. Further, the obtained effect block data number is delivered to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, if the effect block number is a variation pattern layer, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table, the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data based on the variation pattern number Determined from the combination number table. The division unit of the effect block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) that are common effects within a series of effects (for example, effects that are executed from when the change of the special symbol is started until it is stopped). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. It is possible to synchronize the effects produced by each effect device by controlling the effects in units of effect blocks based on the effect block numbers. Also, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In this embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost surface and the abnormality notification layer is the foreground. It is the structure for.

  When the effect block control unit 5040 receives a block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub effect block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for performing an effect.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, a hold layer is specified, and liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing a hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and sub effect block data for outputting a sound effect at the start winning prize 5053 is acquired. Also, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, a variation start command or the like is transmitted to identify the variation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is also transmitted when an error occurrence or warning is notified, and an abnormality detection layer is specified. Moreover, a plurality of effects can be performed simultaneously by performing effects for each layer.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs liquid crystal display. The effect 1f scheduler is activated. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  Also, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol if rendering scheduler execution unit 5332. To start the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal symbol if drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and plays the game board An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When the sub effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on information designated in the sub effect block data 5053. When the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 starts the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 causes the sub-effect 1 ms. Start the scheduler.

  Furthermore, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub performance schedule data 5073 is not different depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data capacity. It is also possible to respond quickly to changes in the execution cycle of the rendering device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share scheduler data, prevent the occurrence of the same type of problems at multiple locations, and reduce the data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is simultaneously executed by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 392B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice according to this embodiment. There are four types of step-up notices, step-up notices 1 to 4, which can be executed. By executing an effect that has been developed in stages, the player is expected to see the result of the variable display of symbols. Suggest a degree.

  In step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and after the step-up 2 effect ends, the notice effect ends. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are finished, the notice effects are finished.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up production, and therefore, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progressing state (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one kind of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  Note that when the step-up notice liquid crystal effect develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice starts immediately before the end of the current step-up notice. There is a period. As described above, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect in the lamp effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be simultaneously executed by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effects overlap.

  Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 production, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 production that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 production occurs. The notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously (overlapping) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly, thereby producing the same pattern effects in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to execute.

  The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control target effect device, and is defined in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs processing of the specified function. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the drive data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 393 is a diagram for explaining the flow of execution of scheduler data according to the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various effect devices are provided by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referred to for setting this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each production number designated from the production block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the production number is defined in the production management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. The number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, but only five are illustrated here. In the example shown in the figure, for example, the production management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the production management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 393, production numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent storage addresses of production management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The production number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured to associate the effect number with the effect management pointer, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data. What is necessary is just to make it process. If the address value of the production management pointer is used as the production number, the data amount of the production management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is not required, so the load required for the scheduler data processing can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 393, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of functions and parameters. As described above, the function is a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify a parameter may be provided.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive device), and user. The sequence control is a basic function for performing production control, and the lamp, sound, and motor are functions for controlling each production device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, the “call” function is designated at the address A2. The “call” function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily returns to the previous processing based on the saved pointer value after processing the scheduler data by temporarily shifting to the address specified by the parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the effect command ends these processes, it returns to the address A2 where “call” is designated, and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

  Thus, by utilizing the “call” function, the contents of a series of blocks BL3 designated by the addresses A31 to A3n can be taken into various portions of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes depending on the result. Some players can find a subtle difference in the contents of the presentation during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and the lottery result or the like can be difficult to predict. It is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game from being impaired.

  Although the “call” function can be used as described above, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as “object action number set”, “voice action number set”, “lamp action number set”, etc. This is because the scheduler execution unit 5060 is merely a specific instruction for a very limited function that can be realized.

  In the example shown in FIG. 393, NOP (wait) is executed at address A3. The “NOP” function waits for the designated number of frames and continues the scheduler data processing. Here, the process of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by a timer interrupt. Therefore, if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0 in the “NOP” function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 once terminates the scheduler data processing without performing the subsequent processing. Then, the process to move to the function of the next address is performed.

  In the present embodiment, a voice operation number or the like is designated using a work in the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately. The scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Also, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the system module layer (see FIG. 392A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

  Similarly, after the conditional branch address A11, the scheduler data is defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 393, the conditional branch is not provided from the conditional branch address A11 to the end of the production (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, an accessory command (address A22), a voice action number (address A21), etc. can be specified without considering conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the production contents may be generated, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if the condition “random number ≦ Th1?” Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. If the address A41 (not shown) is called after the address A2 (address A2 + 1) with the condition “Th1 <random value ≦ Th2?”, The address A31 and the subsequent addresses are called. Different performances are performed. In this way, if different addresses are called in a conditional branch according to a random number, the contents of the presentation can be switched randomly according to the random number, and the fun of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the contents of effects in this way is referred to as “effect lottery” in this specification.

  In the effect lottery, all of display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only a part may be switched. When switching all of them, all the contents of the display, sound, and lamp should be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the “call” function, and specify the other part after returning from the “call” function. do it.

  Further, in the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used so as to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, the display, sound, lamp, and driving device independently perform the effect lottery. As a result, the effect modes realized by the combination become very diverse, and there is an advantage that it can be more interesting.

  However, regardless of the result of the lottery of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in this embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the effect lottery has the content that the effect ends in the same time. Note that it is not an essential requirement that the production ends in the same time, and these production times may not be the same.

  The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has a variety of effects, and has the advantage that the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when an effect lottery is instructed, when the drive device is executing an 8-shaped sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. May be. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. In the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting selection of some scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery switches the content of the effect only by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize more various effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the output of sound will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice action number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the voice action number, the capacity of the voice action number table is reduced and the processing load when referring to the table is reduced by making it correspond to the storage address as in the case of the production number described above. There is an advantage of enabling.

  The sound pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 397 and 398.

  In the example shown in FIG. 394, a “call” function is defined at the address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  At address SA3, phrase playback is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces it.

  In addition, a structure example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In this embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel designated during phrase playback. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left / right / up / down output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b and reproduces the sound. The loop is a designation as to whether or not to reproduce the sound repeatedly. Stereo is a designation of whether or not to output in stereo.

  Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operation state indicates whether each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is an address of scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 394, as the processing proceeds, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data 5505, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes zero.

  The number of call nestings and the number of loop nestings represents the number of nestings of calls and loops that are specified in a multiple manner by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is called by the “call” function (second call) in the processing after the address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of the address SA2, the call nest is performed. The number is 2. When the second call is finished and returned to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same applies to the loop. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nesting. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the number of loop iterations. The loop head address or the like is provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / flashing control. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for lamps. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, as in the case of the production number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when the table is referenced. There is an advantage of making it possible.

  The lamp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters in the same way as effect data (FIG. 393). A function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

  In the example shown in FIG. 395, a “call” function is defined at the address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown) and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

  In the address LA3, gradation pattern setting is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 associated with it. The lamps are turned on with the designated gradation data 1 and when the time designated by the timer value has elapsed, the gradation data 2 is used. Lights up. Here, an example in which two kinds of gradation data are designated is shown, but even when three or more kinds of gradation data are designated, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes at the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp is terminated. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it reaches the stop (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is active. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified by the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially as time passes. The lamp performs the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 is shifted to the gradation data 2. When the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing at the address LA11 is terminated and the processing proceeds to the processing at the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 395, as the process proceeds, the value of the ramp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The gradation data pointer is an address of gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing proceeds, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The loop count is the loop repeat count, and the loop head address is the head address of the loop range. As with sound, you may allow loops to be nested.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Next, the function of the driving device module 5700 that controls the operation of the driving device will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The driving device module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, movement amount (stepping motor rotation step angle), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal drive, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, an instruction to perform a return operation to return to the origin position or an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop in a state where the drive device is energized to a limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when starting and stopping the rotation.

  The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data for controlling the driving device will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for presentation control was demonstrated. Here, other functions will be described. FIG. 396 to FIG. 398 are diagrams showing examples of functions in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As described above, functions are grouped into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor, and user group. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of effects. FIG. 396 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

  “STOP” is a function representing the end of scheduler data. “NOP” is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by specifying the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle for executing the “NOP” function. In the case of execution in the frame cycle, one frame is approximately 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment. If 30 is specified, the operation waits for about 1 second. If the execution is performed in a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of executions is specified as 30, the operation waits for about 30 ms. “NOP_F_VALUE” uses the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters. When the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are satisfied, the “NOP_F_VALUE” function is terminated. If not satisfied, this is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters, and writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing repetitive processing (loop), specifies the top of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When “0” is set as the number of loops, an infinite loop is set. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-described “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the call destination process, the address saved by the “RET” function described above is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and branch table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “call” function is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. 401. When the callee process is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the caller process (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  “SUBJ” selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “JUMP” function described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. 402. The process of the call destination is continued as it is without returning to the process of the caller that executed the “SUBJ” function. “JUMP” sets the address designated by the parameter to the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the designated address or label.

  “REQ” is a function for starting another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF”, like “REQ”, is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, “REQF” can be executed independently for a specified period of processing of scheduler data to be executed. For example, in the case of initialization of an accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The functions belonging to the lamp group are functions for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 397 lists examples of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPLAY” is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data designated by a parameter. In “HPLAY”, resetting is performed even when the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the gradation data timer in the work 5603 is cleared to instruct execution of the gradation data.

  “KPLAY” is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting the lamp based on the gradation data specified by the parameter, similarly to “HPLAY”. In “KPLAY”, when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without being reset.

  “HPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by specifying a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as “HPLAY”. “KPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter, similarly to “HPLAY2”. The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a specified lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data designated by the parameter. When the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by “HPLAY”, and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the head, and the reproduction of the lamp gradation data at the time of reproduction by “KPLAY” Continue playing without interruption. That is, even when the same lamp gradation data is executed using “KPLAY” while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  In addition to the function of “HPLAY” described above, “HPLAY2” is the same as “HPLAY” except that the layer for reproducing the ramp gradation data is designated by the parameter and the layer is designated by the parameter.

  In addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, “KPLAY2” is the same as “KPLAY” except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is specified by a parameter and a layer is specified by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (Sound)
The functions belonging to the sound (sound) group are functions for controlling sound output. Examples of functions related to sound control are given in FIGS. 397 and 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter. In “SPLAY”, the sound is reset even when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, and the sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Similar to “SPLAY”, “SXPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In “SXPLAY”, when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without being reset. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping sound reproduction based on a phrase number specified by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of the “PAN_PH” function execution for the phrase being played specified by the parameter, and the panpot end This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position in the transition time designated up to the coordinate position. “PAN_PH2” can specify the pan-pot start coordinate position with a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Similar to the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position in the transition time designated from the panpot start coordinate position designated by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position.

  “VOL_FADE_PH” is specified from the volume value at the start of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase / decrease the volume value at the transition time. “VOL_FADE_PH2” can be used to specify a fade start volume value with a parameter in addition to the function of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function. As with the “VOL_FADE_PH” function, the volume value of the target phrase is set to the parameter at the start of function execution. This function is used to increase / decrease the volume value during the transition time specified from the fade start volume value specified in step 1 to the fade end volume value.

  “VOL_PH” is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value of the phrase being reproduced designated by the parameter using the volume value designated by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function for muting the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPLAY” and “SXCPLAY” execute a designated channel music reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number designated in the parameter on the designated channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and reproduced from the beginning when reproducing by “SCPLAY”, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption when reproducing by “SXCPLAY”. In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using “SXCPLAY” while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs a panpot for the phrase (ch), whereas “PAN_PH” performs the panpot for the phrase. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than “PAN_PH”, the process does not change. With regard to “PAN_CH2”, “PAN_PH2” described above performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas panning for a ch is performed, except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “PAN_PH2”. The process does not change.

  “VOL_FADE_CH” performs fading for ch, whereas “VOL_FADE_PH” performs fading for the phrase. “Ch_FADE_PH” is “VOL_FADE_PH” except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Processing does not change. As for “VOL_FADE_CH2”, “VOL_FADE_PH2” described above performs the fade for the phrase, whereas the fade is performed for the ch. “Ch_FADE_PH2” except that the ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase is changed to the ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas “VOL_PH” increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Otherwise, the process is the same as “VOL_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” performs mute for the phrase, but mute for the ch. Ch is specified by the parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Otherwise, the process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH”. With respect to “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” described above cancels mute (mute) for a phrase, whereas mute is canceled for a ch. Ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The process is the same as “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
The function belonging to the motor group is a function for controlling the output of the motor or solenoid. FIG. 398 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process for causing the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described so far. FIG. 398 shows an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. “COMMAND” issues a command to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a and the like. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes scheduler memory copy processing for copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each purpose of management, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers. Functions related to ramps can be executed by sound schedulers, There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in a plurality of schedulers that can execute a sound function for each application, and all functions can be executed in a mixed manner. The number of schedulers to be executed is not limited, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 399 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler definition according to this embodiment. The scheduler can be classified for convenience according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. Hereinafter, an outline of typical types of schedulers will be described.

  First, an example of a scheduler related to state transition will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure states SCH and TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  There are also sub-state schedulers (sub-states SCH and SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data for controlling transition of internal states (sub-internal states) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state changes when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the player operates an effect button, wins an effect execution lottery, or changes to another state when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. To do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  In the scheduler for sounds, the background for controlling the output of sound output in accordance with the background display and the display of changes in the design, the scheduler for executing the design sound scheduler data (SND_SCH01), and output when the notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) for controlling the output of sound and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) for controlling the output of sound at the time of advance notice execution by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similarly to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes a background (LMP_SCH01) for executing the background and design lamp scheduler data for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the change display of the design. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp when the notice is executed by an accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler targeted for the ramp is 1f (frame).

  Also, a scheduler that controls sound and lamps in conjunction with each other is defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / flashes the lamp in order to notify the outside of notifications such as ball breakage or ball clogging, and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors, etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is used for general purposes in order to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / flashing are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing the motor system scheduler data for executing the system operation, and a scheduler for executing the motor ram clear scheduler data for setting the RAM clear ( MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing the motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing an action of an accessory by production or the like.

  The scheduler for executing the action of the accessory by the production etc. is a general-purpose that is used without depending on the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of the specific accessory or the kind of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state and the sound and the ramp (this embodiment 1f = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

  Note that the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, but the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with the gaming state or notice. Thereby, it becomes possible to start each scheduler without depending on the number or the number of effects provided in the gaming machine, and the restrictions for executing the effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The function types used in production control and the outline of the types and functions of schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Specific examples of application of scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production Outline]
FIG. 400A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation of an accessory controlled using scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo role 5001, a star role 5002 (left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, right star role 5002c) and a spear role 5003. Is placed.

  The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it drops (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the presentation is finished. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can perform an effect of vibrating in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement in addition to the vertical movement.

  The star combination 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star combination 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star combination 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star combination 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star object 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star objects 5002 operate at a predetermined timing according to the contents of the production.

  The left star role 5002a moves to the lower left and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star character 5002b moves downward and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star role 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star character 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to the middle position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The bonus item 5003 is arranged at the upper center of the game area. The scissors 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the player's operation of the production button or the lottery result of the bonus announcement notice production, it moves from the initial position to the middle position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. An operation mode is set. As with the logo accessory 5001, the saddle accessory 5003 can also produce an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

  Next, a description will be given of the flow of a notice effect that is executed with one symbol variation. First, with reference to FIG. 400B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star object notice, and a button (BTN) logo object fall notice will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the notice effect including the heel notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 400B shows an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in a series of change display from the start of change to the stop of the special symbol in this embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of fluctuation display shown in FIG. 400B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. Then, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, group notice, star character notice, and button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed.

  In the following, a part of scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for controlling the ramp in the step-up notice (FIG. 401), the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (FIG. 402) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star object in the star figure notice The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 403 to 405) for controlling the operation of 5002 and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 406) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting state of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 401 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for performing lamp lighting / flashing control in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_STP” and the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and identifies the address of the scheduler data that is the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up advance work area “YKK_STP”. In the step-up advance notice work area “YKK_STP”, a lottery result value of the step-up advance notice is stored and corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the step-up advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the step-up number (1 to 4).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and waits for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. Thereby, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinks with a corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the processing of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP” is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” designates ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes a ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. The wait process is executed. Thereby, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked with a corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven by using the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the next process of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is terminated.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). is there. Depending on the content of the advance notice, there are cases where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF sentence, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complex and management of correction and the like becomes difficult. On the other hand, “SUBC” solves the above problem easily by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Second, because it takes the form of “CALL”, it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the “SUBC” function, and it is not necessary to describe the number of branches of the scheduler data after branching. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the “SUBC” function may be terminated without performing branch processing.

  That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in a table format, and can call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branches, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination. However, in the function “SUBC”, branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. This makes it easy to add and change production contents and improve development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed to the end by accepting an operation button operation input by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting state of a predetermined lamp is controlled in accordance with the degree of expectation (button cut-in notice lottery result value).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 400B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, the notice can be executed in parallel.

  FIG. 402 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notification according to this embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, the function “KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA” is first executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Accordingly, the designated lamp is turned on (flashes) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops corresponds to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the function from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to the function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop is executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” is displayed. When the effect button is operated, “1: button ON” is displayed. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a button processing program outside the scheduler data.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is selected in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. The The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” of the caller scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” when the button cut-in advance notice button is ON in the button cut-in advance branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” are the function “SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT”, the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ”, the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT”, and the button cut-in advance branch jump address table “UBL_LMP_LMP_LMP_CMP”. Is executed as a parameter.

  The button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT” stores the address of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the preliminary announcement is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to a lottery result value for button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT” stores a lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT 4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is lit red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and then the 150-frame wait process is performed for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03”. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH03”.

  Since the call of the button cut-in warning lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in warning lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the calling scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT”. do not do. Therefore, the end of the scheduler “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is terminated when the “STOP” function included in the “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is executed and when the “STOP” function included in the “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed from the scheduler “SUBJ_LMP_CUT1”. There is.

  The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. First, it is possible to call the scheduler data for the lottery result in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (in this embodiment, the notice lottery result value). Depending on the content of the notice, the lottery result value range may be several hundreds, and the bifurcation like the IF statement increases the number of scheduler data for judgment, making it difficult to manage corrections. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of work memory and the number of call address tables for branching is one. However, a complicated conditional branch may be processed with one action by using a plurality of both. Secondly, since the format is “JUMP”, all different processes can be executed depending on the branched scheduler data after the “SUBJ” function is executed. Similarly to “SUBC”, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branch processing is not performed and the “SUBC” function is terminated. You may do it.

  That is, the function “SUBJ” selects the branch destination scheduler data based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination stored in the table format in advance, like the function “SUBC”, and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to transition the processing to the above, and the same effect as the function “SUBC” can be obtained.

  In addition, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the process of the schedule data of the call destination and does not return to the process of the call source, so it is suitable for executing the process alternatively. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the effect from being executed redundantly by using the function “SUBJ”. On the other hand, since the function “SUBC” returns to the process based on the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-process after executing the process of the callee, thereby simplifying the process.

  Therefore, by using the function “SUBC” and the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and make it possible to flexibly cope with the processing branch. Furthermore, it becomes easy to cope with additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, so that development efficiency is improved and it is easy to cope with changes in the specifications of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control for star role notice]
Subsequently, the control of the star object notice executed in the second half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. When reach occurs in the change display of the special symbol and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group notice is generated and a star object notice is executed independently of the group notice. In the star role announcement, a plurality of types of star roles 5002 (three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c in this embodiment) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are provided. By operating, the expected degree of symbol variation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of appearances of the star object 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 400B, the star role notice in this embodiment is executed by driving the star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star role scheduler data scheduler). Is done. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star object 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also be used. .

  FIG. 403 to FIG. 405 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for performing motor control in the star combination notice of the present embodiment. 403 shows the overall flow and scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the left star role 5002a, FIG. 404 shows scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role 5002c, and FIG. 405 shows a scheduler for controlling the middle star role 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, a function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed by using the target scheduler work number “YKK_HYA” and the star object notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star role forking branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the star role forcing work area “YKK_HYA”. . The star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” stores the lottery result value of the star role notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

  In the star role notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, the address of the star role appearance scheduler data is stored. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed, and by preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to make the accessory non-operating when the preliminary announcement is not won. Yes. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the star role notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only the left star role 5002a, SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is the left star role 500c, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star objects 5002.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role notice for causing the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c to appear in the star role notice work area “YKK_HYA” is executed. “3” is stored, and scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” is executed. When only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role notice is “1”, and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role notice is selected. The result value is set to “2”.

  The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first designates the parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating the pattern of the appearance action of the left star role 5002a, and executes the function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function “REQ” is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler similarly specified by the parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the function “REQ” executes the middle star role 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” using the middle star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04”. In this embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star object 5002c and the middle star object 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star object 5002a. ing. As described above, the star data 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the different schedulers to execute the scheduler data for operating the star objects 5002.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star role 5002a operates in the designated manner. After the wait process is completed, the function “RET” is executed to return to the caller star role notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1”, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is ended by the function “stop”.

  Next, control of the right star object 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed by using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03” designated at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance mode (pattern) of the right star object 5002c is specified and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed as shown in FIG. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operating time of the right star object 5002c. After completion of the wait process, the process is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the caller scheduler data process.

  Finally, with reference to FIG. 405, control of the central star object 5002b will be described. The middle star role 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the middle star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 405, the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance mode (pattern) of the central star 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time becomes the operation time of the middle star object 5002b. After completion of the wait process, the process is terminated by executing the function “STOP” without returning to the caller scheduler data process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are represented by the function “REQ”. It is possible to operate each accessory in parallel by executing using. In other words, the operations of each accessory can be executed in parallel without performing special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as necessary. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single actor action can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, a minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of objects are operated in parallel has been described. However, more objects can be executed in parallel if there is no problem in the operation of the objects. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of actors in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the event of the logo object falling notice]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the second half of the change in this embodiment will be described. The logo object fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star object notice. The logo object fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo object 5001 simulating the logo of the gaming machine falls in the vertical direction in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit than usual. Is high.

  As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo character object fall notice of the present embodiment is driven by driving the logo character object fall notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo character object scheduler data scheduler). Executed. It should be noted that a general purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can operate the logo accessory 5001.

  FIG. 406 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for performing motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”, a specified operation is performed for one second. Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop process, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed by using the target scheduler work number “YKK_LGO” and the button logo bonus drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” as parameters. The

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and determines the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”. Identify. The button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO” stores the result of the button logo object fall notice execution lottery. If the button logo object fall notice execution lottery is off, “0: Not executed”, button When winning the lottery for the logo object fall notice, “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set. The result of the lottery for the button logo bonus drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo bonus drop lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  While the button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO” is set to “0: Not Executed”, the button logo object object drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” shows that the logo object object object notice is not executed The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”) of the scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” of the caller. Therefore, if the player loses the button logo symbol drop notice lottery, the loop process is executed 90 times, the loop process is exited, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is completed. .

  On the other hand, when “1: Logo drop notice execution” is set in the button logo object notice work area “YKK_LGO”, that is, when the button logo object drop notice execution lottery is won, the button logo object fall In the notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo object fall notice is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” are the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN”, and the button logo object fall notice button branch call address table. “TBL_MOT_LGO” is executed as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo character item fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF”, the effect button is operated. If “1” is selected, “1: button ON” is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button logo bonus item drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, in the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” when the logo accessory fall notice button is OFF Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the caller scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the button logo winning combination drop notice is won, if the production button input is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. This is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the motor scheduler at the time of the logo feature fall notice button ON in the button logo feature fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON”, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON” is executed. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when the scheduler data is executed. Here, the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo character object 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_LGO_ON”. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Furthermore, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”. At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a dropping operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Furthermore, by executing the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI”, the logo accessory 5001 moves from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position during that time. After completion of the weight processing, the execution of the logo object dropping operation is completed, so the function “MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0” is executed, the button logo object notice lottery result is rewritten to “0: not executed”, and the caller scheduler Return to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” (function “RET”) of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN”. This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. The function returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”, but since the button logo bonus notice lottery result has been rewritten to “0: Not executed”, the scheduler data “PTA_LGO_DOWN” that causes the button logo bonus to fall is executed. Instead, the remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  As described above, when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, by issuing a command internally, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting effect. .

  In this embodiment, the function “COMMAND” is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal in the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, but the control is transferred from the scheduler to the program by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side. Once it is restored, complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command is performed, and the processing result is written in a work area used by the scheduler, so that processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. In addition, a merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that time management and execution determination by a program are not required because the command issuance timing is set as the processing timing as it is. Further, it is possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by a user that is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function “COMMAND”, and perform processing.

  In this embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a fixed value command. However, the function “COMMAND” is not a fixed value but a work area is specified and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. May be.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (at power-on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the gaming machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from when the gaming machine is turned on until the game is started until the first variation display is started will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a diagram for explaining scheduler data executed when the gaming machine of this embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub gaming state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” progresses, a screen corresponding to the sub internal state is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 407, a standby screen, a manufacturer demonstration screen, a model demonstration title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. Is done. At this time, the main game state is a standby state. When the waiting state is finished, the game is started, and when the game ball is won at the start winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state are changed to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. The As described with reference to FIG. 390, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, and activates the corresponding scheduler to execute the scheduler data.

  Also, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process, as with the main command. Is done.

  When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated command includes a command for starting the scheduler and a command for controlling various rendering devices (sub-internal output command).

  In the command for starting the scheduler, for example, the main control board such as scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 or the change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control in the peripheral control board 1510, the start winning etc. Scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function “REQ” included in the scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command (sub internal output command) for controlling the effect device is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the rendering device is output by the function “COMMAND” included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where the command is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands for controlling the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer and processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by further starting other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical manner by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining the scheduler, various types of effects can be implemented in parallel, The development efficiency of gaming machines can be improved, such as making debugging work more efficient.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, command analysis processing can be shared by command output by the function “COMMAND0”. This makes it possible to share scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes a problem that a large number of scheduler data combinations must be managed in a table. This can be suppressed.

  Next, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power is turned on according to this embodiment.

  As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the gaming machine is turned on and the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received by the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, a function “COMMAND0” is executed and a command is issued to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp and sound corresponding to the sub internal state are output as necessary. .

  The scheduler to be executed will be specifically described. First, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON”, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” that changes to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 900” is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_MDEMO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” in the maker demo state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 300” is executed to enter a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_KDEMO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. Accordingly, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” in the model demonstration state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 900” is executed to enter a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_GOTO” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state anti-going scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, the sound reproduction is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the got prevention state. Thereafter, the function “NOP: 450” is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, a command “COM_STS_TAIKI” for changing to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. The gaming machine is ready to play at this stage, the game is started, and loops in this standby state until the game ball wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function “COMMAND0” can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program on the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (production 2)]
Next, an example will be described in which a saddle object fall notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo object fall notice. The fall notice of the samurai role is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as passing over the parameter used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Production Outline]
FIG. 410 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of change displays from the start of change to the stop of special symbols in the present embodiment. The scheduler data for executing the production and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination falling notice.

  In the series of change display shown in FIG. 410 (A), a button (BTN) winch first half drop notice is executed in the first half of the change. After that, reach occurs, and in the latter half of the change, the group trailer and the button half-fall first fall notice continued from the first half are followed by the second half fall notice. For each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lamp lighting, sound output, image output, action of an accessory, etc. is executed. The details of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, the content of the winning combination fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 410 (B). As described above, the winning combination fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) winning combination first half falling notice and a winning combination latter half falling notice.

  In the first half of the button 鉈 combination first half fall notice, the notice effect progresses by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the player wins the first lottery drop lottery of the button winning combination, if the effect button is not operated, the falling effect of the winning combination 5003 is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the winning combination second half drop notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the winning combination second half drop notice execution lottery regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  When winning the lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination and operating the effect button at a predetermined timing, the winning combination 5003 falls to the middle position. Furthermore, if the winning combination for the second half drop notice of winning the winning combination is won while the winning combination 5003 has fallen to the middle position, the winning combination 5003 falls to the lower position. In other words, the winning combination 5003 falls from the upper part (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the advance notice of the falling of the winning combination, and falls to the lower part (lower position) in the second half. If the winning lottery for the second half of the winning combination is selected, it will fall to the bottom regardless of the position of the winning combination 5003. Further, when the winning combination falling notice is finished, the winning combination 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410 (B), the stunning object fall notice is executed in six patterns. More specifically, when the result of lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, since it does not depend on the operation of the production button, the second half fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, the button winning combination first half drop notice and the second half falling notice are not selected, so that the winning combination 5003 is not dropped and is not moved from above. In the case of the pattern 2, the winning combination 5003 does not fall and is positioned at the upper part in the advance notice, while the winning combination latter half drop notice is won in the execution lottery. It falls at a stretch.

  When the player wins an execution lottery for the first half of the button combination, the effect of the first half of the button combination is different depending on whether or not the production button is operated. Therefore, for the winning combination object fall notice, four patterns of effect forms can be executed depending on the presence / absence of operation of the effect button and the result of the execution of the late winning object fall notice.

  If the player wins the first lottery drop lottery and does not operate the production button, and the result of the second half drop prior notice is not selected, the bonus player 5003 will not fall. (Pattern 3). When the button lottery first half drop notice execution lottery is won and the production button is operated, and the result of the second half fall notice of the second half fall notice is not won, the bonus item 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. Falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the end of the falling notice of the bonus item (pattern 4).

  If you win the first lottery drop lottery and don't operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout announcement lottery, you won't operate the production button. The winning combination 5003 is not dropped and is positioned at the upper part until the second half drop notice starts, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half drop notice (pattern 5). If you win the first lottery drop lottery and operate the production button, and if you win the second half fallout notice lottery, when the production button is operated, It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the second half drop notice (pattern 6).

  As described above, there are six patterns of appearances that can appear in the winning combination fall notice of the present embodiment, and scheduler data for controlling the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the winning combination fall notice will be described below. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 410 (A), the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for controlling the operation of the combination item 5003 in the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification, Next, description will be made regarding the second half fall advance notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for controlling the action of the last prize 5003 in the fall notice.

[18-9-2. [Various controls in advance notice of the fall of an accessory]
FIG. 411 is a view for explaining the contents of the button 鉈 combination first half drop notification scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the first combination drop notification of the first combination of the present embodiment. . As described above, when the player wins the first half drop notice for the button bonus item, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the effect object 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. The effect to be executed is executed. When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination is not won, if the effect button is not operated even after winning, the winning combination 5003 is ended without operating. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used for the execution of the first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” of the button combination.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the game board side effect display device 1600 rattles the winning combination 5003. Thereafter, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait process “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the winning combination 5003 vibrates.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of an effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop process, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed a maximum of 90 times.

  The function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” will be described. The scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is set with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button winning combination first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” as parameters. Executed.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button winning combination first half drop advance notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, and based on the contents of the button winning combination first half drop advance notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler data to be branched to Specify the start address of. The button 鉈 character first half drop notice work area “YKK_NTA1” stores the results of the button 鉈 character first half drop notice execution lottery. If the button 鉈 character first half drop notice execution lottery is not selected, “0: “1” is selected for the first half fall notice of the winning combination when the “No win” button is selected. The result of the lottery for the first half drop notice of the button winning combination corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” for the first drop of the button bonus combination.

  When “0: Non-Winning” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA1” for the first drop of the button combination, the button combination is displayed in the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” at the time when the first half drop notification is not executed is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” is only the function “STOP”, and the result of the button drop of the first half of the button combination is “non-winning”. Therefore, the scheduler data does not execute the first drop of the button combination. The execution of is terminated.

  On the other hand, when “1: Bonus first half fall notice execution” is set in the “YKK_NTA1” button win combination first fall notice work area, that is, when the button win combination first half fall notice is selected. In the button winning combination first half drop advance notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is selected when the bonus combination drop notice is executed. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button 鉈 character first half drop notice button branch call address The table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” is executed as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button winning combination first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and identifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and button logo object fall notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and when the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF “When the effect button is operated,“ 1: button ON ”is set. The operational state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record in the button winning combination first half drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, in the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, when the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button is OFF, the motor scheduler The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns to immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1” of the caller scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” (function “RET”). This further returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the winning lottery for the first notice of the drop of the button winning combination is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function “STOP” is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the button 鉈 accessory first half fall notice button ON in the button 鉈 accessory first half drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” The hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON”, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the winning combination falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID” within the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing the operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the intermediate position. Furthermore, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, and the winking object 5003 falls to an intermediate position during this time.

  Finally, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler saddle position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, and the fact that the saddle accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  When the first half drop notification of the bonus item is completed, the second half drop notification of the bonus item is started. FIG. 412 and FIG. 413 are diagrams for explaining the content of the late bonus drop preview scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the late bonus fall notice, which is the latter half of the bonus fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. In order to execute the late bonus drop scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used in the same manner as the previous bonus drop scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA” is executed, and drawing of an effect indicating whether or not the winning combination 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. . Thereafter, a wait process “NOP: 90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. When the winning combination 5003 falls, the big hit expectation increases, and the player's expectation is enhanced by drawing the effect for 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed with the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the winning combination late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. .

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” and, based on the contents of the winning combination latter half fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2,” the scheduler data to be branched to Specify the start address. The results of the lottery for the second half of the fall notice are stored in the “YKK_NTA2” work area “YKK_NTA2”. “If the winning combination for the second half of the fall of the winning combination is selected,“ 1: The second half of the falling notice of the winning combination is executed ”is set. The execution lottery result of the late combination of the late winning combination of the bonus item corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”.

  If the winning area second half fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2” is set to “0: Not elected”, then the second half fall fall of the bonus object in the second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” at the time when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch winning second half fall notice lottery result non-winning branch call address KNT_NO2 Branch based on.

  When “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the second half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The run-time motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored.

  When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected when the second half drop notification is not executed in the second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON”, the function “RET” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is restored. Thereafter, the value of the scheduler saddle position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten on “0: initial position”, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop of the winning combination in the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” Pre-execution / second half-fall notice non-winning motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected.

  In the case of the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” at the time of non-winning for the first half fall notice, first, a 120 frame (about 4 seconds) wait process “NOP: 120” is executed. In the weight process executed here, as will be described later, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position when the winning combination 5003 is in the lower position. In this case, since there is originally a scissors 5003 at the intermediate position, the user waits for 4 seconds.

  After the end of the wait process, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operating time of the winning combination 5003, a wait process “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In addition, when “1: 鉈 late fall notice” is set in the “YKK_NTA2” work area “YKK_NTA2”, the 鉈 feature late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN” at the time of winning of the second half of the winning combination is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the branch object fall notice 2 branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NT” are used. .

  When “0: initial position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop notification is not made in the second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” at the time of execution / late fall notice win selection is selected.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the winning combination 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 240”, and during this time, the scooping object 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the saddle accessory 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed, and the above-described scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is called to return the saddle winning object 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  On the other hand, when “1: intermediate position” is set in the heel position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler, the first half drop of the winning combination in the winning combination latter half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” Motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected at the time of execution of the advance notice / late fall notice.

  In the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” (FIG. 413), first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END” is executed, and the command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the winning combination 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as the issue of the command “COM_NTA_STA-END”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the scissors 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, and during this time, the scooping object 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the winning combination 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the winning combination 5003 reaches the lower position. Further, a weight process of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and effect drawing is continued on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 from the initial position to the lower position with the timing of starting the operation of returning the winning combination 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about (4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time required for the winning combination 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

  Thereafter, as in the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed to return the winning combination 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to return the saddle accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function “RET” returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  When the saddle object 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed and the value of the scheduler position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. And the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is terminated.

  In the winning combination fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the winning combination 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the winning combination 5003 by writing the position of the winning combination 5003 using the function “MEMW” in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. . Thereby, the moving amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the winning combination 5003, and it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling each corresponding scheduler data.

  Also, in the returning operation to the initial position after the operation of the winning combination 5003, since the common scheduler data is called by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when the scheduler data is executed and referring to it when other scheduler data is executed. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of execution of each scheduler data, so that a program code can be created according to the player's operation, etc. The processing can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, making it easier to create and debug scheduler data and facilitate management. In this embodiment, the function is a function for writing a fixed value. However, by specifying a work name as a function parameter instead of a fixed value, data can be transferred from the program side, and processing based on command information can be performed. Therefore, more complicated processing can be performed by the scheduler. A unique feature of the function “MEMW” is that information that is not determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function “MEMW” can be processed if the information is determined before the function “MEMW” is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Example of scheduler data configuration (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of notice effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each announcement production.

  Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of notice effects and the basic effects related to the series of notice effects and the variation pattern (regardless of lottery other than the notice effects) A description will be given of the configuration of the scheduler data for executing the effect produced and the effect related to the background effect and the design effect that is one-to-one with the variation pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the period from when the change of the special symbol is started to when the change is stopped is managed by a block unit (effect section) divided by a predetermined structural unit. For example, the block can be used from the start of symbol variation until reach occurs, or when reach does not occur until the symbol stops (first half variation), or from reach occurrence until symbol stops (second half variation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. Each block is assigned a time corresponding to the variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined into block data.

  The rule of block division is that when the basic effects related to variation are compared in multiple variation patterns, the same basic effect part is divided into common block data, and the part with the difference in the basic effect of liquid crystal display is divided into block data To do. Referring to FIG. 414A, in the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” has a normal variation of 6 seconds. It is lost, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of lost is performed. Since the normal variation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other variation patterns, the normal variation 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) and the loss-stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) are divided.

  The variation pattern “10H02H” has a normal variation of 12 seconds, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and thereafter, the design effect of the loss is performed. Since the normal variation 12-second effect is also used in other variation patterns, it is divided as the normal variation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the lost pattern effect is exactly the same as the variation pattern “10H01H”. The liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping the stop is commonly used as the liquid crystal effect block data for the stop of loss, which is divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the variation pattern “10H01H”. Similarly, with respect to other variation patterns, portions that have already been converted into block data regarding the basic effects are used in common, and block portions that are different are newly converted into block data.

  As described above, by creating a block, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and all the variation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than variation are combined with unique liquid crystal effect block data. It is possible to realize basic effects such as all variation patterns and jackpots other than variations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the biggest purpose of blocking is to create a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is reflected in all the fluctuation patterns using the block data.

  With respect to the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, since the sound source built-in VDP 1540a is controlled, the format and function are completely different from those of the sound, lamp, and accessory scheduler data in the present embodiment. The structure in which the rendering scheduler data for effects and the rendering scheduler data for notice effects are combined has the same structure as the sub-effect block data for controlling sounds, lamps, and accessories. In addition, drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving picture material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, color, pictures and movies displayed in the background, and effects related to designs. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the type and execution timing of the effect related to the notice effect that occurs in the block data. The information shown is embedded.

  Further, in this embodiment, block data for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when displaying the variability by changing the shape of the identification symbol. It becomes possible to execute with a liquid crystal display device. Note that the drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effect. In addition, a configuration in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for notice effects related to symbols is combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub-effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the variation display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 414A is a view for explaining a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern commands in the present embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram for explaining a sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) by change pattern that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating combinations of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, unique numbers that specify the liquid crystal effect block data to be configured are held in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern numbers. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, it is constituted by “LCD03_BLK” indicating a normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, “LCD04_BLK” indicating a normal short reach in the second half variation, and “LCD02_BLK” indicating the stoppage time of disconnection. Is done. At this time, “LCD03_BLK”, “LCD04_BLK”, and “LCD02_BLK” are stored in this order. In this way, the configuration of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used for the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, “LCD03_BLK” is used regardless of the content of the notice effect that is actually executed. Thereby, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of variation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 414B, the variation pattern liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. . Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 415, the variation pattern sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similar to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. Hold. Further, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Next, a procedure for executing a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a variation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for performing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal symbol block data, and effect control based on sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram for explaining the outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is identified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 receives the variation pattern number. Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 392A, the effect control unit 5020 determines a layer to be used, determines a block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. Corresponding block data numbers are obtained from the variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the variation pattern liquid crystal design block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). To do. By making all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

  Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

  Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal design if drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is a normal variation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half change, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is a normal variation 12-second liquid crystal design block data “ZUG03_BLK”. The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the contents of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, thereby rendering the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol if scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as when processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub production block data is started, one or a plurality of sub production 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub production block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the production content is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be set as the shared execution cycle at startup.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling effect devices such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specifying function in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects by various effect devices are executed by each module.

  It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function “REQ, REQF”. Various rendering devices can be controlled by executing a rendering data designation function in the called scheduler data. Further, by using the command transmission function “COMMAND” or “COMMAND0”, it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by sending a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data specifying function for controlling the action of the accessory, the action of the accessory and the drawing are linked as in the above-described effect of falling notice of the accessory Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for performing effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data control start processing related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

  The effect block control unit 5040 selects the change pattern layer by the effect control unit 5020 based on the change pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each change pattern corresponding to the change pattern. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 415). The row position of the variation effect sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 415) is set in the variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table row index (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 415, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set in the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table row index, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

  Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (variation pattern-specific sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thus, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of this embodiment.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub pattern block data number table for each variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized with “0” (step S7012). As a result, the processing is started from the top record of the variation effect sub-effect block data number table specified from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data classified by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern (FIG. 420 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub effect block data number table row index, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) is subtracted from the sub effect block data number table. get. In the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice), one or a plurality of scheduler data is registered, and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data is associated with each other based on a lottery result of a notice or the like.

  Furthermore, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub effect block data number table row index when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub effect block data is completed, and the sub effect block data number table row index changes to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the different sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the variation effect-specific sub effect block data number table is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of row elements of the variation effect sub-effect block data number table is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

  FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of this embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update processing for each variation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub-effect block data number table This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data by variation pattern when execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table using the variation effect sub-effect block data combination number table row and column index. (Step S7021). Thereby, sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the variation effect sub effect block data number table is specified and defined as sub effect block data. It is determined whether the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub effect block data control update process is terminated.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all schedulers of sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data and sub-effect block data corresponding to a notice) defined by the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. Is completed (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects has been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. Then, the sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

  As described in FIG. 414A, FIG. 414B and FIG. 415, the sub-effect block data by variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal design block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution times of the respective block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, if the same variation pattern is obtained by blocking, the number of times the scheduler is defined in the production block and the production block is always the same regardless of the combination of production and the appearance of the production. Complexity can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the production control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-production schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various production devices and execute various productions without any sense of incongruity. can do. In addition, because scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various rendering devices can be independently developed and checked for operation in rendering device units and block data units. Can improve the development efficiency.

  FIG. 420 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for executing the basic effect and the notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment. FIG. The execution time of the notice effect, (B) shows the configuration of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub effect block data and notice sub effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 420 (B), the combination of two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and notice block data, is possible, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 420, sub-effect block data classified by variation pattern constituting the variation display of variation pattern “10H03H” is “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( It is configured by a stoppage of losing. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol, and normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the variation display result is confirmed as lost, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

  Sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 420 (A), sub-effect block data related to step-up notice, BTN logo object fall notice, and symbol stop notice notice and sub-effect related to the background Block data is defined. Further, the sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” defines the sub effect block data for the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub effect block data related to the background. Further, in the sub effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub effect block data related to the background is defined without defining the notice effect sub effect block data. In the drawing, the execution of the notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 420 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 420 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” classified by variation pattern will be described.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the background, the normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is defined. In the normal variation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normal variation 12-second background are defined. The normal variation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” ends.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the notice, a function “NOP”, a step-up notice sub effect block data, a BTN logo object fall notice sub effect block data, and a symbol stop notice sub effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data and sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo character object drop notice are defined in the BTN logo object drop notice sub effect block data. The BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo accessory drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

  At this time, the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect until the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice) is started from the start of the fluctuation. Function until the start of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) until the execution of the sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” by the variation pattern is finished. “NOP” is executed and waits for a specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data within the scheduler block according to the variation pattern by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function “NOP” of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern may not be present.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as the lamp, sound, and accessory is defined for each notice effect. Thereby, since the time from the start of the control based on the sub effect block data to the execution of each notice effect is uniquely determined, the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern is managed not by the start of variation but by the relative value from the start of execution of the sub-effect block data by variation pattern. As a result, when the same variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation. Although different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern is managed in the same way. In the case of the liquid pattern block data by variation pattern, the liquid crystal design block by variation pattern It is managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” classified by variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

  Normal short reach background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the variation effect sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is completed.

  In the sub effect scheduler data related to the notice, a function “NOP”, cut-in notice sub effect block data, and group notice sub effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute the sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The sub effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

  By executing the sub effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

  The variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. no problem.

  Finally, in the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” for each variation pattern, no effect related to the notice is performed, so only the losing stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub effect block data is defined in the sub effect scheduler data related to the background. In the stop stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to a normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. Loss-stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data “SCH02_BLK” is completed.

  FIG. 421 is a view for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data and the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal design block data of the present embodiment. In the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern, the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is only different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the sub effect block data will be described using the step-up effect described in FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image in which a drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects (step-up 1 effect to 4 effects) using the video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. is there.

  The drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment in units of step-up effects.

  The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, as in this embodiment, four types of step-up notices. If it is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data file for 4 lines. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data file is created with a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to combine and realize the notice.

  FIG. 423 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect block data for step-up notice according to the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the structure of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in this embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at a predetermined timing.

  The step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data will be described. First, based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the change, it is determined which of the step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. The If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is terminated without executing, and therefore the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2, Step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated.

  Further, the function “NOP” is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, and after waiting for the time specified by the parameter, the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, since the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single notice can be realized by combining the notice scheduler data of the notice in the minimum structural unit.

  Next, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured in a one-to-one correspondence with the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data and the block configuration and execution time. Thereby, it becomes possible to synchronize dynamically with all effect apparatuses also with respect to the combination of a fluctuation pattern and a lottery result of a notice, and can realize an effect with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub-effect block data is different from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the order of data access is acquired from the variation effect sub-effect block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the notice effect defined at a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at a timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on the information specifying the effect contents such as the fluctuation pattern, the scheduler data defined in a hierarchical manner is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and the schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, thereby dramatically improving the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to a new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to use software assets related to the presentation control of the gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the memory use area may be released. By stopping the scheduler, the memory usage can be reduced. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time elapses after execution of the schedule data is completed, or may be stopped other than the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine enters a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is constituted by a combination of functions for controlling the effect object, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, driving device operation, and the like are controlled objects, but the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is controlled on drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (liquid crystal effect scheduler function) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data described above, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. Send and execute the production. Further, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect, it is possible to change the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of a scheduler function for liquid crystal effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, an overview of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In the present embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

  First, functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. For example, the function belonging to the coordinate setting group is to set the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Thereby, it becomes possible to designate and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X axis coordinate position, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y axis coordinate position, and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” designates the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display object anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a display area that is designated to be enlarged or reduced when displayed on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the coordinate unit. It is to do. By performing a drawing process by setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” designates the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” designates the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” designates the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values, and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by designating an angle, there is no need to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX” specifies the X-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY” specifies the Y-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ” specifies the Z-axis value, and rotates the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” designates the X-axis value, the Y-axis value, and the Z-axis value, and rotates the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process. Specifically, the α value is specified to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value that is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display object. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying a liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so as to be drawn on the back surface.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group in order to set information related to the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described in detail later, is information embedded in control information for drawing (images, moving images). By detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back, and the contents of the effect are switched. Or perform another production. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets the frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling the sub-scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, the process can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
In the foregoing, an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described. Next, parameters specified when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect will be described with an example. FIG. 425 and FIG. 426 are diagrams showing examples of parameters for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect are managed for each group as in the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of parameters are different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE_SIZE", "AAD_AD" And the like. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for designating an α value that is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter for designating the total number of data of the parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter for designating the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for designating a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for designating an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter for designating the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the production SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registered effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registrations of kick effects SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter for designating the total number of registration of the frame effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters for footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter for designating the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes “AAD_ZUGARA” and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the sub effect scheduler function includes “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for designating a sub-scheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Production control in gaming machines has been realized by combining and executing programs that individually control various production devices and programs that link multiple production devices. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the rendering device for each notice content in addition to the commands related to the variation pattern, and are created by a highly skilled programmer. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, symbol, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to perform a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complex effect control. As a result, a high level of skill is required for each programmer and the development man-hours increase, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, since the total amount of program codes of the production control program is increased, the man-hours required for testing for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality have also increased.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is not possible to realize an effect executed in conjunction with liquid crystal drawing (image display) with a program code. Instead, the program data for the gaming machine is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal rendering effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby realizing a reduction in development period and an improvement in quality.

  Specifically, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal rendering effect is used by assigning images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in time series. In this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and an effect common block is created by grouping effect blocks for each state such as a variation pattern or jackpot, By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a variation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, because of the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of the effects related to the lottery, replacement of the effects and symbols, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player, so simply execute the combined effect common block as it is Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating a production common block using the above-described tool, a production switch (production SW for invoking a program for performing the production at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (incorporated). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, the callback always occurs regardless of the effect SW “ON” and “OFF”. Further, when the effect SW is ON in the callback destination function, a predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback) To do). Based on the information processed by the program function that is called back, a display list command can be created, and effect display ON / OFF and effect replacement can be realized. In the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lamp lighting, action of an accessory, etc.). Also, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent production control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player. .

  The program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect and the effect replacement called by the callback is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting a presentation SW so that a designer or plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge sets a presentation element such as an image or a video at the time of presentation design, and calls a predefined program function, Complex production specifications can be realized. In addition, using the production creation tool, production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) can be created in production units, and the development period can be greatly reduced. In addition, production contents can be created based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be greatly reduced.

[20-1. Direction switch configuration]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch in the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  An effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW start command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

  The effect SW group is a set of effects SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively displayed. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

  FIG. 428 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, there are active and passive effects SW, and the effect SW group is composed of one or more active effects SW and passive effects SW. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of the active effect SW, and the head group number of the passive effect SW and the number of the passive effect SW are included.

  The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for designating whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. The replacement information is information for designating whether or not to call a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information for designating whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. The effect SW is statically evaluated in the passive state, and the effect SW is dynamically evaluated in the active state.

  The effect SW start command address is an address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 429 exemplifies an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of the number of commands and data corresponding to the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by effect switch in step-up notice effect]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of the step-up notice in the present embodiment, where (A) shows the stage where the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) shows the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 430 (A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed in up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and when the step-up notice does not develop, the step-up notice ends.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of step-up notice effect, an effect that the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of black and the pattern of fill. For example, when the color of black is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, as the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation is higher as the number of positions where filling starts is higher, and the degree of expectation may be changed at the position where filling starts. For example, the expectation is low when filling starts from only one place in the lower left, and when filling starts from two places in the lower left and upper left, the filling starts from three places in the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The expectation is higher in order, and the expectation is highest when the filling is started from the four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice at each stage, the development effect for the step-up notice at the next stage is executed. Regardless of whether or not the development effect is actually developed to the next stage, the effect is executed in a common manner until the middle in order to increase the player's expectation. The case of the step-up notice 1 will be described. First, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of the ink color determined by lottery and the paint pattern. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (thinens), and characters for display in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is, and the character display is darkened, and the production is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the character display is not darkened and the ink is drawn and the character is not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to the degree of expectation are displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “punishment”, “feeling”, “continuation”, and “one-shot kill”. In the effect mode of step-up notice 2, the screen is first filled while enlarging the area to be filled with the combination of the ink color and the paint variation in step-up notice 1 in a state where characters are displayed. Thereafter, when the screen is completely filled with black, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and eventually the ink is completely removed, and the displayed characters disappear. Will end up.

  In step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black in step-up notice 2, and an effect that the ink is gradually removed from this state is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern that the ink brushes. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left, the expectation is low, and when ink is applied from the lower left and the upper left, the ink is applied from the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the degree of expectation becomes highest when ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of brushing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

  Step-up notice 4 is the final stage of step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the expectation of a character pattern increases in the order of “game”, “opportunity”, “development”, “hot fight”, “extreme heat”, “happiness”. In addition, the expectation level of the character color increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Next, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above using the effect SW will be described. FIG. 431 to FIG. 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the production contents and the production SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 432 (A) shows step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing step-up notice 1 for painting with black ink from four directions on the screen, and (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. The step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled in are shown. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between effects SW and effects for replacing effects related to step-up notice 1.

  FIG. 431 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1 and is divided according to each drawing (lower left ink drawing, upper left ink drawing, lower right ink drawing, upper right ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described for each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, totaling 26 effects. It has become. In addition, since there is always one effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing section, and only one of the drawing sections “character failure” and “character success” is executed, the maximum effect that can be executed simultaneously in step-up notice 1 The number of renderings is 5 effects, including the drawing category “lower left”, the drawing category “upper left”, the drawing category “lower right”, the drawing category “upper right” and the drawing category “character failure” or the drawing category “character success”.

  Further, according to the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1, the effect determining method for each drawing section will be specifically described. First, the lottery of the step-up notice 1 is performed, and the contents of effects related to the ink drawing are determined. The effects related to ink drawing are specifically the selection of the position where ink appears from the drawing category “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right” and the color of the ink appearing from the place where the selected ink appears. Become. In addition, either the drawing division “character failure” or the drawing division “character success” and the contents of the character displayed at this time are displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 432 (A), the structure of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the image of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described. . As described above, the total number of effects of the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects in total, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the production data is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. In addition, black ink spreads simultaneously from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters “change” are displayed lightly in the drawing division “character failure” and the drawing division “character success”, and then the drawing division “character” The characters “change” are deleted by “failure”, and the characters “change” are clearly displayed in the drawing category “character success”.

  Further, in FIG. 432 (B), the drawing division “lower left” is “red”, the drawing division “upper left” is “none”, and the drawing division “lower right” is “none”, depending on the lottery result of step-up notice 1. A command is issued in which the classification “upper right” is “red”, the drawing classification “character failure” is “feeling”, and the drawing classification “character success” is “none”. As a result, the red ink spreads from the drawing section “lower left” and the red ink spreads from the drawing section “upper right”, and the character “Kai” is displayed lightly in the drawing section “character failure”. The character “Kai” is erased in the drawing division “character failure”.

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is set to “red”, “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper right” is set to “red”. Thus, “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “Character failure”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “character success” is “none”. Since the command “” is not performed, none of the effects SW is set to ON and is set to OFF.

  As described above, the red ink spreads from the drawing category “lower left” and the red ink spreads from the drawing category “upper right” from all the effects of the step-up notice 1. The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 433, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 432 (A), an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 433 (B) is performed. A mechanism for directing the production will be described.

  FIG. 433 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the master data. More specifically, referring to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 433, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And the corresponding effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED”, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

  In the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and executed in the process of creating the display list command for drawing the effect, and is defined as the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. With the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” as a trigger (detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left ink effect replacement table, determines all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table, and identifies the effect SW set to ON. To do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “lower left” is “red”, and the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, so that “from the lower left” corresponding to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set. The moving image number on the CGROM of “Red ink” is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback passes the specified moving image number on the red CGROM to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 from the lower left and ends the execution. When the control returns again to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 performs CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the upper video number, a display list command is generated using the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

  The feature of the effect replacement by callback in this embodiment is that the control structure is low level (in this embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) and high level control structure (this implementation) By calling a program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for modification but capable of executing complex processing), it is possible to separate the detection of replacement timing and replacement control by using a callback. It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data having a data structure.

  In the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). The same control as the effect control of the present embodiment is not executed by callback, but a structure for performing complex control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side. When production control is realized by analyzing and executing data, the complexity of the program code processed on the liquid crystal if drawing scheduler execution unit side is increased, and when new functions are added or functions are changed It is necessary to change the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the trouble caused by the change of control but also the function that worked normally before the change will affect the new trouble. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), the callback is always executed by the callback, and a plurality of the callbacks executed by the callback are executed. Whether or not execution is possible and the processing contents are determined in the callback function. By creating a callback function that corresponds to a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the LCD effect scheduler data structure, and a call corresponding to a new function. This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the influence range due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of causing a problem by affecting other callback functions is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the LCD effect scheduler data is executed centrally with a single large program, the execution analysis is performed with a plurality of callback functions and the LCD effect scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the program structure and configuration can be further simplified.

  Although this embodiment has been described specifically for the replacement of the production, the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not limited to the exchange of the production, the replacement of the design, the control of display or non-display of the production, the drawing target The present invention can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always the liquid crystal effect scheduler. The index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, about several thousand of the effect replacement table and the effect SW are defined. In situations where game specification changes and game specification additions frequently occur between the planning and development of a gaming machine and the launch of the game machine, the consistency between the index number of the moving image (image) on the CGROM and the effect SW It will be extremely difficult to maintain.

  In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It may happen that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the LCD effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and replacement is performed with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that an effect dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in outliers may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, the consistency check can be realized by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. Further, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the master CGROM on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and an effect is drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the ink is gradually erased from some or all of the vertices of the display area from the painted state, and the character emerges when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In both cases of success and failure, an effect that the ink is gradually erased from the vertex of the display area is executed. Therefore, the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erase the ink for each vertex. (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

  The upper left ink replacement group, lower right ink replacement group, upper right ink replacement group, character failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group described in FIG. 433 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left ink replacement group. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed, an effect SW flag (layer) corresponding to the mode may be defined for the animation of the displayed character, or one kind of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects can be achieved by individually defining drawing appearance patterns for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It is possible to execute or perform a combined effect. Since the switching and combination of effects only switches the setting of the effect SW flag individually, the planner who configures the effects only needs to set the parameters with the tool without the need to create a new program. Various variations of production can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of types of drawing patterns only by combining four types of drawing patterns based on the appearance position of black and two types of display patterns as a result of development effect. This minimizes the types of programs to be developed, improves the development efficiency of presentation control programs for gaming machines, and improves the quality of inspections of developed presentation control programs. Can do.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switches]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram for explaining a control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly shows an evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control internal issued by the peripheral control unit 1530 to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510 An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or performing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data that matches the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data that matches, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

  The effect SW determination data includes two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW determination command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, main control command values, and sub internal command values, or to combine peripheral control internal issue command values and peripheral control internal command values. . For example, the change start designation command value and the probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background designation command of the peripheral control internal issue command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

  By defining multiple commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini character notice is used, if the mini characters that are displayed for different backgrounds are different, the background command value is determined, and after specifying the background, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it is possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it is necessary to make multiple determinations by the number of commands. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice as in this embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make multiple determinations, and an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands can be specified in the same way as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effects SW can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effects SW can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command “0x103001” is received, the effect SW flag “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” with the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, an example of these functions will be described. FIG. 435 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  LEDSW_TST is a function for determining whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady program or a callback program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a callback program, not the effect SW activation by the command.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a steady program or a callback program. Further, when the “all reset” attribute is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” of the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. All effects SW belonging to the group are set to OFF.

  LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of the target effect SW from a steady program or a callback program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for obtaining the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady program or the callback program.

[20-4. Example of production switch implementation]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. FIG. 436 to FIG. 441 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute specific processing, the callback is executed, and it is determined that the specific processing is not performed in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

  FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment. (A) is an example of a program code defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. (C) is a figure which shows an example of production SW group.

  The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A). The effect SW group ID, the reset target effect SW group ID, the effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and the effect SW It includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions such as an effect SW for performing the same (same type) notice effect, an effect SW for holding display, or an effect SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is expressed by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset effect SW group ID is identification information for designating an effect SW group in which the effect SW is set to OFF when “effect SW all reset” is designated in “attrib bit assignment” to be described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effects SW whose processing is to be stopped (reset) at the same time when the effects SW are switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits in the same manner as the effect SW group ID, and a plurality of groups can be designated.

  The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW total reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 436 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  Passive / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the production SW, and is “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0”, and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In passive, even when a command for starting the effect SW is received a plurality of times during the period in which the effect SW is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active period, the effect SW is effected in the period in which the effect SW is defined. When a command for starting SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed as many times as the number of commands received for the corresponding effect. Active is used for displaying a rendering effect corresponding to the button press when the button is pressed a plurality of times within the button effective period.

  The special control information (special control behavior) is information for designating whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, the user side callback function is called instead of the system side callback function.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a predefined replacement callback function is called when the presentation SW defined for each display target, still image, and moving picture in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is called. It is.

  The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information for designating whether or not the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluating the effect SW is set to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, the effect SW belonging to all the groups set in the “reset target effect SW group ID” is set to OFF during the effect SW evaluation.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 436 (A). As for the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON during the evaluation SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and a new effect SW is controlled or effected by the output command.

  The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when “with replacement” is specified). Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effects SW are set, they are managed as an effect group. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, the number of active effects SW, a passive effect SW head ID, and a number of passive effects SW.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the active effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effects SW is the number of active effects SW arranged from the effects SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head among the passive effects SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effects SW is the number of passive effects SW arranged from the effects SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, when “reproduction SW all reset” is designated by “attrib bit assignment”, the continuous belonging to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effects SW and the plurality of continuous active effects SW to OFF.

  FIG. 437 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code defining an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated form in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle numerical values when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the array index corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 436 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed, and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. The effect SW information table is stored in an array having the effect SW number as an index, similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

  Next, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 436 (A). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table and the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is the effect SW replacement table information and (B ) Shows an effect SW replacement table.

  FIG. 439 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table information, the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data are stored. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

  The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1,” this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, the ink color is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

  FIG. 439 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of material numbers defined in the replacement table are defined. In this embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

  As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated with reference to the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, any effect SW defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and moving images will be described. The layer can draw the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers, layers) and draw the display result for general use. For example, by dividing the background layer, it is possible to draw with a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

  In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed, so that even if some layers are changed, other layers are not affected. Can do.

  FIG. 440 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background) For). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal layer table is executed based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first notice 1) and (B) shows the layer information table (notice The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables in the first and second half of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, similarly to the layer information table for the background.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440 (A), layer information tables for background, symbol display, for the first half notice, for big hit effect, for accessory operation, for hold display, etc. are defined.

  Also, FIG. 440 (B) shows a layer information table for the background. In the production in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background according to the game state (shortening time) Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations can be added by changing the background color in part by the effect SW.

  FIG. 441 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which roulette notice, blackout notice, window notice are defined, and a command for clearing notice is also defined. FIG. 441 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which step-up notice, button mini character notice, and conversation notice are defined. As in the case of the first notice 1, the layer table for clearing the notice. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table for each notice defined in the layer information table for each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “effect SW all reset” is defined by “attrib bit assignment”. When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice effects SW belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW. Ends and disappears. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because no production is performed.

  The end judgment record is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing the layer information. When the end judgment record is detected, it is determined that the data reading is finished. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the data amount (number of records) can be dynamically changed without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Step-up notice implementation example]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the notice effect by the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described using the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. The structure of is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 442 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks are It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawn frames and the effect SW. In the present embodiment, a total number of drawn frames (580), an effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and a common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. The callback is executed based on the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” based on the information of the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP” in the callback function.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect SW, total number of frames drawn, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and it is configured to be able to cope with increase / decrease of the number of steps by adding and deleting liquid crystal effect blocks. For example, when the step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

  The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawn frames defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal effect block. To explain using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced by (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after completion of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” in the first row.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, loop start frame position, and playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the LCD effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. When loop playback is performed from the beginning or midway, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” liquid crystal effect block playback time is (150) frames, so when the LCD frame “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” finishes playing, the second half 50 frames are looped twice. This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. An effect of performing fluctuation fluctuation without determining a symbol during a pseudo-continuous production can be realized by using a loop playback function.

  The reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback despite the fact that the total playback time and playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment is the same is due to some trouble. In order to prevent the drawing from being updated when the next production common block is not executed and the liquid crystal screen to stop, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded.

  In the present embodiment, when the production from the step-up notice 1 to the step-up notice 3 is executed, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is executed after the lottery of the notice related to the production is executed on the peripheral control board 1530 and then the step-up A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

  After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_STEPUP_SUPP” On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks can be defined in the liquid crystal effect common block, and it can be controlled whether or not the liquid crystal effect block is executed using the effect SW. In addition, the display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block at each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  As the contents of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block as the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Describing with reference to the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the top (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three rows of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, the number of execution frames (120) is designated as “LCD_NOP”, and therefore, the process waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is designated is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is ended.

  As shown in Fig. 430, at the end of the step-up notice for each step of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to realize the execution effect of the development to the next step-up notice is doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” executes the wait by “LCD_NOP”, waits for (120) frames, and then starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2”, so that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” becomes The liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” starts to be executed when (120) frames have passed since the start of the execution. Thus, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step-up notice 2.

  In addition, a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data can be defined in time series in the liquid crystal effect block. When the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined continuously, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the number of execution frames is used. To execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data for step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, function NOP for waiting while executing step-up notice effect 1, function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2, for executing step-up notice effect 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting an operation of the effect button during the change of the pattern and operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Button mini character production aspect]
FIG. 444 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed at the time of receiving a main command or at the start of variation, and winning. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input reception period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the button operation input reception period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  More specifically, when the button lottery effect lottery is won and 90 frames (f) have elapsed from the start of the change, the first half of the button mini character validity period is reached. The button mini character first half effective period is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) that prompts the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen with the start of the button mini character first half effective period. When the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character period, the mini character is displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character first half validity period. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, but may be displayed in the same mode or when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different ways as long as possible.

  When the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character is displayed as in the first half of the button mini character validity period. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a different mode from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini character effective period, but may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different ways as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini character effect is the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the total number of liquid crystal effect common blocks to be registered in the liquid crystal effect common block. The number is defined in pairs with the effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawn frames (180), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawn frames (150), the effect SW “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, first, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed for (150) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is terminated.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 446 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” that call the callback function to determine whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information SW. Therefore, the rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 447 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. To explain the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top in the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and waits for (90) frames from the start of variation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” corresponding to the first half period of the button mini character is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is ended. In the latter half of the production, “LCD_NOP” defined at the top of the liquid crystal production block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini-character second half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of variation. Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the button mini character second half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” is ended.

  As described above, since the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active production SW, the production SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” and “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” are executed. If the command to be issued is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effects SW “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed as many times as is issued. Further, a callback is always generated by the effect SW every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is finished and until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is finished. By creating liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period and controlling it with the active effect SW, a control is performed in which the callback period is executed without determining the button effective period separately. Is possible. For example, the number of repeated hits can be counted by repeatedly hitting a button, and an effect corresponding to the number of hits can be executed. Further, the lamp can be turned on in response to the button operation by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the lamp in the callback function. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation effective period is ended by calling the sub effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory and performing the operation according to the number of button operations. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, executing a production block including a function for causing the accessory to return to the initial position by waiting for “LCD_NOP” until the button operation valid period ends.

[24. Liquid crystal production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to change the drawing contents according to the gaming state and the expectation of the variable display game to be noticed. Similarly, it is possible to replace the identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variation display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and a reel in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is assigned to each column. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a manner corresponding to the gaming state, and each reel is defined for each manner. The variation display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame, as in the notice effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each gaming state or performance. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the gaming state and effects, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reels of identification symbols. With the reel arrangement, the identification symbols are displayed in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and the design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the display is returned to 1 after 0 A reel index is defined that defines the total number and the display order of identification symbols. A plurality of reel indexes can be defined.

  The tables for replacing the identification symbols include a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, an index number on the CG ROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using a reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. The reel index replacement work number table defines work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index. The reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the quasi-continuous variation or the confirmed symbol number value of the identification symbol can be recognized as stopped or stopped by the player. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of variation according to the effect contents.

  The identification of the data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for replacement of the identification symbol. Based on the reel index replacement work number table, the target reel index replacement work number is specified. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement workpiece is taken out, and the reel index replacement workpiece number is corrected based on the number of identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified by the replacement table of the identification symbols, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used for the replacement of the identification symbol. The display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the production contents are drawn.

  Furthermore, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display. In addition, by setting a reel according to the gaming state, even if a failure occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the gaming state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, the occurrence timing of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing classification by the parameter delivered to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 448 is a diagram illustrating an example of drawing divisions that can be determined in the callback function at the time of callback execution by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A” generates a callback before the start of drawing of liquid crystal A, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” generates a callback after starting of drawing of liquid crystal A. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before starting the liquid crystal B drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after starting the liquid crystal B drawing. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and before completion of drawing of each liquid crystal, it is possible to determine whether drawing has been completed. As a result, it becomes possible to perform drawing on the liquid crystal A.

  In “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM”, a callback is generated before all drawing is started, and in “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM”, a callback is generated after all drawing is completed. Initializing the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing by performing the determination before drawing starts, or determining the end of drawing to instruct the execution of the effect to other effect devices when drawing is completed It becomes possible.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM” generates a callback before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM” generates a callback after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer. For example, when a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing a notification layer by performing the determination before the start of layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and display the notification display having a high priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the symbol that was drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, the symbol with high expectation It is possible to display an effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

  As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before or after the start of drawing. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before the start of common block drawing, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after the completion of common block drawing. By performing the determination before starting the common block rendering, the execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering that constitutes the liquid crystal rendering common block is stopped and rendering of the rendering is not performed, or the liquid crystal rendering common block By performing the determination after the drawing is finished, it is also possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block different from the liquid crystal effect common block scheduled to be executed at the start of the fluctuation.

  Also, “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the start of drawing of the liquid crystal effect block in the common block of liquid crystal effects, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after drawing of the liquid crystal effect block. By performing the determination before the liquid crystal effect block drawing is started, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed as a result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it becomes possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback before the start of drawing of still images and moving images in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can generate a callback after completion of drawing of still images and moving images. Various effects can be replaced by making a determination before starting to draw a still image or a moving image. In addition, by performing the determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the rendering of the effects according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

  As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described so far, in this embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and videos are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the effect category. Is done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effects SW are set for each layer.

  When the effect is executed, images and the like are drawn in parallel with the plurality of layers, and the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Furthermore, the drawing by the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (preliminary_first half 1 layer). FIG. 449 is a diagram illustrating an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the notice effect is executed according to the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or a plurality of effects SW are set for each layer. However, if these effects SW are to be managed individually, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each layer, gaming machine state, and effect category.

  For example, the effects SW assigned for each layer are grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and each effect category.

  In this way, by managing the effect SW as a group, it is possible to collectively control individual effect elements. For example, if you want to change the background that is currently displayed and the background display, design layer, and hold display to a different background when a new change starts, the background layer, design layer, hold layer The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display according to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layer, It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from among the plurality of effect displays displayed superimposed on the layers.

  In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the jackpot effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the jackpot, but for the hold, the hold that was drawn during the change It is also possible to display continuously. Such control defines the effect group to be hidden as described above as the reset effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which the effect SW is all reset is designated as the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation, This can be realized by defining a common block for liquid crystal effects at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in blocks of a certain length for the purpose of improving the control of the complicated game effects. As a result, a production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the notice lottery, and a series of productions such as symbol fluctuation display and jackpot is realized by drawing based on the selected production block, and complicated control is performed. Therefore, the control that synchronizes the sub-effects such as an accessory, a lamp, and a sound output with the drawing contents has been realized. In the common block, a period divided by a predetermined timing from the start of symbol variation to the symbol determination is set. These periods correspond to, for example, the first half variation and the second half variation, and are assigned to the variation pattern. It was set according to the change time of the pattern.

  By configuring in this way, the common block can be used universally with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change and the notice effect executed in the second half of the change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common blocks are divided by a predetermined period, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of change to the end of change only by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When performing such effects over a plurality of periods, the common block is associated with the preceding common block and the subsequent common block is reduced, and each common block is executed independently. For this reason, the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to create and control a program code individually rather than setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, not only the display of variable symbols and a series of effects of big hits are performed by combining effect blocks of a certain length for all effects, but the length of the effect blocks Is configured not to be exceptionally constant, but to allow the production block length to match the production period. Furthermore, by rendering rendering blocks having different rendering times in combination, and rendering rendering blocks that span the combined rendering blocks at the same time, a rendering rendering that continues from the start of change to the end of change is realized.

  Examples of effects that span a plurality of periods include a countdown effect in which numbers are counted down as the symbols start to change, and the countdown display continues from the first half to the second half. FIG. 450 is a diagram for explaining an example of a common block extending over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, where (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, and The structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block over a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 450, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 450 (A), a step-up notice and a BTN logo accessory drop notice are executed in the first half fluctuation, and a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed in the second half fluctuation. The contents of each notice effect are as described above. Further, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step up notice until the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 450 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo object fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice are shown. The structure of the production block of the countdown notice executed during the period until the end is shown. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The countdown notice effect block includes a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data is started, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half of the fluctuation is finished after the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the start of the step-up notice, and the function NOP that waits until the latter half of the change is finished is a NOP that is executed after the end of the group notice. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the production block, the common block can be operated more flexibly. Further, by setting the standby time before and after the start of the production, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other production blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, processing such as image reuse, deformation and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various presentation expressions are efficiently realized.

  FIG. 451 is a diagram for explaining a conventional configuration for writing an image to a frame buffer by writing an image written to each layer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, an image drawn on each layer is overwritten on a frame buffer and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, a moving image or a still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Furthermore, a moving image or a still image displayed on the notice layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using a display list command. Finally, a moving image or a still image related to the hold layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using a display list command to create drawing data for one frame.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. After newly adding an effect around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

  In this way, drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by applying an effect to the created drawing data. However, with such conventional image conversion, only image conversion for drawing data for one frame can be realized, and in addition to addition of a new drawing element to a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame, This is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on a drawing element drawn on each layer or each drawing element in the layer on the capture buffer.

  The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, for example, background, design, notice, etc. are overwritten on the frame buffer in layer order. Will be overwritten by the layer's drawing elements. In addition, since the drawing element is a set of dots (points) that are colored when drawn on the frame buffer, even if an attempt is made to extract the drawing element as a rectangle, it is overwritten with another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten portion is lost.

  At present, due to the improved processing capability of VDP, the need to re-use image data for one drawn liquid crystal display screen has been reduced, but the expression of production is diversified for the purpose of improving the fun of the game. For this reason, an increase in load has been expected in order to execute a complicated drawing process.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems and perform more diverse effects, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display newly, instead of adding the image, each image display unit constituting the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is dynamically changed during drawing. Realize complex presentation by adding new drawing.

  Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is displayed in units of effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for display by the effect block. Incorporate Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When the image is changed, the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the program function that is called back is not drawn on the frame buffer, but is allocated on the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage means). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, or replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for an image in which a plurality of effects are superimposed, or a new image can be changed. Addition can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a configuration in which an image drawn on each layer is stored in an off-screen buffer, and the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted and written to the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 452 is a diagram for explaining the procedure of converting the image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing it in the frame buffer in this embodiment.

  As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers different from the frame buffers are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Then, image conversion is performed in an image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is enabled by combining an image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and an image drawn on the frame buffer.

  More specifically, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when the display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. A callback function is called by a callback based on the effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 452, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element in the background layer, within the function called back based on the effect SW, a display list command for enlarging each effect element in the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A. Thus, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW at the drawing timing of each effect element in the symbol layer. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before starting drawing of the notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when drawing of all the effect elements related to the notice layer is finished, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer is issued in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all effect elements of the reserved layer are written into the frame buffer, and a one-frame liquid crystal drawing screen for displaying this time is created.

  By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on the basis of each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In addition, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is an image conversion target. Furthermore, at the timing of creating a display list command for drawing an image to be converted, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the notice lottery or the result of interactive operation by the user's external input. It is possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on animation data stored on the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a to draw at the time of game effect execution. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command for one screen is created, the external request DMA (transfer means) The contents of the buffer were sent to VDP using.

  However, at present, the production specifications are complicated and the processing load increases, so that the processing time for the notice lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer composition processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as production is executed at a predetermined cycle, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle when the processing with high load as described above is executed repeatedly. .

  If the process cannot be completed within the cycle exceptionally, the game control by the main control device and the effect control by the peripheral control device are synchronized based on the processing cycle. There is a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device will deviate, and the interest of the game will be significantly reduced.

  For this reason, it has been necessary to reduce the processing time of the peripheral control process by reducing the time required for a process with a high load in the peripheral control process such as an effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing time for generating a native display list command that can be processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a by analyzing the animation data on the CGROM described above, which is relatively heavy load in the peripheral control processing, in particular, the above-described animation data. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control process will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a will be described. FIG. 453 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information on the display list command to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a (parameter value corresponding to the VDP register number and register number). Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the built-in sound source VDP 1540a. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when a callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Thus, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  When receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the top, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a plurality of VDPs of different manufacturers are mounted on a single gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to each manufacturer's VDP. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is applied. FIG. 454 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in this embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, the display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal effect scheduler data as in the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is converted into the converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and replaces effects and symbols. The effect replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 439 described above, and the symbol replacement method is the same as the description using FIG. 439 described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for resuming display list analysis, generates a transfer resume request for the external request DMA, and resumes analysis of the display list command.

  By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) is used without performing any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all effects other than the replacement. First, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

  With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a that accompanies the image display, and the image processing can be speeded up. Further, since the use area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

  The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the less frequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing speed of the display list command that is frequently used is shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. Also, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and different image processing depending on the model and version is performed according to the conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (production control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used by a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, each having a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. . The floating-point types are a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and have a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

  The processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine is a byte capable of reading and writing data stored in all addresses in units of 1 byte in the memory (ROM, RAM), regardless of whether the processor is a CISC processor or a RISC processor. It has become a machine. The address for reading / writing a plurality of bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the data is always read from a byte boundary, and when accessed so as to cross the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. I'll be relaxed.

  However, in current game machine development, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. For this reason, an alignment violation occurs during program execution, and the execution speed of the program may decrease. In the peripheral control of a gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all processing within a predetermined processing cycle, and thus a decrease in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the effects of the gaming machine are configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. Data structure is adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each piece of information is stored when data corresponding to the data structure is stored in a memory. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the storage area. As a result, the data access start position by the processor is adjusted, and the information is arranged so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, so that an alignment violation does not occur and a decrease in the program execution speed is prevented. Can do. Adjusting the alignment of the data structure on all ROMs and RAMs is an enormous amount of work. Therefore, the lottery process at the start of fluctuation that increases the load on the processor and increases the processing time. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the liquid crystal drawing, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the processing described above.

[31. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols]
By the way, in recent years, a variety of effects have been required in order to enhance the interest of the game, so that the contents of the effects on the effect display device are complicated and the contents of the drawing are diversified. In the embodiment described so far, it is configured to display only one set of identification symbols for informing the result of variation display, and a relatively wide variety of effects are added to the variation display of the set of identification symbols. Although there was a player group who did not like a wide variety of performances among players, there was a challenge to develop gaming machines that meet a wide range of player needs, There is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced in a configuration in which a wide variety of performances appear frequently. Therefore, for the purpose of providing gaming machines that meet a wide range of player needs, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in a unique manner will be described below. Specifically, a plurality of display areas for performing the variable display of identification symbols on the effect display device 1600 are assigned to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player needs among different player needs In order to cope with this, it is assumed that the variable display of a different set of identification symbols is simultaneously advanced. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification symbol, but is displayed in different effects such as the variation mode of the identification symbol.

[31-1. Identification pattern display area]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the above-mentioned identification symbols when variably displaying the above-mentioned plural identification symbols under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in the present embodiment. (A) is a configuration example having an identification symbol display area A and a display region B on one display screen in the effect display device 1600, and (B) is an identification symbol on each display screen when there are two display screens. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), a display area A and a display area B for identification symbols are provided on one screen. The display area A is assigned to the upper part of the screen and the display area B is assigned to the lower part of the screen. A first identification symbol 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas having the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy boundary extending in the central lateral direction. Has been. The first identification symbol 8010 is composed of a three-digit symbol of a first left symbol 8010a, a first middle symbol 8010b, and a first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification symbol 8020 is based on the three-digit symbols of the second left symbol 8020a, the second middle symbol 8020b, and the second right symbol 8020c in accordance with the three-digit symbol of the first identification symbol 8010. Composed. The display areas A and B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

  For the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the variable display starts simultaneously and stops simultaneously. The stop timing of individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, but the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. Further, the final stop symbols are the same stop symbol combination (lottery result) so as not to misidentify or give a sense of discomfort even if any identification symbol is recognized by the player. For example, when the winning result is derived as the result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are all the same symbol combination (for example, “777”) and are synchronized with the second symbol. All of the individual identification symbols of the identification symbol 8020 are also the same symbol combination (such as “777” equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). Further, when a result of losing no reach is derived as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 do not constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same) (for example, “135” "224" etc.) and in synchronism with it, each identification symbol of the second identification symbol 8020 is also equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010 which does not constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). "135", "224", etc.). In addition, when the result of losing with reach is derived as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 constitute a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), but not all are identical. In combination with a combination (for example, “131”, “242”, etc.), the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 are not in a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). ("135", "224", etc.) equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010).

  It should be noted that the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode that allows the player to recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations. For example, one display area is configured to display a combination of symbols in a symbol display mode consisting of “Kanji numerals” (such as “123”), while the other display area is composed of “alphanumeric characters” or the like. You may make it comprise so that a symbol combination may be displayed by a display mode ("123" etc.). Moreover, you may comprise so that a symbol combination may be displayed by the same kind symbol display mode (for example, "123" is displayed also in any display region) in both display areas. Further, when displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. In this embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is three digits. However, if the symbol combination equivalent to the finally derived symbol combination can be shown to the player, For example, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is both composed of two digits, or the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is both four. It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, in the first identification symbol 8010, it is sufficient that the second identification symbol 8020 has the same number of digits as the second identification symbol 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is finally determined. In the variable display process of one identification symbol 8010, it may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from the final number of digits.

  In the present embodiment, the same kind of symbol display mode (alphanumeric numeric symbols in this embodiment) is adopted in the display areas of both the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, but each identification symbol The aspect of the additional decoration display added to each symbol is different. Specifically, in the first identification symbol 8010, an additional decoration display is made for each identification symbol, impacts each identification symbol itself, and various effects are also executed by the additional decoration display ( High decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 is not subjected to the additional decoration display like the first identification symbol 8010 or at least a simple additional decoration display than the first identification symbol 8010 (low). Decorative dynamic display).

  Furthermore, the types of symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 and the types of symbols constituting the second identification symbol 8020 do not necessarily match exactly or correspond exactly one to one. For example, according to the production mode, the first identification symbol 8010 has a numeric symbol (0 to 9) and a character symbol (for example, a symbol imitating an airplane) as symbols that are variably displayed in each identification symbol. The second symbol may be only a numerical symbol (0 to 9). Further, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 stops at the character symbol, the symbol is re-variable and the final stop symbol is controlled to be a numeric symbol. Character designs may contain special gaming elements that are different from numeric designs, and numeric designs are directly linked to the final lottery results, while character designs are not the final lottery results. It can be positioned as being used specifically for production in the process of variable display.

  In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation) (high decoration dynamic display). For example, in the variation display of the identification symbol, the high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbol is switched to the low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the content of the identification symbol at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing a callback based on the effect SW for replacement of the identification symbol, the identification symbol replacement table based on the stop symbol or the symbol stop timing at the switching timing of the identification symbol In addition, the identification symbol is replaced using the reel index replacement work number table, the identification symbol is finely decorated until just before stopping, and the player who pays attention to the first identification symbol 8010 is given interest until just before stopping. It is said.

  The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or part of the identification symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 depending on the game state, the production mode, or the type of variation pattern of the special symbol. The first identification symbol 8010 is variously changed in the progress of the game depending on the game state, the production mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol string data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A is provided (for example, symbol string data of 0 to 9, symbol string data of zero to nine), and the gaming state At the time of switching, at the time of effect mode switching, or at the time of selecting a special symbol variation pattern, a symbol string data selection effect SW (for example, symbols corresponding to symbol string data of 0 to 9) individually corresponding to the plurality of symbol string data types The column data selection effect SW1, the symbol string data selection effect SW2 corresponding to the symbol sequence data of zero to nine are set to ON, and the other effect SWs are set to OFF, so that the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed. The symbol string data can be changed in various ways, and various effects can be executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the first identification symbol 8010, the final digit is determined in the variation display process on the assumption that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 in the final determination. You may comprise so that it may change temporarily to the number of digits different from a number. For example, although it will eventually be 3 digits, it should be displayed in 2 digits only for a specific period during the variable display (for example, reach reach period to determine whether to reach after the left symbol stops) Etc. can be illustrated. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, for example, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, etc. As the effect SW to be defined, the digit data selection effect SW corresponding to the digit data (for example, the digit data selection effect SW corresponding to the 3-digit data, the digit data corresponding to the 1-digit data) When displaying two digits using the selection effect SW2 or the like), various digit effects can be executed by setting the digit data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting other effect SW to OFF. .

  In the first identification symbol 8010, not only the display pattern is changed by changing the identification symbol itself, but also an effect using the additional decoration display made on the identification symbol as described above is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 455 (A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010, an advantageous lottery result (winning etc.) can be obtained in the running variation display. It may be suggested that the possibility of being derived is high. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decorations 8011 or the type of operation (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of the number of additional decorations 8011 from 1 to 3 to 5). The expectation level is increased in the order of white → blue → red in the order of the color of the additional decoration 8011 or the motion of the additional decoration 8011 is increased in the order of stationary → vibration action → rotation action. ) In addition, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification symbol 8010c, the player can pay more attention to the effect in the first identification symbol 8010, and more clearly suggest that the expectation has increased. Also good. Furthermore, a different additional decoration may be applied to each identification symbol, and an expectation degree for deriving an advantageous lottery result from any of the first identification symbols 8010 may be notified.

  As another example, effect display control is performed in which a flame effect image (white, blue, red) which is an additional decoration display different from the above-described star-shaped additional decoration 8011 is superimposed on each of the symbols included in the first identification pattern 8010. It is also possible to execute such an effect that the flame color is changed according to the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red). As described above, when a plurality of additional decoration displays for the first identification symbol 8010 are provided, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery to display any additional decoration display based on the winning lottery result. Reflecting the determination result, the determination may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like.

  In the display area A, the additional decoration display added to the first identification symbol 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer displaying the identification symbol. As a result, the display control of the identification symbol can be made common regardless of the presence or type of the additional decoration display. In addition, by drawing the identification symbol and the additional decoration display on separate layers, it is possible to specify whether the additional decoration display is displayed on the front side or the rear side of the identification symbol. If it is done, it can be automatically controlled at the time of production. Further, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, a more effective effect can be realized without complicating the effect control.

  Furthermore, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in a reach state where the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, an effect of displaying a character according to the degree of expectation (the possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the character type, action, etc.) A suggested symbol effect) may be executed.

  In addition, the background display of the display area A may be changed according to the expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (design effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result is derived depending on the type of background display). Further, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect of changing only the background display color may be executed (for example, expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red).

  As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn, so that the front side of the identification symbol is displayed. It is possible to specify whether to display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side and the background display is on the back side). Can be controlled automatically. Thereby, the control for performing the variable display of the identification symbol can be made independent of the character effect display mode, the presence / absence of the background display change, and the type of the background display.

  As other effects in the display area A, the operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front side layer of the first identification symbol 8010 independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the player operates the operation unit. An operation effect according to the mode is executed (design effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result is derived from the operation-corresponding image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after displaying the button operation instruction image, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation and the operation effect for performing a specific action is executed.

  Furthermore, in the display area A, an effect linked to the movable body provided in the game board 5a may be executed (an effect that suggests the possibility of an advantageous lottery result being derived by the movable body operation). For example, the movable body arranged at the upper part of the game area 5a is moved to a position where the player's line of sight is blocked by moving a part or all of the first identification symbol 8010 to indicate that the expectation is high. Also good.

  Next, the display area B will be described. The second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B receives the variation start command and starts the variation display of the identification symbol. After the variation stop command is received or after the variation time has elapsed, the variation display of the identification symbol is displayed. End and stop at the specified stop symbol. While the identification symbol is variably displayed, it is a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the identification symbol, and a simple presentation mode is displayed in which only the stop symbol is displayed after the lapse of the variation time (low Decorative dynamic display).

  In the display area B, an additional decoration display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variation display of the identification symbol, or an operation effect is performed. There is no. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, control for changing the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed. Further, even if the first identification symbol 8010 performs temporary stop and re-variation, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 continues.

  Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification symbol 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as symbol replacement is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. The effect control program only executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in sequence, so even with such simple scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of highly decorative dynamic display is executed. The execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is only skipped.

  If the display mode is not changed during the variable display, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed. For example, an aspect of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the gaming state or effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the aspect corresponding to the start of variation may be selected.

  As for the background display, a background display for the display area B (background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the gaming state and the effect mode may be prepared. In order to simplify the control surface, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged so that the background display common to the display area A is performed. May be.

  Thus, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is executed after the start of variation, based on the effect SW for replacement of the identification symbol, Various effects by display etc. are not performed, but it is a simple one specialized in waiting for which symbol combination to stop display. For this reason, in the display area B, the player does not feel irritated by the type of various effects and the like, but the game progresses with a game characteristic in which he / she can watch and stop with any symbol combination.

  In addition, in the display area B, an additional decoration display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variation display of the identification symbol, or an operation effect is executed. This is not necessary, and it is only necessary to set the background display to be transparent. Therefore, various layer settings such as the first identification symbol 8010 (display area A) are not required.

  In addition, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the upper left portion of the screen shown in FIG. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates that the special symbol changes from the start to the stop, and during the special symbol change display, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed. While the variable display is in progress, a special symbol variation explicit display indicating that the special symbol variation display is in progress, and when the special symbol variation stops or stops, the first identification symbol While the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped and displayed in 8010, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the special symbol variation explicit display is performed in the fourth symbol 8030 until the display of the variation display result is completed. While the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is rotated 90 degrees at a predetermined interval and displayed with vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state of being filled with a predetermined color. The fourth symbol 8030 is drawn on a higher layer independent of the layer for drawing in the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the fourth symbol 8030 in the present embodiment is displayed so that it can be recognized from the outside under all situations including a customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display region A, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this form, and the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display region B. Alternatively, control corresponding to the special symbol variation explicit display and the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 may be performed by a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 indicate to the player what kind of lottery results have been included, including the details (hit, no reach, no reach, etc.). In contrast to the role of communication, the 4th symbol is the game status (whether the special symbol is being changed, being stopped, or waiting for customers). It plays the role of communicating to the designer and the gaming machine manager (or player). In other words, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, but have a role that cannot be fulfilled by the fourth symbol in terms of transmitting details of the lottery result to the player. Yes. Although details will be described later, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be temporarily erased or concealed during the special symbol variation display or the customer waiting state. On the other hand, the 4th symbol may be temporarily erased or concealed while the special symbol is being displayed or in the waiting state in view of constantly transmitting the game status to the player. The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have a role that cannot be fulfilled.

  In addition, a hold storage display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the reserved storage display of the first special symbol is drawn at the lower left portion of the screen, and the reserved storage display of the second special symbol is drawn at the lower right portion of the screen. In FIG. 455 (A), the hold storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem if it does not overlap with the identification symbol. Note that the hold storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer as described above, and is arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B. As with the fourth pattern 8030, the form is not necessarily limited to this, and the hold storage display 8040 may be replaced with a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. As a result, it is possible to execute a rendering effect independently for each display area, a highly decorative dynamic display with a high effect effect executed in the display area A, and a low decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B. Can be executed in any combination. Since the combination of the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, it is not necessary to change the effect control program itself, and the effect configuration can be easily created and changed. .

  Next, an example in which the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on each display screen in the case of having two display screens will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 455 (B), a display area is allocated to each physically different display device, and the display area A and the display area B are configured by display devices of the same size. In addition, about the structure which has a common function with the example shown to (A), the same code | symbol is provided and description is abbreviate | omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, the display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and the display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, a first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and a fourth symbol 8030 and a reserved storage display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in the display area B, the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed.

  Instead of the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area for displaying the fourth symbol 8030 and the reserved storage display 8040 may be different from the display area A. Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the reserved storage display 8040 may be assigned to the display area B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is drawn on the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Further, a preview image 8050 is displayed that suggests that there is a high possibility that an advantageous lottery result will be derived in the fluctuation.

  Further, in the second identification symbol 8020, all the identification symbols are in a high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in a reach state, and a notice effect such as the display of the notice image 8050 is executed. Only the low decorative dynamic display 8020 is continued.

[31-2. Display area emphasis mode]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbols is performed in different display modes in the display area A and the display area B. In the following, either one is performed by performing a selection operation by a player (operating a switching operation unit (not shown)) while the variable display of the identification symbols displayed in each display area is performed in parallel. The control to display the variable display being executed in the display area in a more emphasized manner than the other display area will be described (emphasis mode, large setting).

  FIG. 456 is a diagram for explaining an emphasis mode of the display area for executing the variation display of the identification symbol in the present embodiment. FIG. 456A shows the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size). A normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasized pattern A for displaying the display area A in an emphasized manner, and (C) is an emphasized pattern B for displaying the display area B in an emphasized manner. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is reduced to a wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is in a state that can be recognized by the player as the game progresses. Yes. Note that the display area to be highlighted can be switched by operating a predetermined switching operation section (such as a switching button), and even if the special symbol is not variably displayed, the variation of the special symbol Switching is possible even during display.

  The player can sequentially switch (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasized pattern A, and (C) the emphasized pattern B by operating the switching operation unit. As a switching mode, each time the player operates the switching operation unit, (A) the normal pattern, (B) the emphasized pattern A, and (C) the emphasized pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order. However, the display pattern desired by the player may be selected immediately. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select the desired display pattern, for example, the display pattern of the switching destination is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes for the switching operation unit by the player, According to the operation mode with respect to the switching operation unit, the display mode desired by the player is immediately switched to. Specifically, the normal pattern is set as the display pattern of the switching destination in response to the first operation (for example, long press for 5 seconds or more) on the switching operation unit, while the second operation (for example, less than 2 seconds) is performed on the switching operation unit. In response to a third operation (for example, a long press of 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) for the switching operation unit, the switching destination display pattern is set correspondingly to the switching pattern. The pattern is set to emphasized pattern B. For example, by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. The symbol variation due to will proceed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456 (C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to the high decorative dynamic display is made, and in that, an “unusual effect” is performed. When the player recognizes that it is, the second operation is performed on the switching operation unit, so that the player can immediately change to the emphasis pattern A with the player's intention. An example of the “unusual effect” is a notice effect in which the character design (airplane) temporarily stops at the medium identification design 8010b, and when the character design can be confirmed in the display area A displayed on the wipe. By performing the second operation of the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern A) of the display area A. When the process shifts to the emphasis pattern A, a character effect or an accessory action that is not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 456 (C) → (B)).

  Further, even when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is reduced (wiped) and displayed, an operation effect that requires player operation may be executed in the display area A. . When the display area A is displayed in a reduced size (wipe), it is considered that the operation has been performed after a specified time from the start of the operation effect even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. The operation effect may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is displayed in a reduced size (wipe), an effect of driving the accessory corresponding to the display area A, for example, an identification symbol is temporarily displayed. The production that is shielded and can be visually recognized at a predetermined timing is suppressed (cancelled) because it is necessary to change the operation mode of the accessory and the control becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456 (B), when the mode of emphasizing the display area A (emphasis pattern A) is selected, the display area B displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner is a low-decoration dynamic display and changes in symbols. Therefore, the “unusual production” as described above is not performed. For this reason, when the emphasis pattern A is selected, the background effect of the display area B is made transparent, or the effect of the display area A is executed together with the background of the display area B. You may make it improve. Even if the display area B is wiped, the visibility of the identification symbol in the display area B needs to be maintained. Therefore, the layer for drawing the identification symbol in the display area B is an image related to the display area A. It is preferable to set the layer higher than the displayed layer.

  In the present embodiment, the effect sound is output corresponding to the variation display of the identification symbol in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is displayed in a variable manner with various effects, an effect sound effect based on the effect mode, game state, change pattern, etc. is output in accordance with these effects. Is done. Here, the fluctuation display of the identification symbol in the display area A and the sound (BGM, effect sound effect) output in accordance with the effect to be executed are managed as one AUTO group, and sound control by the automatic channel method is performed. Thereby, even if the effects in the display area A are executed in duplicate, the upper limit of the channel to be used is limited, so that it is possible to suppress resource consumption due to the execution of the effects of the gaming machine. Further, since it becomes possible to automatically output a sound with a high priority, it is possible to suppress complication of production control.

  On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is subjected to variable display in a high-speed display mode, and the output effect sound is also simple (only variable BGM and stop sound). Therefore, when the display area A and the display area B are both normal patterns that are not reduced (wipe) displayed (FIG. 456 (A)), the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area B is not output, or The control is performed in such a manner that the output sound effect corresponding to the display area B is suppressed by reducing the output sound. When one display area is displayed in an emphasized pattern, only the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner Is not output, or the output sound is reduced, for example, so that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area displayed in a reduced (wipe) manner is suppressed.

  In the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed (the start-up memory is not held), one display area is not reduced (wiped) as shown in FIGS. 456 (B) and (C). Each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. This is because the significance of emphasizing one of the display areas in a state in which the display of the identification symbol is not performed is small, and the customer display screen is designed on the premise of full screen display.

  Further, when the power is turned off while the special symbols are being displayed, and then the power is turned on, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, the highlight pattern A for highlighting the display area A may be used, or a normal pattern may be used. At this time, the symbol combination to be displayed is set to the symbol combination for the initial state (for example, “123”) regardless of the result of the previous change. When the power is turned off and the power is turned on after the symbol has not fluctuated, the wipe pattern is not displayed until the symbol variation starts (without the emphasis patterns A and B). The identification symbol is displayed. This is because, as described above, it is not meaningful to highlight one display area in a state where the symbols are not variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, each display area is configured by different layers. In each display area, an area to be drawn differs depending on whether the display area is drawn in an emphasized manner or a reduced display. Specifically, the size of each layer is the same as the size of the entire display screen, and drawing is performed in a designated display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw with a common means even if the sizes of the areas are different. Therefore, if it is displayed in the default size (normal pattern), enlarged (in emphasized form), reduced (wipe), or in any case, the display area is the same Even if the actual size is different, drawing can be performed by a common means (program or data).

  Accordingly, only when a specific object (for example, a decoration image) is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, only an emphasis mode), a new object may be drawn. For example, when a decoration image is added to an identification symbol, a layer for drawing a decoration image may be newly prepared and combined with a layer for drawing the identification symbol. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer for drawing the decoration image higher than the priority of the layer for drawing the identification symbol, the decoration image can be arranged on the front side of the identification symbol when the layers are combined. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a common program or data is used for an object (for example, an identification symbol) displayed in the same image regardless of whether it is displayed in an emphasized manner or reduced. On the other hand, when displaying a decorative image superimposed on an identification symbol, prepare a layer with a higher priority than the identification symbol, draw the decorative image on the layer, and place it on the front side of the identification symbol layer. The emphasis mode is drawn by arranging them. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare programs and data separately for each display mode for objects with common display contents in each display mode, such as identification symbols, and it is possible to use common programs and data. What is necessary is just to prepare the minimum program and data used as a difference. By comprising in this way, the increase in image data accompanying diversification of production contents can be suppressed, the production control can be prevented from becoming complicated, and the increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, a variation display mode of the identification symbol from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop will be described. FIG. 457 is a diagram for explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration in which the display variation of the identification symbol in the present embodiment is performed in the display region A and the display region B, and the partial variation of the identification symbol is stopped in the display region A. An example in which the variation of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area B in conjunction with the above case. FIG. 458 is a diagram for explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration in which the display of the identification symbol according to the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B. When the fluctuation is stopped regardless of the display mode of the display area A. The example which displays all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each screen shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Hereinafter, each screen will be described.

  (A) shows a state immediately after the symbol variation display is finished in the state where the start memory number is three. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are both stopped and displayed in a state where the identification symbol is “125”.

  (B) is a state in which start memory is digested (start memory number 3 → 2), and symbol variation display is started. The first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B are each displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the symbol is started, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is changed from being filled to a vertical stripe and rotated.

  (C) has shown the state which the left identification symbol 8010a of the 1st identification symbol 8010 stopped. In FIG. 457 (C), when the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458 (C), even if the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is continuously displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable display stops after the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode. On the other hand, when the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped, the display is stopped without shifting to the low-speed display mode. This is because the change display of the identification symbol by the display area B is intended to notify the player that the change is changing rather than enhancing the effect, and to clearly display the stop symbol.

  (D) has shown the state which the right identification symbol 8010c of the 1st identification symbol 8010 stopped further from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, and reach is reached. In the display area A, the reach effect corresponding to the change pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the change display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing the special effect.

  (E) shows a state in which the medium identification symbol 8010b of the first identification symbol 8010 stops (temporarily stops) at the character (airplane) symbol in the reach state. Here, the airplane symbol is a symbol indicating that the variation display is resumed, and indicates execution of so-called pseudo continuous variation. Therefore, even if the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, the variation display of the fourth symbol 8030 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 457 (E), the middle identification symbol 8020b of the second identification symbol 8020 is The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the state where the first identification symbol 8010 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time is continued, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start to change again as shown in (F). In the example shown in FIG. 458, the variable display by the high-speed display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued regardless of the display mode such as the re-change of the first identification symbol 8010.

  (G) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped after the first change of the first identification symbol 8010 is started. At this time, the decoration 8011 is drawn over the left identification symbol 8010a, and it is notified that there is a high possibility (expectation) that an advantageous lottery result can be obtained in the fluctuation. For the second identification symbol 8020, the effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed. In FIG. 457 (G), the left identification symbol of the second identification symbol 8020 is a symbol corresponding to the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol 8020a is stopped, and in FIG. 458 (G), the variable display by the high-speed display mode is continued.

  (H) has shown the state which the right identification symbol 8010c of the 1st identification symbol 8010 stopped further from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol (“5”) and reach a reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. Thereafter, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol ("5") as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c, and when the stop symbol is confirmed, the second identification symbol 8020 is also the first identification symbol 8020b. It stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and the big hit effect is executed.

  When the identification symbol is displayed by the high decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification symbol is displayed by the low decorative dynamic display, it is possible to avoid a gorgeous effect and maximize the expectation for the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, a display area A in which the identification symbol is variably displayed with high decoration dynamic display and a display area B in which the identification symbol is variably displayed with low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one or both are selected. By executing the variable display according to the display mode in parallel, the player can play the game in a mode that suits his / her preference.

  Further, since the player can freely switch between the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display during the variable display, for example, a display in which an effect of notifying the expectation is executed when a reach occurs. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, it is possible to play a game according to the situation.

  In the above-described embodiment, the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game progresses in a manner that the player can visually recognize, but as follows. May be. For example, the player displays the display on the other side so that the player can view only the display on the one side desired by the player while performing the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display in parallel. A movable body or the like (one-side concealing means) having a function of concealing so as not to be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize may be provided, and the display on the other side may be hidden by such a movable body. For example, the covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area A in FIG. 455A and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A is less than the covering position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easy to visually recognize The upper covering movable body that can move to the retracted position (the position above the display area A), the covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area B in FIG. 455A, and the display area rather than the covering position There is a region in which the movable body overlaps with B, and a lower covering movable body that can move to a retreat position (a position below the display area B) that makes it easy to visually recognize the effect display performed in the display area B is provided. When the covering condition A for hiding the area A is satisfied (a first specific operation or the like by the player on the switching operation unit), the covering condition B for moving the upper covering movable body to the covering position and hiding the display area B is satisfied. (Second specific operation on the switch operation section by the player, etc.) by, like to move the undercoat movable body covering position can be exemplified. Thereby, for example, it is possible to concentrate on the display on one side desired by the player and advance the game without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high decoration dynamic display and the low decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel in the progress of the game. However, the demonstration display by the effect display device 1600 is performed in the customer waiting state. There is no need to execute high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display in parallel during the current period, for example, while leaving only high-decoration dynamic display capable of active external appeal. The decorative dynamic display may be deleted. For example, as shown in FIG. 456 (A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progress in the normal pattern in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard mode (specified size) is completed, and the customer waits after a predetermined time. When shifting to the state, the display area B can be erased while leaving the display area A, the display area B can be erased, and the display area A can be enlarged to a large area. When a new start condition is satisfied while waiting for a customer, the display of the display area B, which is a low decorative dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Applying a production block to a production that continues over multiple variations]
Then, the example which applies an effect block with respect to the effect which continues over several fluctuations is demonstrated. In the example described above, the period from the start to stop of the symbol change is divided into predetermined periods, and the effect blocks corresponding to each period are defined. Then, by combining these effect blocks, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control while realizing various effects. Moreover, although the example which made it possible to define the production | generation block exceeding the period prescribed | regulated beforehand was also demonstrated, it is limited to the production | generation block which is settled in one fluctuation | variation, and with respect to the production | generation performed over multiple fluctuation | variations It was insufficient to apply the production block.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example in which the effect block is applied to a series of effects executed over a plurality of variations will be described. Here, as a series of effects executed over a plurality of variations, a timer effect and background effect that are executed as a pre-reading effect (pre-notification effect) at the time of winning a start, a mini character effect that is executed when switching between effect modes, and continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied Will be described.

[32-1. Control of pre-reading effect (advance notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect that are executed as the pre-reading effects at the time of winning the start, a supplementary explanation will be given for the control of the pre-reading effects.

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first start opening passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 136) in accordance with the start winning start opening. Random values are extracted (acquired) as storage (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetch process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetch process (S5255), based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random value, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 A memory pre-reading effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter, “special drawing pre-reading effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure prefetch effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). The received command is analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95).

  When the special figure prefetch effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetch effect control process in the received command analysis process. In the pre-reading effect control process, a process for executing the normal pre-reading effect for changing the start memory display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. Note that the pre-reading effect control process sets a flag indicating that the pre-reading effect command has been received in the received command analysis process, and is called in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95). Good.

  In the process for executing the normal prefetching effect that changes the start memory display, a lottery is performed based on the special drawing prefetch effect command, and the changed start memory display mode is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when shifting to the reach state in the special symbol variation display corresponding to the special figure prefetch effect command. For example, the start memory display mode is changed in color or shape. Then, a normal prefetch effect setting process for changing the mode of the start memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, and settings are made to output sound effects at the timing of the change, turn on the lamp, and move the accessory. . Processing for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a pre-suggested effect indicating that the execution time of the suggested effect suggesting the lottery result and the hit possibility for a specific start memory is approaching by a countdown display. There are two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the pre-read effects described above, and the variable display for a specific start memory is started before the variable display for the specific start memory is started. Different from the timer effect (hereinafter referred to as prefetch timer effect) that counts down the period until the predetermined timing of the time and the prefetch effect described above, it is controlled on the basis of the variation pattern and has a specific start memory. A timer effect (hereinafter referred to as an in-variable timer effect) that counts down the period from the predetermined timing after the start of the change display to the time until another timing of the change display for this specific start-up memory is counted down. ,have. In other words, both the pre-read timer effect and the in-variation timer effect are advance notification effects in which the symbol variation with respect to a specific start-up memory is not completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen in the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. However, the pre-read timer effect is different from the in-variable timer effect because the pre-read timer effect is a countdown display on the display screen over a plurality of symbol variations. In addition, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the pre-read timer effect and the in-variation timer effect may be set to various values. However, the average value of the initial values used in the pre-read timer effect may vary depending on multiple variations. This is a relatively larger value than the average of the initial values used in the in-variation timer effect. In the present embodiment, since characteristic elements are included in the prefetch timer effect, the prefetch timer effect will be described in detail below.

  In the process for executing the prefetch timer effect, it is first determined whether or not to execute the prefetch timer effect. Since the prefetch timer effect is a prefetch effect that can be executed across multiple variations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the prefetch timer effect until the start of the variation display corresponding to the received special figure prefetch effect command. It is determined whether a sufficient time is secured. That is, it is determined whether or not the total variation time of all the start-up memories held until the variation is started is equal to or longer than a specific time (40 seconds or more in this embodiment). Further, the contents of the effect are determined along with whether or not the pre-read timer effect can be executed, based on the success of the start memory for the effect execution target and the variation pattern of the start memory. Further, the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect is determined at the time of determining the effect contents. As the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect, for example, at the start of fluctuation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the prefetch effect target, or before the start memory of the prefetch effect target Either at the time when the reach of the variation corresponding to the stored start memory is started, or at the end of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory for the pre-reading effect is set.

  The prefetch timer effect is composed of a timer count effect that performs a countdown display and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer count effect and the timer end effect are executed continuously. In addition, the execution time of the timer count effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect varies depending on the length of the timer count effect, but is changing with respect to the start-up memory that is the target of prefetching, and before or after the reach It will be a variety of timings.

  When execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer count effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the variation corresponding to the start memory for the pre-read effect. For example, in this embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total variation time of the start memory held before the start memory for the prefetch effect, and the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect is set. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the determined time is set as the execution time of the timer count effect (the initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the contents of the effect executed as the timer count effect (effect pattern during countdown) are set. As an effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the light emission mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific pattern provided on the game board 5 is used. Examples include pattern 2 for changing the emission color of the lamp with the progress of the countdown display, pattern 3 for operating a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 with the progress of the countdown display, etc. This corresponds to the expected level of variation of the production target, and is set by lottery. For example, pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3 is set in such a way that the expectation increases, pattern 1 is more easily selected than the hit case, and pattern 2 is not the hit case. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is more easily selected in the case of hit than in the case of loss.

  After setting the content of the effect executed as the timer count effect (the effect pattern during the countdown), the content of the timer end effect (the effect pattern after the countdown) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the character “End !!” is superimposed on the identification symbol in the color according to the expectation (for example, the expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red) on the display screen. Display for a predetermined time and make sure the player knows that the time is up. As the post-countdown effect pattern, for example, a pattern 1 in which the character color of “END !!” is black, a pattern 2 in which the character color of “END !!!!” is blue, or a character color of “END !!” The pattern 3 etc. which are red can be illustrated. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the expected degree of change of the pre-reading production target, and are set by lottery. For example, pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3 is set so that the expectation level increases, pattern 1 is more likely to be selected than the hit case, and pattern 2 is not the hit case. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is more easily selected in the case of hit than in the case of loss. In addition, the post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also a character may be decorated or a character may be displayed. Different expectations may be accommodated.

  As described above, after performing various settings related to the prefetch timer effect, the prefetch timer effect is executed (started) on the basis that a predetermined start condition (arrival of the start time of the prefetch timer effect) is satisfied. As described above, the prefetch timer effect is configured by the timer count effect and the timer end effect, and the effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These effect blocks are defined in advance, and when execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined, the timer count effect effect block and the timer end effect effect block are selected based on the execution time or expectation level of the timer count effect. The timer counting effect block and the timer end effect block may be selected individually, or the timer counting effect block and the timer end effect block are managed as a set and selected for each set. It may be. When the timer count effect block and the timer end effect block are selected, the timer count effect block is executed, and after the effect block ends, the timer end effect block is executed.

  In the effect block of the timer count effect, only the effect contents are defined, and the execution time can be set variably. As a result, it is not necessary to redundantly hold effect blocks having the same contents that differ only in execution time, and an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of effect contents can be suppressed. The look-ahead timer effect is not an effect in which the execution timing and end timing are strictly determined as in the effect block corresponding to the above-described variation time, but based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the calculated performance execution time. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area may be read out at the start of the timer count effect effect block.

  When the execution time of the timer count effect can be covered, an effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer count effect. Since the execution time of the timer counting effect only needs to be within a predetermined range, it may be limited to a realistic number of effect blocks even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holds and the variation pattern (variation time). is there. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the prefetch timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning prize until the change of the prefetch effect target is started as a lower limit, and the change time of the change is added to this time, Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect can be specified. Since at least one production block having an execution time included in this range only needs to exist, there is a possibility that a minimum number of production blocks may be prepared. Alternatively, only the production blocks with high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the production blocks with low execution frequency may be controlled as production blocks whose variable time can be variably set.

  FIG. 459 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect block of the prefetch timer effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram illustrating an execution example of the prefetch timer effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the prefetch timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG.

  FIG. 459 and FIG. 460 show an example in which a prefetch timer effect is executed across variation 1 and variation 2. Fluctuation 1 is “normal fluctuation” in the first half fluctuation and no reach, and fluctuation 2 is “normal fluctuation” in the first half fluctuation. In addition, since it is as having mentioned above about the case where an effect is performed within each change, description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 460 (A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the reserved number of symbol fluctuations is zero. Note that, as described above, the fluctuation 1 is a normal fluctuation where no reach occurs.

  Furthermore, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the variable display of the left symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a start winning is generated, and the number of symbols to be retained is 1. Whether or not the prefetch timer effect can be executed is determined at the time of winning a start. Here, execution of the prefetch timer effect is determined, and a timer count effect block and a timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460 (B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are variably displayed, and the timer display unit is arranged in the lower right portion of the screen (time t1). In FIG. 460 (B), “START” indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the prefetch timer effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 460 (C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identification symbols are determined (time t2). At this time, the timer count effect is continued, and the remaining time of the prefetch timer effect (timer count effect) is displayed on the timer display unit.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460 (D), variation 2 to be prefetched is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display unit is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (E), when the execution of the timer count effect ends, the remaining time “0.00” is displayed on the timer display unit, and the timer end effect block is executed to start the timer end effect. (Time t3). At this time, as a timer end effect, a message “End!” Indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. In the message displayed here, as described above, the character color is set according to the expected degree of the change. Further, the content of the message may be set according to the expected degree of change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (F), in a state where the timer end effect is continued, a stop occurs at the same symbol “5” of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 460 (G), after the timer end effect is finished, the change of the middle symbol is stopped and all symbols are fixed. After that, as shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the reach occurs, but the timer end effect may be executed after the reach occurs. At this time, since the reach effect and the timer end effect are executed in duplicate, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the reach effect of the change. Thereby, it can prevent that an effect is reduced by performing an effect twice.

  As described above, it is possible to define an effect executed over a plurality of variations by using an effect block, and it is possible to more flexibly operate the common block. By defining an effect executed as a look-ahead effect at the time of start winning such as a look-ahead timer effect as in the common block described above, it is possible to share and simplify the effect control, which improves the efficiency of game machine development. Can be

  In addition, the control of the effect block over a plurality of variations is performed by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks. Thereby, the movement of the accessory and the output of the sound can be performed in accordance with the progress of the pre-read timer effect, and various effects can be realized.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, similarly to the prefetch timer effect, a background effect that is a prior notification effect that suggests a lottery result for a start memory in which symbol variation has not been completed will be described. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol variations, and the background effect is terminated at a predetermined timing during the variation of the prefetch target. In the present embodiment, the background is returned to the original when the reach is developed while the prefetch target is changed.

  FIG. 461 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a background effect effect block according to the present embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram illustrating an execution example of the background effect according to the present embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG.

  FIG. 461 and FIG. 462 show an example in which the background effect is executed across variation 1, variation 2 and variation 3. Variation 1 and Variation 2 develop to reach when the first half variation is “normal variation” and no reach, and Variation 3 leads to reach when the first half variation is “normal variation”. The description of the latter half of change 3 is omitted. As in the case of the look-ahead timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 462 (A), when the variation 1 is started, the variation display of all the identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of symbols to be retained is 1. As described above, variation 1 is a normal variation in which no reach occurs. Thereafter, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the left symbol is stopped. Then, at time t1, a start prize is generated, and the number of symbols to be suspended is two. Here, the execution of the background effect is determined at the time of starting winning, and the background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462 (B), the background is changed from “mountain” to “sea”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 462 (C), the fluctuation 1 is completed, and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 462 (D), the variation 2 is started, and the variation display of the identification symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (E), the fluctuation 2 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by the execution of the background effect is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462 (F), the variation 3 to be prefetched is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (G), the background effect is completed and the background effect ends and the background of the “mountain” returns to the “mountain” background (time t4).

  Similar to the timer effect, the effect block for executing the background effect is selected and executed when a start prize to be prefetched occurs. The timing to end is the timing at which the reach of the pre-read target changes to reach, that is, the remaining time of the change being executed at the time of starting winning, the total change time of the change executed until the start of the pre-read target change, and the pre-read You may calculate and set the total value of the first-half fluctuation | variation time of the fluctuation | variation used as object. Further, the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied without setting the execution time in the effect block for executing the background effect. The termination condition in this case is to detect that the reach state has been developed in the change of the prefetch target. The end condition is determined by a callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, a process for ending the background effect is called.

  As described above, in the background effect in the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect until the reach develops in the variation that is the target of the prefetch effect. The player recognizes that the degree of expectation of the change is high because the background is restored when the reach develops, and the degree of attention with respect to the latter half of the change becomes high.

  On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the start of the target change, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, the background display is switched after the change ends, Resume production. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after the occurrence of reach and the player is discouraged, the expectation can be raised again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, the mini character effect that is started when the effect mode is switched will be described. The mini character effect is an effect in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the effect mode appears. Since the mini character displayed at this time is displayed only during symbol variation, the mini character is not displayed when symbol variation ends when the number of pending variations becomes zero. Note that the hidden mini-character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini character is continuously displayed across a plurality of changes until it shifts to the customer waiting state. Hereinafter, the mini character effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 463 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mini character effect according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463 (A), the game is continued in the “mountain” mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463 (B), when the “mountain” mode is changed to the “sea” mode, a mini character “Kujira” is displayed at the left center of the screen. To change the mode, the mode is switched by operating an operation unit (production button) (not shown).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 463 (C) and FIG. 463 (D), the suspended symbol variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463 (E), when all the suspended symbol fluctuations are completed, the state shifts to a customer waiting state, and the displayed mini character is hidden.

  Since the execution condition of the mini character effect is that the symbol variation continues, even if there is no reserved variation, the mini character effect is continued if the symbol variation is in progress. The execution condition of the mini character effect may be not only when the mode is changed, but also when the start prize is generated after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this way, a mini character appears not only when the mode is changed, but the player can be surprised and the interest can be enhanced. Further, the game state may be added to the determination condition as the execution condition of the mini character effect. For example, in a gaming state in which the probability state is not clearly notified and a high probability state, the current gaming state can be suggested to the player by facilitating the appearance of a mini character.

  Further, the mini-character effect termination condition may be, for example, when the mini-character display continues for a predetermined time, in addition to the case of shifting to the customer waiting state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a premiere feeling to the appearance of a mini character.

  The mini character effect is defined by the effect block, and during execution of the mini character effect, the end condition of the mini character effect is determined by callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, the mini character effect is ended. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the duration of the mini character effect in advance, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not the mini character effect can be continued according to conditions such as the transition to the customer waiting state and the game state. In this way, the end condition of the mini character effect can be dynamically determined by the callback, so there is no need to individually define the effect block corresponding to the execution time of the mini character effect, and the effect block is defined for each character. Management can be facilitated.

  It should be noted that effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect described above may be set in duplicate. In that case, the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect are duplicated. Will be executed. Further, a plurality of effect blocks for effects that can span a plurality of variations may be overlapped at different timings. In that case, different start memories to be pre-read in the pre-read timer effect and the background effect, or the same start memory Even so, it is possible to vary the start timing of each performance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation with respect to the subsequent fluctuation even after the end of one effect, and when the same start-up memory is a prefetch target, the expectation with respect to the fluctuation is further increased. be able to.

  In addition, when an effect sound effect is output by applying an automatic channel method in an effect that spans multiple variations, the effect effect sound that is output in an effect (for example, a reach effect) that is executed with one variation is different. An AUTO group may be assigned. For example, by setting an AUTO group that can assign the effect sound of the effect executed with one change to more channels, the output of the effect sound effect of the change can be prioritized, but it is configured with fewer channels. Sound effects of productions that span multiple fluctuations in the AUTO group (for example, “Start!” Sound that is the start sound of the pre-read timer effect, count sound that is being counted down (such as a titch), and timer end effect sound Can be prevented from occupying many channels for a long period of time.

  Furthermore, you may set a different AUTO group for every kind about the production over a some fluctuation | variation. For example, an AUTO group composed of two channels is defined for the prefetch timer effect, and an AUTO group composed of two channels is defined for the mini character effect. Thereby, even if the prefetch timer effect and the mini character effect are executed in parallel, the effect sound effect of each effect can be output without being disturbed. The effect sound effect in the background effect is output constantly during the effect, as in BGM, or is only output at the time of switching the background. The channel (AUTO group) may be used instead.

  Control of the production effect sound output, the action of the movable accessory and the lighting of the lamp in the production spanning multiple variations such as the pre-read timer production, the background production and the mini character production can be executed according to the liquid crystal display by the production SW. It is. In particular, when the end timing of the production cannot be specified at the start of the production, it is difficult to control the production device at the timing set in advance by the sub production block data, so the production device is linked with the liquid crystal display by the production SW. It is possible to achieve a sense of unity by controlling. Also, when the production effect sound of the production whose production end timing is not specified at the start of the production is output, the sub production block data for outputting the corresponding production effect sound is repeatedly executed during the production, and at the end of the production. The execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the effect at the start of the effect, such as a pre-read timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data for performing the display effect and the sub effect block data for performing the effect with sounds, accessories, etc. Can be executed. As a result, it is possible to independently define a display effect and an effect by sound, an accessory, etc., and an effect can be configured by freely combining various effect block data. For example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal effect block data that defines the display mode of the timer in the timer count effect and sub effect block data that defines the notification sound that is output when the timer count effect is executed can be combined freely. You can diversify your production variations.

[33. Configuration 2 for displaying a plurality of identification symbols]
By the way, in recent game machines, a variety of effects are executed in the effect display device 1600 in order to enhance the interest of the game, but the identification symbols are displayed in order to ensure that the player can visually recognize the variation display of the identification symbols. There is a risk that the production area may be narrowed depending on the area that is provided. In order to prevent this, an area for displaying the identification symbol is temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification symbol may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Furthermore, it has been necessary to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by adapting the aspect in which the identification symbol is reduced or enlarged to the effect content.

  Therefore, a plurality of display areas are provided in the effect display device 1600 for performing variable display of the identification symbol, and a plurality of sets of identification symbol variable display are simultaneously advanced. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (high decoration dynamic display, low decoration dynamic display) in order to respond to the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment, it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the variation display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration pattern of the identification symbol in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. Example of a configuration that displays identification symbols in multiple areas simultaneously]
FIG. 464A is a diagram illustrating an example in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. The display area A occupies an area of about 70% from the upper part of the entire display area in the effect display device 1600. The display area B occupies a lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. The hold display is arranged at the lower left of the screen. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitter such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in FIG. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area). In the present embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A is displayed. And the 2nd identification symbol displayed on the display area B should just be a symbol display mode which a player can recognize that it is an equivalent symbol combination.

  In addition, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are started to be displayed at the same time and stopped at the same time, and the timing of finally determining the stop mode of all the identification symbols is the same. In this embodiment, the stop timing of individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is also set at the same time. However, if the symbol determination timing is the same, the stop timing of each symbol is arbitrary. Also good.

  The layer of the screen shown in FIG. 464A includes a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to divert other drawing information by changing the coordinates and size for displaying the identification symbol. As a result, drawing data can be shared and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, the drawing process can be shared, and the program structure can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Similar to the above-described example, the first identification symbol is subjected to various effects until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (design variation, dynamic display). For example, when switching the identification symbol from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the identification symbol can be replaced by executing a callback based on the presentation SW for replacing the identification symbol, and the identification symbol can be decorated until just before stopping. it can. In the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variably displayed in the same manner as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the content of the effect in conformity with the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined in the first identification symbol. Thereby, the change display of the first identification symbol and the change display of the second identification symbol can be smoothly linked.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is started, the display is stopped in the order of the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol. FIG. 464A (B) shows a state where the left identification symbols of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are stopped. At this time, a notice character in the shape of an airplane is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a notice character in the shape of a tree is displayed in the lower part of the display area. Each notice character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be individually changed or deleted. As a result, it is possible to independently execute a plurality of notice effects according to the expected degree of change display.

  The airplane character displayed as the notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by executing an effect that is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A (B), the airplane character is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left part of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the display of variation is progressed. FIG. 464A (C) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of the right identification symbol has stopped and reach has occurred. The airplane character moves to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A (B). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), in the reach state, a notice effect in which an additional decoration display is made on the first identification symbol is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (E), the display of the airplane character is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification symbol of the first identification symbol is hidden by the airplane character, and then the airplane character is further enlarged, and the display of the first identification symbol is interrupted as shown in FIG. 464A (F). Is done. At this time, you may make it display continuously on the back side of the enlarged character of the plane, without stopping the change display of the first identification symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 464A (G), the variation display of the identification symbol is finished, and the display becomes a definite display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 464A (H), the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, and the game shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  Subsequently, the second identification symbol will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 464A (A) and 464A (B), the second identification symbol is also displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the first identification symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 464A (C), when the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol stop at the same identification symbol “5” and reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), the first identification symbol Similarly to the above, an additional decoration display is also made on the second identification symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 464A (E) and 464A (F), even if the player cannot visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the notice effect in the variable display after the reach has occurred, the variation display of the second identification symbol is performed. Is in a state that the player can visually recognize.

  In the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol during the variation display of the identification symbol. Therefore, even if the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, the additional decoration display is made on the second identification symbol in the same manner as the first identification symbol. The player can be surely notified of the expectation level of the big hit.

  Further, the additional decoration of the first identification symbol may be different from the additional decoration of the second identification symbol. For example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification symbol having a wide display area and the display area is narrow. In the second identification symbol, the maximum number of additional decoration stars may be set to 3 so that the player can easily recognize it. The player can also determine that a notice image with a high expectation level is displayed such that the first identification symbol is hidden while only the second identification symbol is displayed, or the second identification symbol is displayed. If there is no additional decoration of the symbol, it may be determined that the so-called gas effect is low in expectation even if a preview image that hides the first identification symbol is displayed.

  For the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol, common image data may be used and drawn on a layer corresponding to each display region, and additional decoration may be set for each display region. In this way, the identification symbol is variably displayed in a plurality of areas, and by sharing a part of the image data necessary for the variability display, the capacity for storing the image data can be saved and a variety of effects can be achieved. Can do.

  Further, not only the image data but also liquid crystal effect scheduler data for variably displaying the identification symbol in each display area may be shared. For example, the display position (coordinates) of identification symbols, layer-related information, etc. are parameterized and processed in a common procedure, thereby improving the development efficiency of production-related programs and flexibly responding to changes in production specifications. Is possible. Furthermore, whether or not to display the additional decoration is merely determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. A more effective effect can be realized without complicating the effect control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the preview image (character) is configured to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol so that the recognition of the identification symbol is obstructed. The same applies to the case where the visual recognition of the variation display of the identification symbol is hindered by the action of the accessory. For example, the movable region of the accessory may be set so that the display region B can be visually recognized even when the accessory moves to the front side of the display region and the visual recognition becomes difficult except for the lower part of the screen.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the notice effect, and the player can visually recognize only the second identification symbol. Therefore, the callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement effect SW of the second identification symbol, and the identification symbol replacement table and the reel index replacement work number are determined based on the stop symbol and the symbol stop timing at the switching timing of the identification symbol. By using the table to replace not only the second identification symbol but also the first identification symbol, the identification symbol is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol can be executed at the same timing or in conjunction with the timing, and the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, the display area B for displaying the second identification symbol may not be fixed. You may make it change the arrangement | positioning of the display area B according to the kind of notification effect, and change the position which displays a 2nd identification symbol. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to values corresponding to the notice effect. A plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification symbol is displayed, the parameter for displaying the corresponding layer is set to ON according to the type of the notice effect, and the parameter of the layer not to be displayed Is set to OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the second identification symbol at a preset position, it is also possible to display the identification symbol separately from the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol, By setting all the layer parameters to OFF, it is possible to display only the first identification symbol.

  The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the notice effect. For example, if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the left side of the screen due to the movable accessory moving to the left front of the screen, the second identification symbol is displayed by setting the effect SW for setting the display area B on the right side of the screen. Then, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

  Further, although the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variation display of the identification symbol in each display area, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first identification symbol and the variation display of the second identification symbol are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound effect may be output. In addition, when only the display area B with a narrow area is displayed, for example, when the notice effect is executed in front, the volume of the effect sound is lowered or the output of the effect sound is stopped. The output related to the change display may be suppressed by giving priority to the output related to the notice effect.

  Furthermore, the sound related to the variation display of the identification symbol (BGM, effect sound) is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound related to the notice effect (BGM, effect sound) is managed as another AUTO group, and the automatic channel method is used. Sound control by. At this time, it is possible to automatically give priority to the output of the sound output by the notice effect by setting the priority of the AUTO group that outputs the sound related to the notice effect high, and the production control is complicated. Can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as whether sound can be output and volume suppression values, it is possible to suppress output of other effect sound effects that are output while sound related to the notice effect is being output. it can.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol being variably displayed due to a notice effect, etc. Since it is only necessary for the player to visually recognize the variation display of the identification symbol, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to relax restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since variable display in a plurality of display areas is executed in an equivalent manner, drawing can be performed using a common program or image data. On the other hand, even if the decoration image is displayed overlaid on the identification symbol for each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol is prepared for each display region, and only programs and image data corresponding to the decoration image are prepared. Can be realized. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare a minimum amount of programs and data that will be the difference. Can be.

[33-2. Modified example 1 of a configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification symbols in a plurality of areas]
In the configuration example described above, the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the same manner in the display area A and the display region B from the start to the stop of the change in the identification symbols. An example will be described in which the identification symbol is variably displayed and the variably displayed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 464B is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed independently in the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment, and are variably displayed in a similar manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the display of the variation of the identification symbol is started simultaneously in each display area. However, as shown in (B), even if the left symbol is stopped in the display region A, the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the display region B. The change display is continued without being. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form a reach mode, all the identification symbols are continuously displayed in the display area B.

  Subsequently, after the reach mode is formed in (C), after the reach production for a predetermined period has progressed, the re-change of the identification symbol as shown in (D) is performed again to change all the symbols in the middle left and right again. A symbol indicating “(Next”) is displayed on the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all the identification symbols is started again. Then, as shown to (F), it stops so that a design on either side may form a reach aspect. At the timing when the reach is reached, the reach mode is not formed in the second identification symbol in the display area B. As described above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the reach form, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed on the middle symbol so that the re-variation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A has reached the reach mode, the second identification pattern does not form the reach mode when it changes again, and the second identification pattern when it does not change again If the symbol forms a reach aspect, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the player is re-variable by seeing the display of the second identification symbol, and there is a risk that the interest will be lowered (especially the re-variable symbol may be changed). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the interest that it may be re-variable for the player because of the gaming specifications that increase the expectation of jackpot by stopping and repeating re-variation). For this reason, in this modification, such a problem is solved by preventing the second identification symbol from forming the reach mode at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the reach mode. Then, after a reach form is formed in the first identification symbol and a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a high expectation effect reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is performed after reaching reach), as shown in (G), the second The display of the identification symbol is set to reach as in the case of the first identification symbol, and thereafter, the display area B is additionally displayed in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B also has the same display aspect as the display area A. An identification symbol is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. In FIG. 464B, for example, the display of the second identification symbol is made the same as the first identification symbol in the display area B after the timing when the high expectation reach effect is performed (in other words, the first identification symbol is In the predetermined period after reaching the reach, the display pattern is different between the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol), and the additional decoration display is performed in the display area B as in the display area A. This timing can be triggered by other predetermined conditions.

  The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started while repeatedly executing the temporary stop of the identification symbol, or may be the start timing of the re-variation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo-series. You can also. In addition, the start timing of the reach effect may be set to a timing at which the display mode of each display area is equivalent.

  As other predetermined conditions, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a notice effect by a specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that a part of the display area cannot be visually recognized. At this time, since the predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the change, the display mode of each display area may be made equal from the beginning, or may be matched with the execution timing of the notice effect by a specific movable accessory. The execution timing of the notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from the specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, when a movable accessory moves by operation of an effect button, you may control so that the display mode of each display area becomes equivalent by making operation of an effect button into a predetermined condition.

  Further, when the degree of expectation for the big hit is high, the predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy effect will be executed in addition to the effect by the movable accessory. Also in this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied from the start of the fluctuation. Furthermore, the various timings described above may be combined. For example, the timing for executing a reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot or the timing for starting the last temporary variation when performing an effect with a movable accessory may be used. .

  As described above, according to the present modification, as in the above-described embodiment, the display pattern of the identification symbol in each display area is made equivalent while maintaining the effect of relaxing the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is executed. Various effects can be realized by adjusting the timing (synchronized). Also, in the first half, where the execution frequency of moving effects, etc. is low, the display mode of some display areas is simplified (low decoration mode) to reduce the control load, and in the second half, where high level expectations are performed. By making the same display mode (high decoration mode) in all the display areas, it becomes possible to suppress the limitation of the production content such as the movement range of the movable accessory being restricted, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Can do.

[33-3. Modified example 2 of a configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification symbols in a plurality of areas]
In the example described above, after the identification symbols are variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, the same symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, it is possible to stop-display the identification symbol in a different mode (design) after the variation display of the identification symbol is performed in each display area.

  FIG. 464C is a diagram illustrating an example in which the identification symbols are variably displayed in the plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment and stopped at different symbols. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, the illustration from (C) to (E) is omitted. In addition, it is good also as a game machine which makes the stop symbol of each display area differ like this modification 2, while displaying an identification symbol variably similarly to the modification 1 shown to FIG. 464B.

  In this modified example, when a plurality of types of hits are prepared, and when the display is stopped in the same manner (identification symbol) in each display area, “first hit” is displayed, but different modes are displayed in each display area. When the display is stopped with (identification symbol), “second hit” (for example, “small hit”) different from “first hit” is shown. As shown in FIG. 464C (G), in the display area A, all the identification symbols are “5”, “5” and “5” which are the same, but in the display area B, the middle symbols are different and the identification symbol “5” "" V "" 5 "is stopped and displayed. In this modification, for example, when a small hit is prepared as the second hit, as shown in FIG. 464C (H), the result of the symbol variation is “second hit”, and the “second hit” is won. A game ball can be received in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

  As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to notify the player of the details of the winning by indicating the winning type by the combination of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of display areas. . For example, it is possible to indicate whether the winning symbol is “hit” with the stop symbol in the display area A, and indicate the type of “hit” with the stop symbol in the display area B.

  Further, the combination of stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misidentify the result of the variable display. Specifically, when “hit” is indicated by the stop symbol in the display area A, the player can clearly recognize that it is a win, for example, the stop symbol is displayed with the same identification symbol. It is better that the player does not misidentify the display area B. For example, when the result of the variable display is “out of range”, the player may stop the display with the same identification symbol so that the player does not misidentify. In the case of so-called “big hit”, the display area A is stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol, while in the case of “small hit”, which has a smaller game value than “big hit”, the same identification is made only in the display area B. You may make it stop-display with a symbol.

  When the display mode of the display area B suggests the type of “winning”, for example, when the display is stopped with the same identification symbol as the display area A, the “probable big hit” is assumed, or the same as the display area A is different. If the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, “normal big hit” that does not shift to the probability variation state may be used. Further, only the middle symbol may be recognized as another identification symbol so that the type of jackpot is recognized. As described above, if the middle symbol is “V”, it indicates that the game ball can be received in the V zone. The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit game in the middle symbol.

  Further, the display area B may not be displayed together with the stop of the identification symbol, and the player may have a sense of expectation while notifying the type of “win” while notifying the “win”. For example, the player's sense of expectation may be enhanced by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability variation state has occurred after the big hit. The display area B may indicate an advantageous gaming state (probability variation state, time reduction state, etc.) that is generated after the big hit game ends.

  Further, after notifying the player of the big hit in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification symbol may be continued only in the display area B. If the display of the display area B is continued, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and after making the big hit, the player can perform the subsequent effects by hiding the identification symbol in the display area A. An area can be secured. Also, in this case, the display that was set to “5”, “V”, “5” at the start of the big hit in the display area B is “5”, “5”, “5” that was displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big hit game. It may be displayed to match. In addition, this display may be displayed until the big hit game ends and the identification symbol starts to change in the game after the big hit game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing in the middle of the big hit game. . However, even when the display is stopped in the middle of the big hit game, it is preferable that the display corresponding to the winning symbol is displayed in the display area A and the display area B when the game after the big hit game is started. In this case, for example, in the display area B, “5”, “V”, and “5” are displayed at the hit timing, but after the big hit game ends, it may be “5”, “V”, and “5”. The display may be changed to “5”, “5”, or “5” across the game.

  According to this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing variable display of identification symbols in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax restrictions on the area in which the notice effect is executed, and to stop symbols in the plurality of display areas This combination makes it possible to notify the player of the game result in detail, and to realize various notification modes. Thereby, a player's expectation can be raised and the interest of a game can be improved.

[34. Substrate that is a component of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the game entertainment has been improved by increasing the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machine or by increasing the size or deformation. However, since the size of the gaming machine is determined to be a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and the size and arrangement of the objects are limited due to factors such as an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device. For this reason, there is a risk that the game entertainment will be reduced due to the monotonous performance. Hereinafter, the embodiments to be described have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for increasing the size of an accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

  An accessory provided in the gaming machine is visible from the player or the front side, and a decorative portion rich in decoration is arranged to enhance the interest of the game, and a light emitting body such as an LED is provided inside. The light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the gaming state and the expected level of variation display. If the light emitter is arranged on the substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmission portion that can transmit light output from the light emitter. The transmission part may be, for example, a transparent member that can transmit light, or may have a mesh-like hole that allows light to pass through the hole.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, a player can visually recognize a board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted via the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is equipped with electronic parts necessary for exhibiting the effect, and is not assumed to be visually recognized by the player. However, in a decorative part having a transmissive part through which light can pass, a board placed inside the decorative part is visually recognized by a player, and the decorative effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, if the substrate cannot be seen by reducing the transmittance of the transmissive part or using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive part, the expected effect cannot be obtained. is there. Furthermore, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot visually recognize from the outside of the decoration part or the transmission part, the size of the decoration part may be unintentionally increased.

  Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a reduction in decoration effect even when a substrate is visually recognized from a transmission portion that constitutes the decoration portion.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the gaming board 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, an effect display device 1600 is arranged (on the game board side) in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, as with the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so as to be able to receive a game ball that has been struck, and a plurality of general winnings. A mouth is always open so that a game ball can be received at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate portion for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first start port or the second start port In accordance with the result of the lottery, it is provided with a big winning opening or the like that can accept a game ball in any case.

  Furthermore, a character combination 9100 having a character shape of “Intense heat” is arranged in the upper right part of the game area 5a. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character combination 9100 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 466, the character combination 9100 is a plate-shaped combination imitating the character shape of “extreme heat”. The effect by the character combination 9100 is executed in a manner corresponding to the expected degree of symbol variation. For example, the light emission mode may be changed such that light is emitted in a color according to the degree of expectation or lighting and extinguishing are repeated in a predetermined pattern. Also, turn on “Geki” and “Heat” alternately, and if the degree of expectation is high, turn on both letters to notify the jackpot, or finally run a so-called gasse effect that turns off both letters You may do it.

  As will be described later, the character combination 9100 includes a transparent member 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112 that are a cover member (cover body) 9110 that can be visually recognized by the player, and a mode according to the progress of the game and the contents of the effect. The illuminator provided inside can emit light from the transmission portion 9111. In this embodiment, the transmissive portion (first region) 9111 is a portion corresponding to a character, the non-transmissive portion (second region) 9112 is an outer edge portion of the character, and the transmissive portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. . The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also have transparency, and for example, may be colored with a transmittance different from that of the transmissive portion 9111. Details of the character combination 9100 will be described with reference to FIG. 468 and subsequent drawings.

  Further, a part of the character combination 9100 overlaps with the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated on the back side of the character combination 9100. At this time, it is also possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 by making the back side of the character combination 9100 a reflective member. Further, a part of the character combination 9100 may be configured to transmit light, and an effect in which light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 transmits the character combination 9100 may be executed.

  In addition, a space is formed between the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a, and a snowman accessory 9200 simulating the shape of a “snowman” on the lower left front side of the effect display device 1600. Is arranged. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side and back side of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

  FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 in the present embodiment, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having an outer appearance, and exhibits a rendering effect when light from a light emitting body (LED) provided therein is transmitted to the outside.

  The snowman accessory 9200 is configured by a hat portion, a head portion, and a torso portion in appearance. The head part and the body part are composed of a transmissive member, and the player can visually recognize the inside. The hat portion has a bucket shape and is provided above the head. The hat portion is composed of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, light irradiated from a light emitter such as an LED provided therein can be transmitted. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG.

  Similar to the character combination 9100, the snowman combination 9200 is executed in a manner corresponding to the expected degree of symbol variation. For example, it is possible to emit light with a color according to the degree of expectation, or to repeatedly turn on and off. Alternatively, only the head may be lit, or only the trunk may be lit. Alternatively, only the hat portion may be turned on at the initial stage of the notice effect to enhance the player's expectation, and the head portion may be turned on sequentially.

[34-2. Character character (extreme heat)]
Next, a detailed configuration of the character combination 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character combination 9100 of the present embodiment. The character combination 9100 is a character combination board disposed on the back side of the cover member 9110 and the cover member 9110 that is visible to the player and mounted with a light emitter 9301 such as an LED. 9120 and a base member 9130 attached to the back side of the cover member 9110 and character combination board 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 has a peripheral wall portion 9113 that protrudes rearward on the outer periphery, and a character combination board 9120 can be accommodated in a space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100 of this embodiment as viewed from the back side. The state in which the character combination board 9120 is stored will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by the transmissive portion 9111 that can transmit light imitating the letters “extreme heat” and the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is formed at the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and hardly transmits light. ing.

  Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 that forms the outer peripheral portion of the character combination 9100 is formed of a material that does not easily transmit light like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. In addition, when lighting a character separately, in order to distinguish between each character, it is necessary to provide the surrounding wall part 9113 between characters. At this time, the character combination board 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the board may be integrated.

  The transmission part 9111 is formed of a colorless and transparent material, and the inside of the character combination 9100 can be visually recognized. When the performance is performed, the light emitter 9301 provided inside transmits light to the transmission part 9111 and blocks the light by the non-transmission part 9112, thereby enhancing the player's expectation by highlighting the character “super heat”. be able to. Further, not only can the light from the light emitter (LED) 9301 disposed on the character combination board 9120 be transmitted, but the player can also visually recognize the character combination board 9120 itself. .

  In the present embodiment, a light diffusion portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusion portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character combination board 9120, and the diffusion member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmission portion 9111. The same effect as the case can be obtained. A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

  With the configuration described above, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently concentrated with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or light emission can be achieved. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the body 9301 can be increased.

  Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character combination 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and there is an effect that is different from the case where the light diffusion portion is used while making the character portion stand out due to the difference in transmittance. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character board
FIG. 470 is a diagram showing the front side of the character combination board 9120 of the character combination 9100 according to this embodiment. FIG. 471 shows a state in which the character combination board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character combination board 9120.

  As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character combination board 9120 has a shape of the character combination 9100 according to the outline shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 instead of the general rectangular shape. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character combination board 9120. Various information is displayed on the character combination board 9120, but may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

  Further, the back side of the character combination board 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 when attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot visually recognize it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but whether to apply the resist only on the front surface or on both surfaces by comparing the manufacturing cost for processing the front and back surfaces separately from the cost of the material. Just decide.

  As described above, the character combination board 9120 is visible from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. For this reason, when the color of the substrate does not match the decoration mode of the accessory, the decoration effect may be reduced, or the decoration effect may be hindered by electronic components arranged on the substrate. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character combination board 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character combination board 9120 is not colored in general green, but is colored in a color (specific color) according to the decoration form of the combination, or the electronic component mounted on the character combination board 9120 has a pattern of the combination. Arrange as you make. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color related to a character or theme appearing in the effect of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

  First, a specific mode for using the shape and color of a substrate provided in a decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. Since the character combination 9100 of this embodiment has the transmission part 9111 as mentioned above, the character combination board 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, the color of the character combination board 9120 is colored to a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character combination 9100, thereby configuring the entire color of the character combination 9100. For example, when the surface of the character combination board 9120 is blue, the entire combination is blue when the illuminant 9301 is not emitting light, and the emission color of the illuminant 9301 is emitted when emitting light. Can be given to a person. In particular, when the area occupied by the transmission part 9111 is large in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminescent body / electronic component]
A plurality of light emitters (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the front surface (front surface) side of the character combination board 9120. The light emitters 9301 may all have the same emission color, or a plurality of different types of emission colors may be prepared. The light emitters 9301 may be turned on according to the progress of the game, and the lighting locations may be different according to the contents of the presentation. When there are different types of light emission colors, the light may be emitted with a color according to the degree of expectation, or different types of light emission colors may be lit simultaneously.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the character combination board 9120 is colored in a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character combination board 9120 and the emission color of the light emitter 9301, a variety of effects can be realized by causing the light emitter 9301 to emit light in a plurality of colors. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the light emitter 9301 is turned off, a specific color colored on the character combination board 9120 is recognized. Therefore, even if the light emitter 9301 is blinked, the character combination board can be used as one effect expression. The specific color colored 9120 and the emission color of the light emitter 9301 can be recognized as different colors alternately. For example, as described above, when the color of the character combination board 9120 is blue, when the light emitter 9301 blinks slowly in red, a red character combination and a blue character combination alternately with light and dark. Can be recognized as a completely different colored accessory.

  Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character combination board 9120. Specifically, the resistor 9302, the IC 9303, and the connector 9304 are included. In this embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, any arrangement that does not cause a technical problem may be used. In addition, as shown in FIG. 471, information on the light emitter 9301 arranged on the front side is printed on the back side of the character combination board 9120, and the electronic components arranged on the front side even from the back side. Can recognize information about. Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the light emitter 9301 is arranged on the surface side, and information on the electronic component is not displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced by the player visually recognizing the silk-printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (such as “LED1” in FIG. 471)). If necessary, information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. For example, when the character combination board 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue and a color that can be discriminated is used as the information display, and silk printing is performed. That's fine. Alternatively, information may be formed by etching characters.

  In the character combination 9100 according to the present embodiment, the electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are arranged on the back side of the board that cannot be seen by the player, so the electronic components such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . In addition, when the electronic component must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic component such as the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is arranged so that it is difficult for the player to see, An electronic component having a shape may be employed. For example, an electronic component having the same color as the specific color may be disposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example in which an electronic component arranged on a substrate is used as a decorative element for an accessory will be described.

  An electronic component is arranged on the front side of the character combination board 9120 at a position where the player can visually recognize the transmission part 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form a character pattern displayed by the character combination 9100. For example, electronic parts are arranged at regular positions so as to decorate characters.

  Further, the arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may prevent the player from recognizing a character pattern during light emission. Furthermore, by selecting the light emitter 9301 in a position where the electronic component can be recognized even during light emission and the light emitter 9301 in a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized during light emission, the pattern is made to emit light. You may comprise so that presence or absence can be switched.

  Moreover, it is good also as a decoration element by arrange | positioning electronic components other than black on the surface side. Although the transmissive portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may transmit light as a lens member or a diffusing member, but may make it easier for the player to recognize the pattern so that the electronic components cannot be clearly identified. In addition, about the aspect which exhibits a decoration effect by arrangement | positioning of an electronic component, another specific example is demonstrated in the snowman accessory 9200 mentioned later.

  It is also possible to use characters printed on the surface of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in a color that is difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decoration effect from being obstructed, the player can recognize characters indicating electronic component and board information as decoration elements. You may print by aspect (color, shape). As a result, the pattern of the accessory can be made in a more complicated form, or the color can be changed by printing with a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and the decoration effect can be enhanced. In addition, by consolidating the characters to be printed on the board, the player can recognize that a color area different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts on the board is formed on the board. You may make it raise.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of luminous body]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character combination 9100 of this embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitters 9301 are also arranged at positions that are visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize behind the non-transmissive portion 9112. Here, the light emitter 9301 disposed at a position visible from the transmission portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitter 9301a, and a light emitter 9301b disposed behind the non-transmission portion 9112 is used.

  For example, when strong light emission is desired, the light emitter 9301a is disposed at a position visible from the transmission portion 9111 so that light is directly emitted to the outside. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 469, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, light can be diffused by arranging the light emitter 9301b on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. It is possible to emit light with light.

  In this manner, the position of the light emitter 9301a may be determined according to the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light emitter 9301 to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emission mode with one accessory. Specifically, only the light emitter 9301a or all of the light emitters 9301 need to emit light when it is desired to strongly emit the entire accessory, and only light emitter 9301b is caused to emit light and diffuse light when it is desired to emit light with soft light. Just do it.

  Further, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitter 9301a is slightly less visible without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmission portion 9111 may be slightly lowered in transparency (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside, or the surface of the transmission portion 9111 is processed (for example, embossed) to diffuse light. In this way, it may be difficult to visually recognize the inside. With this configuration, the light emitter itself is difficult to visually recognize, but can emit light more strongly than being disposed behind the non-transmissive portion 9112. In addition, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

  The character effect board 9120 itself may not be directly used as a decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the effect. For example, when the specific color of the character combination board 9120 is white, the reflectance can be increased even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit, Of course, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character combination 9100 from becoming too dark by reflecting light from the outside.

  Further, since the specific color of the character combination board 9120 is white, the character color of the character combination 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the character combination is turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LED) is used as the light emitter 9301, the character color can be expressed as a variety of colors, but the light from the light emitter 9301 and the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 By combining the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing portion provided on the substrate and the light reflected from the substrate surface in an overlapping manner, a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitter 9301 can be performed. it can. At this time, since a variety of effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, cost can be reduced.

  As described above, in the character combination of the present embodiment, the color of the board or the mounted electronic component is used as a decoration element so that the player can visually recognize it, so that the board is hidden. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, an electronic component that does not become a decorative element may be disposed on the back side of the substrate, and only the color of the substrate may be used as the decorative element by disposing electronic components other than light emitters such as LEDs on the back side.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by an attachment member (not shown). At this time, the character combination board 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character combination board 9120 is not fixed and is accommodated in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. You may make it do. Note that wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying power to the character combination board 9120 is not shown. For example, wiring holes are formed in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 or the cover member 9110. What is necessary is just to form.

  In addition, you may make it attach directly to the game board 5 by providing an attaching part in the cover member 9110, without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character combination board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Variation 1 of character combination]
Subsequently, the shape of the character combination board 9120 is not completely similar to the shape of the character combination board 9100, and the outer edge of the character combination board 9120 matches the outline shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case where it does not carry out is demonstrated. In this case, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be disposed on the entire character combination 9100, the light guide 9140 is disposed between the cover member 9110 and the character combination substrate 9120 to diffuse the light. The shortage of the amount of light in the portion 9301 where it is not arranged is compensated. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those described above.

  FIG. 473 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from the light emitter 9301 in the character combination 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character combination substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light over the entire back side of the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character combination 9100 according to the outline shape of the space.

  FIG. 474 is a diagram showing the front side of the character combination board 9120 of the character combination 9100 of Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 475 shows a state in which the character combination board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character combination board 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character combination board 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character combination board 9120 is formed with a notch portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. In addition, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character combination board 9120. As shown in FIG. 475, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is attached to the base member 9130 through the attachment hole 9121.

  Similarly, an attachment hole is formed in the light guide member 9140 so that the attachment portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. Note that if the ratio of the notch portion 9122 is small and the position of the substrate is not shifted, the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 may be sandwiched and fixed without providing a mounting structure.

  FIG. 476 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character combination 9100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. In this modified example, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be disposed in the notch portion 9122, the entire character combination 9100 is caused to emit light by guiding light through the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusion part may be provided on the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

  Accordingly, the character combination 9100 of the present modified example is formed with a portion decorated by the character combination substrate 9120 by using the color or electronic parts of the character combination substrate 9120 as a decoration element, and a notch 9122. For this reason, parts that are not decorated with the character combination board 9120 are mixed. At this time, the decoration effect can be maintained by performing the light decoration by the light diffusion portion provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 or the cover member 9110.

  As described in this modification, the shape of the character combination board 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character combination board 9100, and a portion not decorated by the character combination board 9120 includes a light guide member 9140, a light diffusion portion, and the like. The reduction of the decoration effect may be suppressed by providing the light decoration. Further, the reduction of the decoration effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character combination board 9120. As a result, it is possible to make the shape of the character combination board 9120 relatively simple without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the board, the manufacturing cost such as processing of the board can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

  Further, without using the base member 9130, the decorative part disposed on the back side of the character combination 9100 can transmit light from the decorative part through the notch part 9122 to produce an effect. Good. For example, when the character combination 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character combination are displayed by displaying an image on the upper right portion of the screen. You may make it perform the production which united with the light emission production by the thing 9100. The same effect can also be executed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. Note that an example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Variation 2 of character combination]
In the first modification, the notch 9122 is formed in a part of the substrate. In the second modification, an example in which the character combination board 9120 described above is about half the size of the character combination 9100 will be described. In addition, the cover member 9110 is configured to be directly attached to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the character combination 9100 in the present modification includes a cover member 9110, a character combination substrate 9120, and a light guide. It is constituted by the member 9140.

  In this modified example, similarly to the modified example 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitters 9301 cannot be arranged to perform light decoration. Further, in the present modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if the light emitter is provided on the back side of the character combination 9100, light of the light emitter can be transmitted.

  FIG. 477 is a diagram illustrating the front side of the character combination board 9120 of the character combination 9100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment. The character combination board 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap each other. Indicates the state. FIG. 478 shows a state in which the character combination board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character combination 9100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character combination board 9120.

  As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478, the character combination board 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character combination 9100. Therefore, when the character combination 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with a specific color colored on the character combination board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character combination board 9120. It becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character combination 9100 can be transmitted from the transmission portion 9111, the back side of the character combination 9100 may be set to a specific color so as to suppress a sense of discomfort.

  Also, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character combination in which characters are expressed in two stages, a character combination board 9120 is arranged on the upper stage side, and a light emitter is arranged on the back side on the lower stage side, thereby performing different effects in the upper stage and the lower stage. Moreover, if this accessory is movable, a different effect can be executed for each stop position by arranging different light emitters on the back side for each stop position.

  Further, the light emitter is not limited to the LED and the lamp, but may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, an LED is disposed on the game board 5 as a light emitter, and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 In the case of the downward movement, it is possible to execute the effect by transmitting light from the lower part of the accessory according to the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

  Note that the image displayed on the back side of the character combination 9100 is the same color (character combination) simulating the character combination 9100 including the lower half (the cutout portion in the first modification) regardless of the transmission part 9111 and the non-transmission part 9112. For the part showing the physical substrate 9120, an image having the same shape and the same color may be displayed. This is because an image is displayed even if a failure occurs in the character combination 9100, and the game can be advanced without giving the player a sense of anxiety due to the failure.

  By comprising as mentioned above, it becomes possible to implement | achieve multiple types of production | presentation with one actor, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a player can visually recognize a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 through a character combination 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character combination 9100, and the light effect by the character combination substrate 9120 is displayed. In addition, display effects by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed in cooperation with each other. By configuring in this way, the lower side portion of the character combination board 9120 becomes a boundary and can be an element constituting the decoration.

  FIG. 479 is a diagram showing a state in which the character combination 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character combination 9100 diffuses light from the light emitter 9301 mounted on the character combination substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140. On the other hand, the lower part of the character combination 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by combining the light from the light emitter 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which the effect by the character combination 9100 and the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are integrated can be executed.

  It should be noted that effects other than the character combination 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member and the decoration effect is enhanced by arranging a light emitter on the back side or sticking a sticker or the like, the game board 5 is made to be visually recognized through the transmission part of the accessory. The decoration effect can be further enhanced.

[34-5. Snowman role]
Next, the snowman accessory 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decorative body) that imitates a snowman, and has a shape in which a spherical head is placed on a spherical trunk that is slightly larger than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat portion is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, light irradiated from a light emitter such as an LED provided therein can be transmitted.

  FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) in which an electronic component including a light emitter 9301 such as an LED is mounted in a cover member 9210 divided into a front cover member 9210a and a back cover member 9210b. Is done.

  The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is established. For example, an effect such as causing an internal illuminant to emit light according to the expected degree of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. Also good. Hereinafter, each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 481 is a view of the front cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as seen from the back side. FIG. 482 is a view showing the back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 484 is a diagram showing the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment.

  The cover members 9210 (front side cover member 9210a and back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 are substantially colorless and transparent except for a part thereof, and a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front. ) Can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of a snowman accessory 9200, and has a very rich design. Similarly to the character combination board 9120, the snowman board 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color). In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character combination substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. In addition, about the code | symbol of the electronic component on a board | substrate, the code | symbol common with the character combination 9100 is used.

  In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 occupies the inside of the accessory so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be seen from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as the specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from behind the snowman accessory 9200, or a decorative body such as a light emitter may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

  In addition, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman accessory 9200 by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 from the side surface to the back surface. The character combination 9100 configured so that the substrate cannot be viewed from the back side does not need to have a specific color up to the back side of the substrate, but the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored in the specific color on the back side. Thereby, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowball accessory 9200 from the side, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the decoration effect. Thereby, the freedom degree of the form of an accessory can be improved, the effect of a game can be improved while improving a production effect.

  Since the player can visually recognize from the side of the snowman substrate 9220 to the back side, a light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the entire snowball accessory 9200 emits light from the back side. . Further, by coloring the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a different color from the front side, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that when only the front light emitter 9301 emits light. It is to be noted that the same effect can be expected by arranging light emitters 9301 having the same color and different emission colors for the snowman substrate 9220. By comprising in this way, the light emission aspect of an accessory can be diversified and the interest of a game can be heightened.

  As shown in FIG. 480, an opening is provided in the cap portion of the snowman accessory 9200, and a cord for transmitting electric power and signals is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 accommodated in the snowman accessory 9200. Yes. Various effects are executed by causing a light emitting body (LED) 9301 disposed on the snowman substrate 9220 to emit light according to the supplied power and a signal from the effect control device.

  In addition, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The permeability of the hat portion is lower than that of the other parts of the snowman role 9200, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside. In view of this, a connector 9304 disposed on the snowman substrate 9220, a cord connected to the connector 9304, and the like are disposed on the hat portion, thereby making it difficult for the player to see.

  The cover member 9210 (front cover member 9210a) is formed with a transmissive portion B9211b having different transmittances in a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front of the player. In addition, let the permeation | transmission part except a cap part be permeation | transmission part A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmissive part B9211b is configured such that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 is visually recognized in a blurred state with aberrations, like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 accommodated in the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 483, in the present embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 corresponding to the portion corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistors 9302 are black electronic components and are densely arranged in a circular shape. When the player looks at the snowball accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears blurred by being visually recognized through the transmission part B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistor 9302) that are gathered and arranged on the board are recognized as black eyes of a snowman, and a decorative element can be configured.

  In addition, the part number of the electronic part (part number printed with silk such as “R1”) is silk-printed with the same specific color as the resist of the snowman substrate 9220 and yellow of the same system so that it can be identified. Yes. In the present embodiment, the printing is performed densely like the resistor 9302, so that it can be identified and functions to reflect light by the amount printed densely.

  In the present embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (part number printed with silk such as “R1”) may be silk-printed in black similarly to the resistor. As described above, both of the resistors 9302 can be recognized as a snowman's eyes by the effect of the lens.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC9303) that does not constitute a decorative element on the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 and on the outer side when the snowball accessory 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.). As a result, an electronic component having a low decoration effect or a possibility of reducing the decoration effect is located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic component. . At this time, by directing the snowman substrate 9220 toward the center side of the gaming machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side more difficult to visually recognize.

  Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described by focusing on the cover member 9210 (the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b). The front-side cover member 9210a and the rear-side cover member 9210b do not need to be divided evenly in the front-rear direction. For example, one of the front-side cover member 9210a may be formed to extend rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220. Good. Hereinafter, an example in which one (inner side) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 485 is a top view of a horizontal section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 485, when the inner cover member of the front cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visually recognized by the player. Is constituted by the front surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment position of the front side cover member 9210a to the back side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b) is on the back side behind the snowman substrate 9220, so that the decoration is high. An object can be realized.

  Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) has a snowman role 9200 on the back surface as well as on the front surface. Decorate white. Although it is desirable that both surfaces are white as in the present embodiment, the player may visually recognize only from the front side so that only the front side may be white.

  In FIG. 485, only the inner cover member of the front cover member 9210a extends backward beyond the snowman substrate 9220. However, depending on the decoration of the accessory to be used, only the outer cover member extends toward the rear of the substrate. You may employ | adopt the aspect extended to a board | substrate back in both inside and outside.

  Furthermore, the structure for attaching each component of an accessory or attaching an accessory to a game board is demonstrated. In the snowman accessory 9200 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by a substrate attachment portion 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, the board attachment portion 9213 is preferably provided outside the snowman accessory 9200 that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the rear surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown). However, like the substrate attachment portion 9213, the cover attachment portion is preferably provided outside the snowball accessory 9200. Further, the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and the attachment portion with the structure is preferably provided outside the snowball accessory 9200, similarly to the substrate attachment portion 9213. In this manner, by disposing the attachment portion of each component of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside that is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the decorativeness of the accessory is prevented from being hindered. Can do.

  In addition to the outside of the accessory, the visibility is not limited by the player (for example, a portion made of a colored member (a hat portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc. A decorative part is provided depending on the attachment part by providing the attachment part in a part to be lowered or a part to be bent among the shape of the accessory (the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment is a boundary part between the head and the body part). Can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the example shown in FIG. 485, the snowball accessory 9200 is configured by the front cover member 9210a and the back cover member 9210b. However, as shown in FIG. 486, the shape of the snowman is formed by one cover member 9210. You may do it. FIG. 486 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory 9200 according to a modification of the present embodiment.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. Also in this modified example, as in the example shown in FIG. 485, it is preferable that the snowman substrate 9220 is white on both sides, but only the surface side may be white.

  In this modified example, the inner cover member not only extends backward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 but also extends rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowball substrate 9220 but also the base body 9230 are players. It will be visible from. For this reason, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman substrate 9220. In addition, about the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board | substrate 9220 with respect to the base body 9230, as mentioned above, an attachment part is provided in the location where a player is difficult to visually recognize, and it attaches with an attachment member etc. It can suppress that decorativeness is impaired.

  In this modification, only the inside of the cover member 9210 is shown to extend rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outside of the cover member depends on the decoration of the accessory to be used. It is also possible to adopt a mode that only extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body or a mode that extends to the rear of the substrate or the base body on both the inside and the outside.

[34-6. Effect]
In general, an electronic circuit board is a green board of a basic size, and the cost greatly depends on how many boards can be taken from one green board based on the green board. Although it is designed in a rectangular shape when considered very simply, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment has a shape with a very rich design. In other words, it can be said that all elements constituting the substrate, from the color of the resist and the substrate to the electronic component, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

  Note that the character combination board 9120 of the character combination described above has a substantially rectangular shape. Compared to the snowman substrate 9220, it has a shape that is included in a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body covering the substrate is provided with a function for having design properties.

  As described above, not only a light emitting body (LED) but also a substrate on which an electronic circuit made up of electronic components that control the light emitting body is formed in the shape of a useful object. It is provided together. In the first place, the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed has a wiring electrically connecting the electronic component and the electronic component constituting the electronic circuit, and the substrate surface is protected with a protective film (to prevent oxidation of the wiring) Resist).

  Therefore, as a color for the accessory, attention was paid to the color of the resist as the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate. If the front side is still equipped with a transmissive part, the decorative effect as an accessory may be reduced by visually recognizing an electronic component mounted on the substrate from the transmissive part. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman role 9200, the color of the board, and all elements constituting the board and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decoration elements to prevent a reduction in the decoration effect. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In gaming machines, a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board, the payout control board, etc. provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and are easy to check and confirm. On the other hand, in a light-emitting decorative substrate employed in a movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, a lens that reflects and scatters light from the light-emitting decorative substrate on the front side facing the player side Members are provided, and the rear surface is attached to the game board panel in a state of being opposed to the effect display device attached to the game board panel. In addition, on the rear side of the light-emitting decorative board, a connector, a control element, a driver, a resistor, a capacitor, etc. for connecting a flat cable for receiving a control signal from the peripheral control means in order to realize a function called light-emitting decoration The electronic parts are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in a gaming store, it is difficult to confirm whether or not a defect has occurred in an electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the light emitting decorative board in the gaming machine after installation. . This is because the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate is in a state opposite to the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such problems will be described below.

  FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in the present embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600. The game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing a physical opening in the game panel 1100 in a punched shape. A space is formed on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 with the game panel 1100, and a plurality of objects are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, in the position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the backside grass character 6800, the first giant tree feature 6600, the second giant tree feature 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first big tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. Yes. In addition, a first herbage 6470 and a second herbage 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit hand 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain hand 6500 is provided behind them. Behind 6500, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided. Thus, a depth feeling can be given by arranging a plurality of actors in layers.

  FIG. 488 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 488 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover 6010, and a torso 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitter 6023a and a second face light emitter 6023b as the face light emitter 6023 on the front surface. The face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. On the bottom surface in the vertical direction of the face cover 6010, the left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated, and a first arm 6016 and a second arm 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Also, the lower end of the face substrate 6020 is provided with a body part 6030 which is a plate-like member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, imitating a rabbit body part.

  4A is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. FIG. 489B is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-like member constituted by a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. . Further, the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b are arranged on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and the control element 6025, the driver 6026, and the first LED are arranged on the rear side of the face substrate 6020. The resistors 6027a to 6027f, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the connector 6029 are surface mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 489 (A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the upper side of the rectangle. The shape is made. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the ear of a rabbit. In a state where the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered with the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

  Each of the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 has a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a simulating the inside of a rabbit ear. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with a brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are areas visible in brown. ing. Note that, in the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the above-described white protective film. In addition, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

  The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, each of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is configured by an LED mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, but will be described in detail later.

  The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is formed by printing on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 with pink ink, and the shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit is visible in pink. It has become. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured such that the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other areas are white.

  FIG. 489 (B) is a view showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuit in the same manner as the front surface of the face substrate 6020. On the upper left and right of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. The dotted line indicating the mounting location and the character strings “LED1” and “LED2” indicating the names of the mounted members are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film, respectively. . A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string “LED1” and the character string “LED2”. Under the driver 6026, a character string “DR1” is formed by printing black ink on a white protective film.

  A capacitor 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between a dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and a dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. Corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b, character strings “C1” and “C2” are formed on the white protective film by printing with black ink.

  A resistor 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) is surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f, the character strings “R1” to “R6” are formed on the white protective film by printing with black ink.

  A control element 6025 made of a microcomputer is surface-mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Corresponding to the control element 6025, the character string “IC1” is formed by printing black ink on the white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LEDs configuring the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LEDs configuring the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

  A connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. In correspondence with the connector 6029, a character string “CN1” is formed on the white protective film by printing with black ink. A control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The electric power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and the like.

  The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 each have a black main body portion and a metal terminal portion. In addition, metal terminals included in the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by solder. In FIG. 489 (B), the main body portion of these electronic components is expressed in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are expressed in white.

  FIG. 490 is a perspective view of the face cover 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box shape with the rear opened, and is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front portion 6011 that forms a front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 that forms an upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 that forms a right surface, and a face cover that forms a lower surface. It is comprised by the part lower surface part 6014 and the face cover part left surface part 6015 which comprises a left surface.

  As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, the first face light scattering unit 6011 a and the second one imitating the eyes of a rabbit are provided on the front side of the face cover unit front part 6011 constituting the front side surface of the face cover unit 6010. A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering unit 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting unit 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Further, the second face light scattering unit 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488 (A), the first face light scatterer 6011a and the second face light scatterer 6011b are viewed in front than the first face light emitter 6023a and the second face light emitter 6023b, respectively. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are surrounded by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b, respectively. It is configured as follows.

  The first face light scatterer 6011a and the second face light scatterer 6011b emit the first face by forming a fine lens cut or a satin finish on the front side of the face cover front part 6011. When the light irradiated from the part 6023a or the second face light emitting part 6023b is incident, it is formed by a rough surface capable of irregularly reflecting the light. The face cover portion front portion 6011 is incident on the portions other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, like the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. Is not provided, and the face substrate 6020 located behind is configured to be directly visible from the front. In the face substrate 6020, the rectangular portion forming the area excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangle forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow, and are overlapped in front view. In the position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind to screw holes provided in the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, the face cover left surface 6015, and the like. It is attached with.

  The rear surface of the face cover portion front portion 6011 and the face light emitting portion 6023 are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the face light emitting unit 6023 fails due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted in relation to a light emitting unit and a member such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting unit.

  As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 includes the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. LEDs that function as a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b are surface-mounted on the front surface side of the face substrate 6020, and each of the face cover portions constituting the front side of the face cover unit 6010 that covers the front. The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b provided on the front part 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020.

  A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 for driving the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020. In addition, power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emission mode of the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023.

  The LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is formed by encapsulating three LED chips that can emit red light, LED chips that can emit green light, and LED chips that can emit blue light with a colorless and transparent resin. . In addition, the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is provided with three metal terminals that serve as anodes of the LED chips and three metal terminals that serve as cathodes. Further, when a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can be made to emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, red, green, and blue can be emitted independently.

  Further, between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip, resistors 6027 are provided as limiting resistors for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chips. Specifically, the first resistor 6027a to the third resistor 6027c constitute the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the LEDs constituting the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023a, respectively. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits that connect the anodes of the LED chips included in the LED. Thus, by providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and when a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is excessive. It prevents current from flowing.

  In addition, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in a power supply terminal included in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel in an electric circuit with respect to the power supply terminal provided in the driver 6026, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 are stably provided. It has a function to make it operate.

  The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled so as to be moved between a standby position below the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position near the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a driving mechanism (not shown). Is possible. This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. And it is comprised so that a predetermined | prescribed game content may be alert | reported with respect to a player by the movement mode and light emission mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. For example, the first and second facial light emitting units 6023a and 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 in a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position and the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. Is turned on in red, and the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b are turned on in red, so that the stop pattern of the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than usual. In the other embodiments, an example is shown in which an accessory or a part of a member constituting the accessory is moved, or a light emitting unit included in the accessory is controlled to a predetermined light emission mode. May be used as an effect, and a configuration may be adopted that suggests that the degree of expectation of stop display in a manner in which the stop pattern of the decorative symbol being changed shows a big hit is higher than usual.

  As described above, in the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) provided in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), there is a possibility that a defect occurs in the light emitting function. For example, in the process of surface mounting on the printed circuit board constituting the face substrate 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface is insufficient, and the electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic component to be mounted is not properly performed. In some cases, the electronic component mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board at the time of assembly at the factory may be lost due to contact with another member or tool. In addition, there is a possibility that a failure may occur in the electronic component due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in the amusement store.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting unit 6023 that can emit full color light by emitting red, blue, and green colors in multiple gradations by a driver 6026, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. When the connection is lost, one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but only two colors of light are actually emitted. In this case, a non-light emitting state occurs. Such a state can occur when the LED chip fails and no current flows, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. .
Such a situation may give an impression that the movable decorative member does not look good to the player who plays the game. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light of the same color, there is a possibility that only a defective LED emits light of a different emission color. Moreover, there is a risk of causing a player's misunderstanding regarding the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 is bent many times by repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, so that the strength of a predetermined portion of the flat cable is deteriorated. The occurrence of a situation in which the flat cable is disconnected and the signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be appropriately performed can be assumed. Alternatively, it may be assumed that the connector 6029 is damaged due to repeated stress applied to a part of the connector 6029 due to repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit accessory 6000, and an unintentional light emission mode is indicated to the player, or power is not completely supplied. In this case, the face light emitting unit 6023 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 does not take the lighting mode and moves from the standby position to the moving position in the unlit state or from the moving position to the standby position. There is a risk that the appearance of will be worse.

  Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visible in black, and the rear surface of the face board 6020 located in front of the display area is reflected on the surface. It is configured to be reflected. Specifically, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured so that the incident light is specularly reflected. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflecting plate (reflective sheet) is installed in the vicinity of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflecting plate may be configured to mirror-reflect incident light. With such a configuration, if there is any abnormality in the face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the rear The contents of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually confirming. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether an abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 491 (A) is a perspective view showing a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (A), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic parts mounted on the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

  In this example, a rabbit character 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front substrate forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit character effect 6000 are arranged. It is configured so that the back surface is located at a predetermined distance (specifically, about several centimeters). In the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), a part of the driver 6026 and the whole of the first resistor 6027a and the second resistor 6027b mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state reflected in.

  Note that FIG. 491 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, but it is also possible to visually recognize the mounting mode of other electronic components by looking in from other angles. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed from above at the center in the left-right direction, the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b can be viewed. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is viewed from diagonally upper left, the entire connector 6029 and a flat cable connected to the connector 6029 can be viewed. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

  FIG. 491 (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (B), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic parts mounted on the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown. In this example, it is difficult to visually recognize electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. The entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a Only a part of the second capacitor 6028b and a part of the second capacitor 6028b can be confirmed. A method for visually recognizing electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

  In this way, in the gaming machine in the disconnected state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 as a decoration means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is installed in the game shop. Further, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is visually recognized in black is visually recognized. Constructed easily.

  Although an example in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film has been shown, the circuit is not limited to white and is configured to cover a circuit on the face substrate 6020 with a light-colored protective film such as cream. May be. This is because the difference between light and dark is clearer with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is black when the light protective film is used than when the dark protective film is used. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is easily visible.

As a process of coloring the face substrate 6020, after creating a circuit structure by copper plating on the printed circuit board, a white protective agent is used as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, and a portion provided with a through hole is provided. Except for this, it is desirable that a white protective film is formed by applying this protective agent to both sides of the printed circuit board to make the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as a protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the face substrate 6020 has a white surface. May be. Alternatively, by combining these embodiments and forming a protective film by applying a white protective agent, white ink is applied on the white protective film, and the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes whiter. You may comprise as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such a manner, the face substrate 6020 can be made visible in white. The same method can be adopted not only when the substrate is white, but also when it is desired to be visible in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be employed when the substrate is set to a specific color.
Although an example in which the both surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are white is shown, only a part of the area where the color of the face substrate 6020 is white may be white, for example, only the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be white, or the face substrate 6020 may be white. Only a predetermined area where the electronic components on the rear surface are mounted may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-like cover, and a punched opening is provided in the cover so that an electronic component whose mounting mode is desired can be visually recognized. Thus, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 and a specific electronic component for which the mounting mode is to be confirmed may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is irregularly reflected on the cover surface, and the visibility of electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. In addition, when such a cover is colored and opaque, an electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is hidden by the cover, and it is extremely difficult to confirm the mounting mode. . Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punched opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to check the mounting mode from the opening provided in the cover for the electronic component for which the mounting mode is to be checked while protecting the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 with the cover. it can. Further, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, and the mounted electronic components are damaged or deteriorated due to heat. Occurrence can be suppressed. In addition, it is good to comprise so that it may not protrude from an opening in the state which the electronic component protruded back from the surface which makes the back surface of a cover. The cover color may be black opaque or dark opaque. With this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

  It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be white, cream, or the like, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be black, dark blue, or the like. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily seen with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is black. Further, since the face board 6020 is light and the mounted electronic components are dark, the face board 6020 reflected on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. This makes it possible to distinguish the electronic component from the electronic component.

  Note that an LED capable of multicolor emission is formed of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or light, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting state of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Thus, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, but the LEDs mounted on the face board 6020 are easily visible. Alternatively, the electronic component may be mounted on a white or light face substrate by applying black or dark ink to the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before being mounted.

  In this specification, white refers to a color that is visible when an object is diffusely reflected almost uniformly (about 100 to 80%) for visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. The bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized in, for example, cream or light gray by absorbing a certain wavelength region to some extent and irregularly reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black means a color that can be visually recognized when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and partially reflects (approximately 20 to several percent). Yes. The dark color is uniformly absorbed for most of the visible light of all wavelengths, and only partially (approximately 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. It indicates a color that is visible as a near color, for example, a dark blue color.

  The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 491 (A) and 491 (B) may be configured to be moved by hand from the standby position to the upper movement position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not made immovable by the lock mechanism when the power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

  As a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be moved manually, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decorative body is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when the movable decorative body is subjected to a large acceleration during transportation of the gaming machine or installation in a game store, etc. In addition, the movable decorative body may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided for locking the movable decorative body when the power is on when the movable decorative body is at the standby position. When the power is turned off while the movable decorative body is locked, the movable decorative body is moved by the lock mechanism. A method of making the body immovable is considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it is difficult to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body. Therefore, by configuring such a lock mechanism not to be provided, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved by hand.

  Next, the light guide plate will be described as a configuration for enabling the rabbit accessory 6000 to be moved manually. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that makes it possible for a player to visually recognize an aspect in which a predetermined pattern is shining by irregularly reflecting light incident from a side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface. Further, such a light emission pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it is difficult or impossible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body. Therefore, by configuring such a light guide plate not to be provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved by hand.

  With such a configuration, at the time of power interruption, it becomes possible for the store clerk to move the rabbit accessory 6000 directly by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100. Different areas on the rear surface of 6020 can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), after the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so that the rabbit accessory 6000 is looked down from below. Thus, it is easy to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which have been difficult to visually recognize until then. In the example shown in FIG. 491 (B), the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which has been invisible until now, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand. Electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f can be visually recognized.

  Although an example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the lower front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the center front of the game board side effect display device 1600, The light plate may be arranged so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if the light guide plate is provided, the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate. By moving 6000 manually, it is possible to achieve both of the functions of changing the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Although the example in which the region in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 directly by hand has been shown, it is guided so that the hand cannot be inserted in the region not covered by the light guide plate in the game panel opening 1100a. The light plate may be enlarged, and in this case, the rabbit accessory may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm is inserted into an area not covered with the light guide plate of the game panel opening 1100a to move the rabbit accessory 6000. You may comprise as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows insertion of such a bar-like member or plate-like member. It is only necessary to provide an opening of about 0.0 cm and a length of about 1.0 cm. By setting it as such a structure, the area covered with the light guide plate of the game panel opening part 1100a can be enlarged, and it becomes possible to expand the area | region which can produce | present using a light guide plate.

  If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not movable when the power is cut off, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the store clerk is hand or elongated. Although the example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member has been shown, when the accessory at the standby position is made immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power interruption, or completely covers the game panel opening 1100a When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example in which the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 is not reflected at all in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit accessory is in the standby position. It becomes.

  Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine during the initial check of the movable decorative body that is performed when the power is turned on, the control unit and the driving unit of the gaming machine The position where the power switch is turned off or the power switch does not return to the standby position under its own weight when the movable decorative body in a position other than the standby position returns to the standby position when the power supply is not forcibly created. It is good to comprise so that it may stop at the position which moved a little by the dead weight from the position which turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

  At the time of the initial check, the lock of the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is first released by the lock mechanism to move from the immovable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. To do. After the rabbit accessory 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays at the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit action 6000 waits. It stops at the position, and the lock mechanism changes from the movable state to the non-movable state, and the initial check is completed. Even when the game is started and the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved as an effect in response to a start prize or the like, the rabbit accessory 6000 at the standby position first changes from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 Control is performed to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is locked from the unlocked state to the locked state. And

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power interruption state, the store clerk is mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 without the rabbit clerk moving the rabbit accessory 6000 directly by hand. The electronic component can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, at the time of the initial check, since the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position for a predetermined time, the rabbit accessory 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine to turn off the power does not become severe. In addition, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020 can be patterned.

  In addition, in the initial check, not only staying at the moving position for a predetermined time, but also when moving from the standby position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the moving position (for example, between the standby position and the moving position). Position), the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is at the predetermined position, the power switch provided in the gaming machine is turned off to turn off the power. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to remain in a predetermined position. With this configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from different angles. It becomes. In addition, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020 can be patterned.

  In the initial check, the example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position for a predetermined time has been shown. However, in these examples, the face substrate 6020 is in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 remains at the moving position or the predetermined position. You may comprise so that the 1st face light emission part 6023a and 2nd face light emission part 6023b with which it is equipped may be lighted in a predetermined | prescribed aspect. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the first and second facial light emitting units 6023a and 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner before the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position and starts moving to the moving position. May be. For example, as a light emission mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be lit in the same color. In this case, the emission color is preferably white. With such a configuration, the store clerk can check whether there is any abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b. It is possible to check what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually recognizing the back side of the face substrate 6020 with the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is at a predetermined position or moving position being disconnected. Moreover, it becomes possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality when the player makes a complaint about the light emission mode.

  Although an example in which the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are lit in the same color has been shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light emitting units 6023 and emit light in the same color. In this case, the emission color may be configured to include at least white. In such a configuration, if any of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. Emits light in different colors (for example, when a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red light, and is a mixture of those colors) Therefore, it is possible to identify the face light-emitting portion having a problem easily by the light emission color.

  When the power interruption state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in a state not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, the rabbit accessory 6000 is once moved to the standby position, and then the initial operation check as described above may be started again from the beginning. By setting it as such a structure, it becomes possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 in the appropriate position which is easy to visually recognize the back surface of the face substrate 6020.

  Various embodiments can be considered for the aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000 itself, the movement aspect of the rabbit accessory 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit accessory 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. Several examples are shown below.

  FIG. 492 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed by the rabbit accessory moving from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, the rabbit cover 6000 is constituted by the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 and can move between the standby position and the moving position, but the body portion 6030 is a game panel. It is configured not to move relative to 1100. FIG. 492 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. . In addition, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 492 (B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. In this state, almost the entire back surface of the face board is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Yes.

  In addition, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually rotated about the front-rear direction. By adopting such a configuration, it is very easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f that are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode. Become.

  FIG. 493 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically long rectangular shape. During operation of the rabbit accessory 6000, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 move to the upper moving position, thereby executing a predetermined effect. Will do.

  FIG. 493 (A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has the first ear portion 6021 and Only a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 in a state of being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is reflected. FIG. 493 (B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving position. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has almost the back surface of the face substrate 6020. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving a member between the member whose electronic component mounting mode is to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the visual mode of the member whose electronic component mounting mode is to be confirmed is changed. Is possible. In addition, although the aspect about the rabbit accessory 6000 was described in another Example, you may apply these aspects to the 1st ear | edge part 6021 and the 2nd ear | edge part 6022 in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 494 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body part 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be vertically long. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the body part 6030 is configured to make the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 invisible, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the movement position, the body part The rabbit accessory 6000 is positioned above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

  In the embodiment described so far, the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change, but the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is an opaque member when moved to the moving position. In addition, in a movable decorative member that increases in area when viewed from the front by deploying in a horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, the area viewed from the front is increased, so that the game board side effect display device 1600 A situation may occur in which it is difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate on the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, the area in front view may be manually reduced in a state where power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, when moving to the moving position during the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front is increased is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front is not increased. Later, the area when viewed from the front may be increased. With such a configuration, it is easy to confirm the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

  An example in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the player visually recognizes the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, when an effect that darkens almost the entire display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is performed as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high, an electronic device mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 by the player The parts will be visually recognized, and there is a possibility that the player will be in an awkward state instead of trying to excite the performance. In addition, when the so-called reach deviation occurs when the decorative design stops after the reach state has been formed, the game is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the effect of darkening the entire surface is executed, the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is visually recognized by the player, and when the player is in a state of disappointment of the reach, Furthermore, there is a risk that the player will be in an abusive state.

  Therefore, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is located at the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening the almost entire display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, such a reflection is visually recognized. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses the above. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are located in the middle of the display area of the face board 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The face board 6020 is prevented from being reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by being hidden by the ear portion 6022. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, the body 6030 is located in the middle of the display area of the face board 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that it is hidden by these members and the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 492, when executing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the like are given to the player. There is a risk of being visually recognized. Therefore, by performing some kind of display only in the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is aroused in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. It becomes. In the lower front part of the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, for example, it may be configured to display a decorative symbol, display the number of reservations, or display the reserved image indicating the jackpot expectation related to the change. . In this case, the image color may be darkened or the image size may be made smaller than in the case of displaying the decorative symbol, the number of reservations, and the reserved image. Further, these may not be displayed statically but dynamically as an animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 less noticeable during the game.

  After the darkening effect is started, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 492 (B) while the darkening effect is being performed. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 493 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 493 (B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 494 (A). You may comprise so that the effect which moves the rabbit accessory 6000 to the movement position shown in FIG. However, in this case, the electronic component mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 is easily visible.

  Therefore, when an effect of moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position is executed, the rabbit accessory 6000 overlaps with the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. You may comprise so that the reflection suppression image which suppresses reflection may be displayed. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6600 moves, an image that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 of the face board 6020 is displayed on the game board side effect display. By displaying in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is aroused.

  The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, or one size (about 1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit accessory. It is assumed that the outer shape of the reflection suppression image is completely overlapped with the outer shape of the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, or the reflection suppression image protrudes about 1-2 mm around the rabbit accessory when viewed from the front. Good. The reflection suppression image may be configured in white or light color. By making the color white or light, the reflection can be made inconspicuous. Note that a reflection suppression image may be configured using black or dark color in addition to white or light color. Furthermore, the image in which the reflection suppression image is dynamically displayed may be used.

  The timing of starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be set before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving in the middle of the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the movement position, the reflection suppression image may be configured to be moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. The reflection suppression image may be displayed until the darkening effect ends. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, the reflection suppression image may be continuously displayed. After that, when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is performed.

  It should be noted that a plurality of such reflection suppression image modes are prepared and different jackpot expectations are assigned to the reflection suppression image modes, and any reflection suppression image is displayed when the rabbit character moves. Thus, it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpot. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher. In this case, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, it is possible to make it difficult to notice such reflection even if some electronic components are reflected. .

  In addition, although the point which displays a reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 was described, also when moving the 1st ear part 6021 and the 1st ear part 6022, even if the aspect mentioned above is applied. Good.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 be black or dark. In addition, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When electronic components are mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, it is desirable that the electronic components have a dark color. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 which are members that suppress the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are the game board. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it can be made difficult for the player to notice the reflection.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 be dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic component is mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. In the case where an electronic component is mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player due to the reflection Can be reduced.

  The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, reflection in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, up, down, left, and right, and the entire area on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved forward in the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. You may comprise so that this effect may be performed after moving to a position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 is positioned between the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves the face to force the rabbit accessory 6000 to appear. As long as the mode is not visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. When the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is to be ended, after the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is brightened, the rabbit accessory 6000 is waited from the moving position. By moving to the position, the influence on the player due to the reflection can be reduced.

  As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of the members other than the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is played. You may comprise so that the state of the rear surface of the member can be confirmed by reflecting in the display area of the board | board side production | presentation display apparatus 1600. FIG. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided to transmit a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 or to supply power from the power supply board 931 is a game board side effect display. The display area of the apparatus 1600 may be reflected. Further, on the back surface of the relay substrate, a connector, a control element, and the like to which a flat cable used for transmission of control signals and power supply is connected are surface-mounted. These may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the electronic component mounted on the relay board.

  Although the example of the relationship between the standby position and the movement position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown in the vertical direction, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and between the rear standby position and the front movement position. You may comprise so that it may move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about the rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, so that the rabbit accessory The upper part of 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to be tilted forward. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable between a standby position in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a movement position where the upper portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved forward. May be. Even in such a configuration, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be increased by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the movement position. Is possible.

  An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600 has been shown, but the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be fixedly provided, The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable about a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the up / down / left / right direction, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided in the moved direction may be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for the rabbit accessory fixedly provided. Become.

  An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided, and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the rabbit accessory 6000 that is fixedly provided is on the game board side. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable is shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move backward and the rabbit accessory 6000 move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 that are not overlapped in the front view may be moved so as to approach each other in the horizontal direction and overlap in the front view. Good. Even in such a configuration, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be increased.

  Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided has been shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. And you may comprise so that the back surface of the face board | substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least 1 of the display area of several production | presentation display apparatuses. Further, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face in different directions so that the rabbit accessory 6000 can move to the front side. It may be configured. In such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices, and the cause of the abnormality can be easily found.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect display devices are provided, and by moving the effect display device, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 has at least one display area of the effect display device or a plurality of effects. You may comprise so that it may reflect in the display area of a display apparatus.

  Although an example in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off is shown, during a so-called demonstration in which the player has not played a game for a predetermined time. You may comprise so that the rear surface of the face board | substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 by darkening substantially the whole display area of the game board side effect display apparatus 1600.

  FIG. 495 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 487 to FIG. 494 is provided is not the front lower center of the game board side effect display device 1600, but the left lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become. In addition, a stump accessory 6100 shaped like a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a whole of the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board 1100 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 487. Are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, in the position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the backside grass character 6800, the first giant tree feature 6600, the second giant tree feature 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first big tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. Yes. Moreover, the 1st grass-working thing 6470 and the 2nd grass-working material 6475 are provided behind these, the 3rd grass-working product 6480 is provided behind these, and it overlaps with the 3rd grass-working material 6480 in this back. A fourth grass role 6485 is provided, a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided behind this, a mountain role 6500 is provided behind them, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain role 6500. An apparatus 1600 is provided. Thus, a depth feeling can be given by arranging a plurality of actors in layers.

  A stump portion 6200 shaped like a stump, a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 shaped like grass are provided in the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump portion 6200 is provided. The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 constitute a stump combination 6100 as a unit.

  FIG. 496 shows a stump combination 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each formed of a plate-like green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 is visible through a member located behind the surface formed by the green transparent synthetic resin at the outer edge portion excluding its lower end portion. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink, and the rear of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not visible. . The 2nd grass movable part 6370 also has the structure similar to the 1st grass movable part 6360, and is provided with the 2nd grass decoration part 6370a.

  As shown in FIG. 496 (A), the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200. As shown to 496 (B), the 1st grass movable part 6360 moves leftward from the state located in the front surface of the stump part 6200, and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 moves rightward from the state located in front of the stump part 6200. It is possible to take the state moved to. First grass movable portion 6360 and second grass movable portion 6370 can be moved by a driving mechanism (not shown) controlled by peripheral control board 1510.

  In the state shown in FIG. 496 (A), the end surface that forms the right end of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end surface that forms the left end of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening 6210a includes a region where the first grass decoration 6360a of the first grass movable unit 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration 6370a of the second grass movable unit 6370. It is configured so as to be visible through a region that is not. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and the rear portion provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting unit 6354 is configured to be visible.

  In this state, as the first light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to emit light, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not provided with the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360. The region and the second grass movable portion 6370 are irradiated with the region where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided, and the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided with the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass movable portion. You may comprise so that it can take the state irradiated to the player through the area | region where the 2nd grass decoration part 6370a of the part 6370 is not provided.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200. Since it is in the state which moved to the right direction from the state to do, it has become the state which the visibility of the lower half of the stump part 6200 improved. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and the rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting unit 6354 is changed from a state where it is difficult to visually recognize to a state where it is easily visible compared to the state before the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 move.

  In this state, as the second light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to the light emission mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a toward the front where the player is located. You may comprise so that the state irradiated directly may be taken. In the second light emission effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through the region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movable portion 6370 where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided. Compared with the first light-emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player, it is possible to give a visually strong stimulus to the player.

  The first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (for example, the probability variation gaming state, the short-time gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state that are advantageous over the normal gaming state In the first gaming state, the period in which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period in which the second light emitting effect is executed. In such a case, the period during which the second light emission effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the first light emission effect is executed. Alternatively, the first gaming state is executed for a relatively long period of time in the first gaming state compared to the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is relatively longer than in the first gaming state. You may comprise so that a 2nd light emission effect may be performed during a period. Further, only the first light emission effect is performed in the first game state, and both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed in the second game state, or only the second light emission effect is performed. Good. The second light-emitting effect, which is more visually stimulated than the first light-emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives the player an interest (effect that gives a special feeling) and is therefore used only when the game state is advantageous. Or, when the game state is more advantageous, the entertainment period of the player can be improved by using the effect period longer.

  In this way, in the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the player will experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time compared to the first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player. The excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state can be further increased.

  FIG. 497 (A) shows the stump 6200. The stump portion 6200 includes a stump plate portion 6210 that is a colored and opaque plate-like member provided on the front side, and a stump box portion 6300 having a box shape provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-like member, and the outer shape is similar to that of a tree stump, and a stump opening 6210a is provided at the center thereof.

  FIG. 497 (B) shows the positional relationship of the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the figure, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and imitates a state in which a hole is formed in the side surface of the stump.

  FIG. 498 (A) shows the stump box 6300. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 constituting an upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 constituting a right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 constituting a lower wall, and a box constituting a left wall. The left wall portion 6340 is constituted by a box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are trapezoidal in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. It is structured long. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front side is inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be obtained.

  FIG. 498 (B) shows a state where the stump box 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this drawing, a portion where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 provided in the rear wall cover 6356 is located is schematically shown by a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352.

  FIG. 498C is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped like a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 includes a first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a shaped like a root of root vegetables and a second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf.

  FIG. 498 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting portion 6354 configured by surface mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 in front view. The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is irradiated forward and perpendicular to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 in front view. Specifically, the first back wall light emitting unit 6354a corresponding to the first back wall cover light scattering unit 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable has a second rear wall cover light scattering shape having a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 496 (A), in the state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located on the front surface of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is The first grass movable portion 6360 is configured to be provided at a position that does not overlap with a region where the first grass decorative portion 6360a is not provided or a region where the second grass movable portion 6370a is not provided with the second grass decorative portion 6370a. Good. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is in the light emission mode as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

  The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b do not contact the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it is easy to dissipate heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 fails due to heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

  The stump bonus item 6100 is used for the effect of informing the jackpot expectation in the gaming machine. Specifically, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right from the state in which the stump opening 6210a is difficult to visually recognize, so that the stump opening 6210a is easily visible. If the stump opening 6210a is in an easily visible state, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 that is visible through the stump opening 6210a. What kind of aspect will it be (for example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear side in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to shine red, shine white, or turned off) Depending on whether or not it looks white, it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation to stop display of the decorative pattern that is changing in a manner indicating a big hit is higher than usual. For example, each of the light emission modes of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be set such that the expected degree of stop display in a mode in which the stop mode of the decorative pattern being changed indicates a big hit is different. With such a configuration, the player can be greatly interested in the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

  Although the example in which the degree of expectation to stop display in a manner in which the stop pattern of the decorative pattern being changed shows a big hit is reported according to the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 has been shown, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emission Such notification may be performed by making the portion 6354b have a different light emission mode.

  For example, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a does not emit light, and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b emits light weakly in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of root vegetables is white. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf is green and is visible to the player. Further, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly in white and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b emits light weakly in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of root vegetables is obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape resembling a root vegetable leaf, is green and is visible to the player. Further, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly in red and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b emits light weakly in green, whereby the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of root vegetables is obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b having a red shape imitating a root vegetable leaf is green and is visible to the player.

  The first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly so that the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not strongly decorate parts other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. In addition, the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b emits light weakly so that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b does not strongly decorate parts other than the second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b. Because. By setting it as such a structure, the effect as if only the rear wall cover light-scattering part 6358 is a light emission mode is realizable.

  By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression that imitates a radish of a root vegetable in the first light emission example and the second light emission example and a carrot of a root vegetable in the third light emission example. Further, in the first light emission example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the first rear wall light are not emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root of a radish). Further, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (radish and carrots in this example) are expressed by making the light emission colors in the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a different. It is possible to do.

  An example is shown in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are caused to emit light weakly so that an effect can be realized as if only the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 is in a light emission mode. However, in such a production, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b emit light strongly, so that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall are formed on the entire inner surface of the stump box 6300. You may comprise so that the light from the light emission part 6354b may reach | attain strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to emit light in the same color (for example, white).

  The light from the rear wall substrate 6352 may be reflected on the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 so as to be visible to the player side. Good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin constituting the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion capable of scattering each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. You may comprise as follows. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, plating that forms a metal thin film such as aluminum on each inner surface constituting at least the stump box portion 6300, etc. You may make it comprise a reflection part by giving a process. With such a configuration, light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and irradiated on the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of irregularly reflecting light forward.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white via a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 move to a movement position, respectively, and the box rear wall part 6350 is visually recognizable from the stump opening part 6210a, a rear wall light emission part Even when 6354 is in the off state, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 that imitates the shape of root vegetables. The player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated.

  Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of root vegetables has been shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made smooth without providing a portion that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354. May be configured to pass as it is. Even in such a configuration, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above-described example.

  Although the example in which the box rear wall 6350 of the stump box 6300 includes the rear wall light emitting part 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 has been described, the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, A configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided in any of the box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, the box left wall part 6340, and the box rear wall part 6350 constituting the stump box part 6300, For example, a box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, and a box lower wall portion 6330 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be provided. In addition, a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided in all of the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350. In these examples, when a predetermined wall portion is provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, the other wall portion is not provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. Only a configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided.

  The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is transparent or By forming the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 in a light emitting state when the first grass movable unit 6360 and the second grass movable unit 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is made of a translucent synthetic resin. You may comprise so that the rear surface of the stump board part 6210 may be illuminated by the irradiated light. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 passes through the stump plate unit 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump plate unit 6210 is decorated with light. Even if the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are made of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. Good. For example, you may form these with a brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be printed with a brown ink with a wooden pattern to form an opaque or translucent region on a portion of the stump plate portion.

  Although the example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white is shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown as in the stump plate portion 6210. In such an embodiment, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is turned off, so that root vegetables with soil attached thereto can be expressed in the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358.

  When the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall part located rearward Although an example in which 6350 is visible is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are arranged with the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 as rotation axes. The upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 is configured to be able to be driven forward so that the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed when the upper part of the first grass movable part 6370 falls forward. The box rear wall 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

  Although the example which provided the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 in front of the stump part 6200 was shown, only one side of the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 is front front of the stump part 6200. The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left moving position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and this member moves to the right or left movement position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. It may be configured.

  The box rear wall portion 6350 includes the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, with the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 as a rotation axis, the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a drive source (not shown) so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310, The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotated so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is in contact with the inner surface of the box left wall portion 6340 with a driving source (not shown) as a rotation axis. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is positioned on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player through the rear wall cover 6356, and the rear wall substrate The player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 in any one of the aspects in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not positioned on the front side of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. Further, since the stump combination 6100 is located on the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as viewed from the player's viewpoint, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated about the upper side or the left side, so that the rear wall after movement The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. In addition, you may make it rotate on the right side or a variable.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a shape larger than that of the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210 so that the outer edges thereof overlap in front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is enlarged from the original shape to the periphery. In this case, in a portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall. The light reflected backward by the part 6340 and the like can be reflected again toward the player in front.

  Further, the light emitting unit may be provided in a portion other than the region covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion simulating the root or the portion simulating the cut end of the stump plate portion 6210 so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light at the same time. You may comprise. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured such that no light emitting part other than the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is provided. Also in this case, the light reflected backward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, etc. in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery. It becomes possible to reflect toward the player in front again.

  In the example shown using FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 is constituted by a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 499, the box rear wall portion 6350 includes a rear wall cover 6356 located on the near side, a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the middle, and a rear wall plate portion 6380 located on the far side. And was made up of. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating a root vegetable, and has a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape imitating the root of the root vegetable and a second rear shape having an outer shape imitating the root vegetable leaf. A wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind can be visually recognized.

  The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape imitating a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a imitating the root portion of the root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b imitating the leaf portion of the root vegetable. A white protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a with a white protective agent. A green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b with a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. In addition, two LEDs are surface-mounted as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b on the second rear wall substrate 6352b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 is formed by the rear wall plate portion 6380.

  The first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be configured as separate printed circuit boards and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 so as to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately coating one printed board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

  In the stump box portion 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 to the movement position as described above. Also, in this embodiment, as a light emission mode when using the first rear wall light emission unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emission unit 6354b for production, a weak light emission mode that can be visually recognized as root vegetables emit light, You may employ | adopt the strong light emission aspect which becomes visible so that the whole stump box part 6300 may light-emit.

  Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are turned off, the colors and shapes of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b are used in the stump box unit 6300. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a imitating the root portion, and the second through the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b imitating the leaf portion. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. As described above, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

  In this example, a plurality of grass winnings 6400 are provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the front side of the rabbit hand and the stump role.

  In the example shown in FIG. 495, as described above, the first grass combination 6470 to the fourth grass combination 6485 are provided as the grass combination 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. Yes. Below, the several embodiment in such a grass | cured material 6400 is shown.

  A grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500A is formed of a grass substrate 6420 having a colored, opaque, plate-like shape, and having an external shape simulating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. The grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is formed of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the grass-related material 6400 shown in FIG. 500B includes a grass substrate 6420 having a colored, opaque, plate-like shape, which has a shape similar to grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is formed by LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIGS. 500A and 500B, the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 is similar to grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be white. In this case, the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 emits light in green or brown, so that the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. The color of the grass substrate 6420 may be green or brown. Green can express the color of living grass, and brown can express the color of withered grass. Thereby, the decoration imitating grass can be realized by both the color and shape of the grass substrate 6420.

  In addition, as the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420, an LED having the same color as that of the grass substrate 6420 is employed. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is used as the mounted LED. With such a configuration, the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be employed when an LED is provided on the substrate as a light emitting unit.

  The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated forward and perpendicular to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize an effect that gives a visually strong image. Note that when the grass front cover 6440 described later is provided, the LED that constitutes the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is arranged so that the light is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. You may comprise so that it may mount. With such a configuration, light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass front cover 6440, and thus the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. The player can visually recognize the effect of the grass front cover 6440 as a whole. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

  On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible to cause the player to visually recognize the effect as if the afterglow was radiated on the grass substrate 6420. Note that, when the grass rear cover 6460 described later is provided, light is irradiated toward the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460, so that the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460. The player can visually recognize the effect as if the entire grass cover 6460 was illuminated. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

  Through holes (not shown) constituting an electronic circuit are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420. Moreover, the metal which comprises the electronic circuit provided on a printed circuit board is exposed to a through hole, and when copper is employ | adopted as a metal, a through hole will be visually recognized with the brown which is a color of copper. . Here, when at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible from the player, the through hole may be visible from the player. In particular, when white is adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420, the player sees brown, which is the color of the through hole provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, and functions as a decoration of the grass substrate 6420. There is a problem that is lost. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, instead of concentrating the through-holes at a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes may be arranged so as to be entirely dispersed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through hole so as to follow the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on the extended line of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through hole has the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is a part. A decorative shape simulating grass may be formed by arranging a through hole in a linear shape in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Further, one or more patterns having the same color as the through hole may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through hole may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through hole is brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. The above-described example is preferably applied to all through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least some of the through holes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the function as a decoration is impaired. In addition, a through hole may be provided in the board | substrate with which the accessory in another example is provided, and you may make it apply the embodiment regarding such a through hole.

  FIGS. 500C to 500E illustrate an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are configured to form a grass accessory 6400. The grass front cover 6440 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape is formed in a decorative shape simulating grass. Further, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be covered with a grass front cover 6440 in a front view.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500C, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500D, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and all the front surfaces of the grass substrate 6420 are covered with the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500E, the grass front cover 6440 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 is covered. The front cover 6440 protrudes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500C, the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. Moreover, a sense of depth can be produced. In the example shown in FIGS. 500 (D) and 500 (E), the grass substrate 6420 located behind can be visually recognized by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. It is good. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. Moreover, a sense of depth can be produced.

  FIGS. 500F to 500H illustrate an example in which a grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass support 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460. The grass cover 6460 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape is formed in a decorative shape imitating grass. Further, the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 provided in the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be covered with the grass rear cover 6460.

  In the example shown in FIG. 500 (F), the size of the grass back cover 6460 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and the back of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass back cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500G, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460 have the same size, and the back of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass back cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), the grass rear cover 6460 is larger than the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass rear cover 6460, and the grass outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 is covered. The rear cover 6460 protrudes. In this example, the outer shape of the grass cover 6460 is visible in front view.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 500 (F) and 500 (G), the herb 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute an effect such that the grasswork 6400 rotates 180 degrees and the grass cover 6460 faces forward by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting such a configuration, a visual aspect as shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) is obtained, and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) can be obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass cover 6460. Moreover, a sense of depth can be produced.

  FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is configured to be smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420. Further, modifications of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface that forms the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is smoothly molded. Yes. Note that the grass front cover transparent portion 6442 described later is also configured so that light passing therethrough passes without being irregularly reflected by the same configuration. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

  In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 to the light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. For example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 emits light in green, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a, and the colored and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover and the colored transparent portion 6442b. The grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front formed in this way are formed. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or colored transparent printing is performed, so that the grass front cover is colored transparent. The portion 6442b may be formed. The example of forming the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b by pasting a colored transparent sticker on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or performing color transparent printing is shown, but the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 is shown. The grassy front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be formed by attaching a colored transparent sticker to a part of the frame or printing colored transparent. Moreover, it is good to employ | adopt green as a color of the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

  In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, since the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be displayed in green. Also, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, so that the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes difficult to be seen by the player, and the grass substrate front surface in the extinguished state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is intimidated by directly viewing the light-emitting portion 6422 by the player. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the intensity of light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, which may cause the player to feel dazzling. It becomes possible to deter. In addition, by emitting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is a modified example. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express white, green, and white modes from the top in front view.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 in this example. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided in the upper portion and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the lower portion. Has been. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front or rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to lens cutting or matte finish. Preferably, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or on both the front surface and the rear surface. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cutting and matte finish, so the shape of the member located behind is difficult or impossible to see, but its color Is visible to the player without any change. Although an example in which the light scattering portion is formed in the colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed in the colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, it becomes visible in a mode in which the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin located in the front is mixed with the member located in the rear. In addition, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. Further, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border an edge portion at an edge portion forming an outer peripheral edge in a front view. In this case, light from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the end portions of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, so that the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from the front. The outer shape can be made to stand out. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the light scattering portion.

  In this example, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, so that the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in a state that is difficult for the player to see, and is turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is awakened because the player directly recognizes the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on, light from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, so that the player feels dazzled. Can be suppressed.

  The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. With this configuration, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared with the case where the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422) are blurred, the presence of the electronic components is less noticeable, and the player It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that would be an awakening. When the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, electronic components (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422) mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 are provided. ) Can be made more inconspicuous. Further, the color of the grass substrate 6420 behind the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be visually recognized, and the color of the grass substrate 6420 is used as a decoration while blurring the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. It is the mode which plays the function of.

  FIG. 501 (E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover colorless transparent in the example shown in FIG. 501 (D). This is an example in which the portion 6442a is modified. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, white, green, and white grass can be represented from above in a front view.

  The example shown in FIG. 501 (F) is a modification of the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B). In this example, a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. A colorless transparent synthetic resin forms a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and an opaque synthetic resin forms a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 form a grass front. A cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is entirely formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed by applying a seal or printing that makes the back of the grass front cover 6440 unrecognizable. May be. Further, by applying a seal or printing that makes the back of the grass front cover 6440 unrecognizable, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is not formed, but the back of the grass front cover 6440 is partially behind. You may comprise so that the grass front cover opaque part 6446 may be formed by giving the seal | sticker and printing which become invisible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the aspect of the front side of the part where the seal or printing is performed can be visually recognized. For example, when the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible and make the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible. . Further, in the case where the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is made visible while the rear of the grass front cover 6440 is made invisible. Is possible. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow or brown may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing the opaque portion.

  In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect via the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Visually visible. On the other hand, regarding the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420. Although the example which employ | adopts yellow and brown as a color of the grass front cover opaque part 6446 was shown, in this aspect, it is possible to express the aspect in which snow piled up with dead grass.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in a light emission state, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, and the grass grows. Can be expressed.

  As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be adopted. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated entirely with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 thus configured and the grass front cover opaque portion made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin are colorless and transparent. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 is pasted with a silver seal, printed with a silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing it. In addition, the opaque part formed in silver in this way has a function of reflecting light. In addition, you may comprise so that a colored coating material may be apply | coated to the opaque part shape formed in silver, or a colored transparent seal | sticker may be stuck. For example, it is possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold by thinly applying a yellow paint. In other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when an opaque portion or a reflective portion is provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are visible in white. It is possible to express a form in which frost or snow has fallen on the grass.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is scattered by being incident on the grass substrate 6420, and finally the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Will be decorated. Thus, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. In addition, by providing a colored transparent layer in the foremost layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible with a silver color and a predetermined color.

  FIG. 501 (G) is a modification of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F). This is an example. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to represent grass in a white, silver, or white form from above in a front view.

  FIG. 502 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass can be expressed by a portion that can be visually recognized by the grass substrate 6420 in white and a green mode by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It has become.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, it is desirable that the light emitting color is the same or the same color as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, for example, green or yellow green It is desirable to emit light. In this case, a dynamic effect can be performed with the color of the grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. Further, the light reflected without passing through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be viewed in green.

  FIG. 502 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 502 (A). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to represent grass in the form of white, green, and green from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in a color in which the green color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is mixed. The grass substrate front light emitting section 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to view.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated. It becomes possible to set it as an aspect. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422.

  FIG. 502 (C) shows the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 in the grass front cover colored transparent portion in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B). This example is modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to represent grass in the form of white, green, and green from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 passes through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and part of the light does not pass. It is reflected and scattered by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set as a decoration mode. Further, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422.

  FIG. 502 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white, green, yellow, brown, or silver aspect from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed. It becomes possible to set it as a decoration aspect. Further, the reflected light decorates the exposed white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. It is possible to express a mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 502 (E) shows a modification of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 502 (D). This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white, yellow, brown, silver, or green form from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, thereby exposing the exposed white color. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. It is possible to express a mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 503 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be set to the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the front light emitting unit 6422 on the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colorless light scattering unit 6444a of the front grass cover, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate can be decorated. 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. Thus, it is possible to express an aspect in which grass grows.

  FIG. 503 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503 (A). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass in a white, white, yellow, brown, or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set in the light emission mode, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set in the decorative mode by the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Further, light is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. It becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with green, and the grass grows. Can express.

  In the example shown in FIG. 503 (B), FIG. 503 (C) shows the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, white, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the white grass The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with green, and the grass grows. Can express.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 503 (A) to 503 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the grass front cover colored light scattering. The portion 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 503 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503 (C). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the white grass The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, and a mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. It is configured. The grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The LED constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind the position that forms the boundary line of these members. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the light-off state.

  For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 501 (B), LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 are arranged behind the boundary line between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. When configured to be arranged, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 becomes inconspicuous, so the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is white and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is green. It becomes possible for the player to clearly see the image.

  Similarly, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored. Relationship between light scattering portion 6444b, grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and grass front cover opaque portion 6446, grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and grass front cover opaque portion 6446, grass front cover colored light Also in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is arranged. It becomes possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the LED less noticeable.

  Further, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass substrate 6420 are exposed. Between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colored light scattering portion 6444b where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front Also in the relationship with the cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is present. Can be made inconspicuous.

  In the combination described above, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LED that constitutes the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

  The light from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 may be irradiated vertically to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted. Irradiation may be performed in a direction perpendicular to the tangent line.

  For example, in the case where both of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a are members capable of transmitting light, from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 The light irradiation direction may be configured to irradiate perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member that forms a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is mounted. It is good to comprise so that light may be irradiated to the direction of the member which makes a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque part 6446 perpendicular to the tangent.

  When a rectangular LED is adopted as the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LED coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the contact of the boundary line at the position where the LED is disposed. It is good to arrange like this.

  When two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting part 6422 has a size of the same width that does not protrude from the front view in the part corresponding to the boundary line. A V-shaped groove may be provided. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is refracted and visually recognized by the V-shaped groove. In other words, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 can be made inconspicuous. The shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, and any shape that can be refracted may be used. On the other hand, when the boundary line is configured by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 are refracted and visually recognized without providing such a groove, and grass It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. It is configured. Thereby, a feeling of depth can be given. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

  Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. Is called. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color so that the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized.

  Further, light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that light is directed toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and that is not positioned in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and in the light emitting state, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in a different color can be used as a decoration mode. It is to be noted that the LED constituting the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, so that More light can reach the end.

  FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500 (D). In these examples, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 are configured to have the same size. Further, modifications of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 504 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface that forms the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is smoothly molded. Yes. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. By setting it as such a structure, the grass board | substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a can be directly visually recognized. In addition, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass in the entire grass combination 6400 can be expressed in white.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, which expresses a mode in which grass grows. it can.

  FIG. 504 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, white and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 504 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is a modified example. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, green and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  FIG. 504 (D) shows an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 504 (E) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is the grass front cover colorless transparent in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D). This is a modified example of the portion 6442a. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, white and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 504 (F) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 504 (G) shows a modification of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 505 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass in the green grass 6400 can be expressed as a whole.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 505 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, green and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 505 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (E). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, green and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  FIG. 505 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, the green, yellow, brown, or silver-colored grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 505 (E) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass of a yellow, brown, silver, or green form can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 506 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass of the grass-like object 6400 can express the white-colored grass.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 506 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to represent grass in a white or green, yellow, brown, or silver aspect from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 506 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 506 (A) to 506 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the grass front cover colored light scattering. The portion 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 506 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass in a yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed by the entire grass combination 6400.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light arrives and the end of the grasswork 6400 can be decorated with a predetermined color. More specifically, since the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from an oblique direction, the portion that appears to be exposed can be visually recognized in a state of being lit with a predetermined emission color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 with green, and it is possible to express a mode in which grass grows. In addition, in the example which provided the other grass front cover opaque part 6446, it can be made visible in such a mode.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D), the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 of the same size as the grass front cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

  Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are displayed. The decoration is performed with a color in which both are mixed, and the decoration on the grass substrate 6420 is also performed with the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422.

  Further, light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that light is directed toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and that is not positioned in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and in the light emitting state, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in a different color can be used as a decoration mode.

  FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 500 (E). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is disposed outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured to protrude, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 507 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface that forms the grass front cover 6440 is not subjected to processing such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is smoothly molded. Yes. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By setting it as such a structure, the grass board | substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442a can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent and white manner from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, which expresses a mode in which grass grows. it can.

  FIG. 507 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, white, and green manner from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (C) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is used as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is used as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (B). This is a modified example. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, the green transparent, green, and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, colorless and transparent, white, and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440, Can be decorated with green color, and a mode of grass growth can be expressed.

  FIG. 507 (E) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a as the grass front cover colorless transparent in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D). This is an example in which the portion 6442a is modified. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and translucent, white, and white manner from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 507 (F) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 507 (G) shows a modification of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 508 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, green transparent and green grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 508 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass of green transparent, green, and green modes can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 508 (C) shows an example of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 508 (B). This is an example in which the portion 6442b is modified. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass in a green translucent, green, and white mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate with green and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 508 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass in a green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 508 (E) shows a modification of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 508 (D). This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or green mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated in green. Can be expressed, and can express the mode of growing grass.

  FIG. 509 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to represent grass in an aspect that is colorless and transparent and white from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 509 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off, grass in a colorless, transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass grows.

  FIG. 509 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (G). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emission mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It is possible to express a mode in which grass grows.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 509 (A) to 509 (C), the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, so that the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the grass front cover colored light scattering. The portion 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  FIG. 509 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, grass in a yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed by the entire grass combination 6400.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 so that the light reaches the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Reaches the upper end of the grass substrate 6420 so that light can be emitted upward and backward. This makes it possible to perform decoration by irradiating other members with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 in green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided to decorate other members, rather than decorating the grass accessory 6400 itself.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), the outer shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

  Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, decoration is performed with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, The decoration on the grass substrate 6420 is also performed by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. Further, light emitted from the grass substrate front surface light emitting unit 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that light is directed toward the end of the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and that is not positioned in front of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned off and in the light emitting state, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in a different color can be used as a decoration mode.

  510A to 510D illustrate an example in which the example illustrated in FIG. 500H is modified. In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the size of the grass rear cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460 is covered with the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 510 (A), a colorless and transparent grass back cover 6460 is provided behind the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin treatment, and is formed smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass-backed cover colorless transparent portion 6462a positioned behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent and white manner from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the exposed portion of the grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462a in front view in green, and grass grows. Aspects can be expressed.

  FIG. 510 (B) is an example in which the grass-back cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into the grass-back cover colored transparent portion 6462b in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). As the color of the grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b, green may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, green-colored and white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colored transparent portion 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the light emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it becomes possible to decorate the portion exposed in the front view of the grass rear cover colored transparent portion 6462b in green, and grass grows. Aspects can be expressed.

  FIG. 510C shows an example in which the grass-back cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into the grass-back cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in the example shown in FIG. 510A. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is in an extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and translucent and white manner from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light, the grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424, it becomes possible to decorate a portion exposed in front view of the grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in green, and grass grows. The aspect which is present can be expressed.

  FIG. 510D shows an example in which the grass-back cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is transformed into the grass-back cover opaque portion 6466 in the example shown in FIG. 510A. As the color of the grass-back cover opaque portion 6466, yellow, brown, or silver may be adopted. Further, white may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emission mode, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466 so that the light reaches the edge that forms the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Thus, the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 in green, and to express a mode in which grass grows.

In the example shown in FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. It is configured. Thereby, a feeling of depth can be given.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. In addition, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is configured to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460, and the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460. Can be visually recognized.

  FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G) show modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 501 (G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 511 (B), a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit is provided in the grass substrate 6420. The rear is visible through the substrate opening 6426.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 511 (C) to 511 (E) and FIGS. 512 (A) to 512 (G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 is located. A grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit is provided, and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible through the grass front cover opening 6448.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 511 (F) to 511 (H), a grass back cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass of the decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit on the grass substrate 6420. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. A grass cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-like physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, it is possible to visually recognize the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (B) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-like physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is configured to be directly visible. Yes. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, it is possible to directly view the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  FIG. 511 (C) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a form in which a punched hole-like physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440, and the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover opening 6448 is directly visible. It is configured to be possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided. In this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

  The grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a constituting a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front, and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a. The grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible via the. On the other hand, in the front view, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap with the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c constituting a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. Is provided. With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also in the grass front cover opening 6448. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized from the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448. Decoration is done.

  When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in a light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided in the grass front cover 6440 are provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated by the light emitted from the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are set to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b, It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front 3rd light emission part 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the front 2nd light emission part 6422b and the grass substrate front surface 3rd light emission part 6422c.

  FIG. 511 (D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). FIG. 511 (E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). Also in these examples, the same effect is acquired by employ | adopting the same aspect as the grass front cover opening part 6448 in the example shown to FIG. 511 (C).

  FIG. 511 (F) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 located behind can be directly visually recognized through the grass substrate opening 6426. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape imitating the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

  With such a configuration, a decorative shape can be realized not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the grass rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

  When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are set to emit light, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b is connected to the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a. It is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b on the grass substrate rear surface. On the other hand, the grass rear cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b, but the grass rear cover 6460. Compared with the part exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b, the amount of light that reaches is reduced. For this reason, the part exposed from the grass board | substrate 1st opening part 6426a of the grass back cover 6460 becomes a mode decorated with less light quantity than the part exposed from the grass board | substrate 2nd opening part 6426b of the grass back cover 6460.

  The grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a may be configured to be extinguished, and only the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting unit 6424b may be configured to perform an effect of lighting in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass cover 6460a is not substantially in a decorative state because the light does not reach substantially, and the grass substrate second opening of the grass cover 6460 is not. Only the part exposed from 6426b can be set as a decoration mode.

  FIG. 511 (G) is an example in which the size of the grass cover 6460 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). FIG. 511 (H) is an example in which the size of the grass rear cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). Also in these examples, the same effect is acquired by employ | adopting the aspect similar to the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown to FIG. 511 (F).

  FIG. 512A is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501A. In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a constituting a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front, and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a. The grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible via the. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b does not overlap with the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c constituting a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 in front view. The grass front cover 6440 overlaps with the grass front cover 6440.

  In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is displayed. As a result, the grass substrate 6420 is visible as white. Therefore, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in a light-off state, the shape imitating the rabbit formed by the grass front cover opening 6448 does not stand out. Further, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is conspicuous. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the presence of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422.

  When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front side of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the grass substrate front surface, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are provided. Although the end surface to be formed is a brown decoration, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed is visually recognized by the player as white as the color of the substrate.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are set to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b, It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front 3rd light emission part 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the front 2nd light emission part 6422b and the grass substrate front surface 3rd light emission part 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the player sees the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided as white as the color of the grass substrate 6420.

  FIG. 512 (B) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b has a grass front cover opening. 6448 is provided. As the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, green may be adopted. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion is visible. By using 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible as green. Thus, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is in green grass.

  When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front side of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the grass substrate front surface, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are provided. Although the end surface to be formed is a brown decoration, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as green on the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent portion, is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass exposed at the site where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end surface forming the substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated with a green emission color, and has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent portion, so that it represents a mode in which the rabbit is hidden in the grass. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are set to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b, It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front 3rd light emission part 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the front 2nd light emission part 6422b and the grass substrate front surface 3rd light emission part 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white as the color of the substrate.

  FIG. 512 (C) shows the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 512 (B). This is a modified example. In this example, it is possible to represent the grass in the form of white, green, and white from the top in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

  FIG. 512D illustrates an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example illustrated in FIG. 501D. In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. , The white grass substrate 6420 is visible as white. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hidden in white grass.

  When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front side of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when green is used as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the grass substrate front surface, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a that are exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided Although the end surface to be formed is decorated in green, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white on the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are set to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b, It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front 3rd light emission part 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the front 2nd light emission part 6422b and the grass substrate front surface 3rd light emission part 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the end surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white as the color of the substrate. Thereby, the aspect as if a white rabbit exists in green grass can be expressed.

  FIG. 512 (E) shows an example shown in FIG. 512 (D), where the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is the grass front cover colorless transparent. This is an example in which the portion 6442a is modified. In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, white, and white from the top in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

  FIG. 512 (F) is an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has a grass front cover opening 6448. Provided. As the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. In this example, when the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 is in an extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. Visible in brown or silver. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown or silver grass.

  When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front side of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the light emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the grass substrate front or when a white blinking manner is adopted as the light emitting manner, in the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. About the end surface which makes the grass board | substrate 6420 exposed and the grass front cover 1st opening part 6448a, it becomes a decoration aspect by the blink aspect of yellow, brown, or white. In addition, a portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Thereby, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are in the same decorative form, and when such a light emitting form is used from the above-described extinguished state, it seems as if the white rabbit is gone. Aspects can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the grass substrate front surface, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a is provided. The end surface to be formed is white and is in a decorative form. In addition, a portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Accordingly, when such a light emitting mode is adopted from the above-described extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the site where the grass front cover first opening 6448a, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, is provided. It can also be made white by the color of light emitted from the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, and can be expressed in a manner that emphasizes white rabbits more.

  On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are set to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b, It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front 3rd light emission part 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It becomes the aspect decorated with the light emitted from the front 2nd light emission part 6422b and the grass substrate front surface 3rd light emission part 6422c. For example, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the opening portion is bordered on the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white as the color of the substrate. As a result, it is possible to express the aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass with more emphasis.

  FIG. 512 (G) shows an example in which the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 512 (F). This is an example. In this example, it is possible to represent grass in a white, yellow, brown or silvery, white form from the top in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

In the example shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G), an opening having a decorative shape (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass) is provided on a decorative member provided in the front (grass substrate 6420 or grass front cover 6440). By providing the front cover opening 6448) and making the member provided behind visible, it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the decoratively shaped opening. Moreover, since the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear are different in color, transparency, and the like, the shape of the opening can be made more prominent. Moreover, you may comprise so that such an opening part may be in a decoration state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 500 (H) and FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G), modifications in which openings are provided are shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G). However, in the example shown in FIGS. 502A to 510D, an opening may be provided similarly.

  Although an example in which a grass front cover opening 6448 is formed by forming a physical opening in a punched shape in the grass front cover 6440 to form a region in which the rear can be visually recognized is shown, the physical opening in a punched shape is shown. Instead of the method of providing, the outer shape of the visually recognizable region may be formed by a boundary line between the region where the rear is invisible or difficult to visually recognize and the region where the rear is relatively easy to visually recognize.

  For example, the outside invisible region may be configured by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inside easily visible region may be configured by the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outer difficult-to-view area is configured by the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easy-to-view area is configured by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, or the outer difficult-to-view area is colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 is configured, and the inner easily visible region is configured by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, or the outer difficult-to-view region is configured by the colorless grass front cover light scattering portion 6444. Is formed by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outside difficult region is formed by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible region is formed by the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. You may make it comprise by. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It is also possible to provide at least two of the above, and to provide an easily visible inner region across two or more of these regions. By setting it as such an aspect, the area | region which is a decorative shape and back is easy to visually recognize can be provided.

In FIGS. 512 (B) to 512 (G), the location where the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided is one of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the like. However, the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of regions constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. It is also possible to provide at least two of the 6446s and to provide the foreground cover opening 6448 across two or more of these regions.
FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) show an example in which the grass-like material 6400 can be visually recognized as a decoration mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, but these states are used as effects in the game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify a player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Or it is good to comprise so that a predetermined | prescribed event may be alert | reported to a player by changing when these states change from the certain state mentioned above to the other state mentioned above. The predetermined event may be, for example, a jackpot expectation or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated.

  500 (C) to 500 (E), FIGS. 501 (A) to 509 (D), and FIGS. 511 (C) to 512 (G), an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. In addition, in FIGS. 500F to 500H and 510A to 510D, an example is shown in which the grass back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420, but the front of the grass substrate 6420 is shown. Any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in combination with any one of the embodiments in which the grass back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is configured. May be.

  When the embodiments are combined, it is preferable to adopt a grass substrate 6420 having the same size. When the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (F), the grass front cover 6440 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the grass cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, in front view, the grass front cover 6440 and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 are just overlapped. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass rear cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500D and 500G, the same size is set. The embodiments may be combined. In this case, in front view, the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 overlap each other. When the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H), the grass front cover 6440 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the grass cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, in front view, the grass front cover 6440 and the outer edge of the grass rear cover 6460 are just overlapped. Further, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 may be made of the same color synthetic resin. When the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover 6460 is colorless and transparent. The synthetic resin may be used. When the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424. Of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424, You may comprise so that it may not be provided about one side. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500E and 500H are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, the grass rear cover 6460 can be decorated with the light from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422. The grass front cover 6440 can also be decorated with light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so that the edge portion is bordered at the edge portion forming the outer peripheral edge in front view. In addition, you may comprise so that neither the grass substrate front surface light emission part 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emission part 6424 may be provided. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to another accessory, for example.

  Any one example of the above-described grass combination 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. 496. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the first grass movable portion 6360 is configured to have a region other than the first grass decoration portion 6360a that constitutes an outer region. In the first grass movable portion 6360, the first grass decoration portion 6360a constituting the inner region constitutes the inner region and the member constituting the outer region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400. It is good to apply a member. Further, the grass other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the outer region in the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the inner region in the second grass movable portion 6370 are grass-treated. The member constituting the outer region and the member constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 may be applied.

  Also, any one example of the grass 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 510 (B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. In addition, the left and right green transparent grass cover 6460 is in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move to the left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form a single decorative body. is doing.

  In FIG. 495, there is provided a third grass accessory 6480, and a fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided behind the third grass accessory 6485, but the left half of the fourth grass accessory 6485 in the front view is a third located in the front. It is configured to be hidden by the grasswork 6480. Here, any one example of the above-described grass combination 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass combination 6480 and the fourth grass combination 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the size of the grass substrate 6420 included in the third grass combination 6480 and the fourth grass combination 6485 is the same. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided in the third grass material 6480 and the fourth grass material 6485 are simultaneously rendered as a light emission mode as in the above-described example. It may be configured.

  In the following, an example is shown in which the grass combination 6400 shown in FIG. 510 (A) is adopted as the third grass combination 6480 and the grass combination 6400 shown in FIG. 507 (E) is adopted as the fourth grass combination 6485. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 provided in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front is caused to emit light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485, The grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 can be illuminated from the front side. In addition, the fourth grasswork 6485 can efficiently diffuse the light emitted from the third grasswork 6480 to the front and enhance the player's interest as a production.

  On the other hand, by irradiating light from the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485, the grass back cover 6460 of the third grass accessory 6480 can be decorated. At this time, only a peripheral portion such as the upper part of the grass rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized as a decorated form by the player, but light passes through the grass rear cover 6460 and is rearward by the white grass substrate 6420. Irregularly reflected and irradiated toward the fourth grass accessory 6485, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a included in the fourth grass accessory 6485 is decorated.

  In this way, light is irregularly reflected alternately between the third grass combination 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass combination 6485 provided in the rear, so that the position of the light source is made invisible to the player. Light can be efficiently reflected forward while being arranged. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is used as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, the light can be reflected more efficiently.

  Although the 3rd grass-working thing 6480 provided in the front and the 4th grass-working material 6485 provided in the back showed a partly overlapped by front view, the 3rd grass-working thing 6480 and the 4th grass-working material were shown. 6485 may be configured to completely overlap with the front view. Further, the third grass accessory 6480 may be configured larger than the fourth grass accessory 6485. Then, the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass accessory 6480 in a front view. Or you may comprise so that it may arrange | position in the position which adjoins by the front view but does not overlap.

  One or both of the third grasswork 6480 and the fourth grasswork 6485 provided at the rear may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, an example is shown in which the third herbage 6480 provided in the front and the fourth herbage 6485 provided in the rear partly overlap each other in a front view. It may be configured such that and the fourth grass accessory 6485 completely overlap in front view. In this case, any one of the third grasswork 6480 and the fourth grasswork 6485 moves in the left-right direction, so that the third grasswork 6480 and the fourth grasswork 6485 are completely overlapped in front view. It may be constituted, and the third grass combination 6480 and the fourth grass combination 6485 are viewed from the front by moving both the third grass combination 6480 and the fourth grass combination 6485 in the left-right direction. You may comprise so that it may overlap completely. In this case, the third grass 4640 and the fourth grass 6485 may be configured to move from a state where they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state where they overlap. Further, the moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it is good to comprise so that it can move upwards or downwards by the height of the grasswork itself. Even if it is set as such a structure, it can comprise so that the 3rd grassing thing 6480 and the 4th grassing thing 6485 can move to the state which overlaps from the state which does not overlap at all by a front view. And it is good to comprise so that the light emission aspect like each example mentioned above can be taken in the state which such 3rd grass combination thing 6480 and 4th grass combination thing 6485 overlapped by front view.

  Although an example in which the grass member 6400 is movable is shown, the opening (the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448) is also difficult to visually recognize or not visible by the movement of the grass member 6400. Changing to a visually recognizable state may be employed as an effect. Specifically, in a front view, the relationship is between the third grass accessory 6480 provided at the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided at the rear and including the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485 are located behind the third grass accessory 6480, in the rear view of the third grass accessory 6480, The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 included in the four grasses 6485 change to a state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are not positioned, and the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible from the player in front view. It is good to constitute so that.

  Although an example is shown in which the grasswork 6400 is movable, the grasswork 6400 may be configured to move as a production to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side production display device 1600. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as an effect. More specifically, when the grass role 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass role 6400 is imitated in accordance with the movement of the grass role 6400. The image may be configured to move and display upward. At this time, it is desirable that the apparatus is configured to move while displaying an image that imitates the outline of the grass accessory 6400 slightly above the grass agent 6400 in front view. By adopting such a configuration, an image imitating the outline of the grass-working object 6400, the outer shape of the grass-working object 6400 configured by the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the grass-back cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. There are a plurality of shapes simulating grass expressed by a boundary line between a plurality of members or a grass substrate 6420 that is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440 from the top to the bottom in a front view. The decoration mode provided can be made visible to the player. As described above, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by the three images: the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 502 (B), 507 (B), etc., when there are two shapes in the front view in the grass-cured material 6400, one decoration mode is realized as a production by a total of four shapes. be able to.

  About the back surface of the grass substrate 6420, you may comprise so that the same electronic component as what the rabbit accessory 6000 is equipped may be mounted. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring to be attached may be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult for the player to see. Thus, the LED and the wiring may be positioned behind them. Further, by applying a pattern having the same shape as the LED and wiring to the transparent grass substrate 6420 by printing, engraving, etc., it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the LED and wiring while ensuring the transparency of the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured. In this case, the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 emit light, whereby the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED, A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to enter a decorative state. With such a configuration, both the function of hiding the presence of LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration can be realized by these members.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 500C to 512G, one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or 1 The grass substrate 6420, the one grass front cover 6440, and the one grass back cover 6460 exemplify one grass combination 6400, but among the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass rear cover 6460. One grass member 6400 may be configured by increasing the number of at least one member. For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to constitute one grass accessory 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, A single grass 6400 may be configured. In addition, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass rear cover 6460 are plural, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500C to 512G is independently performed in each of the plural members. You may apply. For example, a mountain accessory 6500 described later is provided with two front covers on one substrate, and an opening is provided on one of the front covers so that a substrate located behind can be visually recognized and also opened on the substrate. This is an example in which a section is provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440. However, the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is viewed from the front so that the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult or invisible. The grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided in at least a part of the front of the grass front cover, and the grass substrate 6420 in front view in front of the portion other than the outer edge portion of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion. 6442a and a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even in such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, a grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is expanded upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the part 6444b. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the scattering part 6444b. Similarly, in FIGS. 507 (F) and 507 (G), the area occupied by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is enlarged or reduced upward so that the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover. You may comprise so that it may be covered with the opaque part 6446. FIG. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque so that at least a part of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the decorative grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Even when the portion 6446 is provided, the same effect can be obtained.

  In FIG. 487 and FIG. 495, an example is shown in which the grasswork 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grasswork 6400 is provided in other positions. You may comprise as follows. For example, the grass 6600 may be provided in a region between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Or you may comprise so that the grass-curing thing 6400 may be provided in the member which comprises the door frame 3. FIG. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass-like objects. In addition, you may comprise so that it may provide in the position similar to grass combination 6400 not only in grass combination 6400 but in other combinations.

  In this way, in the grasswork 6400, it is possible to execute an effect that can be visually recognized in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by a plurality of members constituting the grasswork 6400. It is possible to express lush grass, withered grass, and withered grass with frost and snow. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these modes to another.

  In the example shown in FIG. 495, a rabbit hand 6000 and a stump hand 6100 are provided in front of the mountain hand 6500. In these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 includes the face light emitting unit 6023, and the stump agent 6100 includes the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b. It is possible to take a production state by irradiating forward. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting part is irregularly reflected by the members provided around the light emitting part, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting part is directed backward, and the light from the light emitting part is emitted. Cannot be efficiently irradiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example in which the light use efficiency from the light emitting unit can be increased by reflecting the light that has been directed rearward forward on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 that is a decorative body will be described.

  FIG. 513 shows a modification of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like. FIG. 513 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 513 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 513 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover 6010, and a torso 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitter 6023a and a second face light emitter 6023b as the face light emitter 6023 on the front surface. The face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. On the bottom surface in the vertical direction of the face cover 6010, the left and right front legs of the rabbit are imitated, and a first arm 6016 and a second arm 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Also, the lower end of the face substrate 6020 is provided with a body part 6030 which is a plate-like member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, imitating a rabbit body part. Further, the face cover portion 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the structure is the same as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513 (A), the face substrate 6020 does not include the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a concave shape toward the back formed by the face cover upper surface portion 6012, the face cover right surface portion 6013, the face cover lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover left surface portion 6015 included in the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it may be inserted into the part. Further, in the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion protrudes upward in two places on the left and right sides, so that a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are formed. Further, the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

  When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such an aspect, the light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, the face cover portion left surface portion 6015, the first ear portion 6021, the first ear decoration portion 6021a, and the second ear portion 6022. In the second ear decoration portion 6022a and the like, there is a possibility that the light will be reflected backward by being reflected many times.

  Further, when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b included in the stump combination 6100 shown in FIGS. 496 to 499 emit light, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall are also emitted. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. There is a risk that light will be reflected and reflected backward at the box left wall 6340 or the like.

  Then, the example which raises the utilization efficiency of light by reflecting the light which went back from the rabbit combination 6000 and the stump combination 6100 back in the front side of the mountain combination 6500 again is shown below.

  FIG. 514 (A) shows a mountain article 6500. In addition, the dotted line in a figure has shown the position where the rabbit combination 6000 and the stump combination 6100 are provided. As for the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by a dotted line. The mountain combination 6500 includes a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the right front side of the mountain board 6520.

  The mountain substrate 6520 is formed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. Further, on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522 are mounted. In addition, a mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided at approximately the center of the mountain substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain substrate opening 6524 is formed by providing a physical opening in a punched shape in the mountain substrate 6520. A member positioned rearward is visible through the mountain substrate opening 6524.

  The first mountain front cover 6540 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first mountain front cover opening 6548. Yes. With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized by the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to represent an aspect in which snow is piled on the mountain or the mountain has glaciers. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a physical opening in a punched shape in the first mountain front cover 6540. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. A mountain substrate 6520 located behind the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second mountain front cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to represent an aspect in which snow is piled up on the mountain or the mountain has glaciers. Further, each of the mountain substrate opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 expresses a form in which a cave is present in the mountain in a decorative manner.

  On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a mountain substrate front surface first light emitting unit 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting unit 6522i are provided as the mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the first light emitting portion 6522a on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the second light emitting portion 6522b in front of the mountain substrate. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting portion 6522c in front of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is further located in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. is doing. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is further located in front of the first light emitting portion 6522d. Yes. A stump character 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting portion 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A stump character 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a stump combination 6100 is located in front of the second mountain front cover 6562g. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6522i.

  In the front view, the mountain role 6500 is an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized as white, and an area where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visually recognized as light blue. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is viewed as light blue, and the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and is blue transparent. It is opened by providing a mountain substrate opening 6524, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b, and a mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided. An area where the rear member can be visually recognized in a hole shape, an area where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visually recognized as white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is the first 2 mountain front cover colorless light scattering A region which is visible in white covered in 6564, mountain board 6520 behind the second crests front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is composed of the transparent visually recognized region not located.

  FIG. 514 (B) shows a state in which the above-described rabbit combination 6000 and stump combination 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain combination 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000 is an area in which the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized as white, and an area in which the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visually recognized in light blue. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 so as to be visually recognized as light blue, and the rabbit accessory 6000 provided forward in these regions includes the first The light utilization efficiency can be increased by irregularly reflecting light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b forward. Also, behind the stump combination 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized in white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and visually recognized in white. In these regions, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump combination 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected toward the front. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light use efficiency. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to include a plurality of reflection regions corresponding to the plurality of members including the light emitting unit.

  In the case where the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 positioned behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 as described above, It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate region hidden by the object 6000 or the stump character object 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or light color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. Further, in the substrate region hidden by the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed without providing a cover in the front, and when a cover is provided, a colorless and transparent cover is provided. It may be configured to do so. In the example shown in FIG. 514 (A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed, an electronic component such as the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522 is not mounted on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. Further, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in a region corresponding to the stump combination 6100 or is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. By adopting such an aspect, it becomes possible to further increase the reflection efficiency of light forward.

  Among the mountain substrate front surface light emitting units 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front first light emitting unit 6522a and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d have a first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of the mountain substrate. For the front second light emitting part 6522b and the mountain board front third light emitting part 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6544 is forward, and for the mountain board front ninth light emitting part 6522i, the second mountain front cover is forward. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. Thus, by providing a colored or light-scattering cover in front of the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522, the player's eyes are not directly irradiated with light from the light emitting unit. On the other hand, the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f are not provided with a cover in the front and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. This is used to illuminate the stump board 6100 on which the light from the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f is located, and the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e, This is because the player does not directly irradiate the player with the light from the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. In this manner, in the mountain accessory 6500, the first mountain front cover 6540 positioned in front of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 is not disposed in the front surface of the mountain substrate 6500 evenly in the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522. The second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit combination 6000, and the stump combination 6100 are unevenly distributed.

  FIG. 514 (C) shows a rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of moving from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front fourth light emitting portion 6522d that have been positioned so as to overlap the rear of the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view so far can be viewed from the player in front view. Has been. The rabbit accessory 6000 can not only emit light in the standby position as described above, but also can emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the movement position. At this time, the game board side effect display device 1600 may perform effect display in the same emission color as that of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is caused to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to execute an effect of displaying white lines extending radially from the location where the rabbit accessory 6000 is located. Also good.

  FIG. 514 (C) shows a rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of moving from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. The mountain board front third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, and the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position even when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. Even in a state where 6000 is at the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the movement position, the mountain board front surface light emitting unit 6522 may be configured to emit white light simultaneously with the display of the white line on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  In the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, when the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are in the light emission mode as the effects, the upper surface portion of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015 pass through the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d. The outline of the rabbit's face becomes the light emission mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d is diffusely reflected backward. This light is again diffusely reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain accessory 6500. With such a configuration, the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light can be increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 514, in the area in the front view, the mountain role 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100, but the area in the front view is the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit object 6000 or the stump object 6100 so that the same function as the mountain object 6500 is exhibited. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to be within an area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in the front view. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, a grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A), 501 (A), 504 (A), and 510 (A) to 510 (D) is white. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Even in the case of such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It becomes possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

  In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 513, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the front view with respect to the face cover 6010. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the front view with respect to the grass front cover 6440. Or you may make it apply with respect to the relationship between the grass back cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass | cured material 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the rear view cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates simulating flowers are not overlapped in front view with respect to the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 and the front surface of the grass front cover 6460. You may comprise so that the whole each board | substrate may be attached with respect to the cover 6440 or the grass cover 6460 so that the whole board | substrate may fit completely. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the substrate and the grass front cover 6440 or a combination of the substrate and the grass cover 6460. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate and the cover are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of objects are provided in the space. Among these bonuses, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree feature 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, the second cloud feature 6750, and the back grass feature are located in the vicinity of the back of the gaming panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through a game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree accessory 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it consists of a first giant tree accessory 6600 located on the left side of the back side of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree accessory 6650 located on the right side of the back side of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 includes a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is constituted by a brown printed board, and the first giant tree board 6630 is constituted by a green printed board. On the rear surface of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, a plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged, and the directions of these light sources are set to the right. The second giant tree accessory 6650 includes a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree substrate 6680 is a green substrate. On the rear surface of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, a plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged, and the direction of these light sources is set to the left. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) may be adopted.

  The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are provided so as to cover the upper part of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Each of the first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 is composed of a white printed circuit board. You may comprise so that the structure which concerns on the grass substrate 6420 of the grass | cured material 6400 shown to FIG. 500 (A)-FIG. 512 (G) may be employ | adopted with respect to each of these board | substrates.

  The first giant tree board 6630 constituting the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree board 6680 constituting the second giant tree accessory 6650 are arranged in the game area 5a from the end of the game panel 1100, and further in the game. Over the panel opening 1100a, it is configured to be visible from the player continuously. Further, the second cloud accessory 6750 is configured to be visible to the player continuously from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant leaf board 6630 constituting the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant leaf board 6680 constituting the second giant tree accessory 6650 cover the upper left and the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so as not to look like a square. The mountain role 6500 is also provided so as to follow the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. In addition, the mountain combination 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the combinations provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 515 shows a back grass feature 6800. The board back grass 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The board back grass 6800 is composed of a board back grass substrate 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The back grass front cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and more specifically, may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin. In the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structure relating to the grass board 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) is adopted. You may comprise. Similarly, the structure related to the grass back cover 6460 may be adopted for the back grass feature 6800.

  In the backside grass 6800, a passing portion for winning a winning opening provided on the front side of the gaming panel 1100 located on the front side and allowing the game ball passing through the opening provided in the gaming panel 1100 to pass therethrough. As shown, a circular back board substrate opening 6824 and a back board front cover opening 6848 are provided. A game ball that has passed through the back board substrate opening 6824 and the back board front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the back board 6800. In addition, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the back board 6820. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the presence of the sensor. As shown below, the back grass substrate opening 6824d is the back grass substrate first opening 6824a to the back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d, and the back grass front cover opening 6848 is the back grass front cover. A first opening 6848a to a back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d are provided.

  The board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a are respectively circular in the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping in the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball that has moved to the back of the game panel 1100 after winning a prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the first opening 6824a of the back board substrate and the first opening 6848a of the back of the back board cover. The passage part for making it pass is formed.

  The front side of the back board substrate second opening 6824b is not covered by the front back board cover 6840, and constitutes a passing part for allowing the game ball to pass directly through the exposed back board substrate 6820.

  The back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the back grass substrate 6820 positioned behind it, and the back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passing portion for allowing the game ball to pass directly. is doing. In this example, the back grass substrate 6820 has a shape that follows the contour below the back grass front cover second opening 6848b. By adopting such a configuration, the path for guiding the game ball that has passed through the second front opening 6848b of the back grass front cover to the sensor located below, while making the shape of the back grass substrate 6820 a decorative external shape. Is as difficult to see as possible.

  The back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions where they overlap in the back grass combination 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball that has moved to the back side of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the third opening 6824c of the back board substrate and the third opening 6848c of the back board front cover. The passage part for making it pass is formed. In this example, two elliptical regions are formed in the back grass front cover 6840 at the upper part of the passage formed by the back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head can be visually recognized. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass agent 6800 It is possible to deter the occurrence of such a situation that damage is lost.

  The back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape in which two oval portions protrude above the circular outer shape. There is no. Moreover, these are provided in the position which overlaps by the front view in the board back grass accessory 6800. Then, the game ball that has moved to the back side of the game panel 1100 after winning a prize opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the fourth opening 6824d of the back board and the front cover fourth opening 6848d. The passage part for making it pass is formed. In this example, the shapes of the back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are configured so as to be visible as decorative shapes simulating the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass agent 6800 It is possible to deter the occurrence of such a situation that damage is lost.

  In addition, it is good to comprise so that the game ball may be made to pass by arrange | positioning the cylindrical member formed with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the passage part which a game ball passes. Further, it may be formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin of a cylindrical member, and the same color as the back cover grass front cover 6840 or the same color as the back cover substrate 6820 may be adopted as the color of the synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, the presence of the cylindrical member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the back board member 6800 is impaired. .

  The first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree feature 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, the second cloud feature 6750, and the back grass feature 6800 are respectively attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the gaming panel 1100 in such a manner as to straddle the rail member 5950 to be used. Thereby, it becomes possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decoration in a mode in which the presence of the rail member 5950 is not conscious. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of them may be composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By setting it as such a structure, the visibility of each accessory located behind improves and it becomes possible to extend the range where decoration is performed. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin having the same color as that of the accessory located behind. For example, in the case where the board back grass 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the board back grass 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

  When the game ball that is driven into the game area 5a is charged, a discharge occurs at an unintended location, an electronic component breaks down due to a high voltage, or the control element is not intended due to an electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge. There is a risk of control. In particular, a role provided with a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as a first giant tree feature 6600, a second giant tree feature 6650, a first cloud feature 6700, a second cloud feature 6750, and a back grass feature 6800. In the case where an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the possibility that such a situation will occur in the electronic components mounted on these boards becomes higher.

  Therefore, in these embodiments, in the aspect including the front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be provided with a silver opaque portion formed by the above-described metal thin film. More specifically, the front cover may be provided so that such an opaque portion is positioned in front of a place where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, it may be configured such that each accessory is provided so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not contact the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, in the region where the charged game ball rolls and falls and overlaps with the game region 5a when viewed from the front, at least the front of each accessory is provided so that it does not contact the back of the game panel 1100. It may be configured.

  In addition, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided in each accessory be separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 is finally installed in the island facility via a ground circuit provided in each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire for each accessory is provided in the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install the island facility via a ground circuit. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an earth circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back of the gaming machine so that the earth path from the game panel 1100 and the earth path from each accessory join at the earth circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game ball that is driven into the game area 5a.

  In FIG. 487 and FIG. 495, an example is shown in which the back grass role 6800 is provided below the back of the game panel 1100, but instead of the back grass role 6800, a mountain role 6500, a rabbit role 6000, a stump role You may comprise so that the thing 6100 may be provided under the back surface of the game panel 1100. FIG. Even in this case, light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected again forward to increase the light use efficiency. It should be noted that, using the function of reflection of the mountain substrate 6520, a winning opening unit having other decorative objects and winning holes is arranged in the same manner as the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 in front of the mountain role. You may comprise. Even in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting unit included in the decorative accessory or the winning school unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

  In addition, a plurality of cylindrical spacers are provided on the back surface of the front cover constituting these accessories, so that the front surface of the substrate touches the top of the spacer and does not directly contact the back surface of the front cover. May be. Specifically, as the structure of each spacer, a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm may be employed vertically from the back surface of the front cover. The spacer may be formed by integral molding of the front cover using the same material. In addition, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when the front cover has a plurality of regions. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be formed by integral molding with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green transparent. In this case, it is preferable to provide a spacer in the colored light scattering portion without providing a spacer in the colored transparent portion. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with the spacer being separated in height. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several mm behind from the front cover. At this time, as compared with the case where the board is decorated in the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board is positioned rearward, so that the decoration effect due to the color of the board and the outer shape of the board is exhibited. However, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the board. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

  The back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud feature 6700, and the second cloud feature 6750 are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, respectively. . Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged on the nearer side than the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, in the space between the board back 6600, the first giant tree 6600, the second giant tree 6650, the first cloud 6700, the second cloud 6675 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Are provided with a rabbit combination 6000 and a stump combination 6100 as movable combinations. In addition, you may comprise so that the rabbit combination 6000 and the stump combination 600 may be provided in the lower part of the game panel 1100 provided with the back board combination 6800.

  In a combination that does not include a front cover, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the substrate. When doing so, you may make it form the scattering part which scatters the light irradiated from the light emission part on the back surface of the game panel 1100 which overlaps with the light emission part by front view. Alternatively, even in the case where a colored transparent or colorless transparent thing is provided as a front cover in a position overlapping the light emitting part in a front view, a scattering part is similarly formed on the back surface of the gaming panel 1100. May be.

  In FIGS. 496 to 499, the example in which the stump combination 6100 is provided has been described. However, the members constituting the stump combination 6100 may be configured to be movable as effects. For example, the box upper wall part 6310, the box right wall part 6320, the box lower wall part 6330, the box left wall part 6340, and the box rear wall part 6350 constituting the stump box part 6300 may be configured to be movable as effects.

  516 (A) to 516 (D) move the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 from the standby positions in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A). It is the figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 516 (A) shows an example in which the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 is in contact with the upper end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (B) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved rearward leftward until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the right end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (C) shows an example in which the box lower wall portion 6330 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box lower wall portion 6330 is in contact with the lower end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (D) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved rearward rightward until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the left end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. Note that only one of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as illustrated, and the other wall portions may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions among the portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

  By setting it as such a structure, the 1st back wall light emission part 6354a and 2nd back wall to the stump board part 6210 provided in front of the stump box part 6300, the 1st grass movable part 6360, and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 The irradiation mode of light from the light emitting portion 6354b can be changed. For example, in a state before the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, in the state where the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, and therefore the rear wall light emission. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 goes straight as it is to illuminate the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front surface shape of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the region above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. In this manner, the illuminated region can be changed by moving the box upper wall portion 6310. Even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid rearward in place of the box upper wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed corresponding to each moved wall portion. It becomes possible to make it.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the box rear wall part 6350 can be moved to the front-back direction, maintaining the inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), the upper end of the box rear wall 6350 is the front end of the box upper wall 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall 6350 is the box lower wall 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG.

  Moreover, you may comprise the box upper wall part 6310-the box left wall part 6340 so that rotation with respect to the box rear wall part 6350 is possible. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350 is the box left wall portion 6340. And the box rear wall 6350 may be configured to be rotatable about an axis. Then, by rotating the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 inward, the box right wall 6320 and the box left wall 6340 cover the front of the box rear wall 6350, You may comprise so that the box rear wall part 6350, the box right wall part 6320, and the box left wall part 6340 may be in a parallel state by rotating the right wall part 6320 and the box left wall part 6340 outside. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 is formed in the same manner as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. You may comprise so that rotation with respect to is possible.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 498 (A) to 498 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 including the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is fixedly provided, and the box rear wall portion 6350 is movable. The rear wall cover 6356 constituting the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, it becomes possible to directly irradiate the stump opening 6210a with light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, there is a distance between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially and the rear wall. The entire cover 6356 can be illuminated. In the case of adopting such an aspect, it is preferable that the regions other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b in the rear wall cover 6356 are also used as scattering portions. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction so that a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state where the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. Can be made visible to the player.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 499 (A) to 499 (D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are provided on the box described above with respect to the rear wall plate portion 6380. Similar to the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  Although the example in which the member provided in a fixed manner may be movable has been shown, in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a or The second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to continue and maintain a predetermined light emission mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, a mode in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b continues to be lit, blinks periodically, or does not emit light is adopted. You may make it do. Further, in the case of executing a light emission mode that continues to be lit or periodically flickers, it may be configured to continue to emit light in the same color. With such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are not changed, but the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356. It is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player by moving the members.

  On the other hand, the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be changed during a period from the timing at which the member movement is started to the timing at which the member movement is completed. Good. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a more complicated production mode.

  In addition, although the example which moves members, such as the box upper wall part 6310 to the box rear wall part 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, as production from the state shown in FIG. 498 or FIG. 499, the box upper wall part 6310 and the box rear part is shown. By moving members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as effects, it may be configured such that the predetermined one member moved is in the state shown in FIGS. 498 and 499. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player.

  Although the example which the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 move to the left-right direction etc. was shown, you may comprise so that the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 may not move. Even if it is set as such a structure, the light emission aspect of the stump combination object 6100 can be diversified by moving members, such as the box upper wall part 6310-the box rear wall part 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356. Moreover, you may comprise the 1st grass movable part 6360 and the 2nd grass movable part 6370 as one member. In this case, the 1st grass decoration part 6360a and the 2nd grass decoration part 6370a may be comprised as one decoration part, and may be comprised with a some decoration part. In addition, when the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are colored and translucent by a technique such as painting and sealing, the first grass when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward. You may comprise so that the decoration part 6360a and the 2nd grass decoration part 6370a may hit and light may be in a production | presentation state.

  Further, as shown below, the stump box 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 are configured by the stump box portion 6300 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. You may comprise.

  FIG. 517 shows an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided instead of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. Is shown. The grass plate portion may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass plate colored transparent portion 6281a simulating the outer shape of grass, a grass plate central decoration portion 6382a simulating the shape of the animal's face, a grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, a grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, A grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, a grass plate left decorative portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b, which are regions other than these, are provided. The grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are each made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The grass plate portion 6381 is configured by printing or sticking a sticker on the front or rear surface. In addition, the grass board center decoration part 6382a has the shape of the animal's face and ears linearly, and the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e have a shape imitating the face of an animal and are translucent or colored transparent that can transmit light. It is configured.

  In such a configuration, as described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, it is possible to change the illumination mode of the grass board center decoration part 6382a, the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e. In particular, the grass top decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e were irradiated with light from the state where the light was hardly irradiated until then. It can be changed to a mode, and the shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visible to the player.

  The stump box portion 6300 is a box-shaped box that has a box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box lower wall portion 6330, a box left wall portion 6340, and a box rear wall portion 6350 as surfaces, and has no front surface. Although it has a shape, the position, size, and shape of at least one of these members may be changed.

  FIG. 518 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are in relation to the box rear wall portion 6350. By providing a right angle, the stump box portion 6300 is shaped like a rectangular parallelepiped, and the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate portion 6381 is positioned in front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. is doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided. By being configured to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to the grass plate unit 6381 can be changed. Further, according to the stump box portion 6300 having a rectangular parallelepiped shape in this way, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c is moved to the left side and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e is moved to the right side as compared with the example shown in FIG. It is provided at the position.

  519 to 521 show a modification of the example shown in FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 519 to 521, the shape and the mounting manner of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different. In the example shown in FIG. 519 (A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position that is half shifted in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 519 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 519 (A).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A), the entire box rear wall 6350 is enlarged to double the length in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 520 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A). FIG. 522 (A) shows rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 520 (A). FIG. 522 (B) is a view showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modification shown in FIG. 520 (A).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is reduced to a half size in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 521 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A). FIG. 522 (C) is a view showing a rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 521 (A). FIG. 522 (D) shows the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 521 (A).

  Under such a premise, the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 519 (A) and 520 (A) (for details, see FIG. 499 (A), 499 (B), FIG. 522 (A), and FIG. 522 (B)), the light emitting decoration state in which the grass board central decoration portion 6382a and the grass board left decoration portion 6382e are illuminated from the rear. It becomes possible. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to set the grassy board decoration portion 6382b to the light emission decoration state. On the other hand, the grass-board central decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light applied is reduced. When the box right wall portion 6320 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass board right decoration portion 6382c and the grass board lower decoration portion 6382d are set to the light emitting decoration state. can do. In addition, although the example which light-emits both the 1st back wall light emission part 6354a and the 2nd back wall light emission part 6354b was shown, in the example shown in (A) in FIG. 520, it is on the left side from the stump box part 6300 by front view. The protruding area may be configured not to emit light. In this case, only the grass board center decoration portion 6382a can be set in the light emission decoration state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 may be moved rearward.

  In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b (see FIGS. 522C and 522D for details) included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. 521A are emitted. In this state, it becomes possible to make the light emitting decoration state in which the grass board central decoration portion 6382a is illuminated from the rear. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to set the grassy board decoration portion 6382b to the light emission decoration state. On the other hand, the grass-board central decorative portion 6382a is relatively inconspicuous because the amount of light applied is reduced. Further, instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, when the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved rearward, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d and the grass board left decoration part 6382e can be set in the light emission decoration state.

  In this way, in the state where the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a is decorated with light emission, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved rearward, so that the grass The on-board decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e can be in the light emission decoration state. At this time, the grass-board central decoration portion 6382a is in a light-emitting decoration state with a weaker light intensity than before. In this way, by setting the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e to the light emission decoration state, some state in the gaming machine is suggested or notified. You may comprise as follows. For example, when four states with different advantages for the player have occurred or are in a state that can occur, the grass top decoration portion 6382b is set to the light emitting decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and is the second most advantageous. The grass board right decoration portion 6382c is set in the light emission decoration state corresponding to the current state, and the grass board left decoration portion 6382e is set in the light emission decoration state corresponding to the third advantageous state. You may comprise so that a grass-bottom decoration part 6382d may be set as a light emission decoration state. By setting it as such an aspect, it becomes possible to give a player the expectation which wall part moves in the state by which the grass board center decoration part 6382a was light-decorated.

  Alternatively, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is not light-decorated, and first, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320. The first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are brought into a light emitting state after a predetermined time has elapsed after moving either the box lower wall part 6330 or the box left wall part 6340 backward. Good. With such a configuration, the player can determine which of the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e is visible. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall portion is provided upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall portion has moved. Therefore, a player who has noticed the movement of one of the walls has great expectation and will watch the change to the light emitting decoration mode of any of the subsequent decorations, thereby improving the interest of the game Is possible.

  Further, for example, in a gaming state (so-called normal gaming state or the like) that is disadvantageous to the player, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operation position), and the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a in front is placed. Only in the case where only the player decoration state is limited and the player is in an advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, short-time game state, jackpot game state), the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be moved rearward so that the area on the grass board upper decoration part 6382b to the grass board left decoration part 6382e is irradiated with light to be in the light emission decoration mode. Thereby, the appearance of the light emitting region can be changed according to the interest of the player who is improved from the disadvantageous gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.

  In the example shown with reference to FIG. 519 (A) and FIG. 521 (A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall 6350. You may comprise so that the decoration member to move may protrude from the opening part.

  Referring to FIGS. 519 (A) to 522 (D), an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is shifted leftward or enlarged or reduced is shown. However, it may be configured to be similarly shifted, enlarged or reduced. Moreover, as a structure of the stump box part 6300, you may employ | adopt not only the example shown in FIG. 498 but the example shown in FIG.

  In FIGS. 498 to 499, an example in which the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354 a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354 b are provided in the box rear wall portion 6350 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, a box upper wall portion 6310 is provided. -You may comprise so that the structure which concerns on light emission, such as a light emission part and a light-scattering part, may be provided in the at least 1 wall part of the box left wall part 6340. FIG.

  Specifically, in the modification shown with reference to FIG. 517 (A) to FIG. 522 (D), the light emitting part and the light scattering part described with reference to FIG. 498 and FIG. May be provided to illuminate the stump box portion 6300 or the grass plate portion 6381. At this time, at least one of the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 is moved rearward as in the example shown in FIGS. 516 (A) to 516 (D). It is good to configure. In such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, from the state where only the front region corresponding to the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300 is mainly illuminated, in addition to the front portion of the opening portion of the stump box portion 6300. It is possible to illuminate the right side, the lower side, and the left side. In addition, although the example which provides a light emission part and a light-scattering part in the box upper wall part 6310 and illuminates the inside of the stump box part 6300 was shown, it replaced with the box upper wall part 6310, and the box right wall part 6320 was shown. Alternatively, a light emitting part or a light scattering part may be provided in the box lower wall part 6330 and the box left wall part 6340, and the illumination mode may be changed by moving each wall part.

  The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured as a plate having the same thickness. The inner wall of the wall portion may be inclined toward the outside so that the thickness of the wall portion becomes thinner. By setting it as such a structure, it becomes possible to reflect more the light currently reflected in the stump box part 6300 toward the front.

  To move the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. It is good to comprise so that the reflection part which can reflect light, and the scattering part which can scatter light are provided by plating with an aluminum thin film on the inner wall. By setting it as such a structure, it becomes possible to make the aspect which the irradiation aspect of the light to the grass plate part 6381 changes stand out more. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless and transparent, colored transparent material, and the inner wall and outer wall thereof are smooth, the irradiation mode of light to the grass plate portion 6381 is changed. It is possible to make it.

  As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movably deformed. However, the movable member may be only one member among these members. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all the members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to move. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to move. . Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even if it is set as such a structure, the light emission decoration aspect with respect to the grass-plate part 6381 can be changed.

  The movement of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be configured to be performed by a driving unit (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, and the like may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

  It is good also as an embodiment by applying each production example in an embodiment, and each technical matter in each production example in combination. Moreover, it is good also as embodiment by applying combining each technical matter in each accessory composition.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side Effect display device 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover part 6011 Face cover part front part 6011a First face light scattering part 601 1b Second face light scattering portion 6012 Face cover portion upper surface portion 6013 Face cover portion right surface portion 6014 Face cover portion lower surface portion 6015 Face cover portion left surface portion 6016 First arm portion 6017 Second arm portion 6020 Face substrate 6021 First ear portion 6021a First ear decoration part 6022 Second ear part 6022a Second ear decoration part 6023 Face light emitting part 6023a First face light emitting part 6023b Second face light emitting part 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistance 6027a First resistance 6027b Second Resistance 6027c 3rd resistance 6027d 4th resistance 6027e 5th resistance 6027f 6th resistance 6028 Capacitor 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body part 6100 Stump role 6200 Stump part 6210 Stump board part 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box portion 6310 Box upper wall portion 6320 Box right wall portion 6330 Box lower wall portion 6340 Box left wall portion 6350 Box rear wall portion 6352 Rear wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall substrate 6354 Rear Wall light emitting part 6354a First rear wall light emitting part 6354b Second rear wall light emitting part 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 First grass Movable part 6360a First grass decoration part 6370 Second grass movable part 6370a Second grass decoration part 6380 Rear wall board part 6381 Grass board part 6381a Grass board colored transparent part 6381b Grass board colorless transparent part 6382a Grass board central decoration part 6382b Grass board Upper decoration part 6382c Grass board right decoration part 6382d Grass board lower decoration part 6382e Grass board left decoration part 6400 Accompaniment 6420 Grass substrate 6422 Grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422a Grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422b Grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422c Grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6424 Grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424b Grass substrate rear second light emitting portion 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate second opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent portion 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444 Grass front cover light scattering portion 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6446 Grass front cover opaque portion 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover first opening 6448b Grass front cover second opening Part 6460 Grass rear cover 6462 Grass rear cover transparent part 462a Grass rear cover colorless transparent portion 6462b Grass rear cover colored transparent portion 6464 Grass rear cover light scattering portion 6464a Grass rear cover colorless light scattering portion 6464b Grass rear cover colored light scattering portion 6466 Grass rear cover opaque portion 6470 First grass material 6475 2nd grass material 6480 3rd grass material 6485 4th grass material 6500 mountain material 6520 mountain substrate 6522 mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522a mountain substrate front first light emitting portion 6522b mountain substrate front second light emitting portion 6522c mountain substrate front surface Third light emitting portion 6522d Mountain substrate front fourth light emitting portion 6522e Mountain substrate front fifth light emitting portion 6522f Mountain substrate front sixth light emitting portion 6522g Mountain substrate front seventh light emitting portion 6522h Mountain substrate front eighth light emitting portion 6522i Mountain substrate front ninth Light emitting portion 6524 Mountain board opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover Color transparent portion 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6548 First mountain front cover opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6600 First giant tree Accessory 6610 First giant tree trunk substrate 6630 First giant tree leaf substrate 6650 Second giant tree role 6660 Second giant tree trunk substrate 6680 Second giant leaf substrate 6700 First cloud feature 6750 Second cloud feature 6800 Back grass feature 6820 Back grass substrate 6822 Back grass substrate front light emitting portion 6824 Back grass substrate opening 6824a Back grass substrate first opening 6824b Back grass substrate second opening 6824c Back grass substrate third opening 6824d Back Grass substrate 4th opening 6840 Board back cover 6842 Board back cover colored transparent part 6844 Board back cover colored light scattering part 6848 Board back grass Front cover opening 6848a 1st opening in the back of the grass back cover 6848b 2nd opening in the back of the back grass cover 6848c 3rd opening in the front of the back grass cover 4848d 4th opening in the front of the back grass cover 9100 Character combination 9110 Cover Member (cover body)
9111 Transmission part (first region)
9112 Non-transparent portion (second region)
9120 Character character board 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman role 9210 Cover member 9210a Front side cover member 9210b Back side cover member 9220 Snowman board 9301 Light emitter (LED)
9302 Resistance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of producing a game,
A board on which electronic components for executing the game are arranged;
A cover body disposed on the front side of the substrate,
The substrate is at least partially visible from the player through the cover body,
The gaming machine, wherein the board has a light emitting means.